GRAMMAR 


OF  THE 


MODERN  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 


AS  NOW  WRITTEN  AND  SPOKEN  IN  THE 
CAPITAL  OF  SPAIN. 

BY 

WILLIAM   I.  KNAPP,  PH.D.,  LL.D., 

LATE   STREET   PROFESSOR   OF   MODERN    LANGUAGES  IN   YALE   UNIVERSITY. 


SECOND    EDITION 

CAREFUL!  Y;R£VISEU  BY 


BOSTON,  U.S.A.: 

GINN   &  COMPANY,    PUBLISHERS. 
1900 


PRESERVATION 
COPY  ADDED 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1882,  by 

WILLIAM    I.   KNAPP, 
in  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


PRESSWORK  BY  GINN  &  Co.,  BOSTON,  U.S.A. 


PREFACE. 


IT  has  seemed  to  the  writer  of  this  volume  that  a  systematic 
presentation  of  the  laws  that  govern  the  official  Castilian  lan- 
guage, at  the  present  stage  of  its  development,  and  fresh  from  its 
native  atmosphere,  would  need  no  apology.  Whether  in  public 
or  private  instruction,  nothing  can  adequately  substitute  the  thor- 
ough acquisition  of  the  forms  and  inflections  of  a  language,  and 
these  are  best  comprehended  and  retained  by  the  tabular  arrange- 
ment, which  at  the  same  time  furnishes  an  accessible  base  of  sup- 
plies for  reviews  or  reference. 

Spanish  is  not  usually  the  first  foreign  tongue  the  student 
meets,  and  therefore  the  experience  he  has  gained  in  Greek  and 
Latin,  or  in  French  and  German,  may  be  turned  to  profit  in 
saving  much  irksome  routine  indispensable  to  his  earlier  studies. 
He  does  not  need,  for  example,  to  be  taught  the  rules  of  agree- 
ment, to  which  general  grammar  has  already  accustomed  his 
mind,  but  what  he  wants  above  all  to  know  is,  the  forms  of  the 
article,  the  pluralization  of  words,  the  variation  of  adjectives,  and 
the  conjugation  of  verbs.  This  done,  he  can  proceed  to  read  any 
ordinary  prose,  leaving  the  syntactical  peculiarities  to  be  noted  by 
experience,  until  a  second  and  more  critical  rehearsal  puts  him 
in  possession  of  all  the  facts  of  the  language.  Therefore,  a  gram- 
mar that  will  facilitate  this  end,  giving  him,  at  a  small  outlay  of 
time,  the  requisite  preliminaries  to  reading  and  writing,  while 
furnishing  ample  means  for  more  thorougK  subsequent  studies, 
would  seem  to  be  the  one  most  urgently  called  for.  At  least 
this  is  the  case  in  our  colleges,  wherein  the  use  of  the  so-called 
speaking-methods  is  impracticable  by  reason  of  the  diffusion  of 
grammatical  material. 


vi  Preface. 

The  plan  of  teaching  with  the  present  book  involves  two  peru- 
sals. The  first  will  take  the  learner  over  essentials  in  a  little 
more  than  eight  weeks,  at  five  recitations  each.  The  lessons  are 
arranged  for  the  ordinary  college  class,  by  whom  many  of  the 
rules  and  forms  would  require  to  be  read  over  only,  or  would  be 
self-evident  by  virtue  of  previous  experience  and  discipline.  With 
younger  pupils,  and  such  as  are  destitute  of  linguistic  training, 
shorter  lessons  can  be  easily  provided  by  a  suitable  parcelling  out 
of  the  full  ones.  For  a  considerable  distance  in  Section  IV,  only 
English  themes  are  furnished  for  translation  into  Spanish,  since 
this  method  best  tests  the  student's  diligence  at  the  early  stage 
of  his  work.  Subsequently,  however,  after  the  essential  elements 
have  been  reviewed,  a  Spanish  dialogue  has  been  inserted,  made 
up  out  of  a  popular  Madrid  play,  reduced  and  re-fashioned  to 
adapt  it  to  class  purposes. 

The  second  perusal  of  the  grammar  is  to  be  made  in  conjunc- 
tion with  another  volume,  —  the  Modern  Spanish  Readings. 
While  thus  entering  into  the  spirit  of  the  literary  life  of  the 
Spaniard  of  to-day,  the  learner,  by  a  carefully  graded  series  of 
Spanish-English  and  English-Spanish  themes,  will  be  insensibly 
conducted  along  to  a  degree  of  familiarity  with  the  spoken  lan- 
guage that  will  call  for  and  satisfy  every  principle  recorded  in 
the  present  text-book.  At  the  same  time,  he  will  have  learned 
the  mode  of  life  and  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  people  of 
the  Peninsula;  and  the  usages  of  society,  polite  address,  corre- 
spondence, etc.,  as  they  exist,  or  are  carried  on  in  all  circles  at 
Madrid.  To  possess  the  technical  terms  popularly  employed 
there  in  most  of  the  relations  of  life,  will  be,  it  is  hoped,  appre- 
ciated;  at  least  they  will  be  sought  for  in  vain  elsewhere  in 
books. 


CONTENTS. 


SECTION    FIRST. 

PAGE 

PHONOLOGY  —  Alphabet i 

Vowels     ...........  2 

Diphthongs  and  triphthongs 5 

Consonants       ..........  7 

Tonic  accent 15 

Graphic  accent          .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         17 

Division  of  syllables      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .18 

Capital  letters 19 

Orthographic  signs       .         'V         *         •    .    •         •         •         .20 
Castilian  vulgarisms  .         .        •/" 21 


SECTION    SECOND. 

FORM    AND    INFLECTION   .......  25 

Article          ...........  28 

Noun  —  Gender        .         .         .         .         .         .         ...         •  32 

Number         ..........  44 

Inflection  .....  .....  49 

Adjective      .         .         .         .         .        .        •        •        •        •         •  51 

Number     ....    ^.         .....  52 

Gender          ...  .......  53 

Apocopation      .........  57 

Position  ..........  61 

Comparison       ..........  65 

Comparative  formulae   ........  67 

Superlative  relative    .....         •         .         .  70 

Superlative  absolute  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  •  74 

Numerals  —  Cardinals       ........  80 

Ordinals        ..........  83 

Fractionals         .........  85 

Multiplicatives,  etc. 


•& 

H 


viii  Contents. 

PAGE 

Personal  pronoun      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .90 

Inflection 94 

Cases 96 

Position  of  object 102 

Disjunctive  form         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .104 

Pleonastic  construction ........  105 

Inflection  and  use  of  ustcd         .         .         .         .         ,         .       106 

Reflexive  pronoun          ........   108 

Two  objective  pronouns     .         .         .         .         .         .         .no 

Afismot  propio       .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .114 

Possessive  adjectives  and  pronouns    .         .         .         .         .         .116 

Demonstratives     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .124 

Relative  pronouns     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .129 

Interrogative  pronouns          .         .         .         ...         .         .138 

Indefinite  pronouns  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .140 

Verb 161 

Conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verb  haber      .         .         .         .162 

Remarks  on  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .163 

Conjugation  of  .the  impersonal  verb  haber  .         .         .         .       1 65 

Remarks  on  .........   167 

Regular  verb  —  active  conjugation     .  ...       168 

Verb  endings         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  .  169 

First  conjugation  —  hablar          .         .         .         .         .         .171 

Second  conjugation  —  comer .         .         .         .         .         .         .  1 74 

Third  conjugation  —  vivir          .         .         .         .         .         .178 

Remarks  on  the  three  conjugations 181 

Regular  euphonic  changes          .         .         .         .         .         .184 

Progressive  form  of  the  verb  .         .         .         .         .         .  1 88 

Conjugation  of  estar  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .190 

Passive  voice          ..  192 

Conjugation  of  ser     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         -193 

Passive  conjugation  —  ser  llamado         .         .         .         .         .196 

Remarks  on 198 

Use  of  ser  and  estar 200 

Reflexive  verb   .........       201 

Conjugation  of  alabarse         .......  203 

Conjugation  of figurarse    .......       206 

Remarks  on  the  reflexive  verb 208 

Special  uses  of 212 

Passive  and  reflexive      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         -213 

Reciprocal  verb 216 


Contents.  ix 

Verb  —  continued.  PAGE 

Impersonal  verb    .         .         .         .         .         .         .          .         .217 

Irregular  verb  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .221 

Stems  and  changes 221 

Present  stem      .........       224 

Tonic  preterit  stems       ........  227 

Future  stems      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .       229 

First  class  —  first  and  second  conjugations  .  .  .  229 

e  stems  —  first  conjugation  ......  230 

Euphonic  changes 231 

e  stems  —  second  conjugation 232 

o  stems  —  first  conjugation  .......  233 

Euphonic  changes       .......       234 

o  stems  —  second  conjugation  ......  236 

Euphonic  changes 237 

Second  class  —  third  conjugation  .  .  ..-'-.  .  .  238 

e  stems  and  o  stems  .  . 241 

Third  class  —  third  conjugation  ......  242 

Euphonic  changes  .......  244 

Fourth  class  —  verbs  in  -uir 245 

Fifth  class  —  tonic  preterit  verbs 247 

First  conjugation 248 

Second  conjugation .       249 

Third  conjugation  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  -255 

Sixth  class  —  miscellaneous 257 

Defective  verbs      .........  263 

Irregular  past  participles   .         .         .         .         .         .         .       265 

Index  to  irregular  verbs  .  .  .  .  .  .  .271 

Adverb 283 

Use  of  certain  adverbs 290 

Negation  in  Spanish  .         .         .         ...         .         .         .       296 

Comparison  of  adverbs  ........  299 

Preposition  ..........  304 

Use  of 306 

Conjunction       .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .318 

Interjection  ...........  320 


Contents. 


SECTION   THIRD. 

PAGE 

ESSENTIALS   OF   SYNTAX  —  Article 323 

Numerals     ....         ........  335 

Laws  of  agreement  —  Adjective  and  noun         .         .-         .         .  339 
Verb  with  its  subject      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .341 

Use  of  the  tenses       .         .         .         .         .         .      ..  ,         .         .  344 

Subjunctive  mode          .         .         .         .         .         ...         .  356 

Correspondence  of  tenses  ........  362 

Use  of  the  infinitive  mode 363 

Gerund     ...........  370 

Use  of  the  past  participle      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  371 

Regimen  of  verbs 374 


APPENDIX    TO    SECTION    SECOND. 

DIMINUTIVES   AND   AUGMENTATIVES       .         .         .  .382 

SECTION    FOURTH. 

DRILL-BOOK 393 

El  Barometro  —  Comedia     .         .         .         .         .         .         .  .415 

Spanish-English  Vocabulary 440 

English-Spanish  Vocabulary          .         .         .         .         .         .  .  465 


SECTION  FIRST. 


PHONOLOGY. 

The  Spanish  Alphabet. 

1.  The  Spanish  Alphabet  has  in  use  at  the  present 
day  twenty-four  simple  letters,  with  which  certain  com- 
pound and  ligatured  forms  have  been  associated  as  inde- 
pendent signs.  The  whole,  therefore,  stands  thus  :  — 


a 

a 

d  in  ah. 

n 

ene 

d'ney. 

b 

be- 

bd  in  bale. 

n 

ene 

am'yey. 

c 

cd 

thd  in  thane. 

0 

6 

d. 

ch 

che 

chdin.  chase. 

P 

Pe 

pa  in  pale. 

d 

dd 

da  in  dale. 

q 

cu 

coo  in  cool. 

e 

€ 

a  in  ale. 

r 

ere 

d'rey. 

f 

efe 

d'fey. 

rr 

erre 

air'-r-rey. 

g 

g£ 

'ha  in  'State. 

s 

ese 

d'cey. 

h 

ache 

d'tchey. 

t 

te* 

td  in  take. 

i 

i 

e  in  eve. 

u 

u 

oo  in  ooze. 

j 

jota 

'ho'ta. 

V 

ve 

vd  in  vale. 

1 

ele 

a'  ley. 

X 

equis 

d'keece. 

11 

die 

ail'yey. 

y 

ygriega 

e  gred'gd. 

m 

erne 

d'mey. 

z 

zeta 

thd'td. 

a.  The  Gothic  or  Black  Letter  (called  in  Spain  letra  gotica,  or 
de  Tortis,  from  an  early  Venetian  printer)  was  used  forMss.  (libros 
de  mand)  throughout  the  Middle  Age.  The  same  was  employed 
almost  exclusively  in  printed  books  (libros  de  molde}  from  the  intro- 
duction of  the  art  into  Spain  (1474)  till  about  1550,  when  it  had 


2  Phonology. 

well-nigh  disappeared  from  new  books,  and  was  only  occasionally 
seen  in  reprints  of  old  Black  Letter  texts. 

b.  £7  and  v  were  constantly  interchanging  in  the  older  language, 
and  are  still  designated  in  the  primary  schools  by  the  ancient  names 
u  and  u  de  corazon  (heart-shaped  u,  that  is,  v)  since  the  new  Aca- 
demic ve  is  not  practically  distinguishable  from  be* 

c.  The  letter  k  is  at  present  authorized  by  government  and  by  the 
Academy  in  a  very  few  imported  words,  such  as  ki!6metro,  kilo- 
metre; kilogramo,  kilogram;  k^pis  or  k£pi,  a  fatigue  cap. 

d.  W,  called  doble  u,  is  found  only  in  foreign  names  or  in  learned 
transliterations.     The  Gothic  and  Arabic  initials,  v,  w,  usually  be- 
came^ in  Castilian.     Thus  wad-al-kebir,  the  great  river,  became 
Guadalquivir;   al-wezir,   the  vizier,   became   alguacil,   the  con- 
stable.    The  Teutonic  "  'war  "  appeared  as  guerra;   "wassail"  as 

tf  ;  and  to  "ward"  guard,  or  keep,  became  guardar. 


2.  All  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  feminine  in  Span- 
ish, and  commonly  stand  with  one  of  the  articles  :  — 

ponga  usted  una  h,  put  in  an  h. 

cuando  vayas  al  correo  no  te  when  you  go  to  the  Post,  don't 

olvides  de  mirar  en  la  F,  forget  to  look  in  F. 

halagiiefio  se  escribe  con  h,  halagiieno  is  spelled  with  an  h. 

Pronunciation. 

3.  The  present  section  on  the  Castilian  pronunciation  is  based 
on  the  reformed  orthography  initiated  by  the  Royal  Spanish  Academy 
in  their  Dictionary  of  1803,  improved  in  that  of  1822,  and  finally 
adopted  in  their  Ortografia  of  Madrid,  1826.    A  view  of  the  ancient 
pronunciations  or  reference  to  the  obsolete  orthography  do  not  come 
within  the  design  of  this  elementary  work. 

The  Vowels. 

4.  Important  General  Law.  —  In  Castilian  the  vowel 
sounds  predominate  over  those  of  the  consonants  to  a 

1  Vet  as  the  name  of  the  letter  vt  was  first,  I  think,  introduced  into  the 
Academy's  Dictionary  of  1837,  —  the  eighth  edition.  Before  that  it  was  often 
called  u  consonants,  u  consonant. 


Vowels.  3 

degree  without  parallel  in  the  other  Romance  tongues ; 
and  whereas  the  vowel  sounds  are  full  and  sonorous, 
those  of  the  consonants  are  subordinate,  smothered,  and 
frequently  suppressed. 

5.  The  vowels  have  but  one  quality  of  sound  each, 
and  this  they  preserve  uniformly  in  all  situations.     In 
ordinary  passive  discourse,    however,   e  and  o  slightly 
lower  their  primitive  key  when  they  stand  in  an  open 
syllable  or  before  the  letters  n  and  r  final. 

6.  The  vowels  are  a,  ey  i  (y),  o,  and  u,  pronounced  as 
follows  :  — 

a        like  a  in  ah,     never  as  in  add,  made :  malo,  animo. 

e  "    a  "  ale,  "          me,  met :  mesa,  lecho. 

i  (y)     "    e   "  me,  "          hit,  dish :  tino,  tinta. 

O  "    o  "  lone,  "          not:  odio,  tesoro. 

u  "    oo "  ooze,  "          bud,  use :  gula,  listed' . 

a.    Before  n  and  r  final,  o  sounds  as  in  g0ne,  and  e  as 
in  th^re  :  — 

error,  error,  —  air-r-rorr1. 
nacioii,  nation,  —  nah-the'on1. 
comer,  to  eat,  —  ko-mair1. 
placer,  pleasure,  — plah-thair* . 

6.  E  final  has  the  a  quality,  but  it  is  given  short  as  y 
in  merry.     So  trist^,  sad,  —  tree'-ste,  not  triss'-tay. 

7.  Y  standing  alone  or  final  is  a  vowel,  and  is  then  a 
mere  substitute  for  the  Spanish  i.    At  the  beginning  of 
a  word  or  syllable  (between  vowels)  it  is  a  true  conso- 
nant with  the  phonetic  value  of  y  in  jj/ear,  enunciated 
with  emphasis  :  — 


Y  VOWEL. 


y,  and.  niuy,  very. 

ley,  law.         voy,  I  go. 


Y  CONSONANT. 

yo,  /.  leyes,  laws. 

ya,  now.  reyes,  kings. 


4  Phonology. 

REMARK.  —  In  English  one  syllable  is  often  accentuated  at  the 
expense  of  the  vowel  sounds  in  the  other  syllables ;  but  in  Span- 
ish a  vowel  never  suffers  its  original  quality  to  be  absorbed  or 
shrunken  because  the  syllable  in  which  it  lies  does  not  receive  the 
primary  stress.  Thus,  do  not  pronounce,  for  example,  cansado, 
tired;  pi^lago,  sea;  animalito,  a  small  animal;  imposibilidad, 
impossibility ',  —  as  if  written  cdn-sah'-do  or  k?n-sah'-do,  pyail'-e-go, 
dnna-mull-ee'-to,  imm-possy-billy-dahd1 ;  but  kan'-sak"-***),  pyaiV- 
ah'-go,  ah'-ne'-mah'-le"-to,  eem1 -po* -se' -be' -le1 -dahty" . 

8.  The  five  vowels  are  divisible  into  strong  (a,  o,  u) 
and  weak  (e,  i),  with  reference  to  the  phonetic  influence 
they  exert  on  the  consonants  c  and  g:  — 

9.  C  before  the  strong  vowels  equals  k :  ca,  co,  cu. 

10.  C  before  the  weak  vowels  equals  th  in  //fcink :  ce,  ci. 

11.  G  before  the  strong  vowels  equals  gh  {g  hard)  .'  ga,  go,  gu. 

12.  G  before  the  weak  vowels  equals  guttural  fh :  ge,  gi. 

13.  C  with  the  k  sound  is  written  qu  before  weak  vowels :     Que,  qui. 

14.  C  with  the  th  sound  is  written  z  before  strong  vowels  :     za,  zo,  zu. 

15.  G  with  the  gh  sound  is  written  gu  before  weak  vowels :  gue,  gui. 

16.  G  with  the  guttural  sound  is  written^'  before  strong  vowels :  ja,  jo,  ju. 

17.  U  is  silent  between  q  or  g  and  the  weak  vowels. 
When  it  should  be  vocal  in  those  positions  it  assumes 
the  diaeresis  (u),  and  cu,  gii  diphthongal  are  pronounced 
kwy  gwy  as  also  elsewhere,  when  u  is  not  mute. 

18.  Note  well,  therefore,  the  following  combinations : 

Vowels. 


Like 

k: 

ca, 

que, 

qui, 

CO, 

cu. 

M 

th: 

za, 

ce, 

ci, 

zo, 

zu. 

* 

gh: 

ga> 

gue, 

gui, 

go, 

gu. 

" 

ch: 

ja, 

ge, 

gi, 

jo, 

ju. 

Diphthongs. 

Like 

kw: 

cua, 

cue, 

cui, 

cuo. 

a 

g\v: 

gua, 

gue. 

gui 

guo. 

w 

'hw: 

jua, 

jue, 

jui, 

juo. 

Diphthongs.  5 

19.  The  two  stem  vowels  e  and  o  amplify  into  ie  and 
ue  respectively  when  the  accent  falls  on  those  vowels  ; 
but  they  recover  their  primitive  form  as  soon  as  the 
stress  is  transferred  to  another  syllable  :  - 

sentir',  to  feel. 

sentimos,  we  feel. 

tendero,  shopkeeper. 

sentimental',  sentimental. 

rogar',  to  request. 

rogamoSj-m?  request. 

bondad',  goodness. 

agorero,  diviner. 

Oscense,  of  Huesca  (Lat.  Osca). 


siento,, 

sienten,  they  feel. 

tienda,  shop. 

sentimiento,  feeling. 

ruego,  /  request. 

ruegan,  they  request. 

bueno,  good. 

aguero,  omen. 

Huesca,  name  of  a  town. 


a.    Hence  ie  is  the  diphthong  of  *,  and  ue  that  of  o. 

Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs. 

20.  These  are  vowels  in  juxtaposition  which  are  pronounced  in 
one  wave  of  sound,  forming,  either  alone  or  with  a  foregoing  con- 
sonant, a  single  syllable;   they  are,  therefore,  divisible  neither  in 
prosody  nor  in  printing.    They  always  preserve  the  alphabetic  sound 
of  each  of  the  vowels  composing  them,  never  passing  over  into  new 
phonetic  combinations  as  in  English  and  French.     Nevertheless  the 
complex  sounds  they  produce  are  reckoned  as  one,  and  the  tonic 
accent,  if  it  be  on  that  syllable,  is  distributed  over  the  vowels  as  if 
they  constituted  a  single  long  vowel.     Hence,  if  one  of  the  vowels 
/  or  u  is  accentuated,  these  do  not  form  diphthongs  or  triphthongs 
with  the  other  vowels.     Thus  uo  in  contim/0,  continuous,  is  a  diph- 
thong, but  not  in  contin^,  /  continue;   so  rcmo,  a  kingdom, — 
diphthong  ;    k/do,   read,  —  not  a  diphthong ;    venz'tf ,   indulgence ; 
ven/#,  I  came. 

21.  True  diphthongs  and  triphthongs  are  :  — 

hay. 


grey. 


al  (ay)  : 

baile, 

donaire, 

hablais, 

au: 

causa, 

pauta, 

caudal'. 

ea: 

Knea, 

traquea, 

Boreas. 

^ei  (ey)  : 

reina, 

peine, 

hableis, 

eo: 

idoneo, 

marmoreo, 

virgmeo. 

6 


Phonology. 


eu: 

deuda, 

rouma, 

Europa. 

ia: 

gracia, 

tenia, 

calumnia. 

ie: 

cielo, 

siento, 

tiene. 

io: 

precio, 

6dlo, 

estudio. 

iu: 

ciudad, 

triunfar, 

enviudado. 

oi  (oy)  : 

heroico, 

doite, 

sois, 

ua: 

fragua, 

recua, 

igual. 

ue: 

duelo, 

bueno, 

pues. 

ul  (uy)  : 

cuidado, 

ruidoso, 

huiria, 

uo: 

mutuo, 

arduo, 

antiguo. 

iai: 

aviais, 

cambiais, 

variais. 

iei: 

avieis, 

cambieis, 

varieis. 

uai  (uay)  : 

averiguais, 

santiguais, 

fraguais, 

uei  (uey)  : 

averigueis, 

santigiieis, 

fragiieis, 

22.    Improper  diphthongs  are  :  — 


hoy. 


muy. 


ae: 

trae, 

Paez. 

io: 

amorio, 

desvario. 

ai: 

raiz, 

traido. 

oa: 

canoa, 

proa. 

an  : 

baul, 

ataud. 

oe: 

heroe, 

corroe. 

ea: 

pelea, 

lancea. 

oi: 

oido, 

oiste. 

ee: 

leer, 

lee. 

oo: 

ioor, 

Feijoo. 

ei: 

lei, 

sonrei. 

ua: 

ganzua, 

falua. 

eo: 

veo, 

beodo. 

ue: 

continue, 

cruento. 

ia: 

dia, 

alegria. 

ui: 

ruido, 

huida. 

ie: 

fie, 

confie. 

uo: 

continuo, 

duo. 

23.  Thus  are  pronounced,  rapidly  indeed,  but  not 
constituting  true  diphthongs,  all  concurrent  vowels  in 
different  words  ;  as,  \a  alegria,  the  joy  ;  \a  # Ita  casa,  the 
lofty  house ;  mi  #lma,  my  soul;  \a  zda,  the  departure ; 
\.u  ^sposa,  thy  wife ;  su  /poca,  his  times  ;  a  z/sted,  to  you. 
Identical  letters  are  more  perfectly  run  together  in  the 
ordinary  language  ;  \a  <zmistad,  the  friendship  ;  su  wtili- 
dad,  his  usefulness;  de  ^ste,  of  this ;  mi  /da,  my  de- 
parture. This  principle  has  occasioned  many  contrac- 
tions, as,  d^l  for  de  e\ ;  d^ste,  for  de  ^ste  ;  d^nde,  from 
Latin  de  mde,  thence;  d<?nde,  from  de  ^nde,  where. 


Consonants.  7 

24.    Likewise  vowels    separated  by  the  silent  //  are 
sounded  as  if  concurrent  :  — 


ahi,  there. 

ahora,  now. 

tahona,  bakery. 

tahur,  gambler. 

ha  hablado,  has  spoken. 


desahucio,  ejection  (law). 
almohadilla,  cushion. 
rehusar,  to  refuse. 
Sahagun,  St.  Facundus  (town), 
mi  hijo,  ;///  son. 


25.  In  poetry  a  diphthong  may  be  dissolved  by  the 
diaeresis  when  the  metre  requires  it  :  — 

suave,  mild,  —  suave.  |      riela,  twinkles,  —  riela. 

Consonants. 
B,  v. 

26.  These  two  letters  are  distinct  in  theory,  and  in 
most  situations  interchangeable  in  practice.1    The  Cas- 
tilian  does  not   give  either  of   them  the  full  English 
sound,  except  after  m,  because  with  him  the  approxi- 
mation  of   the   organs    employed  in   their  production 
amounts  to  simple  contact  without  pressure  (§  4)  :  — 


beber,  to  drink  (anc.  bever). 
vivir,  to  live  (anc.  biuir). 
vuelta,  turn  (anc.  bueltd). 


volver,  to  turn  (anc.  boluer). 
enviar,  to  send  (anc.  embiar). 
envidia,  jealousy  (anc.  ymbidid). 


The  ancient  orthography  is,  as  usually  happens  in  Spain,  the 
modern  popular  pronunciation,  especially  in  the  Castiles. 

1  Blanco  White,  a  learned  Spaniard  of  this  century,  declared  the  identity  of 
b  and  v  rather  strongly,  in  these  words :  "  My  friend's  destination  was  a  town  in 
the  mountains  or  Sierra  de  Ronda,  called  Olbera  or  Olvera,  for  we  make  no 
difference  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  b  and  the  v."  —  Letters  from  Spain,  by 
Don  I^eucadio  Doblado,  London,  1822,  p.  161.  The  Spanish  Academy  affirm, 
also,  that  these  two  letters  "  are  alike  in  a  great  part  of  Spain,  although  they 
ought  not  to  be." —  Gramdtica,  ed.  of  1870,  p.  315.  See,  also,  their  Ortografia, 
Madrid,  1826,  p.  51. 


8  Phonology. 

C  HARD  and  Qu. 

27.    C,  before  the  strong  vowels  or  another  consonant, 
and  qu  before  the  weak  vowels,  sound  always  like  k :  — 


casa,  house. 
cosa,  thing. 
cura,  parish  priest. 
claro,  clear,  light. 


que,  that,  which. 
quiere,  he  wishes. 
tabique,  thin  partition. 
inquieto,  restless. 


C  WEAK  and  Z. 

28.    C,  before  the  weak  vowels,  and  z  before  the  strong 
vowels,  have  the  value  of  th  in  Mink  :  — 


cena,  supper. 

cita,  appointment. 

cielo,  heaven. 

hace,  makes,  does. 

acento,  accent. 

ace'quia,  canal  for  irrigation. 

nacion,  nation. 


hizo,  he  made,  did. 
brazo,  arm. 
corazon,  heart. 
razon,  reason. 
caza,  game. 
azogue,  quicksilver. 
taza,  (tea) cup. 


a.    Z  cannot  stand  before  the  weak  vowels,  but  is 
changed  into  c :  — 


razon,  reason. 
feliz,  happy. 
luz,  light. 


racional,  rational. 
felicidad,  felicity. 
luces,  lights. 


b.  Cc  are  found  together  only  before  the  vowel  i,  and 
are  pronounced  regularly  Kth  :  — 

accion,  action.  \       faccioso  (Carlisf)  rebel. 

Ch. 

29.  This  letter  has  been  considered  as  distinct  in  the 
Dictionaries  only  since  1803.  Its  constant  phonetic 
value  is  that  of  ch  in  church.  Formerly  it  represented 
also  the  k  sound  in  classic  and  scripture  words  ;  but 
these  are  now  written  with  c  before  the  strong  vowels, 
and  qu  before  the  weak  ones  :  — 


Consonants. 


mucho,  much. 
hecho,  done,  made. 
muchacho,  boy. 
avechucho,  sparrow-hawk. 
chillar,  to  shout,  scream. 
Acates,  Achates. 
Cristiano,  Christian. 


ducho,  expert. 
cuchara,  spoon. 
bicho,  insect. 
alcachofa,  artichoke. 
chiquitin,  a  little  one. 
Aquiles,  Achilles. 
Ecequias,  Hezekiah. 


D. 


30.  D  has  technically  the  common  English  sound  ; 
but,  as  in  the  case  of  b  and  v,  there  is  simple  contact 
without  pressure,  on  the  part  of  the  organs  involved  in 
its  formation.  The  Spanish  d,  therefore,  has  never  the 
decided  English  sound,  being  rather  inclined  to  a 
smothered  th  in  /Aough  :  — 


dorar,  to  gild. 

desde,  from. 

dehesa,  pasture  ground. 

subdito,  subject. 

albedrfo,  free  will. 


indio,  East  Indian. 
arde,  it  burns. 
sordera,  deafness. 
tildar,  to  censure. 
verdadero,  true. 


31.  Between  vowels,  especially  in  the  endings  ado, 
eda,  ido,  odo,  udo,  d  has  a  less  equivocal  sound  of  th  in 
//fough,  weaker.  At  the  end  of  a  word  its  quality  is 
the  same,  but  it  is  asserted  with  much  less  decision  :  — 


hado,  fate. 
olvidado,  forgotten. 
marido,  husband. 
polvareda,  cloud  of  dust. 
lodo,  mud. 
engrudo,  paste. 


corned,  eat  ye. 
virtud,  virtue. 
ciudad,  city,  town. 
verdad,  truth. 
usted,  you. 
vivid,  live  ye. 


The  d  thus  pronounced  may  be  graphically  repre- 
sented by  the  &  raised  above  the  line  to  suggest  the 
tenuity  of  its  value ;  as,  a**o,  co-m#*9  laftrdr.  This  f* 


io  Phonology. 

must  never  be  pronounced  as  in  /^ink,  however,  which 
is  the  characteristic  of  c  weak  (§  28). 

a.   Dr  always  equals  d'r  or  #>,  but  not  as  in  dream: 
,  drama  ;  a^/rede,.  on  purpose  (obsolete)  ;  Madrid. 


G  HARD  and  On. 

32.  Gy  before  the  strong  vowels  or  another  conso- 
nant, and  gu  before  the  weak  vowels,  sound  like  g  in 
go  and  guilt  :  — 


gasto,  expense. 
,  fruition. 
gula,  gluttony. 
guante,  glove. 
greda,  chalk. 


albergue,  refuge. 
manguito,  muff. 
guinda,  cherry. 
malagueno,  of  Mdlaga. 
guisado,  stew. 


a.  If  etymology  or  uniformity  of  the  g  value  in  in- 
flection require  the  u  in  gue,  guiy  to  become  vocal,  as  it 
is  in  the  combinations  gua,  guo,  then  the  diaeresis  must 
always  be  employed  :  — 


agua,  water. 
lengua,  tongue. 
fragua,  he  forges. 


desague,  drainage. 
lingiiista,  linguist. 
fragile,  he  may  forge. 


So  also 

agiiero,  omen  (augurium).      \  agiielo,  grandfather  (for  abuelo). 

G,   J,   GUTTURAL. 

33.  Gy  before  the  weak  vowels,  and/  in  all  positions, 
but  chiefly  before  the  strong  vowels,  have  the  guttural 
sound  of  the  Arabic  hhd.  This  sound  is  often  repre- 
sented by  the  German  ch  after  strong  vowels  (as  in 
Back,  L.OC&,  Buck ;  not  as  in  Pecfr,  "Lic&t,  BuV^er),  and  the 
modern  Greek  ret^o?,  />ta^atpa,  etc.,  but  it  is  like  none 
of  them  sufficiently  to  be  cited  as  equivalents,  save  the 
Arabic.  It  must  be  learned  from  a  native  of  Castile:  — 


Consonants.  1 1 


giro,  money-order. 
algibe,  cistern. 
aflige,  he  afflicts. 
diligencia,  mail-coach. 
gime,  he  groans. 
pdgina,  page. 


hijo,  son. 

jarro,  water-pitcher. 

atajo,  short  cut  (path). 

trabajo,  labor. 

mujer,  woman. 

bandeja,  waiter  (for  serving). 


a.  In  Andalusia  (Southern  Spain)  this  sound  is  reduced  to  the 
Arabic  ha. 

H. 

34.  H  is  totally  silent.  In  the  sixteenth  century  it 
had  a  decided  aspiration,  of  which  it  still  retains  a  slight 
trace  before  the  diphthong  ue,  not,  however,  appreciable 
to  most  foreigners :  — 


hablar,  to  speak. 
haber,  to  have. 
ahf,  there. 
hacemos,  we  make. 
hermano,  brother. 


huevo,  egg. 
huerta,  plantation. 
hueso,  bone. 


Huelva, 
Huesca, 


names  of  places. 


M. 

35.  ^/sounds  as  in  English.  The  Latin  min,  or,  by  loss  of  the 
short  vowel,  m'n,  becomes  Spanish  by  changing  n  into  r  and  in- 
serting b,  which  in  this  situation  is  distinctly  enunciated.  Thus, 

hombre,  man,      from  homme-m. 


nombre,  name,       " 

nomm[e-m]  for  nomen. 

cumbre,  top,           " 

culmine-m. 

lumbre,  light,          " 

lumm[e-m]     "  lumen. 

mimbre,  rush,        " 

vimme-m. 

hambre,  hunger,    " 

fam[ine-m]     "  famem. 

hembra,  female,     " 

foemina-m. 

a.  Mn,  not  contracted  from  mtn,  usually  becomes  n  (nn)  by 
assimilation  of  the  m  1  ;  so^^u-m  makes  sue^^o,  sue;1o,  dream. 
Even  in  words  in  which  the  mn  are  retained,  the  lower  orders  often 
pronounce  them  pn  and  gn  ;  as  hipno  or  hi£%o  for  himno,  hymn. 
So  the  ancients  (thirteenth  century)  occasionally  wrote  Dy/«a  and 


1  See  note  on  n. 


12  Phonology. 

Dygna  for  Calila  e  Dimna  (Fables  of  Bilpay) .     Compare  the  Greek 
hu///os  and  Latin  somnus. 

b.    Latin  and  English  mm  stand  in  modern  Spanish 
as  nm :  — 

inmenso,  boundless.  inmortal,  immortal. 

R  SMOOTH. 

36.  Single  r,  between  vowels,  has  the  pure  alphabetic 
sound,  as  in  very  :  - 

ara,  altar.          \        bolero,  a  dance.          \        toro,  bull. 

37.  Before  any  consonant,  and  after  by  dy  t,  v, —  r  must 
always  have  a  full,  decided,  and  independent  sound  :  — 


arde,  it  burns. 
hombre,  man. 


ladra,  (the  dog)  barks. 
lastre,  ballast. 


catre,  cot-bed. 
Thus  arr-^ey^  oin'-Urey,  ka'frey. 

38.  When  final,  the  single  r  is  still  more  distinctly 
pronounced,  and  is  emphasized  almost  into  the  charac- 
ter of  the  double  rr :  — 


hablar,  to  speak. 
comer,  to  eat. 


vivir,  to  live. 
placer,  pleasure. 


The  vowel  before  r  is  to  be  given  quick  and  emphatic, 
not  drawling  as  in  English. 

R   ROUGH. 

39.  When  the  single  r  stands  at  the  beginning  of  a 
word,  or  after  the  letters  /,  n,  s,  it  is  pronounced  with  a 
rolling  sound.1  The  same  is  always  the  case  and  in  all 
positions  when  the  r  is  doubled  :  — 

1  This  rough  sound  of  r  after  /,  «,  and  s,  has  occasioned  the  intercalation 
of  d,  as  well  as  the  obsolete  makeshift  of  transposition.  Thus  valafra  for  val'rd; 
ven^ra  for  ven'rd  (ancient  verna)  ;  ten^ra  for  terira  (ancient  terna)  ;  Esdfras, 
Ezra,  for  Es'ras.  So  also  tierwo,  tender,  came  from  teriro  (teneru-m)  and 
yerno  (French  gent/re)  fromgen'ro  (generu-m),  by  metathesis  of  nr. 


Consonants. 


B   SMOOTH. 

pera,  pear. 
aro,  hoop. 
par  do,  grey. 
puerto,  port. 
tarde,  evening. 
cordero,  lamb. 
bruto,  brute. 
ladron,  thief. 
triste,  sad. 
arar,  to  plough. 
acabar,  to  finish. 
ver,  to  see. 


K   ROLLING. 

ruedo,  (door)mat. 
rogar,  to  request. 
ramo,  bough. 
roto,  broken. 
ruido,  noise. 
aired edor,  around. 
enredo,  snarl,  plot. 
honra,  honor. 
Israelita,  Israelite. 
error,  error. 
parr  a,  grapevine. 
torre,  tower. 


s. 


40.    5  is  always  and  in  every  position  pronounced  like 
the  English  s  in  .raid,  never  as  in  pha^e,  way^ :  — 

racimos,  clusters. 

pasas,  raisins. 

ese,  esa,  eso,  that  (is,  ea,  id). 

grueso,  bulky. 


mesa,  table. 
camisa,  shirt. 
base,  basis. 
los,  las,  the. 
desde,fr0m,  since. 


lesna,  awl. 


41.  X  is  now  everywhere  pronounced  as  in  English, 
that  is,  ks  :  — 

exacto,  exact.  \       sexo,  sex. 

REMARK.  —  The  national  prefix  es,  when  it  comes  from  the  Latin 
ex,  has  now  been  graphically  (at  least)  fixed  by  the  Academy  as  ex. 
The  people,  however,  very  generally  continue  to  pronounce,  for  ex- 
ample, 

estranjero,/^^,  >  whik  th     wrke  <  extranjero. 

estenor,  external,        )  (  exterior. 


This  has  produced  among  the  illiterate  great  confusion,  by  reason 
of  their  interchanging  the  es  from  ex  with  es  prothetic,  as  in  ^splen- 
dido,  tfscuela,  from  the  Lat.  splendidus,  schola.  So  one  hears  zx- 
plendor,  e^rcalera,  e^rcandalo,  and  even  e^rcoba,  —  for  ejplendor, 


14  Phonology. 

splendor  ;   e^calera,  staircase  ;  e^candalo,  scandal',   and  ejcoba,  a 
broom? 

Ligatured  Consonants. 


42.   LI  is  pronounced  like  I'y  in  "wil/^ou,"  or  Hi 
in  Wi//zam  :  — 


sello,  stamp. 
silla,  chair. 
polilla,  moths. 
rastrillo,  rake. 


Have,  key. 
lloro,  weeping. 
lleno,  full. 
llueve,  it  rains. 


N. 

43.   N  with  tilde 2  (n)  is  pronounced  n  j,  as  in  " 
jj/ew,"  or  like  ni  in  u/«bn  3  :  — 


ano,  year. 

peldano,  round  (of  a  ladder). 

lena,  firewood. 

guinada,  wink. 


otofio,  autumn. 
barreno,  dish-trough. 
engano,  deception. 
rebano,  flock. 


44.  Ligatured  vowels  are  diphthongs  and  triphthongs. 


1  A  copy  of  the  last  Dictionary  of  the  Academy  (1869),  printed  on  one  side 
of  a  leaf  only,  leaving  the  other  blank,  and  which  belonged  to  the  late  Acade- 
mician Senor  Segovia  Izquierdo,  fell  into  my  possession  at  Madrid  shortly  after 
the  owner's  death  in  1875.     In  it  I  find  in  his  handwriting  twenty-eight  ex- 
amples of  these  false  ex's   under  this  characteristic  epigraph :    "  Voces  que, 
comenzando  con  la  silaba  es,  han  dado  los  ignorantes  en  escribir  con  ex"    He 
omitted,  however,  explendor  and  explendido,  which  I  have  often  heard  from 
otherwise  clever,  though  unlearned,  persons. 

2  From  tit&le-m,  a  corrupt  form  of  titulu-m,  in  its  later  signification  of  mark, 
sign  —  contracted  regularly  tit'le-mt  and  by  metathesis  of  the  /7,  tilte,  tilde. 

3  The  origin  of  n  is  the  mark  of  abbreviation  over  the  original  nn,  nm 
(daw«u-m,  danno,  da«o,  loss).     In  the  earliest  Spanish  MSS.  the  bar  (rasgo) 
appears  as  a  mere  sign  of  shortening,  as  ano  for  anno.    Mr.  Vollmoller,  in  his 
edition  of  the  Poema  del  Cid,  has  mistaken  this  rasgo  for  a  phonetic  sign  or 
tilde,  which  it  certainly  came  to  be  later.    Mr.  Pidal  was  therefore  correct  in 
regarding  it  as  a  mere  note  of  abbreviation,  and  in  printing  anno,  although  we 
opine  it  were  preferable  to  have  reproduced  faithfully  the  original  bar  (ano). 


Accent. 


Tonic  Accent. 

45.  Words  ending  in  a  consonant  not  inflectional,  are 
regularly  accentuated  on  the  ultimate,  unless  otherwise 
graphically  indicated  :  — 


verdad,  truth. 
comer,  to  eat. 
jardin,  garden. 
amor,  love. 
desleal,  disloyal. 
despues,  afterwards. 
Adam,  Adam. 
Frances,  Frenchman. 
Aleman,  German. 
capaz,  capable. 
desliz,  (moral)  slip. 


An  inflectional  termination  is  the  plural  sign  (s,  es) 
or  the  tense  endings  (s,  es,  mos,  an,  en). 

a.  The  words  caracter,  character,  and  regimen,  gov- 
ernment, regimen,  form  the  irregularly  accented  plurals 
caracteres,  regimenes. 

b.  Infinitives  and  Imperatives  second  person  plural, 
follow  the  regular  rule  of  consonant  terminals  :  — 


caliz,  (sacramental}  cup. 

hue'sped,  guest. 

£rbol,  tree. 

marmol,  marble. 

carcel,  prison. 

alcazar,  (fortified)  palace. 

litil,  useful. 

Cadiz,  Cadiz. 

Tamesis,  Thames. 

Este'ban,  Stephen. 

Burgos,  Burgos  ( 


querer,  to  wish. 
comprar,  to  buy. 


quered,  wish  ye. 
comprad,  buy  ye. 


c.  The  second  person  plural  of  verbs  has  the  accent- 
uation on  the  ultimate,  or  the  diphthong,  unless  other- 
wise graphically  marked  :  — 


llamais,  ye  call. 
quereis,  ye  wish. 
decis,  ye  say. 


llamabais,  ye  were  calling. 
queriais,  ye  were  wishing. 
compr£seis,  ye  should  buy. 


i6 


Phonology. 


d.  Proper  names  in  ez  and  a  few  in  es  accentuate  the 
penult  ;  the  rest  follow  the  general  rule  of  consonant 
terminals  :  — 


Fernandez. 

Cervantes. 

Martinez. 

Mdntes. 

Sanchez. 

Sanchiz. 

Dlez. 

Ruiz. 

Fldres. 

Mufifz. 

Soils. 

Mad6z. 

Vaktes. 


Cortes.1 


46.  Words  ending  primarily  in  a  vowel  or  a  diphthong 
(which  is  always  considered  as  constituting  a  single 
syllable)  are  regularly  accentuated  on  the  penult,  unless 
otherwise  marked  :  — 


odio,  hatred. 
rostro,  countenance. 
buitre,  vulture. 
manteca,  butter. 
audiencia,  upper  court. 
andamio,  staging. 


lastima,  pity. 
zangano,  drone. 
maquina,  machine. 
alegrfa,  joy. 
aleli,  gilly  flower. 
comprd,  he  bought. 


a.   This  principle  is  not  modified  by  inflectional  end- 
ings.    See,  however,  §  45,  b,  c :  — 


odios,  rancor. 
amas,  thou  lovest. 


maquinas,  machines. 
quieren,  they  wish. 


47.  Compound  words  have  the  accentuation  of  their 
simple  components,  and  adverbs  in  mente  follow  the 
natural  stress  of  the  adjective  to  which  that  ending  is 
attached :  — 


un  pisa-verde,  an  exquisite. 
un  saca-corchos,  a  corkscrew. 
un  corta-plumas,  a  penknife. 


facilmente,  easily. 
sdbiamente,  sagely. 
ten£zmente,  tenaciously. 


1  The  unaccented  endings  ez,  es,  are  patronymics,  formed  on  the  basis  of 
the  Latin  ablative  is.  Thus,  Fernandez  is  from  e  Ferdinandis,  of  the  Ferdi- 
nand family  ;  Cervantes,  from  fe  Servandis,  of  the  Scrvandos.  The  accented 
ending  es,  on  the  contrary,  is  geographical,  from  -ensis,  formed  like  Cartha- 


Accent. 


Graphic  Accent. 

48.  The  acute  accent  (')  is  the  only  mark  now  in  use 
in  Spanish.  It  should  be  graphically  applied  only  in 
the  following  cases  :  — 

a.   To  indicate  an  irregularly  accentuated  syllable :  — 


melancdlico,  melancholy. 
par^ntesis,  parenthesis. 
venlamos,  we  were  coming. 


mucho,  much. 
espanol,  Spanish. 
Frances,  French. 


b.    To  distinguish  homonyms  :  — 


a,  has  (obsolete). 

al,  to  the. 

aun,  yet,  still. 

de,  of,  from. 

e,  I  have  (obsolete). 

el,  the. 

ha,  has. 

luego,  afterward. 

mi,  my. 

mas,  but. 

o,  oh. 

se,  one's  self. 

si,  if. 

te,  thee. 

tu,  thy. 


a,  to,  in,  at. 

al,  otherwise  (alias). 

aun,  even,  also. 

de\  he  may  give. 

e,  and  (before  i  or  hi). 

€\,  he,  him. 

ha,  ago. 

luego,  therefore. 

mi,  me  (prepositional  case). 

mas,  more. 

6,  or  (and  u  before  o). 

se,  I  know  ]  be  thou. 

si,yes;  0ne'ssetf(prepos.  case). 

te,  tea. 

tu,  thou. 


c.  To  distinguish  verbs  identical  in  form  with  other 
parts  of  speech  ;  also  verbs  with  pronouns  attached  to 
them  :  — 

cdmo,  I  eat. 
suefio,  I  dream. 
sie'ntese,  sit  down. 


como,  as. 
suefio,  dream. 
dame,  give  me. 
tengase,  let  him  have. 


ve'te,  be  off  (go  thyself). 


giniensis,  Span.  Cartagines  ;  Valdensis,  Span.  Valdes.  See  Godoy  Alcantara : 
Apellidos  Castellanos,  Madrid,  1871,  —  a  very  interesting,  but  not  very  scholarly, 
book,  in  view  of  the  author's  facilities. 


1 8  Phonology. 

d.    To  distinguish  demonstrative  adjectives  used  sub- 
stantively  :  — 


aquel,  that  (tile). 

aqudl,  that  one. 

ese,  that  (iste). 

e*se,  that  one. 

este,  this  (hie). 

e*ste,  this  one. 

e.    To  distinguish  the  interrogative  and  exclamatory 

use,  direct  and  indirect,  of  certain  pronouns   and   ad- 

verbs :  — 

como,  as. 

cdmo,  how? 

cual,  as,  which. 

cual,  which  ? 

cuan,  as. 

cudn,  howl 

cuando,  when. 

cua'ndo,  when  ? 

cuanto,  as  much. 

cuanto,  how  much  ? 

cuyo,  whose. 

ciiyo,  whose? 

donde,  where.    . 

ddnde,  where? 

que,  which,  that. 

que,  what? 

quien,  who. 

quien,  who? 

f.    In  certain  correlatives  :  — 

quien — quien,  one — another,  some — others. 
cuales — cuales,  some — others. 

REMARK.  —  The  Academy  does  not  always  strictly  observe  its 
own  rules  touching  the  graphic  accent,  but  the  great  printers  of 
Madrid  (Aribau  &  Co.,  Fortanet,  and  Ginesta)  are  sufficient  guides. 

Division  of  Syllables. 

49.  A  single  consonant  between  vowels  begins  a 
syllable  :  — 

me-sa,  table.  \       la-bor,  needle-work. 

a.  The  letters  ch,  rr,  II,  and  n,  are  considered  as 
simple  consonants,  and  follow  the  same  rule :  — 


mu-cha-cho,  boy. 
pan-ta-lla,  lamp-shade. 


ni-no,  child. 
tie-rra,  land. 


Capital  Letters.  19 

50.  Two  separable  consonants  standing  between  vow- 
els are  divided  :  — 

puer-ta,  door.  \       gus-to,  pleasure. 

Exception.  —  The  letters  b,  c,  ch,  </,/,  g,j,  /,  q,  t,  v,  z, 
followed  by  /  or  r,  cannot  be  separated,  unless  they 
unite  compound  words  :  — 

pa-la-bra,  word.  I       ta-bla,  board. 

si-glo,  century.  \       po-dra,  he  will  be  able. 

sub-lu-nar,  sub-lunar. 

51.  Three  or  four  consonants,  of  which  s  is  the  sec- 
ond, divide  after  the  s  :  — 

cons-tan-te,  constant.  \       trans-cri-bir,  to  copy. 

a.  Otherwise  compound  words  are  to  be  resolved  into 
their  elements  :  — 

cor-ta  -  plu-mas ,  penknife.      I       ca-ri  -  lar-go ,  long-faced. 
pre-po-si-cion,  preposition.     I       ad-je-ti-vo,  adjective. 

52.  True  diphthongs  and  triphthongs  are  indivisible  : 

vie-ne,  he  comes.  bue-no,  good. 

pre-ciais,  ye  prize.  I       va-cieis,  ye  may  empty. 

but 

lo-or,  praise.  I       le-er,  to  read. 

a-ta-ud,  coffin.  I       gzn-zu-a,  false  key. 

Capital  Letters. 

53.  These  follow  the  same  general  laws  as  in  English, 
with  the  following  important  exceptions  :  — 

a.    Adjectives    derived   from  the  names  of   nations, 


2O  Phonology. 

provinces,    towns,    and    men,    are   written   with    small 
initials  :  — 

el  idioma  frances,  the  French  language. 

la  sal  andaluza,  Andalusian  wit  and  humor. 

las  tablas  alfonsfes,  the  Alfonsinian  Tables. 

la  escena  madrilena,  the  Madrid  stage  (theatre) . 
but 


el  Andaluz,  the  Andalusian. 
el  Madri\eno,t/teMadritenian. 


el  Frances,  the  Frenchman. 
el  Catalan,  the  Catalonian. 


b.  The  pronoun  yo,  /,  is  written  with  a  small  initial, 
unless  it  begins  a  sentence  after  a  period,  or  introduces 
a  quotation  :  — 

el  y  yo,  he  and  I.  \  dijo  :  "  Yo  soy,"  he  said:  "  it  is  /." 

Orthographic  Signs. 

54.  The  diaeresis  is  used  to  dissolve  a  diphthong,  and 
to  render  vocal  a  silent  u  after  g :  — 


suave,  mild. 


riela,  it  glimmers. 


cigiiena,  stork.  argiiir,  to  argue. 

55.  The  punctuation  marks  are  identical  in  Spanish 
and  English,  except  the  signs  of  interrogation  and  ex- 
clamation, which  in  Spanish,  beside  the  regular  form  at 
the  end  of  the  phrase,  are  inverted  at  the  beginning:  — 

I  tiene  usted  im  libro  ?  have  you  a  book  ? 

\  cuan  presto  se  va  el  placer  !   how  quickly  pleasure  passes  away ! 

56.  The  following  are  the  technical  names  of  most  of  the  terms 
relating  to  orthographical  signs  :  — 


comma  (,)   coma. 
semicolon  (  ;  )  punto  y  coma. 
colon  (  :  )   dos  puntos. 
period  (.)  punto. 
full  stop,  punto  final. 


interrogation  (<•-?)  interrogacion. 
exclamation  (;  -  !)  admiracion. 
dash  ( — )  rayita. 

"     (....)  "puntos  suspensivos. 
double  dash  (=)  dos  rayitas. 


Castilian  Vulgarisms. 


21 


hyphen  (-)  guion. 
diaeresis  (••)  crema. 
parenthesis  (  )  parentesis. 
brackets  ([])  corchetes. 
brace  (j)  corchete. 
apostrophe  (')  apdstrofo  or  virgu- 

lilla. 

quotation  marks  ("  ")  comillas. 
index  (SSP)  manecilla. 
.ytar  (*)  estrellita. 
asterisk ',  asterisco. 
dagger  (f)  cruz. 

/0  underscore 


section  (§)  parrafo. 
paragraph  (If)  calderon. 
#/<£  (")  tilde,  as  «.' 
for  (     )  rasgo,  as   admon. 

administration,  t^fc*.1 
cedilla  (9)  cedilla  (obsolete), 
^r^  (/\)  llamada. 
capitals  (letras)  mayusculas. 
small  letters,  minusculas. 
£#/££  word,  reclamo. 
reference,  cita,  llamada. 
italics,  cursiva,  bastardilla. 
subrayar. 


for 


NOTE 

ON  CASTILIAN  VULGARISMS  AMONG  THE  LOWER  CLASSES,  FREQUENTLY 
QUOTED  IN  LITERATURE. 

Vowels. 

57.  The  vowel  e  is  occasionally  employed  for  i :  — 

prencipal  for  principal.  vesita         for  visita. 

prencipio    "    principio.  enquilino    "    inquilino. 

vesitar         "    visitar.  endina        "    indigna. 

denguno  for  ninguno. 

58.  Vowels  are  diphthongized  irregularly,  and  i  inserted :  — 

haiga       for  haya. 
cudiao  1 
cuidiao ) 


cuidado. 


quid  for  ca. 

naide  "    nadie. 

Alifonso,  a,  "    Alfonso,  a. 


59.   The   diphthong  ie  is   reduced  to  its  primitive  e,  and  vice 
versa :  — 

pacencia  for  paciencia.  |       concencia  for  conciencia. 

diferiencia  for  diferencia. 

1  This  sign  of  abbreviation  which  originated  the  tilde  is  taken  from  the 
Arabs.    See  Wright's  Arabic  Grammar,  Vol.  I.,  p.  23,  d. 


22  Phonology. 

Consonants. 

60.  B  and  v  easily  pass  over  into  g  by  the  aspirate  h  :  — 

vuelve,  he  returns,    makes  huelve  and  giielve. 

bueno,  £-00^,  "  hueno         "  giieno. 

abuelo,  grandfather,     "  ahuelo         "  agile  lo. 

buhardilla,  attic,  "  huardilla     "  guardilla. 

a.   On  the  other  hand,  £•  passes  over  into  b  through  h  :  — 

agur,  bye-bye,  makes  ahur  and  abur.1 
aguja,  needle,  "  ahuja  "  abuja. 
agujero,  hole,  "  ahujero  "  bujero. 

Some  of  these  forms,  viz.,  agiielo,  guardilla,  abur,  avur,  and 
ahur,  are  included  in  the  native  dictionaries,  while  all  are  frequent 
in  the  national  drama  and  novela  de  costumbres? 

61.  Cc.     C  is  rejected  before  c  and  t,  as  might  be  expected  from 
the  national  repugnance  to  double  letters :  — 


acion     for  accion. 
aflicion  "    afliccion. 
facioso   "    faccioso. 


efeto  for  efecto. 
direto  "  directo. 
conduta  "  conducta. 


Hence  the  literary  forms    objeto,  object,   and    sujeto,   subject, 
aficion  (affectio) ,  fondness,  in  obedience  to  this  popular  law. 

62.   Ch.    Among  the  peasants  of  both  Castiles,  a  very  peculiar 
sound  of  the  ch  is  frequently  heard,  approaching  the  Basque  ts:  — 


1  Agur  (French  heur  in  bonheur,  malheur)  is  a  remnant  of  the  Roman  pass- 
ing salutation  "  bonum  augurium  tibi  sit,"  our  "  good  luck  to  you,"  now  used 
in  Spain  in  turning  from  a  person  or  on  leaving  a  shop.    The  popular  tradition 
is  that  it  means  the  devil,  and  perhaps  the  original  should  read  "  prosit  tibi 
Augur,"  the  Augur  (i.e.  Apollo)  be  with  thee.    At  all  events,  the  celebrated 
statesman  and  scholar,  Martinez  de  la  Rosa,  sought  to  exorcise  the  paganism 
by  saying  "  Abur  adios." 

2  See  among  many  others  the  sainetes  of  Ramon  de  la  Cruz,  Madrid,  1843, 
2  vols.  8° ;  the  Escenas  Matritenses,  of  the  now  venerable  Mesonero  Romanos, 
best  edition,  Madrid,  1862;  the  Escenas  Andaluzas,  by  "  El  Solitario  "  (Serafin 
Est6banez   Calderon),   Madrid,  1847,  4°,  and  the  Espanoles  Pintados  for  si 
mismos,  containing  articles  by  the  best  talent  of  contemporary  Spain. 


Castilian  Vulgarisms.  23 

63.  D.     This  letter  is  constantly  omitted  between  vowels  and 
when  final :  — 


Prao 

for  Prado. 

too 

for  todo. 

casao 

"    casado. 

e 

"    de. 

lao 
ocupao 
mario 

"    lado. 
"    ocupado. 
"    marido. 

pue  ser 
Madri 
come 

"    puede  ser. 
"    Madrid. 
"    corned. 

via 

"    vida. 

berda 

"    verdad. 

naa  and 

na  "    nada. 

necesia 

"    necesidad. 

uste  and  oste  for  usted. 
The  contraction  do  for  ado  is  common  to  all  classes. 

a.   This  system  of  suppression  has  produced  the  degeneration  of 
Spanish  words  from  the  Latin :  — 

sedere,  to  sit,  Old  Span,   seer,1              Modern   ser,  to  be. 

videre,  to  see,  "  veer,  "  ver,  to  see. 

legere,  to  read,  "  leer,  "  leer. 

comedere,  to  eat,  "  comer,  "  comer. 

delict um,  crime,  "  delicto  "  delito. 

mente  captus,  silly,        "  mentecapto,  "  mentecato. 

civitat-em,  state,  "  cibdad,  town,  "  ciudad. 

64.  H  before  ue  frequently  passes  over  into  g :  — 

giievo    for  huevo.  j       giieso        for  hueso. 

guerta    "    huerta.  giiespede    "    huesped. 

These  incorrect  forms  are  met  with  in  the  old  literature,  especially 
in  Mss.     Giiete  for  Huete,  Giiesca  for  Huesca.     See  also  B,  V. 

65.  LI  like  y  consonant :  — 

yeno  for  lleno.  |       yeba  for  lleva. 

66.  6*  is  frequently  dropped  or  barely  aspirated,  especially  when 
final :  — 

pue  or  pue'  for  pues.  |       lo'  bueno'  for  los  buenos. 


1  Gerund :  seyendo  ;  part,  past,  seydo,  seido,  and  sido,  in  Old  Spanish,  even 
in  documents  dated  as  late  as  1502  to  1546,  in  my  possession. 


24  Phonology. 

67.  Kis  often  pronounced  too  emphatically,  like  the  English  j:  — 

yegua,  mare.  ya,  already. 

yeso,  lime.  yo,  I. 

68.  Metathesis  is  very  common :  — 

Blivia  and  blibia  for  Biblia,  Bible. 

probe  "  pobre,  poor. 

pedricar  "  predicar,  to  preach. 

presona  "  persona,  person. 

percurador  "  procurador,  attorney. 

perlado  "  prelado,  prelate. 

naide  "  nadie,  nobody. 

"  abernuncio  "  (Sancho)  "  "  abrenuncio  "  (D.  Quijote),  /  renounce. 

69.  Other  vulgar  forms   are   conozgo  for  conozco,  /  know ; 
dende  for  desde  ;  denantes  for  antes ;  onde  for  donde.     Gipsy 
words  abound  in  the  vocabulary  of  the  lower  orders  ;  as,  chavd  for 
muchacho ;  parn£  for  dinero ;  camelar  for  querer ;  diquelar  for 
ver,1  etc.    Of  English  the  Peninsular  war  seems  to  have  bequeathed 
only  el  monis,  the  money ! 

1  The  best  work  for  these  terms,  which  are  scattered  about  the  modern 
popular  drama,  is  El  Gitanismo,  containing  Grammar  and  Vocabulary,  by  F. 
S.  Mayo,  alias  Quindale,  Madrid,  1870,  12°,  pp.  152. 


SECTION  SECOND. 

FORM    AND    INFLECTION. 
Preliminary  Remarks. 

70.  There  are  in  Spanish  the  usual  nine  Parts  of  Speech  ;  namely, 
the  noun,  adjective,  pronoun,  verb,  participle,  adverb,  preposition, 
conjunction,  and  interjection. 

71.  Of  these  Parts  of  Speech,  the  first  five  are  capable  of  various 
degrees  of  inflection ;  the  rest  are  said  to  be  invariable.^ 

72.  The  inflection  of  nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  may  also 
be  called  declension ;  that  of  verbs,  conjugation.     Adjectives,  adjec- 
tive pronouns,  and  past  participles  are  likewise  said  to  be  varied, 
with  respect  to  gender  and  number. 

73.  Declinable  or  inflected  words  have  number,  gender,  and,  to 
a  certain  extent,  case.     Verbs  have  number  and  person,  mode  and 
tense. 

74.  The  declinable  parts  of  speech  are  inflected  by  the  aid  of 
prepositions,  chiefly  de,  of,  from,  and  d,  to,  at,  which  may  for  this 
reason  be  termed  case-prepositions. 

75.  Although  cases  are,  properly  speaking,  wanting  in  Spanish, 
except  in  the  personal  pronouns,  their  technical  names  are  con- 
venient for  exact  and  concise  statement.    We  shall,  therefore,  desig- 
nate them  as  follows :  — 


1  The  inflection  of  a  word  signifies  the  various  changes  that  take  place  in  its 
structure  or  endings  to  express  number,  gender,  case,  person,  mode,  and  tense. 

25 


26 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Case  Name. 

Kiip.  Equivalent. 

Span. 
Signs. 

Eng.  Signs. 

N. 

Nominative. 

Nomin.  or  Subject. 

G. 

Genitive. 

Possessive. 

de 

'5,  s1,  of,  from. 

D. 

Dative. 

Indirect  Objective. 

d 

to,  at. 

I.A. 

Impersonal  Accusative. 

Direct  Objective. 

P.A. 

Personal  Accusative. 

Direct  Objective. 

£ 

P. 

Prepositional. 

(With  any  preposition?) 

76.  The  Accusative  is  usually  like  the  Nominative  when  the  direct 
object  of  an  active  transitive  verb  is  the.  name  of  a  thing,  animal,  or 
place  {Impersonal  Accusative) ,  and  like  the  Dative  when  the  direct 
object  represents  a  person,  thing,  or  abstract  quality  personified 
{Personal  Accusative)  :  — 


este  muchacho  destroza  sus  libros, 
un  buen  padre  quiere  a  sus  hijos, 
el  vicio  aborrece  a  la  virtud, 


this  boy  mutilates  his  books, 
a  good  father  loves  his  children- 
vice  abhors  virtue. 


77.   The  Prepositional  case  is  like  the  Nominative,  except  in  cer- 
tain personal  pronouns :  — 


el  nino  sale  a  paseo  con  el  ve- 

cino, 

no  podrd  hacer  eso  sin  ml, 
estaba  fuera  de  si  de  gozo, 
;  Dios  se  apiade  de  ti ! 
no  quiero  ir  con  £1, 


the  child  goes  out  to  walk  with 

the  neighbor. 

he  cannot  do  that  without  me. 
he  was  beside  himself  for  joy. 
may  God  take  pity  on  thee  ! 
I  do  not  care  to  go  with  him. 


78.  Leading  prepositions  are :  — 


a",  to  (motion  to)  ;  at  (position), 
ante,  before  (presence). 
COn,W#A  (mean?, accompaniment), 
contra,  against. 

de,  of,  from  (possession,  origin). 
desde,/"n?/^,  since  (time,  place), 
en,  in,  at  (state,  place), 
entre,    between    (two)  ;     among 
(several) . 


hdcia,  towards,  toward. 
hasta,  ////,  until,  to,  up  to. 
para,  for  (destination)  ;  /#j(end). 
para  con,  toward  (moral  direc- 
tion). 

por,  by  (agent)  ;  for  (motive), 
sin,  without. 
sobre,  on,  upon. 
tras,  after,  behind  (order). 


Preliminary  Remarks, 


27 


a.   The  following  govern  the  Qenitive  :  — 


a"  casa  de,  to  one's  house  (motion) . 
a"ntes  de,  before  (time,  order), 
despues  de,  after  (time,  order), 
delante  de,  before  (place,  posi- 
tion) . 
detras  ^behind  (place,  position). 


cerca  de,  near. 

en  casa  de,  in,  at,  one^s  house 

(rest). 

lejos  <Je,  far  from. 
encima  de,  on,  upon,  over. 
debajo  de,  under,  beneath. 


Examples. 


entrega  el  libro  al  hombre, 

vamos  todos  a  Sevilla, 

cartas  £  varios, 

Pedro  quiere  a  Juan, 

esta  a  la  puerta, 

ante  el  rey,  el  alcalde, 

se  hirid  con  una  lanza, 

salid  con  un  amigo, 

se  sublevaron  contra  la  autori- 

dad, 

la  madre  del  mozo, 
la  fuerza  de  la  sangre, 
vengo  de  Italia, 
construido  de  laton, 
contento  de  alguien, 
vive  del  viento, 
bebe  del  vaso, 
es  amado  de  todos, 
desde  aquel  dia, 
desde  el  palacio, 
en  Madrid;  en  casa, 
en  el  campo  ;  en  la  ciiidad, 
esta  carta  es  para  mf , 
lo  hago  para  un  amigo, 
se  come  para  vivir, 
justo  para  con  los  hombres, 
hecho  por  un  artesano, 
creado  por  Dios, 
por  un  buen  motivo, 


he  delivers  the  book  to  the  man. 
let  us  all  go  to  Seville, 
letters  to  divers  (persons). 
Peter  likes  John, 
he  stands  at  the  door, 
before  the  king,  the  mayor.    , 
he  wounded  himself  with  a  lance 
he  went  out  with  a  friend, 
they  revolted  against  the  authori- 
ties. 

the  lad's  mother, 
the  power  of  blood. 
I  come  from  Italy, 
made  out  of  brass, 
satisfied  with  somebody, 
he  lives  on  air. 
he  drinks  out  of  a  glass, 
he  is  beloved  by  all. 
from  (since)  that  day. 
from  the  palace, 
at  Madrid  ;  at  home, 
in  the  country ;  in  the  city. 
this  letter  is  for  me. 
I  do  it  for  a  friend, 
men  eat  to  live, 
just  toward  men. 
made  by  a  mechanic, 
created  by  God. 
for  a  good  reason 


28 


Form  and  Inflection. 


salid  sin  capa, 
tras  este  sugeto  vino  otro, 
a  casa  del  cura, 
antes  de  e'ste  ent-re  yo, 
antes  del  tiempo, 
usted  estci.  antes  de  dl, 
despues  de  esto, 
vino  despues  de  mi, 
delante  del  palacio, 
detras  de  la  puerta, 
cerca  de  la  ciudad, 
en  casa  de  un  amigo, 
16jos  de  la  poblacion, 
encima  de  la  mesa, 
debajo  de  la  mesa. 


he  went  out  without  a  cloak. 

after  this  person  came  another. 

to  the  curate's  (house). 

I  came  in  before  this  (man). 

before  the  time. 

you  are  before  him  (rank). 

after  this. 

he  came  after  me. 

before  the  palace. 

behind  the  door. 

near  the  city. 

at  a  friend's  (house). 

far  from  the  town. 

on  the  table. 

under  the  table. 


REMARK.  —  In  giving  the  various  inflections  of  declinable  words, 
the  enumeration  of  cases  will  ordinarily  be  limited,  for  brevity's 
sake,  to  the  Nominative,  Genitive,  Dative,  and  one  of  the  two  Accu- 
satives. 

The  Articles.1 

79.  The  Articles  are  of  two  sorts  :  the  Definite,  el, 
the9  and  the  Indefinite,  un,  an  or  a.  They  agree  with 
the  noun  they  limit  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  and 
are  inflected  as  follows :  — 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

el 
del 
al 
el 

la 
de  la 
a  la 
la 

the. 

's,  of,  or  from  the. 
to  or  at  the. 
the. 

los 
delos 
d  los 
los 

las 
delas 
alas 
las 

the. 
s\  of  or  from  the 
to  or  at  the. 
the. 

un 
deun 
a  un 
un 

una 
deuna 
a  una 
una 

an  or  a. 
of  at  from  an  or  a. 
to  or  at  an  or  a. 
an  or  a. 

(Wanting.) 

1  Although  the  Articles  are  properly  determinative  adjectives,  they  are  given 
here  because  they  serve  to  distinguish  the  gender  and  case  of  nouns. 


The  Articles. 


29 


80.  Del  and  al  are  contractions  of  de  el  and  d  el  re- 
spectively. At  the  present  day  the  uncontracted  forms 
are  used  only  when  the  article  el  belongs  to  a  quoted 
epithet,  title,  or  heading  :  — 


un  suelto  de  '  El  Impartial,' 
una  extraordinaria  d  '  El  Porve- 

nir,' 
una  carta  de  *  El  Globo,' 


but 


un  articulo  de  fondo  del  Diario 

de  la  Corte, 
una  carta  al  Diario  oficial, 


an  item  in  4  The  Impartial.' 
a  *  Porvenir '  extra. 

a  letter  in  *  The  Globe/ 

a  leader  in  the  Court  Journal, 
a  letter  to  the  official  Gazette. 


81.  The  Masculine  Definite  Article  el  is  at  present 
regularly  employed  before  a  feminine  noun  in  the  singu- 
lar number,  when  it  begins  with  the  syllable  a  or  ha 
having  the  tonic  accent :  — 


el  alma,  the  soul  (in  general) . 

el  anima,  the  soul  (in  purgatory) . 

el  ama,1  the  mistress,  nurse. 

el  agua,  the  water. 

el  aguila,  the  eagle. 

el  ave,  the  bird  (generic). 

el  arte,  the  art. 

el  habla,  the  speech. 

el  hambre,  the  famine. 


la  alegria,  the  joy. 

la  animation,  the  stir. 

la  aguja,  the  needle. 

la  alhaja,  the  jewel. 

la  avenida,  the  inundation. 

la  armadura,  the  mounting. 

la  hacienda,  the  estate. 

la  hazafia,  the  exploit. 

la  Habana,  (the)  Havana. 


but 


las  almas,  las  dguilas, 

el  arte  poetica, 

la  alta  casa, 

el  agua  esta  ya  clara, 


the  souls,  the  eagles. 

the  art  of  poetry  (poetic  art) . 

the  lofty  house. 

the  water  is  now  clear. 


1  Una  ama  de  Haves  or  de  gobierno,  a  housekeeper ;  una  ama  de  leche,  a 
wet-nurse  ;  una  ama,  in  general,  a  mistress,  the  lady  of  the  house,  with  reference 
to  the  servants,  employees,  etc. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a.  The  Indefinite  Article  is  often  found  employed  in 
the  same  way,  whatever  be  the  accent,  but  not  by  the 
best  modern  writers  and  speakers :  — 


im  ave,  for  una  ave, 

**  con  un  alma  toda  fuego," 


a  bird. 

with  a  soul  all  fire. 


82.  The  Indefinite  Article  has  properly  no  plural ; 
the  adjective  unos,  fern,  unas,  some,  may,  however,  be 
used  to  express  the  partitive  value  of  a  substantive, 
especially  when  it  has  an  attribute :  — 


tengo  casas  y  heredades, 
el  rey  posee  palacios, 
tengo  unas  casas  muy  bonitas, 
el  rey  posee  unos  palacios  muy 
regalados, 


I  have  houses  and  lands, 
the  king  possesses  palaces. 
I  have  soine  very  pretty  houses  * 
the  king  possesses    some    vecy 
sumptuous  palaces. 


a.  When  the  noun  has  no  attribute,  unos  is  equiva- 
lent to  a  few,  but  with  a  weaker  force  than  algunos  or 
unos  cuantos,  in  the  signification  of  some,  any,  afew:  — 


una  frutera  con  unas  frutas, 
quiso  dar  unos  pasos, 
^tiene  usted  (algunos)  libros? 
tengo  algunos  ;  no  tengo  mas  que 
unos  cuantos, 


a  dish  with  fruit. 

he  was  about  to  take  (a  few)  steps. 

have  you  (any)  books  ? 

\  have  some ;  I  have  only  a  few» 


REMARK.  —  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  there  is  no  partitive 
article  in  Spanish  as  in  French,  although  there  is  a  partitive  con- 
struction formed  by  the 


they  are  (some)  of  the  wealthiest 

peopleln  town, 
her  husband  is  a  voter,  and  (one) 

of  the  influential  (ones) ._        _ 


son  gentes  de  las  ma's  ricas  que 

hay  en  la  ciudad, 
su  marido  es  elector  y  de  los  in- 

fluyentes, 


The  Articles. 


The  Determinative 


sa  The  so-called  neuter  article  lo,  the,  is  employed 
with  adjectives,  ad vejrbs,  and  pronouns  (very  seldom 
and  always  illogically  with  nouns),  to  express  substan- 
tive ideas :  — 


lo  bueno, 

to  malo, 
lo  ameno, 
lo  posibie-, 
lo  infame, 
lo  mejor, 
lo  olvidado, 
lo  que, 
lo  cual, 
lo  mio, 
lo  demas, 


the  good,  that  which  is  good,  the  good  thing  (jo 

ayaOov) . 
the  evil,  that  which  is  bad,  the  evil  thing  (TO  KOLKOV). 

what  is  lovely,  the  loveliness  (i.e.  of  nature). 

what  is  possible,  one's  best,  the  possibility. 

what  is  infamous,  the  infamy, 
the  best,  that  which  is  best,  the  best  thing. 

that  which  is  forgotten,  the  past  and  gone, 
that  which,  what ;  todo  lo  que,  all  that. 
which  tfiing,  which;  todo  lo  cual,  all  of  which. 
mine,  that  which  or  what  is  mine  -(TO  e/xoV) . 
the  rest,  that  which  or  what  remains. 


lo  justp   no,  es  .siempre  lo  mas 

hacedero, 

lo  ameno  de  este  valle, 
hare  lo  posibie  para  efectuarlo, 

reconozco  lo  infame  de  su  accion, 

no  entiendo  lo  que  dice, 
todo  lo  que  reluce  no  es  oro, 
dicho  lo  cual  se  re  tiro, 
did  a  cada  uno  lo  suyo, 


what  as  just  is  not  always  what 

is  most  feasible, 
the  loveliness  of  this  vale. 
I  shall  do  my  best  to  oring  it 

about. 
I  acknowledge  the  infamousness 

of  his  act. 

I  do  not  catch  what  he  says, 
all  is  not  gold  that  glitters, 
saying -which  he  withdrew, 
he  gave  to  each  his  own. 


a.   As  a  pronoun,  as  well  as  an  article,  lo  has  a  variety 
of  uses  that  need  only  be  illustrated  at  this  point :  — 


lo  creo,  lo  aseguro, 

— -T7-~  V    .  & 

yo  soy  ciego  y  el  no  ?o  es, 
£1  es  artista  y  yo  no  lo  soy, 


I  think  so,  I  assert  it  confidently, 
I  am  blind  and  he  is  not  (so), 
he  is  an  artist  and  I  am  not  (one) . 


32  Form  and  Inflection. 


es  lo  de  siempre, 

lo  del  palacio,  lo  del  rey, 


versos  £  lo  divino, 


it  is  the  old  story  (that  of  alway). 
the  (affair)  of  the  palace,  of  the 

king, 
verses  (turned)  into  the  sacred 


(style). 
See  further  under  The  Adjective. 

The  Noun. 

GENDER. 

84.  Spanish  nouns  have  two  Genders  only  :  the  Mas- 
culine and  Feminine.  All  substantives,  even  those 
designating  inanimate  things,  substances,  and  abstract 
ideas,  are  of  one  of  these  two  genders  :  — 


el  hombre,  the  man. 

el  caballo,  the  horse. 

el  libro,  the  book. 

el  azucar,  (the)  sugar. 

el  vicio,  (the)  vice,  bad  habit. 


la  mujer,  the  woman. 
la  vaca,  the  cow. 
la  pluma,  the  pen. 
la  leche,  (the)  milk. 
la  virtud,  (the)  virtiie. 


Hence  libro,  azucar,  vicio,  for  example,  are  gram- 
matically considered  to  be  males,  like  hombre,  caballo ; 
and  the  corresponding  pronouns  el,  he,  le,  him,  apply 
equally  in  both  cases.  So  pluma,  leche,  virtud,  are 
considered  as  females,  and  the  corresponding  pronouns 
would  be  ella,  she,  la,  her.  It,  then,  is  not  a  translation 
of  //,  le,  ella,  la,  when  reference  is  made  to  the  name 
of  a  thing,  substance,  or  an  abstract  idea,  but  an  idio- 
matic adaptation  to  English  usage.  The  Spanish  trans- 
lation of  it  could  only  be  ello  as  subject,  if  expressed, 
and  lo  as  object  or  predicate  :  — 

1  Such  is  court  or  secular  poetry  metamorphosed  into  religious  verse  by  a 
sort  of  sacred  travesty.  Boscan  and  Garcilaso  (1543)  were  so  transmuted  by 
one  Sebastian  de  C6rdoba  (1575).  For  examples,  see  my  edition  of  Boscan, 
Madrid,  1875,  at  pp.  xxvii  and  520. 


The  Noun.  —  Gender.  33 


veo  al  hombre,  le  veo,  * 
tengo  el  libro,  le  tengo, 
busco  a*  la  dama,  la  busco, 
busco  la  pluma,  la  busco, 
^crees  lo  que  dice?  lo  creo, 
(ello)  consta,  it  is  evident. 


I  see  the -man,  I  see  him. 
I  have  the  book,  I  have  him  (it) 
I  seek  the  lady,  I  seek  her. 
I  seek  the  pen,  I  seek  her  (it), 
do  you  believe  what  he  says?    I 
believe  it. 


85.  General  Rule.  —  In  the  greatest  number  of  Span- 
ish nouns,  the  ending  o  indicates  the  masculine  gender, 
and  the  ending  a  the  feminine  :  — 

el  hermano,  the  brother.  I  la  tia,  the  aunt. 

el  gozo,  the  joy.  \  la  alegria,  (the)  delight. 

86.  The  gender  of  a  word  may  be  determined  in  part 
by  its  signification  and  in  part  by  its  ending. 

87.  Masculines  by  signification  are  :  — 

a.  All  nouns  of  whatever  ending  that  denote  males, 
or  the  dignities,  professions,  and  pursuits  commonly 
assigned  to  males  :  — 


el  papa,  the  pope. 

el  rey,  the  king. 

el  juez,  the  judge. 

el  cura,  the  curate. 

el  periodista,  the  journalist. 

el  tahur,  the  gambler. 


el  grabador,  the  engraver. 

el  albanil,  the  mason. 

el  ebanista,  the  cabinet-maker. 

el  sastre,  the  tailor. 

el  buey,  the  ox. 

el  avestruz,  the  ostrich. 


b.  The  names  of  countries,  cities,  and  towns  usually 
follow  the  gender  indicated  by  the  final  vowels  o,  a ;  if 
they  end  in  a  consonant  they  are  mostly  masculine :  — 

Valencia,  Segovia,  la  Andalucfa.  I  Logrono,Oviedo,Lugo,elCarpio 
Madrid,  Velez,  Burgos.  |  Jaen,  Almoddvar,  el  Escorial. 


34 


Form  and  Inflection. 


REMARK.  —  Masculines  in  o  may  be  poetically  used  in  the  femi- 
nine, the  noun  la  ciudad,  the  city,  being  understood ;  and  feminines 
in  a  are  masculine  when  the  inhabitants  are  intended  :  — 

la  gran  Toledo,  great  Toledo.        \  todo  Malaga,  all  Malaga. 

Except  in  those  proper  names  of  places  from  which  the  article  is 
inseparable :  — 


la  gran  ciudad  del  Toboso, 
Bernardo  del  Carpio, 
la  Corufla  ei\tera, 


the  great  city  of  El  Toboso. 
Bernard  of  El  Carpio. 
All  Corunna  (the  "Groyne"  en- 
tire) . 


c.    The  names  of  most  rivers,  whatever  be  the  end- 
ing:— 


el  Guadiana  (wddi-Anas). 
el    Guadalquivir    (wdd-dl-kebir, 
the  great  river) . 


el    Guadalaviar     (wdd-dl-abidd, 

the  white  river) . 
el  Guadalajara  (stony  river) . 


d.    Indeclinable  parts   of   speech   and   phrases   used 
substantively :  — 


el  porque,  the  wherefore. 

el  si,  the  consent. 

el  pagare,  the  promissory  note. 

los  afueras,  the  outskirts . 

el  viva,  the  applause. 

el  pesame,  the  condolence. 

el  conquibus,  the  wherewithal. 

el  creer,  believing,  belief. 


el  besamanos,  the  (royal)  saluta- 
tion. 

el  pro  y  el  contra,  the  pro  and 
con. 

el  quien  sabe,  the  query. 

el  que  diran,  public  gossip. 

el  vayven  orvaiven  (va  y  viene), 
the  oscillation. 


e.    The  names  of  most  fruit-trees  or  their  wood  are 
masculine,  while  those  of  their  fruits  are  feminine  :  — 


el  manzano,  the  apple-tree. 
el  castano,  the  chestnut-tree. 
el  naranjo,  the  orange-tree. 
el  guindo,  the  cherry-tree. 
el  avellano,  the  hazel-tree. 


una  manzana,  an  apple. 
una  castana,  a  chestnut. 
una  naranja,  an  orange. 
una  guinda,  a  cherry. 
una  avellana,  a  hazelnut. 


The  Noun.  —  Gender. 


35 


el  olivo,  the  olive-tree. 

el  peral,  the  pear-tree. 

el  moral,  the  mulberry -tree. 

el  nogal  or  la  noguera,  the  walnut. 

el  roble  or  la  encina,1  the  oak. 


una  aceituna,  an  olive. 
una  pera,  a  pear. 
una  mora,  a  mulberry. 
una  nuez,  a  walnut. 
una  bellota,  an  acorn. 


Exceptions. 


la  palmera,  the  palm-tree. 
la  higuera,  the  fig-tree. 

el  limonero,  the  lemon-tree. 
el  membrillero,  the  quince. 
el  albaricoquero,  the  apricot. 


un  datil,  a  date. 
\  un  higo,  a  fig. 
\  una  breva,  an  early  fig. 

un  limon^  #  lemon. 

un  membrillo,  #  quince. 

un  albaricoque,  ##  apricot. 


REMARK.  —  Elfruto  (masc.)  is  the  fruit  on  the  tree,  or  in  a  figu- 
rative sense ;  la  fruta  (fern.)  is  the  fruit  gathered,  exposed  in  the 
market,  or  served  on  the  table.  On  the  other  hand,  la  rama  is  the 
bough  or  branch  attached  to  the  tree,  and  el  ramo,  when  plucked, 
as  also  in  a  metaphorical  sense. 

88.    Feminine  by  signification  are  :  — 

a.  All  nouns,  of  whatever  ending,  which  denote  fe- 
males, or  the  dignities,  offices,  professions,  and  pursuits 
which  may  be  ascribed  in  Spanish  countries  to  women  :  — 


la  emperatriz,  the  empress. 

la  reina,  the  queen. 

la  infanta,  the  princess  royal. 

la  vaca,  the  cow. 

la  gallina,  the  hen. 

la  costurera,  the  seamstress. 


la  estanquera,  the  tobacconist. 
la  patrona,  the  landlady. 
la    peinadora,    the    lady^s   hair- 
dresser. 

la  doncella,  the  lady's  maid. 
la  oficiala,  the  work-woman. 


Except:  el  duefio,  the  owner \  proprietor,  or  proprietress;  un 
dngel,  an  angel,  which  are  applicable  to  persons  of  either  sex. 

1  The  Latin  quercus  exists  only  in  the  family  name  Alburquerque ;  that  is, 
arbor  querci  (kerki),  the  ancestral  arms  being  an  oak  on  a  white  ground.  See 
Madoz  and  Nunez  de  Castro.  Encina  is  from  the  diminutive  oiilex,  —  ilicina, 
elcina,  encina.  The  ancient  family  name  was  written  Enzina,  Enzinas,  and 
Enfina,  etc.  Roble  is  from  robur  (robdre,  roble). 


36  Form  and  Inflection. 

b.    All  letters  of  the  alphabet  :  — 
la  b  (bd),  the  letter  b.  \  una  h  (ache),  an  h. 

89.   Masculines  by  ending  are  :  — 

a.   All  nouns,  of  whatever  signification,  when  they 
end  in  o  :  — 


el  libro,  the  book. 

el  reino,  the  kingdom. 

el  suelo,  the  ground,  floor. 


el  tintero,  the  inkstand. 

el  cerro,  the  hill. 

el  palacio,  the  palace. 


Except:  la  mano,  the  hand;  la  reo,  the  (female)  culprit. 

b.    Nouns  in  a  designating  males,  or   derived   from 
Latin  masculines :  — 


el  monarca,  the  monarch. 
el  Carlista,  the  Carlist. 
el  cometa,  the  comet. 


el  planeta,  the  planet. 

los  albaceas,  executors  (Arabic). 

el  dia,  the  day. 


Also,  el  mapa,  the  map. 

Likewise  foreign  words  in  general  ending  in  an  accented  d :  el 
sofa",  the  sofa;  el  mand,  (the)  manna;  el  albala,  the  royal  patent  or 
certificate. 

c.  Nouns  in  a  derived  from  Greek  and  Latin  neuters 
in  a  (genitive  -aro?,  -atis)y  or  such  as  follow  their  anal- 
ogy:— 


el  clima,  the  climate. 

el  drama,  the  drama. 

el  enigma,  the  enigma. 

el  idioma,1  the  language. 

el  lema,  the  motto, 

el  tema,  the  theme,  exercise. 


el  problema,  the  problem. 

el  poema,  the  poem. 

el  rduma,  the  cold. 

el  sistema,  the  system. 

el  telegrama,  the  telegram. 

el  programa,  the  program. 


1  Never  idiom  as  a  peculiarity  of  speech,  which  is  idiotismo  in  Spanish. 


The  Noun.  —  Gender. 


37 


90.   Feminines  by  ending  are :  — 

a.  All  nouns,  of  whatever  signification,  when  they 
end  in  a,  derived  from  Latin  feminines  of  the  first  de- 
clension, or  from  neuter  plurals.  The  latter  often  have, 
besides  the  singular  meaning,  a  collective  one  echoing 
their  plural  origin  :  — 


la  mesa,  the  table. 

la  tabla,  the  board,  plank. 

la  regla,  the  rule. 

la  casa,  the  house. 

la  silla,  the  chair. 

la  puerta,  the  door,  gate. 


la  hoja,1  the  leaf,  leaves. 

la  caza,  the  shooting,  game. 

la  lena,  the  firewood. 

la  vina,  the  vine,  vineyard. 

la  boda,  the  marriage,  nuptials. 

la  loza,  the  crockery. 


From  mensa,  tabula,  regiila,  casa,  sella,  porta ;  folia,  capta,  ligna, 
vinea,  vota,  lutea. 


b.  Nouns  terminated  in  dad,  tad,  tud,  ion,  umbre,  ie, 
which  are  derived  from  Latin  accusatives  feminine  in 
tatem,  tutem,  ionem,  inem,  iem:  — 


la  verdad,  the  truth. 

la  libertad,  (the)  liberty. 

la  virtud,  (the)  virtue. 

la  nation,  the  nation. 

la  muchedumbre,  the  throng. 


la  servidumbre,  the  servants  (col- 
lectively) . 

la  espe'cie,  the  species. 
la  serie,  the  series. 
la  superficie,  the  surface. 


From  veritatem,  libertatem,  virtutem,  nationem,  multitudinem, 
speciem,  etc. 

91.  Nouns  not  denoting  males  or  females,  and  those 
terminated  or  derived  otherwise  than  above  indicated, 
do  not  uniformly  show  the  gender,  in  which  case  it  is  to 

1  The  collective  sense  is  illustrated  in  1his  sentence :  esta  planta  lleva  mucha 
hoja,  this  plant  bears  much  leaf,  or  has  all  gone  to  leaves,  a  phraseology  very 
common  among  Castilian  farmers  and  peasants. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


be  learned  by  a  habit  of  associating  the  noun  with  an 
article l :  — 


el  arbol  (arbor em,  f.),  the.  tree. 
el  talle  (la  tattle),  the  waist. 


la  carcel  (career em,  m.),  the  jail ^ 
la  calle,  the  street, 


92.  Masculine  nouns  in  #  may  assume  the  feminine 
article  when  they  are  applicable  to  women  :  — 

a  Belgian. 

a  Carlist. 

an  artist. 

a  compatriot. 

an  athlete.  , 

a  native,  aboriginal. 

a.  On  the  other  hand,  a  few  feminines  in  a  now  gen- 
erally assume  the  masculine  article  when  they  denote 
male  persons  :  — 


un  Belga, 
un  Carlista, 

una  Belga, 
una  Carlista, 

un  artista, 

una  artista, 

un  compatriota, 
un  atleta, 
un  indigena, 

una  compatriota, 
una  atleta,  ! 
una  indigena, 

la  centinela, 
la  espfa, 
la  guardia, 
la  guia, 


el  centinela, 
el  espfa, 

el  guardia  marina, 
el  guia, 


the  sentinel, 
the  spy. 

the  midshipman, 
the  guide. 


Except :  la  recluta,  the  recruit ;  ••.  la  escolta,  the  escort. 

b.    Several  nouns  denoting  persons,  of  other  endings 
than  a,  have  a  common  form  for  both  genders  :  — 


el  or 
el  or 
el  or 
el  or 
el  or 
el  or 
el  or 
el  or 


la  complice, 
la  hereje, 
la  interprete, 
la  jdven, 
la  martir, 
la  reo, 
la  testigo, 
la  asistente, 


•the  accomplice. 

the  heretic. 

the  interpreter. 

the  youth  (young  man  or  woman) , 

the  martyr. 

the  criminal,  defendant. 

the  witness. 

the  sick- nurse. 


i  Better  with  the  indefinite  article,  since  the  definite  does  not  always  serve  as 
a  guide  to  gender.    See  8c. 


The  Noun.  —  Gender. 


39 


93.  Many  feminine  nouns  in  a,  denoting  things,  as- 
sume personal  significations,  and  then  may  belong  to 
either  gender,  but  are  preferably  masculine  :  — 


la  espada,  sword. 
la     atalaya,     watch- 
tower. 

la  trompeta,  trumpet. 
la  ayuda,  aid. 
la  mascara,  mask. 
la  calavera,  skull. 

una  ordenanza,  ordi- 
nance. 

la  cabeza,  head. 

la  guia,  guide,  guide- 
book. 

la  alhaja, /£2£/£/. 

la  guarda-ropa,  ward- 
robe. 


el  espada, 
el  atalaya, 

el  trompeta, 
el  ayuda,' 
el  or  la  mascara, 
el  calavera, 

un  ordenanza, 

el  cabeza  (seldom}, 
el  guia, 

el  alhaja, 

el  guarda-ropa, 


the  swordsman. 

the  warden  or  keeper 

of  a  watch-tower, 
the  trumpeter, 
the  aid  or  aide, 
the  masker, 
the  mad-cap,   harum 

scarum  fellow, 
an  orderly. 

the  head,  chief, 
the  guide  (man). 

the  "  gem  "  (irony).1 
the  master  of  the  w. 
(office). 


94.  Many  nouns  were  formerly  feminine  which  are 
now  masculine  in  ordinary  plain  prose  ;  preserving  the 
archaic  feminine,  however,  in  the  poetic,  sublime,  or 
affected  style,  and  in  certain1  traditional  phrases  :  — 


el  mar,  the  sea. 
el  puente,  bridge. 


allende  la  mar,  beyond  the  sea  (archaic) . 

la  puente  Segoviana,  the  aqueduct  at  Segovia. 


a.  Margen,  margin  of  a  book,  or  edge  of  a  stream, 
is  either  masculine  or  feminine,  without  difference  of 
meaning  :  — 

las  margenes  de  este  libro  han  de 
ser  muy  anchas, 


paseandome  por  el  ma'rgen  del 
rio, 


the  margins  of  this  book  are  to 

be  very  broad, 
walking  along  the  margin  ,of  the 

river. 


1  Generally  in  the  phrase :  es  buen  alhaja,  he's-  a  "pretty  "  fellow,  a  "  bright 
boy"  etc.,  meaning,  he  is  a  man  of  doubtful  reputation,  a  "  lark,"  a  hypocrite,  etc. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


So  el  or  la  dote,  the  dowry ;  but  las  dotes,  (intellectual  or  moral) 
endowments. 

b.  Arte  is  feminine  in  the  plural  in  all  senses.  In  the 
singular  it  is  feminine  with  some  adjectives  and  mascu- 
line with  others,  although  the  feminine  greatly  pre- 
dominates :  — 


las  bellas  artes,  the  fine  arts. 
el  arte  podtica  (81),  poetic  art, 
the  art  of  poetry. 


las  artes  mecdnicas,  the  mechani- 

ical  arts. 
el  arte  dramatico,  the  drama. 


95.   Some  nouns,  denoting  things,  have   a  different 
meaning  according  as  they  are  masculine  or  feminine  :  — 


el  cometa,  the  comet. 

el  crisma,  (the)  holy  oil. 

el  colera,  the  cholera. 

el  corte,  the  cut,  edge. 

el  canal,  the  canal  (or  for  irriga- 
tion) . 

el  capital,  capital  (money). 

el  moral,  mulberry-tree. 

el  frente,/rwjr/f  head. 

el  drden,  order  (eccles.,  polit., 
archit.). 

el  parte,  despatch,  message,  (tel- 
egram, etc.). 

el  pendiente,  ear-ring. 

el  pez,yfo#  (in  the  water). 


la  cometa,  the  kite  (child's  toy) . 
la  crisma,1  the  head  (vulgar) . 
la  colera,  the  rage. 
la  corte,  the  court,  metropolis. 
la  canal,  the  channel  (straits). 

la  capital,  the  capital  (city) . 
la  moral,  morals,  the  moral. 
la  frente,  the  forehead. 
la  drden,  order  (command,  order, 

e.g.,  of  St.  James,  etc.). 
la  parte,  the  part,  portion. 

la  pendiente,  slope,  declivity. 
la  pez,  pitch. 


96.  Compound  nouns  usually  assume  the  gender  of 
the  second  member  when  that  is  in  the  singular ;  but  if 
it  be  in  the  plural  the  whole  word  is  masculine,  which- 
ever be  the  gender  of  the  second  term  :  — 

1  Because  the  part  christened.  The  people  say :  te  rompo  la  crisma  (or  el 
bautismo),  r II  break  your  head  (chrism,  baptism). 


The  Noun.  —  Gender.  41 


la  guardaropa,  the  wardrobe. 
el  guar da-canton,1  guard-post. 
el  ferro-carril,  the  railway. 


el  cortaplumas,  the  pen-knife. 
el  portamonedas,  porte-monnaie . 
el  mondadientes,  the  tooth-pick. 


Except :  el  tranvia,2  the  tramway  (horse  railroad) . 

REMARK.  —  Of  course  if  the  word  indicates  a  male  person  or  his 
office  it  will  be  masculine  :  — 

el  guarda-aguja,  the  switch-tender,    el  guarda-ropa,  the  master  of  the 

wardrobe. 

Formation  of  the  Feminine  of  Personal  Nouns. 

97.  Masculine  nouns  indicating  persons,  their  employ- 
ments, creeds,  etc.,  may  be  made  feminine  at  will  by 
observing  the  following  rules  :  — 

a.    By  changing  final  o  into  a?\  — 


el  abuelo,  grandfather. 
el  hermano,  brother. 
el  muchacho,  boy*  lad. 
el  nifio,  child,  little  boy. 
el  axmgo,  friend. 


el  amo,  master. 

el  compafiero,  companion. 


la  abuela,  grandmother. 
la  hermana,  sister. 
la  muchacha,  girl. 
la  nifia,  child,  little  girl. 
la  2xri\%p.?  friend. 


el  ama  (81),  mistress. 
la  companera,  companion. 


Except:  el  diablo,  the  evil  one;  el  diacono,  the  deacon,  which 
make  in  the  feminine  la  diablesa,  the  she-devil ';  la  diaconisa,  the 
deaconess.  Reo  is  unchangeable :  el  reo,  la  reo,  the  defendant,  and 
el  dueno  means  the  owner,  male  or  female,  while  la  duena  signifies 


1 1  am  ignorant  of  the  technical  English  equivalent  of  guardacanton.  It  is 
a  stone  post  set  at  the  corner  or  edges  of  a  park  and  along  the  country  high- 
ways to  keep  carriages  in  the  road. 

2  First  introduced  into  Madrid  with  the  thing  itself  in  1871,  and  the  gender 
waa  the  object  of  considerable  discussion  in  the  journals.     It  is  now  universally 
given  as  masculine,  and  sometimes  spelled  tramvia. 

3  In  good  society,  among  ladies  only.     Gentlemen  (unless  intimate  friends) 
use  it  with  qualificatives,  or  prefer  conocida,  acquaintance.     Es  una  conocida 
mia,  she  is  a  friend  of  mine,  or  es  mi  buena  amiga;  es  muy  amiga  mia,  she  is  a 
good  friend  of  mine. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


the  duenna  in  all  its  associations.  But  dueno,  fern,  duena,  is  regu- 
lar in  the  sense  of  master,  mistress  of  one's  self;  as,  no  fui  duena 
de  mi  misma,  I  was  not  mistress  of  myself  ,  I  could  not  control  myself. 

b.    By  adding  a  to  the  masculine  endings  d,  /,  n,  r,  s, 
and  z :  — 


el  huesped,  guest,  boarder. 

el  Espafiol,  Spaniard. 

un  oficial,  officer,  journeyman. 

el  Aleman,  German. 

el  chiquitin,  little  one,  wee  thing. 

el  senor,  the  gentleman,  Mr. 

un  aguador,  water-carrier. 

el  marques,  marquis. 

el  France's,  Frenchman. 

un  Andaluz,  Andalusian. 

c.    A  few  in  dor  and  tot 
triz :  — 

el  actor,  the  actor. 

el  emperador,  the  emperor. 


la  huespeda,  the  guest. 

la  Espanola,  Spanish  woman. 

una  oficiala,  journeywoman . 

la  Alemana,  German  woman. 

la  chiquitina,  wee  thing. 

la  senora,  M*  lady,  Madam,  Mrs. 

una  aguadora,  water  girl. 

la  marquesa,  marchioness. 

la  Francesa,  French  woman. 

una  Andaluza,  Andalusian. 

change  those  endings  into 

la  actriz,  the  actress. 

la  emperatriz,  the  empress. 


d.    The  following  add  esa  to  the  stem  of  the  mascu-* 
line  :  — 

el  abad,  the  abbot. 
el  alcaid-e,1  the  warden. 
el  alcald-e,  the  mayor. 
el  baron,  the  baron. 
el  cond-e,  the  earl. 
el  duqu-e,  the  duke. 


la  abadesa,  the  abbess. 

la  alcaidesa,  the  warden's  wife. 

la  alcaidesa,  the  mayors  wife. 

la  baronesa,  the  baroness. 

la  condesa,  the  countess. 

la  duquesa,  the  duchess. 


e.    The  following  add  is  a  to  the  masculine  stem  :  — 


el  diacon-o,  the  deacon. 
el  poet-a,  the  poet. 
el  profet-a,  the  prophet. 
el  sacerdot-e,  the  priest. 


la  diaconisa,  the  deaconess. 
la  poetisa,  the  poetess. 
la  profetisa,  the  prophetess. 
la  sacerdotisa,  the  priestess. 


1  Formerly  an  alcdide  was  the  commander  of  a  fortress ;  such  a  personage  is 
now  a  general  or  comandante,  while  alcdide  has  descended  to  the  chief  of  a 
state  or  c\iy  prison.  The  turnkey  is  <?/  Haver o  ;  jailor,  carcelero. 


The  Noun.  —  Gender. 


43 


f.    Nouns  in  e  not  derived  from  Latin  present  partici- 
ples generally  change  that  ending  into  a  :  — 


el  sastre,  the  tailor. 
el  monje,  the  monk. 
el  elefante,  the  elephant. 


la  sastra,  the  tailoress. 

la  monja,  the  nun. 

la  elefanta,  the  elephant. 


REMARK.  —  Heroe,  hero,  makes  heroina,  heroine,  and  jabali,  wild 
boar,  makes  jabalina. 

g.  Nouns  in  ante,  ente,  iente  (yente),  formed  from,  or 
on  the  analogy  of,  the  Latin  present  participle,  should 
be  invariable ;  but  popular  usage  tends  more  and  more 
to  give  them  the  feminine  in  a :  — 


el  comediante, 
el  farsante, 
el  pariente, 
el  asistente, 

la  comediante,  or 
la  farsante, 
la  pariente, 
la  asistente, 

la  comedianta, 
la  farsanta, 
la  parienta, 
la  asistenta, 

the  actor,  actress, 
the  "  humbug." 
the  relative, 
the  sick-nurse. 

el  pretendiente, 
el  presidente, 
el  protestante, 

la  pretendiente, 
la  presidente, 
la  protestante, 

la  pretendienta, 
la  presidenta, 
la  protestanta, 

the  claimant, 
the  president, 
the  protestant. 

Exception :  la  infanta,  the  princess  royal,  never  la  infante. 

98.  Some  nouns  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  the 
feminine :  — 

don  (with  Christian  name),  Mr. 
el  principe,  the  prince. 
el  rey,  the  king. 
el  raton,  the  rat. 
el  gallo,  the  cock. 


dona  (with  Christian  name),  Mrs, 
la  princesa,  the  princess. 
la  reina,  the  queen. 
la  rata,  the  mouse. 
la  gallina,  the  hen. 


a.    Likewise  the  following  proper  names  :  — 


Carlos,  Charles. 
Enrique,  Henry. 
Felix,  Felix. 
Josd,  Joseph. 
Miguel,  Michael. 
Pablo,  Paul. 
Pedro,  Peter. 


Carlota,  Charlotte. 
Enriqueta,  Henrietta. 
Felisa,  Felicia. 
Josefa,  Josepha. 
Micaela,  Michaela. 
Paula,  Paula. 
Petra,  Petra. 


44 


Form  and  Inflection. 


99.  A  few  nouns  have  a  distinct  form  for  the  femi- 
nine :  — 


el  hombre,  the  man. 

el  padre,  the  father. 

el  marido,  the  husband. 

el  yerno,  the  son-in-law. 

el  caballero,  the  gentleman. 

el  toro,  el  buey,  the  bull,  the  ox. 

el  caballo,  the  horse. 

el  varon,1  male  (of  persons) . 

el  macho,  male  (of  animals). 


la  mujer,  the  woman. 

la  madre,  the  mother. 

la  esposa,  the  wife. 

la  nuera,  the  daughter-in-law. 

la  dama,  the  lady. 

la  vaca,  the  cow. 

la  ye'gua  (equd) ,  the  mare. 

la  hembra,  the  female  (persons) . 

la  hembra,  the  female  (animals). 


100.  The  names  of  some  animals  are  masculine  in 
form,  and  include  the  female ;  others  are  feminine  in 
form,  and  include  the  male.  To  distinguish  such,  the 
words  macho  (masculus)  and  hembra  (foemina)  are  used 
when  necessary :  — 


el  macho  de  la  perdfz, 
la  hembra  del  ruisenor, 


the  male  pheasant, 
the  female  nightingale. 


REMARK.  —  An  intolerable  construction  is  often  heard  among 
the  uneducated  ;  for  example  :  la  perdiz  macho,  el  ruisenor  hembra. 
In  the  predicate,  however,  we  would  say :  esta  perdiz  es  macho,  this 
pheasant  is  a  male ;  este  ruisenor  sera  hembra,  this  nightingale 
must  be  a  female. 


NUMBER. 


101.  Spanish  nouns  have  two  numbers,  the  singular 
and  the  plura1 :  — 


el  hombre,  the  man. 
la  mujer,  the  woman. 


los  hombres,  the  men. 
las  mujeres,  the  women. 


1  The  regular  derivative  form,  la  varona,  the  woman,  in  its  proper  sense,  is 
only  found  once  (in  Genesis  II.),  to  represent  the  Hebrew  Isha,  —  "called 
varona"  (isha,  woman),  "because  she  was  taken  out  of  varon"  (ish,  man). 


The  Noun.  —  Number. 


45 


Formation  of  the  Plural. 


102.  The  following  assume  s  :  — 

a.    All  unaccented  vowel  terminals,  except  y  :  — 


la  casa,  the  house. 
el  billete,  the  ticket. 
la  metrdpoli,  the  capital. 
el  amigo,  the  friend. 
el  espiritu,  the  spirit. 


las  casas,  the  houses. 
los  billetes,  the  tickets. 
las  metropolis,  the  capitals, 
los  amigos,  the  friends. 
los  espiritus,  the  spirits. 


b.    The  accented  vowel  terminal  /:  — 


lafe,  (the)  faith. 

el  pie,  the  foot. 

el  cafe,  the  coffee-house. 


las  fes,  the  certificates. 

los  pies,  the  feet. 

los  cafes,  the  coffee-houses. 


Except  the  letter  of  the  alphabet,  la  e,  las  ees. 

103.  The  following  assume  es  :  — 

a.    All    consonant    terminals,    converting    z    into    c 
(28  a):- 


el  huesped,  the  guest. 
la  verdad,  the  truth. 
el  reloj,1  the  watch. 
la  piel,  the  skin,  hide. 
el  varon,  the  man,  male. 
la  nation,  the  nation. 
el  dolor,  the  pain,  grief  . 
el  mes,  the  month. 
el  juez,  the  judge. 
la  vez,  the  time  (vicis). 


los  huespedes,  the  boarders. 

las  verdades,  the  truths. 

los  relojes,  the  watches. 

las  pieles,  the  skins,  hides. 

los  varones,  the  males. 

las  naciones,  the  nations. 

los  dolores,  the  pains,  sorrow, 

los  meses,  the  months. 

los  jueces,  the  judges. 

las  veces,  the  times  (vices) . 


REMARK.  —  El  lord,  an  English  lord,  makes  los  lores]  la  Camara 
de  los  lores,  the  House  of  Lords. 

1  From  horologium,  "  time  reckoner,"  is  now  often  written  relo  in  the  singu- 
lar, and  always  pronounced  so  in  Spain;  in  the  plural  it  is  pronounced  and 
written  relojes. 


46  Form  and  Inflection. 


6.  Terminals  in  y :  — 

el  rey,  the  king. 
la  ley,  the  law. 
el  buey,  the  ox. 


los  reyes,  the  kings. 
las  leyes,  the  laws. 
los  bueyes,  the  oxen. 


c.  Accented  vowel  terminals,  except  /:  — 


el  baja",  the  pasha. 
el  rubi,  the  ruby. 
el  jabali,  the  wild  boar. 
el  rondd,  the  rondeau. 
el  tisu,  the  tissue. 


los  bajaes,  the  pashas. 
los  rubies,  the  rubies. 
los  jabalies,  the  wild  boars. 
los  ronddes,  the  rondeaux. 
los  tisues,  the  tissues. 


Exceptions  in  d:  el  papa,  papa,  —  los  papas;  la  mama,  mam- 
ma 9  —  las  mamas  ;  el  sofa,  the  sofa,  —  los  sofa's. 

Except,  in  /:  Maravedt  (an  imaginary  coin,  in  which  accounts 
were  formerly  kept,  —  thirty-four  to  a  real  of  five  cents),  has  the 
three  plurals  :  los  maravedies,  maravedises,  and  maravedis,  of 
which  the  first  is  now  obsolete. 

Except,  in  6 :  el  landd,  the  landau,  —  los  landds ;  and  many 
others. 

Except,  in  u :  la  tribu,  the  tribe,  —  las  tribus;  but  this  word  is 
now  pronounced  tribu. 

REMARK.  —  Letters  of  the  alphabet  and  most  monosyllables  be- 
long to  this  rule  :  — 

la  i,  la  6,  la  u  ;  I       las  fes,  las  des,  las  lies, 

los  sies  y  los  noes,  I       the  ayes  and  noes. 

Better,  however,  los  que  dijeron  si,  those  who  said  "aye"  etc. 

104.  Invariable  are :  (a)  the  unaccented  endings  is 
and  es,  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable  ;  (6>)  patrony- 
mics in  s  and  z ;  (c)  most  pure  Latin  technical  or  con- 
ventional terms  :  — 


la  crisis,  the  crisis. 

el  parentesis,  the  parenthesis. 

eljueves,  Thursday. 


las  crisis,  the  crises. 

los  parentesis,  the  parentheses. 

los  jueves,  on  Thursdays. 


The  Noun.  —  Number. 


47 


el  mdrtes,  Tuesday. 
Floras  (proper  name) . 
Valdes  (proper  name). 
Fernandez  (proper  name). 
el  deficit,  the  deficit. 


los  martes,  on  Tuesdays. 
los  Fldres,  men  like  Flores. 
los  Valdes,  men  like  Valdes. 
los  Ferndndez,  the  Fernandez. 
los  deficit,  the  deficits. 


105.  Compound  words,  when  not  already  plural  in 
form,  usually  attach  the  plural  sign  to  the  last  member 
only,  unless  the  first  is  an  adjective  or  apparently 
such :  — 

el  padrenuestro,  the  pater  noster.     los  padrenuestros,  pater  nosters. 


el  tranvia,  the  tramway. 
el  guardacanton,  the  gitard-post. 
el  ferro-carril,  the  railway. 
el  cortaplumas,  the  pen-knife. 
el  mundadientes,  the  tooth-pick. 


los  tranvias,  tramways. 
los  guardacantones,  guard-posts. 
los  ferro-carriles,  railways. 
los  cortaplumas,  pen-knives, 
los  mundadientes,  tooth-picks. 


but 


gentilhombre,  (court)  gentleman. 
ricohombre,1  crown  counsellor. 


gentileshombres,  gentlemen. 
ricoshombres,  coimsellors. 


REMARK.  —  Hidalgo,  a  nobleman  of  the  lowest  grade,  a  gentle- 
man, makes,  properly,  in  the  plural,  los  hidalgos,  and,  by  a  mista- 
ken tradition,  hijodalgo,  hijosdalgo ?  Feligres,  parishioner,  from 
filius  ecclesiae,  makes,  regularly,  feligreses. 


1  Originally  ricome  ;  that  is,  ric'ome,  man  of  the  realm,  not  rich  man,  which 
is  hombre  rico.  'The  term  is  in  part  adoption  and  in  part  a  translation  of  the 
Gothic  rik-man,  realm-man,  Reichsmann  in  modern  German. 

-  As  if  from  fijo  de  algo,  son  of  somebody,  or,  rather,  son  of  something,  con- 
tracted \vfidalgo.  Hidalgo  is  the  word  Italicus  (like  galgo  from  gallicus,  sirgo 
from  sericus,  etc.),  one  having  the  jus  italicum  or  Roman  citizenship,  with  an 
aspirate  'i,  like  huevo  from  ovum.  This  early  aspiration  of  the  initial  seems 
to  have  suggested  the  popular  make-shift  fiio  dalgo  of  the  middle  age,  to  ex- 
plain the  forgotten  italico  or  itaVco.  This  is  proved  by  the  derivatives :  hidal- 
go, a,  adjective,  noble;  as,  una  accion  hidalga,  a  noble  act;  hidalguia,  noun; 
as,  la  hidalguia  castellana,  Spanish  heroism,  or,  rather,  all  that  is  most  noble 
in  the  Castilian  character. 


48 


Form  and  Inflection. 


106.  Certain  masculine  plurals,  indicative  of  rank  and 
kindred,  aside  from  their  natural  and  obvious  meaning, 
include  the  husband  and  wife,  and  the  two  sexes  of 
other  relatives :  — 


los  reyes,  the  kings,  sovereigns ; 

los  principes,  the  princes ; 

los  infantes,  the  princes  royal ; 

los  duques,  the  dukes ; 

los  presidentes,  the  presidents ; 

los  padres,  the  fathers,  parents; 

losesposos,    ) 

losconyugesj  ^e  married  couple; 

los  hermanos,  the  brothers  ; 

los  tios,  the  uncles; 

los  hijos,  the  sons,  children ; 

los  nifios,  the  children  ; 

los    abuelos,   the  grandfathers, 

grandparents ; 
los  am  os,  the  masters ; 
los  senores,  the  gentlemen ; 


the  king  and  queen, 
the  prince  and  princess, 
the  infante  and  infanta, 
the  duke  and  duchess, 
the  president  and  his  lady. 

the  father  and  mother, 
the  husband  and  wife. 

the  brother  and  sister. 

the  uncle  and  aunt. 

the  son  and  daughter  (of  any  age) . 

the  boy  and  girl. 

the  grandfather  and  grandmother. 

the  master  and  mistress, 
the  gentleman  and  lady. 


Example. 

Ayer  salieron  los  reyes  d  paseo,  yesterday  the  king  and  queen  drove 
out;  los  reyes  catolicos,  the  Catholic  king  and  queen,  or,  the 
Catholic  sovereigns  (Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  reigned  A.  D. 
1474-1504,  1516). 

REMARK.  —  Most  of  these  may  also  include  several  of  both 
sexes :  the  princes  and  princesses  royal,  the  sons  and  daughters,  the 
boys  and  girls,  the  brothers  and  sisters  ;  like  the  German  Gebruder, 
Geschwister,  etc.  On  the  other  hand,  el  matrimonio  means  the 
husband  and  wife  (das  Ehepaar) ,  the  man  and  his  wife ;  una  cama 
de  matrimonio,  a  double  bed,  a  bed  for  two.  So,  la  par ej a  properly 
signifies  two  policemen  (who  usually  go  in  pairs  in  Spain) .  Vaya 
usted  a"  llamar  una  pareja,  go  and  call  the  police  (a  brace  of  police- 
men). 


The  Noun.  —  Inflection. 


49 


INFLECTION. 


107.  Spanish  nouns  have  no  other  inflectional  ending 
than  the  plural  sign.1  They  may,  however,  be  declined 
by  the  aid- of  the  case-prepositions  de  and  a,  either  with- 
out the  article  or  with  it :  — 


el  amigo  del  rey, 
a  la  puerta  del  palacio, 
las  calles  de  Madrid, 
Maria  busca  a  Trie's, 
aficionado  a  los  libros, 
abismado  en  lectura, 
un  amigo  del  juez, 


the  king's  friend, 
at  the  palace  door, 
the  streets  of  Madrid. 
Mary  seeks  Agnes, 
fond  of  books, 
absorbed  in  reading. 
a  friend  of  the  judge. 


108.    Inflection  without  the  Article. 


N. 

Carlos, 

Charles. 

Ines, 

Agnes. 

G. 

de  Carlos, 

of  Charles,  Charles'. 

de  Ines, 

of  Agnes,  Agnes' 

D. 

a  Carlos, 

to  Charles. 

a  Ines, 

to  Agnes. 

A. 

a  Carlos  (76), 

Charles. 

a  Ines  (76), 

Agnes. 

N. 

libro, 

book. 

libros, 

books. 

G. 

de  libro, 

of  book. 

de  libros, 

of  books. 

D. 

a  libro, 

to  book. 

a  libros, 

to  books. 

A. 

libro, 

book. 

libros, 

books. 

el  libro  de  Carlos, 

la  pluma  de  Ines, 

Juan  ve  a"  Maria, 

Luis  quiere  mucho  a  Pedro, 

da  un  libro  a  Antonio, 


Charleses    book,    the    book    of 

Charles. 
Agnes's  pen. 
John  sees  Mary. 
Lewis  is  very  fond  of  Peter. 
give  a  book  to  Antonio. 


1  Save  in  a  few  meagre  cases,  like  Cdrlos,  from  Carolus ;  Dios,  from  Deus ; 
querque  in  Alburquerque,  from  arbor  querci  (quercus);  duende,  wizard,  elf% 
from  Deus  Endi,  the  Iberian  god  Endo  ;  Fernandez,  from  Fredinandis,  etc. 


Form  arid  Inflection. 


este  juguete  es  propio  de  nifios, 

una  hoja  de  libro, 

no  habla  de  libros, 

no  quiero  libro  algtmo, 

la  puerta  tiene  goznes, 

la  ciudad  esta  circuida  de  muros, 


this  toy  is  for  children. 

a  book-leaf,  the  leaf  of  a  book. 

he  is  not  speaking  of  books. 

I  do  not  want  any  book  at  all. 

the  door  has  hinges. 

the  town  is  surrounded  by  walls. 


109.    Inflection  with  the  Definite   Article. 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

£ 

N. 

el  hombre, 

the  man. 

la  mujer, 

the  woman. 

$ 

G. 

del  hombre, 

the  man's. 

de  la  mujer, 

the  woman's. 

5o 

D. 

al  hombre, 

to  the  man. 

a  la  mujer, 

to  the  woman. 

02 

A. 

al  hombre  (76), 

the  man. 

a  la  mujer  (7  6), 

the  woman. 

N. 

los  hombres, 

the  men. 

las  mujeres, 

the  women. 

1 

G. 

de  los  hombres, 

the  men's. 

de  las  mujeres, 

the  women's. 

P 

s 

D. 

a  los  hombres, 

to  the  men. 

a  las  mujeres, 

to  the  women. 

A. 

a  los  hombres, 

the  men. 

a  las  mujeres, 

the  women. 

£ 

N. 

el  libro, 

the  book. 

la  pluma, 

the  pen. 

• 

G. 

del  libro, 

of  the  book. 

de  la  pluma, 

of  the  pen. 

M 

| 

D. 

al  libro, 

to  the  book. 

a  la  pluma, 

to  the  pen. 

OQ 

A. 

el  libro, 

the  book. 

la  pluma, 

the  pen. 

N. 

los  libros, 

the  books. 

las  plumas, 

the  pens. 

2 

G. 

de  los  libros, 

of  the  books. 

de  las  plumas, 

of  the  pens. 

S 

D. 

a  los  libros, 

to  the  books. 

a  las  plumas, 

to  the  pens. 

A. 

los  libros. 

the  books. 

las  plumas, 

the  pens. 

el  palacio  de  los  reyes, 

la  prudencia  de  la  mujer, 
las  habitaciones  de  la  casa, 
las  calles  de  la  ciudad, 
sale  de  la  habitacion, 
da  el  regalo  £  los  ninos, 


the  king's  and  queen's  palace 
(106). 

the  woman's  prudence. 

the  rooms  of  (in)  the  house. 

the  streets  of  the  town. 

he  goes  out  of  the  room. 

he  hands  the  present  to  the  chil- 
dren. 


The  Adjective. 

110.     Inflection  with  the  Indefinite  Article. 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

N. 

un  hombre, 

a  man. 

una  mujer, 

a  woman. 

G. 

de  un  hombre, 

a  man's. 

de  una  mujer, 

a  woman's. 

D. 

a  un  hombre, 

to  a  man. 

a  una  mujer, 

to  a  woman. 

A. 

un  hombre, 

a  man. 

una  mujer, 

a  woman. 

N. 

un  libro, 

a  book. 

una  pluma, 

a  pen. 

G. 

de  un  libro, 

of  a  book. 

de  una  pluma, 

of  a  pen. 

D. 

a  un  libro, 

to  a  book. 

a  una  pluma, 

to  a  pen. 

A. 

un  libro, 

a  book. 

una  pluma, 

a  pen. 

111.    Inflection  of  Neuter  L,o  with  Adjectives. 


Positive. 

Superlative. 

N. 

lo  bueno, 

the  good. 

lo  mejor, 

the  best. 

G. 

de  lo  bueno, 

of  the  good. 

de  lo  mejor, 

of  the  best. 

D. 

a  lo  bueno, 

to  the  good. 

a  lo  mejor, 

to  the  best. 

A. 

lo  bueno, 

the  good. 

lo  mejor, 

the  best. 

veo  un  hombre  y  una  mujer, 
busco  al  criado  de  un  amigo, 
el  vestido  de  una  senora, 
un  panuelo  de  caballero, 
aqui  tiene  usted  un  servidor, 
lo  peor  es  que  no  lo  sabe, 

nos  saca  de  lo  bueno,  para  caer 
en  lo  malo, 


I  see  a  man  and  a  woman. 

I  am  seeking  a  friend's  servant. 

a  lady's  dress. 

a  gentleman's  handkerchief. 

a  servant  at  your  disposal. 

the  worst  (of  it)  is  he  does  not 

know  it. 
he  draws  us  away  from  good,  to 

bring  us  into  evil. 


The  Adjective. 

112.   Adjectives  have  two  numbers  and  two  genders, 
besides  the  absolute  form  with  lo:  — 


Form  and  Inflection. 


un  libro  nuevo,  a  new  book. 
los  hombres  sabios,  wise  men. 
lo  malo,  what  is  evil,  the  evil. 


leche  fresca,  fres/i  milk. 

frutas  ricas,  luscious  fruit '. 

lo  ancho,  what  is  wide,  the  width. 


113.  Adjectives,  whether  attributive  or  predicate, 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  they 
qualify :  — 


un  h ombre  robusto, 
una  linda  casa, 
senoras  caritativas, 
estas  nifias  son  guapas, 


a  stout,  healthy  man. 

a  pretty  house. 

benevolent  ladies. 

these  young  girls  are  pretty. 


a.  With  lo,  the  adjective  varies  anomalously  to  suit 
the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun,  when  the  adjec- 
tive is  followed  by  que,  that,  with  the  verb  to  be,  or  its 
equivalents.  The  adjective  must  then  be  rendered  by 
a  substantive :  — 


lo  sabios  que  son  estos  consejos, 
lo  bonita  que  es  la  iglesia, 


the  wisdom  of  these  counsels  (the 

wise  that  are  these  counsels), 
the  beauty  of  the  church. 


Formation  of   the  Plural. 


114.  Adjectives  form  their  plural  in  either  gender  by 
adding  s  to  unaccented  vowel-terminals,  and  es  to  con- 
sonant and  accented  vowel-endings,  always  changing 
z  to  c  before  es :  — 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Masc. 

Fein. 

fresco, 
espafiol, 
fell 

fresca, 
espaflola, 
z, 

frescos, 
esparioles, 
felic 

frescas, 
espafiolas, 
es, 

fresh,  cool. 
Spanish, 
happy. 

comun, 

comunes, 

common. 

baladi, 

baladies, 

of  no  account. 

The  Adjective. 


53 


Formation  of  the  Feminine. 

115.  The  feminine  of  adjectives  is,  in  general,  formed 
by  changing  final  o  into  a,  or  by  adding  a  to  certain 
consonant  terminations.  Many  adjectives  have  but 
one  ending  for  both  genders. 

The  variation  of  adjectives  (72)  may  be  reduced  to 
two  general  classes.  The  first  class  embraces  common 
and  proper  adjectives  of  two  terminations  in  each  num- 
ber, one  for  each  gender ;  the  second  embraces  com- 
mon and  proper  adjectives  of  one  termination  for  both 
genders. 

REMARK.  —  Proper  adjectives  are  those  which  are  derived  from 
the  names  of  geographical  divisions,  countries,  provinces,  places, 
and  persons. 

116.    First  Class.  —  Two  Terminations. 


End- 

SINGULAR. 

PL.UKAL,. 

ings. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

O 

bianco, 

blanca, 

blancos, 

blancas, 

white. 

— 

gaditano, 

gaditana, 

gaditanos, 

gaditanas, 

of  Cadiz. 

an 

holgazan, 

holgazana, 

holgazanes, 

holgazanas, 

lazy. 

— 

ale  man, 

alemana, 

alemanes, 

alemanas, 

German. 

ol 

espafiol, 

espafiola, 

espafioles, 

espafiolas, 

Spanish. 

on 

burlon, 

burlona, 

burlones, 

burlonas, 

roguish. 

or 

traidor, 

traidora, 

traidores, 

traidoras, 

treacherous. 

uz 

andaluz, 

andaluza, 

andaluces, 

andaluzas, 

Andalusian. 

una  rosa  blanca,  a  white  rose. 
cerveza  alemana,  German  beer. 
ojos  burlones,  roguish  eyes. 
la  sal  andaluza,  Andalusian  wit 
and  humor. 


las  sefioras  gaditanas,  ladies  of 

Cadiz. 

una  ley  espafiola,  a  Spanish  law. 
miradas    traidoras,    treacherous 

glances. 


54  Form  and  Inflection. 

117.   To  this  class  belong  also  :  — 

a.    Diminutives    in    ete   and    augmentatives    in    ote, 
which  change  the  final  e  into  a :  — 


regordete,      regordeta, 
grandote,       grandota, 


regordetes ,     regordetas , 
grandotes,       grandotas, 


chubby, 
biggish. 


All  others  in  e  belong  to  the  second  class ;  that  is, 
they  are  unchangeable  for  gender. 

b.    Diminutives  and  proper  adjectives  in  in:  — 


chiquitin,      chiquitina, 
mallorquin,  mallorquina, 


chiquitines,     chiquitinas, 
mallorquines,  mallorquinas, 


of  Majorca 


All  others  in  in  belong  to  the  second  class. 


c.    Proper  adjectives  in  /s  :  — 


francos,       francesa, 
ingles,         inglesa, 
leone's,         leonesa, 
montane's,'  montanesa, 


franceses,      francesas, 
ingleses,        inglesas, 
leoneses,        leonesas, 
montaneses,  montafiesas, 


French. 

English. 

of  Leon  (Spain) 

highland,    Astu- 


Common  adjectives  in  es  belong  to  the  second  class. 

118.   A  few  adjectives  in  tor  may  also  change  that 
ending  into  triz-trices  for  the  feminine  :  — 


fuerza  motora  or  motriz, 
causas  motoras  or  motrices, 


motive  power, 
impelling  causes. 


REMARK.  —  For  comparatives  in  or  and  ior  (yor),  see  120,  b. 


1  Montan6s,  of  or  belonging  to  the  hill  country  about  Santander,  Spain,  which 
district  is  called  La  Montana  (not  la  wontana),  the  Mountain  ;  and  hence  the 
adjective  has  the  variation  of  proper  adjectives  in  es. 


The  Adjective. 


55 


119.    Second  Class.  —  One  Termination. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

End- 

ings. 

Masc.  and  Fein. 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

a 

agricola,  belga, 

agricolas,  belgas, 

agricultural,  Belgian. 

e 

grande,  ateniense, 

grandes,  atenienses, 

great,  Athenian. 

i 

baladi,  marroqui, 

baladies,  marroquies, 

vile,  Morocco. 

al,  el 

nacional,  fiel, 

nacionales,  fieles, 

national,  faithful. 

11,  ul 

facil,  azul, 

faciles,  azules, 

easy,  blue. 

en,  in 

joven,  ruin,1 

jovenes,  ruines, 

young  ;   low,  mean. 

un,  ar 

comun,  familiar, 

comunes,  familiares, 

common,  familiar. 

az,  ez 

capaz,  soez, 

capaces,  soeces, 

capable,  low. 

iz,  oz 

feliz,  atroz, 

felices,  atroces, 

happy,  shocking. 

un  pueblo  agricola,  an  agricultu- 
ral people. 

la  cultura  ateniense,  Athenian 
culture. 

una  cinta  azul,  a  blue  ribbon. 

la  vida  comun,  common  life. 

el  gobierno  persa,  the  Persian 
government. 


una  casa  grande,  a  large  hotise. 

las  fiestas  nacionales,  the  nation- 
al holidays. 

las  muchachas  jovenes,  young 
girls. 

una  muerte  feliz,  a  happy  death. 

los  pueblos  belgas,  the  Belgian 
towns. 


120.   To  this  class  belong  also  :  — 
a.    All  common  adjectives  in  e's :  — 
corte's,  pi.  corteses,  polite.  \  montes,  pi.  monteses,  mountain-. 


una  advertencia  cortes, 
palabras  corteses, 
puercos  monteses,2 


a  courteous  remark. 

polite  language. 

wild  (or  mountain)  boars. 


1  Latin,  Latin,  is  a  noun ;   latino,  latina,  an  adjective :  saber  el  Latin,  to 
know  Latin;  un  libro  latino,  a  Latin  book;  la  literatura  latina,  Latin  literature. 

2  Jab  all  also  means  wild  boar.     It  is  the  Arabic  adjective  from  djebal, 
mountain ;  therefore  puerco  montes  is  the  Castilian  synonym  of  jabali.    So, 
Arab,  alfayate,  Cast,  sastre,  tailor ;  Arab,  alarife,  Cast,  arquitecto,  architect', 
Arab,  albeitar,  Cast.  veterina.no,  farrier,  etc.,  etc. 


56  Form  and  Inflection. 

ba    All  comparatives  in  or,  ior  {yor) :  — 

mejor,  pi.  mejores,  better.  I  interior,  pi.  interiores,  interior. 

peor,  pi.  peores,  worse.  \  superior,  pi.  superiores,  superior 

c.    All  adjectives  in  istay  indicating  social,  political, 
moral,  and  scientific  affiliations :  — 


un  principio  socialista, 

una  idea  oscurantista, 

el  partido  carlista, 

los  prohombres  progresistas, 


a  socialistic  principle, 
an  old-fogy  notion, 
the  Carlist  party, 
the  advanced  leaders 


(leaders  of  the  late  Progresista  or  advance  party,  1836-1871). 
d.   All  adjectives  in  e  (except  117,  a):  — 


una  almendra  dulce, 
una  herida  grave, 
una  tiple  eminente, 
graves  inconvenientes, 


a  sweet  almond. 

a  serious  wound. 

a  distinguished  soprano-singer. 

serious  objections. 


e.  The  ending  -ense  is  the  learned  or  modern  journal- 
istic and  literary  form  of  proper  adjectives,  against  the 
popular  ones  in  o  and  &  (ensis);  thus,  matritense  and 
madrileno,  of  Madrid  ;  tudense  and  tudes,  of  Tuy  ; 
conquense  and  conques,  of  Cuenca  ;  abulense  and  aviles, 
ofAvila;  escurialense  and  escorialeno,  of  the  Escorial. 
A  few,  however,  possess  no  other  form  than  the  learn- 
ed or  classical  one  :  as,  ateniense,  Athenian  ;  parisiense 
(popular,  parisi^n),  of  Paris,  Parisian. 

121.  All  proper  adjectives,  then,  are  variable  in  gen- 
der, except  those  in  a,  e,  and  /:  — 


talan,  a,  Catalonian. 
,  Castilian. 


Valladolid. 


asturiano,  a,  Asturian. 


valenciano,  a,  Valencian. 
extremeno,  a,  of  Extremadura^ 
europe'o,  a,  European. 
aragone's,  a,  Aragonese 


The  Adjective. 


57 


ingles,  a,  English. 
mahones,  a,  of  Puerto  Mahon. 
gallego,  a,  Galician. 
manchego,  a,  of  La  Mancha. 
griego,  a,  Greek,  Grecian. 
alicantino,  a,  of  Alicante. 
bilbamo,  a,  of  Bilbao. 
fndio,  a,  Indian. 


judfo,  a,  Jewish. 
britanico,  a,  British. 
alcalamo,  a,    ^  #/"  Alcald  de  He- 
complutense,  \      ndres. 
celta,  Celtic. 
arabe,  Arabian. 
marroqui,  of  Morrocco. 
berberi,  of  Barbary. 


122.  Any  adjective  may  be  employed  as  a  substan- 
tive in  either  gender  or  number,  assuming  in  that  case 
all  the  laws  that  govern  the  noun  :  — 


el  Espanol,  the  Spaniard. 
el  sabio,  the  wise  man. 


los  Espanoles,  Spaniards. 
los  fieles,  the  faithful. 


a.  On  the  other  hand,  nouns  are  occasionally  associ- 
ated as  adjectives  with  other  nouns,  thus  forming  com- 
pound expressions  as  in  the  Teutonic  languages  :  — 


la  tierra  virgen,  virgin  soil. 
la  madre  patria,  mother  country. 
la  escuela-modelo,  model  school. 
el  cura  parroco,  the  parish  priest. 


una  carta-prdlogo,  an  epistolary 

preface. 
una  carta-puebla,  local  privilege 

(law) . 


Apocopation. 

123.  Eight  adjectives  lose  their  final  o  when  they 
stand  as  attributes  immediately  before  a  noun  in  the 
masculine  singular :  — 

bueno,  good.  tercero,1  third. 

malo,  bad,  poor  (ofjhings).  uno,  one. 

postrero,  latter,  last.  alguno,  some,  any  (neg.  no). 

primero,yfrj/.  ninguno  (necunus),2  no,  not  any ', 

none. 


1  Tercero  remains  unabridged  in  the  formula  of  the  Creed,  "  el  tercero  dia," 
and,  in  general,  in  the  sacred  style. 

2  The  n  is  inserted,  as  in  ceme^terio,  cemetery. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


buen  tiempo,  good  weather. 
mal  exito,  ill-success. 
el  postrer  duelo,  the  last  pang. 
el  primer  tomo,  the  first  volume. 


el  tercer  dia,  the  third  day. 
un  soldado,  one  soldier. 
algun  motive,  some  caiise. 
ningun  libro,  no  book. 


but 


<;  tiene  usted  un  buen  vecino  ? 

tengo  uno  muy  bueno, 

un  hombre  malo  y  perverse, 

el  afio  primero  y  ultimo, 

el  libro  tercero  del  tomo  quinto, 

uno  y  otro  dia, 

no  hay  remedio  alguno, 

ninguno  de  los  dos, 

el  bueno  de  mi  amigo, 

alguno  que  otro  dia, 


have  you  a  good  neighbor  ? 

I  have  a  very  good  one. 

a  bad,  vicious  man. 

the  first  and  last  year. 

book  third  of  volume  fifth. 

both  days  (one  and  the  other  day) , 

there  is  no  help  for  it  at  all. 

neither  of  the  two. 

my  good  friend  (idiom). 

one  day  or  another  (idiom). 


a.  In  the  language  of  common  life  this  law  is  fre- 
quently extended  to  the  feminine  singular,  especially 
before  a  and  ha:  — 


buen  alhaja,  fine  jewel,  pretty 

fellow  (in  irony1), 
algun  ave,  some  bird. 


tin  alma,  one  soul. 

en  mal  hora,  inopportunely. 

de  primer  agua,yfr\$-/  water  (rate). 


b.  The  numeral  adjective  uno,  one,  when  associated 
or  combined  with  other  numbers,  is  contracted  before 
nouns  of  either  number  or  gender  which  it  serves  to 
multiply :  — 

treinta  y  un  dias,  thirty-one  days.  \  veintiun  casas,  twenty-one  hoiises. 

124.  The  adjective  grande,  great,  in  the  sense  of 
eminence,  loses  its  final  syllable  de  before  a  singular 
noun  beginning  with  a  consonant  not  h :  — 


1  Of  course,  in  this  secondary  sense,  alhaja  is  masculine,  according  to  93. 


The  Adjective. 


59 


una  gran  casa,  a  great  family . 
un  gran  peligro,  a  great  peril. 


un  gran  dia,1  a  great  occasion. 
el  Gran  Capitan,2  the  Great  Cap- 
tain. 


but 


un  grande  amigo,  a  great  friend 
(intimate) . 


un  grande  hombre,  a  great  man 
(distinguished) . 


una  grande  iglesia,  a  great  {famous)  church. 

a.  The  full  form  is,  however,  used,  even  before  con- 
sonants, when  grande  has  an  intensive  or  emphatic  sig- 
nification. In  this  sense  it  was  formerly  much  more 
common  than  at  present  :  — 


tan  grand 


,  so  great  a  saint.  \  el  grande  dano,  the  great  harm? 


b.    When  grande  refers  to  dimensions,   or  order,   it 
regularly  stands  after  the  noun  it  qualifies  :  — 


una  casa  grande,  a  large  house. 
el  premio  grande,  the  first  prize. 


un  hombre  grande,  a  large  man. 
un  caballo  grande,  a  large  horse. 


REMARK.  —  In  the  sense  of  tallness,  grande  is  now  rather  re- 
placed by  alto,  alto  de  cuerpo,  alto  de  estatura ;  or  by  buen  mozo 
(fern,  buena  moza),  applied  to  any  age,  to  mean  a  fine,  tall  person, 
and  a  fine-looking  person,  with  reference  to  form  and  size. 

125.  Cualquiera,  //.  cualesquiera,  whatever,  any  — 
you  please,  usually,  but  not  uniformly,  loses  the  final  a 
before  a  noun  of  either  gender  or  number :  — 


1  When  Isla  wrote  "  Dia  grande  de  Navarra,"  he  meant,  it  is  true,  a  great 
civic  occasion,  but  with  the  humorous  idea  of  dimensions,  —  a  big  day,  a  high 
day. 

2  Gonzalo  de  Cordova,  so  called  for  his  conquest  of  Naples  and  Sicily. 

3  From  Fray  Luis  de  Granada :    Sermon  de  las  Caydas  Publicas,  Lisbon, 
1588 ;  Madrid,  1589 ;  and  Antwerp,  1590 ;  8vo.    The  modern  editions  all  have 
in  these  passages  gran  santo,  gran  dano ;  for  no  Spanish  author  has  been  so 
corrected  and  spoiled  in  text  by  the  Inquisition  as  the  Friar  Lewis. 


6o 


Form  and  Inflection. 


cualquier  or  cualquiera  libro, 
cualquier  or  cualquiera  cosa, 
cualesquier  or  cualesquiera  moti- 
ves, 


any  book  (whatever), 
any  thing  (whatever) . 
any  causes  (whatever). 


but  always 


cualquiera  de  los  libros, 
un  libro  cualquiera, 
cualesquiera  que  sean  los  moti- 
vos, 


any  of  the  books, 
any  book  you  please, 
whatever  be  the  causes  or  mo- 
tives. 


126.  Ciento,  one  hundred  (never  un  ciento),  loses  its 
final  syllable  to  when  it  stands  before  the  word  it  multi- 
plies, whichever  be  the  gender  :  — 

cien  soldados,  cien  almas, 
cien  mil  pesos,  cien  millones, 


one  hundred  soldiers,  souls. 
100,000  dollars,  100,000,000. 


but 


ciento  veinte, 
ciento  y  diez, 
ciento  contra  uno, 
mil  y  ciento, 


one  hundred  (and)  twenty, 
one  hundred  and  ten. 
one  hundred  against  one. 
one  thousand  (and)  one  hundred. 


127.  The  word  santo,  saint,  loses  its  final  syllable  to 
only  before  the  names  of  the  calendar  saints,  arch- 
angels, and  Old-Testament  worthies  :  — 


San  Pedro  (S.  Pedro),  St.  Peter. 
San    Miguel    (S.    Miguel),   St. 

Michael. 
San    Daniel    (S.    Daniel),    St. 

Daniel. 


San  Juan  (S.  Juan),  St.  John. 
San  Pablo,  St.  Paul. 
San  Agustin,  St.  Augustine. 
San  Gabriel,  St.  Gabriel. 
San  Josue%  St.  Joshua. 


Except:  Santo  Toma's  or  Tomd  (S.  Toma's),  St.  Thomas-, 
Santo  Domingo  (S.  Domingo),  St.  Dominic ;  Santo  Toribio,  St. 
Toribius ;  and  Santo  Job,  St.  Job.  St.  Thomas,  as  the  name  of 
one  of  the  West-India  islands,  is  now  accented  and  written  San 
Tdmas  and  San  Thdmas,  in  conformity  with  foreign  usage. 


The  Adjective.  6 1 

a.    The  fern,  santa  remains  always  unabridged  :  — 


Santa  Maria,  St.  Mary. 
Santa  Isabel,  St.  Elizabeth. 
Santa  Barbara,  St.  Barbara. 


Santa  Ines,  St.  Agnes. 
Santa  Agueda,  St.  Agatha. 
Santa  Rita,1  St.  Margaret. 


b.    The  adjective  santo,  a,  holy,   is  never  contract- 
ed :— 

el  santo  angel,  the  holy  angel.        \      el  santo  varon,  that  saintly  man. 
una  santa  mujer,  a  saintly  woman. 

REMARK.  —  In  giving  a  series  of  two  or  more  saints'  names,  it  is 
in  better  taste  to  prefix  the  title  to  each  singly :  — 

San  Juan  y  San  Jose,  St.  John  and  St.  Joseph,  not  los  Santos 
Juan  y  Jose  (los  SS.  Juan  y  Jose),  Sts.  John  and  Joseph. 


POSITION    OF    THE    ADJECTIVE. 

128.  The  attributive  adjective,  as  a  rule,  stands  after 
the  noun  qualified,  in  ordinary  unemphatic  language ; 
notwithstanding,  all  elegant  writers,  poets,  and  orators, 
place  it  according  to  their  own  views  of  taste,  harmony, 
and  effect :  — 


un  cuento  divertido, 
un  asunto  grave, 
una  noticia  desgarradora, 
la  lengua  castellana, 
el  continente  europeo, 
el  gobierno  espafiol, 
una  accion  desalmada, 


an  entertaining  story, 
a  serious  matter, 
heart-rending  intelligence, 
the  Castilian  language, 
the  European  continent, 
the  Spanish  government, 
a  heartless  action. 


1  This  local  saint  is  called  in  Spain,  "  la  abogada  de  los  imposibles,"  the 
patroness  of  impossibilities.  St.  Barbara  is  the  advocate  of  Spanish  gunpowder 
and  coast  defenses,  while  the  chulo,  the  "b'hoy"  (puerum,  plulo,  chulo),  swears 
vengeance  "  por  via  'e  San  Andre "  (63,  66) ,  by  the  life  of  St.  Andrew,  as  he 
rushes  upon  his  adversary  with  the  historic  navaja  (navalia)  or  "Jack's  "  knife. 


62 


Form  and  Inflection. 


129.  The  following,  therefore,  are  more  especially 
found  after  the  substantive  limited  by  them,  unless  the 
language  is  poetic  or  expansive  :  — 


a.  Participles  and  participial  adjectives  in  ado,  ido, 
and  those  in  ante,  ente,  iente  (yente),  derived  from  Latin 
present  participles  :  — 


un  sacerdote  consagrado, 
la  oveja  perdida, 
banderas  desplegadas, 
aguas  abundantes, 
un  espiritu  paciente, 
las  Cortes  constituyentes, 
los  caballeros  andantes, 


a  consecrated  priest. 

the  lost  sheep. 

banners  unfurled  (flying  banners). 

abundant  water. 

a  patient  spirit.  [sembly. 

the  Constituent   (National)  As- 

the  knights-errant. 


but,  poetically  or  expansively : 


por  dilatadas  regiones, 
las  enganadas  naciones, 
la  naciente  estrella, 
la  andante  caballeria, 


over  extensive  regions, 
the  deceived  nations, 
the  rising  star, 
knight-errantry. 


b.    Proper    adjectives,    or    those   derived    from    geo- 
graphical, personal,  political,  and  scientific  names:  — 


las  Escenas  matritenses, 
los  prados  jerezanos, 
el  idioma  frances, 
un  cabecilla  carlista, 
la  filosofia  positivista, 
el  partido  unionista, 


los  tartesios  campos, 


pictures  of  Madrid  life. 

the  grassy  plains  of  Sherry. 

the  French  language. 

a  Carlist  (guerilla)  chieftain. 

positive  philosophy. 

the  union  party. 


but,  poetically : 

|  the  plains  of  Tartessus. 


The  Adjective. 


c.    Common  adjectives  in  aly  dor,  tor: — • 


el  despacho  central, 
el  puente  internacional, 
un  principio  conservador, 
la   sociedad   protectora   de   ani- 
males, 


the  Central  office, 
the  International  Bridge, 
a  conservative  principle, 
the  society  for  the  protection  of 
animals. 


la  vencedora  gente, 


but,  in  poetry : 

\  the  victorious  people. 


d.    All  augmentatives  and  diminutives  * :  — 


el  alcalde  pregunton, 
un  nino  chiquitin, 
un  hombre  grandecito, 
un  aldeano  ricote, 


the  impertinent  busybody. 

a  wee  bit  of  a  child. 

a  tallish  man. 

a  well-to-do  villager. 


e.   In  general,  long  adjectives,  unless  emphatic  or  in 
tensive :  — 

una  cosa  imposible, 
medidas  preventivas, 


an  impossible  thing, 
preventive  measures. 


but 


mi  inolvidable  amigo, 
con  incansable  afan, 


my  never-to-be-forgotten  friend, 
with  untiring  zeal. 


f.  When  a  plural  substantive  is  limited  by  two  or 
more  adjectives  in  the  singular,  the  latter  must  stand 
after  the  noun  :  — 

las  lenguas  griega  y  latina,  the  Greek  and  Latin  languages, 

los  tomos  primero  y  cuarto,  the  first  and  fourth  volumes, 

las  filas  tercera  y  vigesima,  the  third  and  twentieth  rows, 

los    siglos     segundo,    cuarto  y     the  second,  fourth,  and  fifth  cen- 
quinto,  turies. 


l  Of  this  difficult  subject  we  shall  treat  in  a  chapter  apart,  because  the  for- 
eigner cannot  be  taught  out  of  Spain  to  use  them  correctly.  They  are  a  part 
of  the  national  type.  See  p.  382. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


130    A  few  adjectives  regularly  precede  the  noun  in 
ordinary  language :  — 


mucho  dinero,  much  money. 
demasiado  juicio,  too  much  pru- 
dence. 
buenos  consejos,  good  advice. 


poca  gratia,  little  attractiveness. 
tantas  virtudes,  so  many  virtues. 
may  ores  fuerzas,  greater  strength. 
malas  plumas,  poor  pens . 


131.    Some  adjectives  have  distinct  significations,  ac- 
cording to  their  position  with  respect  of  the  noun  :  — 


un  buen  hombre,  a  good  man. 
una  buena  noche,  a  good  night. 
mal  negocio,  bad  business   (un- 

fortunate) . 
mala  pluma,  poor  pen. 
gran  vicio,  great  defect. 
nuevo  libro,  new  book  (different). 
negra  action,  dark  deed. 
varios  papeles,  various  papers^  or 

documents. 

pobre  muchacho,2  poor  boy. 
pobre  autor,  sorry  author. 
cierta  epoca,  a  certain  period. 
santa  Biblia,  sacred  Bible. 
santa  tierra,  sacred  soil. 
santo  padre ,  father  (of  the  church) 
santo  campo,  sacred  field. 


un  hombre  bueno,1  a  "best" man. 

noche  buena,  Christmas  Eve. 

un  jdven  malo,  a  bad  youth 
(wicked) . 

toro  malo,  vicious  bull. 

pera  grande,  large  pear. 

libro  nuevo,  new  book  (recent). 

vestido  negro,  black  coat. 

papeles  varios,  miscellaneous  pa- 
pers. 

el  muchacho  pobre,  the  poor  boy. 

autor  pobre,  indigent  author. 

noticia  cierta,  reliable  news. 

semana  santa,  holy  week  (Easter). 

tierra  santa,  Holy  Land. 

el  padre  santo,  the  pope. 

campo  santo,  cemetery. 


a.    Some  adjectives  precede  or  follow  the  noun  with 
little  or  no  difference  of  signification  :  — 


1  Aii  early  translation  of  the  old  Gothic  "  goodsman,"  property  man,  and 
hence  responsible,  a  voucher.    So  the  omes  or  hombres  buenos  of  the  mediaeval 
C6rtes  were  select  men,  from  this  property  qualification.    They  represented  the 
third  estate  in  assembly  with  the  prelates  and  nobles. 

2  In  commiseration ;  more  or  less  depreciative,  and  often  resented  by  per- 
sons of  spirit,  from  its  side-meaning  of  infeliz,  stupid;   still,  the  natives  say : 
"  j  Pobre  Espana !  digna  de  mejor  suerte,"  poor  Spain!  worthy  of  a  better  fate. 


The  Adjective. 


un  pequeno  libro, 
una  bonita  casa, 
un  hermoso  regalo, 
un  breve  discurso, 
un  triste  dia, 


un  libro  pequeno, 
una  casa  bonita, 
un  regalo  hermoso, 
un  discurso  breve, 
un  dia  triste, 


a  small  book, 
a  pretty  house, 
a  handsome  present 
a  short  discourse, 
a  sad  day. 


COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

132.  Adjectives  in  Spanish  have  the  three  usual 
degrees  of  comparison ;  namely,  the  Positive,  Com 
parative,  and  Superlative,  each  of  which  is  varied 
according  to  gender  and  number :  — 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

m.     bianco,  blancos,  ^ 
f.      blanca,  blancas,  J 

mas  bianco,  mas  blancos,  ) 
„    ,  .                                 \whiier. 
mas  blanca,  mas  blancas,  J 

Superlative  Relative. 

Superlative  Absolute. 

el  or  lo  mas  bianco,     \ 

la  mas  blanca, 
,    ,  ,             J  the  whitest. 
los  mas  blancos, 

las  mas  blancas,  j 

blanquisimo  (13),] 

blanqufsima, 
.  .          ,  .                   \  very  white. 
blanquisimos, 

blanquisimas,         J 

So  compare  fresc-o,  fresh,  cool,   trist-e,  sad]   prudent-e,  pru- 
dent ;  viej-o,  old;  aplicad-o,  diligent. 


el  libro  es  mas  pesado  que  el 

periodico, 
la  ventana  es  mas   alta   que   la 

puerta, 
estos  sombreros  son  mas  caros 

que  los  mios, 
aquellos  son  los  mas  hermosos 

de  la  fabrica, 
los  de  mi  amigo  son  hermosisimos, 


the  book  is  duller  than  the  news- 
paper. 

the  window  is  higher  than  the 
door. 

these  hats  are  dearer  than  mine. 

those  yonder  are  the  finest  (ones) 

in  the  factory, 
those  of  my  friend  are  very  fine. 


66 


Form  and  Inflection. 


133.  Four  adjectives  have,  besides  their  regular 
comparatives  and  superlatives,  other  preferred  forms 
derived  from  the  Latin,  but  popularly  called  irregular. 
They  are :  — 


Positive. 


Comparative. 


bueno,  a, 
malo,  a, 
grande,1 

pequefio,  a, 


good, 
bad,  poor, 
great,  large. 

small,  little. 


mejor(i2O,^ 
peor,  es, 
mayor,  es, 

menor,  es, 


rarely ',  mas  bueno), 
(seldom,  mas  malo), 
or,  mas  grande, 

or,  mas  pequefio, 


better. 

worse,  poorer. 

greater,  larg- 
er, older. 

smaller,  less, 
younger. 


Superlative  Relative. 


mejor; 

peor; 

mayor; 

menor; 


mejores, 

peores, 

mayoreS; 

menores, 


(rarely,  el,  etc.,  mas  bueno,  a), 
{seldom,  el,  etc.,  mas  malo,  a), 
or,  el,  la,  lo  mas  grande, 
los,  las  mas  grandes, 
or,  el,  lo,  la  mas  pequefio,  a, 
los,  las  mas  pequefios,  as, 


the  best. 

the  worst,  poorest. 

the  greatest,  larg- 
est, oldest. 

the  smallest,  least, 
youngest. 


Superlative  Absolute. 


bonisimo,  a, 
malisimo,  a, 
grandisimo,  a, 
pequenisimo,  a. 


or,  muy  bueno,  a, 
muy  malo,  a, 
muy  grande, 


muy  pequefio,  a,  ( 


{rarely,  optimo,  a), 
"  pesimo,  a), 
(seldom,  maximo,  a), 


very  good, 
very  bad,  poor, 
very  large,  great. 


minimo,  a),  very  small,  little.2 


1  The  positive  magno,  a  (Lat.  magnus),  hitherto  obsolete,  save  as  an  epi- 
thet of  kings  (Carlomagno,  Charlemagne;  Alfonso  III.  el  Magno,  Alphonso  III. 
the  Great,  f  A.D.  910,  etc.),  is  of  late  considerably  used  in  an  intensive  sense : 
as,  una  concurrencia  magna,  a  big  turn-out ;  una  sensacion  magna,  a  great  sen- 
sation ;  la  cuestion  magna,  the  decisive  question^  the  question  ;  una  turba  magna, 
a  big  crowd. 

2  Maximo  and   minimo  may  be  used  as  relative  superlatives  with  a  few 
words  like  cosa,  parte  :  la  maxima  parte,  the  greatest  part ;  la  minima  cosa, 
the  slightest  thing.     Optimo  and  pesimo  answer  a  question,  thus  :  <iQu6  tal  ha 
sido  la  pieza?  —  Pesima.    How  was  the  play  9  —  Very  poor. 


The  Adjective. 


digno  de  mejor  suerte, 

sus  mejores  proyectos, 

los  mejores  libros, 

la  peor  pluma, 

peor  esta  que  estaba, 

la  mayor  parte, 

un  peligro  mayor, 

el  premio  mayor, 

buscaba   mayor    espacio 

esperanzas, 

la  menor  imprudencia, 
los  hermanos  mayores, 
los  hijos  menores, 


a    sus 


worthy  of  a  better  fate. 

his  best-laid  plans. 

the  best  books. 

the  poorest  pen. 

it  is  worse  than  it  was. 

the  greater  part. 

a  greater  peril. 

the  highest  (first)  prize. 

he  sought  a  broader  field  for  his 

expectations, 
the  slightest  imprudence, 
the  older  brothers, 
the  younger  children. 


Comparative   Formulae 


134.  Most  parts  of  speech  may  be  placed  in  relations 
of  comparison  by  the  use  of  certain  adverbs  and  adjec- 
tives constituting  correlative  formulae.  Such  are  :  — 


Equality. 

tan  —  como, 

as  (so)  —  as. 

<i 

tanto,  a  —  como,  or   "\ 

as  (so)  much  —  as,  as  (so) 

it 

tanto,  a  —  cuanto,  a,  / 

many  —  as. 

Superiority. 

mas  —  que  (de), 

more  —  than. 

Inferiority. 

menos  —  que  (de), 

less  —  than,  fewer  —  than. 

cuanto  mas  —  tanto  mas, 

the  more  —  the  more. 

cuanto  menos  —  tanto  menos, 

the  less  —  the  less. 

tan  bianco  como  la  nieve, 
es  tan  buena  como  rica, 
tanto  oro  como  plata, 
tanta  prudencia  como  habilidad, 
tantos  hombres  como  mujeres, 
tanto  dinero  cuanto  usted  diga, 
ma's  alto  que  una  casa, 
ma's  rico  que  el  que  ma's, 
mas  libros  que  dinero, 
menos  sabio  que  £1, 


as  white  as  snow. 

she  is  as  good  as  (she  is)  rich. 

as  much  gold  as  silver. 

as  much  discretion  as  shrewdness. 

as  many  men  as  women. 

as  much  money  as  you  say. 

higher  than  a  house. 

richer  than  the  richest. 

more  books  than  money. 

less  (not  so)  wise  than  (as)  he. 


68 


Form  and  Inflection. 


mdnos  honrado  que  ducho, 
menos  Mpices  que  plumas, 
cuanto  m£s  habla  tanto  mas  di- 

vaga, 
cuanto  me'nos  dinero  gana  tanto 

menos  ahorra, 


less  upright  than  able. 

fewer  pencils  than  pens. 

the  more  he  talks  the  more  he 

rambles, 
the  less  money  he  earns  the  less 

he  lays  by. 


135.    In  the   formula   tan  —  como,  the   first  member 
may  be  suppressed  :  — 


bianco  como  la  nieve, 
manso  como  un  cordero. 


white  as  snow, 
meek  as  a  lamb. 


a.  In  the  poetic  style,  the  second  member  of  the 
same  formula  may  be  replaced  by  cual,  but  the  noun 
following,  in  that  case  rejects  the  article:  — 


bianco  cual  nieve,  or,  better, 
cual  nieve  bianco, 
manso  cual  cordero,  or  \ 
cual  cordero  manso, 


D,  or  ) 

3,          > 


white  as  snow, 
meek  as  a  lamb. 


136.   The  correlative  formulae  may  be  expressed  neg 
atively  by  placing  no,  not ;  sin,  withoiit ;  tampoco,  nor 
—  either y  etc.,  before  the  verb  :  — 


no  es  menos  bella  que  rica, 

no  somos  tan  buenos  como  ellos, 

sin    tener    ellos    tantos    libros 

como  yo, 

tampoco  exige  el  ma's  que  tu, 
no  soy  menos  cuerdo  que  el, 


she  is  not  less  beautiful  than  rich, 
we  are  not  so  good  as  they, 
without    their   having   so   many 
books  as  I.  [thou. 

neither  does  he  require  more  than 
I  am  not  less  prudent  than  he. 


137.   The  comparative  adverb  que  is  replaced,  — 

a.    By  de  lo  que  (than  what)  when  the  second  part  of 
the  comparison  contains  a  verb  :  — 


The  Adjective. 


mas  discrete  de  lo  que  parece, 
parece  mas  docta  de  lo  que  es, 
es  menos  rico  de  lo  que  dice, 


more  prudent  than  he  seems,  [is. 
she  seems  more  learned  than  she 
he  is  not  so  wealthy  as  he  says. 


REMARK.  —  The  original  que  may  be  resumed,  however,  if  the 
comparative  consists  of  one  of  the  organic  forms  in  or :  — 

peor  esta  que  estaba,  |  it  is  worse  than  it  was, 

or,  Worse  and  Worse  *  the  title  of  one  of  Calderon's  dramas. 

b.  By  de,  before  numerals,  provided  the  sentence  be 
affirmative ;  if  it  be  negative,  the  resumption  of  que  is 
quite  general,  but  not  universal :  — 


tiene  mas  de  diez  casas, 

tendra  menos  de  veinte  anos  de 

edad, 
no    ha    ido    alia   ma's    que    dos 

veces, 

tampoco  tengo  yo  mas  que  tres, 
sin  tener  menos  que  cuatro  casas 

de  campo, 


he  has  more  than  ten  houses, 
he  must  be  less  than  twenty  years 

old. 
he  has  not  been  there  more  than 

twice. 

I  haven't  more  than  three  either, 
without  having  fewer  than  four 

country-seats. 


138.  Mas  and  menos  may  be  strengthened  by  the  ad- 
verbs un  poco,  a  little ;  poco,  scarcely ;  mucho,  imich; 
harto  or  bastante,  considerably ;  aim,  even;  todavia. 
yet,  still;  and  by  the  superlative  muchisimo  (never 
muy  mucho,  in  the  modern  language),  very  much:  — 


poco  mas  ancho, 
mucho  mas  bianco, 
harto  menos  doloroso, 
aun  mas  favorable, 
muchisimo  menos  grave, 


scarcely  any  wider, 
much  whiter, 
considerably  less  painful, 
still  (even)  more  favorable, 
very  much  less  serious. 


139.   From  the  above  tables  (132,  134)  it  appears  :- 

a.   That    the    comparative    degree    of    adjectives    is 
formed  by  placing  the  adverbs  mas,  more ;  menos,  less, 


70  Form  and  Inflection. 

before  the  positive,  with  que  (de),  than,  to  complete 
the  comparison. 

b.  That  four  adjectives  have,  in  general  use,  organic 
comparative  forms  derived  from  the  Latin  melior,  pejor, 
major,  minor. 

c.  That  mayor  and  menor,  applied  to  persons,  signify 
also  older  and  younger;  and  to  things,  greater,  less. 

REMARK.  —  In  some  phrases  mayor  signifies  greater,  with  refer- 
ence to  some  other  undefined  object,  and  then  should  be  rendered 
simply  by  great,  grand,  or  chief:  — 


la  iglesia  mayor, 
la  plaza  mayor, 
la  calle  mayor, 


the  principal  church  (cathedral). 

the  grand  square. 

grand  street  (main  street). 


The   Superlative  Degree. 

140.  As  already  seen  (132),  the  superlative  of  adjec- 
tives is  of  two  kinds,  —  relative  and  absolute. 

a.  The  relative  superlative  is  translated  by  most  or 
-est,  and  expresses  not  only  superiority  and  inferiority 
to  any  other  quality  or  object,  but  also  to  all  other 
qualities  or  objects,  declared  or  implied. 

b.  The  absolute  superlative,  translated  by  very,  and 
occasionally  by  most,  -est,  expresses  quality  or  quantity 
in  a  very  high  degree,  but  without  comparison. 

The   Relative   Superlative. 

141.  The  relative  superlative  is  formed  by  associat- 
ing the  definite  article  (el,  la,  lo ;  los,  las)  or  a  posses- 
sive adjective  (my,   thy,  his,  our,   etc.)  with  the  com 
parative :  — 


The  Adjective. 


el  mas  justo  juicio, 

lo  mas  grave  del  asunto, 

los  libros  menos  estimados, 

mi  mas  querido  amigo, 

nuestro  menor  deseo, 

el  mayor  mdnstruo  los  zelos, 


the  justest  judgment.       [matter. 

the  most  serious  (thing)  in  the 

the  least  esteemed  books. 

my  dearest  friend. 

our  least  (or  smallest)  desire. 

jealousy  the  greatest  monster. 


142.  When  the  noun  is  accompanied  by  the  definite 
article  or  a  possessive  adjective,  the  superlative  may 
follow  it  without  an  article.  This  is  especially  the  case 
when  the  adjective  preferably  stands  after  the  noun  in 
the  positive :  — 


las  casas  ma's  blancas, 

los  nombres  mas  conocidos, 

los  dias  ma's  aciagos,  or 

los  mas  aciagos  dias, 

la  necesidad  mas  apremiante,  or 

la  mas  apremiante  necesidad, 

los  hombres  mas  leidos, 


the  whitest  houses. 

the  best  known  names  (146). 

the  most  ill-starred  days. 

the  most  urgent  necessity, 
the  best  read  men. 


Except  when  the  noun  with  which  the  adjective  agrees  is  in 
apposition  with  some  other  term,  or  when  the  article  is  found  with 
the  noun  in  an  indefinite  sense ;  in  the  latter  case  it  is  customary 
to  use  a  partitive  genitive  or  the  absolute  superlative  :  — 


los  Ingleses,  gente  la  ma's  despre- 

ocupada, 
un  jdven  de  los  mas  despejados, 

or, 
un  jdven  despejadisimo, 


the  English,  a  most  unprejudiced 

people, 
one  of  the  brightest  of  young  men? 

or, 
a  very  bright  young  man. 


a.  The  relative  superlative  assumes  the  article  when 
it  stands  in  the  predicate  after  the  verb  to  be  or  its 
equivalents,  and  agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  verb :  — 


la  antigua  provincia  de  Galicia  es 
la  mas  remota  de  Espafia, 


the  ancient  province  of  Galicia  is 
the  most  retired  (one)  in  Spain. 


Form  and  Inflection, 


143.  The  relative  superlative  is,  from  its  very  struc- 
ture, a  definite  comparative  as  well.  Thus,  in  the 
examples  :  — 


es  el  individuo  ma's  instruido  de 

la  Academia, 
fue  la  senora  mdnos  amable  de  la 

tertulia, 


he  is  the  most  learned  member 

in  the  Academy, 
she  was  the  least  amiable  lady  at 

the  conversazione^ 


the  logical  interpretation  would  be :  He  is  more 
learned  than  any  other  member  of  the  Academy  ;  she 
was  less  amiable  than  any  other  lady  at  the  conversa- 
zione. Hence,  — 

144.   The  relative  superlative   is   often   expressed   in 
Spanish  by  the  formal  comparative :  — 


esta  es  cosa  que  me  da  mayor 


this  is  a  thing  that  gives  me  the 


pena,  greatest  concern, 

(i.e.,  greater  concern  than  any  other  thing.) 

lo  que  es  mas  caro  al  hombre,       |  what  is  dearest  to  man. 
(what  is  dearer  than  anything  else.) 

145.  When  two  objects,  persons,  or  qualities  are 
compared,  the  formal  superlative  is  really  a  compara- 
tive, and  must  be  so  translated  :  — 


de  estos  dos  albafiiles,  Pedro  es 

el  ma's  ha"bil; 
de  las  dos  sefioras,  la  morena  es 

la  mdnos  simpatica, 


of  these  two  masons,  Peter  is  the 

more  skilful, 
of  the  two  ladies,  the  brunette  is 

the  less  congenial. 


146.  The  comparative  and  the  relative  superlative, 
with  mas,  are  translated  by  better  and  best,  instead  of 
more  and  most,  when  participial  adjectives,  to  which 
well  may  be  joined  in  the  positive,  are  compared  in 
their  proper  sense  as  such  :  — 


The  Adjective. 


73 


ma's  conocido,      better  known. 
mas  leido,  better  read. 

mas  amados,        better  loved. 


el  mas  conocido,  the  best  known. 
el  mas  leido,         the  best  read. 
los  mas  amados,  the  best  loved. 


a.  If  the  past  participle  has  also  the  signification  of 
a  mere  adjective,  its  comparative  and  superlative  are 
rendered  as  usual :  — 

querido,  dear.    \    mas  querido,  dearer.    \    el  mas  querido,  dearest. 

Instruido  may  be  translated  by  instructed  or  by  learn- 
ed, and  its  degrees  of  comparison  would  be  rendered 
accordingly :  — 


mas  instruido,  better  instructed, 
more  learned. 


el    ma's    instruido,    the   best   in- 
structed^ the  most  learned. 


147.   The  prepositions  in,  at,  of,  after  a  relative  super- 
lative, are  generally  expressed  in  Spanish  by  de :  — 


el  hombre  ma's  ruin  de  la  ciudad, 
el  suelo  ma's  feraz  de  la  comarca, 
la  conferencia  mas  concurrida  de 
la  serie, 


the  vilest  man  in  town, 
the  most  fertile  soil  in  the  district, 
the  best  attended  lecture  of  the 
course. 


REMARK.  —  The  use  of  en  in  this  relation  is  very  common,1  but 
is,  perhaps,  to  be  classed  with  popular  idioms  or  vulgarisms  :  — 


es  el  nino  mas  despejado  (de)  en 
la  escuela, 


he  is  the  brightest  lad  in  (the) 
school. 


148.  The  neuter  article  lo  may  be  employed  with  any 
superlative  to  which  in  English  the  word  thing,  or  some 
other  word,  may  be  supplied  :  — 


1  This  construction  with  en,  when  used  of  persons,  may  generally  be  ex- 
plained as  an  ellipse  :  de  los  que  hay  en  la  e.,  of  those  who  are  in  the  s.  Wiggers, 
Grammatik,  p.  67,  gives  wrongly  :  La  casa  mas  hermosa  en  la  cuidad;  a  sentence 
no  Spaniard  would  write. 


74 


Form  and  Inflection. 


lo  ma's   fdcil   no  es  siempre  lo 

mejor, 
lo  ma's  acertado  sera"  el  negar- 

selo, 


the  easiest  (way)  is  not  always 

the  best, 
the  most  appropriate  (thing)  will 

be  to  refuse  him  (it  to  him). 


The  Absolute  Superlative. 

149.   The  absolute  superlative  is  formed  by  affixing  to 
the  stem  of  the  positive  the  variable  ending  -isimo :  — 


es  claro,  clarisimo, 
una  cosa  acertadisima, 
un  hombre  prudentisimo, 
esta  sefiora  es  feisima, 
tengo  muchisimos  libros, 
una  necesidad  apremiantisima, 


it  is  clear,  very  clear. 

a  very  appropriate  thing. 

a  very  prudent  man. 

this  lady  is  very  plain  ("  homely"). 

I  have  a  great  many  books. 

a  most  urgent  necessity. 


a.  The  absolute  superlative  is  also  formed  by  asso 
ciating  with  the  simple  adjective  adverbs  like  muy, 
bien,  very ;  harto,  bastante,  considerably,  quite ;  suma- 
mente,  exceedingly  ;  excesivamente,  extremely,  etc. 


muy  bianco,  very  white. 
harto  sensible,  very  much  to  be 
regretted. 


sumamente  rico,  exceedingly  rich. 
excesivamente    raro,    extremely 
rare. 


REMARK.  —  The  superlative  in  -isimo  assumes  the  same  position 
with  respect  of  the  noun  that  the  simple  adjective  would  have :  — 


poco  fruto,  poquisimo  fruto, 
un  orador  elocuente,  un  orador 
elocuentisimo, 

un  j6ven  rico,  un  joven  riquisimo, 


little  fruit,  very  little  fruit, 
an  eloquent  orator,   a  very  elo- 
quent orator. 

[a  wealthy   young   man,    a   very 
wealthy  young  man. 


150.   The  affix  -isimo  is  applied  to  the  pure  stem  of 
the  adjective  agreeably  to  the  following  laws  :  — 


The  Adjective. 


75 


a.    By  rejecting  a  final  vowel,  or  a  true  diphthong 
(§21):- 


doct-o,  doct-isimo,  very  learned. 
suav-e,  suav-isimo,  very  mild. 
grand-e,  grand-isimo,  very  large. 


hermos-o,     hermos-isimo,    very 

beautiful. 
ampl-io,  ampl-fsimo,  very  full. 


but  (according  to  §§  20,  22)  : 
impi-o,  impi-fsimo,  very  wicked.   \   fri-o,  fri-isimo,  very  cold. 

b.  By  changing  the  final  stem-consonants  c  into  qu, 
g  into  gu,  and  z  into  c  (§§  13  ;  15  ;  28,  a)  :  — 

blanc-o,  blanqu-isimo,  very  white.  I   feliz,  felic-isimo,  very  happy. 
larg-o,  largu-isimo,  very  long.       \   atroz,  atroc-isimo,  very  shocking. 

c.  By  changing  the  termination  -ble  into  -bil:  — 
noble,  nobil-isimo,  very  noble.       \   amable,  amabil-isimo,  very  kind. 

d.  By  restoring  the  movable  diphthongs  ie  and  ue 
to  their  primitive  simple  vowels  e  and  o  (§  19)  :  — 


diestro,  destrisimo,  very  expert. 
valiente,  valentisimo,  very  brave. 
ardiente,  ardentisimo,  very  zeal- 
ous, very  glowing. 
cierto,  certisimo,  very  sure. 


tierno,  ternisimo,  very  dear. 
lieto,  letisimo,  very  beaming. 
bueno,  bonisimo,  very  good. 
nuevo,  novisimo,  very  recent.1 
fuerte,  fortisimo,  very  strong. 


REMARK.  —This  rule  is  fast  yielding  to  the  corrupting  influences 
of  the  uneducated  classes,  and  ciertisimo,  tiernisimo,  and  fuerttsima 
are  frequently  heard  and  found  in  literature,  although  the  Academy 
recognizes  only  the  first.  Viejo,  old,  always  maintains  the  diph- 
thong in  the  superlative  (viejisimd)  ;  while  the  derivative  vejez,  old 
age,  rejects  it. 

1  Generally  rendered  and  used  as  a  relative  superlative:  La  Novisima 
Recopilacion,  the  latest  compilation  ;  i.e.,  the  Revised  Statutes  (of  1806),  those 
of  Philip  II.  (1567)  being  la  Nueva  Recopilacion,  the  New  Digest. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


e.    By   simply   attaching   -isimo   to    the    unchanged 
adjective  when  it  ends  in  any  consonant  except  z: — 

util,  utih'simo,  very  useful.  \   liberal,  liberalisimo,  very  liberal. 

151.   A  few  superlatives  in  -isimo  are  constructed  on 
Latin  stems :  — 


amigo,*1     amicisimo, 

very  friendly, 

/hwzamic-us. 

antiguo,      antiquisimo, 

very  ancient, 

antiqu-us. 

bendfico,     beneficentisimo, 

very  beneficent, 

beneficent(is). 

benevolo,    benevolentisimo, 

very  benevolent, 

benevolent(is). 

cruel,           crudelisimo, 

very  cruel, 

crudel-is. 

fiel,             fidelisimo, 

very  faithful, 

fidel-is. 

frio,*         1 

r  ,  '  j         f  frigidisimo, 
irigiQO,     j 

very  cold, 

frigid-us. 

magnifico,  magnificentisimo, 

very  magnificent, 

magnificent(is). 

pio,*         1    . 
piadoso,*/Plentlslmo>2 

very  devoted, 

pient(is). 

sabio,          sapientisimo, 

very  wise, 

sapient(is). 

sacro,        1 

sagrado,  Jsacratislmo» 

very  sacred, 

sacra  t-us. 

152.    Some  few  adjectives  form  their  absolute  super- 
latives by  attaching  -rimo  to  the  Latin  base  in  er :  — 

aspe'rrimo,  very  harsh,  from  asper. 

celebdrrimo,  very  famous,  celeber. 

integeVrimo,  very  disinterested,  integer, 

libdrrimo,  very  free,  liber, 

miserrimo,  very  wretched,  miser, 

paupdrrimo,  very  indigent,  pauper, 

salubdrrimo,  very  healthful,  saluber. 


dspero,* 

cdlebre, 

integro, 

libre, 

misero, 

pobre,* 

salubre, 


1  Those  distinguished  by  an  asterisk  have  also  the  regular  superlative ;  as, 
amiguisimo,  friisimo,  piadosisimo,  asperisimo,  pobrisimo. 

2  The  form  pientisimo,  although  unknown  to  the  Academy's  Dictionary  and 
Grammars,  is  in  common  use.    The  earliest  record  of  it  that  I  remember  is  in 
the  Diferencias  de  libros  q  ay  en  el  vniuerso,  by  Alexo  Vanegas  de  Busto, 
Toledo,  1540,  f.  240,  where  the  author  says :   "  de  la  pietissima  (pientisima) 
virge  maria."    Vanegas  is  an  "  authority  "  recognized  by  the  Academy  (Diet., 
ed.  1726,  p.  Ixxxvi,  and  Catdlogo  de  Autoridades,  Madrid,  1874,  p.  100). 


The  Adjective. 


77 


a.  The  superlative  uberrimo,  very  productive,  wants 
the  positive  and  comparative  (Lat.  uber,  uberior),  which, 
however,  may  be  supplied  byferdz. 

153.  The  adjectives  facil,  easy,  probable ;   dificil,  dif- 
ficult,  not  probable,   have   the  superlatives  facilisimo, 
facilimo ;   dificilisimo  and  dificilimo. 

154.  The  following  comparatives  and  superlatives  in 
form,  derived  from  the  Latin,  have  mostly  lost  their 
primitive  force  as  such,  and  may  be  treated  as  adjec- 
tives, occasionally  with  special  significations  :  — 

anterior,  previous,  prior. 
citerior,  hither. 
exterior,  external,  outside. 
inferior,  inferior,  lower. 
interior,  internal,  inside. 
posterior,  posterior. 
(mas  cercano,  nearer.) 
superior,  superior,  upper. 
ulterior,  ulterior,  ultimate. 


(wanting.) 
(wanting. ) 
extreme,  extreme. 
mfimo,  lowest. 
intimo,  intimate. 
postremo,  hindermost. 
proximo,  nearest,  next. 
supremo,  sumo,  highest,  supreme. 
ultimo,  last*  final. 


la  carta  anterior,  the  previous 

letter. 
los  puntos  extremes,  the  extreme 

points. 
un    cuarto    interior,   an    inside 

apartment. 


la  infima  plebe,  the  lowest  rab- 
ble. 

un  amigo  intimo,  an  intimatt 
friend. 

un  esfuerzo  supremo,  a  supreme 
effort. 


a.   These  forms  often  serve  as  simple  adjectives  to 
build  true  comparatives  and  superlatives :  — 


a"  precio  tan  mfimo, 

la  casa  mas  prdxima, 

las  mas  superiores  ciencias,1 

mi  ma's  intimo  amigo, 


at  so  low  a  price, 
the  nearest  house, 
the  highest  sciences, 
my  most  intimate  friend. 


1  Diet*  of  the  Acad.t  ed.  1726-39,  vol.  i.  p.  xlii.  3. 


78  Form  and  Inflection. 

b.   The  same  may  be  said  of  the  superlative  minimo 
(§  133,  note  2):  — 

la  cosa  ma's  minima,  |       the  smallest  thing. 

155.   The  superlative  absolute  is  often  merely  inten- 
sive :  — 


este  mismisimo  asunto, 
un  caso  singularisimo, 


this  identical  subject, 
a  signal  case  in  point. 


156.  Of  the  two  forms  comprised  under  the  denomi- 
nation of  superlative  absolute,  that  in  -isimo  is  the 
stronger :  — 

es  un  hombre  doctfsimo,    ) 


es  un  hombre  muy  docto, 


he  is  a  very  learned  man. 


157.  The  adverbs  mas,  more ;  menos,  less;  muy,  very ; 
are  often  applied  to  nouns  in  the  sense  of  "more  of  a," 
"less  of  a,"  and  "very  much  of  a,"  "a  thorough  "  :  — 

es  ma's  nifio  de  lo  que  creia,  he  is  more  of  a  child  than  I  sup- 

posed. 


es  menos  politico  que  esplotador, 
es  muy  hombre  de  mundo, 

es  muy  caballero,  es  muy  Es- 
pafiol, 

es  muy  senorito, 
muy  seftor  mio, 


he  is  less  of  a  politician  than  a 

"  carpet-bagger.1' 
he   is   a   thorough  man   of  the 

world, 
he  is  a  thorough  gentleman,  a 

thorough  Spaniard, 
he  is  quite  a  young  gentleman.1 
my  dear  sir. 


158.  The  formula  muy  —  para  signifies  too  —  to,  too 
much  of  a  —  to,  with  nouns,  adjectives,  and  past  parti- 
ciples :  — 


1  He  who  replies  to  these  observations,  says,  not  muy,  but  mucho,  very, 
literally  much ;   si  tal,  true;   or,  justo,  of  course. 


The  Adjective. 


79 


es  muy  grande  para  jugar  tanto, 
es  muy  bobo  para  incomodarse 

de  eso, 
estaba  muy  asustada  para  arries- 

gar  preguntas, 


he  is  too  large  to  play  so  much 
he  is  too  much  of  a  simpleton  to 

resent  that, 
she  was  too  much  frightened  to 

venture  inquiries. 


159.  The  intensive  prefix  re  (Lat.  re  and  [/]  rai)  was 
formerly  much  used  to  express  a  kind  of  absolute  super- 
lative, with  or  without  muy,  and  was  applied  to  adjec- 
tives, adverbs,  and  occasionally  even  to  nouns.  Its 
use  is  now  popular  or  vulgar :  — 


Ancient  (1537). 


En  las  Cortes  de  los  Principes 
son  pocos,  y  muy  pocos,  yaun 
muy  poquitos,  y  muy  repo- 
quitos,  los  que  se  tienenentera 
amistad  {Guevara). 


In  the  Courts  of  Princes,  those 
who  cherish  towards  one  an- 
other genuine  friendship  are 
few,  very  few,  even  exceeding- 
ly few,  and  scarcely  any  at  all. 


Modern. 


rebueno,  or  muy  rebueno  (usual\ 
rebien,  or  muy  rebien  (  "  ), 
no  me  da  la  re-real  gana  (low) , 


very  good  indeed. 

very  well  indeed.  [(do  it)  ; 

it  does  not  suit  my  majesty  to 


(literally,  it  does  not  give  me  the  very  royal  mind  to.1) 


1  In  the  following  tragic  nursery  rhyme,  reproducing  the  legend  of  "  Peter 
Peter,  pumpkin  eater,"  and  which  may  be  heard  any  bright  morning  among  the 
nurses  on  the  Recoletos  of  Madrid,  occurs  the  prefix  re  with  a  proper  name :  — 


Pepe,  ?v-Pepe 
mato  a  la  mujer 
con  siete  cuchillos 
y  un  alfiler; 
la  metio  en  un  cesto, 
la  llevo  a  vender, 
le  sac6  un  doblon 
y  lo  metio  en  panchon. 


Josy,  my  Joe, 
killed  his  wife 
with  seven  knives 
and  one  pin ; 
put  her  in  a  panier, 
took  her  to  be  sold, 
got  a  doubloon  for  her, 
and  laid  it  out  in  buns! 


80 


Form  and  Inflection. 


NUMERALS. 


160.   The  cardinal  numbers  are  those  which  answer 
the  question,  How  many? 


Cardinal  Numbers. 

I 

uno,  a,  (contract  un)  . 

28 

veinte  y  ocho,  or  veinti- 

2 

dos. 

ocho. 

3 

tres. 

29 

veinte  y  nueve,  etc. 

4 

cuatro. 

30 

treinta,(treinta  y  uno,  etc.  ) 

5 

cinco. 

40 

cuarenta. 

6 

seis. 

50 

cincuenta. 

7    i  siete. 

60 

sesenta. 

8     ocho. 

70 

setenta. 

9     nueve. 

80 

ochenta. 

10      diez. 

90 

noventa. 

100 

ciento,  (contract  cien). 

ii 

once. 

12 

doce. 

101 

ciento  y  uno,  a. 

13 

trece. 

1  02 

ciento  y  dos. 

14 

catorce. 

103 

ciento  y  tres,  etc. 

'5 

quince. 

2OO 

doscientos,  as. 

16 

diez  y  seis,  or  dieciseis. 

300 

trescientos,  as. 

17 

diez  y  siete,  or  diecisiete. 

4OO 

cuatrocientos,  as. 

18 

diez  y  ocho,  or  dieciocho. 

500 

quinientos,  as. 

19 

diez  y  nueve,  or  diecinueve. 

600 

seiscientos,  as. 

20 

veinte. 

700 

setecientos,  as. 

800 

ochocientos,  as. 

21 

veinte  y  uno,  a,  or  veintiuno, 

9OO 

novecientos,  as. 

a,  (contract  veintiun). 

I,OOO 

mil,  (mil  y  uno,  etc.) 

22 

veinte  y  dos,  or  veintidos. 

23 

veinte  y  tres,  or  vemtitres. 

10,000 

diez  mil. 

24 

veinte  y  cuatro,  or  veinticua- 

100,000 

cien  mil. 

tro. 

200,000 

doscientos,  as,  mil. 

25 

veinte  y  cinco,  or  veinticinco. 

500,000 

quinientos,  as,  mil. 

26 

veinte  y  seis,  or  veintiseis. 

1,000,000 

un  millon,  or  un  cuento. 

27 

veinte  y  siete,  or  veintisiete. 

2,000,000 

dos  millones. 

Numerals. 


81 


Remarks  on  the  Cardinals. 

161.  Archaic  forms  are  docientos   and  trecientos. 

They  are  heard,  however,  at  the  present  day  in  current 
language,  but  are  not  met  with  in  approved  modern 
literature.  Incorrect  conversational  forms  are  siete- 
cientos  and  nuevecientos.  See  150,  d,  Remark. 

162.  The  cardinal  numbers,  although  adjectives,  are 
all  invariable  except  uno,  a,  and  cientos,  as,  when  multi- 
plied by  two  up  to  nine  inclusive  :  — 


dos  libros,  tres  plumas, 
cuatro  cuartos,  cinco  onzas, 
diez  dias,  cuarenta  almas, 
un  amigo,  una  conocida, 
ciento  y  un  soldados, 
veintiun  casas,  cien  anos, 

cien  mil  duros, 

doscientos  hombres,  doscientas 

mujeres, 
quinientos  bonos,  quinientas  car- 

petas, 
cuatrocientas  mil  personas, 


two  books,  three  pens,    [ounces, 
four    cuartos     (coppers),     five 
ten  days,  forty  souls, 
one  friend,  one  acquaintance, 
one  hundred  and  one  soldiers, 
twenty-one  houses,  one  hundred 

years. 

one  hundred  thousand  dollars, 
two  hundred  men,  two  hundred 

women, 
five  hundred  bonds,  five  hundred 

(government)  securities, 
four  hundred  thousand  persons. 


For  the  contractions  of  uno  and  ciento,  see  123,  a,  b ;  126. 

163.   As  numeral  adjectives,  ciento  and  mil  cannot 
assume  un  like  the  substantives  millon  and  cuento :  — 

un  millon  de  gracias,  a  thousand 
thanks  (literally,  'one  million 
of  thanks). 


cien  vecinos,1  one  hundred  citi- 
zens. 
mil  duros,  one  thousand  dollars. 


1  Vecino  means  (i)  a  neighbor ;  (2)  the  head  of  a  family ;  (3)  a  legal  or  offi- 
cially inscribed  resident,  a  householder;  (4)  a  citizen.  Native  estimates  of 
population  are  made  in  rural  districts  by  vecinos,  heads  of  families ;  in  towns, 
by  almas,  souls;  and  by  government,  for  foreign  convenience,  by  habitantes, 
inhabitants.  The  traditional  method  is,  however,  by  vecinos. 


82 


Form  and  Inflection. 


me  did  ma's  de  mil  onzas, 
recibid  hasta  cien  azotes, 


he  gave  me  more  than  one  thou- 
sand ounces.         [dred  lashes, 
he  received  as  many  as  one  hun- 


a.  Ciento  used  as  a  substantive  assumes  the  form 
centenar,  unless  employed  to  express  rate.  Mil,  as  a 
substantive,  may  retain  that  form,  or  appear  as  millar ; 
but  to  express  rate,  only  the  latter  is  usual :  — 


centenares  de  hombres, 
a"  doce  reales  el  ciento, 
millares  or  miles  de  vidas, 
£  veinticinco  pesetas  el  millar, 


hundreds  of  men. 
at  twelve  reals  per  hundred, 
thousands  of  lives.  [sand, 

at  twenty-five  francs  per  thou- 


REMARK.  —  In  mercantile  language,  it  is  usual  to  omit  the  article 
with  the  number.1 


a"  doce  reales  ciento. 


a"  veinticinco  pesetas  millar. 


164.  Tens  of  hundreds  cannot  be  used  in  Spanish  for 
counting  from  one  thousand  upwards,  but  mil  must 
always  introduce  the  denomination  :  — 

mil  y  seis, 

mil  y  ciento, 

mil  ciento  y  diez, 

mil  cuatrocientos  noventa  y  dos, 

dos  mil  trescientas  personas, 


ten  hundred  and  six. 
eleven  hundred, 
eleven  hundred  and  ten. 
fourteen  hundred  and  ninety-two, 
twenty-three  hundred  persons. 


165.  The  conjunction  y,  and  (archaic  /),  is  now  only 
used  to  connect  the  last  of  a  series  with  the  foregoing 
number :  — 


Fifteenth  Century: 
myll  e  quatrogientos  e  nouenta 
e  nueue,  1499. 


Ninteenth  Century: 
mil     cuatrocientos     noventa     y 
nueve,  1499. 


1  So  the  Madrid  hawkers  say,  for  example :  a  real,  or  &  real  uno,  one  real 
each. 


Numerals. 


166.   The  ordinal  numbers,  as  their  name  indicates, 
show  the  order  of  a  series  ;   as,  first,  second,  etc. :  — 


Ordinal  Numbers. 

ist 

primero,  a,  (contract  primer). 

28th 

vigesimo  octavo. 

2d 

segundo,  a. 

29th 

vigesimo  nono. 

3d 

tercero,  a,  {contract  tercer). 

30th 

trigesimo,  a. 

4th 

cuarto,  a. 

3ist 

trigesimo  primo,  etc. 

5th 

quinto,  a. 

40th 

cuadragesimo,  a. 

6th 

sexto,  a,  (#;**/  sesto). 

50th 

quincuagesimo,  a. 

7th 

septimo,  a,  (rtWsetimo). 

6oth 

sexagesimo,  a. 

8th 

octavo,  a. 

7oth 

septuage"simo,  a. 

9th 

nono,  a,  or  noveno,  a. 

8oth 

octogesimo,  a. 

loth 

decimo,  a. 

90th 

nonagesimo,  a. 

nth 

undecimo,  a. 

looth 

centesimo,  a. 

1  2th 

duodecimo,  a. 

loist 

centesimo  primo. 

1  3th 

decimo  tercio. 

20Oth 

ducentesimo,  a. 

1  4th 

decimo  cuarto. 

3OOth 

trecentesimo,  a. 

1  5th 

decimo  quinto. 

40Oth 

cuadragentesimo,  a.i 

1  6th 

decimo  sexto. 

500th 

quingentesimo,  a. 

1  7th 

decimo  septimo. 

6ooth 

sexcentesimo,  a.1 

1  8th 

decimo  octavo. 

700th 

septengentesimo,  a.1 

1  9th 

decimo  nono. 

Sooth 

octogentesimo,  a. 

20th 

vigesimo,  a. 

9OOth 

nonagentesimo,  a. 

2lSt 

vigesimo  primo. 

i,oooth 

milesimo,  a. 

22d 

vigesimo  segundo. 

2,OOOth 

dos  milesimo,  a. 

23d 

vigesimo  tercio. 

i  o,oooth 

diez  milesimo,  a. 

24th 

vigesimo  cuarto. 

100,000th 

cien  milesimo,  a. 

25th 

vigesimo  quinto. 

200,000th 

doscientos  milesimo,  a. 

26th 

vigesimo  sexto  (sesto). 

5oo,oooth 

quinientos  milesimo,  a. 

2yth 

vigesimo  septimo  (setimo)  . 

i,  ooo,oooth 

millonesimo,  a. 

1  Some  write  cuadringentesimo,  sescentesimo,  septingenttsimo,  but  as  the 
Academy  does  not  give  these  numerals  in  the  Dictionary  or  Grammar,  the  deci- 
sion of  that  body  is  not  accessible. 


84  Form  and  Inflection. 

167.   Archaic  forms  are  •    - 


8th 

ochavo.  a. 

30th 

treinteno,  a. 

9th 

noveno,  a. 

4Oth 

cuarenteno,  a. 

loth 

deceno,  a. 

50th 

cincuenteno,  a. 

nth 

onceno,  a. 

6oth 

sesenteno,  a. 

1  2th 

doceno,  a. 

7oth 

setenteno,  a. 

1  3th 

treceno,  a. 

8oth 

ochenteno,  a. 

1  4th 

catorceno,  a. 

90th 

noventeno,  a. 

1  5th 

quinceno,  a. 

looth 

centeno,  a. 

20th 

veinteno,  a. 

i,oooth 

mileno,  a. 

el  ochavo  dia, 
Alfonso  onceno, 
el  doceno  trabajo, 


the  eighth  day.  —  Cronica  General,  A.D.  1260. 
AlphonsoXI.  —  Fourteenth  century,  and  still  used, 
the  twelfth  labor. — Villena,  Labors  of  Hercules. 


But  2 ist,  etc.,  would  be  vigesimo primo*  not  veinteno primo. 

168.  The  ordinals,  both  simple  and  compound,  vary 
regularly  like  all  adjectives  in  o,  agreeing  in  gender 
and  number  with  their  nouns :  — 


la  primera  estacion, 
leccion  decima  nona, 
la  fila  vigesima  prima, 


the  first  station, 
lesson  nineteenth, 
the  twenty-first  row. 


REMARK.  —  The  Academy  writes  the  compound  forms  in  one 
word:  as,  trigesimotercio  (fern,  trigesimatercia) ,  thirty-third ';  but 
this  innovation  is  not  generally  adopted  by  Spanish  printers,  nor 
should  it  be,  since  each  member  varies  in  ending  like  independent 
adjectives. 

For  the  contracts  of  primer o  and  tercero,  see  123. 

169.  Fractional  numbers  used  in  mathematical  calcu- 
lations, though  substantives,  belong  here.  They  do  not 
generally  correspond  with  the  ordinals,  as  in  English ; 


Numerals. 


but    from   ten    upwards    a.   "me    the    ending    avo,   pi. 
avos :  — 


Fractional  Numbers. 

i 

la  mitad  (un  medio). 

A 

un  diez  y  seis  avo  (dieciseis  avo). 

i| 

uno  y  medio,  una  y  media. 

A 

un  diez  y  siete  avo. 

i 

un  tercio. 

A 

un  diez  y  ocho  avo. 

I 

dos  tercios. 

A 

un  diez  y  nueve  avo. 

i 

un  cuarto. 

A 

un  veintavo  (veinte  avo). 

i 

tres  cuartos. 

A 

un  veintiun  avo,  etc. 

i 

un  quinto. 

A 

tres  veintavos. 

1 

cuatro  quintos. 

A 

un  treintavo. 

i 

un  sexto. 

A 

un  cuarentavo. 

1 

cinco  sextos. 

A 

un  cincuentavo. 

» 

un  septimo. 

A 

un  sesentavo. 

i 

un  octavo  and  ochavo. 

A 

un  setentavo. 

i 

un  noveno. 

A 

un  ochentavo. 

A 

un  decimo. 

A 

un  noventavo. 

A 

un  onzavo  (or,  once  avo). 

530 

tres  noventavos. 

A 

un  dozavo  (doce  avo). 

TOO 

un  centavo  and  centesimo. 

A 

un  trezavo  (trece  avo). 

ToVo 

un  milesimo. 

A 

un  catorzavo  (catorce  avo)  . 

If! 

trescientos  veinticinco,  novecien- 

A 

un  quinzavo  (quince  avo). 

tos  setenta  y  dos  avos. 

170.  Fractional  numbers,  from  \  to  TV  inclusive,  may 
also  be  expressed  by  the  ordinals  with  the  feminine 
noun  parte,  part,  especially  when  a  genitive  follows  or 
is  understood.  From  -^  onward  this  construction  is 
preferable,  except  in  mathematical  calculations  :  — 


one-third, 

two-thirds, 

one-fourth, 

three-fourths, 

one-twentieth, 

one-hundredth, 


un  tercio,  or  la  tercera  parte. 

dos  tercios,  or  las  dos  terceras  partes. 

un  cuarto,  or  la  cuarta  parte. 

tres  cuartos,  or  las  tres  cuartas  partes. 

un  vigesimo,  or  la  vigesima  parte. 

un  centesimo,  or  la  centesima  parte. 


86  Form  and  Inflection. 

a.  As  substantives,  una  tercia  (formerly  una  tercia 
parte)  signifies  a  third  of  a  yard;  una  cuarta,  a  fourth 
or  quarter  of  a  yard ;   un  cuarteron,  a  quarter  of  a 
pound;  una  arroba  (from  the  Arabic  for  one-quarter), 
twenty-five  pounds  or  a  quarter  of  a  hundred,  applied  to 
liquid  as  well  as  dry  measure  in  Spain.     Un  diezmo, 
meaning  a  civil  or  ecclesiastic  ten  per  cent  tax,  is  cor- 
rupted from  dfcimo,  as  the  English  tithe  is  from  tenth: 
as,  las  alcavalas  del  diezmo,  in  ancient  law,  the  ten 
per  cent  peculium  regis  on  all  purchases  and  sales.     Un 
quinto,  is  a  fifth,  and  a  fifth  man,  hence  a  conscript 
soldier;  la  quinta,  the  military  conscription. 

b.  Fractionals  are  also  employed  in  Spanish  to  spec- 
ify  the    number   of    leaves   in   a   signature   or  folded 
sheet  (cuadtrnillo1),  that   is,  the   size   (tamano)   of  a 
volume :  — 


un  tomo  en  folio  (f°), 

un  tomo  en  cuarto  (4°), 

un  tomo  en  octavo  (8°), 

un  tomo  en  dozavo  (12°), 

un  tomo  en  diezyseis  avo(i6°), 

un  t.  en  veinte  y  cuatro  avo  (24°) , 


a  volume  in  folio, 
a  volume  in  4to. 
a  volume  in  8vo. 
a  volume  in  I2mo. 
a  volume  in  i6mo. 
a  volume  in  241110. 


REMARK.  —  In  this  connection,  "large"  is  expressed  by  mayor, 
and  "small"  by  menor  or  pequeno:  — 


un  tomo  en  f  °  mayor,  or  de  mar- 

ca  mayor, 

-  un  tomo  en  cuarto  menor, 
un  libro  de  mano  en  octavo  mar- 
quilla, 


a  volume  in  large  folio. 

a  volume  in  small  4to. 

a  manuscript  in  medium  octavo. 


1  So  named  (from  quatro)  because  in  the  origins  of  typography  most  books 
were  issued  in  "  fours,"  whether  the  external  form  was  quarto  or  folio. 


Numerals. 


un  libro  de  molde  en  octavo  pe- 
quefio,  or  '*  espanol," 


a  printed  book  in  small  octavo, 
"Spanish  size."1 


171.  The  arithmetical  signs  +,  x ,  — ,  -5-,  =,  are  read 
respectively  mas,  por,  menos,  dividido  por,  igual:  — 

5  +  3  =  8,  cinco  ma's  tres  igual  ocho ;  or,  cinco  y  tres,  ocho. 

f  x  8  —  5,  cinco  octavos  por  ocho  igual  cinco. 


5  times  8  are  40, 


cinco  por  ocho,  cuarenta. 


172.  Half  (a  half  or  one-half),  as  a  noun,  is  expressed 
by  la  mitad  (in  calculations  only,  by  un  medio) ;  as 
an  adjective,  by  medio,  a,  without  an  or  a:  — 


la  mitad  de  mis  bienes, 
le  di  la  mitad, 
media  hora,  medio  dia, 
una  hora  y  media, 
un  dia  y  medio, 


one-half  of  my  goods. 
I  gave  him  one-half, 
half  an  hour,  half  a  day. 
an  hour  and  a  half, 
a  day  and  a  half. 


173.   Multiplicatives  answer  the  question,  How  many 
fold?  as, 


simple,  simple.       \ 


el  duplo, 
el  triplo, 


|       triple,  triple. 


Adjectives. 

doble,  double. 

Substantives. 

twofold,  twice  as  much,  many, 
threefold,  three  times  as  much. 


el  cuadruplo,    fourfold,  four  times  as  much. 
el  quintuple,    fivefold,  five  times  as  many. 
el  centuplo,       an  hundred  fold,  etc. 

1  Technical  book  terms  are :  una  foja,  a  folio  (leaf  numbered  on  the  first 
side  only,  —  recto,  verso  or  vueltd)  ;  una  hoja,  a  leaf  (without  foliation  or  pagi- 
nation) ;  una  pagina,  a  numbered  page.  Un  "  juego"  de  libros,  means  a  "set" 
of  volumes,  whether  of  two,  or  three  hundred ;  una  biblioteca  de  tres  mil  tomos 
6  de  mil  novecientos  juegos  de  libros,  a  library  consisting  of  three  thousand 
volumes  or  of  nineteen  hundred  sets.  Biblioteca  is  a  public  or  private  library  ; 
formerly,  libreria  signified  private  library,  but  its  use  is  now  limited  to  the  poets 
and  old-fashioned  people,  while  libreria  universally  designates  a  book-shop  or 
tke  book  trade. 


88 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a.  With  the  number  of  a  street  are  used  duplicado, 
"bis,"  repeated;  triplicado,  triple  number;  cuadrupli- 
cado,  quadruple  number,  when  it  is  not  convenient  or 
feasible  to  increase  the  cardinal  number :  — 


calle  del  Arenal,  niimero  veinte 
duplicado,  Strand,  No.  20  "bis" 


calle  del  Sauco,  num.  6  trip0., 
Alder  Street,  No.  6  triple. 


REMARK.  —  The  Latin  bis,  twice,  appears  in  Spanish  in  the 
words  bizco  (bisojo,  double  eye),  cross-eyed;  bizcocho  (bis-coctus), 
biscuit?  cracker,  and  teacake ;  bisabuelo,  a,  great -grandfather, 
great-grandmother ;  and  biznieto,  a,  great-grandson,  great-grand- 
daughter. The  Spaniards  use  also  the  Greek  rera/oro?,  fourth, 
corrupted  into  tdtara,  with  a  few  words :  as,  tatarabuelo,  a,  great- 
great-grandfather  or  mother;  tataranieto,  a,  great-great-grandson 
or  daughter;  tataradeudo,  a,  a  remote  kindred. 

174.   Collectives  or  numeral  substantives  are  :  — 


un  par,  a  couple. 
una  docena,  a  dozen. 
una  quincena,y£/&^;z. 
una  veintena,  a  score. 

un  par  de  dias,  de  huevos, 
una  quincena  (de  dias), 
una  treintena  de  anos, 


una  treintena,  a  score  and  a  half. 
una  cuarentena,  two  score. 
una  centena,y£w  score. 
una  gruesa,  a  gross. 

a  couple  of  days,  —  of  eggs. 

a  fortnight. 

a  score  and  a  half  of  years. 


a.    The  term  "  or  so  "  after  numerals  is  expressed  by 
poco  mas  6  menos,  or  by  cosa  de,  a  matter  of:  — 

una  veintena  de  libras  poco  ma's  6  me'nos,  or  cosa  de  una  veintena 
de  libras,  twenty  pounds  or  so,  some  twenty  pounds. 


l  That  is,  English  biscuit,  the  American  "  cracker,"  also  the  teacake  called 
"  lady-fingers,"  and  the  like.  Sea-biscuit  in  Spanish  is  galleta,  "  hard-tack," 
kneaded  with  rancid  olive-oil,  and  used  in  the  marine  as  well  as  the  merchant 
service. 


Numerals. 


175,  Numeral  Adverbs  answer  the  questions,  How 
many  times  ?  How  often  f  and  are  formed  by  the  asso- 
ciation of  a  cardinal  number  or  adjective  with  the  femi- 
nine noun  vez,  a  time  (Lat.  vice-m) :  — 


una  vez,  once. 

dos  veces,  twice. 

tres  veces,  three  times. 

veinte  veces,  twenty  times. 

cien  veces,  one  hundred  times. 


muchas  veces,  often. 
pocas  veces,  few  times,  seldom. 
rara  vez,  or  raras  veces,  seldom. 
otras  veces,  other  times. 
algunas  veces,  sometimes. 


alguna  que  otra  vez,  one  time  and  another. 

a.    Distributives  which    answer   likewise  the  ques- 
tion, How  often  ?  are  expressed  by  todo  or  cada :  — 


todos  los  dias,  meses,  anos, 
todas  las  horas,  veces, 
cada  dia,  mes  y  ano, 
cada  hora,  cada  vez, 
cada  dos  siglos, 
cada  tres  meses, 


every  day,  month,  year, 
every  hour,  each  time, 
every  day,  month,  and  year, 
every  hour,  each  time, 
every  two  centuries, 
every  three  months. 


REMARK.  —  "  Time  "  is  expressed  in  Spanish  in  a  variety  of  ways : 
by  vez,  as  above,  when  it  means  an  occasion,  an  instance  ;  by  tiempo, 
as  a  limited  portion  of  duration  ;  by  hora,  when  it  means  "  o'clock  " ; 
by  rato,  as  to  the  quality  of  an  occasion ;  by  plazo,  as  a  fixed  pe- 
riod ;  German,  Frist :  — 


esta  vez  te  lo  perdono, 

el  tiempo  es  corto, 

no  tengo  tiempo, 

I  que  hora  es  ? 

d  estas  horas  estara  en  Paris, 

ha  llevado  mal  rato, 

i  que  rato  mas  delicioso  ! 

el  plazo  convenido, 

pagare  en  el  plazo  senalado, 

£  plazos  cortos, 


Pll  forgive  you  this  time. 

time  is  short. 

I  have  no  time. 

what  time  is  it?. 

by  this  time  he  is  at  Paris. 

he  had  a  poor  time. 

what  a  delightful  time  ! 

the  time  agreed  on.      [the  time. 

I  shall  pay  at  the  expiration  of 

in  short  instalments. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


The  Pronoun. 

PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

176.  The  personal  pronouns  in  the  nominative  are:  — 


SINGULAR. 

Person. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

First. 
Second. 

Third. 

yo,       /. 
tti,        thou. 
vos,     you. 
el,        he  (if). 
usted,  you  (your  grace)  . 

yo,       /. 

td,        thou. 
vos,      you. 
ella,     she  (if). 
usted,  you  (your  grace)  . 

ello,  it. 

PLURAL. 

First. 
Second. 
Third. 

nosotros,  we. 
vosotros,  you. 
ellos,        they. 
ustedes,   you  (your  graces)  . 

nosotras,  we. 
vosotras,  you. 
ellas,        they. 
ustedes,  you  (your  graces). 

a.  To  these  may  be  added  se  as  the  reflexive  and 
reciprocal  substitute  of  pronouns  of  the  third  person, 
in  all  cases  except  the  nominative.  As  direct  object, 
se  means  ones  self,  himself,  herself,  itself,  yourself; 
pi.,  themselves,  yourselves,  each  other,  one  another. 

REMARK.  —  Names  of  things  and  abstract  qualities  (except  those 
made  so  by  the  neuter  article  lo)  are  masculine  or  feminine  in  Span- 
ish, whatever  be  the  English  gender.  Hence,  el  libro,  the  book  —  £1, 
le,  lo,  it-,  los  libros,  the  books  —  ellos,  los,  they,  them;  la  pluma,  the 
pen  —  ella,  la,  //;  las  plumas,  the  pens — ellas,  las,  they,  them. 
Ello  relates  only  to  a  thought,  or  a  phrase  to  which  gender  cannot  be 
attributed  :  ello,  lo,  it  —  lo  creo,  /  believe  it,  f  think  so.  See  §  84. 


Personal  Pronouns.  g\ 

177.  Nosotros  and  vosotros  are  compounds  of  nos 
and  vos  with  the  plural  indefinite  pronoun  otros,  -as, 
others;  and  hence  the  variation  of  gender,  unknown  to 
the  other  European  languages,  in  the  first  and  second 
persons.     The  appendix  otros  served  originally  to  ex- 
pand or  amplify  the  force  of  we  and  you,  but  it  added 
nothing  to  the  signification,  as   the   French  autres  in 
vous  autres  does.     The  compound  first  appeared  in  the 
latter  half  of  the  fifteenth  century.1 

178.  Nos  is  still  used  officially  in  a  representative 
sense  by  sovereigns,  prelates,  and  magistrates.     It  is 
also  met  with  in  certain  quaint  devotional  formulae  :  — • 


nos  los  Inquisidores, 
nos  el  cabildo  de  tal, 
venga  a  nos  el  tu  reino, 
ruega  por  nos,  Senora, 


we  the  Inquisitors, 
we  the  Chapter  of  so  and  so. 
let  thy  kingdom  come  to  us. 
intercede  for  us,  Lady. 


Pronouns  of  Address. 

179.  The  pronouns  regularly  employed  in  popular 
address  are  tu,  vos,  vosotros,  -as,  and  us  ted ;  besides 
titles  such  as  vuecelencia,  senoria,  tisia,  etc. 

REMARK.  —  At  an  early  period  of  the  vernacular  Castilian,  as 
fixed  by  King  Alfonso  X.,  called  El  Sabio,  or  the  Wise  (A.D.  1252- 
84) ,  and  till  far  down  in  the  fifteenth  century,  the  only  pronouns  of 
address,  aside  from  titles,  were  tii  and  vos,  the  latter  being  then 
applicable  to  one  or  more  persons.  Tu  was  employed  in  sacred 

1  The  compound  forms  do  not  appear  in  the  early  Castilian  Poem  of  the  Cid, 
written  prior  to  the  thirteenth  century;  nor  in  the  Chronicle  of  the  Cid,  first 
printed  in  1512,  but  older  by  several  centuries ;  nor  in  the  Chronicle  of  Spain 
(A.D.  1260),  published  in  1541;  nor  in  the  works  of  the  Marquis  of  Santillana 
in  the  early  part  of  the  fifteenth  century.  They  abound,  however,  in  the  Royal 
Edicts  from  1476,  and  in  the  Chronicle  of  Spain,  by  Diego  de  Valera  (Seville, 
1482),  though  generally  written  throughout  in  two  words,  nos  otros,  vos  otros. 


92  Form  and  Inflection. 

invocation,  in  poetry,  in  the  family,  and  to  Moors  (against  the 
Arabic  ant  a,  thou)  ;  while  vos  was  the  formal  medium  between  man 
and  man,  like  the  English  you.  In  the  sixteenth  century,  under  the 
expansive  influences  of  the  reigns  of  the  Catholic  sovereigns  and  the 
Emperor  Charles  V.,  vuestra  merced,  your  grace,  pi.  vuestras  mer- 
cedes,j0//r£rtf££y,  came  to  be  the  courtly  address  between  gentle- 
men ;  and  vos,  with  its  new  plural  vosotros,  was  reserved  for  a  lofty 
formula  appropriate  to  persons  of  superior  and  inferior  rank,  to 
the  Deity,  and  to  court  poetry,  while  tu  maintained  its  position  in 
the  family  and  in  informal  rhyme.  The  relative  situation  of  such 
words  at  the  present  day  is  as  follows :  — 

180.  Tu,  thou  (nearly  always  translated  you),  is  em- 
ployed :  (a)  in  the  sacred  and  hortative  styles  and  in 
poetry ;    (b)  between    husband   and  wife,   parents  and 
children,  relatives,  and  betrothed  persons ;  (c)  between 
intimate  friends ;  (d)  by  the  native  master  and  mistress 
to  their  domestics ;    (e)   by  everybody  in  speaking  to 
brutes,  pet  animals,  or  even  to  inanimate  objects. 

181.  Vos,  you,  is  now  always  limited  to  one  person, 
male  or  female,  although  joined  to  the  second  person 
plural  of  verbs.     It  is  at  present  employed ;  (a)  inter- 
changeably with  tu  for  sacred  invocation  by  Catholics, 
as  more  distant  and  formal   than  tu;  (U)  in  modern 
literature,  representing  ancient   manners ;    (c)   in  the 
family,  when  the  younger  members  wish  to  show  great 
respect  to  the  elders  ;  (d^)  in  anger  and  scorn,  to  infe- 
riors or  to  those  whom  we  wish  to  address  harshly; 
(<e)  in  translations  from  the  English  and  French,  to 
represent  the  "you"  and  "vous"  of  those  nations. 

182.  Vosotros,  -as,  you,  is  the  plural  of  tu  and  of  vosy 
and  must  be  used  when  there  are  two  or  more  persons 
or   objects   to   whom    singly    tu   or   vos   would   apply. 


Personal  Pronouns.  93 

Beyond  this,  it  is  also  employed  by  public  speakers  be- 
fore religious,  literary,  political,  and  other  assemblies. 
It  is,  therefore,  heard  at  public  sessions  of  the  Acade- 
mies, at  the  Athenaeum,  the  churches,  and  the  theatre, 
by  the  accustomed  or  authorized  speakers.  But  if,  at 
the  play,  the  manager  come  forth  to  make  an  announce- 
ment or  offer  an  apology,  he  would  use  zistedes.  Vosotros 
supposes  the  confidence  and,  to  a  certain  degree,  the 
sympathy  of  the  audience. 

183.  Usted  (pi,  ustedes),  yoti,  is  descended  from  the 
now  obsolete  vuestra  merced,  yozir  grace ;  vuestras 
mercedes,  your  graces  (abbreviated  Vinci.,  VmdsJ),  and 
represents  the  conventional  "you  "  in  all  conditions  of 
life ;  even  in  malice,  anger,  and  satire.  It  is  the  uni- 
versal address  of  society,  and  the  only  one  the  foreigner 
need  ever  employ.  Being  considered  to  be  of  the  third 
person,  it  requires  the  verb,  pronoun-object,  and  pos- 
sessive adjective,  to  be  likewise  in  that  person,  although 
translated  into  English  by  the  second  person. 

At  the  present  day  in  Spain  it  is  either  written  out 
in  full,  or  abbreviated  into  V.  or  Vd.y  pi.  W.  or  Vds. 
These  signs  are  always  to  be  read  usted,  ustedes, 
precisely  as  Mr.  in  English  is  read  Mister,  and  M.  in 
French,  Monsieur: — 


usted  (or  V.)  tiene, 
ustedes  (or  VV.)  tienen, 
^  trae  V.  su  hijo  consigo  ? 
^no  conoce  V.  a  sus  amigos? 


you  have,  i.e.  your  grace  has. 
you  have,  i.e.  your  graces  have. 
do  you  bring  your  son  with  you  ? 
do  you  not  know  your  friends? 


REMARK.  —  Official  titles  of  address  at  court  or  in  government 
circles  are  likewise  joined  with  the  third  person  of  the  verb.  The 
principal  are:  vuestra  (or  su)  majestad  (V.M.),  your  majesty  ; 
vuestra  (or  su)  alteza  (V.  A.)  ,  your  highness,  to  a  prince  or  prince- 


94  Form  and  Inflection. 

regent ;  vuecelencia  or  vuecencia  (V.E.),y0ur  excellency,  to  a  crown 
minister,  an  ambassador,  or  a  grande  of  Spain;  usia  (V.S.),/<?w 
honor,  to  a  judge  or  an  alcalde.1  In  the  Chambers  the  mutual  ad- 
dress of  the  members  is  su  senoria  (S.S.),  his  lordship.  The  Re- 
gents of  the  kingdom  in  royal  minorities  have  the  corporate  title  of 
Majestad,  like  the  king  whom  they  represent ;  and  the  municipal 
councils  that  of  senoria,  or  lordship. 

Title  of  address  is  el  tratamiento ;  as,  el  tratamiento  de  alteza,  the. 
address  of  highness.  To  "thee  and  thou"  anyone  is  tutearle,  or 
llamarle  de  tu  ;  the  latter  may  be  applied  to  any  pronoun  of  address, 
—  llamar  d  uno  de  vos,  de  usted,  to  use  vos,  usted,  to  any  one. 

Inflection. 

184.  The  personal  pronoun  admits  of  a  fuller  inflec- 
tion than  any  other  part  of  speech,  save  the  verb.     The 
dative  and  accusative  cases  have  two  forms :  the  first  of 
which  is  called  the  conjunctive,   because  governed  by 
the  verb ;  and  the  second,  disjunctive,  because  governed 
by  a  preposition,  and  thus  disjoined  from  the  verb  :  — 

Conjunctive.  Disjunctive. 

me  da,  he  gives  (to)  me.  I   acude  a"  mi,  he  applies  to  me. 

te  busca,  he  seeks  thee.  \   a"  ti  busco,  I  seek  thee. 

185.  The  association  of   both    the    conjunctive   and 
disjunctive   forms  to   the    same   verb    constitutes   the 
redundant  or  pleonastic  construction,  very  common  in 
Spanish :  — 


me  da  a  mi,  or  &  mi  me  da, 
te  busca  a"  ti,  or  &  ti  te  busca, 
le  digo  a"  V.,  or  A  V.  le  digo, 
les  estimo  a  VV.,  or  a  VV.  les 
estimo, 


he  gives  (to)  me. 

he  seeks  thee. 

I  say  to  you  (to  him  to  you) . 

I  esteem  you  (them  your  graces). 


1  Formerly  also  much  used  by  the  lower  orders  to  any  gentleman,  but  rather 
provincial  now. 


Personal  Pronotms.  95 

186  The  personal  pronouns  are  inflected  as  follows :  — 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

First  Person. 

N. 

yo,                7. 

nosotros-as,              we. 

G. 

de  mi,           of  me,  of  myself  . 

de  nosotros-as,         of  us,  of  ourselves. 

D. 

me  —  a  mi,  to  me,  to  myself. 

nos  —  a  nosotros-as,  to  us,  to  ourselves. 

A. 

me  —  a  mi,  me,  myself. 

nos  —  a  nosotros-as,  us,  ourselves. 

P. 

mi,                me,  myself. 

nosotros-as,               us,  ourselves. 

Second  Person. 

H. 

tti,                 thou. 

G. 

de  ti,             of  thee,  of  thyself  . 

N.    vosotros-as,            you. 

D. 
A. 
P. 

te  —  a  ti,      to  thee,  to  thyself. 
te  —  a  ti,      thee,  thyself. 
ti,                  thee,  thyself. 

G.   de  vosotros-as,       of  you, 
of  yourselves  . 
D.   os  —  a  vosotros-as,  to  you, 

to  yourselves. 

N. 
G. 
D. 

vos,               you. 
de  vos,          of  you,  of  yourself  . 
os  —  a  vos,  to  you,  to  yourself. 

A.   os  —  a  vosctros-as,  yott, 
yourselves. 
P.   vosotros-as,            you, 

A. 
P. 

os  —  a  vos,  you,  yourself. 
vos,               you,  yotirself. 

yourselves. 

Third  Person  —  Masculine. 

N. 

el,                     he,  it. 

ellos,                        they. 

G. 

de  el,                of  him,  of  it. 

de  ellos,                  of  them. 

D. 

le  —  a  el,         to  him,  to  it. 

les  —  a  ellos,          A?  them. 

A. 

le,  lo  —  a  el,  him,  it. 

los,  les  —  a  ellos,  them. 

P. 

el,                     him,  it. 

ellos,                         /!£?/». 

Third  Person  —  Feminine. 

N. 

ella,                  she,  it. 

ellas,                  they. 

G. 

de  ella,             of  her,  of  it. 

de  ellas,            <?/  //&<?;>/. 

D. 

le  —  a  ella,      to  her,  to   it. 

les  —  a  ellas,   /<?  them. 

A. 

la  —  a  ella,      her,  it. 

las  —  a  ellas,   them. 

P. 

ella,                   her,  it. 

ellas,                  /fti/K. 

Form  and  Inflection. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Third  Person  —  Neuter. 

N. 

ello,  lo,     it,  that,  so. 

G. 

de  ello,     of  it. 

D. 

a  ello,       to  it. 

(Wanting.) 

A. 

lo,             it,  that,  so. 

P. 

ello,          it. 

Reflexive  Substitute  of   Third  Person. 

G. 

de  si,         of  himself,  of  herself, 

de  si,        of  themselves,  of  each  other. 

of  itself. 

D. 

se  —  a  si,  to  himself,  to  herself, 

se  —  a  si,  to  themselves,  to  each  other. 

to  itself. 

A. 

se  —  a  si,  himself,  herself,    it- 

se —  a  si,  themselves,  each  other. 

self,  one's  self. 

P. 

si,               himself,   herself,    it- 

si,              themselves,  each  other. 

self. 

REMARKS    ON    THE    CASES. 
Nominative. 

187.  The  subject  nominative  of  the  personal  pronoun 
is  usually  suppressed,  unless  required  on  account  of 
emphasis,  contrast,  ambiguity,  or  distinctness  :  — 


voy  a*  casa, 

volvera  pronto, 

iqu£  escribes?  estdn  locos, 

,;  que'  he  de  hacer  yo  ? 

&\  se  va,  ella  se  queda, 

no  sabe  lo  que  yo  quisiera, 


I  am  going  home. 

he  will  return  soon.  [crazy. 

what  are  you  writing?  they  are 

what  am  /to  do ? 

he  goes,  she  stays. 

he  does  not  know  what  I  want. 


a.    Sometimes  its  use  is  merely  rhetorical :  — 


yo  soy  la  luz  verdadera, 

yo  he  dicho  en  mis  discursos, 


I  am  the  true  light. 

I  have  said  in  my  speeches. 


Personal  Pronouns. 


97 


188.   The  subject  of  an  impersonal  verb  is  not  ex- 
pressed :  — 


conviene ;  me  parece, 
basta ;  se  sigue, 
Jlueve ;  hay, 


it  is  fitting ;  it  seems  to  me. 
it  is  enough ;  it  follows, 
it  rains ;  there  is,  there  are. 


a.    But  when  it  points  with  emphasis  to  an  idea  -or  to 
a  following  qit,ey  the  subject  ello  is  employed  :  — 


<jque  es  ello? 

ello  es  que  hay  animales  muy 
cientificos  (Iriarte) , 


what  is  it? 

the  fact  is  that  there  are  some 
very  scientific  animals. 


REMARK.  —  In  es  que,  the  fact  is  that,  there  is  an  ellipse, 
full  form  es  el  caso  que^  or  el  caso  es  que>  is  often  met  with. 


The 


189.  When,  in  English,  the  pronoun-subject  has  a 
substantive  in  apposition  with  it  that  limits  or  defines 
it,  in  Spanish  the  substantive,  accompanied  by  the 
definite  article,  replaces  the  pronoun  as  the  subject  of 
the  verb,  and  the  latter  is  put  in  the  person  and  number 
appropriate  to  the  suppressed  pronoun  :  — 


los  Espanoles  estamos  muy  atra- 

sados, 
tenemos  el  gusto  los  liberates  de 

ver  el  cambio, 
la  mayor  ofensa  que   los   prin- 

cipes  podeis  hacer  a  Dios,  es 

no  osar  nadie  avisaros. 

(Guevara,  1537.) 


we  Spaniards  are  very  backward. 

we  liberals  have  the  satisfaction 

of  seeing  the  change, 
the    greatest    offence     that    ye 

princes   can    commit    against 

God,  is  that  none  dare  warn 

you. 


a.    If  the  pronoun  and  apposition  are  both  expressed, 
the  latter  must  always  retain  the  definite  article  :  — 


nosotros  los  Espanoles, 
vosotras  las  senoras, 


we  Spaniards, 
you  ladies. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


190.  The  position  of  the  pronoun-subject  is  subser 
vient  to  the  general  laws  of  taste ;  but  emphasis,  enthu- 
siasm, and  often  elegance,  are  exhibited  by  placing  it 
after  the  verb,  as  in  the  interrogative  state:  — 


no  fue  el  en  verdad  el  unico  in- 
tolerante  de  su  siglo, 

hombre  del  cual  pienso  yo  que 
no  le  hay  superior  en  la  his- 
toria, 


indeed  he  was  not  the  only  in- 
tolerant man  of  his  time. 

a  man  who  I  think  has  no  su- 
perior in  history.  (Cdnovas 
del  Castillo,  1877.) 


Genitive. 


191.  The  genitive  has  all  the  meanings  of  the  prepo- 
sition de,  of,  from,  by,  with,  at,  to,  and  often  it  is  not 
translated  at  all :  — 


habla  de  tf,  de  nosotros, 
se  rie  de  mi,  de  ellos, 
esta  casa  es  de  ella, 
se  olvida  de  si,  de  ello, 


he  speaks  of  thee,  of  us. 
he  laughs  at  me,  at  them, 
this  house  belongs  to  her  (is  of), 
he  forgets  (of)  himself  (of)  it. 


Dative. 


192.  The  dative  is  not  only  translated  by  to,  but  also 
by  for,  from  (with  the  idea  of  taking  away),  and  very 
often  it  imparts  to  a  following  definite  article  the 
meaning  of  a  possessive  adjective:  — 


me  habla,  te  da, 
nos  procura, 
le  cortd  el  brazo, 
se  hirid  la  mano, 
les  quita  el  sueno, 


he  speaks  to  me,  he  gives  thee. 
he  gets  for  us. 
he  cut  his  (another's)  arm. 
he  wounded  his  (own)  hand, 
he  takes  away  their  sleep. 


a.    In  English,  the  signs  of  the  dative  (to,  for,  from) 
are  often  suppressed  :  — 


me  da,  le  dice, 

nos  procura  destinos, 


he  gives  me,  he  tells  him. 
he  gets  us  places  (positions) . 


Personal  Pronouns. 


99 


193.  In  Spanish,  the  dative,  with  another  pronoun- 
object,  is  very  frequently  superfluous,  and  may  be 
considered  as  an  expletive :  — 


llevatelo  (of  a  purchase) , 
se  lo  com  id, 

quitatemelo  (of  removal) , 
echatemela  (la  pluma), 


take  it  (for  thyself ). 
he  ate  it  up  (for  himself), 
take  it  away  from  me, 
toss  it  to  me  (the  pen) . 


194.  Since  the  datives  le  and  les  are  common  to  both 
genders,  some  writers  improperly  employ  the  accusa- 
tives la  and  las  for  these  feminines :  — 


le  digo,  la  digo, 
les  presto  el  libro, 
las  presto  la  pluma, 


I  say  to  him,  I  tell  her. 

I  lend  them  (men)  the  book. 

I  lend  them  (women)  the  pen. 


Accusative. 


195.    The  accusative  case  is  governed  directly  by  the 
verb :  — 


me  ve,  te  llama, 
nos  aman,  os  enganan, 
le  conoce,  la  sigue, 
los  odia,  las  recibe, 
el  libro  —  le  or  lo  tomo, 
la  pluma  —  la  veo, 
los  libros  —  los  tomo, 
las  plumas  —  las  veo, 


he  sees  me,  he  calls  thee. 
they  love  us,  they  deceive  you. 
he  knows  him,  he  follows  her. 
he  hates  them,  he  receives  them, 
the  book  —  I  take  it  (him), 
the  pen  —  I  see  it  (her), 
the  books  —  I  take  them, 
the  pens  —  I  see  them. 


REMARK.  —  Many  modern  writers  use  lo  of  persons  as  well  as  of 
things,  but  the  student  should  follow  the  dominant  practice  which 
makes  le  refer  to  persons  and  masculine  words,  while  lo  is  limited  to 
things  to  which  gender  cannot  be  assigned. 

196.  The  use  of  les  for  los  is  frequently  met  with, 
but  is  discouraged  by  the  Academy.  In  the  pleonastic 
construction  with  ustedes,  however,  it  is  admissible: — 


IOO 


Form  and  Inflection. 


les  busque  a*  ustedes, 
los  conoci  en  seguida, 
les  mandd  que  no  saliesen, 


I  looked  for  you,  I  sought  you. 

I  knew  them  at  once. 

he  ordered  them  not  to  go  out. 


REMARK.  —  In  the  ancient  language,  from  which  the  last  example 
is  taken,  many  verbs  seem  to  have  governed  the  dative  which  are 
now  usually  found  with  the  accusative. 

197.  The  pronouns  le  or  lo,  la,  los,  las,  have  an 
indefinite  signification  of  one,  some,  any,  such,  negative 
none,  when  they  stand  in  the  predicate  "with  the 
impersonal  verb  hay,  there  is,  there  are,  and  relate  to 
a  substantive  taken  in  an  indeterminate  sense:  — 


cree  que  no  hay  dia  de  juicio,  y 

le  (or  lo)  hay, 
trae  una  silla  si  la  hay  por  ahi, 

comprare  billetes  si  los  hay, 
si  hubiese  alguna  sociedad  patri- 
otica  como  las  hay  politicas, 


he  believes  that  there  is  no  judg- 
ment day,  and  there  is  one. 

bring  a  chair  if  there  is  one 
thereabouts.  [any. 

I  shall  buy  tickets  if  there  are 

if  there  were  some  patriotic  so- 
ciety as  there  are  political  ones. 


198.  The  same  pronouns  signify  some,  one,  ones,  when 
they  are  used  with  personal  verbs  relating  to  a  substan- 
tive taken  in  a  partitive  sense  :  — 


^tiene  V.  pan?  le  or  lo  tengo, 
^quien  quiere  agua?  la  quiero  yo, 
;  felices  pascuas  tenga  usted !  — 

las  tenga  usted  muy  felices, 
<itiene  V.  ganas  de  comer?  las 

tengo  y  urgentes, 


have  you  bread  ?  I  have  (some) . 
who  wants  water?  I  want  some, 
a  merry  Christmas  to  you !  —  may 

you  have  very  merry  ones, 
have  you  an  appetite  ?    I  have, 

and  a  pressing  one. 


199.   Lo,  accusative  of  ello,  represents  a  phrase,  an 
idea,  to  which  gender  cannot  be  assigned :  — 

I  cree  usted  lo  que  dice  ? 

no  lo  creo, 

<iconviene  hacerlo  6  no? 


do  you  believe  what  he  says  ? 

I  do  not  believe  it. 

is  it  worth  while  to  do  it  or  not? 


Personal  Pronouns. 


101 


200.  Lo  is  equivalent  to  one,  such,  when  it  stands  in 
the  predicate  with  the  verb  to  be,  referring  to  a  fore- 
going substantive :  — 


^es  ella  huerfana?  lo  es, 
^  son  ellas  huerfanas  ?  lo  son, 
^es  usted  caballero?  lo  soy, 
sea  cristiano  6  no  lo  sea, 
afirmaba  el  autor  que  lo  era  tam- 

bien  de  un  Viaje, 
vf  que  decia  "carta";   eralo  en 

efecto, 


is  she  an  orphan?  she  is  (one), 
are  they  orphans?  they  are. 
are  you  a  gentleman?  I  am. 
whether  he  be  a  Christian  or  not. 
the  author  affirmed  that  he  was 

one  of  some  Travels  too- 
I  saw  that  it  said  "  Epistle";  in 

fact  it  was  one. 


201.  When  lo  stands  in  the  predicate  of  the  verb  to  be, 
and  relates  to  an  adjective,  it  is  equivalent  to  so:  — 

si  el  esta  contento,  yo  no  lo  estoy, 
<:  sera  ocioso  emprenderlo  ? 
si  que  lo  sera", 
los  ladrones  son  muy  honrados, 

pero  tambien  lo  son  los  ver- 

dugos, 


if  he  is  satisfied,  I  am  not  (so), 
will  it  be  vain  to  undertake  it? 
yes,  it  will  be. 

robbers  are  very  honest  people, 
but  so  are  hangmen  likewise. 


REMARK.  —  The  idiomatic  formulae,  Is  it  I?  is  it  thou?  it  is  I, 
it  is  thou,  etc.,  are  expressed  in  Spanish  by  the  simple  verb  to  be  (I 
am,  thou  art;  am  I?  art  thou?  etc.)  :  — 


,;quien  es?  yo  soy, 

<i  son  ustedes  ?  nosotros  somos, 

<isoy  yo,  Senor?  tu  eres, 


who  is  it?  it  is  I. 
is  it  you?  it  is  we. 
Lord,  is  it  I  ?  it  is  thou. 


Prepositional. 

202.  The  prepositional  case  is  that  form  of  the  pronoun 
before  which  all  prepositions  must  stand.  It  is  the  same 
as  the  nominative  in  form,  save  in  mi,  ti,  and  si :  — 


sin  mi,  para  ti, 

con  el,  por  usted, 

a"  nosotros,  de  vosotros, 


without  me,  for  thee. 
with  him,  by  you. 
,  Ip  us,  of  rt/^from  you. 


102 


Form  and  Inflection. 


203.  By  exception,  the  preposition  con,  with,  unites 
as  one  word  to  the  forms  -migo,  -tigo,  -sigo  —  the  "go" 
being  a  forgotten  remnant  of  the  Latin  cum  in  mecum, 
tecum,  secum :  — 


conmigo,  contigo, 
consigo, 

con  61,  con  ella, 

con  ello,  con  nosotros, 


with  me,  with  thee. 
with  himself,  herself,  etc. 


but 


with  him  (it),  with  her  (it), 
with  it,  with  us. 


204.  The  adverb  alii,  there,  in  it,  is  often  used  instead 
of  a  pronoun  in  the  prepositional  case  :  — 


^esta  en  la  cajita?  alii  esta, 
la  pintura  —  clava  alii  los  ojos, 


is  it  in  the  box?  it  is  in  it.      [it. 
the  painting  —  fix  your  eyes  on 


Position  of  the  Object. 

205.  The  conjunctive  forms  of  the  dative  and  accusa- 
tive cases  regularly  stand  before  the  finite  verb ;  but 
to  infinitives,  gerunds,  and  imperatives  conjugated 
affirmatively,  they  are  appended  as  one  word :  — 

he  hears  me,  to  hear  me. 
hearing  me,  hear  (thou)  me. 
I  tell  thee,  to  tell  thee. 
telling  thee,  tell  (thou)  me. 


me  oye,  oirme, 
oydndome,  dyeme 
te  digo,  decirte, 
dicie'ndote,  dime, 
no  le  escuches, 
no  me  digas  eso, 


do  not  listen  to  him. 
do  not  tell  me  that. 


206.  Objective  pronouns  may,  however,  be  appended 
to  the  finite  verb  when  it  begins  a  sentence,  unless 
negative :  — 


re'stanos  decir  (no  nos  resta), 
negdles  el  cielo  este  gozo, 
se'ale  la  tierra  leve, 
pUceme,  dijo  el  cyr? ,  < 


it  remains  for  us  to  say. 
heaven  denied  them  this  boon, 
light  be  the  dust  above  him  ! 
>  I  it  plca$es  me,  said  the  curate. 


Personal  Pronouns. 


103 


207.  If  an  infinitive  depend  on  a  verb  or  on  another 
infinitive,  the  pronoun  may  stand  before  the  verb  or  be 
attached  to  either  infinitive  :  — 


no  quiso  decirme,  or    no  me 

quiso  decir,  [buscar, 

voy  a*   buscarlos,  or  los  voy  a" 

sin  volver  a  preguntarles,  or  sin 

volverles  a  preguntar, 


he  did  not  care  to  tell  me. 

I  am  going  to  look  for  them, 
without  asking  them  again  (re- 
turning to  ask  them). 


a.  If  the  verb  or  infinitive  do  not  admit  an  object, 
the  pronoun  attaches  to  the  word  that  governs  it  ac- 
cording to  the  primary  rule  :  — 

los  vid  venir, 
vino  a*  verme, 
al  oirnos  discurrir  asi, 


he  saw  them  come, 
he  came  to  see  me. 
on  hearing  us  discourse  thus. 


208.  When  the  gerund  is  in  the  progressive  form  of 
the  verb  with  estar,  to  be ;  ir,  to  go ;  venir,  to  come ; 
andar,  to  go,  the  object-pronoun  may  attach  to  it,  or 
stand  before  the  verb  ;  but  the  latter  disposition  is 
preferable :  — 


lo  estamos  viendo  todos  los  dias, 
los  voy  buscando, 
os  vamos  comprendiendo, 
nos  iba  siguiendo, 


we  are  seeing  it  every  day. 
I  am  looking  for  them, 
we  are  getting  to  understand  you. 
he  went  on  following  us. 


209.  The  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  im- 
perative mode  lose  the  s  and  the  d  of  the  respective 
endings  when  the  reflexives  nos  and  os  are  attached 
to  them :  — 


ame'monos  (for  ame'mosnos) , 
vdmonos  (for  vayamosnos) , 
amaos  (for  amados) , 
detene'os  (for  detenedos), 
rendios  (for  rendidos), 


let  us  love  one  another, 
let  us  go. 

love  (ye)  one  another, 
stop  (yourselves), 
surrender  (yourselves). 


IO4 


Form  and  Inflection. 


REMARK.  —  The  above  constitute  the  natural  and  regular  laws  for 
the  position  of  the  conjunctive  pronouns.  There  are  some  devia- 
tions in  practice  from  them  which  the  student  is  advised  not  to  imi- 
tate, since  their  application  would  be  more  or  less  quaint  and 
inelegant,  or  dependent  on  a  wide  experience  of  the  language  at  all 
epochs. 

Disjunctive  Form. 

210.  The  disjunctive  or  prepositional  form  of  the 
dative  and  accusative  cases  is  used  when  the  verb,  from 
its  intransitive  nature  or  signification,  does  not  (in 
Spanish)  admit  an  object  without  a  preposition:  — 


acudid  a"  mi,  a*  ti,  a*  vos, 
viene  a"  nosotros  y  nos  dice, 
nos  acercamos  a  vosotros, 
se  dirijio  a  ellos,  a  ellas, 


he  applied  to  me,  to  thee,  to  you. 
he  comes  to  us  and  says  (to  us), 
we  draw  near  to  you. 
he  addressed  (himself  to)  them. 


211.  It  is  likewise  used  with  all  kinds  of  verbs  in 
emphatic,  intensive,  and  antithetic  utterances,  in  excla- 
mations, and  in  answer  to  a  question  without  the  verb :  — 


;a  ti  llamo,  Sefior! 

los  lazos  que  a*  mi  le  unen, 

<;£  el  buscas  ahora? 

nadie  osa  avisar  a"  vosotros  y  re- 

prender  a"  vuestros  cortesanos, 
la  candela  alumbra  a*  los  otros  y 

quema  a*  si  misma, 
el  prmcipe  nos  puede  avisar  y 

nosotros  d  el, 
,10.  quien  busca  fulano? 
a"  V.,a"  mi,  a"  ellos, 


Lord,  to  Thee  I  call ! 
the  bonds  that  unite  him  to  me. 
are  you  looking  for  him  now  ? 
no  one  ventures  to  warn  jw/  and 

rebuke  your  courtiers. 
the  lamp  gives  light  to  others 

and  consumes  itself, 
the  prince  may  warn  us  and  we 

him. 

whom  is  such  a  one  looking  for? 
for  you,  for  me,  for  them, 
(do  you  ^ay)  that  to  him ! 


212.  When  there  are  two  verbs,  the  one  of  which  is 
intransitive  and  the  other  transitive,  directly  or  indi- 
rectly, each  may  have  its  appropriate  regimen  :  — 


llego  a"  ellos  y  les  digo, 


I  come  up  to  them  and  say  (to 
them) . 


Personal  Pronouns. 


105 


213.    Some  verbs   require  the  disjunctive  with   one 
signification  and  the  conjunctive  with  another:  — 

no  vuelvas  mas  a  dl,  do  not  return  to  him  again, 

me  vuelve  la  cara,  he  turns  his  face  to  me. 

cedo  d  ella,  I  give  way  to  her. 

le  cedo  el  paso,  I  allow  her  to  pass. 


Pleonastic  Construction. 


214.  The  conjunctive  and  disjunctive  pronouns  may 
be  associated  to  the  same  verb,  not  merely  to  give 
emphasis,  but  also  to  amplify  the  phrase.  Either 
pronoun  may  come  first,  but  greater  intensity  is  often 
secured  when  precedence  is  given  to  the  disjunctive:  — 


a*  ti  te  conviene  eso, 
a  el  le  aprecian  mucho, 
±3.  mi  que  me  importa? 
quiso  enganarnos  a*  nosotros, 
^  a  vosotros  os  gusta  eso  ? 


that  is  for  your  interest, 
they  regard  him  highly, 
what  do  /  care  ? 
he  wanted  to  deceive  us. 
do  you  like   that?    (does 
please  you?) 


that 


215.  Any  substantive  or  appositive  may  replace  the 
disjunctive  pronoun,  preserving  the  redundant  con- 
struction with  the  conjunctive:  — 


le  aseguro  al  ministro,       [bajar, 
a*  los  Indios  les  obligaron  d  tra- 
a"  los  caballeros  les  parecio  bien, 
al  hombre  no   le   es   permitido 

obrar  con  libertad,  [ficio, 
a*  todos  nos  reportara  un  bene- 
a"  los  Espanoles  nos  gusta  char- 

lar  (or  parlar) , 


I  assure  the  minister.  [work, 
they  compelled  the  Indians  to 
it  seemed  good  to  the  gentlemen, 
man  is  not  allowed  to  act  with 

freedom. 

it  will  bring  us  all  a  benefit, 
we  Spaniards  like  to  gossip  (it 

pleases  us  S.  to  gossip). 


216.  A  similar  redundant  construction  obtains  with 
the  conjunctive  pronoun  and  a  substantive  in  the 
accusative :  — 


io6 


Form  and  Inflection. 


eso  no  lo  hago, 

es  amigo  de  apuntarlo  todo, 

todo  me  lo  enviaba  mi  dama, 

casa  no  la  tenian, 

cosa  que  no  le  me  posible  el  cum- 

plirla, 
hombres    como    Cdrlos    quinto 

nadie  los  volvera  ya  ma's  d  ver, 


I'll  not  do  that.  [thing, 

he  is  fond  of  jotting  down  every- 
my  lady  sent  me  everything, 
house  they  had  none, 
a  thing  that  it  was  not  possible 

for  him  to  fulfil, 
no  one  will  ever  again  see  men 

like  Charles  the  Fifth. 


Inflection  of  TJsted. 

217.  Usted  is  inflected  like  any  personal  substantive ; 
as,  hombre,  mitjer.  To  avoid  its  unpleasant  repetition, 
it  has  for  pronominal  substitutes  the  datives  and  accu- 
satives of  //  and  ella,  together  with  the  common  reflexive 
and  reciprocal  substitute  of  the  third  person  :  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
P. 

usted,                         you. 
de  usted,                      ofyoti. 
a  usted,  subs,  le,        to  you. 
a  usted,  subs,  le,  la,      you. 
usted,                         you. 

ustedes,                             you. 
de  ustedes,                          of  you. 
a  ustedes,  les,                  to  you. 
a  ustedes,  los,  las  (les),      you. 
ustedes,                              you. 

G. 
D. 
A. 
P. 

de  si,  of  yourself. 
se  —  a  si,  to  yourself. 
se  —  a  si,      yourself. 
si,      yourself. 

de  si,  of  yourselves. 
se  —  a  si,  to  yourselves. 
se  —  a  si,      yourselves. 
si,      yourselves. 

218.  To  avoid  the  disagreeable  repetition  of  a  formal 
address,  usted  as  subject  may  be  given  once,  and  left 
understood  afterward  :  — 

usted  no  sabe  lo  que  quiere,          |   you  do  not  know  what  you  want. 

219.  As   object,    usted  may   be   represented   by   its 
pronominal  substitutes:  — 


Personal  Pronouns. 


107 


devuelvo  d  V.  el  libro  y  le  pido 

otro, 

vengo  d.  ver  a  VV.  y  a  decirles, 
oigo  a  V.,  mas  no  le  veo, 
busque  a  VV.,  mas  no  les  en- 

contre, 


I  return  you  the  book  and  ask 
you  for  another.  [you. 

I  come  to  see  you  and  to  say  to 

I  hear  you,  but  I  do  not  see  you. 

I  looked  for  you,  but  I  did  not 
find  you. 


220.  In  short  sentences,  usted,  as  subject,  may  be 
suppressed ;  and,  as  object,  may  be  replaced  by  one  of 
its  substitutes,  provided  no  ambiguity  would  arise  :  — 

you  do  me  a  great  favor, 
that  is  all  I  have  to  tell  you. 
I  tell  you  and  I  repeat  it. 


me  hace  un  gran  favor, 

es  cuanto  le  tengo  que  decir, 

les  digo  y  lo  repito, 


221.   The   oblique    cases   of   listed  may   replace   the 
possessive  adjective:  — 

at  your  feet,  lady  (at  presenta- 
tion or  exif).  \_sahitation. 
I  kiss  your  hand,   sir   (formal 


&  los  pies  de  V.,  sefiora, 
beso  a  V.  la  mano,  cabal lero, 


222.  Usted,  as  subject,  may  stand  before  or  after  the 
verb  to  which  it  is  nominative.  In  the  compound  tenses 
it  can  never  separate  the  auxiliary  and  participle,  but 
takes  its  place  before  or  after  both  :  — 

you  do  not  know. 

you  will  find  it. 

I  hope  you  will  do  us  the  favor 

of  remaining  with  us. 
have  you  received  the  book? 


usted  no  sabe,  or  no  sabe  V., 

lo  hallaran  ustedes, 

espero  que  nos  hara  V.  el  favor 

de  quedar  con  nosotros, 
^ha  recibido  V.  el  libro? 


a.    The  substitutes  of  tested  follow  the  general  law  of 
position  laid  down  for  conjunctive  pronouns  :  — 

le  digo,  les  digo,  I  tell  you  (sing,  and  pi.) . 

diciendole,  diciendoles,  telling  you. 

decirle,  buscarles,  to  tell  you,  to  look  for  you. 

retfrese  V.,  no  se  retire  V.,  retire,  do  not  retire. 


io8 


Form  and  Inflection. 


223.    Usted  and   its  substitutes  form  the  pleonastic 
construction  when  joined  to  the  same  verb:  — 


ledirdd  V., 

le  busco  d  V., 

^que*  le  pasa  a"  V.  (sing.)  ? 

,;  quelespasa  a  VV.  (//.)? 


I  shall  tell  you. 

I  look  for  you. 

what  is  the  matter  with  you? 

what  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 


224.  All  adjectives,  past  participles,  and  variable  words 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  tt?&</when  they  qualify 
or  relate  to  it :  — 


es  usted  huerfana, 
esta*  V.  enganado,  sefior, 
esta  V.  enganada,  senora, 
VV.  mismos  son  los  traidores, 
VV.  mismas  son  las  traidoras, 


you  are  an  orphan, 
you  are  deceived,  sir. 
you  are  deceived,  madam, 
you  yourselves  are  the  traitors, 
you  yourselves  are  the  traitor- 
esses. 


The  Reflexive  Pronoun. 


225.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons 
have,  in  the  oblique  cases,  a  reflexive  meaning  when 
they  refer  to  the  same  person  as  the  subject  :  — 


me  hallo  ocupado, 
te  enganas, 
nos  preguntamos, 
os  arrojais, 


(I  find  myself,)  I  am  busy, 
thou  deceivest  thyself. 
we  ask  ourselves, 
you  cast  yourselves. 


226.  Pronouns  of  the  third  person,  including  usted, 
refer,  in  the  oblique  cases,  to  a  different  person  or  thing 
from  the  subject.  Hence,  each  gender  employs  the 
common  substitute  se  to  express  reflexive  or  reciprocal 
action  on  the  subject:  — 


se  olvida  de  el, 
se  olvida  de  si, 


he  forgets  him  (another), 
he  forgets  himself. 


Personal  Pronouns. 


109 


le  engana, 
se  engana, 
lo  abre  ;  se  abre, 
los  hieren, 
se  hieren, 

V.  la  engana ;  V.  se  engana, 
VV.  las  enganan ;  VV.  se  enga- 
nan, 

se  toman  alimento  para  ellos, 
se  toman  alimento  para  si, 


he  deceives  him. 

he  deceives  himself. 

he  opens  it ;  it  opens  (itself) . 

they  strike  them. 

they  strike  themselves,  [yourself. 

you  deceive  her;    you    deceive 

you  deceive  them ;  you  deceive 
yourselves. 

they  take  along  food  for  them. 

they  take  along  food  for  them- 
selves. 


227.  When  se  represents  a  neuter  or  an  impersonal 
subject,  it  may  be  translated  by  one,  they,  we,  you, 
people,  taken  in  an  indeterminate  sense,  or  the  verb 
with  se  may  be  rendered  by  the  passive  voice  :  — 


se  dice  (it  says  itself) , 

se  avisa, 

nada  se  saca  con  eso, 

aqui  se  come  bien, 

se  ha  mandado, 

se  ve,  se  conoce, 


they  say,  it  is  said. 

they  give  notice,  notice  is  given. 

you1!!  gain  nothing  by  that. 

here  you  dine  well. 

orders  have  been  issued. 

it  is  clear,  it  is  evident. 


228.  A  reflexive  verb,  as  a  rule,  replaces  the  passive 
voice,  which  may  often  be  translated  by  the  indefinite 
they:  — 


aqui  se  habla  Espafiol, 
se  equivocan  mucho, 
se  encuentra  gente, 
se  compran  libros  viejos, 
se  entregan  las  armas, 


Spanish  is  spoken  here. 

they  are  much  mistaken. 

you  find  people. 

old  books  are  bought. 

they  give  up  their  arms  (the  arms 

surrender   themselves   or  are 

surrendered) . 


229.   The  reflexive   se  is  very  generally  omitted  in 
translation  as  superfluous  in  English : 


1 10 


Form  and  Inflection. 


se  digna  protegerme, 
se  marchan  en  seguida, 
se  va  haciendo  cajista, 
se  queda  con  el, 
se  vuelve  loco  de  gozo, 
se  mega  a  complacerme, 


he  deigns  to  aid  me. 

they  depart  at  once.         [poser. 

he  is  getting  to  be  a  (type)  com- 

he  keeps  it  (remains  with  it). 

he  is  overcome  with  joy. 

he  refuses  to  accommodate  me. 


230.    Se  stands  in  the  dative  to  replace  a  possessive 
adjective  with  a  determinative  object:  — 

se  pone  la  levita,  j    he  puts  on  his  coat, 

se  quita  el  abrigo, 


se  ha  cortado  la  mano. 


he  takes  off  his  overcoat, 
he  has  cut  his  hand. 


231.   The  dative  of  interest  is  frequently  met  with  in 
Spanish,  and  sometimes  has  the  force  of  an  expletive :  — 


se  propone, 
se  lo  comio, 
cdjetela  —  la  moneda, 
lleveselo  V.  —  el  libro, 
subetelo  —  el  baul, 
echatemelo,  [fermos, 

a  mi  se  me  mueren  menos  en- 


he  proposes  (to  himself). 

he  ate  it  up  (for  himself). 

pick  it  up  —  the  coin. 

take  it  —  the  book. 

carry  it  up  stairs  —  the  trunk. 

toss  it  to  me.  [die  to  me). 

I  lose  fewer  cases  (fewer  cases 


232.  Se  has  very  often  an  adverbial  force,  or  it  receives 
the  action  of  a  transitive  verb,  leaving  it  practically 
intransitive  :  — 


se  va,  se  vuelve, 
se  cae,  se  lleva, 
se  sale,  se  muere, 
se  rompe,  se  dobla, 
se  abre,  se  cierra, 


he  goes  away,  he  turns  around, 
he  falls  down,  he  carries  off. 
it  leaks,  he  is  dying, 
it  breaks,  it  folds, 
it  opens,  it  shuts. 


Two  Objective  Pronouns. 

233.  When  a  verb  governs  two  conjunctive  pronouns, 
the  dative  precedes  the  accusative,  except  only  the 
reflexive  se,  which  always  stands  first,  whichever  be 
its  case :  — 


Personal  Pronouns. 


ill 


me  lo  da,  me  la  da, 

te  los  busca,  te  las  busca. 

nos  lo  presta, 

os  los  ofrezco, 

te  lo  llevas, 

se  me  olvida, 


he  gives  it  to  me. 

he  seeks  them  for  thee. 

he  lends  it  to  us. 

I  offer  them  to  you. 

thou  takest  it  for  thyself. 

(it  forgets  itself  to  me)  I  forget. 


234.  When  the  conjunctive  datives  le,  to  him,  to  her, 
to  it,  to  you,  and  les,  to  them,  to  you,  meet  a  pronoun- 
object  beginning  with  1,  they  assume  the  common  form 
se.  This  word  was  anciently  written  ge,  and  is  not  to 
be  confounded  with  the  reflexive  of  the  third  person  L :  — 


se  le  doy  —  el  libro, 
se  lo  presto  —  a  ella, 
se  lo  digo  —  a  usted, 
se  les  envia  —  a  ellos, 
se  los  presta  —  a  ellas, 
se  lo  digo  —  a  ustedes, 


I  give  it  (the  book)  to  him. 
I  lend  it  to  her. 

I  say  it  to  you  (sing.).  [them, 
he  sends  them  (persons)  to 
he  lends  them  (books)  to  them. 
I  say  it  to  you  (plur.). 


a.    The  mutations  of  le,  les  into  se  appear,  then,  as 
follows :  — 


le  le     and 

les  le     become 

se  le;     ancient, 

gele. 

lela 

les  la 

se  la; 

ge  la. 

lelo 

leslo 

se  lo; 

ge  lo. 

leles 

les  les 

se  les; 

ge  les. 

le  los 

les  los 

se  los; 

ge  los. 

lelas 

les  las 

se  las; 

ge  las. 

1  Se,  substitute  for  le,  les,  and  se,  reflexive,  came  to  be  identical  in  form  by 
the  early  vitiated  pronunciation  of  the  primitive  ge.  The  Latin  illi,  illis,  first 
produced  the  Spanish  datives  li  and  Us,  later  le,  les,  which,  before  a  pronoun- 
object  in  /,  passed  over  into  ge,  like  muger  from  mulier,  and  ageno  from  alienus. 
But  ge  and  the  reflexive  se  were  anciently  pronounced  almost  alike,  —  she 
(Alsatian-French,  je),  —  and  hence  the  graphic  confusion  of  them  near  the 
close  of  the  fifteenth  century.  Each  should,  therefore,  be  kept  functionally 
distinct,  although  they  are  constantly  interchanging  with  apparent  identity :  — 


se  lo  procura  (se  =  le), 
se  lo  procura  (se  =  se), 
se  los  compran  (se  =  les), 
se  los  compran  (se  =  se), 


he  gets  it  for  him. 
he  gets  it  for  himself, 
they  buy  them  for  them, 
they  buy  them  for  themselves. 


112 


Form  and  Inflection. 


235.  The  following  table  presents  examples  of  two 
conjunctive  pronouns,  the  first  of  which  is  in  the  dative 
case,  and  the  second  in  the  accusative.  When  these 
pronouns  are  attached  to  the  verbal  form,  as  represented 
in  the  second  column,  the  verbal  form  must  be  accented ; 
thus,  digotelo,  /  tell  thee  so :  — 


FIRST    PERSON    WITH    THIRD.  —  ORDER,    DAT.    AND    ACC. 

Before  the 

Attached  to 

Verb. 

the  Verb. 

Reflexive. 

me  le, 

-mele, 

him, 

him, 

me  la, 

-mela, 

her,  it, 

her,  it, 

me  lo, 

-melo, 

it, 

to  me. 

it, 

-  to  myself. 

me  los  (les), 

-melos  (les), 

them  (w.), 

them, 

me  las, 

-melas, 

them(/), 

them, 

nos  le, 

-nosle, 

him, 

him, 

nos  la, 

-nosla, 

her,  it, 

her,  it, 

nos  lo, 

-noslo, 

it, 

to  us. 

it, 

to  ourselves. 

nos  los  (les), 

-noslos  (les), 

them, 

them, 

nos  las, 

-noslas, 

them, 

them, 

SECOND   PERSON  WITH   THIRD.  —  ORDER,  DAT.   AND   ACC. 

tele, 

-tele, 

him, 

him, 

tela, 

-tela, 

her,  it, 

her,  it, 

telo, 

-telo, 

it, 

to  thee. 

it, 

to  thyself. 

te  los  (les), 

-telos  (les), 

them, 

them, 

te  las, 

-telas, 

them, 

them, 

os  le, 

-osle, 

him, 

him, 

os  la, 
os  lo, 
os  los  (les), 

-osla, 
-oslo, 
-oslos  (les), 

her,  it, 
it, 
them, 

to  you. 

her,  it, 
it, 
them, 

to  yourself, 
to  yourselves. 

os  las, 

-oslas, 

them, 

them, 

Personal  Pronouns. 


THIRD    PERSON    WITH    THIRD.  —  ORDER,  DAT.  AND   ACC. 

Before  the 
Verb. 

Attached  to 
the  Verb. 

Reflexive. 

se  le, 

-sele, 

him, 

him, 

se  la, 
se  lo, 
se  los  (les), 
se  las, 

-sela, 
-selo, 
-selos  (les), 
-selas, 

her,  it, 
it, 
them  (»*.), 
them  (/), 

to  him. 
to  her. 
to  you. 

her,  it, 
it, 
them, 
them, 

to  himself, 
to  herself, 
to  itself, 
to  yourself. 

sele, 

-sele, 

him, 

him,      ] 

se  la, 
se  lo, 

se  los  (les), 

-sela, 
-selo, 
-selos  (les), 

her,  it, 
it, 
them, 

to  them, 
to  you. 

her,  it, 

it, 
them, 

to  themselves, 
to  yourselves. 

se  las, 

-selas, 

them, 

them, 

236.  In  the  following  table  the  first  pronoun  is  the 
reflexive  in  the  accusative  case,  and  the  second  a  con- 
junctive in  the  dative  :  — 


REFLEXIVE  WITH  AIX  PERSONS.  —  ORDER,  ACC.  AND  DAT. 

se  me, 

-seme, 

himself, 

to  me, 

se  te, 

-sete, 

herself, 

to  thee, 

se.le, 

-sele, 

itself, 

to  him,  her,  it. 

se  (le)  a  V. 

-se(le)aV. 

themselves, 

to  you  (your  grace). 

se  nos, 

-senos, 

1 

himself, 

Ito  us. 

se  os, 

-seos, 

herself, 

to  you. 

se  les, 

-seles, 

itself, 

to  them. 

se  (les)  a  VV., 

-se(les)  a  VV., 

themselves, 

to  you  (your  graces)  . 

237.  The  position  of  two  objective  pronouns,  with 
respect  of  the  governing  verb,  follows  the  same  laws 
as  that  of  the  simple  objective:  — 


Form  and  Inflection. 


me  lo  da, 

dclmelo, 

no  me  lo  dds, 

darselo, 

dandoselo, 

quieren  quitarmelo,     > 

me  lo  quieren  quitar,  \ 

entreguenseme  las  armas, 

habiendotelo  dicho, 

se  me  figura, 

figuratelo, 

no  te  lo  figures, 


he  gives  it  to  me. 

give  it  to  me  (imperative). 

do  not  give  it  to  me. 

to  give  it  to  him  (or  to  them) . 

giving  it  to  him  (or  to  them). 

they  wish  to  take  it  from  me. 

let  the  arms  be  delivered  to  me, 
having  told  thee  so. 
I  imagine, 
imagine  or  fancy  it. 
do  not  imagine  it. 


238.   The  pleonastic  construction  is  the  same  for  two 
objectives  as  for  one  :  — 


se  lo  doy  a  usted,  a  ustedes, 
a  ese  caballero  se  lo  he  dicho, 
a*  mi  me  lo  han  asegurado, 
nos  hizo  Dios  merced  a  ti  y  a  mi, 


I  give  it  to  you  (sing,  and  phir. ) . 
I  have  told  it  to  that  gentleman, 
they  assured  me  so.  [me. 

God  was  gracious  to  you  and  to 


Mismo,  Propio. 

239.  Every  pronoun-subject  may  be  intensified  by 
adding  to  it,  in  the  proper  gender  and  number,  the 
adjective  mismo,  a,  self;  mismos,  as,  selves:  — 


yo  mismo,  yo  misma, 

tii  mismo,  tu  misma, 

€\  mismo,  ella  misma,          [mas, 

nosotros  mismos,  nosotras  mis- 

usted  mismo,  usted  misma, 

ustedes  mismos  or  mismas, 


I  myself  (man  or  woman) . 

thou  thyself. 

he  himself,  she  herself. 

we  ourselves. 

you  yourself. 

you  yourselves. 


REMARK.  —  Note  the  effect  of  the  graphic  accent  on  the  signi- 
fication of  tu  and  el: 


el  mismo,  he  himself. 
tu  mismo,  thou  thyself. 


el  mismo,  the  same. 

tu  mismo  padre,  thy  very  father 


Personal  Pronouns. 


240.  In  the  oblique  cases  of  the  personal  pronoun, 
mismo  or  propio  may  be  used,  but  only  with  the 
disjunctive  or  prepositional  forms:  — 


me  retra"igo  de  mi  mismo, 

te  enganas  a  ti  propio, 

se  condena  a  si  misma, 

os  quereis  a  vosotros  mismos, 

VV.  se  vuelven  contra  si  propios, 


I  withdraw  from  myself, 
thou  deceivest  thyself, 
she  condemns  herself, 
you  are  fond  of  yourselves, 
you  turn  against  your  own  selves. 


a.    Mismo  may  be  added  to  nouns  with  the  reflexive 
meanings  of  the  third  person  :  — 


el  hombre  mismo, 
la  mujer  misma, 
el  libro  mismo, 
los  derechos  mismos, 
las  casas  mismas, 


the  man  himself, 
the  woman  herself, 
the  book  itself, 
the  rights  themselves, 
the  houses  themselves. 


REMARK.  —  The  English  word  self,  joined  to  nouns  or  adjectives 
without  a  pronoun,  may  be  generally  rendered  by  propio^  a,  by  a 
circumlocution,  or  by  a  single  word :  — 


el  amor  propio,  self-love. 
la  abnegacion  propia,  self-denial. 
el  orgullo,  self -consciousness . 
el  egoismo,  selfishness. 
automatico,  a,  self-acting. 


el  gobierno  popular,  self-govern- 
ment. 

orgulloso,  self-conscious. 
egoista,  selfish.  [press. 

prensa     automatica,     self-acting 


una  maquina  que  se  alimenta  a  si  misma,  a  self-feeding  machine. 


241.  After  adverbs  of  time  and  place,  mismo  is  inva- 
riable and  signifies  this  or  that  very,  or  its  force  may  be 
rendered  by  the  tone  of  voice  :  — 


mafiana  mismo,  hoy  mismo, 
ahora  mismo,  ayer  mismo, 
aqui  (alii)  mismo, 


to-morrow,  this  very  day. 

this  very  moment,  only  yesterday. 

in  this  (that)  very  place. 


Ii6  Form  and  Inflection. 

242.   Mismo,  with  the  definite  article,  has  the  signifi- 
cations of  self,  very,  even :  — 

el  mismo  cielo,  the  sky  itself,  the  very  sky,  even  the  sky. 
las  mismas  mujeres,  the  women  themselves,  the  very  women,  even 
the  women. 

a.  Even,  in  this  sense,  may  also  be  expressed  by 
hasta,  with  or  without  mismo:  — 

hasta  las  mujeres,  or  hasta  las  mismas  mujeres,  even  the  women, 
or  even  the  very  women.  ,    , 

b.  Mismo,  a,  as  a  common  adjective,  with  an  article, 
signifies  the  same :  — 


el  mismo  dia, 
la  misma  noche, 
los  mismos  libros, 


the  same  day. 
the  same  night, 
the  same  books. 


Possessive  Adjectives  and  Pronouns. 

243,  Possessive  adjectives  and  pronouns  are  varied 
and   inflected    like   any   adjective    in    o.      Unlike   the 
English  usage,  they  agree  in  gender  and  number  with 
the  object  possessed,  and  not  with  the  person  or  thing 
possessing. 

POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVES. 

244.  Possessive  adjectives  are  conveniently  classed  as 
conjunctive  and  absolute,  according  as  they  stand  before 
the  noun  or  after  it.     The  conjunctives  lose  their  final 
syllable,    and    consequently    their    gender    distinction, 
except  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural,  in  which 
both   forms   are   identical.      They   are   varied    as    fol- 
lows:— 


Possessive  Adjectives. 


117 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Conjunctive. 

Absolute. 

Conjunctive. 

Absolute. 

Common. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Common. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

mi, 

mio, 

mia, 

mis, 

mios, 

mias, 

my. 

tu, 

tuyo, 

tuya, 

tus, 

tuyos, 

tuyas, 

thy. 

f 

his, 

her, 

su, 

suyo, 

suya, 

sus, 

suyos, 

suyas,  -j 

its, 

I 

your. 

nuestro-a, 

nuestro, 

nuestra, 

nuestros-as, 

nuestros, 

nuestras, 

our. 

vuestro-a, 

vuestro, 

vuestra, 

vuestros-as, 

vuestros, 

vuestras, 

your. 

f 

their, 

su, 

suyo,    • 

suya, 

sus, 

suyos, 

suyas,  < 

(. 

your. 

245.  The  conjunctive  forms  of  the  possessive  adjec- 
tive regularly  stand  before  the  nouns  they  qualify  when 
no  particular  emphasis  is  intended  :  — 

my  father,  my  parents. 

my  house,  my  houses. 

thy  money,  thy  days.1 

his  uncle,  his  uncle  and  aunt. 

their  labor,  their  trials. 

our  book,  our  pen. 

our  books,  our  pens. 


mi  padre,  mis  padres, 

mi  casa,  mis  casas, 

tu  dinero,  tus  dias, 

su  tio,  sus  tios  (§  106), 

su  trabajo,  sus  trabajos, 

nuestro  libro,  nuestra  pluma, 

nuestros  libros,  nuestras  plumas, 


246.    Since  su,  sus,  signify  one's,  his,  her,  its,  their, 
and  are  therefore  often  equivocal,  the  genitive 

»f    rhp    annrnnriarp    nprsnnal    nrnnnnn    whirfi    thpv 


your, 
case  of 


id  are  theretore  otten  equivocal,  the  genitive 
the  appropriate  personal  pronoun  which  they 

1  Tus  dias  also  means  "  thy  saint's  day,"  the  anniversary  of  one's  christening 
or  baptism ;  birthday  13  not  celebrated  in  Spain.  So  they  say,  hoy  es  su  santo, 
or  el  dia  de  su  santo,  or  -  'mply  hoy  son  sus  dias,  to-day  is  his  saint  or  saint's  day 
or  to-day  are  "his  days  "  —  ^s  birthday,  in  English. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


represent  may  be  added  to  the  noun,  or  the  definite 
article  may  replace  su,  susy  when  the  context  would  be 
indecisive,  or  when  emphasis  requires  :  — 


su  libro  de  el,  de  ella, 
su  libro  de  ellos,  de  ellas, 
los  libros  de  el,  de  ellos, 


his,  her  book  (his  book  of  him, 

of  her), 
their  book  (their  book  of  them, 

m.  and/.),      [him,  of  them), 
his,  their  books   (the  books  of 


247.  Your  is  also  expressed  by  su,  sus,  when  the 
address  is  carried  on  by  usted ;  otherwise  vuestro,  a, 
which  corresponds  to  vos,  vosotros,  as.  Instead  of  su, 
de  usted  (de  V.)  alone  may  be  used,  or  both  su  and  de  V., 
constituting  the  favorite  pleonastic  construction  :  — 


su  libro,  el  libro  de  V.,          or 

su  libro  de  V., 

su  libro,  el  libro  de  VV.,       or 

su  libro  de  VV., 

sus  libros,  los  libros  de  V.,   or 

sus  libros  de  V., 

sus  libros,  los  libros  de  VV.,  or 

sus  libros  de  VV., 

,;  teneis  vuestros  libros  ? 

REMARK.  —  The     conjunctive 
strengthened  by  adding  to  it  the 

mi  propio  padre, 

mi  propia  casa, 

sus  propios  asuntos, 

tu  propia  fe  te  ha  salvado, 


your  book  (to  one  person) . 
your  book  (to  several  persons) . 
your  books  (to  one  person) . 

your  books  (to  several  persons) . 
have  you  your  books  ? 

possessive     adjective     may    be 
word  propio,  a,  own :  — 

my  own  father. 

my  own  home  (house). 

his  own  affairs. 

thine  own  faith  hath  saved  thee. 


248.  The  absolute  or  uncontracted  forms  of  the 
possessive  adjective  regularly  stand  after  an  impersonal 
noun,  accompanied  by  the  definite  article,  and  are 
preferred  when  greater  intensity  is  required,  as  in 


Possessive  Adjectives.  iig 

spirited   language,   in   contrast,   and   for  rhetorical  ef- 
fect :  — 


la  f6  tuya,  el  deseo  mio, 
los  achaques  suyos, 
la  edad  nuestra, 


thy  faith,  my  desire. 

his  (physical)  infirmities.1 

our  age,  or  our  times. 


REMARK.  —  Except  in  the  vocative  case,  the  absolute  forms  are 
not  used  of  persons  in  common  prose  with  the  definite  article.  See 
§  250. 

249.  The  absolute  possessive  adjectives  of  the  first 
person  are  regularly  employed  in  direct  address  (the 
vocative  case),  but  without  the  definite  article :  — 


amigo  mio,  amigos  mios, 
padre  nuestro,  Dios  mio, 
hijo  mio,  muy  sefior  mio, 
muy  senores  nuestros, 


my  friend,  my  friends. 
Our  Father,  Heavens!  (My  God!) 
my  son,  my  dear  sir  (in  letters) . 
gentlemen  (our  dear  sirs).'2 


a.  But  if  an  ordinary  adjective,  or  past  participle  used 
as  an  adjective,  accompany  the  direct  address,  either 
the  conjunctive  or  the  absolute  forms  may  be  used  :  — 

mi  querido  hijo,  or  \ 

. ,    ,  ..       .        >  my  dear  son.3 

querido  hijo  mio,     ) 


mi  inolvidable  amigo, 
mis  buenos  senores, 
mi  pobre  muchacho,  or 
pobre  muchacho  mio, 


my  never-to-be-forgotten  friend. 

my  good  sirs. 

my  unfortunate  boy,  or 

my  poor  fellow. 


250.   The  definite  article,  with  all  absolute  forms,  is 
suppressed  in  certain  phrases  :  — 


1  Moral  infirmities  would  be  debilidades. 

2  Used  by  one  firm  writing  to  another  firm  or  razon  social.    We  would  say 
simply  "  gentlemen." 

3  The  father  would  usually  write  to  his  son  :  mi  querido  hijo  ;  the  mother, 
querido  hijo  mio,  which  will  serve  as  an  example  of  the  intensity  of  postposition. 


I2O 


Form  and  Inflection. 


de  parte  tuya, 
a"  casa  nuestra, 
a"  fig  mia,  suya, 
d  instancias  vucstras, 
a"  costa  suya, 


on  thy  part,  from  thee. 

to  our  house. 

on  my  or  his  word. 

at  your  instance. 

at  his  or  their  expense. 


251.  The  absolute  forms  of  the  possessive  adjective 
regularly  stand  after  a  personal  or  impersonal  noun 
taken  in  an  indeterminate  sense  (with  a,  an,  some, 
expressed  or  implied).  The  adjective  then  assumes 
the  idiomatic  pronominal  signification  of  mine,  of  thine, 
of  his,  etc.  :  — 

a  friend  of  mine,  of  ours, 
a  relative  of  thine,  of  yours, 
some  acquaintances  of  yours, 
some  servants  of  his  (of  theirs). 
I  shall  give  you  an  old  one  of  mine. 
I  spoke  to  him  of  a  matter  of  yours. 


un  amigo  mio,  nuestro, 

un  pariente  tuyo,  vuestro, 

unos  conocidos  de  V.,  de  VV., 

unos  criados  suyos, 

le  dare  a"  V.  uno  viejo  mio, 

hable  con  61  de  un  asunto  tuyo, 


REMARK.  —  We  may  also  say,  uno  de  mis  amigos,  one  of  my 
friends,  etc. ;  but  there  is  more  definiteness  in  this  style  of  phrase 
than  in  the  other. 

a.  The  same  rule  obtains  when  the  noun  is  in  the 
predicate  after  the  verb  to  be,  or  its  equivalent  :  — 


6s  discipulo  mio,  suyo, 
son  paisanos  nuestros, 


he  is  a  pupil  of  mine,  of  his. 
they  are  from  our  province. 


b.  A  substantive  grouped  with  one  or  more  possessive 
adjectives,  and  denoting  possession,  is  put  in  the 
genitive :  — 


*'  es  intimo  amigo  mio,  tuyo,  y 
de  toda  nuestra  casa," 


he  is  an  intimate  friend  of  mine, 
of  yours,  and  of  all  our  family. 


252.   The  conjunctive  possessive  adjectives  have  the 
same  pronominal  signification  as  the  absolute  ones  do 


Possessive  Adjectives. 


121 


with  indeterminate  expressions,  when  the  former  stand 
between  a  demonstrative  and  a  noun  :  — 

this  friend  of  mine.1 

that  house  of  thine. 

yon  garden  of  his,  of  theirs. 

these  friends  of  ours. 


este  mi  amigo, 

esa  tu  casa, 

aquel  su  jardin, 

estos  nuestros  amigos, 


253.  Instead  of  the  possessive  adjective,  the  dative 
of  the  personal  pronoun,  or  of  usted,  must  be  used  with 
the  verb,  and  the  definite  article  with  the  noun,  when 
reference  is  made  to  parts  of  the  body  or  articles  of 
dress  :  — 


le  tomd  la  mano  (a  ella) , 
beso  a  usted  la  mano,2 
me  conmueve  el  alma, 
se  herfa  el  pecho, 
me  duele  la  cabeza, 
te  pisa  el  vestido, 
se  quita  los  zapatos, 
les  pone  la  ropa, 
me  he  cortado  el  dedo, 


he  took  her  hand  (the  h.  to  her). 
I  kiss  your  hand  (the  h.  to  you), 
it  stirs  my  heart  (to  me  the  h.). 
he  smote  his  (own)  breast, 
my  head  aches  (the  h.  a.  to  me), 
he  steps  on  thy  dress, 
he  takes  off  his  (own)  shoes, 
he  puts  on  their  clothes  (to  them) . 
I  have  cut  my  finger. 


a.    If  there  can  be  no  possible  doubt  as  to  the  person 
referred  to,  the  article  will  suffice  without  the  dative:  — 


recibio  un  golpe  en  el  brazo, 
ella  levantd  los  ojos, 
bajo  la  cabeza  y  calldse, 


he  received  a  blow  in  his  arm. 
she  raised  her  eyes.  [lent, 

he  bowed  his  head  and  was  si- 


254.  Possessive  pronouns  are  regularly  accompanied 
by  the  definite  article,  both  agreeing  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  object  possessed,  and  not  with  the 
person  or  thing  possessing :  — 

1  In   Biblical  language,  este   tu   hermano,  this  thy  brother ;    aquellos   tus 
acusadores,  those  thine  accusers;   but  not  in  modern  common  English. 

2  The  lady  says  this  to  the  gentleman  (adding  caballero,  sir),  on  a  formal 
presentation,  or  when  she  or  he  leaves  the  room  ;  his  term  is :  a  los  pies  de  VM 
sefiora,  at  your  feet,  lady,  on  presentation  or  leave-taking. 


122 


Form  and  Inflection. 


su  padre  de  V.  y  el  mio, 
su  casa  y  la  tuya, 
mis  amigos  y  los  vuestros, 
nuestros  hermanos  y  los  de  V., 
enjugdron  nuestras  Idgrimas,  las 
de  mi  hija  y  mias, 


your  father  and  mine, 
his  house  and  thine, 
my  friends  and  yours, 
our  brothers  and  yours, 
they  wiped  away  my  daughter's 
tears  and  mine. 


255.   The  possessive  pronouns  are  varied  as  follows  :  — 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fein. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

el  mio, 

la  mia, 

lo  mio, 

los  mios, 

las  mias, 

mine. 

el  tuyo, 

la  tuya, 

lo  tuyo, 

los  tuyos, 

las  tuyas, 

thine. 

rhis. 

el  suyo, 

la  suya, 

lo  suyo, 

los  suyos, 

las  suyas, 

\  hers. 

I  its. 

el  de  V.  or 

la  de  V.  or 

lo  de  V.  or 

los  de  V.  or 

las  de  V.  or 

| 

el  suyo, 

la  suya, 

lo  suyo, 

los  suyos, 

las  suyas, 

}  yours. 

el  nuestro, 

la  nuestra, 

lo  nuestro, 

los  nuestros, 

las  nuestras, 

ours. 

el  vuestro, 

la  vuestra, 

lo  vuestro, 

los  vuestros, 

las  vuestras, 

yours. 

el  suyo, 

la  suya, 

lo  suyo, 

los  suyos, 

las  suyas, 

theirs. 

eldeVV.or 

ladeW.or 

lodeW.or 

losdeVV.0r 

lasdeVV.0r 

1 

el  suyo, 

la  suya, 

lo  suyo, 

los  suyos, 

las  suyas, 

>  yours. 

256.    Each  one  of  these  forms  is  inflected  like  any 
adjective  with  the  definite  article:  — 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

N.A.P. 
G. 
D. 

el  mio, 
del  mio, 
al  mio, 

la  mia, 
de  la  mia, 
a  la  mia, 

lo  mio, 
de  lo  mio, 
a  lo  mio, 

los  mios, 
de  los  mios, 
a  los  mios, 

las  mias, 
del  as  mias, 
a  las  mias, 

mine, 
of  mine, 
to  mine. 

Possessive  Pronouns. 


123 


su  libro  es  semejante  al  mio, 
tus  costumbres  son  distintas  de 

las  nuestras, 
mi  heredad  linda  con  la  de  usted, 


his  book  is  similar  to  mine, 
thy   habits    are    different    from 

ours, 
my  property  joins  yours. 


257.  The  possessive  pronoun  loses  the  article  when 
it  stands  in  the  predicate  with  the  verb  to  be,  and  is 
used  in  a  general  sense :  — 


el  triunfo  es  nuestro, 
esta  casa  es  mia, 
este  libro  es  suyo,  or  de  el, 
los  premios  son  vuestros, 
tuya  es  la  culpa, 


the  triumph  is  ours, 
this  house  is  mine, 
this  book  is  his. 
the  prizes  are  yours, 
thine  is  the  fault. 


REMARK.  —  But  if  the  possessive  in  the  predicate  has  a  specific 
meaning,  the  article  is  regularly  employed :  — 


este  sombrero  es  el  mio, 
esta  casa  es  la  mia, 


(this  hat  is  mine  (/.£.,  the  one 


t     that  belongs  to  me) . 
this  house  is  mine. 


a.  In  the  predicate  suyo  may  be  replaced  by  the 
genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun  when  ambiguity  re- 
quires it  :  — 

this  book  is  his,  hers. 

this  pen  is  yours. 

the  trees  are  theirs. 

these  papers  are  mine  and  not 


este  libro  es  de  el,  de  ella, 
esta  pluma  es  de  usted, 
los  arboles  son  de  ellos, 
estos  papeles  son  mios  y  no  de 
ustedes, 


yours 


258.   The  possessive  may  be  employed  substantively ; 
lo  is  always  so  used  :  — 


los  mios, 

los  nuestros, 

lo  mio  y  lo  suyo, 

d  lo  suyo  vino,  y  los  suyos  no  le 
recibieron, 


my  people,  my  party  (mine) . 

our  friends,  our  adherents  (ours) . 

what  is  mine  and  his. 
he  came  to  his  own  (estate), 
and    his    own    (people)   re- 
ceived him  not. 


124 


Form  and  Inflection. 


DEMONSTRATIVES. 

259.  The  demonstratives  are  determinative  adjectives 
with  substantive  and  pronominal  functions.  They  agree 
in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  they  limit,  except 
the  neuter  forms  which  are  substantives  by  nature. 
They  are  inflected  by  the  aid  of  the  case  prepositions, 
and  varied  as  follows  :  — 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

este, 

esta, 

esto, 

this 

estos, 

estas, 

these 

(by  me). 

(by  me). 

ese, 

esa, 

eso, 

that 

esos, 

esas, 

those 

(by  you). 

(by  you). 

aquel, 

aquella, 

aquello, 

that 

aquellos, 

aquellas, 

those 

(yonder). 

(yonder)  . 

el, 

la, 

lo, 

that 

los, 

las, 

those 

(of). 

(of). 

260.  To  these  may  be  added :    estotro,  a,  —  estotros,  as,  this 
other,  these  other ;  esotro,  a,  —  esotros,  as,  that  other,  those  other ; 
aquel  otro,  aquella  otra,  etc.,  that  other,  those  other.     Likewise 
the  archaic  forms  aqueste,  aquese,  for  este,  ese,  this,  that. 

261.  The  demonstratives  este,  ese,  and  aquel  naturally 
stand  before  the  noun  which  they  limit :  — 


este  nifio,  esta  casa, 
ese  precio,  aquel  dia, 
estos  libros,  esas  calles, 


this  child,  this  house.  [day. 
that  price  (you  mention),  that 
these  books,  those  streets. 


262.  In  lively  or  intensive  language,  the  demonstra- 
tives este,  ese,  aquel,  may  follow  a  noun  accompanied  by 
the  definite  article  :  — 

el  hombre  este,  la  casa  esta,  I   this  man  (here),  this  house, 

las  mujeres  esas,  los  dias  aque-    I   those  women,  those  days. 

llos, 


Demonstratives. 


125 


263.  In  general,  este  signifies  that  which  is  near  the 
speaker,  where  he  is,  or  of  which  he  is  speaking ;  ese> 
that  which  is  near  the  person  addressed,  where  he  is, 
or  of  which  he  is  speaking ;  aquel,  that  which  is  remote 
from  both :  — 


este  libro,  esta  pluma, 
ese  libro,  esa  pluma, 
aquel  libro,  aquella  pluma, 

este  pais,  esta  ciudad, 
ese  pais,  esa  ciudad, 

aquel  pais,  aquella  ciudad, 


this  book,  this  pen  (near  me) . 
that  book,  that  pen  (near  you) . 
that  book,  that  pen  (yonder). 

this  country,  city  (where  I  am). 

that   country,   city   (where   you 

are).  [both). 

that  country,  city  (distant  from 


REMARK.  —  Observe  that  ese  means  that,  where  our  correspondent 
is,  no  matter  how  many  thousand  miles  away ;  if  we  are  in  New  York, 
and  he  in  Valparaiso,  we  write  to  him  of  his  town,  and  he  to  us  of 
ours,  as  esa  ciudad;  while  Montevideo  and  Quebec  would  be 
aquella  ciudad  to  both.  To  each,  respectively,  the  United  States 
and  Chili  would  be  ese  pais,  that  country  (where  yoii  are) ;  while 
Canada  or  Buenos  Ayres  would  be  aquel  pais  to  both. 

a.  In  correspondence,  the  words  ciudad,  city,  and 
plaza,  market,  are  usually  suppressed  with  esta  and  esa 
after  the  preposition  en,  in;  en  esta  is  therefore  ren- 
dered here,  and  en  esa,  there  or  with  you :  — 


en  esta  no  hay  novedad, 

I  como  van  los  negocios  en  esa  ? 


there  is  nothing  new  here, 
how  is  business  with  you? 


b.  When  speaking  of  the  same  place,  city,  etc.,  relative 
distances  therein  are  expressed  by  este,  ese,  and  aquel:  — 


esta  calle,  este  barrio, 

esa  calle,  ese  barrio, 

aquellas  calles,  aquellos  barrios, 


this  street,  this  district  (where 
we  are) .     [which  you  speak) . 
that  street  (where  you  live,  or  of 
those  (remote)  streets. 


126 


Form  and  Inflection. 


264.  With  reference  to  time  historically  considered, 
este  denotes  the  present  day,  or  the  time  of  which  we 
are  speaking  represented  as  present ;  ese,  a  period  or 
circumstance  occurring  within  our  personal  memory; 
aquel,  any  period  or  circumstance  occurring  previous  to 
our  day :  — 

esta  £poca,  these  days  (this  epoch). 

ese  suceso,  that  event  (which  I  remember). 

aquellos  sucesos,  those  events  (before  my  time). 

This  law  is  seldom  violated  by  correct  writers. 

a.  Within  the  limit  of  personal  experience,  relative 
distances  or  events  are  expressed  the  same  way :  • — 

this  week,  this  year. 

that  event,  that  year  (spoken  of). 

that  day,  that  year  (long  ago) . 


esta  semana,  este  ano, 
ese  suceso,  ese  ano, 
aquel  dia,  aquel  ano, 


265.   Ese  has  often  the  contemptuous  sense  of  the 
Latin  iste:  — 


los  pillos  esos, 

esos  esplotadores, 

esas  tias,  or  las  tias  esas, 


those  rascals. 

those  (political)  harpies. 

those  women  (in  contempt) . 


REMARK.  —  Ese  is  also  found  with  many  popular  idioms  asso- 
ciated with  de  Dios,  of  God,  in  the  sense  of  "blessed";  as,  por 
esos  trigos,  campos,  barrios  "  de  Dios,"  in  those  blessed  fields,  dis- 
tricts, etc.,  to  indicate  vaguely,  wittily,  or  satirically  indefinite  loca- 
tion :  — 


'vdngase  un  par  de  horas  por 
esas  calles  de  Dios,  y  vera" 
c<5mo  todos  piensan  de  ese 
modo"  (Escenas  Matritenses\ 


come  along  for  an  hour  or  two  and 
take  a  stroll  about  the  streets, 
and  you'll  see  if  everybody  is 
of  your  way  of  thinking. 


1  Literally,  "  aunts  " ;   popularly  used  of  the  supposed  grasping  nobility ;  as 
well  as  of  lewd  women. 


Demonstratives. 


127 


El  Carnaval  es  una  licencia  para 
que  toda  persona  decente  pue- 
da  correr  como  un  loco  por 
esas  calles  de  Dios,  con  un  rabo 
mas  largo  que  el  de  Luzbel, 
y  un  pedazo  de  carton  en  la 
cara,  haciendo  el  oso  delante 
de  todo  el  mundo. 


Carnival  is  a  general  privilege 
permitted  to  any  respectable 
person  to  run  madly  about  the 
blessed  streets  with  a  tail  long- 
er than  Lucifer's,  and  a  piece 
of  pasteboard  attached  to  his 
face,  playing  his  pranks  be- 
fore everybody. 


266.  The  neuter  forms  esto,  eso,  aquello,  mean  this 
thing,  that  thing;  thus:  esto,  what  I  say;  eso,  what 
you  say ;  aquello,  that  (remote  thing),  in  narration:  — 


esto  es  cuanto  tengo  que  decir, 

eso  no  es  nada, 

eso  es  ya  otra  cosa, 

eso  es ;  eso  si, 

aquello  fue  una  lastima, 


this  is  all  I  have  to  say. 
that  is  nothing, 
that  makes  a  difference, 
that's  a  fact ;  that  indeed, 
that  was  a  pity  (to  see). 


267.  The  definite  article  is  used  as  a  demonstrative 
pronoun,  assuming  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun 
it  replaces  :  — 


mi  libro  y  el  de  mi  hermano, 
estos  libros  y  los  de  mi  hermano, 
su  casa  y  la  de  su  padre, 
sus  casas  y  las  de  su  padre, 
los  relojes  de  oro  y  los  de  plata, 


my  book  and  that  of  my  brother, 
these  books  and  my  brother's, 
his  house  and  that  of  his  father, 
his  houses  and  those  of  his  father, 
the  gold  and  silver  watches. 


REMARK.  —  The  genitive  after  the  demonstrative  pronoun  may 
often  be  embraced  in  the  English  possessive  case :  My  book  and 
my  brother's,  his  house  and  his  father's,  etc. 

a.  Lo,  aquello,  and  la,  las,  are  used  elliptically  in 
certain  phrases :  — 


lo  de  Castro, 

lo  de  ayer, 

aquello  del  fildsofo  griego, 


the  (affair)  of  Castro. 

the  affair  of  yesterday,  [losopher. 

that  (thought)  of  the  Greek  phi- 


128 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a  la  de  Dios  es  Cristo,1 
tomar  las  de  Villadiego, 


like  a  good  fellow, 
to  take  French  leave. 


26a  As  substantives,  tste  refers  to  the  last  mentioned 
of  two  persons  or  things,  and  aqutl  to  the  first :  — 


e^te,  this, 
esta,  this, 
dstos,  these, 
estas,  these, 


>  the  latter. 


divididos  estaban  caballeros  y 
escuderos,  £stos  contandose 
sus  vidas,  y  aqu^llos  sus 
amores, 


aqudl,  that, 
aquella,  that, 
aque'llos,  those, 
aqu&las,  those, 


the  former. 


parted  sat  knights  and  esquires  ; 
the  latter  reviewing  their  lives, 
and  the  former  their  gallan- 
tries. 


Observe  that  the  order  in  Spanish  is  regularly  the  reverse  of  the 
English,  although  Mesonero  Romanos  writes  :  — 


Sacrificando  aquellas,  y  ponien- 
do  estas  sobre  las  nifias  de 
mis  ojos, 


reluctantly  parting  with  the  for- 
mer, and  warmly  cherishing 
the  latter. 


1  A  la  or  d  lo  de  Dios  es  Cristo,  seems  to  derive  from,  after  the  (fashion)  of 
[him  whose]  God  is  Christ,  and  to  suggest  a  reference  by  the  Moors  and  Jews 
to  the  dominant  Christian  Spaniard,  by  whom  it  was  handed  down  in  the  lower 
signification  of  a  "gay  fellow,"  —  in  Spanish,  a  valenton.  In  the  Lazarillo  de 
Tormes  (1552)  we  find :  puesto  a  lo  de  Dios  es  Cristo,  dressed  up  like  a  dandy; 
and  in  the  Guzman  de  Alfarache,  gente  de  lo  de  Dios  es  Cristo,  boon  companions. 
Phrases  like  these  and  such  as  tomar  las  de  Villadiego,  averiguelo  Vargas,  etc., 
come  from  local  circumstances  soon  forgotten,  while  the  term  remained.  Tomar 
las  calcas  de  Villadiego,  to  catch  up  Villadiego 's  small  clothes,  redolent  of  some 
whilom  scandal  from  which  Villadiego  escaped  without  stopping  to  arrange  his 
toilet,  is  first  given  in  the  Celestina  (1499-1500),  then  in  Blasco  de  Garay  (1545), 
in  Perez  del  Castillo  (1560), in  Cipriano  de  Valera  (1588), in  Percivale's  Spanish- 
English  Dictionary  (London,  1592),  in  that  of  Minsheu  (1599),  in  Cervantes 
(1605),  Covarrubias  (1611),  Quevedo  (1627),  and  the  Spanish  Academy's  Dic- 
tionary (1729),  with  the  ellipse  calzas  supplied.  After  that  date,  the  " breeches " 
disappear,  and  few  Spaniards  to-day  understand  the  original  reference.  Averi- 
guelo Vargas  means,  literally,  let  Vargas  ferret  it  out,  or,  more  generally,  find  it 
out  if  you  can,  — a.  variation  of  Horace's  credat  ludaeus  Apella. 


Relative  Pronouns. 


129 


269.  Este,  ese,  and  aquel  are  also  used  as  substantives, 
in  the  signification  of  this,  this  one,  he ;  that,  that  one, 
he,  preserving  their  gender  variation  as  adjectives,  and 
assuming  the  graphic  accent :  — 


este  no  es  mi  libro. 

<;es  este  el  tuyo? 

aquel  que  estd.  sobre  el  armario 

es  mio, 

entdnces  dijo  este, 
,;  que  es  lo  que  hace  aquel  ? 


this  is  not  my  book, 
is  this  one  thine? 
that  one  which  is  on  the  ward- 
robe is  mine, 
then  said  he. 
what  is  that  (fellow)  doing? 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

270.   The  relative  pronouns  are  :  — 

quien,  quienes,  who;  que  (invariable),  who,  which,  that. 

el  cual,  la  cual ;   los  cuales,  las  cuales,  > 

...  .  >  who,  which. 

el  que,    la  que ;    los  que,        las  que,       ) 

lo  cual.  which  (thing) ;   lo,   que.  that  which,  what. 
cuyo,  cuya;   cuyos,  cuyas,  whose,  of  which,  which. 

aquel  que,     or  el  que,  he  who,    )  the  one  who,  the  one  which 

aquella  que,  or  la  que,  she  who,  >      or  that. 

aquellos  que,  or  los  que,  )  those  who,  or  those  which,  the  ones 

aquellas  que,  or  las  que,  >      who  or  which. 

quien,  he  who,  the  one  who ;  quienes,  those  who,  the  ones  who, 

aquello  que,  that  (thing,  saying  or  matter)  which. 


Quien. 


271.  Quien  is  now  properly  used  of  persons  only.  Its 
nominative  is  que,  when  the  antecedent  is  a  word  of 
either  gender  or  number,  and  quien,  el  cual,  or  que  when 
it  connects  a  compound  sentence  of  which  each  member 
makes  complete  sense  by  itself :  — 


130 


Form  and  Inflection. 


el  hombre  que,  la  mujer  que, 
ayer  tope*  con  un  amigo,  quien 

(el  cual  or  que)   me   conto 

todo  lo  sucedido, 
el  duelo  nos  vino  de  los  pueblos 

del  Norte,  quienes  (los  cua- 

les)  decidian  sus  pleitos  por 

las  armas, 


the  man  who,  the  woman  who. 
yesterday  I  fell  in  with  a  friend, 

who  gave  me  an  account  of  all 

that  has  happened, 
duelling   came   to  us  from  tfie 

Northern  peoples,  who^yrere 

accustomed    to   decide   ^their 

differences  by  arms. 


REMARK.  —  Although  we  cannot  use  quien  when  the  antecedent 
is  a  mere  term  without  independence,  yet  we  may  say,  for  example, 
hombre  es  quien  viene,  it  is  a  man  who  comes]  mujeres  son 
quienes  salen,  they  are  women  who  are  going  out ;  when  the  ante- 
cedent is  used  indefinitely  and  stands  in  the  predicate  with  the 
verb  to  be. 

272.  In  the  oblique  cases,  quien  was  formerly  em- 
ployed for  both  numbers,  and  applied  to  things  as  well 
as  persons,  echoing  its  Latin  origin  (quern) ;  but  at 
present  such  use  must  be  regarded  as  archaic  :  — 


j  siglos  dichosos  aquellos  £  quien 
los  antiguos  pusieron  nombre 
de  dorados ! 

los  Siete  Sabios  ci  quien  tanto 
veneraba  la  Grecia. 


happy  ages  those  to  which  the 
ancients  applied  the  epithet 
golden ! 

the  Seven  Wise  Men  whom 
Greece  so  much  venerated. 


REMARK.  —  Quien  may,  however,  be  used  with  proper  names  of 
cities,  and  applied  to  corporations  and  other  collective  terms  denoting 
persons ;  such  as,  pueblos,  naciones,  Academia,  consejo,  etc. 

273.  The  accusative  of  quien  is  either  a  quien  or  que 
(not  £  que),  whom.1 


1  Hence  the  sentence,  este  es  el  hombre  &  que  V.  debe  la  vida,  is  incorrect. 
See  Monsanto  and  Languellier's  Spanish  Grammar,  p.  133.  We  could  say: 
esta  es  la  circunstancia  a  que  V.  debe  la  vida;  not  el  hombre  d  que. 


Relative  Pronouns.  131 

274.   The  inflection  of  quien  is  as  follows  :  — 


! 

Singular. 

Plural. 

v 

que  (quien), 

que  (quienes), 

who. 

fo. 

de  quien, 

de  quienes, 

of  whom. 

D. 

a  quien, 

a  quienes, 

to  whom. 

A. 

a  quien,  or  que, 

a  quienes,  or  que, 

whom. 

1     P* 

con  quien,1 

con  quienes,1 

with  whom. 

el  hombre  que  escribe, 
las  muchachas  que  cosen, 
el  amigo  de  quien  hablamos, 
las  personas  £  quienes  acudo, 
el  vecino  que  (or£  quien)  busco, 
las   senoras   que    (d    quienes) 

visito, 
los  oficiales  con  quienes  comi, 


the  man  who  writes. 

the  girls  who  sew. 

the  friend  of  whom  we  speak. 

the  persons  to  whom  I  apply. 

the  neighbor  whom  I  seek. 

the  ladies  whom  I  visit. 

the  officers  with  whom  I  dined. 


Que. 

275.  Que  relates  to  persons  or  things  in  the  nominative 
or  accusative  cases  only;  in  the  other  cases  its  use  is 
limited  to  things.  Being  invariable  in  number  and 
gender,  its  inflection  is  indicated  by  prepositions,  as 
follows  :  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N. 

que, 

que, 

who,  which,  that. 

G. 

de  que, 

de  que, 

of  which. 

D. 

a  que, 

a  que, 

to  which. 

A. 

que, 

que, 

whom,  which,  that. 

P. 

con  que, 

con  que, 

with  which. 

1  Any  preposition  may,  of  course,  supplant  con  in  the  prepositional  case ; 
as,  por  quien,  by  whom ;  para  quien,  for  whom,  etc. 


132 


Form  and  Inflection. 


el  libro  que  esta  encima  de  la 

mesa, 

las  plumas  que  no  hacen  serial, 
la  huelga  de  que  se  habla, 
el  gobierno  £  que  estamos  suje- 

tos, 

los  estudios  £  que  me  aplico, 
las  manzanas  que  V.  me  did, 
la  facilidad  con  que  se  hace, 
la  casa  en  que  vivo, 


the  book  which  (that)  is  on  the 
table.  [mark, 

the  pens  which  do  not  make  a 
the  strike  of  which  they  speak,  g, 
the  government  to  which  we 
subject.  [my 

the  branches  to  which  I  app 
the  apples  which  you  gave  me 
the  ease  with  which  it  is  done, 
the  house  in  which  I  live. 


1 


REMARK.  —  In  Spanish,  the  preposition  must  always  stand  before 
the  word  it  governs.  Hence  the  vulgar  English  constructions,  the 
strike  they  speak  of,  the  government  we  are  subject  to,  the  house  I  live 
in,  must  first  be  restored  to  the  literary  form  before  rendering  into 
Spanish. 


276.   The  accusative  case  of  the  relatives  quien  and 
que  must  never  be  omitted  in  Spanish  :  — 


la  persona  que  vi, 
las  casas  que  compre, 


the  person  (whom)  I  saw. 
the  houses  (which)  I  bought. 


REMARK.  —  The  conjunction  que,  that,  must  not  be  confounded 
with  the  relative  pronoun.  The  former  is  frequently  left  out  in 
Spanish  after  certain  verbs,  although  the  Academy  very  properly 
censures  the  omission  :  — 


te  ruego  encarecidamente  (que) 
no  te  marches  hasta  que  yo 
vuelva, 

supliquemos  al  eterno  Padre 
(que)  quiera  reconocer  las 
palabras  que  le  decimos  (Gra- 
nada) , 


I  earnestly  request  you  not  to  go 
away  until  I  come  back. 

let  us  implore  the  Eternal  Father 
to  be  pleased  to  acknowledge 
the  words  that  we  address  to 
him. 


Literally:  I  request  that  you  may  not  go,  etc. ;  let  us  implore 
that  the  Father  may  be  pleased,  etc. 


Relative  Pronouns. 


133 


£1  cual,  el  que. 

277.  El  cual  and  el  que  are  the  substitutes  of  quien 
and  qiie,  and  therefore  relate  to  persons  or  things.  They 
are,  in  general,  preferred  when  an  inflected  relative  is 
desirable  to  avoid  ambiguity,  or  the  unpleasant  recur- 
rence of  the  word  que,  as  connectives  between  compound 
sentences,  and  especially  after  short  prepositions  when 
the  antecedent  substantive  is  accompanied  by  the  in- 
definite article,  or  is  used  partitively :  — 


los  Moros  se  dejaron  maniatar  de 

los  Cristianos,  los  cuales  con 

mucha  presteza  lo  hicieron, 
llamd  a"  un  mozo  de  cordel,1  al 

que  le  entregd  una  carta, 
seguimos  al  ama  del  candnigo, 

el   cual  vivia   en   un   cuarto 

bajo, 
se  dedicd  al  cuidado  de  su  hija, 

en  la  cual  veia  el  retrato  de  su 

mujer, 
una  real  drden  en  la   cual  se 

decia  que, 
un  incidente  con  el  que  no  se 

habfa  contado, 
hay  injurias  de  las  que  no  se 

debe  hacer  caso, 


the  Moors  suffered  their  hands 

to  be  tied  by  the  Christians, 

who  were  not  slow  to  do  it. 
he  summoned  a  messenger,  to 

whom  he  delivered  a  letter, 
we  followed  the  housekeeper  of 

the  canon,  who  lived  on  the 

ground  floor, 
he  devoted  himself  to  the  care 

of  his  daughter,  in  whom  he 

beheld  the  image  of  his  wife, 
a  royal  order  in  which  it  was  said 

that,  etc. 
an  incident  on  which  he  had  not 

counted, 
there  are  wrongs  of  which  no 

notice  should  be  taken. 


278.  The  inflection  of  el  cual  is  as  follows  (that  of  el 
que  varies  the  article  in  the  same  manner,  but  que  does 
not  change)  :  — 


1  A  mozo  de  cordel  is  a  public  "  porter,"  who  carries  a  coil  of  rope 
(cordel}  on  his  shoulder,  and  serves  to  transport  heavy  burdens,  or  to  run 
of  errands.  Lately  "  errand-boys "  have  been  introduced  into  Madrid,  called 
mandaderos. 


134 


Form  and  Inflection. 


SINGULAR. 

PL.URAL. 

Masc. 

Fein. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

N. 

el  cual, 

la  cual, 

los  cuales, 

las  cuales. 

who,  which. 

G. 

del  cual, 

de  la  cual, 

de  los  cuales, 

de  las  cuales, 

of  whom,  of 

which. 

D. 

al  cual, 

a  la  cual, 

a  los  cuales, 

a  las  cuales. 

to  whom,  to 

which. 

P.A. 

al  cual, 

a  la  cual, 

a  los  cuales, 

a  las  cuales, 

whom 

(persons). 

I.  A. 

el  cual, 

la  cual, 

los  cuales, 

las  cuales, 

which 

(things). 

P. 

con  el  cual, 

con  la  cual, 

con  los  cuales, 

con  las  cuales, 

with  whom, 

with  which. 

279.  The  substitutes  must  be  used  when  the  relative 
is  governed  by  compound  prepositions,  or  such  as  are 
not  monosyllables  :  — 


un  medico  ante  el  que  huyen 

las  dolencias, 
un  velador  eiicima  del  cual  hay 

un  juego  de  cafe, 
las  noticias  segun  las  cuales 

quiso  obrar, 
latorre  desde  la  cual  se  domina 

la  vega  entera, 


a  physician  before  whom  aches 

and  pains  disappear. 
a  stand  on  which  there  is  a  coffee 

set. 
the    information    according    to 

which  he  saw  fit  to  act. 
the  tower  from  which  you  can 

take  in  the  whole  plain. 


280.   The  adverb  donde,  where,  is  frequently  used  as 
a  relative  :  — 


la  calle  por  donde  ha  ido, 


the  street  by  which  he  went. 


281.   Lo    cual,   which,    refers   always   to   an   idea,   a 
thought,  or  a  preceding  sentence :  — 

le  aconsejd  que  tomase  un  cria-       I  advised  him  to  engage  a  ser- 
do,  lo  cual  no  quiso  hacer,  vant,  which  he  would  not  do. 

dicho  lo  cual,  salio,  saying  which,  he  went  out. 


Relative  Pronotms. 


135 


282.   Lo  que,  that  which,  what,  todo  lo  que,  all  that, 
likewise  relate  to  an  idea,  and  not  to  a  word  :  — 


me  dijo  lo  que  habfa  sucedido, 
V.  me  dara  lo  que  le  parece, 
a"  lo  que  veo,  no  consta, 
todo  lo  que  dice  es  verdad, 


he  told  me  what  had  passed, 
you  may  give  me  what  you  like, 
by  what  I  see,  it  is  not  proven, 
all  that  he  says  is  the  truth. 


a.    Lo    que    occasionally    signifies    how,    how    miich, 
especially  in  exclamations:  — 

if  he   only  knew  how   much   I 

longed  for  them  ! 
how  much  you  must  know ! 


j  si  el  supiera  lo  que  yo  los  de- 

seaba  !     (  Cervantes . ) 
j  lo  que  debe  V.  saber ! 


REMARK.  —  In  popular  language  one  often  hears  lo  que  employed 
in  the  sense  of  as  for,  probably  an  ellipse  for/<?r  lo  que  toca  d:  — 


lo  que  es  este  sefior,  no  alcanzo 
comprenderle, 


as  for  this  gentleman,  I  do  not 
succeed  in  understanding  him. 


283.  Cuanto  and  todo  cuanto,  as  much,  as  many, 
quite  as  much  —  many,  often  replace  the  relative 
expression  todos  los  que,  todo  lo  que,  all  who,  all 
which,  all  that,  the  que  being  absorbed :  — 


A  la  ma's  dulce 
De  cuantas  nifias 
Del  feliz  Tuna 
La  marge  n  pisan. 

es  el  mas  divertido  de  cuantos 

libros  he  leido, 
le  ofrecio  todo  cuanto  poseia, 

recibieron  con  gozo  cuanto  los 
Espanoles  les  daban,. 


To  the  sweetest 
Of  all  the  maidens 
That  tread  the  borders 
Of  the  pleasant  Turia.1 

it  is  the  most  amusing  of  all  the 
books  that  I  ever  read. 

he  offered  him  all  that  he  pos- 
sessed. 

they  joyfully  received  all  that 
the  Spaniards  gave  them. 


1  The  Turia  is  the  ancient  Roman,  and  modern  poetical,  name  of  the  river 
Guadalaviar,  that  flows  through  the  city  of  Valencia. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


284.  Cuyo,  a,  whose,  of  which,  which,  relates  to 
persons  and  things,  and  agrees  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  object  possessed  :  — 


el  jdven  cuyo  padre  conozco, 
la  hija  cuya  madre  esta  enferma, 
un  oficial   cuyos    me'ritos  son 

imponderables, 
por  cuya  causa, 
la  muerte,  debajo  de  cuyo  yugo 

hemos  de  pasar  todos, 
en  un  lugar  de  La  Mancha,  de 

cuyo  nombre  no  quiero  acor- 

darme, 
una  musica  misteriosa,   cuyas 

notas  se  perdian  en  el  silencio, 


the  youth  whose  father  I  know, 
the  daughter  whose  mother  is  ill. 
an  officer  whose  merits  cannot 

be  exaggerated, 
for  which  cause, 
death,    under   whose    yoke   we 

must  all  pass, 
in  a  village  of  La  Mancha,  the 

name  of  which  I  do  not  care  to 

call  to  mind, 
mysterious  music,  whose  strains 

died  away  in  silence. 


a.  A  quien  is  often  employed  in  the  signification  of 
cuyo,  on  the  same  principle  that  requires  the  dative  of 
the  personal  pronoun  with  a  definite  substantive  to 
render  the  possessive  adjective  (§  253),  usually  com- 
bined with  the  redundant  construction  :  — 

como  individuo,  a  quien  em- 
piezan  d  faltarle  las  fuerzas, 
or, 

cuyas  fuerzas  empiezan  a"  fal- 
tarle, j 

un  hombre,  a  quien  su  empleo  ] 
(or,  cuyo  empleo)  apdnas  le  !• 
daba  para  comer, 


like  an  individual  whose  powers 
begin  to  fail  him. 


a  man  whose  occupation  scarcely 
yielded  him  a  subsistence. 


285;  El  que,  with  its  variations  la  que,  los  que,  las 
que,  is  used  in  the  sense  of  he  who,  she  who,  the  one  or 
one  who;  they  who,  those  who,  the  ones  who  (gen.  el  de 
quien,  etc.),  when  it  relates  to  persons.  Relating  to 
things,  it  signifies  the  one  which  or  that,  those  which  or 
that,  the  ones  which  or  that  (gen.  el  de  que,  etc.)  :  — 


Relative  Pronouns. 


137 


el  que  habla, 

V.  es  el  que  me  ofende, 

el  aturdimiento  del  que  no  se  da 

cuenta  de  su  mobilidad, 
los  que  salen  son  amigos  mios, 


no  es  la  que  buscaba, 
estos  libros   son  los    que 

aprecio, 
aquel  de  quien  hablo, 

al  que  se  va,  se  le  olvida. 


mas 


he  who  speaks. 

you  are  the  one  who  offends  me. 
the  stupefaction  of  one  who  can- 
not account  for  his  movements, 
those   who    are    going   out   are 
friends  of  mine.  [for. 

she  is  not  the  one  I  was  looking 
these  books  are  the  ones  I  prize 

most. 

he  of  whom  I  speak. 
f  him  who  goes  away  they  forget, 

or, 
lout  of  sight,  out  of  mind. 


286.  Each  member  of  the  relative  may  be  inflected, 
-the  antecedent  like  the  definite  article,  and  the 
relative  proper  like  quien  or  que,  according  to  whether 
persons  or  things  are  referred  to.  In  the  oblique  cases, 
however,  the  antecedent  aquel  is  more  common  than 
el,  when  reference  is  made  to  persons ;  otherwise, 
either  is  employed  according  to  the  demonstrative 
meaning :  — 


aquel  de  quien  lo  of, 
aquella  a  quien  visito, 
aquellos  con  quienes  anda, 
echa  de   menos  aquella  ruidosa 
alegria  que  llenaba  la  casa, 


he  from  whom  I  heard  it. 
she  whom  I  visit, 
those  with  whom  he  goes, 
he   misses   that  boisterous   glee 
that  used  to  pervade  the  house. 


REMARK.  —  El,  as  the  antecedent  of  que,  is  the  definite  article 
with  a  demonstrative  application,  and  hence  it  can  never  assume 
the  accent  (el),  which  is  the  characteristic  of  the  personal  pronoun. 


287.  Instead  of  el  que  and  aquel  que,  quien  is  employed 
in  the  same  senses,  including  in  itself  both  the  antece- 
dent and  the  relative  :  — 


138 


Form  and  Inflection. 


quien  calla,  otorga, 

quien  se  hace  de  miel,  se  lecomen 

las  moscas, 
£1  es  quien  lo  dijo, 
A    quien    Dios    quiere    guardar 

^  quien  lo  destruira? 
obrd   como   quien  es   (es  decir, 

conforme    a"    su    condicion    6 

cardcter) , 

como  quien  se  dirige  a  ... 
como   quien   dice   (como   si    se 

dijera) , 
lo  que  es  el  aire,  no  hay  quien  lo 

detenga, 


he  who  is  silent,  consents. 

he   who   makes   himself   honey, 

will  be  devoured  by  the  flies, 
he  is  the  one  who  said  so. 
who  can  destroy  him  whom  God 

wishes  to  preserve  ? 
he  acted  like  the  one  that  he  is 

(i.e.,  like  one  of  his  station  or 

character) . 

as  you  go  towards  .  .  . 
as  one  who  says  (as  if  one  should 

say), 
as  for  the  wind,  there  is  none  that 

can  detain  it. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


288.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  chiefly  distin- 
guishable from  the  relatives  by  the  use  of  the  graphic 
accent,  applied  alike  in  direct  and  indirect  questions. 
They  are :  — 

quie'n,  pi.  quie'nes,  who? 
ciiyo,  a,  pi.  ciiyos,  as, 
de  quie'n, pi.  de  quie'nes, 


? 
WSe' 


(invariable) ,  what  f 
cual,  pi.  cuales,  which  ?  what  ? 


289.   Quien  is  declined  like  any  substantive  :  — 


jiquie'n  es?  ^quienes  son? 
<jde  quien  habla  V.? 
«;£  quidn  visitamos? 
£para  quidn  lo  hizo? 
icon  quie'nes  comen  hoy? 
dime  con  quidn  andas,  y  te  dire* 
quie'n  eres, 


who  is  it?  who  are  they? 
of  whom  do  you  speak? 
whom  do  we  visit? 
for  whom  did  he  do  it  ? 
with  whom  do  they  dine  to-day? 
tell  me  with  whom  you  go,  and  I 
will  tell  you  who  you  are. 


290.    Whose,    used    interrogatively,    is    expressed    by 
ciiyo,  a,  or  by  de  quien :  — 


Interrogative  Pronouns. 


139 


I  cuyo  es  este  libro  ?  cuyo  libro 

es  este?  or, 

^de  quidn  es  este  libro? 
<icuyas  (or,  de  quieX  de  quien-  1 

es)  son  las  casas  aquellas  ?      j 
«ide  cuyos  proyectos  habldis? 
^  en  beneficio  de  quie'n  lo  hace  V.  ? 


whose  book  is  this? 


whose  houses  are  those  (262)  ? 

of  whose  plans  do  you  speak? 
for  whose  benefit  do  you  do  it? 


291.    Que,  what?  is  used  as  a  substantive  and  as  an 
adjective  in  both  numbers  and  genders  :  — 


<:  que'  dice  ?  i  qud  hora  es  ? 
<ide  qud  habla  V.? 
ruido  es  ese? 


what  does  he  say  ?  what  time  is  it  ? 
of  what  are  you  speaking  ? 
what  noise  is  that  ? 


a.    Que  is  also  employed  in  exclamations  to  signify 
what!  what  a!  and  before  an  adjective  alone,  how! — 


I  que'  dia !  \  qud  desgracia ! 
j  que  buena  y  hermosa  es ! 
;  a"  que'  alturas  ha  subido  ! 
I  con  que  aplomo  lo  dice  ! 


what  a  day  !  what  a  misfortune  ! 
how  good  and  beautiful  she  is ! 
to  what  heights  has  he  risen  ! 
with  what  coolness  he  says  it ! 


REMARK.  —  To  add  still  greater  emphasis,  an  adjective  may  be 
placed  after  the  noun  with  tan  or  mas :  — 


I  que'  dia  tan  hermoso  ! 
libros  m£s  pesados ! 


what  a  beautiful  day ! 
what  dull  books ! 


292.  Cual,  which?  is  used  when  one  or  more  objects 
of  a  certain  number  are  specifically  or  vaguely  referred 
to,  and  it  also  replaces  que,  what?  when  it  stands  in 
the  predicate  with  the  verb  to  be :  — 

^cua"!  de  los  libros  quiere  V.  ?  which  of  the  books  do  you  want? 

,;  in  cual  de  mis  amigos  has  vis  to  which   of  my  friends   have  you 

hoy?  seen  to-day? 

^cual  es  la  fecha  de  la  carta?  what  is  the  date  of  the  letter? 

I  cudles  son  los  motives  ?  what  are  the  grounds  ? 

ignoro  cuales  scan,  I  do  not  know  what  they  are. 


140 


Form  and  Inflection. 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 


293.  Ajeno,  a  (Lat.  alienus),  of  others,  another's, 
others',  other  people's,  is  an  adjective  in  Spanish;  the 
neuter,  lo  ajeno,  signifies  what  belongs  to  another,  or  to 
others :  — 


el  dinero  ajeno,  la  casa  ajena, 

los  bienes  ajenos, 

no  te  metas  en  negocios  ajenos 

ni  en  vidas  ajenas, 
busca  lo  tuyo  y  no  lo  ageno, 


another's  money,  house, 
property  of  others, 
do  not  meddle  with  other  peo- 
ple's affairs  or  lives,    [other's, 
seek   thine   own,   and    not   an- 


a.    Ajeno  is  also  an  adjective  with  the  regimen  de, 
and  signifies  foreign  to,  disconnected  with :  — 


esto  es  ajeno  de  mi  caracter, 
ajeno  de  los  negocios  publicos, 
ajeno  de  la  conversacion, 


this  is  foreign  to  my  character, 
disconnected  with  public  affairs, 
a  stranger  to  the  conversation. 


294.  Al  (Lat.  alius,  aliud},  another  person,  another 
thing,  is  now  obsolete,  or  is  occasionally  used  to  give 
an  antique  flavor  to  modern  discourse ;  it  is  replaced 
by  otro,  de  otro  mo  do,  etc.  :  — 

so   el   sayal   ay   al    (Proverbs, 

1556), 
6  los  unos  ni  los  otros  non  faga- 

des  nin  fagan  ende  al  (Law  of 

I492) , 
en  al  estuvo  que  en  encantamen- 

tos  (Cervantes,  Don  Quijote), 


under  the  sackcloth  there  is  an- 
other. 

and  let  none  of  you  do  or  suffer 
aught  else  to  be  done  (inde 
aliud). 

he  was  for  something  else  than 
enchantments. 


295.  Alguien  (Lat.  aliquem),  somebody,  some  one, 
anybody,  any  one,  is  an  invariable  substantive,  used  of 
persons  only,  and  cannot  be  followed  by  a  partitive 
genitive  (de) :  — 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


141 


alguien  ha  estado  aquf, 
,1  ha  venido  alguien  ? 
si  pregunta  por  mi  alguien,  dile 
que  no  estoy, 


some  one  has  been  here. 
has  any  one  come  ? 
if  anybody  asks  for  me,  tell  him 
that  I  am  not  in. 


296.  Alguno,  a  (Lat.  alic-unus),  is  employed  both 
as  a  substantive  and  an  adjective,  and  relates  to  persons 
or  things.  As  related  to  persons,  it  means  somebody, 
some  one,  anybody,  any  one ;  some,  any,  a  few.  Unlike 
alguien,  it  may  be  followed  by  the  partitive  genitive, 
expressed  or  implied,  in  both  genders  and  numbers :  — 

alguno  de  VV.  me  toco, 

esto    lo    hizo    alguno    de   mis 

enemigos, 

algunos  no  lo  creen,  otros  si, 
hay  algunos  que  no  lo  sienten, 
algun  hombre  (§  123),  alguna 

mujer,  [ras, 

algunos  amigos,  algunas  seno- 


some  one  of  you  touched  me. 
some   one  of  my  enemies  did 

this. 

some  do  not  credit  it,  others  do. 
there  are  some  who  do  not  regret 

it. 

some  man,  some  woman, 
a  few  friends,  a  few  ladies. 


REMARK.  —  If  it  be  said  absolutely,  *'  some  one  has  touched  me," 
alguien  would  be  preferred ;  but  if  we  mean  some  one  of  a  specific 
number  or  group,  alguno  (fern,  alguna)  must  be  used.  So,  alguien 
toca  a  la  puerta,  some  one  knocks  at  the  door -,  vaya  a  ver  si  es  alguno 
de  los  que  esperamos,  go  and  see  if  it  is  some  one  of  those  we  are 
expecting',  <iHa  llegado  alguien?  has  anybody  come?  <;Ha  llegado 
alguno?  has  any  one  come  (that  we  looked  for)? 


297.   Alguno,  as  related  to 
a  few:  — 

algun  dia,  alguna  epoca, 
algunos  siglos,  algunas  veces, 
(itiene  V.  algun  remedio? 
posee  algunas  fincas, 
de    estos    libros,    algunos    no 

valen  un  ardite,  s 
algunas    de   estas    pizarras   no 

sirven  ya, 


things,  signifies  some,  any, 

some  day,  some  period, 
some  centuries,  sometimes, 
have  you  any  help  (for  it)  ? 
he  owns  some  real  estate, 
of  these   books,  some  are  not 

worth  a  farthing, 
some   of   these   slates   will   not 

answer  any  longer. 


1 42 


Form  and  Inflection. 


REMARK.  —  "  Some,"  in  a  vague  sense,  as  some  or  other,  one  or 
another,  is  translated  by  the  idiomatic  adjective  expression,  alguno 
que  otro  (fern,  alguna  que  otra) :  — 


€1   estaba  al    puesto    hojeando 
alguno  que  otro  libro, 


he  stood  at  the  stall  turning  over 
the  pages  of  some  book. 


298.  "Some"  or  "any/'  in  partitive  questions,  are 
not  generally  expressed  in  Spanish,  but  their  answers 
are  given  by  an  objective  personal  pronoun  (le,  lo,  los, 
las),  or  by  alguno  with  an  adjective.  Algunos  and 
unos  cuantos  very  exactly  render  the  English  some  in 
the  emphatic  sense  of  a  few  :  — 


^tiene  V.  vino  de  Valdepenas? 
le  tengo  y  de  primera  clase, 
^quien  vende  libros  viejos? 
los  hay  en  aquella  tienda, 
yo  poseo  unos  cuantos  raros 
en  casa, 


have  you  any  Valdepenas  wine  ? 
I  have  some,  and  first-class, 
who  sells  old  books? 
there  are  some  in  yonder  shop. 
I  have  a  few  rare  ones  at  home. 


299.  Algo  (Lat.  alicum  for  aliquod)  and  alguna 
cosa,  something,  anything,  are  used  interchangeably ; 
the  former,  however,  is  invariable  and  absolute :  — 


halld 


' 


r^enelcamino, 
( alguna  cosa  j 

[algo  bueno?  1 

[  alguna  cosa  buena?j 
hay  algo  malicioso  en  £1, 


;  tiene  V. 


he  found  something  in  the  road. 

have  you  anything  good?   [him. 
there  is  something  malicious  in 


a.   Algo  is  often  employed  as  an  adverb  in  the  signi- 
fication of  somewhat,  rather :  — 


estoy  algo  malucho, 
ella  esta"  algo  interesada, 
esta  carne  es  algo  cara, 


I  am  somewhat  ailing. 

she  is  rather  selfish. 

this  meat  is  somewhat  dear. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


143 


REMARK.  —  This  "somewhat"  is  very  often  expressed  by  a 
diminutive  termination,  as  illo,  applied  to  the  adjective ;  and  when 
the  remark  is  delicate,  by  tco,  with  or  without  algo:  — 


la  carne  es  carilla, 
ella  es  algo  bonitica, 


the  meat  is  rather  dear, 
she  is  somewhat  pretty. 


300.  Ambos,  as,  both,  is  used  either  as  a  substantive 
or  an  adjective,  and  of  persons  or  things.  It  may  be 
replaced  by  los  dos  (fern,  las  dos) :  — 


venian  ambos  a  caballo, 
tengo  ambas  manos  heladas, 


both  came  on  horseback, 
both  of  my  hands  are  frozen. 


We  could  say  with  equal  propriety :  venian  los  dos  a  caballo, 
tengo  las  dos  manos  heladas. 

a.  Instead  of  ambos,  as,  entrambos,  as,  is  met  with 
in  the  same  sense,  although  originally  signifying  between 
two    (entre    ambos).       An    idiomatic   variation    is    also 
ambos  a  dos,  entrambos  a  dos,  between  the  two ;  as, 
le  mataron  ambos  a  dos,  they  both  slew  him,  i.e.,  between 
them  both. 

b.  "  Both,"  in  the  sense  of  each,  is  rendered  by  uno 
y  otro,  plur.  unos  y  otros:  — 


personas  de  uno  y  otro  sexo, 
estudid  hombres  y  cosas,  escri- 

biendo  despues  sobre  unos  y 

otras, 


persons  of  both  sexes. 

he  studied  men  and  things,  sub- 
sequently writing  on  each  (or 
both). 


301.  Cada  (Gr.  /card),  each,  every,  is  an  invariable 
adjective  employed  only  in  the  singular,  and  always 
stands  before  the  substantive :  — 


cada  hombre  ;  cada  mujer, 
cada  ano  ;   cada  semana, 
cada  dia  tiene  su  afan, 
£  cada  paso  ;  por  cada  tomo, 


each  man ;  each  woman, 
every  year ;  every  week, 
each  day  has  its  cares, 
at  every  step  ;  for  each  volume. 


144 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a.    Cada  may  stand  with  a  plural   substantive  only 
when  the  latter  is  preceded  by  a  numeral :  — 


cada  dos  dias, 
cada  tres  anos, 
cada  mil  soldados, 


every  two  days, 
every  three  years, 
every  thousand  soldiers. 


302.  When  cada  is  employed  substantively  or  dis- 
tributively,  it  associates  itself  with  uno  (fern,  una]  or 
cual,  forming  cada  uno,  cada  cual:  — 


cada  uno  tiene  sus  quehaceres, 
cada  cual  lleva  lo  suyo, 
cada  uno  de  los  jueces, 
cada  una  de  las  damas, 
cada  uno  segun  sus  obras, 


each  has  his  occupations,   [him. 
every  one  takes  what  belongs  to 
each  (one)  of  the  judges, 
each  (one)  of  the  ladies, 
every  one  according  to  his  deeds. 


303.  Every  may  also  be  expressed  by  todos  los  (fern. 
todas  las),  agreeing  with  a  plural  noun  including  a 
period  of  time  :  — 


todos  los  anos,  dias, 
todas  las  semanas,  veces, 


every  year,  every  day. 
every  week,  every  time. 


304.  Cierto,  a,  a  certain  — ,  is  an  adjective  which 
is  always  followed  by  a  noun  without  the  indefinite 
article :  — 


cierto  hombre  ;  cierta  se flora, 
ciertos  libros  ;  ciertas  cosas, 
bajo  ciertas  condiciones, 


a  certain  man  ;  a  certain  lady, 
certain  books;  certain  things, 
on  certain  conditions. 


REMARK.  —  If  by  certain,  we  wish  to  indicate  authenticity,  the 
above  adjective  ceases  to  be  indefinite  and  always  stands  after  the 
noun,  or  in  the  predicate  alone :  — 


noticias  ciertas, 

la  noticia  es  cierta, 

no  es  cierto  lo  que  V.  dice, 


sure,  authentic  news, 
the  intelligence  is  true, 
what  you  say  is  not  so. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


145 


305.  Cosa,  a  thing  (fern.),  is  often  used  in  the  signifi- 
cation of  something,  anything;  and  with  a  negative, 
nothing :  — 

it  is  something  well  worth  seeing. 

is  there  anything  more  extra- 
ordinary ? 

they  journeyed  on  without  any- 
thing occurring  to  them  worthy 
of  note. 

that  is  not  worth  anything. 

that  is  nothing  (important). 
1 1  do  not  want  anything  else,  or 
\\  care  for  nothing  else. 


es  cosa  muy  de  ver, 

I  hay  cosa  mas  chocante  ? 

caminaron  sin  que  les  aconte- 
ciese  cosa  que  de  contar 
fuese, 

no  vale  cosa, 

no  es  cosa  (que  valga), 

no  quiero  otra  cosa, 


306.  Fulano  (fern,  fulana)  (Span.-Arab.////^),  means 
so  and  so,  such  a  one,  or  it  expresses  an  evasion  not 
easily  rendered.  It  is  used  only  of  persons  in  the  sin- 
gular, to  indicate  any  one  whose  name  we  do  not  know, 
or  recall,  or  care  to  give.  When  used  alone,  it  commonly 
assumes  the  form  of  fulano  de  tal1;  if  two  different 
persons  are  referred  to  in  the  same  vague  manner, 
f  ulano  and  mengano  are  associated ;  and,  if  three, 
fulano,  mengano  y  zutano  represent  the  "Tom,  Dick, 
and  Harry,"  of  vulgar  English2:  — 

£  quien  sera  f  ulano  ? 

<:  quien   lo   dijo  ?   <;  que   se   yo  ? 

Fulano  de  tal. 
ayer  me  escribio  fulano  de  tal, 


who  can  so  and  so  be  ? 

who   said   so?     I   don't   know; 

such  a  one. 
yesterday  so  and  so  wrote  me. 


1  "  So  and  so  of  such  a  name,"  fulano  representing  the  Christian  name 
(nombre),  and  tal  the  surname  (apellido);  as,  for  example,  Juan  de  Valdes. 

2  Mengano  and  zutano  are  undoubtedly  alliterative  merely,  made  up  of 
invented  stems  with  the  common  ending  ano.     Zutano  is  explained  unsatisfac- 
torily by  Dietz  and  Mahn,  each  in  his  own  way.     Neither  mentions  mengano, 
which,  in  turn,  may  be  connected  with  the  obsolete  Mengo  or  Mingo,  familiar 
for  Domingo,  Dominic,  or  plain  "  Dick,"  although   I   incline  to  think  them 
alliterations,  corresponding  in  principle  to  riff-raff,  pell-mell,  etc. 


146 


Form  and  Inflection. 


no  les  va  en  ello  ma's  que  el  gusto 
de  que  los  mande  fulano  6 
mengano, 

no  conozco  ni  fulano,  ni  men- 
gano, ni  zutano, 


they  have  no  other  interest  in 
it  than  the  pleasure  of  being 
ordered  about  by  this  one  and 
that. 

I  know  neither  this  one,  that 
one,  nor  the  other. 


307.  Mismo,  a  (archaic,  mesmo,  a,  still  used  in  rural 
districts ;   low   Lat.   metipsimus ;    Ital.    medesimo ;   old 
Fr.  mesme),  is  an  adjective  with  occasional  substantive 
functions.     The  neuter  is  lo  mismo,  the  same  (thing). 

308.  When  mismo  stands  before  a  noun,  it  has  the 
meaning  of  the  same,  if  coupled  with  the  definite  article ; 
of  same  and  very,  with  the  demonstrative  adjective;  of 
very,  with  a  possesive  adjective  ;  and  the  same  (one  and 
the  same},  with  the  indefinite  article  or  its  plural  unos, 
unas  : — 


el  mismo  dia  ;  la  misma  noche, 
los  mismos  pensamientos, 
este  mismo  caso, 
esas  mismas  casas, 
mis  mismos  amigos,  enemigos, 
una  misma  suerte,  patria, 
unos  mismos  padres  (§  106), 
viene  a"  ser  lo  mismo, 


the  same  day ;  the  same  night. 

the  same  thoughts.          [stance. 

this  same  (or  this  very)  circum- 

those  same  houses. 

my  very  friends,  enemies. 

the  same  fate,  country. 

the  same  father  and  mother. 

it  amounts  to  the  same  (thing) . 


a.    Before  or  after  the  noun,  mismo  with  the  definite 
article  means  also  very  or  self:  — 

el  mismo  dia ;  el  dia  mismo, 
las  mismas  mujeres, 


See  also 


239-242. 


the  very  day ;  the  day  itself, 
the   very   women ;    the   women 
themselves. 


309.    Nada   (Lat.   res  nata,   with   a   negative,  not  a 
living  thing),   nothing  or  not  anything,  stands  before 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


147 


the  verb  without  a  negative,  or  after  the  verb  with  no, 
not.  Hence,  in  the  latter  case,  and  generally  in  Spanish, 
two  negatives  strengthen  the  negation  :  — 


nada  tengo,  or  no  tengo  nada, 
nada  veo,  or  no  veo  nada, 
nada  vale,  or  no  vale  nada, 
nada  me  dijo,  or  no  me  dijo 
nada, 


I  have  nothing  —  not  anything. 
I  see  nothing  —  I  do  not  see  a. 
it  is  worth  nothing —  not  worth  a. 
he  told  me  nothing  —  did  not  tell 
me  anything. 


310.  Although  etymologically  feminine,  nada  is  always 
associated  with  the  absolute  form  of  an  adjective,  and 
in  that  case  regularly  follows  the  negative  verb :  — 


no  hizo  nada  bueno  ni  malo, 
no  exijo  nada  gravoso, 


he  did  nothing  good  or  bad. 
I  require  nothing  onerous. 


311.  Instead  of  nada,  the  forms  ninguna  cosa  or  cosa 
alguna  are  constantly  met  with  in  the  same  signification. 
The  former  may  stand  before  the  verb,  or  after  it  with 
the  additional  negation,  while  the  latter  can  only  follow 
a  negative  verb  ;  with  an  adjective  only  the  first  form, 
ninguna  cosa,  can  be  used,  the  adjective  agreeing  with 
the  feminine  cosa :  — 


ninguna  cosa  tengo,  1 

no  tengo  ninguna  cosa,  or 
no  tengo  cosa  alguna, 

no  tengo  ninguna  cosa  buena,  or\ 
no  tengo  nada  bueno ;  but  not  \ 
no  tengo  cosa  alguna  buena, 


I  have  nothing,. or 
I  have  not  anything. 


I  have  nothing  good. 


312.  Nada,  ninguna  cosa,  or  cosa  alguna,  may  stand 
after  a  verb  without  no,  in  the  signification  of  anything 
or  auglit :  — 


148  Form  and  Inflection. 

a.    In   exclamatory  or   interrogative    sentences   that 
involve  a  negative  answer :  — 


j  c6mo  negarle  a"  61  nada ! 
I  quie'n  habra  visto  ni  oido  nada 
que  iguale  d  ello  ? 


how  can  one  refuse  him  anything ! 
who  can  have  seen  or  heard  any- 
thing to  equal  that  ? 


b.  After  verbs  that  contain  in  themselves  a  negative 
idea :  — 

guardese  V.  de  decirle  nada,       |    beware  how  you  tell  him  any- 
i.e.,  see  that  you  do  not  tell  him  anything.  [thing ; 

c.  After  the  prepositions  sin,   without;    antes  de, 
before;  the  conjunctions  sin  que,  without  (that) ;  antes 
que,  before  (that)  :  — 


sin  preguntarle  nada, 
antes  de  decirles  nada, 
sin  que  me  dijese  iiada, 
antes  que  contestase  nada, 


without  asking  him  anything, 
before  telling  them  anything, 
without  his  telling  me  anything, 
before  I  answered  anything. 


d.    After  comparatives  and  superlatives  :  — 


mejor  que  nada  de  todo  cuanto 
le  he  oido, 


better  than  anything  that  I  ever 
heard  him  say. 


313.  Nada  is  often  used  elliptically  as  an  exclamation 
designed  to  cut  off  farther  remark  or  discussion,  and 
may  be  variously  rendered  by  say  no  more,  never  mind, 
well,  there:  — 


nada,  nada,  voy  a"  verle  en  se- 

guida  (for  no  digas  mas) , 
pues  nada,  or 
con  que, 


\  hasta  la  vista, 


say  no  more  ;  Pll  go  and  see  him 


at  once. 


well ;  until  we  meet  again. 


1  If  nunca  stands  after  the  verb  with  nada,  the  verb  is  negative :  no  vale 
nunca  nada,  he  never  amounts  to  anything;  nunca  vale  nada,  he  is  never  worth 
anything. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


149 


314.   Nada  may  be  followed  by  de,  with  substantives, 
to  signify  nothing  of,  no :  — 

let  nothing  of  this  leak  out. 

he  has  no  (propensity  to)  gaming 


que  nada  de  esto  transluzca, 
£1  no  tiene  nada  de  juego  ni 
licores  (no  tiene  vicios), 


.  or  strong  drink  (no  bad  habits) . 


315.   No  —  nada,  also  means  not  —  at  all :  — 

that  does  not  matter  at  all. 
I  don't  like  that  at  all  (literally, 
it  does  not  please  me  at  all). 


no  importa  nada, 
no  me  gusta  nada, 


a.    Nada  is  likewise  employed  without  other  nega- 
tives, in  the  same  sense  of  not  at  all,  in  no  respect :  — 


yo  nada  temo  la  muerte, 
el  es  nada  perezoso, 


I  do  not  at  all  fear  death, 
he  is  not  at  all  indolent. 


316.  Nadie,1  no  one,  nobody,  is  the  negative  of  dlguien, 
and  is  subject  to  the  same  limitations  (§  295);  that  is, 
it  is  an  invariable  substantive,  used  of  persons  only,  and 
cannot  be  followed  by  a  partitive  genitive.  Like  nada, 
it  requires  another  negative  only  when  it  comes  after 
the  verb  :  — 


nadie  pase,  or  no  pase  nadie, 
nadie  ha  venido  todavia,  or 
no  ha  venido  nadie  todavia, 
a"  nadie  veo,  oruo  veo  a"  nadie, 
nadie  vid  jamas  a"  Dios, 
I  quien  ha  llamado  ?  —  nadie, 

no  he  visto  a  nadie, 


let  no  one  pass  (or  go  in) . 
nobody  has  come  yet. 

I  do  not  see  any  one.  [time, 
no  man  hath  seen  God  at  any 
who  called  (or  knocked)  ?  —  No 

one. 
I  have  not  seen  anybody. 


1  Nadie  (ancient,  nadi)  is  from  the  Latin  natus  —  with  a  negative,  not  a  living 
soul;  the  form  nadie  seems  to  be  an  assimilation  oinadi  to  the  ending  e  in  este, 
ese.  In  the  sixteenth  century,  it  is  often  replaced  by  the  formula  no  —  hombre 
—  no  —  nadie :  El  no  maravillarse  hombre  de  nada,  for  a  man  to  wonder  at 
nothing.  See  my  edition  of  the  Works  of  Mendoza,  Madrid,  1877,  p.  106. 


ISO 


Form  and  Inflection. 


317.  Nadie  may  stand  after  a  verb  without  no,  in  the 
signification  of  anybody,  under  the  same  conditions  that 
apply  to  nada  (§  312,  a-d] :  — 

who  can  have  seen  anybody  more 
civil.  [thing? 

how  can  I  refuse  any  one  any- 

beware  how  you  disclose  the 
secret  to  anybody. 

without  being  heard  by  any  one. 

he  went  out  without  anybody's 
seeing  him. 

he  never  would  listen  to  any  one. 

one  of  the  strangest  pieces  of 
fiction  that  any  one  could 
conceive. 


habra"  visto  nadie   que 

sea  ma's  comedido? 
£  c6mo  negare  nada  a  nadie  ? 
guardese   V.    de    descubrir   el 

secreto  a"  nadie, 
sin  ser  oido  de  nadie, 
sali6  sin  que  nadie  le  viese, 

nunca  quiso  escuchar  a"  nadie,  j 
or,  [nadie, 

no    quiso    escuchar    nunca    aj 
una  de  las  mas  nuevas  historias 
que  nadie  pudo  pensar, 


318.  Ninguno,1  a,  nobody,  no  one,  none,  no,  the  negative 
of  alguno  (§  296),  is  employed  both  as  a  substantive 
and  an  adjective,  and  relates  to  persons  or  things. 
Unlike  nadie,  it  may  be  followed  by  the  partitive 
genitive,  expressed  or  implied,  in  both  genders  and 
numbers  :  — 


<:cual    de    ellos    salid?  —  Nin- 

guno, 

ninguno  de  los  enemigos, 
ninguna  de  las  casas, 
ningun  enemigo  (§  123), 
ninguna  casa, 
ninguno  consintio  en  ello, 
no  se  fie  V.  en  nadie, 


which  one  of  them  went  out?  — 

No  one. 

none  (not  one)  of  the  enemies, 
none  (not  one)  of  the  houses, 
no  enemy, 
no  house. 

nobody  agreed  to  it.          [body, 
do  not  put  confidence  in  any- 


1  Ninguno  is  from  the  Latin  nec-unus  for  nullus,  with  the  intercalation  of  an 
n  (nencunus)  after  the  analogy  of  renglon  for  region  (augmentative  of  regla 
\regula\}  and  of  cementerio  for  cemeterio. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


no  se  fie  V.  en  ninguno   (de 

ellos) ,  [ninguno, 

<itiene    V.    libros? — no    tengo 


do  not  put  confidence  in  any  (of 

them).  [none. 

have  you  any  books?  —  I  have 


319.     Like    nada    and    nadie,    ninguno    requires    an 
additional  negative  when  it  stands  after  the  verb :  — 


no  quiere  a"  ninguno  de  los  dos, 
no  consta  en  ninguna  ley, 
no   tengo  ningun   libro ;    nin- 
guna casa,  [regalo, 
nunca    quiso    aceptar    ningun 


he  likes  neither  of  the  two. 
it  does  not  appear  by  any  law. 
I  have  no  book;  no  house. 

[present, 
he    never    would    accept    any 


320.  Ninguno  is  translated  by  any  one,  any,  when  it 
stands  after  a  verb  without  no,  under  the  same  conditions 
that  apply  to  nada  and  nadie  (§§  312,  317) :  — 


sin  que  ninguno  de  ellos  me  lo 


admiraronse  todos,  y  mas   los 
duques  que  ninguno  (§  106), 


without  any  of  them  telling  me 

so. 
all    were    astonished,    and    the 

duke  and  duchess  more  than 

any  one. 


321.  After  a  negative  verb,  alguno,  a,  is  more  ele- 
gantly employed  than  ninguno,  especially  after  sin; 
but  it  must  be  associated  with  a  substantive  expressed, 
and  always  stand  after  it :  — 


no  siente  remordimiento  alguno, 
sin  trabajo  ni  fatiga  alguna, 
sin  duda  alguna, 


he  feels  no  compunction, 
without  any  toil  or  fatigue, 
without  any  doubt. 


a.    If  the  noun  be  understood,  ninguno  alone  can  be 
used :  — 


estaba  colgado  de  sus  palabras 
sin  hablar  ninguna, 


he  hung  on  his  words  without 
uttering  (himself)  any. 


152 


Form  and  Inflection. 


322.  The  English  no,  not  any,  as  an  adjective,  when 
it  is  unemphatic,  may  be  simply  expressed  by  a  verb 
made  negative  by  no,  followed  by  a  noun  without 
article :  — 


no  tengo  tiempo, 

no  tiene  casa, 

no  tenemos  libros, 

no  tienen  amigos, 

no  hay  necesidad  de  ello, 

no  hay  contestacion, 


I  have  no  time, 
he  has  no  house, 
we  have  no  books, 
they  have  no  friends, 
there  is  no  necessity  for  it. 
"•no  answer"  (to  a  message). 


a.  To  make  this  construction  emphatic,  we  have  only 
to  put  ninguno,  a,  before  the  noun,  or  better,  alguno,  a, 
after  it :  — 


no  tengo  tiempo  alguno, 

no  hay  ninguna  contestacion,  or 

no  hay  contestacion  alguna, 


I  have  no  time  at  all. 

there  is  no  answer  whatever. 


323.  Otro,  a  (Lat.  alter,  alfro),  another,  other  (pi. 
others},  is  used  both  as  an  adjective  and  a  substantive, 
embracing  persons  or  things.  It  does  not  admit  the 
indefinite  article  as  in  English  (an-other),  but  requires 
the  definite  article  when  a  distinct  person  or  thing  is 
to  be  specified  :  — 


otro  individuo  ;  el  otro  i., 
otra  persona ;  la  otra  persona, 
otro  dia ;  el  otro  dia, 
otra  noche  ;  la  otra  noche, 
otros  dicen ;  los  otros  creen, 
otras  piensan  de  distinto  modo, 
venga  otro ;  trae  el  otro, 
dclme  otra ;  da"me  la  otra, 
tengo  otros ;  tengo  los  otros, 
busco  otras, 
no  quiero  las  otras, 


another  individual ;  the  other  i. 
another  person  ;  the  other  p. 
another  day ;  the  other  day. 
another  night ;  the  other  night, 
others  say;  the  others  believe, 
others  {fern.)  think  differently, 
bring  on  another ;  bring  the  o. 
give  me  another ;  give  me  the  o. 
I  have  others  ;  I  have  the  others. 
I  look  for  others. 
I  don't  want  the  others. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


153 


324.  The  other  fart,  the  others,  when  they  mean  the 
rest,  are  expressed  respectively  by  lo  demas  and  los 
or  las  demas:  — 


lo  demas  me  importa  poco, 

no  he  visto  a"  los  demas, 

en  cuanto  a"  las  demas  me  callo, 


I  care  little  for  the  other  part. 
I  have  not  seen  the  others, 
as  for  the  rest,  I  say  nothing. 


REMARK.  —  Al  otro  dia  means  on  the  next  day.  The  genitive 
of  possession  is  expressed  by  ajeno  (§  293) ;  as,  los  bienes  ajenos, 
not  los  bienes  de  otros,  other  peopled  property  or  goods. 

325.  Propio,  a  (formerly proprio),  self,  own,  may  stand 
after  the  personal  pronouns  like  mismo,  and  after  the 
possessive  adjectives  and  pronouns  to  strengthen  their 
meaning :  — 


tu  propio  or  propia, 

tu  propio  amigo, 

por  si  propios, 

este  dinero  es  suyo  propio, 


thou  thyself. 

thy  own  friend. 

of  themselves. 

this  money  is  his  own. 


REMARK.  —  Propio  de  signifies  adapted  to,  suitable  for :  — 
un  juego  propio  de  nifios,  |    a  game  suitable  for  children. 

326.  Quiera,  you  wish,  you  please,  subjunctive  of  the 
verb  querer,  is  joined  to  or  associated  with  pronouns, 
to  form  various  indefinite  expressions. 


327.   Quienquiera,  whoever,  any  one  whatever,  relates 
only  to  persons,  and  in  an  absolute  sense :  — 


quienquiera  que  sea, 

eso  lo  diria  a"  quienquiera, 

seria  antipatico,  no  tan  solo  en 

el,  si  no  en  quienquiera  que 

sea, 


whoever  (that)  it  be. 

I  would  affirm  that  to  any  one. 

that  would  be  repulsive,  not  only 
in  him,  but  in  anybody  what- 
ever. 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a.  Quien  alone,  followed  by  a  verb  in  the  indicative 
or  subjunctive,  often  admits  the  signification  of  any  one 
who,  especially  in  the  oblique  cases  :  — 


lo  digo  d  quien  quiera  aceptar 
la  apuesta, 


I  say  it  to  any  one  who  may  care 
to  accept  the  wager. 


328.  Cualquiera,  pi.  cualesquiera,  any  (whatever), 
any  (you  please),  is  both  an  adjective  and  a  substantive, 
relating  to  persons  or  things:  — 

a.  As  an  adjective,  it  may  precede  or  follow  the  noun ; 
but  in  the  latter  case,  only  in  the  singular :  — 


cualquier  dia  (§  123)  —  noche, 
cualesquier  motives — personas, 
un  libro — una  pluma  cualquiera, 


any  day ;  any  night. 

any  reasons  ;  any  persons. 

any  book ;  any  pen. 


b.    Followed  by  de,  cualquiera  signifies  likewise  any, 
and  of  two,  either:  — 


cualquiera  de  los  bultos, 
cualquiera  de  los  dos, 


any  of  the  packages, 
either  of  the  two. 


REMARK.  —  Un  cualquiera  means  "  a  nobody,"  a  person  of  no 
account,  or  of  no  pedigree. 

329.    Cualquiera,  followed  by  que  and  a  verb  in  the 

subjunctive,  means  whichever,  whatever:  — 


cualquier  cosa  que  V.  diga, 
cualquier  motivo  que  se  pre- 
sente,  [pren, 

cualesquiera  cosas  que  com- 
cualquiera  que  V.  guste, 


whatever  you  say. 

whatever  motive  be  alleged,  or 

assigned. 

whatever  things  they  buy. 
whichever  you  like. 


330.  Whatever  may  also  be  expressed  by  sea  el  que, 
la  que,  pi.  sean  los  que,  las  que,  with  a  noun  and  a 
verb  in  the  subjunctive  :  — 


sea  el  que  quiera  el  motive  que 

se  presente, 
sea  el  que  quiera  el  trabajo  que 

nos  cueste  vivir, 


Indefinite  Pronouns.  155 

whatever  reason  be  assigned. 


whatever  be   the    trouble    that 
living  costs  us. 


331.  Whatever,  as  a  neuter  substantive,  is  rendered 
by  todo  lo  que  and  por  mas  que,  with  the  subjunctive; 
what,  in  this  relation,  by  lo  que:  — 


todo  lo  que  V.  me  manddre 

eso  hard, 

por  mas  que  diga,  no  lo  creo, 
diga  lo  que  quiera, 


whatever  you  order  me,  I  will 
do.  [him. 

whatever  he  say,  I  do  not  credit 
say  what  he  may. 


332.  Sendos,  as  (corrupted  from  the  Latin  singulos 
-as),  one  for  each,  each  one,  is  used  distributively  and  only 
in  the  plural :  — 


tenian  las  cuatro  ninfas  sendos 
vasos  hechos  d  la  romana, 

salieron  de  la  nave  seis  enanos, 
tanendo  sendas  harpas, 


the  four  nymphs  had  each  a  vase 
made  in  the  Roman  fashion. 

six  dwarfs  came  forth  from  the 
vessel,  each  playing  a  harp. 


333.   Tal  (pi.  tales),  such,  such  a  (pi.  such),  is  used  as 
a  substantive  and  an  adjective  of  persons  and  things. 


a.    Without  an  indefinite  article,  as  an  adjective:  — 

such  a  man ;  such  a  woman, 
such  a  day ;  such  a  house, 
such  men  ;  such  days, 
such  lives ;  such  persons. 


tal  hombre ;  tal  mujer, 
tal  dia ;  tal  casa, 
tales  hombres ;  tales  dias, 
tales  vidas ;  tales  personas, 


REMARK.  —  The  same  use  extends  to  all  the  cases :  — 

no  diga  V.  tal  cosa, 

la  historia  de  tal  £poca, 

no  me  fio  en  tales  hombres, 


do  not  say  such  a  thing, 
the  history  of  such  a  period. 
I  do  not  trust  such  men. 


156  Form  and  Inflection. 

b.    Without  an  indefinite  article,  as  a  neuter  substan- 
tive :  — 


no  hay  tal  en  este  pais, 
no  creo  tal, 


there  is  no  such  (thing)  here. 
I  don't  believe  such  a  (thing) . 


334.  Tal  is  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  only 
when  used  with  names  of  persons,  and  in  the  sense  of 
one,  a  certain.  With  common  nouns,  cierto,  without 
the  article,  has  the  same  meaning,  a  certain.  Hence 
un  tal,  una  tal,  and  cierto,  cierta,  are  adjectives 
replacing  fulano  or  fulan  ode  tal,  which  can  only  be 
employed  as  a  substantive  (§§  304,  306):  — 

me  lo  dijo  fulano  de  tal, 
se  lo  did  un  tal  Perez, 


cierto  sargento,  un  tal  Garcia, 
se  puso  al  frente  de  la  suble- 
vacion, 


such  a  one  told  me  so. 

one  Perez  gave  it  to  him. 

a  certain  sergeant,  one  Garcia, 

put  himself  at  the  head  of  the 

insurrection. 


REMARK.  —  Tal  often  serves  to  strengthen  an  affirmation,  denial, 
or  interrogation :  — 

si  tal;  no  tal;  ^que  tal?  |    yes;  no;  how  are  you? 

335.  Idioms  with  tal  are :  tal  cual,  such  as,  and  so  so, 
pretty  well ;  tal  y  tal,  such  and  such  (//.  tales  y  tales, 
etc.). 

336.  Todo,  a  (Lat.  totus),  all,  whole,  every,  anything. 
is   employed   as   an   adjective,   a  substantive,  and    an 
indefinite  pronoun. 

337.  As  an  adjective,  it  is  followed  by  the  definite 
article,  or  other  determinative  word  if  the  noun  requires 
one:  — 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


157 


todo  el  dia ;  toda  la  noche, 
todos  los  hombres, 
todas  las  clases, 
esto  fue  toda  su  locura, 
por  todo  aquel  dia, 
hizo  un  viaje  por  toda  Espana, 
todo    Madrid    concurritf    a    la 
fiesta, 


all  day ;  the  whole  night.        0 
all  men. 
all  classes. 

his  whole  folly  consisted  in  this, 
throughout  that  whole  day. 
he  made  a  journey  over  all  Spain, 
all   Madrid    turned  out  at  the 
festival. 


REMARK.  —  In  poetical  or  intensive  prose  language,  the  adjec- 
tive may  follow  the  noun :  — 

armdse  de  sus  armas  todas  (Cer- 
vantes), 


he  armed  himself  with  all  his 
arms. 


338.    Instead  of  todo,  entero,  a,  entire,  whole,  all,  may 
be  used,  placed  always  after  the  noun  :  — 


el  pueblo  entero, 

la  noche  entera, 

dias  enteros ;  la  Espana  entera, 


the  whole  village, 
the  whole  night, 
whole  days ;  all  Spain. 


339.  An  idiomatic  use  of  todo  is  found  especially 
with  expressions  of  time,  in  which  is  meant  some 
indefinite  point  within  the  general  period  mentioned  :  — 

en  todo  el  mes  de  setiembre, 


en  todo  el  ano  que  viene, 


some  time  in  September,   [year. 
some   time   during   the  coming 


340.  Todo,  as  an  adjective,  may  be  followed  by  the 
noun  directly,  in  the  sense  of  every  in  the  singular,  or 
all  in  the  plural :  — 


todo  Espanol  que  se  respeta  a" 

si  mismo, 

todo  corazon  sensible, 
todo  remedio  es  ya  vano, 
en  todo  caso ;  a"  toda  hora, 
por  todos  modos, 
en  todas  partes, 


every    Spaniard    who    respects 

himself. 

every  heart  that  feels, 
every  appliance  is  now  vain, 
in  every  case  ;  at  all  hours, 
in  every  way  (in  all  ways), 
everywhere  (in  all  directions). 


158 


Form  and  Inflection. 


^REMARK.  —  After  por,  todo  frequently  means  the  same  as  tinico,  a, 
sole,  only,  with  which  it  is  freely  exchanged :  — 

me    di6    por    toda    respuesta       he  gave  me  as  his  only  answer 


que 


that  .  .  . 


341.   As  a  substantive,  todo   refers   to   persons   and 
things,  in  all  genders  and  in  both  numbers  :  — 

a.    In  the  singular,  mostly  as  a  neuter  —  all,  every- 
thing: — 


todo  se  concluyd, 
todo  era  gritos  y  alboroto, 
hombre  pobre  todo  es  trazas, 
todo    manifiesta    su    remordi- 

miento, 
en  esta  mesa  hay  de  todo, 


all  is  over  (is  finished), 
all  was  shrieks  and  confusion, 
a  poor  man  is  all  projects, 
everything  proves  his  compunc- 
tion, 
on  this  table  there  is  everything. 


REMARK.  —  The  neuter  use  of  todo  is  frequently  associated  with 
a  pleonastic  lo :  — 


lo  ha  confesado  todo, 
todo  lo  gastas  en  vanidades, 


he  has  confessed  everything, 
you  spend  your  all  on  frivolities. 


b.    In  the  plural  in  both  genders  :  — 


todos  esta*n  ya  presos, 

aprobdron  la  medida  todos, 

no   todos    piensan    del    mismo 

modo, 

las  he  visto  a"  todas  (women) , 
todos  estan  de  venta  (books'), 


all  are  now  in  prison. 

all  favored  the  measure. 

not  all  think  the  same  way  (have 

the  same  way  of  thinking) . 
I  have  seen  them  all. 
all  are  for  sale. 


342.   Todo  is  often  synonymous  with  cualquier  cosa, 
anything  (whatever)  in  a  good  or  bad  sense  :  — 


ese  hombre  es  capaz  de  todo, 
a"  todo  me  hallara's  dispuesto, 


that  man  is  capable  of  anything, 
you  will  find  me  ready  for  a. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


159 


343.  Finally,  todo  qualifies  relative  pronouns,  neuter 
adjectives  (substantives)  and  adverbs,  in  the  sense  of 
every  one,  all,  quite,  thoroughly ;  as,  todo  el  que,  todo 
aquel  que,  every  one  who ;  todos  los  que,  all  those  who ; 
todos  cuantos,  todo  cuanto,  all  who  or  that;  todo  lo 
cual,  all  of  which ;  todo  lo  que,  all  that ;  todo  cansado, 
quite  tired ;  todo  lo  demas,  all  the  rest  (omne  caterum), 
etc. 


344.  Uno,  a,  is  an  adjective,  a  substantive,  and  a 
pronoun,  signifying  in  the  singular  an  or  a,  one,  each 
other ;  and  in  the  plural,  some,  each  other,  one  another:  — 


a.  Singular :  — 

un  hombre  (§  123) ;  una  ventana, 
un  dia  ;  una  semana, 
,;  tiene  V.  un  libro  ?  —  tengo  uno, 
,;  puede  uno  ver  que  es  ? 
los  dos  hermanos  se  quieren  uno 
a  otra  (§  106),          [en  otro, 
estos   hombres  se  apoyan  uno 

b.  Plural:  — 

unos  bollos  ;  unas  almendras, 
son  unos  desconocidos, 
unos  van  y  otros  vienen,  [otros, 
los  obreros  se  ayudan  unos  a" 
estas  planchas  de  metal  se  dan 

una    contra    otra,    or    unas 

contra  otras, 


a  man ;  a  window. 

one  day  ;  one  week. 

have  you  a  book?  —  I  have  one. 

can  one  see  what  it  is  ? 

the  brother  angf  sister  are  fond 

of  each  other, 
these  men  sustain  one  another. 


(some)  cakes ;  almonds, 
they  are  unknown  persons, 
some  go  and  others  come, 
the  laborers  help  one  another, 
these    plates    of    metal    strike 

against    each    other,    or   one 

another. 


345.  Uno,  as  an  indefinite  numeral,  may  stand  in 
contrasted  clauses,  but  usually  at  the  present  day 
without  the  article  : : — 


i6o 


Form  and  Inflection. 


de  un  momento  a*  otro, 
de  una  manera  u  otra, 
uno  fu6  justiciado  y  el  otro 

soltado, 

uno  y  otro ;  uno  u  otro, 
ni  uno  ni  otro, 


from  one  minute  to  another. 

in  one  way  or  another. 

the  one  was  executed  and  the 

other  set  free, 
both;  either, 
neither. 


346.   As  an  indefinite  pronoun,  uno  may  be  followed 
by  the  partitive  genitive  :  — 


abrid  una  de  las  ventanas, 
me  regald  uno  de  sus  libros, 


he  opened  one  of  the  windows, 
he  gave  me  one  of  his  books. 


a.    The  plural  of  uno  in  this  construction  is  algunos, 
as,  some,  not  unos :  — 


algunos  de  sus  amigos, 


|   some  of  his  friends. 


REMARK. — We  may  say  unos  amigos  suyos,  some  friends  of 
his,  but  not  unos  de  sus  amigos.  The  singular  of  alguno  may  be 
used  thus  distributively,  but  it  is  vaguer  than  uno  —  some  one  or 
other  of  his  friends. 


347.    Uno,  a,  replaces  a  substantive  with  or  without 
an  adjective,  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  former :  — 


tengo  un  reloj  de  oro  y  uno  de 

plata,  ambos  preciosos, 
unas  veces  gastaba  levita  riegra, 

y  otras  una  de  colores, 
hablando  de  carabinas,  61  tiene 

una  a"  canon  liso  muy  buena, 
careciendo  yo  de  abrigo,  el  me 

prestd  uno  viejo  suyo, 


I  have  a  gold  watch  and  a  silver 

one,  both  very  fine  ones, 
sometimes  he  wore  a  black  frock 

coat,  and  others  a  colored  one. 
speaking  of  rifles,  he  has  a  very 

good  smooth-bore  (one). 
I  being  without  an  overcoat,  he 

lent  me  an  old  one  of  his. 


348.  Uno,  one;  se,  they,  you;  gente,  people ;  are  used 
in  the  vague  signification  of  some  one,  any  one ;  or  the 
verb  may  be  put  in  the  third  person  plural :  — 


The  Verb. 


161 


no  sabe  uno  que  hacer,  j 
no  se  sabe  que  hacer, 
llama  gente,  or  llama  dlguien, 
llaman  a*  la  puerta, 
^quien  es?  —  gente  de  paz.1 


one  does  not  know  what  to  do. 

somebody  knocks. 

there  is  a  rap  at  the  door. 

who  is  it  ? — a  friend  (peace-folk) . 


349.   Varios,  as,  several,  a  good  many,  is  used  as  an 
adjective  and  a  substantive  :  — 


varies  amigos  vinieron, 
de  estos  brillantes  tengo  varies, 
he  visto  varios  ejemplares  de 
esta  obra, 


several  friends  came.  [ral. 

of  these  diamonds,  I  have  seve- 
I  have  seen  several  copies  of  this 
work. 


REMARK.  —  Instead  of  varies,  and  parallel  with  it,  the  term  una 
porcion  de,  a  considerable  number  of,  considerable,  several,  is 
popularly  used  followed  by  a  noun  in  the  singular  or  plural,  or  by  a 
collective  word :  — 


abone  una  porcion  de  dinero, 

uiia  porcion  de  gente, 

he   gastado    una    porcion    de 

duros  en  ello, 
una  porcion  de  veces, 
recibi  una  porcion  de  encargos, 


I  paid  considerable  money. 

a  considerable  number  of  people. 

I  have  expended  several  dollars 

on  that. 

several  times,  a  number  of  times. 
I    was    entrusted    with    several 

messages. 


The  Verb. 


350.  Before  proceeding  to  the  conjugation  of  verbs, 
it  is  indispensable  to  give  the  simple  tenses  of  the 
auxiliary  verb  haber .  .  ,  to  have  .  .  ,  by  the  aid  of  which 
the  compound  tenses  of  all  other  verbs  are  formed. 


1  In  every  Spanish  apartment-door  there  is  fixed  a  ventanllla  or  small 
opening,  with  a  metal  slide,  which  the  servant  slips  back  on  answering  a  knock 
or  ring,  and  inquires,  &Quien?  refusing  to  open  till  the  caller  exclaims,  j  Gente 
de  paz  !  or  simply,  j  Paz !  peace  ;  and  among  the  old-fashioned,  /Ave  Maria  / 


1 62 


Form  and  Inflection. 


REMARK.  —  To  have,  as  an  auxiliary,  then,  is  expressed  in  Spanish 
by  haber ;  but,  as  an  independent  verb,  meaning  to  possess,  by 
tener :  — 


tengo  un  libro,  not  he  un  libro, 
he  tenido  un  libro,  not  ? 
tengo  tenido  un  libro,  $ 
tenerlo,  but  haberlo  tenido, 


I  have  a  book. 

I  have  had  a  book. 

to  have  it,  to  have  had  it. 


Still  tener  may  be  occasionally  employed  as  an  auxiliary,  as  well 
as  other  verbs  :  — 

la  carta  que  tengo   (or  llevo)    |    the  letter  that  I  have  written, 
escrita, 

Conjugation  of  the  Active  Auxiliary  Verb. 

351.   Haber,  to  have ;  stems  :  hab,  hub,  habr. 


INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

hab-er,  to  have. 

hab-iendo,  having. 

hab-ido,  had. 

INDICATIVE    MODE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MODE. 

Present. 

Present. 

he,                    /  have. 

hay-a, 

/  may  have. 

has,                 thou  hast. 

hay-as, 

thou  mayst  have. 

ha,                    he  has. 

hay-a, 

he  may  have. 

hemos,            we  have. 

hay-amos,         we  may  have. 

hab-eis,            ye  have. 

hay-ais, 

ye  may  have. 

hull,                  they  have. 

hay-an, 

they  may  have. 

Imperfect. 

Imperfect   (first  form). 

hab-ia,             I  had. 

hub-iera, 

I  might  have. 

hab-ias,           thou 

hadst. 

hub-ieras 

,         thou  mightst  have. 

hab-ia,             he  had. 

hub-iera, 

he  might  have. 

hab-iamos,     we  had. 

hub-ieramos,  we  might  have. 

hab-iais,          ye  had. 

hub-ierais,       ye  might  have. 

hab-ian,          they  had. 

hub-ieran,        they  might  have. 

The  Verb. 


INDICATIVE    MODE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MODE. 


Past  Definite. 

hub-e,  /  had. 

hub-iste,  thou  hadst. 

hub-o,  he  had. 

hub-imos,  we  had. 

hub-isteis,  ye  had. 

hub-ieron,  they  had. 


Imperfect  (second  form) . 

hub-iese,  /  might  have. 

hub-ieses,         thou  mightst  have. 
hub-iese,  he  might  have. 

hub-iesemos,  we  might  have. 
hub-ieseis,  ye  might  have. 
hub-iesen,  they  might  have. 


Future. 

habr-e,          /  shall  have. 
habr-ds,         thou  wilt  have. 
habr-d,  he  will  have. 

habr-emos,  we  shall  have. 
habr-eis,  ye  will  have. 
habr-dn,  they  will  have. 


Future. 

hub-iere,          /  should  have. 
hub-ieres,         thou  shouldst  have. 
hub-iere,          he  should  have. 
hub-ieremos,  we  should  have. 
hub-iereis,        ye  should  have. 
hub-ieren,        they  should  have. 


Conditional  (apodasis) . 

habr-ia,          /  should  have. 
habr-ias,         thou  wouldst  have. 
habr-ia,          he  would  have. 
habr-iamos,  we  should  have. 
habr-iais,       ye  would  have. 
habr-ian,        they  would  have. 


Conditional   (protasis). 

hubiera  v      or  hubiese, 
hubieras        or  hubieses, 
hubiera          or  hubiese, 
hubieramos  or  hubiesemos, 
hubierais      or  hubieseis, 
hubieran       or  hubiesen, 


Remarks  on  Haber. 


352.  In  nearly  all  the  persons  of  the  indicative  present,  the 
original  Latin  stem  and  endings  have  shrunken,  while  the  vowels 
a  and  e  of  the  first  person  singular  have  been  attracted  and  reduced 
to  e  (ai  =  e),  after  the  analogy  of  s6  from  sapio  (sai-po),  and 
quepo  from  capio  (caipd)  .  Hence  :  — 


Latin  hab^o,     by     ,te'-bo,  becomes  modern  Spanish  he. 


habes, 

habet, 

habemus, 

habetis, 

habent, 


ha£s 

ha-£/, 

habemos  (archaic), 

habedes  (obsolete) t 


has. 

ha. 

heiuos. 

habeis. 

ban. 


1 64 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a.  The  subjunctive  present  is  from  the  Latin  habeam  —  hab-ya  \ni\  , 
hay  a,  so  that  the  y  here  properly  belongs  to  the  ending. 

b.  The  past  definite  hube  is  formed  from  habui,  by  the  above 
law  of  vowel-attraction,  yielding  haubi  (old  Span.  hobe).     From 
this    preterit-stem    hub,    are    derived    the   imperfects   and    future 
subjunctive,    by   regular   processes  :    Lat.    htfbweram   =   haubera, 
hobiera  (§  19).  hubiera;   h^b^issem  =  haubesse,  hobiese,  hubiese; 

=  hauberi,  hobiere,  hubiere. 


c.  The  future  and  conditional  indicative  are  properly  compound 
tenses  made  up  of  the  endings  of  the  present  and  imperfect  joined 
to  the  infinitive.  In  the  case  of  haber,  the  e  falls  away,  leaving  the 
stem  habr  to  receive  the  endings  e,  as,  a  ;  ia,  ias,  ia,  etc. 


353.  Apart  from  its  character  as  an  auxiliary,  haber 
is  not  at  present  employed  as  an  independent  verb,  save 
in  the  following  cases  (§  350,  remark) :  — 

a.    In  certain  special  significations  :  — 


el  caco  no  pudo  ser  habido, 
habido  consejo, 
se  las  habra  conmigo, 
cuya  a*nima  Dios  haya, 


the  thief  could  not  be  taken, 
a  council  having  been  held, 
he  will  have  to  do  with  me. 
may  God  have  his  soul. 


b.  In  the  simple  tenses,  when  haber  is  followed  by 
the  preposition  de  and  the  infinitive  of  some  other  verb  ; 
it  then  has  the  meaning  of  duty,  or  refers  to  future 
action  —  to  be  to,  to  have  to,  must :  — 


I  que  habia  de  hacer  yo  ?  [casa, 
hoy  nemos  de  comer  fuera  de 
mafiana  has  de  trabajar, 
han  de  tenerlo  en  casa  a"  la  una, 


what  was  I  to  do? 
to-day  we  are  to  dine  out. 
to-morrow  you  are  to  work, 
they  must  have  it  home  by  one. 


c.    In  the  simple  and  compound  tenses,  when  followed 
by  que  and  the  infinitive  of  some  other  verb.     Haber  is 


The   Verb. 


165 


then    used    impersonally,    and    denotes    obligation    or 
necessity,  and  is  translated  by  to  be  necessary:  — 


hubo  que  emplear  dos  dias  en 

ello, 

I  qu6  hay  que  hacer  ? 
ha  habido  que  salir  a  escape, 
hay  que  tener  paciencia, 
hay,  dntes,  que  condenar  esta 

politica  en  los  reyes  Catdlicos, 


it  was  necessary  to  lay  out  a 
couple  of  days  on  it. 

what  is  to  be  done?          [haste. 

it  was  necessary  to  get  out  in 

we  must  have  patience. 

this  policy  is  rather  to  be  con- 
demned in  the  Catholic  sove- 
reigns. 

there  is  no  doubting  it. 

it  is  not  right  to  blame  him  for  it. 


no  hay  que  dudarlo, 

no  hay  que  censurarlo  en  £1, 

REMARK.  —  In  the  personal  verb,  the  imperative  singular  he  for 
habe,  and  popularly  the  plural  hed  for  habed,  still  survive  with  the 
adverbs  aqui,  here;  ahl  and  alii,  there;  and  regularly  attach  to 
themselves  the  pronoun  objects  me,  te,  le,  la,  lo,  nos,  os,  los,  las. 
The  radical  meaning  of  he  in  those  positions  is  not  have,  but 
behold:  — 


he  aqul  (behold here),1 

he  ahl  (behold there), 
he'me  aqui ;  helo  ahi, 
helos;  helas. 

he'dnos  aqui,  Senor,  ante  vuestra 
presencia, 


this  is  {pointing  to  what  fol- 
lows) .  [cedes) . 

that  is  {pointing  to  what  pre- 

here  I  am  ;  there  it  is. 

behold  them,  or  there  they  are. 

behold  us  here,  Lord,  in  thy 
presence. 


354.   As  an  impersonal  verb,  haber  regularly  builds 
its  own  compound  tenses :  — 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

Absolute  Past  Participle. 

haber,  there  .  .  to  be. 

habiendo,  there  being. 

habido,  there  having  been. 

1  In  Biblical  language,  simply  lo  or  behold  :  — 
I  he  aqui,  os  lo  he  dicho  antes !    |    behold,  I  have  told  you  before ! 


166 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PRESENT. 

PRESENT. 

hay,  there  is,  there  are. 

haya,  there  may  be. 

IMPERFECT. 

IMPERFECT  (first  form). 

habia,  there  was,  there  were. 

hubiera,  there  might  be. 

PAST  DEFINITE. 

IMPERFECT  (second  form). 

hubo,  there  was,  there  were. 

hubiese,  there  might  be. 

FUTURE. 

FUTURE. 

habra,  there  will  be. 

hubiere,  there  should  be. 

CONDITIONAL  (apodasis). 

CONDITIONAL  (protasis).      \were. 

liabria,  there  would  be. 

hubiera  or  hubiese,  (if)  there 

Imperative  Mode  :  —  hay  a  or  que  hay  a,  let  there  be. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Infinitive  Past. 

Gerund  Past. 

haber  habido,  there  .  .  to  have 

habiendo  habido,  there  having 

been. 

been. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

ha  liabido,  there  has,  —  have,  been. 

haya  habido,  there  may  have  been. 

PLUPERFECT. 

PLUPERFECT  (first  form  )  .       [been  . 

habia  habido,  there  had  been. 

hubiera  habido,  there  might  have 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

PLUPERFECT  (second  form}.      \been. 

hubo  habido,  there  had  been. 

hubiese  habido,  there  might  have 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

FUTURE   PERFECT.        \been. 

habra  habido,  there  willhave  been. 

hubiere  habido,  there  should  have 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis). 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis'). 

habria  habido,  there  would  have 

hubiera  or  hubiese  habido,  (if) 

been. 

there  had  been. 

The  Verb.  167 


Remarks  on  Haber  Impersonal. 

355.  The  infinitives   are  dependent  on  other  verbs 
in  some  finite  form  :  — 

puede  haber  —  haber  habido,    |       there  may  be  —  have  been. 

356.  Hay  is  a  contraction  of  ha  with  the  now  obsolete 
y  (Lat.  ibi  —  i'i,  y)>  there ;  ha-y,  it  has  there,  there  is, 
there  are  (Fr.   il  y  a).     The  old  Spanish  original  ha, 
negative   non  ha   (still   preserved   in  Portuguese),  has 
been  handed  down  in  the  legal  phrase  for  denying  a 
petition :    no   ha   lugar,   there  is   no   occasion ;    or  for 
dismissing  a  case  —  equivalent  to  nolle  prosequi. 

357.  A   vulgar,    but    very    common,    form    of    the 
imperative  and  desiderative  hay  a  among  the  illiterate 
classes,    is    haiga,    as    if    from   faciat    (faica,  faiga, 
haiga} :  — 


que  haiga  salud, 

que  no  haiga  novedad, 


let  there  be  health, 
let  nothing  befall  you. 


Both  these  phrases  are  heard  among  the  lowly  in 
taking  leave  of  one  another.  Likewise  in  the  personal 
verb,  in  the  respectful  formula  employed  in  an  undertone 
when  a  deceased  person  is  referred  to.  Thus,  Ramon 
de  la  Cruz,  in  the  "  Sainete  "  entitled  Las  Castaneras 
Picadas,  says  humorously  :  — 

Felices,  senora  Paca 
Javiera,  con  muchos  gustos, 
Y  los  aumentos  de  gracia 
Que  yo  la  deseo  en  vida 
Del  difunto  (que  Dios  haiga) . 


1  68 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Active  Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Verb. 

358.  The  inflection  of  all  regular  verbs  in  the  Active 
Voice  proceeds  after  three  models  which  are  charac- 
terized by  the  ending  of  the  infinitive,  thus:  — 

Infinitives  in  -ar  characterize  the  First  Conj.  :       hablar,  to  speak. 
Infinitives  in  -er  characterize  the  Second  Conj.  :  coiner,  to  eat. 
Infinitives  in  -ir  characterize  the  Third  Conj.  :     vivir,    to  live. 

a.  All  verbs,  whether  regular,  irregular,  impersonal, 
or  defective,  belong  to  the  conjugation  indicated  by  their 
infinitive-ending,  however  much  their  inflection  may 
differ  in  other  respects  from  the  models  of  regular  verbs. 

359.  In     the    regular    verb    the    terminations    are 
applied    directly   to    the    unchanged    stem,    found    by 
suppressing  the  infinitive-endings  :  — 


habl-ar  ; 
com-er  ; 
viv-ir  ; 


habl-amos, 
com-emos, 
viv-imos, 


to  speak  ; 
to  eat  ; 
to  live  ; 


we  speak. 
we  eat. 
we  live. 


a.  The  indicative  future  and  conditional  are  originally 
compound  forms,  consisting  of  the  infinitive  joined  to 
the  endings  of  the  indicative  present  and  imperfect  of 
the  auxiliary  verb  haber :  — 


hablar-6  ; 
vivir-an  ; 


hablar-ia, 
vivir-lan, 


I  shall  —  I  should  speak, 
they  will  —  they  would  live. 


REMARK.  —  Hence  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Spanish  future  is 
"I  have  to  speak,"  expressed  likewise  by  he  de  hablar;  and  the 
literal  meaning  of  the  conditional  is  "  I  had  to  speak,"  or  habia  de 
hablar.  Anciently,  the  object-pronoun  could  stand  between  the 
infinitive  and  the  auxiliary;  as,  hablarozhe,  hablarleMa,  and 
hablar\Q*ia ;  modern :  os  hablar e,  les  hablar  la.  Thus  the  proverb 
in  its  original  form :  — 


dime  con  quien  andas,  decirteh£ 
quie'n  eres  (for  te 


tell  me  with  whom  you  associate, 
I  will  tell  you  what  you  are. 


The  Verb. 


169 


360.  In  the  irregular  verb  throughout,  the  gerund, 
past  participle,  present  and  imperfect  indicative,  present 
subjunctive,  and  imperative,  are  derived  from  the  stem 
of  the  infinitive  (present  stem);  the  imperfect  (both 
forms)  and  future  subjunctive  are  derived  from  the 
stem  of  the  past  definite  (preterit  stem) ;  the  future  and 
conditional  of  the  indicative  always  follow  the  infinitive 
by  adding  to  it  the  endings  of  haber  (§  352,  c) :  — 


I.  Present  Stem:  — 

Infinitive, 
Gerund  (usually), 
Past  participle, 
Present  indicative, 
Present  subjunctive, 
Imperative, 
Imperfect  indicative. 


II.  Preterit  Stem:  — 

Past  definite  indicative, 
Imperfects  subjunctive, 
Future  subjunctive, 
Gerund  (occasionally). 

III.  From  the  Infinitive:  — 

Future  indicative, 
Conditional  of  the  indicative. 


361.   Table  of  verb-endings  :  — 


INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST    PARTICIPLE. 

1. 

-ar, 

-ando, 

-ado. 

2. 

-er, 

-iendo, 

-ido. 

3. 

-ir, 

-iendo, 

-ido. 

INDICATIVE    MODE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MODE. 

Present. 

Present. 

1. 

2.                  3. 

1. 

8.                    3. 

-0, 

-O,                 -O. 

-e, 

-a,               -a. 

-as,              -es,           -es. 

-es, 

-as,             -as. 

-a, 

-e,             -e. 

-e, 

-a,               -a. 

-amos,         -emos,      -imos. 

-emos,       -amos,       -amos. 

-ais,             -eis,          -is. 

-eis, 

-ais,            -ais. 

-an,             -en,           -en. 

-en, 

-an,             -an. 

Form  and  Inflection. 


INDICATIVE    MODE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MODE. 

I 

mperfect. 

Imperfect  (first  form). 

1. 

3.                 3. 

1.                    8.                    3. 

-aba, 

-ia,            -ia. 

-ara,          -iera,          -iera. 

-abas, 

-ias,          -ias. 

-aras,        -ieras,        -ieras. 

-aba, 

-ia,            -ia. 

-ara,           -iera,          -iera. 

-Abamos, 

-iamos,    -iamos. 

-Aramos,  -ieramos,  -ieramos. 

-Abais, 

-iais,         -iais. 

-Arais,       -ierais,       -ierais. 

-aban, 

-ian,         -ian. 

-aran,        -ieran,        -ieran. 

Past  Definite. 

Imperfect  (second  for  ni). 

1. 

2.               3. 

1.                     2.                     3. 

-e, 

-i,              -i. 

-ase,           -iese,          -iese. 

-aste, 

-iste,         -iste. 

-ases,         -ieses,         -ieses. 

-6, 

-io,            -io. 

-ase,           -iese,           -iese. 

-amos, 

-imos,       -imos. 

-Asemos,  -iesemos,  -iesemos. 

-Ssteis, 

-tsteis,     -ISteis. 

-Aseis,        -ieseis,       -ieseis. 

-aron, 

-ieron,      -ieron. 

-asen,        -iesen,        -iesen. 

Future. 

Future. 

1. 

2.                  3. 

1.                  3.                  3. 

-e, 

-e,             -e. 

-are,          -iere,          -iere. 

-as, 

-as,           -as. 

-ares,         -ieres,         -ieres. 

-a, 

-A,            -A. 

-are,          -iere,          -iere. 

-ffeios, 

-^mos,      -£inos. 

-Aremos,  -ieremos,  -ieremos. 

-eis, 

-eis,          -eis. 

-Areis,        -iereis,       -iereis. 

-an, 

-An,           -An. 

-aren,        -ieren,        -ieren. 

IMPERATIVE    MODE. 

Condition  nl  . 

1.                       8.                   3. 

1.                    2.                      3. 

-ia, 

-ia,            -ia. 

_                  __                     _ 

-ias, 

-ias,          -ias. 

-a,             -e,               -e. 

-ia, 

-ia,            -ia. 

-e  (V.),      -a  (V.),       -a  (V.). 

-iamos, 

-iamos,    -iamos. 

-emos,       -amos,        -amos. 

-iais, 

-iais,         -iais. 

-ad,            -ed,             -id. 

-fan, 

-ian,         -ian. 

-en  (W.),  -an  (W.),  -an  (W.). 

The  Verb. 


FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

362.   Model  verb  —  hablar,  to  speak. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

Past  Participle. 

habl-ar,  to  speak.           habl-ando,  speaking. 

habl-ado,  spoken. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PRESENT. 

PRESENT. 

habl-.o,               /  speak. 

habl-e, 

I  may 

habl-as,             thou  speakest. 

habl-es, 

thou  mayst 

habl-a,               he  speaks. 

habl-e, 

he  may 

Vr  habla,            you  speak. 

V.  hable,   ~ 

"you  may 

1 

habl-amos,       we  speak. 

habl-emos, 

we  may 

•  ^ 
fe 

habl-ais,  *         ye  speak. 

habl-eis, 

ye  may 

habl-an,             they  speak. 

habl-en, 

they  may 

VV.  hablan,       you  speak. 

VV.  hablen 

you  may 

IMPERFECT. 

IMPERFECT  (first  form}. 

habl-aba,          /  was 

habl-ara, 

I  might 

habl-abas,        thou  wast 

habl-aras, 

thou  mightest 

habl-aba,          he  was 

fc 

habl-ara, 

he  might 

V.  hablaba,        you  were 

I 

V.  hablara, 

you  might 

^ 

i\ 

habl-abamos,  we  were 

•  ^ 
>' 

habl-aramos,  we  might 

•  ft 
3* 

habl-abais,       ye  were 

$ 

habl-drais, 

ye  might 

habl-aban,       they  were 

habl-aran, 

they  might 

VV.  hablaban,  you  were 

VV.  hablaran,  you  might 

PAST  DEFINITE. 

IMPERFECT  (second  form)  . 

habl-e,               /  spoke. 

habl-ase, 

I  might 

habl-aste,         thou  spokest. 

habl-ases, 

thou  mightest 

habl-6,               he  spoke. 

habl-ase, 

he  might 

V.  hablo,            you  spoke. 

V.  hablase, 

you  might 

1 

habl-amos,       we  spoke. 

habl-asemos,  we  might 

•  ft 

to 

habl-dsteis,      ye  spoke. 

habl-dseis, 

ye  might 

habl-aron,        they  spoke. 

habl-asen, 

they  might 

VV.  hablaron,  you  spoke. 

VV.  hablasen,  you  might 

Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

FUTURE. 

FUTURE. 

hablar-e,            /  shall 

habl-are,            I  should 

hablar-as,          thou  wilt 

habl-ares,           thou  shouldst 

hablar-a,            he  will 

habl-are,             he  should 

V.  hablara,        you  will 

1 

V.  hablare,          you  should 

% 

hablar-emos,    we  shall          \  §, 

habl-aremos,     we  should 

•  ft 
jb« 

hablar-eis,         ye  will 

habl-areis,          ye  should 

hablar-an,         they  will 

habl-aren,          they  should 

VV.  hablaran,    you  will 

VV.  hablaren,     you  should 

CONDITIONAL  {apodasis). 

CONDITIONAL  (protasis). 

hablar-ia,          /  should 

hablara          or  hablase, 

hablar-ias,        thou  wouldst 

hablaras        or  hablases, 

^ 

hablar-ia,          he  would 

hablara          or  hablase, 

^"*} 

V.  hablaria,        you  would 

1 

V.  hablara      or  hablase, 

s 

^ 

hablar-iamos,  we  should 

-  ft 
^" 

hablaramos  or  hablasemos, 

'1 

hablar-iais,       ye  would 

hablarais       or  hablaseis, 

J^ 
rt 

hablar-ian,        they  would 

hablaran       or  hablasen, 

p" 

VV.  hablarian,  you  would 

VV.  hablaran  or  hablasen, 

Imperative  Mode. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 



habl-emos,        let  us  speak. 

habl-a,           speak  (thou). 

habl-ad,              speak  {ye). 

habl-e,           let  him  speak. 

habl-en,              let  them  speak. 

hable  V.,        speak. 

hablen  VV.,        speak. 



no  habl-emos,   let  us  not  speak. 

no  habl-es,    speak  (thou)  not. 

no  habl-eis,        speak  {ye)  not. 

no  habl-e,      let  him  not  speak. 

no  habl-en,         let  them  not  speak. 

no  hable  V.,  do  not  speak. 

no  hablen  VV.,  do  not  speak. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Infinitive  Past. 

Gerund  Past. 

haber  hablado,  to  have  spoken. 

* 

habiendo  hablado,  having  spoken. 

The  Verb. 


'73 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

he  hablado,                   /       ] 

haya  hablado,                7 

^ 

has  hablado,                 thou 

ft 

hayas  hablado,              thou 

v| 

har  hablado,                   he 

1 

haya  hablado,               he 

r 

V.  ha  hablado,               you 

1 

V.  haya  hablado,             you 

hemos  hablado,           we 

haydmos  hablado,        we 

i 

habeis  hablado,            ye 

« 

haydis  hablado,             ye 

\ 

han  hablado,                they 

p" 

hayan  hablado,             they 

VV.  han  hablado,  •        you 

VV.  hayan  hablado,       you 

o" 

PLUPERFECT. 

PLUPERFECT  (first  form). 

habia  hablado,              / 

hubiera  hablado,          7       ]  § 

habias  hablado,           thou 

fc. 

hubieras  hablado,        thou 

°& 

habia  hablado,              he 

$X 

hubiera  hablado,          he 

s. 

V.  habia  hablado,          you 

1 

V.  hubiera  hablado,        you 

1 

habiamos  hablado,      we 

1 

hubieramos  hablado,  we 

i 

habiais  hablado,          ye 

n> 

hubierais  hablado,       ye 

i 

habian  hablado,           they 

p" 

hubieran  hablado,       they 

3s 

VV.  habian  hablado,     you 

VV.  hubieran  hablado,  you 

p" 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

PLUPERFECT  (second  form  )  . 

hube  hablado,  (when)  7 

hubiese  hablado,          7 

3 

hubiste  hablado,          thou 

fe 

hubieses  hablado,         thou 

H 

hubo  hablado,               he 

*L 

hubiese  hablado,          he 

V.  hubo  hablado,           you 

H 

V.  hubiese  hablado,        you 

n, 

hubimos  hablado,        we 

JS 

hubiesemos  hablado,  we 

| 

hubisteis  hablado,       ye 

n 

hubieseis  hablado,       ye 

hubieron  hablado,       they 

p" 

hubiesen  hablado,        they 

o> 

VV.  hubieron  hablado,  you 

VV.  hubiesen  hablado,  you 

p" 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

habre  hablado,              7 

& 

hubiere  hablado,          7 

1 

habrds  hablado,            thou 

1: 

hubieres  hablado,         thou 

!• 

habrd  hablado,              he 

ft* 

hubiere  hablado,           he 

s 

V.  habra  hablado,          you 

S 

V.  hubiere  hablado,        you 

1 

habremos  hablado,      we 

^ 

hnbieremos  hablado,  we 

'i 

habreis  hablado,          ye 

1 

hubiereis  hablado,       ye 

habrdn  hablado,           they 

n> 

hubieren  hablado,        they 

« 

VV.  habran  hablado,     you 

p" 

VV.  hubieren  hablado,  you 

a. 

174 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis). 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis}. 

habria  hablado,          / 

&, 

<^ 

hubiera         or  hubiese         }  ^ 

habrias  hablado,        thou 

£, 

hubieras       or  hubieses 

v^/ 

habria  hablado,          he 

H, 

j^ 

hubiera         or  hubiese 

S 

V.  habria  hablado,       you 

1 

V.  hubiera     or  hubiese 

ft    p 

habriamos  hablado,  we 

1 

hubieramos  or  hubiesemos 

•^  §T 
§•  P- 

habriais  hablado,       ye 

1 

hubierais      or  hubieseis 

^® 

habrian  hablado,       they 

a 

hubieran       or  hubiesen 

n 

VV.  habrian  hablado,  you 

o 

VV.hubieran  or  hubiesen 

p 

SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

363.    Model  verb  —  comer,  to  eat. 


SIMPLE     TENSES. 


Infinitive. 


Gerund. 


Past  Participle. 


com-er,  to  eat. 


com-iendo,  eating. 


com-ido,  eaten. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


PRESENT. 

com-o,  /  eat. 

com-es,  thou  eatest. 

he  eats. 

you  eat. 
com-einos,     we  eat. 

ye  eat. 

they  eat. 


PRESENT. 


-e>^. 
V.  come, 


com-a, 
com-as, 
com-a, 
V.  coma, 


I  may 
thou  mayst 
he  may 
you  may 


com-eis, 
com-en, 
VV.  comen,  you  eat. 


com-amos,  we  may 
com-ais,        ye  may 
com-an,        they  may 
VV.  coman,  you  may 


The  Verb. 


175 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


IMPERFECT. 

com-ia,  /  was 

com-ias,  thou  wast 

com-ia,  he  was 

V.  comia,  you  were 

com-iamos,  we  were 

com-iais,  ye  were 

com-ian,  they  were 

VV.  comian,  you  were 

PAST  DEFINITE. 
com-i,  /  ate. 

com-iste,          thou  atest. 
com-io,  he  ate. 

V.  comio,          you  ate. 
com-imos,        we  ate. 
com-isteis,       ye  ate. 
com-ieron,       they  ate. 
VV.  comieron,  you  ate. 

FUTURE. 

comerje,  I^hall 

comeif-as,  thou  wilt 

comeij-a,  he  will 

V.  comerfa,  you  will 

comef-emos,  we  shall 

comer-eis,  ye  will 

comer-an,  they  will 

W.  comeran,  you  will 

CONDITIONAL  (apodasis). 
comer.-ia,          /  should 
comerrias,        thou  wouldst 
comerria,          he  would 
V.  comena,       you  would 
comer-iamos,  we  should 
comer-iais,       ye  would 
comer-ian,        they  would 
VV.  comerian,  you  would 


IMPERFECT  {first form). 

com-iera,  /  might 

com-ieras,  thou  mightest 

com-iera,  he  might 

V.  comiera,  you  might 

com-ieramos,  we  might 

com-ierais,  ye  might 

com-ieran,  they  might 

W.  comieran,  you  might 

IMPERFECT  (second  form) . 

com-iese,  I  might 

com-ieses,  thou  mightest 

com-iese,  he  might 

V.  comiese,  you  might 

com-iesemos,  we  might 

com-ieseis,  ye  might 

com-iesen,  they  might 

W.  comiesen,  you  might 

FUTURE. 

com-iere,  /  should 

com-ieres,  thou  shouldst 

com-iere,  he  should 

V.  comiere,  you  should 

com-ieremos,  we  should 

com-iereis,  ye  should 

com-ieren,  they  should 

W.  comieren,  you  should 

CONDITIONAL  (protasis} . 
comiera  or  comiese, 

comieras         or  comieses, 
comiera          or  comiese, 
V.  comiera       or  comiese, 
comieramos  or  comiesemos, 
comierais       or  comieseis, 
comieran        or  comiesen, 
VV.  comieran  or  comiesen, 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Imperative  Mode. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 



com-amos,         let  us  eat. 

com-e,            eat  (thou). 

com-ed,               eat  (ye). 

com-  a,            let  him  eat. 

com-an,               let  them  eat. 

coma  V.,        eat. 

coman  VV.,        eat. 



no  com-amos,   let  us  not  eat. 

no  com-as,    eat  (thou)  not. 

no  com-ais,        eat  (ye)  not. 

no  com-a,      let  him  not  eat. 

no  com-an,         let  them  not  eat. 

no  coma  V.,  do  not  eat. 

no  coman  VV.,  do  not  eat. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Infinitive  Past. 

Gerund  Past. 

haber  comido,  to  have  eaten. 

habiendo  comido,  having  eaten. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

he  comido,                 / 

haya  comido,                / 

« 

has  comido,               thott 

iSf" 

hayas  comido,              thou 

\ 

ha  comido,                he 

1 

haya  comido,                he 

^ 

V.  ha  comido,            you 

f\> 
^ 

V.  haya  comido,           you 

1 

hemos  comido,        we 

^  ^ 

hayamos  comido,       we 

•» 

habeis  comido,         ye. 

o> 

hayais  comido,            ye 

^ 

han  comido,              they 

o" 

hayan  comido,             they 

o> 

VV.  han  comido,       you 

VV.  hayan  comido,      you 

o 

PLUPERFECT. 

PLUPERFECT  (first  form}. 

habia  comido,           / 

hubiera  comido,          / 

§ 

habias  comido,         thou 

•frl 

hubieras  comido,        thou 

t 

habia  comido,           he 

& 

*, 

hubiera  comido,          he 

^ 

V.  habia  comido,       you 

r*> 
•    £ 

V.  hubiera  comido,       you 

r^ 

habiamos  comido,  we 

*    r£ 
* 

hubieramos  comido,  we 

4 

habiais  comido,       ye 

O> 

hubierais  comido,      ye 

a 

habian  comido,        they 

p" 

hubieran  comido,       they 

n> 

VV.  habian  comido,  you 

VV.  hubieran  comido,  you 

p 

The  Verb. 


177 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

PLUPERFECT  (second  form). 

hube  comido,  (when)  /       ] 

hubiese  comido,            / 

S 

hubiste  comido,            thou 

* 

hubieses  comido,           thou 

t 

hubo  comido,                 he 

ft 

hubiese  comido,             he 

V.  hubo  comido,            you 

ft 

V.  hubiese  comido,         you 

1 

hubimos  comido,          we 

I 

hubiesemos  comido,     we 

* 

hubisteis  comido,        ye 

2- 

hubieseis  comido,         ye 

& 

hubieron  comido,         they 

o 

hubiesen  comido,           they 

* 

VV.  hubieron  comido,  you 

VV.  hubiesen  comido,    you 

o 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

habre  comido,                /       ]  ., 

hubiere  comido,             / 

& 

habras  comido,              thou 

§r 

hubieres  comido,           thou 

1 

habra  comido,               he 

^ 

hubiere  comido,             he 

!* 

V.  habra  comido,           you 

1 

V.  hubiere  comido,          you 

§ 

habremos  comido,       we 

*  ^ 

hubieremos  comido,     we 

<* 

habreis  comido,            ye 

1 

hubiereis  comido,         ye 

s 

habran  comido,             they 

g 

hubieren  comido,          they 

M 

n 

VV.  habran  comido,      you 

o 

VV.  hubieren  comido,    you 

p" 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis}. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis). 

habria  comido,              / 

1 

hubiera         or  hubiese 

^ 

habrias  comido,            thou 

£. 

hubieras        or  hubieses 

5 

habria  comido,              he 

&i 

hubiera          or  hubiesfc 

S 

V.  habria  comido,           you 

1 

V.  hubiera      or  hubiese 

.li 

habriamos  comido,      we 

% 

hubieramos  or  hubiesemos 

ft    P* 

habriais  comido,          ye 

S" 

hubierais      or  hubieseis 

8    ° 

habrian  comido,           they 

<s 

(D 

hubieran       or  hubiesen 

n> 

VV.  habrian  comido,     you 

p" 

VV.  hubieran  or  hubiesen 

o" 

REMARK.  —  The  first  person  singular  present  indicative  is 
written  cdmo,  / eat,  to  distinguish  it  from  como,  as.  The  graphic 
accent  then  here  is  merely  distinctive. 


Form  and  Inflection.    . 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

364.    Model  verb  —  vivir,  to  live. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Infinitive.                               Gerund.                         Past  Participle. 

viv-ir,  to  live.                viv-iendo,  living.                viv-ido,  lived. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PRESENT. 

PRESENT. 

viv-o,               /  live. 

viv-a,                /  may  live. 

viv-es,             thou  livest. 

viv-as,              thou  mayst  live. 

viv-e,               he  lives. 

viv-a,                he  may  live. 

V.  vive,           you  live. 

V.  viva,            you  may  live. 

viv-imos,        we  live. 

viv-amos,        we  may  live. 

viv-is,              ye  live. 

.  viv-ais,            ye  may  live. 

viv-en,             they  live. 

viv-an,             they  may  live. 

W.  viven,      you  live. 

VV.  vivan,       you  may  live. 

IMPERFECT. 

IMPERFECT  (first  form). 

viv-ia,              /  was  living. 

viv-iera,           I  might  live. 

viv-ias,            thou  wast  living. 

viv-ieras,        thou  mightest  live. 

viv-ia,              he  was  living. 

viv-iera,          he  might  live. 

V.  vivia,          you  were  living. 

V.  viviera,       you  might  live. 

viv-iamos,      we  were  living. 

viv-ieramos,  we  might  live. 

viv-iais,  •       ye  were  living. 

viv-ierais,      ye  might  live. 

viv-ian,           they  were  living. 

viv-ieran,        they  might  live. 

VV.  vivian,     you  were  living. 

VV.  vivieran,  you  might  live. 

PAST  DEFINITE. 

IMPERFECT  (second  form). 

viv-i,                I  lived. 

viv-iese,           /  might  live. 

viv-is  te,          thou  livedst. 

viv-ieses,         thou  mightest  live. 

viv-io,              he  lived. 

viv-iese,          he  might  live. 

V.  vivio,          you  lived. 

V.  viviese,       you  might  Jive. 

viv-imos,        we  lived. 

viv-iesemos,  we  might  live. 

viv-isteis,       ye  lived. 

viv-ieseis,       ye  might  live. 

viv-ieron,       they  lived. 

viv-iesen,        they  might  live. 

VV.  vivieron,  you  lived. 

VV.  viviesen,  you  might  live. 

The  Verb. 


179 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

FUTURE. 

FUTURE. 

vivir-e,            /  shall  live. 

viv-iere,              /  should  live. 

vivir-ds,          thou  wilt  live. 

viv-ieres,            thou  shouldst  live. 

vivir-d,            he  will  live. 

viv-iere,             he  should  live. 

V.  vivira,        you  will  live. 

V.  viviere,           you  should  live. 

vivir-emos,    we  shall  live. 

viv-ieremos,      we  should  live. 

vivir-eis,        ye  will  live. 

viv-iereis,          ye  should  live 

vivir-dn,         they  will  live. 

viv-ieren,            they  should  live. 

VV.  viviran,  you  will  live. 

VV.  vivieren,      you  should  live. 

CONDITIONAL  (apodasis}. 

CONDITIONAL  {protasis}. 

vivir-ia,          /  should  live. 

viviera           or  viviese, 

vivir-ias,        thou  wouldst  live. 

vivieras         or  vivieses, 

Ci 

vivir-ia,          he  would  live. 

viviera           or  viviese, 

O 

V.  viviria,       you  would  live. 

V.  viviera       or  viviese, 

S 

vivir-iamos,  we  should  live. 

vivieramos  or  viviesemos, 

'  ^ 

vivir-iais,      ye  would  live. 

vivierais       or  vivieseis, 

<* 

vivir-ian,        they  woztld  live. 

vivieran        or  viviesen, 

? 

VV.  vivirian,  you  would  live. 

VV.  vivieran  or  viviesen, 

Imperative  Mode. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 



viv-amoS;,           let  us  live. 

viv-e,              live  (thou}. 

viv-id,                 live  (ye). 

viv-a,              let  him  live. 

viv-an,                let  them  live. 

viva  V.,           live. 

vivan  VV.,           live. 



no  viv-amos,     let  us  not  live. 

no  viv-as,       live  (thou}  not. 

no  viv-ais,          live  (ye)  not. 

no  viv-a,         let  him  not  live. 

no  viv-an,           let  them  not  live. 

no  viva  V.       do  not  live. 

no  vivan  VV.,     do  not  live. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Infinitive  Past. 

Gerund  Past. 

haber  vivido,  to  have  lived. 

habiendo  vivido,  having  lived. 

i8o 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

he  vivido,                       / 

haya  vivido,                   / 

^ 

has  vivido,                    thou 

fe* 

hay  as  vivido,                 thou 

1 

ha  vivido,                      he 

1 

haya  vivido,                   he 

£j- 
^ 

V.  ha  vivido,                   you 

^, 
•  "3* 

V.  haya  vivido,               you 

:* 

hemos  vivido,               we 

i 

hayamos  vivido,           we 

^ 

58* 

habeis  vivido,               ye 

a 

hayais  vivido,               ye 

I 

han  vivido,                    they 

o 

hayan  vivido,                 they 

n> 

VV.  han  vivido,           "  you 

VV.  hayan  vivido,          you 

0* 

PLUPERFECT. 

PLUPERFECT  (first  form}  . 

habia  vivido,                 / 

hubiera  vivido,             / 

g 

habias  vivido,               thou 

fe* 

hubieras  vivido,            thou 

1 

habia  vivido,                 he 

£ 
^M 

hubiera  vivido,              he 

V.  habia  vivido,              you 

^4 

.  <3' 

V.  hubiera  vivido,           you 

ft 

^> 

habiamos  vivido,         we 

H 

hubieramos  vivido,     we 

*v« 

habiais  vivido,             ye 

n> 
fj 

hubierais  vivido,          ye 

8' 

j^ 

habian  vivido,               they 

hubieran  vivido,           they 

0 

VV.  habian  vivido,         you 

VV.  hubieran  vivido,     you 

o" 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

PLUPERFECT  (second  form}. 

hube  vivido,     (when)  / 

hubiese  vivido,              /      ]  | 

hubiste  vivido,             thou 

^ 

hubieses  vivido,            thou 

1 

hubo  vivido,                   he 

ft 
ft. 

hubiese  vivido,              he 

^ 

V.  hubo  vivido,              you 

?> 
.  <2' 

V.  hubiese  vivido,          you 

.1 

hubimos  vivido,           we 

«* 
JX, 

hubiesemos  vivido,      we 

fc 

hubisteis  vivido,          ye 

a> 

hubieseis  vivido,          ye 

I 

hubieron  vivido,           they 

o 

hubiesen  vivido,           they 

•T" 

n 

VV.  hubieron  vivido,     you 

VV.  hubiesen  vivido,     you 

rT 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

habre  vivido,           .      / 

^, 

hubiere  vivido,              / 

S, 

^ 

habras  vivido,               thou 

ft 
^. 

hubieres  vivido,            thou 

C 

habra  vivido,                  he 

^ 

hubiere  vivido,              he 

^M 

&N 

V.  habra  vivido,             you 

1 

V.  hubiere  vivido,           you 

ft 

i 

habremos  vivido,         we 

S> 
Q' 

hnbieremos  vivido,      we 

-  ^ 
'x, 

habreis  vivido,              ye 

& 

hubiereis  vivido,          ye 

? 

habrdn  vivido,               they 

<t> 

hubieren  vivido,           they 

•^« 

n 

VV.  habran  vivido,        you 

VV.  hubieren  vivido,     you 

p^ 

The  Verb. 


181 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis). 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis'). 

habria  vivido,              / 

& 

hubiera         or  hubiese 

Ci 

habrias  vivido,            thou 

1 

hubieras       or  hubieses 

^ 

habria  vivido,              he 

hubiera         or  hubiese 

S 

V.  habria  vivido,          you 

1 

V.  hubiera      0?'  hubiese 

1.  2." 

habriamos  vivido,     we 

-  f\> 

hubieramos  or  hubiesemos 

'  s-  o 

habriais  vivido,          ye 

1" 

hubierais      or  hubieseis 

1 

habrian  vivido,           they 

CD 

hubieran       or  hubiesen 

o> 

VV.  habrian  vivido,     you 

FT 

VV.  hubieran  or  hubiesen 

p 

Remarks  on  the  Three  Conjugations. 

365.  The  subject-pronouns  are  to  be  expressed  with 
the  verb,  only  when  they  are  intensive,  emphatic,  or 
adversative,  and  when  (by  the  identical  endings  of  the 
first  and  third  persons  of  certain  tenses)  obscurity  would 
result  from  the  omission  (see  §§  187-190) :  — 

REMARK.  —  Identical  endings  of  the  first  and  third  persons  are 
found  in  the  present  subjunctive,  imperfect  indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive, future  subjunctive,  and  the  conditionals  :  — 


hable ;       coma ;       viva ; 
hablaba;  comia;      vivia; 
hablara;  comiera;  viviera; 
hablase ;  comiese  ;  viviese ; 
hablare ;  comiere ;  viviere ; 
hablaria;  comeria;  viviria; 


(-may        speak;  eat;  live, 
was         speaking;  eating;  living, 

might     speak;  eat;  live, 

might     speak ;  eat ;  live, 

should   speak ;  eat ;  live. 

should ) 

.,  [speak;  eat;  live. 
I  would  )  r 


366.  The  graphic  accent  (in  the  present  century 
always  acute,  ' )  distinguishes  otherwise  homonymous  or 
identical  forms  in  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  :  — 


h<zblo,         h<zble,          hablare, 
hablara,     habkras,     habl^reis, 


hablJ,         habl/,          hablar/. 
hablanf,     hablar^s,     hablar/is. 


1 82  Form  and  Inflection. 

Except  the  first  persons  plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  the 
past  definite  in  the  first  and  third  conjugations,  wherein  no  written 
accent  is  authorized :  — 


habLzmos ;     viv/mos, 
habLzmos ;     viw'mos, 


we  speak ;     we  live, 
we  spoke  ;     we  lived. 


REMARK.  —  Much  confusion  often  arises  in  reading  Spanish 
books  printed  before  A.D.  1550  when  the  graphic  accent  (usually 
grave  x  )  began  to  be  employed  by  the  best  printers.  Martin  Nucio 
(or  Nuyts)  of  Antwerp,  from  1556  gave  a  new  impulse  to  this  branch 
of  orthography ;  and  in  1580  we  find  the  use  of  accents  generalized, 
especially  to  mark  the  future  tense.1 

367.  Of  the  imperative  mode,  only  the  second  person 
singular  and  plural  are  original  persons.  All  the  others 
are  simply  persons  of  the  subjunctive  present  with  an 
optative,  desiderative,  or  a  hortative  meaning.  For 
example :  — 

habla,  speak  (original  form),  to  one  to  whom  tu  is  used. 

hable  V.,        speak  (polite),  subjunctive,  "  may  your  grace  speak." 
hablad,  speak  (original  form) ,  to  two  or  more  to  whom  voso- 

tros  is  used. 
hablen  VV.,  speak  (polite),  subjunctive,  "  may  your  graces  speak." 


hable    (subjunctive),    let    him 
speak. 


hablen   (subjunctive),  let  them 
speak. 


hablemos  (subjunctive) ,  let  us  speak. 

a.  Observe  that  habla  and  hablad  (and  so  come, 
corned ;  vive,  vivid,  and  all  original  imperatives)  cannot 
be  made  negative.  To  render  the  imperative  negative 
in  Spanish,  the  corresponding  subjunctive  forms  must 
always  be  used  :  — 


habla,     speak  (thou). 
hablad,  speak  (ye). 


no  hables,    do  not  speak. 
no  hableis,  do  not  speak. 


1  See  Obras  de  luan  Boscan,  Antwerp,  Nucio,  1556,  Editor's  Prologue 
(reprinted  in  my  edition,  Madrid,  1875,  p.  511),  and  Herrera's  edition  of 
Garcilasso,  Seville,  1580. 


The  Verb. 


183 


b.  The  other  forms  being  already  in  the  present 
subjunctive,  merely  assume  the  adverb  no  to  render 
them  negative :  — 

hable,  let  him  speak. 
hable  V.,  speak  (your  grace) . 
hablen,  let  them  speak. 
hablen  W.,  speak  (your  graces) 
hablemos,  let  us  speak. 


'  no  se  muera  vuestra  merced, 
sino  tome  mi  consejo,  y  viva 
muchos  arios," 


no  hable,  let  him  not  speak. 
no  hable  V.,  do  not  speak. 
no  hablen,  let  them  not  speak. 
no  hablen  VV.,  do  not  speak. 
no  hablemos,  let  us  not  speak. 

do  not  die,  your  grace,  but  take 
my  advice,  and  live  many 
years. 


(literally,  "  let  not  your  grace  die ;  but  let  him  take  my  advice,  and 
let  him  live  many  years.") 

368.  The  terminations  -aste,  -iste,  and  -asteis,  -isteis, 

of  the  second  person  singular  and  plural  of  the  past 
definite  tense  are  now  popularly  assimilated  into  astes, 
istes:  — 

tu  hablastes,  for  hablaste, 
tu  vivistes,     for  viviste, 
hablastes,  for  habldsteis, 


comistes,  for  comisteis, 


thou  didst  speak, 
thou  didst  live, 
ye  did  speak, 
ye  did  eat. 


369.  The  d   of   the  participial    ending  ado  is  very 
generally  omitted  in  pronunciation  at  the  present  day, 
not  only  in  Madrid,  but  throughout  Spain,  in  familiar 
or  social  life,  not  in  grave  discourse  :  — 

hablao,  for  hablado.  \    regalao,  given  (for  regalado) . 

It  is  not  convenient  to  call  this  a  vice,  since  it  is  observed  by  nine- 
tenths  of  the  Spanish  people  when  speaking  familiarly.  Not  so 
with  ido,  however,  except  among  the  admirers  of  the  bull-baiting 
fraternity. 

370.  The  compound  tenses  of  all  Spanish  verbs,  active 
and  neuter,  transitive  and  intransitive,  are  at  the  present 
day  formed  by  means  of  the  verb  haber  only  :  — 


184  Form  and  Inflection. 


ha  ido ;  hemos  venido, 
se  ban  ido ;  he  llegado, 


he  has  gone ;  we  have  come, 
they  have  gone  off;  I  have  ar- 
rived. 


a.   Anciently  they  said ;  es  ido,  is  gone ;  son  venidos,  are  come ; 
but  not  at  present. 

Regular  Euphonic  Changes. 

371.  All  verbs  in  -car,  -gar,  and  -zar  (that  is,  those 
having  the  stem-ending  c,  g,  or  z)  change  those  letters 
into  qu,  gu,  and  c,  respectively,  as  often  as,  by  inflection, 
they  meet  the  weak  vowel  e  (see  §§  13  ;  15  ;  and  28,  a). 
These  mutations  occur  in  the  following  places  only  : 
In  the  first  person  singular  of  the  past  definite,  in  the 
present  subjunctive  throughout,  and  consequently  in  all 
those  persons  of  the  imperative  that  are  not  original 

(§367):- 

a.  tocar,  to  touch. 

PAST  DEF.     toque  (but  tocaste,  toco,  tocamos,  etc.'} . 

SUBJ.  PRES.  toque,  toques,  toque,  toquemos,  toqueis,  toquen. 

IMPERAT.      (toca),  toque,  toquemos,  (tocad),  toquen. 

b.  llegar,  to  arrive. 

PAST  DEF.    llegue  (but  llegaste,  llego,  llegamos,  etc.). 

SUBJ.  PRES.  llegue,  llegues,  llegue,  lleguemos,  llegueis,  lleguen. 

IMPERAT.       (llega),  llegue,  lleguemos,  (llegad),  lleguen. 

c.   alcanzar,  to  reach. 

PAST  DEF.     alcance  (but  alcanzaste,  alcanzo,  alcanzamos,  etc.). 

SUBJ.  PRES.  alcance,  alcances,  alcance,  alcancemos,  alcanceis, 
alcancen. 

IMPERAT.  (alcanza),  alcance,  alcancemos,  (alcanzad),  al- 
cancen. 

372.  Verbs   in  -guar   assume   in   like   positions  the 
diczresis  before  e  (§§  17 ;  21  ;  32,  a) :  — 


The  Verb.  185 

a.   averiguar,  to  investigate,  to  ascertain. 

PAST  DEF.     averigiie  (but  averiguaste,  averiguo,  averiguamos,  etc.}. 
SUBJ.  PRES.  averigiie,   averigiies,   averigue,   averigiieinos,   averi- 

giieis,  averigiien. 
IMPERAT.       (averigua),   averigue,   averigiieinos,    (averiguad), 

averigiien. 

373.  Verbs  in  -cer  and  -cir,  preceded  by  a  consonant, 
change  the  stem-ending  c  into  z  as  often  as,  by  inflection, 
it  meets  one  of  the  strong  vowels  a  or  o  (according  to 
§  14;  see  also  §  28;  28,  a).    This  mutation  occurs  in  the 
following  places  only :  In  the  first  person  singular  of 
the  indicative  present,  in  all  the  persons  of  the  present 
subjunctive,  and  consequently  in  those  persons  of  the 
imperative  that  are  not  original  (§  367) :  — 

a.   veneer,  to  overcome. 

INDIC.  PRES.  venzo  (tovences,  vence,  vencemos,  etc.}. 
SUBJ.  PRES.    venza,  venzas,  venza,  venzamos,  venzais,  venzan. 
IMPERAT.        (vence),  venza,  venzamos,  (venced),  venzan. 

b.   esparcir,  to  scatter. 

INDIC.  PRES.  esparzo  (but  esparces,  esparce,  esparcimos,  etc.}. 

SUBJ.  PRES.  esparza,  esparzas,  esparza,  esparzamos,  esparzais, 
esparzan. 

IMPERAT.  (esparce),  esparza,  esparzamos,  (esparcid),  es- 
parzan. 

374.  Verbs  in  -cer  and  -cir,  preceded  by  a  vowel, 
strengthen  the  stem-ending  by  inserting  before  it  a  z 
as  often  as  the  stem  meets  an  a  or  an  o :  — 

a.   carecer,  not  to  have,  to  be  without. 

INDIC.  PRES.  carezco  (but  careces,  carece,  carecernos,  etc.} . 

SUBJ.  PRES.  carezca,  carezcas,  carezca,  carezcamos,  carezcais, 
carezcan. 

IMPERAT.  (carece),  carezca,  carezcamos,  (careced),  carez- 
can. 


1 86  Form  and  Inflection. 

b.    nacer,  to  be  born. 

INDIC.  PRES.  nazco  (but  naces,  nace,  nacemos,  etc?). 

SUBJ.  PRES.    nazca,  nazcas,   nazca,  nazcamos,  nazcais,  nazcanc 

IMPERAT.        (nace),  nazca,  nazcamos,   (naced),  nazcan. 

c.    conocer,  to  know  (persons). 

INDIC.  PRES.  conozco  (but  conoces,  conoce,  conocemos,  etc?). 

SDBJ.  PRES.  conozca,  conozcas,  conozca,  conozcamos,  conozcais, 
conozcan. 

IMPERAT.  (conoce),  conozca,  conozcamos,  (conoced),  co- 
nozcan. 

d.   lucir,  to  shine,  to  display. 

INDIC.  PRES.  luzco  (but  luces,  luce,  lucimos,  etc?). 

SUBJ.  PRES.    luzca,  luzcas,  luzca,  luzcamos,  luzcais,  luzcan. 

IMPERAT.        (luce),  luzca,  luzcamos,  (lucid),  luzcan. 

Except  mecer,  to  shake,  to  rock ;  empecer,  to  injure ;  cocer,  to 
boil  (cuezo,  cueza,  etc.)  ;  and  escocer,  to  smart  (escuezo,  escueza, 
etc.),  which,  with  their  compounds,  follow  §  373  for  the  stem-ending. 
Hacer,  to  do,  to  make,  and  its  compounds,  change  the  radical  c  into 
£•  before  a  strong  vowel  (hago,  haces ;  haga,  hagas,  etc.). 

REMARK.  —  The  2  of  this  class  is  properly  an  organic  s,  derived, 
in  the  case  of  verbs  in  -ecer  (-escer) ,  from  Latin  inceptives  in  -escere, 
and  retained  throughout  in  old  Spanish.  Verbs  in  -acer  and  -ocer 
come  from  Latin  stems  in  asc,  osc.  With  verbs  in  -ucir  alone,  the  2 
is  euphonic :  — 


LATER  LATIN. 

OLD  SPANISH. 

MODERN  SPANISH. 

caresco  ; 

caresco; 

carezco. 

carescis,  etc.  ; 

caresces,  etc.  ; 

careces,  etc. 

nasco  ; 

nasco; 

nazco. 

nascis,  etc.  ; 

nasces,  etc.  ; 

naces,  etc. 

cognosce; 
cognoscis,  etc  ; 
luceo; 
luces,  etc. 

conosco; 
conosces,  etc.  ; 
lusco  ; 
luces,  etc.  ; 

conozco. 
conoces,  etc. 
luzco. 
luces,  etc. 

375.   Verbs  in  -ger  and  -gir  change  the  radical  g  into 
j,  before  an  a  or  o  (§§  16,  33)  :  — 


The  Verb.  187 

a.  coger,  to  gather. 
INDIC.  PRES.  cojo  (but  coges,  coge,  cogemos,  etc?). 

SUBJ.  PRES.    coja,  cojas,  coja,  cojamos,  cojais,  cojan. 
TMPERAT.        (coge),  coja,  cojamos,  (coged),  cojan. 

b.  dirigir,  to  guide. 
INDIC.  PRES.  dirijo  (but  diriges,  dirige,  dirigimos,  etc.). 

SUBJ.  PRES.    dirija,  dirijas,  dirija,  dirijamos,  dirijais,  dirijan. 
IMPERAT.        (dirige),  dirija,  dirijamos,  (dirigid),  dirijan. 

376.  Verbs   in  -guir,   and   one   in  -quir,   reject  the 
orthographic  u,  returning  to  the  simple  radical  g  and  c 
hard,  when,  by  inflection,  they  would  stand  before  an 

a  or  an  o\  — 

a.   distinguir,  to  distinguish* 

INDIC.  PRES.  distingo  (but  distingues,  distingue,  distinguimos,  etc.). 
SUBJ.  PRES.    distinga,    distingas,    distinga,   distingamos,   distin- 

gais,  distingan. 
IMPERAT.        (distingue),  distinga,   distingamos,   (distinguid), 

distingan. 

b.   seguir,  to  follow  (irregular). 

INDIC.  PRES.  sigo  (but  sz'gues,  segue,  seguimos,  seguis,  s/guen,  etc). 
SUBJ.  PRES.    siga,  sigas,  siga,  sigamos,  sigais,  sigan. 
IMPERAT.        (segue),  siga,  sigamos,  (seguid),  sigan. 

c.   delinquir,  to  transgress  (law). 

INDIC.  PRES.  delinco  (but  delinques,  delinque,  delinqulmos,  etc.). 

SUBJ.  PRES.  delinca,  delincas,  delinca,  delincamos,  delincais, 
delincan. 

IMPERAT.  (delinque),  delinca,  delincamos,  (delinquid),  de- 
lincan. 

REMARK.  —  Verbs  in  -guir  are  somewhat  irregular,  and  will  be 
treated  with  such. 

377.  The  necessity  of  all  the  foregoing  consonant- 
mutations  is  obviously  to  maintain  in  the  stem  the  same 
sound  throughout  the  conjugation  that  it  has  in  the 
infinitive,  whatever  be  the  orthography. 


1 88  Form  and  Inflection. 

378.  Verbs    having    the    stem-ending    in    a    double 
consonant  (ch,  11,  n),  regularly  absorb  the  vowel  i  of 
the  diphthongs  ie,  io,  whenever  they  occur  in  the  course 
of  inflection ;   that  is,  in  the  gerund,  the  third  person 
singular  and   plural   of   the  past   definite,  and  in  the 
imperfects  and  future  of  the  subjunctive:  — 

a.   bullir,  to  boil. 
GERUND.  bullendo. 

PAST  DBF.          third  singular  and  plural,  bull6 ;  bulleron. 
SUBJ.  IMPERF.   bullera,  bulleras,  etc.  ;  bullese,  bulleses,  etc. 
SUBJ.  FUTURE,  bullere,  bulleres,  bullere,  bulleremos,  etc. 

b.   taner,  to  play  (of  music,  tangere). 
GERUND.  tanendo. 

PAST  DEF.         taiio,  taneron. 

SUBJ.  IMPERF.   tanera,  taneras,  etc. ;   tanese,  taneses,  etc. 
SUBJ.  FUTURE,  tanere,  taneres,  tanere,  taneremos,  etc. 

c.   plaflir,  to  lament. 
GERUND.  planendo. 

PAST  DEF.         piano,  plaiieron. 

SUBJ.  IMPERF.    planera,  plaiieras,  etc. ;   planese,  plaiieses,  etc. 
SUBJ.  FUTURE,  plaiiere,  planeres,  planere,  plaueremos,  etc. 

d.   Those  in  final  radical  ch  do  not  uniformly  absorb 
the  vowel  i :  — 

e.   henchir,  to  fill  (irregular) . 

GERUND.  hi  n  oh!  on  do  and  hinchendo. 

PAST  DEF.         hinchio  and  hincho ;  hinchieron  and  hincheron. 

SUBJ.  IMPERF.   hinchiera  and  hinchera,  hinchieras  and  hincheras, 

etc. ;  hinohiese  and  hinchese,  hinohieses  and  hin- 

cheses,  etc. 
SUBJ.  FUTURE,  hinchiere  and  hinchere,  hinchieres  and  hincheres,  etc. 

Progressive  Form  of  the  Active  Verb. 

379.  Spanish  verbs  may  be  translated  into  English 
in  three  different  ways  ;  namely  :  — 


The  Verb. 


189 


by  the  absolute  form,        1  f  I  speak. 

by  the  emphatic  form,       ^hablo,  j  I  do  speak. 
by  the  progressive  form,  j  [  I  am  speaking. 

380.  The  progressive  form  may  also  be  expressed  in 
Spanish  by  associating  with  the  gerund  of  the  principal 
verb  the  auxiliary  verb  estar,  to  be,  or  one  of  its 
substitutes  hallarse  or  encontrarse,  to  find  ones  self, 
to  be;  quedar,  to  remain;  ir  or  andar,  to  go;  seguir, 
to  go  on;  verse,  to  see  'ones  self:  — 


(hablando, 
comiendo, 
viviendo, 
f  hablando, 

estas  or  vas  \  comiendo, 
[  viviendo, 

{hablando, 
comiendo, 
viviendo, 

me  hall£  escribiendo, 
te  encontraste  jugando, 
quedd  durmiendo, 
quedamos  mirando, 
siguid  hablando, 


f  speaking. 
I  am  -j  eating. 

I  living. 

f  speaking, 
thou  art  \  eating. 

[  living. 

f  speaking, 
he  is  -{  eating. 

I  living. 

I  found  myself  (I  was)  writing, 
you  found  yourself  playing, 
he  remained  (was)  sleeping, 
we  stood  gazing, 
he  went  on  talking. 


381.  Of  the  two  verbs  in  Spanish  for  "to  be,"  —  ser 
and  estar,  —  the  latter  is  alone  employed  with  the  gerund 
to  make  up  the  progressive  form  of  an  active.verb  ;  while 
ser  is  the  only  one  that  serves  to  build  the  passive  voice. 

REMARK.  —  Estar  is  from  the  Latin  sto,  stare,  to  stand,  with 
the  prothetic  e,  as  in  escuela  (schola),  estudio  (studiunt),  etc. 
(§  41,  remark).  The  second  stem  estuv  is  derived  from  a  Latin 
basis  stabui  =  staubi,  estove,  estuve,  after  the  analogy  of  habui  — 
haubi,  hobe,  hube. 


190  Form  and  Inflection. 

382.    Conjugation  of  estar,  to  be :  — 


INFINITIVE.                        GERUND.                 PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

estar,  to  be.                  estando,  being.                  estado,  been. 

INDICATIVE    MODE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MODE. 

Present. 

estoy,  (std),       I  am. 
estas,                  thou  art. 
esta,                    he  is. 
V.  esta,               you  are. 
estamos,             we  are. 
estais,                 ye  are. 
estdn,                  they  are. 
VV.  estan,          you  are. 

9             Present. 

este,  (stem),       I  may  be. 
estes,                   thou  mayst  be.  * 
este,                     he  may  be. 
V.  este,                you  may  be. 
estemos,             we  may  be. 
esteis,                  ye  may  be. 
esten,                  they  may  be. 
VV.  esten,           you  may  be. 

Imperfect. 

estaba,               I  was  (being). 
estabas,              thou  wast. 
estaba,                he  was. 
V.  estaba,            you  were. 
estabamos,       we  were. 
estabais,            ye  were. 
estaban,             they  were. 
VV.  estaban,      you  were. 

Imperfect  (first  form}. 

estuviera,           /  might  be. 
estuvieras,          thou  mightest  be. 
estuviera,            he  might  be. 
V.  estuviera,       you  might  be. 
estuvieramos,   we  might  be. 
estuvierais,        ye  might  be. 
estuvieran,         they  might  be. 
VV.  estuvieran,  you  might  be. 

Past  Definite. 

estuve,                 /  was. 
estuviste,            thou  wast. 
estuvo,                'he  was. 
V.  estuvo,           you  were. 
estuvimos,         we  were. 
estuvisteis,        ye  were. 
estuvieron,        they  were. 
VV.  estuvieron,  you  were. 

Imperfect  {second  form  )  . 

estuviese,            /  might  be. 
estuvieses,          thou  mightest  be. 
estuviese,            he  might  be. 
V.  estuviese,       you  might  be. 
estuviesemos,    we  might  be. 
estuvieseis,        ye  might  be. 
estuviesen,          they  might  be. 
VV.  estuviesen,  you  might  be. 

The  Verb. 


191 


INDICATIVE    MODE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MODE. 

Future. 

estare,             /  shall  be. 
estaras,           thou  shalt  be. 
estara,             he  will  be. 
V.  estara,        you  will  be. 
estaremos,     we  shall  be. 
estareis,          ye  will  be. 
estaran,          they  will  be. 
VV.  estaran,  you  will  be. 

Future. 

estuviere,             /  should  be. 
estuvieres,           thou  shouldst  be. 
estuviere,             he  should  bt» 
V.  estuviere,         you  should  be. 
estuvieremos,     we  should  be. 
estuviereis,         ye  should  be. 
estuvieren,          they  should  be. 
VV.  estuvieren,   you  should  be. 

Conditional  (apodasts). 

estaria,            /  should  be. 
estarias,          thou  wouldst  be. 
estaria,            he  -would  be. 
V.  estaria,       you  would  be. 
estariamos,   we  should  be. 
estariais,        ye  would  be. 
estarian,         they  would  be. 
VV.  estarian,  you  would  be. 

Conditional  {protasis). 

estuviera         or  estuviese, 
estuvieras       0restuvieses, 
estuviera         or  estuviese, 
V.  estuviera      or  estuviese, 
estuvieramos0restuviesemos,    ft. 
estuvierais      or  estuvieseis,         £ 
estuvieran       or  estuviesen, 
VV.  estuvieran  or  estuviesen, 

IMPERATIVE    MODE. 

estd,                be  (thou). 
este,                let  him  be. 
este  V.,            be. 

no  estes,          be  (thou)  not. 
no  este,           let  him  not  be. 
no  este  V.,      do  not  be. 

estemos,              let  us  be. 
estad,                   be  (ye}. 
esten,                   let  them  be. 
esten  VV.,            be. 

no  estemos,        let  us  not  be. 

no  esteis,             be  (ye)  not. 
no  esten,              let  them  not  be. 
no  esten  VV.,      do  not  be. 

383.  The  compound  tenses  of  estar  are  regularly 
formed  by  means  of  the  verb  haber  and  the  past  participle 
estado  (status),  so  that  a  synopsis  will  suffice  to  suggest 
the  full  inflection  ;  — 


192 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Infinitive  Past. 


Gerund  Past. 


haber  estado,  to  have  been. 


habiendo  estado,  having  been. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


PAST  INDEFINITE. 
he  estado,  I  have  been. 

PLUPERFECT. 
habia  estado,  I  had  been. 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 
hube  estado,  (when)  /  had  been. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
habre  estado,  /  shall  have  been. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST. 
habna  estado,  /  should  have  been. 


PAST  INDEFINITE. 
haya  estado,  /  may  have  been. 

PLUPERFECT  (first form}. 
hubiera  estado,  /  might  have  been. 

PLUPERFECT  (second form} . 
hubiese  estado,  /  might  have  been. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

hubiere  estado,  /  should  have  been. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST.       [been. 

hub-iera,  hub-iese  estado,  (if)  I  had 


Passive  Voice. 

384.  The  proper  passive  voice  in  Spanish  is  formed 
by  the  auxiliary  ser,  to  be,  joined  to  the  past  participle 
of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 

REMARK.  —  Ser  is  a  contraction  of  the  old  Spanish  seer,  from 
the  Latin  verb  sedere,  to  sit.  This  stem  forms  the  gerund  siendo 
(old  Span,  seyendo),  the  past  participle  sido  (old  Span,  seydo,  from 
seditus  for  sessus),  and  the  present  subjunctive  sea  (old  Span,  seya, 
from  sedeam,  like  haya  from  habeam,  and  vaya  from  a  form  vadeam). 
The  future  and  conditional  of  the  indicative  regularly  follow  the  in- 
finitive ser-e,  ser-ia.  The  present  indicative  follows  sum,  est,  sumus, 
sunt ;  but  in  the  second  person  singular,  it  adopts  the  future  ens 
(eres),  and  in  the  plural,  a  regularized  sutis  (old  Span,  sodes,  modern 
sots').  The  imperfect  indicative  derives  from  eram,  eras,  etc.  The 
preterit  stem  fu  builds  the  past  definite  indicative,  the  imperfects 
and  future  subjunctive.  Therefore,  the  Latin  esse  does  not  reappear 
in  Spanish,  except  in  the  present  and  imperfect  indicative. 


The  Verb. 


193 


CONJUGATION    OF    THE    PASSIVE     AUXILIARY    VERB. 

385.   Ser,  to  be. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Infinitive.                               Gerund.                          Past  Participle. 

ser,  to  be.                       siendo,  being.                       sido,  been. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PRESENT. 

PRESENT. 

soy  (sum),                    I  am. 

sea  (sedeani),  I  may  be. 

eres  (eris  for  es),        thou  art. 

seas,                  thou  mayst  be. 

es  (est),                       he  is. 

sea,                   he  may  be. 

V.  es,                            you  are. 

V.  -sea,               you  may  be. 

somos  (sumus),          we  are. 

seamos,           we  may  be. 

sois  (sutis  for  estis),  ye  are. 

seals,               ye  may  be. 

son  (sunt),                   they  are. 

sean,                 they  may  be. 

VV.  son,                       you  are. 

VV.  sean,         you  may  be. 

IMPERFECT. 

IMPERFECT  (first  form}. 

era,                                /  was. 

fuera,               /  might  be. 

eras,                              thou  wast. 

fueras,             thou  mightest  be. 

era,                                 he  was. 

fuera,               he  might  be. 

V.  era,                          you  were. 

V.  fuera,           you  might  be. 

eramos,                         we  were. 

fueramos,       we  might  be. 

erais,                            ye  were. 

fuerais,           ye  might  be. 

eran,                              they  were. 

fueran,             they  might  be. 

VV.  eran,                      you  were. 

W.  fueran,      you  might  be. 

PAST  DEFINITE. 

IMPERFECT  (second  form}. 

fui,                                    I  was. 

fuese,                /  might  be. 

fuiste,                           thou  wast. 

fueses,              thou  mightest  be. 

fue,                                 he  was. 

fuese,                he  might  be. 

V.  fue,                            you  were. 

V.  fuese,           you  might  be. 

fuimos,                         we  were. 

fuesemos,       we  might  be. 

fuisteis,                        ye  were. 

fueseis,            ye  might  be. 

fueron,                          they  were. 

fuesen,             they  might  be. 

VV.  fueron,                  you  were. 

VV.  fuesen,      you  might  be. 

194 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

FUTURE. 

FUTURE. 

sere,              /  shall  be. 

fuere,               /  should  be. 

seras,            thou  wilt  be. 

fueres,             thou  shouldst  be. 

sera,             he  will  be. 

fuere,                he  should  be. 

V.  sera,         you  will  be. 

V.  fuere,           you  should  be. 

seremos,      we  shall  be. 

fueremos,       we  should  be 

sereis,          ye  will  be. 

fuereis,            ye  should  be. 

seran,           they  will  be. 

fueren,             they  should  be. 

VV.  scran,   you  will  be. 

VV.  fueren,      you  should  be. 

CONDITIONAL  {apodasis)  . 

CONDITIONAL  (protasis). 

seria,            /  should  be. 

fuera           or  fuese, 

serias,          thou  wouldst  be. 

fueras         or  fueses, 

O 

seria,             he  would  be. 

fuera           or  fuese, 

^2) 

V.  seria,        you  would  be. 

V.  fuera       or  fuese, 

S 

Kl 

(5 

seriamos,    we  should  be. 

fueramos   or  fuesemos, 

•  s 
3 

seriais,         ye  would  be. 

fuerais        or  fueseis, 

« 

£ 

serian,          they  would  be. 

fueran        or  fuesen, 

o 

VV.  serian,  you  would  be. 

VV.  fueran  or  fuesen, 

Imperative  Mode. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 



seamos,           let  us  be. 

se,                 be  (tkou). 

sed,                  be  (ye). 

sea,               let  him  be. 

sean,                 let  them  be. 

sea  V.,          be. 

scan  W.,          be. 



no  seamos,      let  us  not  be. 

no  seas,        be  (thou}  not. 

no  seals,           be  (ye)  not. 

no  sea,          let  him  not  be. 

no  sean,            let  them  not  be. 

no  sea  V.,    do  not  be. 

no  sean  VV.,    do  not  be. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Infinitive   Past. 

Gerund  Past. 

haber  sido,  to  have  been. 

habiendo  sido,  having  been. 

The  Verb. 


195 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

he  sido,                   I  have  been. 

haya  sido,                7 

has  sido,                 thou  hast  been. 

hayas  sido,              thou 

3 

v$ 

ha  sido,                   he  has  been. 

haya  sido,                he 

Si 

S> 

V.  ha  sido,               you  have  been. 

V.  haya  sido,            you 

5 
5 

^ 

hemos  sido,           we  have  been. 

hayamos  sido,        we 

* 

habeis  sido,            ye  have  been. 

hayais  sido,            ye 

1 

han  sido,                 they  have  been. 

hayan  sido,             they 

§ 

VV.  han  sido,          you  have  been. 

VV.  hayan  sido,       you 

PLUPERFECT. 

PLUPERFECT  (first  form}. 

habia  sido,              /  had  been. 

hubiera  sido,          7 

~ 

habias  sido,            thou  hadst  been. 

hubieras  sido,        thou 

°l 

habia  sido,             he  had  been. 

hubiera  sido,          he 

<x 
•*>< 

V.  habia  sido,          you  had  been. 

V.  hubiera  sido,       you 

a 
<2 

habiamos  sido,     we  had  been. 

hubieramos  sido,  we 

f  ^ 
^ 

habiais  sido,         ye  had  been. 

hubierais  sido,       ye 

$ 

^S 

habian  sido,           they  had  b 

een. 

hubieran  sido,       .  they 

* 

VV  habian  sido,      you  had  been. 

VV.  hubieran  sido,  you 

p 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

PLUPERFECT  (second  form). 

hube  sido,  (when)  I  had  been. 

hubiese  sido,           7 

5j 

hubiste  sido,          thou  hadst  been. 

hubieses  sido,         thou 

f 

hubo  sido,   '            he  had  been. 

hubiese  sido,          he 

'H. 
^ 

V.  hubo  sido,           you  had  been. 

V.  hubiese  sido,       you 

» 
Q 

hubimos  sido,        we  had  been. 

hubiesemos  sido,  we 

•      t^ 
^« 

hubisteis  sido,      ye  had  been. 

hubieseis  sido,       ye 

§ 

jS 

hubieron  sido,       they  had  been. 

hubiesen  sido,        they 

r) 

VV.  hubieron  sido,  you  had  been. 

VV.  hubiesen  sido,  you 

o 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

habre  sido,              I  shall 

hubiere  sido,          7 

& 

habras  sido,           thou  wilt 

hubieres  sido,         thou 

o> 
1 

habra  sido,             he  will 

?> 
a 

hubiere  sido,          he 

5 

^», 

V.  habra  sido,          you  will 

8 

V.  hubiere  sido,       you 

s 

v  ^ 

habremos  sido,      we  shall 

'  $• 

r*> 

hubieremos  sido,  we 

f*> 
5* 

habreis  sido,          ye  will 

s 

hubiereis  sido,       ye 

1 

habran  sido,           they  will 

hubieren  sido,        they 

n 

W.  habran  sido,    you  will 

W.  hubieren  sido,  you 

p" 

196 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis). 
habria  sido,          /  should 
habrias  sido,        thou  wouldst 
habria  sido,         he  would 
V.  habria  sido,      you  would 
habriamos  sido,  we  should 
habriais  sido,      ye  would 
habrian  sido,       they  would 
VV.  habrian  sido,  yoti  would 


CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis] 
hubiera          or  hubiese 
hubieras        or  hubieses 
hubiera          or  hubiese 
V.  hubiera      or  hubiese 
hubieramos  or  hubiesemos 
hubierais       or  hubieseis 
hubieran       or  hubiesen 
VV.  hubieran  or  hubiesen 


CONJUGATION    OF    THE    PASSIVE    VERB, 

386.   Ser  llamado,  to  be  called. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Infinitive  Mode. 

Gerund. 

(  llamado,  a,     ) 
ser  <  „                         >  to  be  called. 
(  llamados,  as,  ) 

(  llamado,  a,      ) 

siendo?            ^              \betngcallcd. 
(  llamados,  as,  ) 

Absolute  Past  Participle. 

llamado,  a;    llamados,  as,  having  been  called. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PRESENT. 

PRESENT. 

"lam  called,"  etc., 

"I  may  be  called"  etc., 

soy  llamado,  a. 

sea  llamado,  a. 

eres  llamado,  a. 

seas  llamado,  a. 

es  llamado,  a. 

sea  llamado,  a. 

somos  llamados,  as. 

seamos  llamados,  as. 

sois  llamados,  as. 

seais  llamados,  as. 

son  llamados,  as. 

scan  llamados,  as. 

The  Verb. 


197 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

IMPERFECT. 
"I  was  called"  etc., 
era  llamado,  a. 
eramos  llamados,  as. 

IMPERFECT  (first  form). 
"I  might  be  called"  etc., 
fuera  llamado,  a. 
fueramos  llamados,  as. 

PAST  DEFINITE. 
"I  was  called"  etc., 
firi  llamado,  a. 
fuimos  llamados,  as. 

IMPERFECT  (second  form)  . 
"I  might  be  called"  etc., 
fuese  llamado,  a. 
fuesemos  llamados,  as. 

FUTURE. 

FUTURE. 

"I  shall  be  called," 
sere  llamado,  a. 
sere"mos  llamados,  as. 

"I  should  be  called,"  etc., 
fuere  llamado,  a. 
fueremos  llamados,  as. 

CONDITIONAL  (a^odasis). 

CONDITIONAL  (protasis). 

"I  should  be  called," 
seria  llamado,  a. 
seriamos  llamados,  as. 

(It}  "I  were  called," 
fuera  or  fuese  llamado,  a. 
fueramos  or  fuesemos  llamados,  as. 

Imperative  Mode. 

se    llamado,  a,  be  called. 
sea  llamado,  a,  let  him  be  called. 

seamos  llamados,  as,  let  us  be  1  ^ 
sed  llamados,  as,                  be  j-  gs 
scan  llamados,  as,  let  them  be  }  ^ 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

(  llamado,  a,     ) 
Infinitive  Past  :  —  haber  sido  \  „         ,               \  to  have  been  called. 
(  llamados,  as,  ) 

(  llamado,  a,     )  . 
Gerund  Past  :  —  habiendo  sido  {  „         ,               [  having  been  called. 
\  llamados,  as,  ) 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

PAST  INDEFINITE. 

"I  have  been  called" 
he  sido  llamado,  a. 
hemos  sido  llamados,  as. 

"I  may  have  been  called" 
haya  sido  llamado,  a. 
hayamos  sido  llamados,  as. 

198 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


PLUPERFECT. 
"/ had  been  called" 

habia  sido  llamado,  a. 
habiamos  sido  llamados,  as. 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

(When)  "I  had  been  called," 
hube  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubimos  sido  llamados,  as. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
"I shall  have  been  called" 
habre  sido  llamado,  a. 
habremos  sido  llamados,  as. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis). 
"I  should  have  been  called" 
habria  sido  llamado,  a. 
habnamos  sido  llamados,  as. 


PLUPERFECT  (first  form). 
"I  might  have  been  called" 
hubiera  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubieramos  sido  llamados,  as. 

PLUPERFECT  (second form).' 
"I might  have  been  called" 
hubiese  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubiesemos  sido  llamados,  as. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
"7  should  have  been  called" 
hubiere  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubieremos  sido  llamados,  as. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis). 
(If)  "I.  had  been  called," 

hubiera  or  hubiese  sido  llama- 
do,  a.  [llamados,  as. 
hubieramos  or  hubiesemos  sido, 


Remarks  on  the  Passive. 


387.  The  passive  participle  is  varied  like  any  adjective 
in  o,  and  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  subject 
of  the  verb  :  — 


el  nino  es  amado  de  todos, 
la  nina  es  mimada  del  ama, 
estos  hombres  ban  sj^p  siempre 

muy  estimados, 

las  senoras  habrian  sido  ma's 
consideradas,  si  no  hubiesen 
tenido  tanto  orgullo  y  vanidad, 


the  boy  is  loved  by  all. 

the  babe  is  petted  by  the  nurse, 

these  men  have  always  been  very 
much  esteemed. 

the  ladies  would  have  been  more 
highly  respected,  if  they  had 
not  had  such  pride  and  vanity. 


REMARK.  —  The  past  participle  with  haber  is  not  variable  ;  hence 
sido  and  estado —  which  are  never  conjugated  with  ser—  are  incapable 
of  any  change  for  gender  and  number.  The  same  is  the  case  with 


The  Verb. 


199 


hob  do  as  an  auxiliary ;  but  when  it  has  the  meaning  of  an  independent 
verb  and  may  be  inflected  in  the  passive  with  ser,  or  when  it  is  used 
absolutely,  it  assumes  the  regular  variations  of  gender  and  number :  — 


no  pudieron  ser  habidos,  habi- 

das, 

habido  consejo, 
habida  consulta, 
habidas  las  mujeres, 


they  (men  or  women)  could  not 

be  apprehended, 
counsel  having  been  taken, 
a  consultation  having  been  held, 
the  women  having  been  taken. 


388.  Byy  after  passive  verbs  and  participles,  is  ren- 
dered by  por  when  agency  is  denoted,  and  by  de  when 
the  verb  expresses  feeling  or  emotion  :  — 


este  drbol  ha 

mi  padre, 
fulano  como  es< 

de  muchos, 
comence  a  pasear? 

conde,  honrado  de 

gos,  temido  de  mis  enemigos, 

y  acariciado  de  todos, 


this  tree  was  set  out  by  my  fa- 
ther. 

so  and  so,  as  a  writer,  is  esteemed 
by  many. 

began  to  parade  about  like  an 
earl,  honored  by  my  friends, 
dreaded  by  my  foes,  and 
fawned  upon  by  all. 


389.  When  the  verb  to  be,  with  a  past  participle, 
expresses  accidental  state  or  situation,  it  must  be 
translated  by  estar  or  one  of  its  substitutes.  The  past 
participle  is  then  considered  to  be  employed  as  an 
adj  ective :  — 


divididos  estaban  caballeros  y 

escuderos, 
la  obra  est£  ya  concluida, 


knights     and      esquires     w< 

grouped  apart, 
the  work  is  already  finished. 


a.  Substitutes  of  estar  are,  ir  and  andar,  to  go; 
quedar  and  quedarse,  to  remain;  encontrarse  and 
hallarse,  to  find  one  s  self;  verse,  to  see  ones  self;  etc., 
all  of  which,  thus  employed,  have  the  signification  of 
to  be,  taken  in  a  transitory  or  accidental  sense :  - 


200 


Form  and  Inflection. 


las  calles  andaban  revueltas, 
qued6    satisfecho   de    mi   con- 

ducta, 
me  vi  aislado  de  todos, 


the  streets  were  in  an  uproar, 
he  was  satisfied  with  my  beha- 
vior. 
I  was  isolated  from  everybody. 


390.  In  general,  ser  is  the  only  verb  that  serves  to  form 
the  true  passive  voice  in  Spanish,  and  estar  the  only  one 
of  the  two  that  unites  with  the  gerund  to  make  up  the 
progressive  form  of  the  active  voice.  Aside  from  these 
constructions,  the  use  of  ser  and  estar  is  to  be  carefully 
distinguished :  — 


esta  obra  ha  sido  traducida  del 

Ingles, 

dicha  obra  esta  mal  traducida, 
este  libro  ha  sido  impreso  en 

el  siglo  pasado, 
me  parece  que  anda  impres| 

una  traduccion  de  dicho  libro? 


this  work   has  been   translated 

from  the 

the  said  workH  BJy  translated. 
liii^l^^H  Brcd  in  the  last 


is 


that  a  version  of 
in  print. 


REMARK.  —  Estar  is,  however,  frequently  found  employed  in  the 
absolute  sense  of  "to  be,"  reflecting  the  force  of  its  Latin  origin 
stare,  to  stand:  — 

esta  visto,  it  is  (stands)  evident.  \    esta  claro,  it  is  clear. 

391.  With  other  words  than  participles,  the  radical 
distinction  in  the  use  of  ser  and  estar  may  be  summed 
up  as  follows  :  — 

a.  Ser  expresses  what  is  essential  and  inherent,  hence 
permanent  and  absolute  :  — 


£1  es  Ingles,  Espanol, 
la  casa  es  de  piedra, 
somos  amigos  suyos, 
yo  soy  cojo,  tu  eres  ciego, 
V.  es  rico,  yo  soy  pobre, 
no   son   felices,  si   bien   estan 
contentos  por  ahora, 


he  is  an  Englishman,  a  Spaniard, 
the  house  is  of  stone, 
we  are  friends  of  his. 
I  am  lame,  thou  art  blind, 
you  are  rich,  I  am  poor, 
they   are   not   happy,   although 
pleased  for  the  moment. 


The  Verb. 


201 


b.   Estar,  on  the  contrary,  denotes  an  accidental,  a 
transitory,  situation  or  state  :  — 


el  Ingles  esta  en  Espafia, 
la  puerta  estaba  cerrada, 
el  rio  estaba  helado, 
la  copa  esta  llena, 
estaran  aqui  manana, 
estuvo  de  buen  humor, 

son  buenos ;  estan  buenos, 

es  malo  ;  esta  malo, 

es  alto  ;  est£  alto, 

es  triste  ;  esta  triste, 

es  cansado  ;  esta  cansado, 

es  callado  ;  esta  callado, 

el    cuarto    es    cdmodo  —  esta 

limpio, 

la  mujer  es  loca  —  esta  loca, 
el  mar  es  inmenso  ;  la  mar  esta 

picada  (94),  [caliente, 

el  yelo   es   frio ;    el  agua  estd 


the  Englishman  is  in  Spain. 

the  door  was  shut. 

the  river  was  frozen. 

the  goblet  is  full. 

they  will  be  here  to-morrow. 

he  was  in  good  spirits. 

they  are  good ;  they  are  well. 

he  is  bad ;  he  is  ill. 

he  is  tall ;  he  is  high. 

he  is  dull;  he  is  sad. 

he  is  wearisome  ;  he  is  tired. 

he  is  close-mouthed  —  silent. 

the    room    is    convenient  —  is 

clean. 

the  woman  is  crazy —  is  frantic, 
the  sea  is  immense ;  the  sea  is 

rough, 
ice  is  cold ;  the  water  is  hot. 


REMARK.  —  Estar  in  its  accidental  sejnse  may  often  be  translated 
by  its  original  meaning  of  to  stand.  "  To  stand"  or  "  stand  up," 
referring  to  posture,  is  expressed  by  ponerse  de  or  en  pie  (action) , 
and  estar  de  or  en  pie  (state)  :  — 

estuvo  &  la  puerta,  he  stood  at  the  door. 

al  entrar  la  dama,  se  puso  de  as  the  lady  came  in,  he  stood  up 

pi<£,  (arose) . 

estuvo  en  pid  largo  rato  pensando,  he  stood  up  a  long  time  thinking. 


The  Reflexive  Conjugation. 

392.   A  reflexive  verb  is  one  that  is  conjugated  with  a 
pronoun-object  relating  to  the  same  person  or  thing  as 

the  subject :  — 

[self. 

yo  me  lisoiijeo;  el  se  engana,    |    I  flatter  myself ;  he  deceives  him- 


2O2 


Form  and  Inflection. 


393.  Any  transitive  verb  may  assume  the  reflexive 
form :  — 

a.  With  the  pronominal  object  in  the  accusative, 
provided  the  verb  naturally  takes  an  accusative  of  the 
person :  — 


le  alabo  ;  se  alaba, 

me  engana ;  me  engaiio, 


I  praise  him  ;  he  praises  himself, 
he  deceives  me  ;  I  deceive  myself. 


b.  With  the  pronominal  object  in  the  dative,  provided 
the  verb  naturally  takes  the  dative  of  the  person  and 
accusative  of  the  thing: —  r  wer 

te  atribuyes  el  poder,  |    thou  assumest  (to  thyself)  the 

REMARK.  —  Under  this  rule  belongs  also  a  kind  of  ethical  dative, 
which  adds  energy  to  the  phrase,  and  may  be  omitted :  — 


me  tomo  la  libertad  de  . . . , 
se  compra  una  prenda, 


I  take  (for  myself)  the  liberty  to .... 
he  buys  (for  himself)  a  garment. 


394.    Many  transitive  verbs  are  made  intransitive  by 
assuming  the  reflexive  form :  — 

he  opened  the  door;  the  door 
opened.  [broke. 

he  broke  the  glass ;    the   glass 

he  sells  the  books ;  good  books 
sell  dear. 

he  drowned  his  grief ;  I  suffocate. 

he  makes  something;  he  does 
not  know  what  he  does. 


abrid  la  puerta ;    la  puerta  se 

abrid,  [rompi6, 

rompid    el   vaso ;     el   vaso    se 

vende   los   libros;    los   buenos 

libros  se  venden  caro, 
ahogd  su  dolor  ;  me  ahogo, 
hace  alguna  cosa ;    no  sabe  lo 
que  se  hace, 


395.  Intransitive  verbs  often  become  reflexive  with 
modified  significations,  the  pronominal  object  frequently 
assuming  an  adverbial  force  :  — 

dormir;  dormirse, 
sale  ;  el  cubo  se  sale, 


muere ;  se  muere, 
voy,  or  marcho, 


to  sleep ;  to  go  to  sleep, 
he  goes  out ;  the  pail  leaks, 
he  dies  ;  he  is  dying. 
I  go,  I  march. 


The  Verb. 


203 


me  voy  or  me  marcho, 
ven;  ve'nte, 
cae ;  se  cae, 


I  go  off  or  away, 
come ;  come  along, 
he  falls  ;  it  falls  down. 


396.    Many  verbs  have  in  Spanish  the  reflexive  form 
only :  — 


alegrarse ;  arrepentirse. 
burlarse;  dignarse, 
figurarse;  quejarse, 


to  rejoice ;  to  repent, 
to  laugh  at ;  to  deign, 
to  imagine  ;  to  complain. 


397.  Many  verbs  that  are  reflexive  in  Spanish  are 
expressed  in  English  by  the  formal  passive,  and  some 
by  both  the  reflexive  and  the  passive  :  — 


disgustarse ;  equivocarse, 

llamarse, 

enganarse, 


to  be  displeased  ;  to  be  mistaken, 
to  call  one's  self  or  to  be  called, 
to  deceive  one's  self,  to  be  de- 
ceived. 


398.    Model  verb  —  alabarse,  to  praise  ones  self. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

alabarse,  to  praise  one's  self. 

alabandose,  praising  one^s  self. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PRESENT. 

PRESENT. 

"I  praise  myself"  etc., 
me  alabo. 

"I  may  praise  myself"  etc., 
me  alabe. 

te  alabas. 

te  alabes. 

se  alaba. 

se  alabe. 

V.  se  alaba. 

V.  se  alabe. 

nos  alabamos. 

nos  alabemos. 

os  alabais. 

os  alabeis. 

se  alaban. 

se  alaben. 

W.  se  alaban. 

W.  se  alaben. 

204 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


IMPERFECT. 

"/  was  praising  myself"  etc., 
me  alababa. 
te  alababas. 
se  alababa. 
V.  se  alababa,  etc. 

PAST  DEFINITE. 
" I praised  myself"  etc., 
me  alabe. 
te  alabaste. 
se  alabo. 
V.  se  alabo,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

"I  shall  praise  myself"  etc., 
me  alabare. 
te  alabaras. 
se  alabara. 
V.  se  alabara,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  (apodasis). 
"I  should  praise  myself"  etc., 
me  alabaria. 
te  alabarias. 
se  alabaria. 
,    V.  se  alabaria,  etc. 


IMPERFECT  {first  form) . 
"I  might  praise  myself"  etc., 
me  alabara. 
te  alabaras. 
se  alabara. 
V.  se  alabara,  etc. 

IMPERFECT  (second  form) . 
"I  might  praise  myself"  etc., 
me  alabase. 
te  alabases. 
se  alabase. 
V.  se  alabase,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

"/  should  praise  myself"  etc., 
me  alabare. 
te  alabares. 
se  alabare. 
V.  se  alabare,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  (protasis). 
(If)  "I  praised  myself"  etc., 
me  alab-ara,  -ase. 
te  alab-aras,  -ases. 
se  alab-ara,  -ase. 
V.  se  alab-ara,  -ase,  etc. 


Imperative    Mode. 


SINGULAR. 

alabate,  praise  thyself. 
alabese,  let  him  praise  himself. 
alabese  V.,  praise  yourself. 

no  te  alabes,  do  not  praise  thyself. 
no  se  alabe,  let  him  not  p.  himself. 
no  se  alabe  V.,  do  not  p.  yourself. 


PLURAL. 

alabemonos,  let  us  praise  ourselves. 
alabaos,  praise  yourselves. 
alabense,  let  them  praise  themselvel. 
alabense  W.,  praise  yourselves. 

no  nos  alabemos,  let  us  not  p.  o.  s. 
no  os  alabeis,  do  not  praise  y.  s. 
no  se  alaben,  let  them  not  p.  th.  s. 
no  se  alaben  VV.,  do  not  p.  y.  s. 


The  Verb. 


205 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 


Infinitive  Past. 


Gerund  Past. 


haberse  alabado,  to  have  praised 
one's  self. 


habiendose  alabado,  having  praised 
one's  self. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


PAST  INDEFINITE. 
"/  have  praised  myself"  etc., 
me  he  alabado. 
te  has  alabado. 
se  ha  alabado. 
V.  se  ha  alabado. 
nos  hemos  alabado. 
os  habeis  alabado. 
se  han  alabado. 
VV.  se  han  alabado. 

PLUPERFECT. 

"I  had  praised  myself"  etc., 
me  habia  alabado. 
te  habias  alabado,  etc. 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

(When)  "I  had  praised  my  self"  etc., 
me  hube  alabado. 
te  hubiste  alabado,  etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

"I  shall  have  praised  myself"  etc., 
me  habre  alabado. 
te  habras  alabado,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis). 
"I  should  have  praised  my  self"  etc., 
me  habria  alabado. 
te  habrias  alabado,  etc. 


PAST  INDEFINITE. 

"I  may  have  praised  myself  "  etc., 
me  haya  alabado. 
te  hayas  alabado. 
se  haya  alabado. 
V.  se  haya  alabado. 
nos  hayamos  alabado. 
os  hayais  alabado. 
se  hayan  alabado. 
W.  se  hayan  alabado,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT  (first form) . 
"I  might  have  praised  myself"  etc., 
me  hubiera  alabado. 
te  hubieras  alabado,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT  (second form) . 
"I  might  have  praised  myself"  etc. 
me  hubiese  alabado. 
te  hubieses  alabado,  etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

"1  should  have  praised  my  self"  etc., 
me  hubiere  alabado. 
te  hubieres  alabado,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis). 
(If)  "7  had  praised  myself"  etc., 
me  hubiera  or  hubieses  alabado. 
te  hubieras  or  hubieses  alabado,  etc. 


2O6 


Form  and  Inflection. 


399.    Model  verb  —  figurarse,  to  fancy  (to  ones  self}, 
to  imagine. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Infinitive  Mode. 

Gerund. 

figurarse,  to  imagine. 

figurandose,  imagining. 

•   Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

PRESENT. 

PRESENT. 

me  figure,          /  imagine. 
te  figuras,           thou  imaginest. 
se  figura,            he  imagines. 
V.  se  figura,      you  imagine. 
nos  figuramos,  we  imagine. 
os  figurais,        ye  imagine. 
se  figuran,          they  imagine. 
VV.  se  figuran,  you  imagine. 

me  figure,         /  may  imagine. 
te  figures,          thou  mayst  imagine. 
se  figure,           he  may  imagine. 
V.  se  figure,     you  may  imagine. 
nos  figuremos,  we  may  imagine. 
os  figureis,        ye  may  imagine. 
se  figuren,         they  may  imagine. 
VV.  se  figuren,^^  may  imagine. 

IMPERFECT. 

IMPERFECT  {first  form)  . 

me  figuraba,      I  was  imagining. 

me  figurara,      I  might  imagine. 

PAST  DEFINITE. 

IMPERFECT  (second  form)  . 

me  figure,          /  imagined. 

me  figurase,      /  might  imagine. 

FUTURE. 

FUTURE. 

me  figurare,      I  shall  imagine. 

me  figurare,      /  should  imagine. 

CONDITIONAL  (apodasis). 

CONDITIONAL  (protasis}. 

me  figuraria,      /  should  imagine. 

me  figur-ara,  -ase,  (if)  /  imagined. 

Imperative  Mode. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

figdrate,  imagine  (thou). 
figdrese,  let  him  imagine. 
figdrese  V.,  imagine. 

figuremonos,  let  us  imagine. 
figuraos,  imagine  {ye). 
figdrense,  let  them  imagine. 
figdrense  VV.,  imagine. 

The  Verb. 


207 


Imperative  Mode. 


SINGULAR. 


no  te  figures,  imagine  (thou}  not. 
no  se  figure,  let  him  not  imagine. 
no  se  figure  V.,  do  not  imagine. 


PLURAL. 

no  nos  figuremos,  let  us  not  imagine. 
no  os  figureis,  imagine  (ye)  not. 
no  se  figuren,  let  them  not  imagine. 
no  se  figuren  VV.,  do  not  imagine. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 


Infinitive   Past. 


Gerund  Past. 


haberse  figurado,  to  have  imagined. 


habiendose  figurado,  having  imag- 
ined. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


PAST  INDEFINITE. 
me  he  figurado,  / 

te  has  figurado,  thou 

se  ha  figurado,  he 

V.  se  ha  figurado,       you 
nos  hemos  figurado,   we 
os  habeis  figurado,     ye 
se  han  figurado,  they 

VV.  se  han  figurado,  you 

PLUPERFECT. 
me  habia  figurado,  I  had  imagined. 

PAST  ANTERIOR. 

me  hube  figurado,  (when)  /  had 
imagined. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

me  habre  figurado,  /  shall  have 
imagined. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (apodasis). 

me  habria  figurado,  /  should  have 
imagined. 


PAST  INDEFINITE. 
me  haya  figurado,          / 
te  hayas  figurado,  thou 

se  haya  figurado,  he 

V.  se  haya  figurado,       you 
nos  hayamos  figurado,  we 
os  hayais  figurado,         ye 
se  hayan  figurado,          they 
VV.  se  hayan  figurado,  you 

PLUPERFECT  (first  form) . 

me  hubiera  figurado,  I  might  have 
imagined. 

PLUPERFECT  (second  form}. 

me  hubiese  figurado,  /  might  have 
imagined. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

me  hubiere  figurado,  I  should  have 
imagined. 

CONDITIONAL  PAST  (protasis). 

me  hub-iera,  -iese  figurado,  (if)  / 
had  imagined. 


208 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Remarks  on  the  Reflexive  Verb. 

400.  The  pronoun-subject  of  the  reflexive  verb  should 
be  expressed  when  emphasis  or  contrast  require  it ;  but 
in  the  interrogative  conjugation  it  must  never  intervene 
between  the  compound  forms  of  the  verb.  Its  ordinary 
position  may  be  best  gathered  from  a  few  examples  :  — 


WITHOUT    A    NEGATION. 


Affirmative. 


Interrogative. 


PRESENT. 


"/ imagine"  etc., 
yo  me  figure. 
tfi  te  figuras. 
vos  os  figurais  (§  181). 
el  se  figura. 
ella  se  figura. 

uno  se  figura,  or  se  figura  uno. 
V.  se  figura,  or  se  figura  V. 

nosotros  ) 

\  nos  figuramos. 
nosotras ) 

vosotros  ) 

\  os  figurais. 
vosotras  J 

ellos  i 

\  se  figuran. 
el  las  I 

VV.  se  figuran,  or  se  figuran '  W. 


"Do  I  imagine  ?  "  etc., 
i  me  figuro  yo  ? 
i  te  figuras  tfi  ? 
i  os  figurais  vos  ? 
£se  figura  el? 
£se  figura  ella? 
I  se  figura  uno  ? 
£se  figura  V.?  or  £  V.  se  figura? 

r  nosotros  ? 

;  nos  figuramos  <  ' 

( nosotras  ? 

.    f  vosotros  ? 

;  os  figurais  1  ~ 

I vosotras  ? 

r  ellos  ? 

<se  figuran  {ellag?       [figunm? 

<ise  figuran  W.?  or 


PAST  INDEFINITE. 


"I have  imagined"  etc., 
yo  me  he  figurado. 
td  te  has  figurado. 
vos  os  habeis  figurado. 
el  se  ha  figurado. 
ella  se  ha  figurado. 
uno  se  ha  figurado.        [rado  V. 
V.  se  ha  figurado,  or  se  ha  figu- 


"Have  I  imagined?  "  etc., 
<ime  he  figurado  yo? 
I  te  has  figurado  tfi  ? 
£  os  habeis  figurado  vos  ? 
I  se  ha  figurado  el  ? 
•  £se  ha  figurado  ella? 
I  se  ha  figurado  uno  ? 
<jse  ha  figurado  V.?  etc. 


The  Verb. 


209 


Affirmative. 

Interrogative. 

PAST  INDEFINITE  (continued). 

"  We  have  imagined"  etc., 

"Have  we  imagined?  "  etc., 

nosotros  ) 

\  nos  nemos  figurado. 
iiosotras  J 

_         ,    (  nosotros  ? 

<i  nos  hemos  figurado  \ 
I  nosotras  ? 

vosotros  )               .              , 

[•  os  habeis  figurado. 
vosotras  j 

.    (  vosotros  ? 

£os  habeis  figurado^ 
(  vosotras  ? 

ellos  i              c         , 

f  se  han  figurado. 
ellas  ] 

,    f  ellos? 

£se  han  figurado  {ellag? 

W.  se  han  figurado,  or  se  han 

£  se  han  figurado  W.  ?  etc. 

figurado  VV. 

Imperative  Mode. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 



figuremonos  nosotros,  -as. 

figdrate  tti. 

figuraos  vosotros. 

figuraos  vos. 

figuraos  vosotras. 

figdrese  el,  ella,  uno. 

figdrense  ellos,  -as. 

figdrese  V. 

figdrense  W. 

WITH    A    NEGATIVE. 

Affirmative. 

Interrogative. 

PRESENT. 

"I  do  not  imagine"  etc., 

"Do  I  not  imagine  ?  "  etc., 

yo  no  me  figuro. 

^,no  me  figuro  yo? 

t6  no  te  figuras. 

£  no  te  figuras  tti  ? 

el  no  se  figura. 

&  no  se  figura  el  ? 

V.  no  se  figura,  or  no  se  figura  V. 

^no  se  figura  V.? 

nosotros  no  nos  figuramos. 

£  no  nos  figuramos  nosotros  ? 

vosotros  no  os  figurais. 

£  no  os  figurais  vosotros  ? 

ellos  no  se  figuran.         [ran  VV. 

£  no  se  figuran  ellos  ? 

W.  no  se  figuran,  or  no  se  figu- 

£  no  se  figuran  W.  ? 

210 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Affirmative. 

Interrogative. 

PAST  INE 

"I  have  not  imagined"  etc., 
yo  no  me  he  figurado. 
tti  no  te  has  figurado. 
el  no  se  ha  figurado. 
V.  no  se  ha  figurado.          [rado. 
nosotros   no   nos   hemos  figu- 
vosotros  no  os  habeis  figurado. 
ellos  no  se  han  figurado. 
VV.  no  se  han  figurado. 

EFINITE. 

"Have  I  not  imagined?  "  etc., 
&  no  me  he  figurado  yo  ? 
&  no  te  has  figurado  tfi  ? 
&  no  se  ha  figurado  el  ? 
£no  se  ha  figurado  V.? 
&  no  nos  hemos  figurado  nosotros? 
£  no  os  habeis  figurado  vosotros  ? 
&  no  se  han  figurado  ellos  ? 
£no  se  han  figurado  VV.? 

Imperative  Mode. 

SINGULAR. 

no  te  figures  tu. 
no  se  figure  el. 
no  se  figure  V. 

PLURAL. 
no  no  figuremos  nosotros. 
no  os  figureis  vosotros. 
no  se  figuren  ellos. 
no  se  figuren  W. 

401.  The  pronoun-object  regularly  stands  before  the 
finite  verb  in  all  conditions  of  a  sentence.  In  the  literary 
style,  however,  it  may  be  attached  to  the  verb  in  the 
simple  tenses,  and  to  the  auxiliary  in  the  compound 
tenses,  when  the  verb  begins  a  phrase  ;  but  in  such 
position  of  the  object,  the  subject  must  take  its  place 
after  the  verb  or  participle  :  — 

equivoque'me  (yo), 
equivocdse  (eT), 
hdme  equivocado  (yo), 
ha"se  equivocado  (eT), 

REMARK. — In  quaint,  archaic  language,  the  auxiliary  and  parti- 
ciple often  change  places,  and  the  reflexive  pronoun  is  attached  to 
the  participle :  — 


I  made  a  mistake, 
he  made  a  mistake. 
I  have  made  a  mistake, 
he  has  made  a  mistake. 


The  Verb. 


211 


•  alegradome  he  con  la  buena 
nueva  que  me  ha  venido ;  a  la 
casa  del  Senor  iremos," 


I  rejoice  at  the  glad  tidings  that 
have  reached  me ;  we  will  go 
to  the  house  of  the  Lord. 


The  last  words  of  Fray  Luis  de  Granada,  1588. 

402.  The  reflexive  object  is  regularly  attached  to  the 
infinitive  and  gerund,  whether  the  phrase  is  affirmative 
or  negative  ;  the  pronoun-subject,  however,  is  more  often 
placed  after  these  forms  :  — 


verme  yo,  for  me  to  see  myself. 
verse  el,  for  him  to  see  himself. 
haberme  visto  yo,for  me  to  have 

seen  myself. 
haberse  visto  el,  for  him  to  have 

seen  himself. 

no  verse  el,  for  him  not  to  see 

himself. 
no  haberse  visto  &\for  him  not 

to  have  seen  himself. 


vidndome  yo,  I  seeing  myself. 
vie'ndose  el,  he  seeing  himself. 
habiendome  visto  yo,  /  having 

seen  myself. 
habiendose  visto  £1,  he  having 

seen  himself. 

no  viendose  el,  he  not  seeing  him- 
self. 

no  habiendose  visto  el,  he  not 
having  seen  himself. 


403.  The  first  person  plural  of  the  imperative  sup- 
presses the  s  of  the  verb-ending  when  the  pronominal 
object  is  attached  to  it:  — 


1 .  figuremonos       for  figuremo^nos, 

2.  entendamonos   for  entendamo^nos, 

3.  arrepintamonos  for  arrepintamo^nos, 


let  us  imagine,  [selves, 
let  us  understand  our- 
let  us  repent. 


but  no  nos  figuremo^,  entendamo^1,  arrepintamo^. 

404.  The  second  person  plural  of  the  imperative  loses 
its  d  before  the  attached  pronoun-object:  — 


1.  figurdos       for  figuraafos, 

2.  entende'os   for  entende^/os, 

3.  arrepentfos /<?r  arrepentu/os, 

Except  the  imperative  of  zrse,  —  fc/os,  go  away 


imagine  ye. 
understand  yourselves, 
repent  ye. 


212 


Form  and  Inflection. 


405.  The  reflexive  verb  may  be  strengthened  by  the 
repetition  of  the  pronoun-object  in  the  prepositional 
case  joined  to  the  adjective  mismo,  a,  or  propio,  a, 
self:  — 


yo  me  alabo  £  mi  mismo, 
ella  se  jacta  de  si  misma, 
VV.  se  burlan  de  si  mismos, 
vosotros  os  burials  de  vosotros 
mismos,  [nosotros  mismos, 
nosotros  nos  hemos  perdido  a 
tti  te  engafias  a  ti  propio, 


I  praise  myself, 
she  boasts  of  herself, 
you  laugh  at  yourselves, 
ye  laugh  at  yourselves. 

we  have  ruined  ourselves, 
thou  deceivest  thyself. 


Special  Uses  of  the  Reflexive. 

406.  Verbs  that  in  Spanish  are  permanently  reflexive, 
with  an  active  or  neuter  signification  in  English,  may, 
besides  the  personal  inflection,  be  conjugated  imper- 
sonally with  se,  itself,  the  dative  pronoun  serving  to 
distinguish  the  person  :  — 


me  figtiro, 

'  or  se  me  figdra, 

9 

'  /  imagine. 

te  figuras, 

Eft 
<W 

or  se  te  figura, 

s*> 

i 

thou  imaginest. 

se  figura, 

c 
tt> 

or  se  le  figura, 

1 

he  imagines. 

V.  se  figura, 

0 

or  se  le  figura  d  V., 

sK 

you  imagine. 

nos  figuramos, 

•1  • 

C/l 

or  se  nos  figura, 

£*> 
5 

we  imagine. 

os  figurais, 

£L 

or  se  os  figura, 

ye  imagine. 

se  figuran, 

<^> 

cf 

or  se  les  figura, 

^ 

they  imagine. 

W.  se  figuran, 

v-x 

or  se  les  figura  d  VV., 

r!" 

you  imagine. 

me  he  figurado,             or  se  me  ha  figurado,              /  have  imagined. 

te  has  figurado,              or  se  te  ha  figurado,                thou  hast  imagined. 

se  ha  figurado,               or  se  le  ha  figurado,                he  has  imagined. 

V.  se  ha  figurado,          or  se  le  ha  figurado  d  V.,      you  have  imagined. 

nos  hemos  figurado,      or  se  nos  ha  figurado,              we  have  imagined. 

os  habeis  figurado,        or  se  os  ha  figurado,                ye  have  imagined. 

se  han  figurado,             or  se  les  ha  figurado,              they  have  imagined. 

VV.  se  han  figurado,     or  se  les  ha  figurado  d  VV.,  you  have  imagined. 

The  Verb. 


213 


me  olvide, 
te  olvidaste, 
se  olvido,  etc., 

or  se  me  olvido, 
or  se  te  olvid6, 
or  se  le  olvido,  etc., 

I  forgot, 
thou  didst  forget, 
he  forgot,  etc. 

me  habia  olvidado, 
te  habias  olvidado, 
se  habia  olvidado,  etc., 

or  se  me  habia  olvidado, 
or  se  te  habia  olvidado, 
or  se  le  habia  olvidado,  etc., 

/  had  forgotten, 
thou  hadst  forgotten, 
he  had  forgotten,  etc. 

407.  In  Spanish,  the  formal  passive  is  comparatively 
little  used  at  the  present  day,  other  less  cumbersome 
constructions  being  better  adapted  to  the  genius  of  that 
language.  Hence :  — 


408.   The  passive  voice  may  be  replaced  by  the  re- 
flexive verb  used  personally  :  — 

el  libro  se  publicd, 

la  voz  se  repitid, 

su  gloria  se  ver£, 

el  dinero  se  gan6,  se  perdid, 

ellos  se  enganan  mucho, 

las  casas  se  ban  vendido, 

eso  no  se  puede  decir,  or ) 


eso  no  puede  decirse, 


the  book  was  issued, 
the  voice  was  repeated, 
his  glory  will  be  seen, 
the  money  was  won,  was  lost, 
they  are  greatly  deceived, 
the  houses  have  been  sold, 
that  cannot  be  said,  or 
you  cannot  say  that. 


a.  In  public  announcements,  the  verb  to  be  of  the 
passive  is  usually  omitted  in  English,  while,  in  Spanish, 
the  reflexive,  which  always  replaces  it  in  such  cases,  is 
given  in  full :  — 

aqui  se  habia  Espafiol, 

se  cambia  todaclase  de  moneda, 

se  compran  valores  de  la  deuda 


publica, 

se  hacen  cobros  y  pagos, 
se  confeccionan  tarjetas  y  fac- 

turas  en  el  acto, 


Spanish  (is)  spoken  here. 

all  kinds  of  coin  (are)  exchanged. 

government      securities       (are) 

bought. 

collections  and  payments  made, 
cards    and    billheads    made   up 

without  delay. 


2I4 


Form  and  Inflection. 


se  garantiza  el  trabajo, 
se  cierra  los  Domingos, 
se  prohibe  fijar  carteles, 
no    se    admiten    imposiciones 
despues  de  las  cuatro, 


work  warranted, 
closed  on  Sundays. 
1  'post  no  bills." 

no  deposits  received   after  five 
o'clock. 


409.    The  passive  voice  may  also  be  replaced  by  the 
reflexive  verb  used  impersonally  :  — 


se  dice ;  se  ha  dicho, 

se  me  engana, 

se  me  ha  enganado, 

se  le  permite ;  se  le  permitid, 

se  nos  habia  enganado, 

se  les  habra  permitido, 


it  is  said ;  it  has  been  said. 

I  am  deceived. 

I  have  been  deceived. 

he  is  allowed ;  he  was  allowed. 

we  had  been  deceived. 

they  will  have  been  allowed. 


Literally :  it  says  itself,  it  has  said  itself,  it  deceives  itself  to  me, 
it  has  deceived  itself  to  me,  etc. 

410.  The  reflexive  used  impersonally  is  a  substitute 
of  the  third  person  plural  active,  and  is  preferred  when 
a  vague  or  indirect  reference  to  persons  is  desirable. 
This  favorite  construction  has  grown  out  of  the  national 
propensity  to  equivocation  :  — 

I  am  not  understood 

(Fr.  on  ne  me  comprendpas) . 
he  was  ordered  to  go  out 


no  se  me  entiende 

(or  no  me  entienderi), 
se  le  niaiido  salir 

(or  le  mandaron  salir), 
se  me  dice 

(or  me  diceri) , 
se  me  ha  dicho 

(or  me  han  dichd) , 


(Fr .  on  lui  or  donna  desortir) . 
I  am  told 

(Fr.  on  me  dif) . 
I  have  been  told 

(Fr.  on  ni*a  dif) . 


REMARK.  —  It  is  customary  to  regard  this  se  as  an  indefinite 
subject  —  they,  you,  one  —  like  the  French  on  (Jiomme)  and  Ger- 
manic man ;  but  an  accusative  cannot  be  a  nominative,  and  the 
only  true  explanation  is  to  regard  the  verb,  as  it  is,  impersonal, 
representing  such  Latin  constructions  as  itur,  ventum  est,  invidetur 
mihi,  etc. 


The  Verb. 


21$ 


411.    So  also  in  the  redundant  construction :  — 


a"  £1  se  le  matd  a"  pedradas, 

(le  mataron  &  pedradas) , 
a  tales  hombres  se  les  engana 
fdcilmente,  [fdcilmente), 

(a  tales  hombres   enganan 
a  los  buenos  principes  no  se 
les  ha  de  perder  la  vergiienza, 
a  nadie  se  le  puede  imputar  esta 
fealdad, 


he  was  stoned  to  death, 

(they  stoned  him  to  death), 
such  men  are  easily  deceived, 

[easily). 

(they    deceive    such    men 
we  are  not  to  lose  our  respect  for 

good  princes. 

such  a  vile  action  can  be  imputed 
to  no  man. 


412.  The  following  examples  of  passive  constructions 
will  serve  to  illustrate  and  fix  the  foregoing  rules  :  — 


{soy  engafiado, 

The  sido  enganado, 

me  engafio, 

1.  -{  me  he  engafiado, 

se  me  engafia, 

[  se  me  ha  engafiado, 

f  eres  engafiado, 

{has  sido  enganado, 

2.  I  te  engafias, 

te  has  engafiado, 

[  se  te  engafia, 

se  te  ha  engafiado, 

{es  enganado, 

f  ha  sido  engafiado, 

se  engafia, 

3.  j  se  ha  engafiado, 

S 

se  le  engafia, 

[se  le  ha  engafiado, 

f  V.  es  engafiado, 

S 

{V.  ha  sido  engafiado, 

1 

3.  -j  V.  se  engafia, 

^ 

V.  se  ha  engafiado, 

sr 

[  se  le  engafia  a  V., 

1* 

se  le  ha  engafiado  a  V., 

a 

{somos  engafiados, 

>  i* 

fhemos  sido  engafiados, 

^ 

nos  engafiamos, 

JL 

1.  1  nos  hemos  engafiado, 

i' 

se  nos  engafia, 

n 

[  se  nos  ha  engafiado, 

s. 

f  sois  engafiados, 

fhabeis  sido  engafiados, 

o 
o 

2.  \  os  engafiais, 

2.  1  os  habeis  engafiado, 

[  se  os  engafia, 

[  se  os  ha  engafiado, 

f  son  engafiados, 

f  han  sido  engafiados, 

3.  -j  se  engafian, 

3.  \  se  han  engafiado, 

[  se  les  engafia, 

[  se  les  ha  engafiado, 

{VV.  son  engafiados, 

f  VV.  han  sido  engafiados, 

W.  se  engafian, 

3.  \  W.  se  han  engafiado, 

se  les  engafia  a  VV.,  J 

[se  les  ha  engafiado  a  VV.9> 

216 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Reciprocal  Verbs. 

413.  When  reflexive  verbs  in  the  plural  refer  to  two 
or  more  persons  distributively,  they  are  called  reciprocal 
verbs,  and  the  object-pronoun  is  rendered  each  other 
when  two  are  indicated,  and  one  another  if  reference  is 
made  to  several :  — 


nos  alabamos, 
os  alabais, 
se  aman, 
alabemonos, 
amaos  el  uno  al  otro, 
amaos  los  unos  d,  los  otros, 
£mense,  or  que  se  amen, 
estos  dos  hermanos  se  abra- 
zan  carinosamente, 

todos  los  individuos  de  esta 
familia  se  quieren  entrana- 
blemente. 


we  praise  each  other,  or  one  another. 

ye  praise  each  other,  or  one  another. 

they  love  each  other,  or  one  another. 

let  us  praise  one  another. 

love  each  other. 

love  one  another. 

let  them  love  each  other,  etc. 

these  two  brothers  (or  this  brother 

and  sister  [§  106])  embrace  each 

other  affectionately, 
all  the  members  of  this   family  are 

passionately  fond  of  one  another. 


414.  The  reciprocal  use  of  the  reflexive  verb  may  be 
strengthened  by  the  term  el  uno  —  el  otro,  fern,  la  una 
—  la  otra ;  los  unos  —  los  otros,  fern,  las  unas  —  las 
otras ;  or  uno  —  otro,  etc.  :  — 


consolaos  los  unos  a  los  otros 

en  estas  palabras, 
no  os  burleis  los  unos  de  los 

otros,  [con  la  otra, 

hijas,  no  os  impacienteis  la  una 
veo  que  las  dos  hemos  nacido 

la  una  para  la  otra, 
sente'monos  uno  junto  a  otro, 
nos  felicitaremos  unos  a  otros 

con  ese  motivo, 


comfort  ye  one  another  with 
these  words. 

do  not  laugh  at  (make  fun  of) 
one  another. 

children,  don't  tease  each  other. 

I  perceive  that  we  two  were  born 
for  each  other. 

let  us  sit  near  each  other. 

we  shall  congratulate  one  an- 
other on  account  of  it. 


The  Verb. 


217 


The  Impersonal  Verb. 

415.  Impersonal  verbs  are  properly  such  as  are 
employed  in  the  third  person  singular  only.  Their 
subject,  which  in  English  is  it,  cannot  be  expressed  in 
Spanish  when  an  operation  of  nature  is  described  ;  but 
otherwise,  the  neuter  ello,  it,  that,  is  occasionally 
admissible  if  intensity  or  emphasis  require :  — 


nieva;  truena;  graniza, 
Hueve;  amanece;  anochece, 

consta ;  ello  consta, 
importa ;  ello  importa, 
ello  es  que  .  .  .  , 


it  snows  ;  it  thunders ;  it  hails, 
it  rains  ;  it  dawns  ;  it  grows  dark. 

it  is  proven,  or  it  is  known, 
it  is  important,  or  it  matters, 
the  fact  is  that ...  (it  is  that . . .). 


416.  Impersonal  verbs  are  inflected  according  to  the 
conjugation  indicated  by  their  infinitive,  to  wit :  — 

417.  Nevar,  nevando,  nevado,  to  snow. 


Indicative  Mode. 

nieva,       it  snows. 
nevaba,  it  was  snowing. 
nevo,        it  snowed. 
nevara,    it  will  snow. 
nevaria,  it  would  snow. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

nieve,             it  may  snow. 
nevara,          it  might  snow. 
nevase,           it  might  snow. 
nevare,          it  should  snow. 
nevara,  etc.,  (if)  it  snowed. 

Imperative  Mode  :  —  nieve,  or  que  nieve,  let  it  snow. 

Indicative  Mode. 

ha  nevado,          it  has 
habia  nevado,   it  had 
hubo  nevado,    (when)  it  had 
habra  nevado,  it  vvill  have 
habria  nevado,  it  would  have 

snowed. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

haya  nevado,        it  may     ~\ 
hubiera  nevado,  it  might  \\^ 
hubiese  nevado,  it  might  [  §  § 
hubiere  nevado,  //  should) 
hubiera  nevado,  (if)  it  had  s. 

218  Form  and  Inflection. 

418.   Llover,  lloviendo,  llovido,  to  rain. 


Indicative  Mode. 

llueve,     it  rains. 
llovia,      it  was  raining. 
llovio,      it  rained. 
llovera,   it  will  rain. 
lloveria,  it  would  rain. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

llueva,     it  may  rain. 
Uoviera,  it  might  rain. 
lloviese,  it  might  rain. 
lloviere,  it  should  rain. 
lloviera,  (if)  it  rained. 

Imperative  Mode  :  —  Hue  va,  or  que  llueva,  let  it  rain. 

Indicative  Mode. 

ha  llovido,          it  has 
ha  hia  llovido,   it  had                  -% 
hubo  llovido,     (when)  #<£#</     g- 
habra  llovido,  it  will  have         ^ 
habria  llovido,  //  would  have 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

haya  llovido,        it  may 
hubiera  llovido,  it  might 
hubiese  llovido,  it  might 
hubiere  llovido,  it  should 
hubiera  llovido,  (if)  it  ha 

iff 

•  si 

Is 

dr. 

419.    Amanecer,  amaneciendo,  amanecido,  to  dawn. 


Indicative  Mode. 

amanece,        it  dawns. 
amanecia,      it  was  dawning. 
amanecio,      it  dawned. 
amanecera,    it  will  dawn. 
amaneceria,  it  would  dawn. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

amanezca  (374),  it  may 
amaneciera,         it  might 
amaneciese,         it  might 
amaneciere,         it  should 
amaneciera,         (if)  it  daw 

\ 

'  § 
p 

ned. 

Imperative  Mode:  —  que  amanezca,  let  it  dawn. 

420.  Verbs  that  are  naturally  impersonal  may  assume 
a  personal  signification  and  inflection  :  — 
amanecf  en  Cddiz, 


anochecimos  en  Madrid, 


it  was  morning  when  /  reached 

Cadiz. 
night  had  set  in  when  we  reached 

Madrid,  or  we  reached  Madrid 

at  night. 


The  Verb. 


219 


llovlan  palos  sobre  nosotros, 

dntes  eran  amigos ;  pero  hace  un 
ano  que  tronaron, 


blows  came  down  upon  us  in 

quick  succession. 
they  were  formerly  good  friends ; 
but  they  fell  out  boisterously  a 
year  ago. 


421.   Many  personal  verbs  are  temporarily  employed 
in  impersonal  senses  :  — 


bastar,  to  be  sufficient. 
parecer,  to  appear. 
convenir,  to  agree,  to  suit. 

baste  decir, 
no  convenla, 


basta,  it  suffices. 
parece,  it  seems. 
conviene,  it  suits,  behooves. 

let  it  suffice  to  say. 
it  was  not  expedient. 


a.    Such  verbs  may  also  be  used  in  the  third  person 
plural  as  personal  verbs  :  — 


no  bastan  explicaciones, 
las  condiciones  me  parecen  du- 
ras,  [das, 

no  me  convendran  tales  medi- 


explanations  are  not  sufficient, 
the  conditions  appear  to  me  (to 

be)  severe, 
such  measures  will  not  suit  me. 


422.  A  number  of  verbs  are  used  only  in  the  third 
persons  singular  and  plural.  Such  properly  belong  to 
defective  verbs  :  — 


acaece  —  acaecen,          ) 
acontece  —  acontecen, ) 


happens  —  happen. 


423.  The   English  impersonal  expression 
variously  rendered  in  Spanish  :  — 

424.  By  es:  — 

a.    With  adjectives,  nouns,  and  adverbs. 


'it  is  "  is 


es  cierto ;  es  tarde, 
es  precise  ;  es  menester, 
es  verdad  ;  es  mentira, 
es  de  dia ;  asi  es, 


it  is  sure ;  it  is  late, 
it  is  necessary, 
it  is  true ;  it  is  false, 
it  is  daylight ;  so  it  is. 


22O 


Form  and  Inflection. 


b.  To  denote  the  hour,  only  when  that  is  one  or  any 
of  its  divisions.  With  all  other  hours,  "  it  is  "  must  be 
expressed  by  son :  — 


es  la  una  —  la  una  y  media, 
son  las  dos  —  las  diez, 


it  is  one  —  half  past  one. 
it  is  two  —  ten  (o'clock). 


425.  By  estd,  to  denote  accidental  state :  — 
esta  oscuro ;  esta  lloviendo,         |  it  is  dark ;  it  is  raining. 

426.  By  hace  :  — 

a.   When  reference  is  made  to  the  weather  or  tem- 
perature :  — 

what  sort  of  weather  is  it? 
it  is  fine  weather, 
it  is  sunny ;  it  is  windy. ' 
it  is  cold ;  it  is  warm. 


tal  tiempo  hace? 
hace  buen  tiempo, 
hace  sol ;  hace  aire, 
hace  frio ;  hace  calor, 


b.    Idiomatically,  with  reference  to  time  :  — 
hace  ocho  dias  que  no  le  veo, 


tiempo  hace  que  tra- 
baja  V.  aqui? 


it  is  a  week  since  I  have  seen 
him  ;  i.e. ,  I  have  not  seen  him 
in  a  week. 

how  long  is  it  that  you  have  been 
working  here?  /'.*.,  how  long 
have  you  been  working  here  ? 


427.  By  hay,  with  reference  to  distance  :  — 

hay  de  aqui  al  palacio?    |  how  far  is  it  from  here  to  the 

palace? 

428.  The  English  expressions  "if  is  /,"  "if  is  thou"  "it 
is  he"  etc.,  are  given  in  Spanish  by  the  regular  inflection 
of  the  verb  "to  be"  with  the  subject-pronoun  :  — 


yo  soy ;  ttl  eres ;  el  es, 
^esella?  somos  nosotros, 
£son  ellos?  ellos  son, 


it  is  I ;  it  is  thou ;  it  is  he. 
is  it  she  ?  it  is  we. 
is  it  they?  it  is  they. 


The  Verb.  221 

a.   The  same  construction  obtains  when  a  relative 
follows :  — 


yo  soy  quien,  or  el  que, 
no  somos  nosotros  los  que, 


it  is  I  who,  or  I  am  the  one  who. 
it  is  not  we  who,  or  we  are  not 
the  ones  who. 


429.   "  It  is  better "  is  translated  by  m£s  vale,  it  is 

worth  more:  — 


mas  vale  esquivarlo, 
mas  vale  tarde  que  nunca, 
mas  vale  pajaro  en  mano  que 
buitre  volando, 


it  is  better  to  evade  it. 
(it  is)  better  late  than  never, 
a  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two 
in  the  bush. 


(literally,  a  bird  in  hand  is  better  than  a  vulture  on  the  wing.) 

IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

430.  An  irregular  verb  is  properly  one  that  deviates 
in  any  respect  from  the  inflection  of  the  regular  models, 
hablar,  comer,  and  vivir. 

REMARK.  —  There  are  a  large  number  of  irregular  verbs  in 
Spanish,  —  about  850,  including  compounds,  —  the  most  of  which, 
however,  are  mere  variations  involving  uniform  laws  of  orthography 
and  accent,  to  subserve  the  purposes  of  harmony,  and  to  satisfy  the 
national  instinct  for  vowel-expansion.  They  may  be  easily  reduced 
to  a  few  classes  with  appropriate  representatives,  to  which  the  general 
alphabetic  Index  of  irregular  verbs  refers.  Hence  the  following  defi- 
nitions of  technical  terms,  embracing  principles  of  wide  application, 
will  greatly  assist  the  learner  to  master  quickly  the  whole  subject. 

431.  Irregular  verbs  are  to  be  inflected,  according  to 
class  and  conjugation,  on  the  three  stems  —  present, 
preterit,  and  future  —  as  bases.     See  §  360. 

432.  The  original  stem  of  a  verb  is  found  by  sup- 
pressing the  characteristic  infinitive-ending.     That  of 
the  future   and   conditional  of   the   indicative   (future 
stem),  is  the  full  infinitive  itself  (§§  359;  359,  a) :  — 


222 


Form  and  Inflection. 


busc-ar,  to  look  for. 
busc-6,   he  looked  for. 


buscar-e,  I  shall  look  for. 
buscar-ia,  I  should  look  for . 


433.  In  the  regular  verb  the  original  stem  is  the 
same  throughout ;  but  in  the  irregular  verb  each  group 
of  tenses  may  have  a  distinct  form  of  the  original  stem, 
or  three  distinct  stems  :  — 


poder,  to  be  able. 
original  stem,  pod; 
present  stem,  pod,  pued; 
preterit  stem,  pud ; 
future  stem,     podr. 


ir,  to  go. 

original  stem,  i  and  va; 
present  stem,  i  and  v; 
preterit  stem,/#  (verb£?  be)*, 
future  stem,     ir. 


434.  Tonic  stems  are  such  as  have  the  primary  stress 
or  tonic  accent  upon  them  in  any  given  form  :  — 

teng-o,   I  have. 
tlen-es,  thou  hast. 
tien-e,    he  has. 
tien-en,  they  have. 
tuv-e,     I  had. 


veng-6,   I  come. 
vien-es,  thou  contest. 
vien-e,    he  comes. 
vien-en,  they  come. 
vin-e,      I  came. 


435.  Atonic  stems  are  such  as  have  but  a  secondary 
accent,  the  primary  stress  being  laid  on  the  personal 
ending :  — 


tSn-emos,  we  have. 
tSn-eis,  ye  have. 
tttv-Iste,  thou  hadst. 


vSn-Tmos,  we  come. 
vgn-is,  ye  come. 
vin-imos,  we  came. 


436.  A  stem-vowel   is  the  characteristic  vowel  in 
any  radical,  and  always  stands  nearest  to  the  infinitive 
ending :  — 

acert-ar,  adquir-ir.      |     sonre-ir.      |     recost-ar,  redargii-ir. 

437.  Strong  stems  are  those  which  are  followed  by 
endings  beginning  with,  or  consisting  of,  one  of  the 
strong  vowels  a  or  o ;  — 


The  Verb.  223 


teng-o,         I  have. 
teng-a,         /  (may)  have. 
teng-amos,  let  us  have. 
tuv-o,  he  had. 


veng-o,    I  come. 
veng-as,  thou  mayst  come. 
veng-an,  they  may  come. 
vin-o,       he  came. 


438.  Weak  stems  are  those  which  are  followed  by 
endings  beginning  with,  or  consisting  of,  one  of  the 
weak  vowels  e  or  i\  — 

ri-este  ?        dost  thou  laugh  ? 


dec-ir,         to  say,  to  tell. 
dec-imos,  we  say  —  tell. 
dic-es,        thou  sayest  —  tellest. 
dic-iendo,  saying,  telling. 


se  ri-en,         they  laugh. 
nos  re-imos,  we  laugh. 
sab-iendo,     knowing. 


439.  The  following  orthographic  changes  are  to  be 
noted :  — 

Strong  stems  ending  in  z  become  weak  stems  ending  in  c. 
«          «  «  c        «  «          «  «  qu> 

g        "  "          "  "  gu. 

<<  "  «  o-n         "  "  "  "  <yjj. 

Weak  stems  ending  in  c  become  strong  stems  ending  in  z. 

"         "  "  qu     "  "          "          "  c. 

«          t(          «  „       «  «          «  «       .    * 

««  «  «  o-u         ..  «  (f  «  0> 

440.  The  expansion  of  a  vowel  into  a  diphthong  may 
be  called  diphthongization.     In  verbs,  the  diphthong  of 
the  vowel  a  is  ai ;  that  of  ^,  ie ;  and  of  0,  ue. 

441.  The  diphthongs  zV  and  id  are  said  to  be  con- 
sonantized  when   the   first   vowel   composing   them   is 
changed  into  y  consonant,  pronounced  as  in  year. 

442.  The  diphthong  ie  is  consonantized :  — 
a.    When  it  is  initial  in  a  tonic  stem :  — 

err-ar  —  terro,  written  yerro,  but  vrt-amos  because  atonic, 
ergu-ir  —  iergp,  written  yergo,  but  ergu-fmos  because  atonic. 
ir  —  (iendo) ,  yendo,  going. 


224  Form  and  Inflection. 

b.    When  it  is  initial  in  a  verbal  ending  after  a  stem- 
vowel  ;  likewise  id  when  final  in  the  same  case  :  — 


cre-er  —  (cre-iendo} ,  creyendo. 

(cre-i6),  creyd. 

tra-er  —  (tra-iendo) ,  trayendo. 
inclu-ir  —  (inclu-iendo) ,  inclu- 
yendo. 


ca-er  —  (ca-iendo) ,  cayendo. 

(ca-io),  cay6. 

le-er  —  (le-iendo),  leyendo. 
argii-ir  —  (argii-iendo) ,  argu- 
yendo. 


443.  The  i  of  the  diphthongs  ie  and  id  is  absorbed 
by  foregoing  double  consonants  —  //,  n,  (ck  usually), 
and  j  when  it  represents  the  archaic  xy  formerly  pro- 
nounced sh :  — 


cen-ir  —  cinendo,  cifid. 
dijera,  anciently  dixera. 


taner  —  tanendo,  tand. 
trajese,  anciently  traxese. 


444.  The  diphthong  ue  is  said  to  be  aspirated  when 
it  assumes  an  //,  which  regularly  occurs  if  the  diphthong 
is  initial  and  has  the  tonic  accent :  — 


ol-er  —  ueloy  written  huelo ;  but  o\-emos,  because  atonic. 

Remarks  on  the  Present  Stem. 

445.  Tonic  stems,  whether  weak  or  strong,  are  often 
strengthened  in  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive, 
and  in  the  imperative  :  — 

a.  By  the  expansion  of  the  radical  vowel  e  into  ie, 
and  of  o  into  ue :  — 


pens-ar  —  pienso,  I  think. 
ten-er  —  tiene,  he  has. 


volv-er  — •  vuelvo,  I  return. 
mov-er  —  mueve,  he  moves. 


b.  By  the  mutation  of  the  original  stem-vowel  etoi:  — 


serv-ir  —  sirvo,  /  serve. 

sirve,  he  serves. 
but       jtfrz/imos,  we  serve. 


seg-uir  —  sigo,  I  follow. 

sigue,  he  follows. 
but       segulmos,  we  follow. 


The  Verb.  225 

446.  Strong  stems,  whether  tonic  or  atonic,  are  like- 
wise frequently  strengthened  in  the  present  indicative 
and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  imperative:  — 

a.    By  changing  the  original  stem-vowel  e  to  i :  — 


serv  —  sirva,  /  or  he  may  serve. 
sirvamos,  we  may  serve. 


seg  —  siga,  /or  he  may  follow. 
sigamos,  let  us  follow. 


b.    By  adding  a  g  to  the  original  stem  ending  in  a 
consonant,  in  the  following  verbs :  — 

as-ir  —  asg-o,  asg-a,  t seize. 


pon-er  —   pong-o,    pong-a,    / 

place. 
sal-ir  —  salg-o,  salg-a,  I  go  out. 


ten-er  —  teng-o,  teng-a,  I  have. 
val-er  —  valg-o,  valg-a,  /  am 

worth. 
ven-ir  —  veng-o,  veng-a,  I  come. 


REMARK.  —  This  g  is  the  expression  of  the  Latin  e  and  i  enounced 
with  a  consonant  power.     Thus  :  — 


valeo  —  valyo.  Span,  valgo. 
valeam  —  valya\m\%  Span,  valga. 


venio  —  venyo,  Span,  vengo. 
veniam  —  venya\m\>  Span,  venga. 


So  asgo,  Lat.  adscio ;  pongo,  Lat.  ponio  for  pono ;  salgo,  Lat. 
salio ;  tengo,  Lat.  teneo.  The  Portuguese  still  preserves  the  Latin 
y  sound,  graphically  represented  by  Ih  and  nh :  valho,  valha ;  venho, 
venha;  etc. 

c.  By  adding  a  g  to  the  diphthongized  stem  ending 
in  a  vowel,  in  the  following  verbs  :  — 

ca-er  —  caig-o,  caig-a,  I  fall.       \   tra-er  —  traig-o,  traig-a,  I  bring. 
o-ir  —  6ig-o,  6ig-a,  /  hear. 

d.  By  diphthongizing  the  medial  stem-vowel  a  into 
aiy  and   reducing   it   graphically  to  its    corresponding 
simple  vowel  (ai  =  e),  in  the  following  verbs  :  - 

cab-er  —  (coif)  quep-o  (§  13),  quep-a  (Lat.  capio,  capiam),  I  hold. 
sab-er  —  (saip)  se[p-o],  sep-a  (Lat.  sapio,  sapiam),  /  know. 
hab-er  —  (haiti)  he[b-o],  but  hay -a  (Lat.  habeo,  habeam),  / have. 

The  Portuguese  preserves  the  diphthong  in  caib-Q,  caib-z. ; 


226  Form  and  Inflection. 

e.    By  changing  the  final  stem-consonant  c  into  gy  in 


hac-er  —  hag-o,  hag-a  (Latin, 
facto,  faciam) . 


dec-ir  —  dig-o,   dig-a   (Latin, 
dico,  dicam). 


For  the  letter  z,  as  a  mode  of  euphonizing  certain  strong  stems, 
see  §  374. 

447-  The  verbs  ver,  to  see,  and  ser,  to  be,  find  their 
strong  stem  in  the  archaic  infinitives  veer  and  seer:  — 

ve-er  —  ve-o,  ve-a,  I  see.          \    se-er  • —  se-a,  I  may  be. 

448.  Atonic  sterns  usually  contain  the  original  radical 
before  weak  vowels,  and  the  strengthened  radical  or 
modified  vowel  before  strong  vowels  :  — 


sab-eis,  ye  know. 
ten-emos,  we  have. 
mor-imos,  we  live. 


sep-ais,  ye  may  know. 
teng-amos,  let  us  have. 
mur-amos,  we  may  die. 


449.    Four  verbs  are  expanded  in  the  first  person  sing- 
ular of  the  present  indicative  by  assuming  a  final  y :  — 


ser,      to  be,     ancient 
estar,  to  be, 
dar,     to  give, 
ir,        to  go. 


so ;    modern 

esto; 

do; 

vo ; 


soy,  I  am. 
estoy,  I  am. 
doy,  I  give. 
voy,  I  go. 


450.    Eight  verbs  make  their  imperative  second  per- 
son singular  in  abbreviated  forms  :  — 

valer,  to  be  worth ; 
salir,     to  go  out ; 
venir,  to  come ; 
tener,  to  have ; 
poner,  to  put,  place ; 
hacer,  to  make,  to  do ; 
decir,  to  say,  to  tell', 
ir,          to  go; 


val   and  vale, 

be  worth  ; 

no  valgas. 

sal    {for  sale)  , 

go  out  ; 

no  saigas. 

veil  (for  viene)  , 

come  ; 

no  vengas. 

ten   (for  tiene), 

have  ; 

no  tengas. 

pon  (for  pone)  , 

place  ; 

no  pongas. 

haz  (for  hace)  , 

make,  do  ; 

no  hagas. 

dl      (for  dice)  , 

say,  tell; 

no  digas. 

ve     (for  va)  , 

go; 

no  vayas. 

The  Verb. 


227 


451.  The    imperfect    indicative   is    always    regularly 
formed  from  the  original  stem,  except  in  the  following 
verbs :  — 

ir  —  iba,  I  was  going  (first  conj . ) .    |    ver  —  veia  (anc.  via) ,  /  was  see- 
ser  —  era,  /  was  (being) .  \ing. 

Tonic  Preterit  Sterne. 

452.  Fifteen  verbs  have    preterit   stems,   which  are 
tonic  in  the  past  definite  first  and  third  persons  singu- 
lar, with  the  respective  endings  e  and  o  instead  of  / —  <?, 
or  / —  id.     In  the  other  persons  and  tenses  of  this  stem, 
the  tonic  accent  is,  as  usual,  on  the  endings,  which  are 
regular.     Thus  :  — 


vine,          /  came. 
vimste,     thou  earnest. 
vino,          he  came. 
vinimos,  we  came. 
vimsteis,  ye  came. 
vinieron,  they  came. 

viniera,  f  might  come. 
viniese,  /  might  come. 
viniere,  /  should  come. 


puse,          I  placed. 
pusiste,     thou  placedst. 
puso,          he  placed. 
pusimos,  we  placed. 
pusisteis,  ye  placed. 
pusieron,  they  placed. 

pusier a,  /  might  place . 
pusiese,  /  might  place. 
pusier  e,  /  should  place. 


REMARK.  —  These  tonic  preterit  stems  have  retained  more  or 
less  distinctly  the  form  of  the  Latin  irregular  perfects  as  they  must 
have  been  popularly  employed  in  the  Iberian  peninsula.  Therefore 
the  vowels  of  the  stem  and  termination  were  attracted  or  exchanged, 
and  the  diphthongs  arising  therefrom  were  reduced  to  simple 
vowels,  according  to  the  custom  of  the  language.  For  example : 
sapui  was  attracted  to  sdupi  and  the  diphthong  changed  to  o,  — 
sope,  —  precisely  as  aurum  makes  oro,  gold.  The  modern  speech, 
since  the  close  of  the  fourteenth  century,  has  preferred  the  stem- 
vowel  u  to  o  —  supe,  tuve,  puse,  etc.  The  Portuguese  retains  the 
ancient  0,  lengthened  according  to  its  phonological  system  into  ou 
(6-u),  in  houve,  soube,  coube,  and  trouxe  (trdw-she),  which  corre- 
spond to  the  Castilian  hube,  supe,  cupe,  truje. 


228 


Form  and  Inflection. 


453.  List  of  tonic  preterit  stems,  as  found  in  the  first 
and  third  persons  singular  of  the  past  definite  indicative, 
together  with  their  origin  and  formation  :  — 


Infinitive. 

Preterit. 

First  and  third  sing. 

Old  Spanish. 

Modern  Spanish. 

LAT. 

habere 

habui,  habuit 

SP. 

haber 

hdubi,  hdubu 

hobe,  hobo 

hube,  luibo. 

AND  FOUR  BY  ANALOGY  WITH  haber:  — 

LAT. 

tenere 

(tabui,  tabuii) 

SP. 

tener 

tdubt,  tdubu 

tove,  tovo 

tuve,  tuvo. 

LAT. 

stare 

(stabui,  stabmf) 

SP. 

estar 

stdubi,  stdubu 

estove,  -ovo 

estuve,  estuvo. 

LAT. 

ambulare 

(and^bz^i,  -bwit) 

SP. 

andar 

anddubi,  -bu 

andove,  -ovo 

anduve,  anduvo. 

LAT. 

capere 

(capui,  c^pmt) 

SP. 

caber 

cdupi,  cdupu 

cope,  copo 

cupe,  cupo. 

LAT. 

sapere 

sapui,  sapuit 

SP. 

saber 

sdupi,  sdupu 

sope,  sopo 

supe,  supo. 

LAT. 

ponere 

posui,  posuit 

SP. 

poner 

pdusi,  pdusu 

pose,  poso 

puse,  puso. 

LAT. 

(potere) 

poiui,  potuit 

SP. 

poder 

pduti,  pdutu 

pode,  podo 

pude,  pudu. 

LAT. 

facere 

feet,  fecit 

SP. 

hacer 

fice,fisu 

fice,  figo 

hlce,  hlzo. 

LAT. 

venire 

veni,  vemt 

SP. 

venir 

vine,  vinu 

vine,  vino 

vine,  vino. 

LAT. 

quaerere 

(qu^^sz),  quaesivit 

SP. 

querer 

quise,  quisu 

quise,  quiso 

quise,  quiso. 

LAT. 

videre 

vidi,  vz'dz't 

SP. 

ver  (veer) 

vidiy  vidu 

vide,  vido 

vi,  vio  (regular)  . 

LAT. 

dicere 

dixi,  dixit 

SP. 

decir 

dixi,  dixu 

dixe,  dixo 

dije,  dijo. 

LAT. 

ducere 

duxi,  duxit 

SP. 

con-<\.\Lcir 

duxi,  duxu 

-duxe,  -duxo 

-duje,  -dujo. 

LAT. 

trahere 

traxi,  traxit 

SP. 

traer 

traxi,  traxu  ) 

traxe,  traxo  ) 

traje,  trajo.  | 

(anal,  with  diicere) 

truxi,  truxu  \ 

truxe,  truxo  j 

truje,  trujo.  j 

The  Verb.  229 


Future  Steins. 


454.  Ten  verbs  form  their  future  stem  by  rejecting 
the  vowel  of  the  infinitive-ending,  five  of  which  replace 
it  by  a  phonetic  d  (§  39) :  — 


caber  —  cabr-d,  cabr-ia. 

haber  —  nabr-d,  habr-ia. 

poder  —  podr-e,  podr-ia. 

querer —  querr-e',  querr-ia. 

saber  —  sabr-d,  sabr-fa. 


salir    —  saldr-e',  saldr-ia. 

valer  —  valdr-e,  valdr-ia. 

poner — pondr-d,  pondr-ia. 

tener  —  tendr-e',  tendr-ia. 

venir  —  vendr-d,  vendr-ia. 


REMARK.  —  The  three  last  stems  were  anciently  euphonized  by 
metathesis  of  the  nr,  instead  of  by  intercalating  the  orthographic 
d\  — 

poner — ponr — porn-&,  porn-ia.  }    tener  —  ttnr  —  ter^-^,  ter//-fa. 
venir  —  ve^r  —  ver^-e',  ver«-ia. 

455.  Two  verbs  form  their  future  stem  from  primitive 
infinitives  that  no  longer  -exist :  — 

decir  —  dir  —  dir-d,  dir-ia.          |    hacer  — far  —  har-e',  har-fa. 
The  latter  verb  is  from  Lat.  facgre,  Ital.  fare,  and  Yr.faire. 

In  the  following  inflections,  only  deviations  from  the  three  model 
conjugations,  hablar,  comer,  vivir,  are  printed  in  heavy  type. 

To  show  where  the  stress  falls  in  forms  of  the  verb  that  do  not 
admit  the  graphic  accent,  a  long  mark  is  placed  over  the  vowel  of 
the  tonic  syllable. 


First  Class. 

456.  The  characteristic  of  this  class  is  the  expansion 
of  the  stem-vowels  e  and  o  into  their  corresponding 
diphthongs  z>,  ue,  when  the  accent  falls  on  the  radical, 
or,  in  other  words,  when  it  is  tonic  (§§  19 ;  19,  a).  This 


230  Form  and  Inflection. 

can  only  occur  throughout  the  singular,  and  in  the  third 
person  plural,  of  the  present  indicative,  subjunctive, 
and  imperative ;  for,  in  all  other  persons  and  tenses, 
the  accent  lies  on  the  verbal  ending. 

.  E  STEMS.  —  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

457.  Pensar,  pensando,  pensado,  to  think. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  piens  (tonic),  pens  (atonic). 

PRES.  IND.    piens-o  piens-as  piens-a  pens-amos  pens-ais  piens-an. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  piens-e  piens-es  piens-e  pens-emos  pens-eis  piens-en. 

IMPERAT.      piens-a  piens-e  pens-emos  pens-ad  piens-en. 

IMPERF.         pens-aba  -abas  -aba  -abamos  -abais  -aban. 

PRETERIT  STEM. — REGULAR. 

PAST  DEF.    pens-e  -aste  -6  -amos  -asteis  -aron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  pens-ara  -aras  -ara  -aramos  -arais  -aran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  pens-ase  -ases  -ase  -asemos  -aseis  -asen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.    pens-are  -ares  -are  -aremos  -areis  -aren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

FUTURE.        pensar-e        -as          -a  -6mos  -eis  -an. 

CONDIT.         pensar-ia       -las         -fa  -famos          -fais          -fan. 

458.  Acertar,  acertando,  acertado,  to  hit  the  mark. 

PRES.  IND.  acierto  aciertas  acierta  acer tamos  acertais  aciertan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  acierte  aciertes  acierte  acertemos  acerteis  acierten. 

IMPERAT.      acierta     acierte    acertemos    acertad    acierten. 

acertaba ;   acerte,  acertara,  acertase,  acertare ;    acertar-e,  -fa. 

459.  Alentar,  alentando,  alentado,  to  encourage. 

PRES.  IND.    aliento  alientas  alienta   alentamos    alentais    alientan. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  aliente  alientes   aliente    alentemos    alenteis    alienten. 

IMPERAT.      alienta     aliente    alentemos    alentad    alienten. 

alentaba;  alente,  alentara,  alentase,  alentare ;  alentar-e",  -la. 


The  Verb.  231 

460.  Cerraj,  cerrando,  cerrado,  to  shut. 

PRES.  IND.   cierro  cierras     cierra      cerramos     cerrais    cierran. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  cierre  cierres      cierre      cerremos     cerreis     cierren. 

IMPERAT.     cierra       cierre      cerremos     cerrad     cierren. 

cerraba ;  cerre,  cerrara,  cerrase,  cerrare  ;  cerrar-e,  -fa. 

461.  Apretar,  apretando,  apretado,  to  grasp  tightly. 

PRES.  IND.   aprieto  aprietas  aprieta   apretamos  apretais  aprietan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  apriete   aprietes   apriete   apretemos  apreteis  aprieten. 

IMPERAT.     aprieta     apriete   apretemos  apretad  aprieten. 

apretaba;  aprete,  apretara,  apretase,  apretare ;  apretar-e,  -fa. 

462.  Atestar,  atestando,  atestado,  to  cram. 

PRES.  IND.    atiesto    atiestas    atiesta    atestamos    atestais    atiestan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  atieste    atiestes    atieste    atestemos    atesteis   atiesten. 

IMPERAT.      atiesta      atieste    atestemos    atestad    atiesten. 

atestaba;   ateste,  atestara,  atestase,  atestare;   atestar-e,  -fa. 

463.  Sembrar,  sembrando,  sembrado,  to  sow. 

PRES.  IND.   siembro  siembras  siembra  sembramos  sembrais  siembran . 
PRES.  SUBJ.  siembre  siembres  siembre  sembremos  sembreissiembren. 

IMPERAT.      siembra  siembre  sembremos  sembrad  siembren. 

sembraba;  sembre\sembrara,sembrase,sembrare;  sembrar-6,-ia. 

464.  Helar,  helando,  helado,  to  freeze. 

PRES.  IND.    hielo  hiclas        hiela        hclamos      helais      hielan. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  hiele  hieles        hieles      helemos      heleis      hielen. 

IMPERAT.      hiela         hiele        helemos      helad      hielen. 

helaba;  hele*,  helara,  helase,  helare;  helare,  helaria. 

Euphonic  Changes. 

465.  In  the  verb  errar,  the  stem-vowel  being  initial, 
the  vowel  i  of  the  diphthong  is  consonantized,  that  is, 
written  and  pronounced  y  consonant  (§  442,  a) :  — 


232 


Form  and  Inflection. 


466.   Errar,  errando,  errado,  to  miss. 


PRES.  IND.  yerro 
PRES.  SUBJ.  yerre 
IMPERAT.  


yerras  yerra  erramos  errais  yerran. 
yerres  yerre  erremos  erreis  yerren. 
yerra  yerre  erremos  errad  yerren. 


erraba ;   erre,  errara,  errase,  errare;    errare,  errarfa. 

467.  Verbs    of   this   class   in   -gar  and  -zar,   besides 
diphthongizing  the  stem-vowel  e,  observe   the  regular 
orthographic  changes  explained  in  §  371  :  — 

468.  Negar,  negando,  negado,  to  deny. 

PRES.  IND.    niego  niegas     niega     negamos        negais       niegan. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  niegue  niegues  niegue  neguemos  negueis  nieguen. 

IMPERAT.      niega       niegue  neguemos  negad       nieguen. 

negaba;  negue,  negaste,  etc.;  negara,  negase,  negare;   etc. 

469.  Enipezar,  empezando,  empezado,  to  begin. 

PR.  IN.  empiezo  empiezas  empieza  empezamos     empezais    empiezan. 
PR.  Sj.  empiece  empieces  empiece  empecemos  empeceis  empiecen. 

IMPER. empieza   empiece  empecemos  empezad     empiecen. 

empezaba;   empece,  empezaste,  etc.;  empezara,  empezase;   etc. 


E  STEMS.  —  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 
470.   Perder,  perdiendo,  perdido,  to  lose. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  pierd  (tonic),  perd  (atonic). 

PRES.  IND.    pierd-o    pierd-es  pierd-e  perd-emos     perd-eis    pierd-en. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  pierd-a    pierr-as  pierd-a  perd-amos     perd-ais    pierd-an. 

IMPERAT.       pier<-i-e     pierd-a  perd-amos     perd-ed     pierd-an. 

IMPERF. 


PAST  DEF.    perd-i 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  perd-iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  perd-iese 
FUT.  SUBJ.    perd-iere 


FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


perd-ia      -las  -fa  -iamos  -iais 

IT 

PRETERIT  STEM.  — REGULAR. 

-iste         -io        -imos  -isteis 

-ieras       -iera      -ieramos  -ierais 

-ieses       -iese      -iesemos  -ieseis 

-ieres       -iere     -ieremos  -iereis 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

-as  -a          -6mos  -£is 

-fas  -fa         -iamos  -iais 


-fan. 

-ieron. 
-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 


perder-e* 
perder-fa 


The  Verb. 


233 


471.   Entender,  entendiendo,  entendido,  to  understand. 

PR.  IN.  entiendo  entiendes  entiende  entendemos  entendeis  entienden. 
PR.  Sj.  entienda  entiendas  entienda  entendamos  entendais  entiendan. 

IMPER. entiende    entienda  entendamos  entended  entiendan. 

entendia;  entendi,entendiera,entendiese,  entendiere;  entender-e,  -fa. 


O  STEMS. — FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


472.    Sonar,  sonando,  sonado,  to  sound. 

X 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  suen  (tonic),  son  (atonic). 

PRES.  IND.    suen-o     suen-as  suen-a  son-amos  son-ais  suen-an. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  suen-e     suen-es  ,^uen-e  son-emos  son-eis  suen-en. 

IMPERAT.       /      suen^r  suen-e  son-emos  son-ad  suen-en, 

IMPERF.         son-abV  "abas  -aba  -abamos  -abais  -aban. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 


PAST  DEF. 

son-e 

-aste 

-6 

-amos 

-asteis 

-aron. 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

son-ara 

-aras 

-ara 

-aramos 

-arais 

-aran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

son-ase 

-ases 

-ase 

-asemos 

-aseis 

-asen. 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

son-are 

-ares 

-are 

-aremos 

-areis 

-aren. 

FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


sonar-e 
sonar-ia 


FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 
-as  -a  -emos 


-fas 


-fa 


-lamos 


473.   Costar,  costando,  costado,  to  cost. 

PRES.  IND.    cuesto  cuestas     cuesta     costamos  costais     cuestan. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  cueste  cuestes     cueste      costemos  costeis    cuesten. 

IMPERAT.      cuesta      cueste      costemos  costad    cuesten. 

costaba;  coste,  costara,  costase,  costare;  costar-e,  -fa. 


474.   Acordar,  acordando,  acordado,  to  agree. 

PRES.  IND.    acuerdo  acuerdas  acuerda  acordamos  acordais  acuerdan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  acuerde  acuerdes  acuerde  acordemos  acordeis  acuerden. 

IMPERAT.       acuerda   acuerde  acordemos  acordad  acuerden. 

acordaba;  acorde,  acordara,  acordase,  acordare;  acordar-e, -fa. 


234 


Form  and  Inflection. 


475.  Hollar,  hollando,  hollado,  to  trample. 

PRES.  IND.    huello  huellas     huella     hollamos  hollais     huellan, 

PRES.  SUBJ.  huelle  huelles     huelle     hollemos  holleis     huellen. 

IMPERAT.      huella    .  huelle     hollemos  hollad     huellen. 

hollaba ;  nolle,  hollara,  hollase,  hollare ;  hollare,  hollaria. 

476.  Volar,  volando,  volado,  to  fly. 

PRES.  IND.    vuelo  vuelas       vuela      volamos      volais      vuelan. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  vuele  vueles       vuele       volemos      voleis      vuelen. 

IMPERAT.      vuela        vuele       volemos      volad      vuelen. 

volaba ;  vole*,  volara,  volase,  volare ;  volare,  volaria. 

477.  Contar,  contando,  contado,  to  count. 

PRES.  IND.    cuento    cuentas     cuenta    contamos    centals    cuentan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  cuente    cuentes     cuente     contemos    conteis    cuenten. 

IMPERAT.       cuenta      cuente     contemos    contad     cuenten. 

contaba ;  conte,  contara,  contase,  contare  ;  contare,  contaria. 

478.  Probar,  probando,  probado,  to  prove. 

PRES.  IND.    pruebo    pruebas    prueba   probamos   probais    prueban. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  pruebe    pruebes    pruebe    probemos^  probeis    prueben. 

IMPERAT.      prueba     pruebe    probemos   probad    prueben. 

probaba;  probe,  probara,  probase,  probate;  probare,  probaria. 


Orthographic  and  Euphonic  Changes. 

479.  The  verbs  desosar,  to  separate  the  bones  from 
the  meat,  and  desovar,  to  spawn  (from  hueso,  bone,  and 
huevo,  egg},  introduce  an  h  before  the  diphthong  of  the 
present  stem :  — 

480.  Desosar,  desosando,  desosado. 

PR.  IN.  deshueso  deshuesas  deshuesa  desosamos  desosais  deshuesan. 
PR.SJ.  deshuese  deshueses  deshuese  desosemos  desoseis  deshuesen. 

IMPER. deshuesa    deshuese  desosemos  desosad  deshuesen* 

desosaba ;  desose,  desosara,  desosase,  desosare ;   desosar-e,  -fa. 


The  Verb.  235 

481.  Verbs  of  this  class  in  -car,  -gar,  and  -zar,  besides 
diphthongizing  the  stem-vowel  o,  observe  the  regular 
orthographic  changes  laid  down  in  §  371. 

482.  Trocar,  trocando,  trocado,  to  barter. 

PR.  IN.  trueco     truecas     trueca     trocamos        trocais       truecan. 
PR.  Sj.  trueque  trueques  trueque  troquemos  troqueis  truequen. 
IMPER.   -         trueca      trueque  troquemos  trocad        truequen. 
trocaba  ;  troque,  trocaste,  etc.  ;  trocara,  trocase,  trocare  ;   etc. 

483.  Rogar,  rogando,  rogado,  to  request. 

PRES.  IND.    ruego     ruegas     ruega     rogamos        rogais       ruegan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  ruegue  ruegues  ruegue  roguemos  rogueis  rueguen. 
IMPERAT.       -        ruega       ruegue  roguemos  rogad        rueguen. 
rogaba;  rogue,  rogaste,  etc.  /  rogara,  rogase,  rogare  ; 


484.  Here  belongs  the  verb  jugar  QLsLt.j0eari),  which 
follows  the  analogy  of  this  class,  with  the  stem-vowel 
u,  anciently  o  :  — 

485.  Jugar,-  jugando,  jugado,  to  play,  to  gamble. 

PRES.  IND.    juego     juegas     juega     jugamos        jugais       juegan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  juegue  juegues  juegue  juguemos  jugueis  jueguen. 
IMPERAT.      -        juega      juegue  juguemos  jugad       jueguen. 
jugaba  ;  jugue,  jugaste,  etc.  ;  jugara,  jugase,  jugare  ;  jugare,  etc. 

486.  Forzar,  forzando,  forzado,  to  force. 

PRES.  IND.    fuerzo    fuerzas   fuerza   forzamos       forzais      fuerzan. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  fuerce    fuerces    fuerce    forcemos    forceis    fuercen. 
IMPERAT.      -        fuerza     fuerce    forcemos    forzad       fuercen. 
forzaba;  force,  forzaste,  etc.;  forzara,  forzase,  forzare;   etc. 

487.  In  verbs  of  this  class  whose  stem-vowel  o  stands 
after  a  g,  the  diphthong  assumes  the  diaeresis  (tie),  ac- 
cording to  §§  17  and  32,  a  :  — 


236 


Form  and  Inflection. 


488.   Agorar,  agorando,  agorado,  to  divine  (augurare), 

PRES.  IND.    agiiero    agiieras    agticra   agoramos  agorais   agiieran. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  aguere    agueres     aguere    agoremos  agoreis   agueren. 

IMPERAT.      agiiera      aguere    agoremos   agorad   agueren. 

agoraba ;   agore,  agorara,  agorase,  agorare  ;  agorar-e,  -fa. 


O  STEMS.  —  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 
489.   Mover,  moviendo,  movido,  to  move. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  inuev  (tonic),  mov  (atonic). 

PRES.  IND.    muev-o  muev-es  muev-e  mov-emos  mov-eis  muev-en. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  muev-a  muev-as  muev-a  mov-amos  mov-ais  muev-an. 

IMPERAT.      muev-e  muev-a  mov-amos  mov-ed  muev-an. 

IMPERF.         mov-ia  -fas  Aa.  -famos        -fais        -fan. 


PAST  DEF.    mov-i 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  mov-iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  mov-iese 


PRETERIT  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 
-iste         -io 


-icras 
-ieses 


-imos 

-ieramos 

-iesemos 


-isteis  -ieron. 
-ierais  -ieran. 
-ieseis  -iesen. 


FUT.  SUBJ.    mov-iere       -ieres       -iere          -ieremos     -i6reis     -ieren. 


FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 


FUTURE. 

CONDIT. 


mover-6 
mover-ia 


-as 
-fas 


-fa 


-Imos 
-famos 


-fais 


-an. 
-fan. 


490.   Morder,  mordiendo,  mordido,  ~to  bite. 

PRES.  IND.    muerdo  muerdes  muerde  mordemos  mordeis  muerden. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  muerda  muerdas  muerda  mordamos  mordais  muerdan. 

IMPERAT.      muerde     muerda  mordamos  morded  muerdan. 

mordia;  mordi,  mordiera,  mordiese,  mordiere;   morder-6,  -fa. 


491.   Volver,  volviendo,  vuelto,  to  return. 

PRES.  IND.    vuelvo    vuelves     vuelve    volvemos   volveis    vuelven. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  vuelva    vuelvas     vuelva    volvamos    volvais    vuelvan. 

IMPERAT.        vuelve      vuelva    volvamos    volved    vuelvan. 

volvfa;  volvi,  volviera,  volviese,  volviere;  volvere",  volverfa. 


The  Verb.  237 

492.  Moler,  moliendo,  molido,  to  grind. 

PRES.  IND.    muelo    mueles     muele     molemos  moleis      muelen. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  muela     muelas     muela     molamos  molais       muelaii. 

IMPERAT.       muele       muela     molamos  moled       muelan. 

molia ;   moli,  moliera,  moliese,  moliere  ;  molere,  moleria. 

Orthographic  and  Euphonic  Changes. 

493.  The  verb  oler  assumes  an  h  before  the  diph- 
thong of  the  tonic  stem :  — 

494.  Oler,  oliendo,  olido,  to  scent,  to  smell. 

PRES.  IND.    huelo     hueles      huele      olemos          oleis  huelen. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  huela      huelas      huela      olamos          olais  huelan. 

IMPERAT.       huele        huela      olamos          oled  huelan. 

olia ;   oli,  oliera,  oliese,  olier^y  olere,  oleria. 

495.  Verbs  of  this  class  in  -cer  preceded  by  a  conso- 
nant, and  a  few  in  -ocer,   besides  diphthongizing  the 
stem-vowel  oy  observe  the  regular  orthographical  changes 
indicated  in  §  373.     See  §  374,  exception:  — 

496.  Torcer,  torciendo,  torcido,  to  twist. 

PRES.  IND.    tuerzo    tuerces    tuerce    torcemos       torceis      tuercen. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  tuerza    tuerzas    tuerza    torzamos    torzais    tuerzan. 

IMPERAT.       tuerce      tuerza    torzamos    torced       tuerzan. 

torcia;  torci,  torciera,  torciese,  torciere;  torcere,  torceria. 

497.  Cocer,  cociendo,  cocido,  to  boil,  to  bake.1 

PRES.  IND.    cuezo     cueces      cuece      cocemos        coceis       cuecen. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  cueza     cuezas      cueza     cozamos     cozais     cuezan. 

IMPERAT.       cuece        cueza      cozamos     coced        cuezan. 

cocia ;   coci,  cociera,  cociese,  cociere ;  cocere,  coceria. 

1  Cocer  means  to  boil,  to  cook,  meats,  vegetables,  tea,  etc.,  and  to  bake 
bread,  pottery,  brick.  Of  water,  it  is  preferable  to  use  hervir  (fervere).  The 
mistress,  for  example,  would  say,  el  agua  hierve ;  and  the  servant,  el  agua  estd 
cociendo.  "Boiled  meat"  is  came  cocida;  "boiling  water,"  or  "very  hot 
water,"  agua  hirviente.  "  To  boil  an  egg  "  is  pasar  un  huevo  por  agua  ;  "  boiled 
eggs,"  huevos pasados por  agua;  "  baked  clay,"  barro  cocido;  etc. 


238 


Form  and  Inflection. 


Second  Class. 

498.  This  class  embraces  verbs  of  the  third  conjuga- 
tion only,  with  the  radical  vowels  e  and  o.     The  gerund 
uniformly  belongs  to  the  preterit  system. 

In  the  present  stem,  besides  the  usual  diphthongiza- 
tion  of  the  vowels  e  and  o  when  tonic,  these  vowels 
subside  into  i  and  u  respectively  before  a  strong  termi- 
nation, whenever  the  stem  is  atonic ;  that  is,  in  the  first 
and  second  persons  plural  of  the  subjunctive,  and  in 
the  first  person  plural  of  the  imperative. 

Again,  in  the  preterit  stem,  including  the  gerund,  the 
radical  vowels  e  and  o  become  respectively  i  and  u,  as 
often  as  the  ending  that  follows  contains  the  diphthong 
ie  or  id. 

E  STEMS. 

499.  Sentir,  (sintiendo),  sentido,  to  feel,  to  perceive. 

PRESENT  STEM.  —  sieiit  (tonic),  sent  (atonic,  weak),  sint  (atonic,  strong). 

PRES.  IND.  sient-o  sient-es  sient-e  sent-Imos  sent-fs  sient-en. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  sient-a  sient-as  sient-a  sint-amos  sint-ais  sient-an. 

IMPERAT.  sient-e  sient-a  sint-amos  sent-id  sient-an. 

IMPERF.  sent-fa  -ias  -fa  -famos  -famos  -fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  — sint  (before  a  diphthong) . 

GERUND.        sintiendo. 
PAST  DEF.     sent-f 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  sint-iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  sint-iese 
FUT.  SUBJ.     sint-iere 


FUTURE. 

CONDIT. 


sentir-e" 
sentir-fa 


-iste 
-ieras 

sintio 

-iera 

sent-imos 
-ieramos 

-fsteis 
-ierais 

sintieron. 
-ieran. 

-ieses 
-ieres 

-iese 
-lire 

-iesemos 
-ieremos 

-ieseis 
-iereis 

-iesen. 
•ieren. 

FUTURE 

STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

-as 
-fas 

-a 
-fa 

-emos 
-famos 

-6is 

-fais 

-an. 
•fan. 

The  Verb. 


239 


500.  Herir,  (hiriendo),  herido,  to  strike  (with  a  weapon). 


PRES.  IND. 

hiero 

hieres 

hiere 

herimos 

hens 

hieren. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

hiera 

hieras 

hiera 

hiranios 

hirais 

hieran. 

IMPERAT. 



hiere 

hiera 

hiramos 

he  rid 

hieran. 

IMPERF. 

her-ia 

-ias 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

GERUND. 

hiriendo. 

PAST  DEF. 

her-i 

-iste 

hirio 

her-imos 

-isteis 

hirieron 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

hir-iera 

-ieras 

-iera 

-ieramos 

-ilrais 

-ieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

hir-iese 

-ieses 

-iese 

-iesemos 

-ieseis 

-iesen. 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

hir-iere 

-ieres 

-iere 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

-ieren. 

FUTURE. 

herir-e 

-as 

-a 

-emos 

-eis 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

herir-ia 

-fas 

-fa 

-iamos 

-fais 

-fan. 

a.  So  the  compounds  of  herir  (from  Lat.  haerere),  or  of  ferir 
(from  Lai.  fertre) ,  and  of  -gerir,  -jerir  (Lat.  -gerere,  -serifre). 

501.  Herir  means  to  strike  with  a  weapon,  with  intent 
to  wound  or  to  put  to  death.  Otherwise,  to  strike  is 
expressed  by  dar  un  golpe  —  dar  golpes  —  a  alguien, 

to  inflict  a  blow  —  blows  —  on  any  one :  — 


Ruben.  Conserve  yo  mi  vida, 
y  Raquel  muera  (hi^rela). 
Raquel.  \  Ay  de  mi ! 


Reuben.  Let  me  preserve  my 
life,  and  let  Rachel  &\t(he strikes). 
Rachel.  Alas  for  me  ! 


—  Tragedy  si  Rachel,  by  D.  Vicente  Garcia  de  la  Huerta,  1778. 
502.   Advertir,  (advirtiendo),  advertido,  to  observe. 


PRES.  IND. 
PRES.  SUBJ. 
IMPERAT. 
IMPERF. 
GERUND. 
PAST  DEF. 
i  IMP.  SUBJ. 
2  IMP.  SUBJ. 
FUT.  SUBJ. 
FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 

ad- 
vierto          viertes  vierte 
vierta          viertas  vierta 
vierte    vierta 

vert-fa           -ias          -ia 
advirtiendo. 
vert-i             -iste         virtio 
virt-iera       -ieras       -iera 
virt-iese       -ieses       -iese 
virt-iere       -ieres       -iere 
vertir-e"          -as           -a 
vertir-ia         -fas          -fa 

ad- 

vertimos  vertis      vierten. 

virtamos  virtais  viertan. 

virtamos  vertid      viertan. 

-iamos  -fais         -fan. 

vert-imos  -fsteis      virtieron. 

-ieramos  -ierais     -ieran. 

-iesemos  -ieseis 

-ieremos 

-emos 


-iesen. 
-iereis  -ieren. 
-eis  -an. 


-famos 


-fais        -fan. 


240 


Form  and  Inflection. 


503.   Hervir  (hirviendo),  hervido,  to  boil. 

PRES.  IND.  hiervo  hierves  hierve  hervimos  hervis  hierven. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  hierva  hiervas  hierva  hirvainos  hirvais  hiervan. 
IMPERAT.  hierve  hierva  hirvamos  hervid  hiervan. 


IMPERF. 

herv-ia 

-ias 

-fa 

GERUND. 

hirviendo. 

PAST  DEF. 

herv-f 

-iste 

hirv 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

hirv-iera 

-ieras 

-iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

hirv-iese 

-ieses 

-iese 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

hirv-iere 

-ieres 

-iere 

FUTURE. 

hervir-e 

-as 

-a 

CONDIT. 

hervir-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 


-lais 


herv-imos    -isteis 

-ieramos       -ierais 

-iesemos 

-ieremos 

-emos 

-famos 


-ieseis 
-iereis 
-eis 
-fais 


-lan. 

hirvieron, 

-ieran. 

-iesen. 

-ieren. 

-an. 

-fan. 


504.  In  the  verb  erguir,  to-  throw  back  (the  head) 
haughtily,  the  stem  being  initial,  the  vowel  i  may  be 
either  consonantized,  or  it  may  replace  the  diphthong 
altogether,  in  the  present  tenses.  The  other  changes 
are  the  same  as  in  the  model  verb  sentir:  — 


505. 

Erguir 

(irguiendo),  erguido. 

PR.  IND. 

yergo 

yergues 

yergue  l 

irgo 

irgues 

irgue     J 

•  eiguimos 

PR.  Sj. 

yerga 
irga 

yergas 
irgas 

yerga  j 
irga     J 

irgamos 

IMPERAT. 

• 

yergue 

yerga  ) 



irgue 

irga     J 

irgamos 

IMPERF. 

ergufa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

GERUND. 

irguiendo. 

PAST  D. 

erguf 

erguiste 

irguio 

erguimos 

i  IMP.  Sj. 

irguiera 

-ieras 

-iera 

-ieramos 

2  IMP.  Sj. 

irguiese 

-ieses 

-iese 

-iesemos 

FUT.  Sj. 

irguiere 

-ieres 

-iere 

-ieremos 

FUTURE. 

erguir-e 

-as 

-a 

-e"mos 

CONDIT. 

erguir-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

ergms 


f  yerguen. 
(  irguen. 

f  yergan. 
irgais       ]  I 

(  irgan. 

f  yergan. 
1  irgan. 


-fais 


-fan. 


ergufsteis  irguieron. 

-ierais  -ieran. 

-ieseis  -iesen. 

-iereis  -ieren. 

-e"is  -an. 

-fais  -fan. 


506.  Verbs  in  -quirir  which  are  derived  from  a  primi- 
tive radical  quer  (Lat.  quaerere),  have  the  usual  diph- 
thong ie  in  the  present  stem  when  tonic  ;  but  otherwise 
they  preserve  the  characteristic  i  throughout. 


The  Verb. 


241 


507.   Adquirir    (adquiriendo),    adquirido,   to  get,    to 
obtain. 

PR.  IN.  adquiero  adquieres  adquiere  adquiiimos  adquirfs  adquieren. 
PR.  Sj.  adquiera  adquieras  adquiera  adquiramos  adquirais  adquieran. 

IMPER.     adquiere    adquiera  adquiramos  adquirid  adquieraii, 

adquin'a;  adquiriendo,  adquiri,  adquiriera,  adquiriese;  etc. 


O  STEMS. 
508.   Dormir  (durmiendo),  dormido,  to  sleep. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  duerrn.  (tonic),  dorm  (atonic  weak),  clurm  (atonic  strong). 

PR.  IN.  duerm-o  duerm-es  duerm-e  dorm-imos     dorm-is      duerm-en. 
PR.  Sj.   duerm-a  duerm-as  duerm-a  durm-amos  durm-ais  duerm-an. 

IMPER.  duerm-e   duerm-a  durm-amos  dorm-id  4  duerm-an. 

IMPF.     dorm-fa     -fas  -fa  -famos  -fais  -fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  —  durm  (before  a  diphthong). 
GER.      durmiendo. 
PA.  D.    dorm-f  -iste       durmio 

i  I.  Sj.  durm-iera  -ieras  -iera 
2 1.  Sj.  durm-iese  -ieses  -iese 
Fu.  Sj.  durm-iere  -ieres  -iere 


dorm-imos  -isteis  durmieron, 

-ieramos  -ierais  -ieran. 

-iesemos  -ieseis  -iesen. 

-ieremos  -iereis  -ieren. 


FUT.       dormir-e 
COND.    dormir-ia 


FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 
-as  -a  -emos 

-fas  -fa  -famos 


-an, 

-fan. 


509.   Morir  (muriendo) ,  muerto,  to  die. 


PRES.  IND.    muero 
PRES.  SUBJ.  muera 

IMPERAT.      

IMPERF.         mor-ia         -fas 
GERUND.       muriendo. 


mueres  muere  morimos  morfs  mueren. 
mueras  muera  muramos  murals  mueran. 
muere  muera  muramos  morid  mueran. 


-fa 


-famos 


-fais 


PAST  DEF. 

mor-f 

-iste 

murio 

mor-imos 

-isteis 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

mur-iera 

-ieras 

-iera 

-ieramos 

-ierais 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

mur-iese 

-ieses 

-iese 

-iesemos 

-ieseis 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

mur-iere 

-ieres 

-iere 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

FUTURE. 

morir-e 

-as 

-a 

-emos 

-eis 

CONDIT. 

morir-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

murieron. 

-ieran. 

-iesen. 

-ieren. 

-an. 

-fan. 


242 


Form  and  Inflection. 


5io    Fodrir  and  pudrir  (pudriendo),  podrido,  to  decay. 

This  verb,  which  usually  made  the  stem-vowels  inter- 
changeable in  certain  tenses  and  persons,  has  now 
become  nearly  regular  with  u,  by  the  authority  of  the 
Spanish  Academy.  The  latest  recommendation  of  that 
body1  fixes  the  inflection  as  follows  (we  insert  the  old 
variations  between  parentheses) :  — 


PR.  IN. 

pudro 

pudres 

pudre 

j  pudrimos 

pudns      | 
)  (podHs)  \ 

pudren. 

PR.SJ. 

pudra 

pudras 

pudra 

pudramos 

pudrais 

pud  ran. 

IMPER. 



pudre 

pudra 

pudramos 

f    pudrid 
1  (podrid} 

\  pudran. 

IMPF. 

pudr-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

(podr-ia) 

(-fas) 

(-fa) 

(-iamos) 

(jiais) 

O«). 

GER. 

pudriendo. 

PA.D. 

pudrf 
(podri) 

pudriste 
(podriste) 

\  pudrio 

f  pudrimos     pudrfsteis 
1  (podrimos)  (podrisfeis) 

|  pudrieron. 

1  1.  Sj. 

pudri-era 

-ieras 

•iera 

-ieramos 

-ierais 

-ieran. 

2I.SJ. 

pudri-ese 

-ieses 

-iese 

-iesemos 

-ieseis 

-iesen. 

Fu.Sj. 

pudri-ere 

-ieres 

•iere 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

-ieren. 

FUT. 

pudrir-e 

-as 

-a 

-emos 

-eis 

-art. 

(podrir-e) 

(-*) 

(-d) 

{-emos} 

d-ezs) 

(-*); 

COND. 

pudrir-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

(J>odrir-ia)   {-ias) 

(•*•) 

(jlamos) 

(4*U) 

(-*»»). 

Third  Class. 

511.  This  class  embraces  only  verbs  of  the  third 
conjugation,  with  the  radical  vowel  e.  The  gerund 
uniformly  belongs  to  the  preterit  system. 

In  the  present  stem,  the  vowel  e  becomes  i  when  the 
radical  syllable  is  tonic,  or  atonic  strong ;  that  is, 
throughout  the  present  indicative,  subjunctive,  and  the 
imperative,  save  only  the  first  and  second  persons  plural 

1  Gramdtica  de  la  Lengua  Castellana,  por  la  Real  Academia  Espanola. 
Madrid,  1880  (published  January,  1881),  p.  132. 


The  Verb. 


243 


of  the  indicative,  and  the  second  person  plural  impera- 
tive. 

In  the  preterit  system,  the  vowel  e,  as  in  e  stems  of  the 
preceding  class,  uniformly  becomes  /,  when  the  personal 
ending  contains  a  diphthong ;  that  is,  in  the  gerund,  in 
the  third  persons  singular  and  plural  of  the  past,  definite, 
and  throughout  the  derivative  tenses. 

512.   Pedir,  (pidiendo),  pedido,  to  ask. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  pid  (tonic,  atonic  strong),  pid  (atonic  weak). 


PRES.  IND. 

pld-o 

pld-es 

pld-e 

ped-imos 

ped-fs 

pld-en. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

pid-a 

pld-as 

pid-a 

pid-amos 

pid-ais 

pld-an. 

IMPERAT. 



pid-e 

pld-a 

pid-amos 

ped-Id 

pld-an. 

IMPERF. 

ped-ia 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

GERUND. 
PAST  DEF. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  pid-iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  pid-iese 
FUT.  SUBJ.     pid-iere 


PRETERIT  STEM. — pid  (before  a  diphthong), 
pidiendo. 
ped-i 


-iste 
-ieras 

pidio 

-iera 

ped-imos 
-ieramos 

-isteis 
-ierais 

pidieron, 

-ieran. 

-ieses 

-iese 

-iesemos 

-ieseis 

-iesen. 

-ieres 

-iere 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

-ieren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 


FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


pedir-e 
pedir-ia 


-as 

-fas 


-emos 
-famos 


-an. 
-fan. 


513.   Servir,  (sirviendo),  servido,  to  serve. 

PRES.  IND. 
PRES.  SUBJ. 
IMPERAT. 
IMPERF. 
GERUND. 
PAST  DEF. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 
FUT.  SUBJ. 
FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


slrvo 
slrva 

serv-fa 
sirviendo. 

serv-f 
sirv-iera 
sirv-iese 
sirv-iere 
servir-e 
servir-fa 

sirves 
sirvas 
sirve 

-fas 

-iste 
-ieras 
-ieses 
-ieres 
-as 
-fas 

sirve 
slrva 
slrva 

-fa 

sirvio 

-iera 
-iese 
-iere 
-a 
-fa 

servimos 
sirvamos 
sirvainos 

-famos 

servimos 
-ieramos 
-iesemos 
-ieremos 
-emos 
-famos 

servfs 
sirvais 

servid 
-fais 

-isteis 
-ierais 
-ieseis 
-iereis 
-&s 
-fais 

sirven. 
slrvan. 
sirvan. 

-fan. 

sirvieron. 

-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 
-an. 
-fan. 

244 


.  Form  and  Inflection. 


Orthographic  and  Euphonic  Changes. 

514.  Verbs  of  this  class  in  -gir,  besides  modifying  the 
radical  vowel  ^,  observe  the  euphonic  changes  indicated 
in  §375:  — 

515.  Regir,  (rigiendo),  regido,  to  rule. 


PRES.  IND. 
PRES.  SUBJ. 
IMPERAT. 
IMPERF. 
GERUND. 
PAST  DEF. 
i  IMP.  SUBJ. 
2  IMP.  SUBJ. 
FUT.  SUBJ. 
FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 

rljo 
rlja 

reg-ia 
rigiendo.. 

reg-f 
rig-iera 
rig-iese 
rig-iere 
regir-e 
regir-ia 

rlges 
rljas 
rlge 

-fas 

-iste 
-ieras 
-ieses 
-ieres 
-as 
-fas 

rlge 
rlja 
rlja 

-fa 

rigio 

-iera 
-iese 
-iere 
-a 
-fa 

regimes 
rijamos 
rijamos 

-famos 

re-gimos 
-ieramos 
-iesemos 
-ieremos 
-emos 
-famos 

regfs 
rijais 

regid 
-fais 

-fsteis 
-ierais 
-ieseis 
-iereis 
-eis 
-fais 

rlgen. 
rijan. 
rljan. 

-fan. 

rigieron 

-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 
an. 
-fan. 

516.  Verbs  of  this  class  in  -guir  (gheer)  modify  the 
stem-vowel,  and  conform  to  the  euphonic  changes  laid 
down  in  §  376:  — 

Seguir,  (siguiendo),  seguido,  to  follow. 


PRES.  IND. 

sigo 

sigues 

sigue 

seguimos 

segufs 

siguen. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

siga 

siga 

siga 

sigamos 

sigais 

sigan. 

IMPERAT. 



sigue 

siga 

sigamos 

seguid 

sigan. 

IMPERF. 

seguia 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

GERUND. 

siguiendo. 

PAST  DEF. 

seguf 

-iste 

siguio 

seguimos 

-fsteis 

siguieron. 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

siguiera 

-ieras 

-iera 

-ieramos 

-ie*rais 

-ieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

siguiese 

-ieses 

-iese 

-iesemos 

-ie*seis 

-iesen. 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

siguiere 

-ieres 

-iere 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

-ieren. 

FUTURE. 

seguire 

-as 

-a 

-emos 

-^is 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

seguiria 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

517.   Verbs  of  this  class  in  the  double  consonant  -Hir, 
and  optionally  those  in  -chir,  modify  the  stem-vowel  e} 


The  Verb. 


245 


and  absorb  the  i  of  the  diphthongs  zV,  id,  contained  in 
the  gerund,  the  past  definite  third  persons  singular  and 
plural,  and  the  derivative  tenses,  according  to  §  378 :  — 


518.   Cenir,  (cinendo), 
PRES.  IND.       cino            cines 
PRES.  SUBJ.      cina          '  cinas 
IMPERAT.                            cine 
IMPERF.           ceii-fa           -fas 
GERUND.          cinendo. 
PAST  DEF.       cefi-f            -iste 
i  IMP.  SUBJ.    cin-era       -eras 
2  IMP.  SUBJ.    ciii-ese        -eses 
Fux.  SUBJ.       cin-ere        -eres 
FUTURE.           cefiir-e          -as 
CONDIT.            cefiir-fa         -fas 

cenido,  to  gird. 

cine       cefiimos 
cina      cinamos 
cina      cinamos 

-fa           -famos 

cino      cefi-imos 
-era       -eramos 
-ese       -esemos 
-ere       -eremos 

-a            -emos 
-fa           -famos 

cefiis 
cinais 

cefiid 
-iais 

-isteis 
-erais 
•eseis 
-ereis 

-eis 
-iais 

cinen. 
cinan. 

ciiia  n. 
-fan. 

cineron. 
-eran. 
-esen. 
-eren. 

-an. 
-fan. 

519.  Verbs   in  -eir  modify  the  stem-vowel  e  into  /, 
according  to  this  class,  but  they  lose  the  i  of  the  diph- 
thongs ie  and  id  throughout  the  preterit  stem  :  — 

520.  Re-ir,  (ri-endo), 

PRES.  IND.  rio  rles 

PRES.  SUBJ.  rla  rlas 

IMPERAT.  rie 

IMPERF.  re-fa  -fas 

GERUND.  ri-endo. 

PAST  DEF.  re-f  -iste 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  ri-era  -eras 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  ri-ese  -eses 
FUT.  SUBJ.  ri-ere  -eres 
FUTURE.  reir-e,  etc. 

Fourth  Class. 

521.  This  class  embraces  all  verbs  in  -uir,  including 
those  in  -guir  (not  those  in  -guir,  §  376  and  remark). 
The  gerund  uniformly  belongs  to  the  preterit  system,  as 
in  the  second  and  third  classes. 


re-ido, 

to  laugh. 

rle 

reimos 

refs 

rien. 

rla 

riamos 

rials 

rian. 

rla 

riamos 

reid 

rian. 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

rio 

re-imos 

-isteis 

rieron, 

-era 

-eramos 

-erais 

-eran. 

-ese 

-esemos 

-eseis 

-esen. 

-ere 

-eremos 

-ereis 

-eren. 

CONDIT. 

reir-fa, 

etc. 

246  Form  and  Inflection. 

In  the  present  stem  a  y  consonant  is  inserted  before 
the  ending  when  the  radical  is  tonic  (weak  or  strong), 
and  also  when  atonic  strong ;  that  is,  in  the  same  positions 
of  the  present  indicative,  subjunctive,  and  of  the  impera- 
tive, in  which  the  third  class  modifies  the  stem-vowel. 

In  the  preterit  system,  including  the  gerund,  the 
diphthongs  ie  and  id  are  consonantized  throughout 
(§§  441 ;  442,  6). 

522.   Huir,  (huyendo),  huido,  to  flee. 

PRESENT  STEMS. — hu-y  (tonic;  atonic  strong),  hu  (atonic  weak) 


PR.  IN. 

PR.  Sj. 

huyo       huyes      huye 
huya       huyas      huya 

huimos 
huyamos 

hufs 
huyais 

huyen. 

hiiyau. 

IMPER. 

huye        huya 

huyamos 

huid 

huya  11. 

IMPERF. 

hu-fa        -fas 

fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  —  hu  (with  diphthongs  consonantized)  . 

GERUND. 

huyendo. 

P.  DEF. 

hu-f            -iste 

-y6 

-imos 

-fsteis 

-yeron. 

i  IMP.  Sj. 

hu-yera    -yeras 

-yera 

-yeranios 

-yerais 

-yeran. 

2  IMP.  Sj. 

hu-yese     -yeses 

-yese 

-yesenios 

-yeseis 

-ye  sen. 

FUT.  Sj. 

hu-yere     -yeres 

-yere 

-yeremos 

-yereis 

-yeren. 

FUTURE 

STEM.  — 

REGULAR. 

FUTURE. 

huir-e         -as 

-a 

-emos 

-eis 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

huir-fa        -fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

523. 

Atribuir,  (atribuyendo),  atribuldo,  to 

ascribe. 

PR.  IN. 

atribu-yo       -yes 

-ye 

atribu-imos 

-fs 

atribu-yen. 

PR.  Sj. 

atribu-ya       -yas 

-ya 

atribu-yamos 

-yais 

atribu-yan. 

IMPER. 

-ye 

•ya 

atribu-yamos 

-Id 

atribu-yan. 

IMPERF. 

atribu-fa         -fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

GERUND. 

atribuyendo. 

P.  DEF. 

atribu-i           -Iste 

-y6 

-irnos 

-fsteis 

-yeron. 

i  IMP.  Sj. 

atribu-yera  -yeras  -yera 

-yeramos 

-yerais 

-yeran. 

2  IMP.  Sj. 

atribu-yese   -yeses 

-yese 

-yesenios 

-yeseis 

-yesen. 

FUT.  Sj. 

atribu-yere   -yeres 

-yere 

-yeremos 

-yereis 

-yeren. 

FUTURE. 

atribuir-e        -as 

-a 

-emos 

-eis 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

atribuir-ia       -fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

The  Verb.  247 

524.  Instituir,  (instituyendo),  instituldo,  to  establish. 

PRES.  IND.  institu-yo      -yes      -ye      institu-imos      -is  institu-yen. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  institu-ya      -yas      -ya      institu-yamos  -yais      institu-yan. 

IMPERAT.     -ye        -ya      institu-yamos -Id          institu-yan. 

IMPERF.        institu-fa       -fas        -fa        -famos  -fais        -fan. 

GERUND,      instituyendo. 

PAST  DEF.   institu-f         -iste      -yo      -imos  -fsteis      -yeron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  institu-yera  -yeras  -yera  -yeramos        -yerais  -yeran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  institu-yese  -yeses  -yese  -yesemos        -yeseis  -yesen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.  institu-yere  -yeres  -yere  -yeremos        -yereis  -yeren. 
FUTURE.       instituir-6      -as         -a         -emos  -eis         -an. 
CONDIT.       instituir-fa     -fas        -fa        -famos  -fais        -fan. 

525.  Verbs  in  -gtiir  lose  the  diaeresis  as  often  as  they 
admit  the  y  consonant :  — 

526.  Argiiir,  (arguyendo),  argiildo,  to  discuss. 

PR.  IN.  argu-yo      -yes      -ye  argii-imos        -fs  argu-yen. 

PR.  Sj.  argu-ya      -yas      -ya  argu-yamos  -yais      argu-yan. 

IMPER.  -ye        -ya  argu-yamos  argii-id  argu-yan. 

IMPRF.  argil-fa          -fas        -fa  -famos  -fais        -fan. 

GER.      arguyendo. 

P.  DEF.  argii-f  -iste       argu-yo  argii-imos        -fsteis     argu-yeron. 

1  I.  Sj.  argu-yera  -yeras  -yera  -yeramos       -yerais  -yeran. 

2  I.  Sj.  argu-yese  -yeses  -yese  -yesemos        -yeseis  -yesen. 
Fu.  Sj.  argu-yere  -yeres  -yere  -yeremos        -yereis  -yeren. 
FUT.      argiiir-e         -as         -a  -emos  ^-eis         -an. 
COND.   argiiir-fa       -fas        -fa  -famos  -fais        -fan. 


Fifth  Class. 

527.  This  class  embraces  those  verbs  that  have 
irregular  preterit  systems  derived  from  the  Latin  by 
attraction,  with  the  tonic  accent  on  the  radical  in  the 
first  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  past  definite. 
The  present  and  future  stems  are  generally  irregular. 


248 


Form  and  Inflection. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 
528.   Andar,  andando,  andado,  to  go  (indefinitely). 


PRES.  IND.    ando 
PRES.  SUBJ.  ande 

IMPERAT.      

IMPERF.         and-aba 


PRESENT  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

andas          anda        andamos  andais 

andes          ande        andemos  andeis 

anda  ande        andemos  andad 

-abas  -aba         -abamos  -abais 


andan. 
anden. 
anden. 
-aban. 


PRETERIT  STEM.  —  anduv  (§452). 

PAST  DEF.    anduve       anduviste  anduvo  anduv-imos  -isteis  -ieron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  anduv-iera       -ieras  -iera  -ieramos         -ierais  -ieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  anduv-iese        -ieses  -iese  -iesemos         -ieseis  -iesen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.    anduv-iere        -ieres  -iere  -ieremos         -iereis  -ieren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 
FUTURE.        andar-e,  etc.  CONDIT.     andar-ia,  etc. 


a.  Andar  is  a  general  undefined  going,  expressing  manner  or 
state ;  tr,  a  going  in  a  specific  direction,  or  for  a  definite  purpose. 
Of  inanimate  objects  and  animals,  andar  is  used ;  of  persons,  ir. 
Ir  £,  followed  by  an  infinitive,  means  to  be  going  to,  to  be  about  to:  — 


andar  de  Ceca  en  Meca,1  to  go 

from  Dan  to  Beersheba. 
andar  vagando  por  todas  partes, 

to  go  roaming  all  over. 
andar  de  prisa  —  despacio,  to  go 

fast  —  slow. 

andar  a"  gatas,  to  go  on  all  fours. 
el  reldj  no  anda ;  esta  parado,  the 

watch  don't  go ;  it  has  stopped. 
el  caballo  anda  bien,  the  horse 

travels  well. 
la  tierra  anda,  the  earth  moves. 


ir  de  Madrid  a  Sevilla,  to  go  from 
Madrid  to  Seville. 

ir  al  teatro  —  a"  la  compra,  to  go 
to  the  play  —  to  market. 

ir  de  un  recado,  to  go  of  an  er- 
rand. 

e'l  va  de  ministro  £  tal  parte,  he 
goes  as  a  minister  to  such  a 
place,  [to  take  a  short  walk. 

voy  a  dar  un  paseito,  I  am  going 

<ique'  me  va  V.  a  dar?  what  are 
you  going  to  give  me  ? 


i  The  Ceca  of  C6rdova,  originally  a  Mint  (Arab,  d&r  as-sikka),  was 
the  central  oratory  for  pilgrims  in  the  western  caliphat,  corresponding  to  the 
ca'aba  of  Mecca  in  that  of  Bagdad. 


The    Verb. 


249 


SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

529.    Caber,  cabiendo,  cabido,  to  be  contained  in,  (en), 
to  hold. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  — quep  (strong,  §  446,  rf),  cab  (weak). 

PRES.  IND.     quepo       cabes        cabe        cabemos         cabeis  caben. 

PRES.  SUBJ.   quepa      quepas    quepa   quepamos   quepais  quepan. 

IMPERAT.       cabe         quepa   quepamos   cabed  quepan. 

IMPERF.          cab-ia        -ias  -ia  -famos  -fais  -fan. 


PRETERIT  STEM.  — cup  (§  452). 

PAST  DEF.     cupe        cupiste  cupo      cup-imos  -isteis 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  cup-iera   -ieras         -iera       -ieramos  -ierais 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  cup-iese   -ieses         -iese        -iesemos  -ieseis 
FUT.  SUBJ.     cup-iere    -ieres        -iere        -ieremos  -iereis 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  cabr  (§  454). 

FUTURE.        cabr-e        -as          -a  -emos  -&s 

CONDIT.         cabr-ia       -ias         -ia  -famos  -fais 


-icron. 
-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 


a.  The  use  of  caber  (from  the  Latin  capgre,  to  take}  is  anomalous, 
in  that  it  reverses  the  English  order  of  subject  and  object,  and  is 
construed  with 'the  preposition  en.     Thus:   En  esta  sala  caben 
quinientas  personas,  this  hall  holds  five  hundred  persons,  —  liter- 
ally, "five  hundred  persons  hold  in  this  hall  ";  no  cabe  mas  en 
esta  vasija,  this  vessel  will  not  hold  any  more,  —  literally,  "  no  more 
holds  in  this  vessel."     In  this  sense  of  material  capacity,  eager,  with 
the  English  construction,  may  be  substituted ;   as,  esta  sala  coge 
quinientas  personas ;   esta  vasija  no  coge  mds. 

b.  Caber  signifies  also  moral  capacity  in  the  sense  of  to  be  capable 
of;  as,  no  cabe  en  €\  tal  infamia,  he  is  not  capable  of  such  baseness ; 
todo  cabe  en  fulano,  so  and  so  is  capable  of  anything  \  no  cabe  ma's, 
there  is  no  room  for  more,  or  **  that  caps  the  climax,"  —  the  latter 
meaning  also  expressed  in  Spanish  by  no  faltaba  mas. 

c.  Cabe  is  used  impersonally  in  the  sense  of  "it  is  possible"; 
negative,  "  there  is  no  —  possible"  :  si  cabe,  if  it  is  possible,  if  it 
may  be-,  no  cabe  duda,  there  is  no  possible  doubt. 


2S0 


Form  and  Inflection. 


530.   Hacer,  haciendo,  hecho,  to  make,  to  do   (Lat. 

J  '          PRESENT  STEMS.  —  hag  (strong,  §  446,  *),  hac  (weak). 

PRES.  IND.    hago 
PRES.  SUBJ.  haga 

IMPERAT.      

IMPERF.        hacfa 

PAST  DEF.    hlce 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  hiciera  hicieras    hiciera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  hiciese    hicieses     hiciese 
FUT.  SUBJ.    hiciere 


FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


har-e 
har-fa 


haces  hace 

hagas         haga 

haz(§  450)  haga 

hacfas          hacia  -famos 

PRETERIT  STEM.  — hie  (§  452). 

hiciste  hlzo  (§14)  hiclmos 
-ieramos 
-iesemos 

hicieres     hiciere        -ieremos 
FUTURE  STEM.  —  har  (§  455). 

-as  -a  -emos 

-fas  -ia  -famos 


hacemos      haceis     hacen. 
hagamos  haga  is  hagan. 
hagamos  haced     hagan. 
iais 


-isteis 
-ierais 
-ieseis 
-iereis 

-eis 
-iais 


-leron. 
-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 


satis- 

faces            face 

facemos       faceis      facen. 

fagas         faga 

fagamos  fagais  fagan. 

face  or  faz  faga 

fu  games  faced      fagan. 

-fas              -fa 

-famos         -iais        -fan. 

ficiste        fizo 

ficlmos     -fsteis     -ieron. 

-ieras           -iera 

-ieramos      -ierais     -ieran. 

-ieses           -iese 

-iesemos     -ieseis     -iesen. 

-ieres           -iere 

-ieremos     -iereis     -ieren. 

CONDIT. 

faria,  etc. 

531.  Satisfacer,  satisfaciendo,  satisfecho,  to  satisfy. 

satis- 

PRES.  IND.    fago 
PRES.  SUBJ.  faga 

IMPERAT.      

IMPERF.         facia 
PAST  DEF.    fice 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  ficiera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  ficiese 
FUT.  SUBJ.    ficiere 
FUTURE.        fare,  etc. 

532.  Foder,  (pudiendo),  podido,  to  be  able. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  pued  (tonic,  §  445,  a},  pod  (atonic,  §  435). 

PRES.  IND.  puedo  puedes  puede  podemos  podeis  pueden. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  pueda  puedas  pueda  podamos  podais  puedanc 

IMPERAT.  

IMPERF.  pod-ia  -fas  -fa  -iamos  -iais  -fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM. —  pud  (§  452). 
GERUND.       pudiendo. 

PAST  DEF.    pnde       pudlste  pudo  pud-imos  -isteis  -ieron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  pud-iera    -ieras  -iera  -ieramos     -ierais  -ieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  pud-iese     -ieses  -iese  -iesemos     -ie*seis  -iesen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.    pud-iere    -ieres  -iere  -ieremos     -ie*reis  -ieren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  — podr  (§  454). 
FUTURE.        podr-6    -as,  etc.        CONDIT.    podr-fa      -fas,   etc. 


The  Verb. 


251 


a.  Poder  is  one  of  the  so-called  modal  verbs,  and  signifies  may 
(might},  can  (could) *  denoting  physical  or  moral  possibility,  per- 
mission, and  a  possible  contingency:  — 


no  puedo  hacerlo, 
no  hemos  podido  efectuarlo, 
"  ,;se  puede  pasar? 
no  se  puede  seguir  adelante, 
podra  ser ;  pudo  ser, 


I  cannot  do  it. 

we  could  not  bring  it  about. 

may  one  (I)  come  in? 

you  can't  go  on. 

it  may  be ;  it  might  have  been. 


533.   Poner,  poniendo,  puesto,  to  put,  to  place. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  — pong  (strong,  §  446,  6),  pon  (weak). 

PRES.  IND.   pongo      pones  pone      ponemos       poneis  ponen. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  ponga      pongas         ponga  pongamos  pongais  pongan. 

IMPERAT.      pon  (§  450)  ponga  pongamos  poned  pongan. 

IMPERF.        pon-ia        -fas  -fa          -famos  -fais  -fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  — pus  (§  452). 

PAST  DEF.   puse         pusiste        puso     pus-imos      -fsteis  -ieron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  pus-iera    -ieras  -iera      -ieramos        -ierais  -ieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  pus-iese    -ieses              -iese       -iesemos        -ieseis  -iesen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.   pus-iere    -ieres             -iere      -ieremos        -iereis  -ieren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  — pondr  (§  454). 

FUTURE.       pondr-e  -as         -a          -emos  -eis  -an. 

CONDIT.       pondr-fa          -fas         -fa          -famos  -fais  -fan. 


a.  Poner  may  be  accompanied  by  the  prepositions  en,  sobre,  or 
encima  de,  to  signify  "  to  put "  or  "  set  on  "  a  surface  or  the  outside 
of  anything.  "To  place"  or  "put  in"  the  inside  of  anything  is 
expressed  by  meter  en.  The  synonym  of  both  verbs  is  colocar :  — 


poner  (or  colocar)  el  sombrero 

en  la  mesa, 

meter  la  costura  en  el  cajon, 
colocarla  en  su  sitio, 


to  put  the  hat  on  the  table. 

to  put  the  sewing  in  the  drawer, 
to  put  it  in  its  place. 


b.  Ponerse,  to  set  one's  self  about,  to  begin,  followed  by  d  and  an 
infinitive ;  to  put  on  a  garment,  gloves,  etc.  Meterse  en,  to  get 
one^s  self  into,  to  meddle  with  :  — 


252 


Form  and  Inflection. 


se  puso  a*  cantar  y  a*  bailar, 

me  pongo  la  levita, 

se  ha  metido  en  Honduras, 

no  se  ineta  V.  en  los  negocios 
ajenos, 


he  began  to  sing  and  to  dance. 

I  put  on  the  frock-coat. 

he  has  got  into  straits  —  ' '  gone 
beyond  his  depth." 

do  not  meddle  with  other  peo- 
ple's business. 


534.   Querer,  queriendo,  querido,  to  will,  to  wish. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  quier  (tonic),  quer  (atonic). 

PRES.  IND.     quiero       quieres     quiere    queremos     quereis  quieren. 

PRES.  SUBJ.    quiera       quieras    quiera    queramos     querais  quieran. 

IMPERAT.        quiere      quiera    queramos     quered  quieran. 

IMPERF.          quer-ia        -las             -fa            -lamos          -lais  -fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  — quis  (§452). 

PAST  DEF.      qulse         quislste    quiso      quis-imos  -isteis  -ieron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.   quis-iera      -ieras        -iera         -ieramos  -ierais  -ieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.   quis-iese      -ieses        -iese         -iesemos  -ieseis  -iesen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.      quis-iere      -ieres        -iere         -ieremos  -iereis  -ieren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  — querr  (§  454). 

FUTURE.          querr-e         -as  -a         -emos  -eis          -an. 

CONDIT.          querr-ia        -fas  -fa        -iamos          -lais         -Ian. 

a.   Querer,  as  a  verb  of  mode,  denotes  will,  inclination,  in  the 
meanings  to  will,  to  be  willing,  to  wish :  — 

^  quiere  V.  leer  esta  carta? 

no  quiso  hacer  lo  que  yo  le  pro- 

puse, 
el  muchacho  querla  jugar,  mas 

su  compafiero  no  quiso, 


will  you  read  this  letter? 
he  would  not  do  what  I  suggest- 
ed. 

the  boy  wanted  to  play,  but  his 
s-     mate  was  not  willing  to. 


b.  When  will,  would,  signify  future  time,  or  a  condition,  the 
appropriate  tense  must  be  used:  — 

when  will  you  come  to  see  me  ? 
I  would  come  soon,  if  I  had  time. 


vendra  V.  a  verme? 
vendria  pronto,  si  tuviese  tiempo, 


c.   Querer  signifies  also  to  like,  to  love,  to  be  fond  of:  — 
el  padre  quiere  £  sus  hijos,  |   the  father  is  fond  of  his  children. 


The  Verb.  253 

535.   Saber,  sabiendo,  sabido,  to  know  (things). 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  sep  (strong),  sab  (weak). 


PRES.  IND.  se  (§  446,  d)  sabes 

PRES.  SUBJ.  sepa  sepas 

IMPERAT.  -  sabe 

IMPERF.  sab-ia  -las 


sabe  sabemos  sabeis  saben. 

sepa  sepamos  sepals  sepan. 

sepa  sepamos  sabed  sepan. 

-ia  -famos  -fais  -fan. 


PRETERIT  STEM.  — sup  (§  452). 

PAST  DEF.      siipe  supiste      supo    sup-imos  -fsteis 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.    sup-iera          -ieras         -iera      -ieramos  -ierais 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.    sup-iese          -ieses         -iese      -iesemos  -ieseis 
FUT.  SUBJ.      sup-iere          -ieres         -iere      -ieremos  -iereis 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  sabr  (§  454). 

FUTURE.          sabr-e  -as  -a          -emos  -eis 

CONDIT.  sabr-ia  -fas  -fa         -famos  -fais 


-ieron. 
-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 


a.  Saber  is  to  know  things,  objects  of  thought;  conocer 
(§  374,  £),  to  know  persons,  and  to  be  acquainted  with  things, 
objects  of  thought :  — 


lo  s6 ;  no  quiero  saberlo,  / 
know  it]  f  do  not  want  to 
know  it. 

^sabe  V.  su  leccion?  la  s6  de 
memoria,  do  you  know  your 
lesson  f  I  know  it  by  heart. 

yo  ya  sabfa  lo  que  quiso  averi- 
guar,  I  knew  what  he  wanted 
to  find  out. 


le  conozco;  no  quiero  cono- 
cerle,  /  know  him ;  I  do  not 
wish  to  know  him. 

^conoceV.  este  libro?  lo  co- 
nozco, are  you  acquainted 
with  this  book  ?  I  am. 

conozco  mi  deber,  y  sabrd  des- 
empenarlo,  /  know  my  duty, 
and  shall  find  means  to  dis- 
charge it. 


b.    Can  (could")  is  always  rendered  by  saber  instead  of  poder, 
when  it  means  to  know  how:  — 


sabe  hablar  Castellano, 

yo  s6        ) 

,    \  hacer  eso, 
yo  puedo ) 


he  can  speak  Spanish. 

I  can  (intellectual  possibility)  i  .      . 

I  can  (physical possibility)      \ 


254 


Form  and  Inflection. 


536.   Tener,  teniendo,  tenido,  to  have,  to  possess. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  teng  (strong),  tien  (tonic  weak),  ten  (atonic  weak). 
PRES.  IND.    tengo       tienes          tiene     tenemos        teneis       tienen. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  tenga      tengas         tenga   tengamos   tengais   tengan. 

IMPERAT.       ten  (§450)  tenga   tengamos    tened       tengan. 

IMPERF.         ten-fa        -fas  -fa          -famos  -fais 


-fas  -ia          -iamos 

PRETERIT  STEM.  —  tuv  (§  452). 
tirviste    tuvo     tuv-imos 
-ieras         -iera       -ieramos 
-ieses         -iese       -iesemos 
-ieres         -iere       -ieremos 


-isteis 
-ierais 
-ieseis 
-iereis 


-fan. 

-ieron. 
-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 


PAST  DEF.    tnve 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  tuv-iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  tuv-iese 
FUT.  SUBJ.    tuv-iere 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  tendr  (§  454). 
FUTURE.        tendr-e          -as  -a  -emos 

CONDIT.         tendr-ia        -fas          -fa          -iamos 


a.  Tener  was  formerly  much  used  as  an  auxiliary  verb,  but  at 
present  it  is  limited  to  certain  verbs  in  certain  locutions  not  easy  to 
define.  The  student  will  do  well  to  confine  himself  to  haber,  till 
experience  and  observation  serve  to  guide  him  surely :  — 


tengo  entendido  que  .   .   . 
lo  tiene  averiguado  ya, 

un  proyecto, 


I  have  learned  that  .... 
he  has  ferretted  it  out  already, 
they  have  a  plan  in  mind. 


537.   Traer,  trayendo  (§  442,  b),  traido,  to  bring. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  traig  (strong),  tra  (weak). 

PR.  IN.   traigo      traes         trae         traemos          traeis  traen. 

PR.  Sj.   traiga      traigas  traiga  traigamos  traigais  traigan. 

IMPER.    trae          traiga   traigamos   traed  traigan. 

IMPF.      tra-ia         -fas  -fa  -iamos  -fais  -fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  —  traj  (§  452). 

P.  DEF.  traje        trajiste  trajo     traj-imos      -isteis  -eron(§443). 

i  I.  Sj.   traj-era     -eras      -era        -eramos       -erais  -eran. 

2 1.  Sj.   traj-ese     -eses      -ese        -esemos        -eseis  -esen. 

Fu.  Sj.  traj-ere     -eres      -ere        -eremos       -ereis  -eren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

FUT.       traer-e         -as          -a  -emos  -eis  -an. 

COND.    traer-fa       -fas         -fa  -fames  -fais  -fan. 


The  Verb. 


255 


a.  The  preterit  stem  truj  is  now  obsolete  as  a  literary  form, 
although  it  is  still  heard,  like  most  Castilian  archaisms,  among 
rustic  people.  Its  inflection  is  precisely  like  the  prevailing  form  :  — 
PAST  DEF.  truje  trujiste  trujo  truj-imos  -isteis  -eron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  truj -era    -eras    -era     -eramos     -e*rais      -eran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  truj-ese    -eses     -ese      -esemos      -eseis      -esen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.    truj-ere    -eres    -ere      -eremos      -ereis      -eren. 

THIRD  CONJUGATION. 
538.   Conducir,  conduciendo,  conducido,  to  conduct. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  conduzc  (strong,  §  374,  ^),  conduc  (weak). 


con- 

PRES.  IND.    duzco 
PRES.  SUBJ.  duzca 

IMPERAT.      

IMPERF.         ducfa 


con- 

duces       duce      ducimos        duel's        ducen. 
duzcas  duzca  duzcamos  duzcais  dnzcan. 
duce  .       duzca  duzcamos  ducid       dnzcan. 
-fas  -fa         -famos          -lais          -fan. 


PRETERIT  STEM.  —  conduj  (§452). 

PAST  DEF.     duje         dujiste  dujo     duj-imos      -isteis  -eron(§443). 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  duj-era  -eras      -era      -eramos      -erais  -eran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  duj-ese    -eses       -iese      -esemos      -eseis  -esen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.    duj-ere  -eres       -ere      -eremos      -ereis  -eren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

FUTURE.        ducir-e      -as  -a          -emos  -eis  -an. 

CONDIT.         ducir-ia     -fas  -ia         -famos  -iais          -fan. 

a.   Ducir  (Lat.  duc2re),  to  lead,  is  not  in  use,  as  a  simple  verb, 
since  the  close  of  the  fifteenth  century. 

539.   Decir,  diciendo,  dicho,  to  say,  to  tell. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  — dig  (strong),  die  (tonic  weak),  dec  (atonic  weak). 


PRES.  IND. 
PRES.  SUBJ. 
IMPERAT. 
IMPERF. 

PAST  DEF. 
i  IMP.  SUBJ. 
2  IMP.  SUBJ. 
FUT,  SUBJ. 

digo 
diga 

decfa 

dije 
dij-era 
dij-ese 
dij-ere 

dices      dice 
digas      diga 
di({  450)  diga 
-fas           -fa 

PRETERIT  STEM, 
dijiste    dljo 
-eras      -era 
-eses       -ese 
-eres      -ere 

decimos 
digamos 
digamos 

-famos 

,-dij  (§452). 
dij-imos 
-eramos 
-esemos 
-eremos 

dec  is 
digais 

decid 
-fais 

-isteis 
-erais 
-eseis 
-ereis 

dicen. 
digan. 
digan. 

-fan. 

-eron(§443) 
-eran. 
-esen. 
-eren* 

256 


Form  and  Inflection. 


FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


dlr-e 
dir-fa 


FUTURE  STEM.  —  dir  (§  455). 
-as  -a          -emos  -eis 


-las 


-a 
-fa 


-lamos 


-lais 


-an. 

-fan. 


a.  The  special  form  diz,  they  say,  seems  to  be  a  contraction  of 
the  Latin  dicitur  (dictt-w,  dist,  like  moz-Q  from  must-us).     It  is  a 
quaint  sort  of  a  synonym  for  se  dice  or  dicen  :  — 

diz  que  ese  labrador  es  rico,     |    they  say  that  farmer  is  rich. 

b.  Like  decir,  are  inflected  all  the  compounds,  such  as  antedecir, 
contradecir )  desdecir,  entredecir,  interdecir,  predecir,  save  only  in 
the  imperative  second  singular,  which,  in  these,  is  generally  dice, 
instead  of  di.     In  bendecir  and  maldecir,  the  variations  are  more 
numerous,  as  will  appear  by  the  inflection  of  the  first.     The  latest 
edition  of  the  Academy's  grammar  makes  all  compounds  of  decir 
follow  the  inflection  of  bendecir  in  the  imperative  and  in  the  future 
stem  ;  but  this  use  is  not  constant  either  in  literature  or  in  conversa- 
tion. 

540.   Bendecir,  bendiciendo,  bendecido,  (bendito),  to  bless. 

This  verb  and  its  contrary,  maldecir,  to  curse,  differ  from  the 
simple  decir,  in  the  past  participle,  the  imperative  second  singular, 
and  in  the  future  stem  only.  Thus  :  — 


ben- 

ben- 

PRES.  IND. 

digo 

dices 

dice 

decimos 

decfs 

dicen. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

diga 

digas 

diga 

digamos 

digais 

digan. 

IMPERAT. 



dice 

diga 

digamos 

decid 

digan. 

IMPERF. 

decfa 

-ias 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

PAST  DEF. 

dije 

dijiste 

dijo 

dij-imos 

-fsteis 

-eron. 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

dij-era 

-eras 

-era 

-eramos 

-erais 

-eran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

dij-ese 

-eses 

-ese 

-esemos 

-eseis 

-esen. 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

dij-ere 

-eres 

-ere 

-eremos 

-e*reis 

-eren. 

FUTURE. 

decir-& 

-as 

-a 

-emos 

-els 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

decirAz. 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

a.  The  irregular  past  participles  bendito  and  maldito  are  used 
little  as  such,  save  in  a  few  expressions,  as :  bendito  seas,  blessings 
on  thee ;  maldito  sea,  confound  him  —  literally,  mayest  thou  be 
blessed,  may  he  be  accursed. 


The   Verb. 


541.    Venir,  (viniendo),  venido,  to  come. 


257 


PRESENT  STEMS.  —  veng  (strong),  vien  (tonic  weak),  ven  (atonic  weak). 

PRES.  IND.   vengo  vienes        viene  venimos       venis        vienen. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  venga  vengas       venga  vengamos  vengais  vengan. 

IMPERAT.     ven (§450)  venga  vengamos  venid       vengan. 

IMPERF.        ven-fa  -ias  -fa  -lamos          -fais          -fan. 


GERUND. 

viniendo 

PRETERIT  STEM.  —  vin  (§453). 

PAST  DEF. 

vine 

vinlste 

vino 

'  vin-imos 

-fsteis 

-ieron. 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

vin-iera 

-ieras 

-iera 

-ieramos 

-ierais 

-ieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

vin-iese 

-ieses 

•iese 

-iesemos 

-ieseis 

-iesen. 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

vin-iere 

-ieres 

-iere 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

-ieren. 

FUTURE  STEM. 

—  vendr  (§  454). 

FUTURE. 

vendr-e 

-as 

-a 

-emos 

-eis 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

vendr-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

Sixth  Class. 

542.  This  class  embraces  a  few  verbs  not  easily  redu- 
cible to  any  of  the  foregoing. 

FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

543.  Dar,  dando,  dado,  to  give. 


PRESENT 

STEM.  —  d  REGULAR. 

PRES.  IND. 

doy(§449)das 

da 

damos 

dais 

dan. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

de 

des 

de 

demos 

deis 

den. 

IMPERAT. 



da 

de 

demos 

dad 

den. 

IMPERF. 

daba 

dabas 

daba 

dabamos 

dabais 

daban. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  —  d  (second  conjugation). 

PAST  DEF. 

di 

diste 

dio 

dimos 

disteis 

dieron. 

i  IMP.  SUBJ, 

diera 

dieras 

diera 

dieramos 

dierais 

dieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

diese 

dieses 

diese 

diesemos 

dieseis 

diesen. 

FUT.  SUB. 

diere 

dieres 

diere 

dieremos 

diereis 

dieren. 

FUTURI 

i  STEM.— 

REGULAR. 

FUTURE. 

dar-6 

-as 

-a 

-6mos 

-6is 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

dar-ia 

-{as 

-fa 

-lamos 

-{ais 

-fan. 

258 


Form  arid  Inflection. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION. 
544.   Caer,  cayendo  (§  442,  b)y  caldo,  to  fall. 

PRESENT  STEMS. — caig  (strong,  §  446,  c),  ca  (weak). 


PRES.  IND. 

caigo 

caes 

cae 

caemos 

caeis 

caen. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

caiga 

caigas 

caiga 

caigamos 

caigais 

caigan, 

IMPERAT. 



cae 

caiga 

caigamos 

caed 

caigan. 

IMPERF. 

ca-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.- 

-  REGULAR 

(but  see  §  442, 

*>. 

PAST  DEF. 

caf 

caiste 

cayo 

ca-imos 

-fsteis 

-yeron. 

i  IMP.  SUBJ. 

ca-yera 

-yeras 

-yera 

-yeramos 

-yerais 

-ye  ran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 

ca-yese 

-yeses 

-yese 

-yesemos 

-yeseis 

-yesen. 

FUT.  SUBJ. 

ca-yere 

-yeres 

-yere 

-yeremos 

-yereis 

-yeren. 

FUTURE 

STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

FUTURE. 

caer-e 

-as 

-a 

-emos 

-eis 

-an. 

CONDIT. 

caer-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

545.  Placer,  placiendo,  placido,  to  please. 


PRES.  IND.  place. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  plazca  (plegue). 

IMPERAT.  plegue  (plega). 

IMPERF.  placfa. 

PAST  DEF.  plugo  (placio). 


1  IMP.  SUBJ.  pluguiera  (placiera) . 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  pluguiese  (placiese). 
FUT.  SUBJ.    pluguiere  (placiere). 
FUTURE.        placera. 

CONDIT.        placerfa. 


a.  The  impersonal  verb  placer  is  now  mostly  archaic,  except 
in  ejaculations.  Otherwise,  it  is  replaced  by  querer,  to  wish,  to 
please ;  gustarle  a  uno,  and  parecerle  a  uno,  to  please,  to  suit, 
any  one :  — 


\  plegue  A  Dios  que  se  salve  ! 
i  pluguiera  a  Dios  que  jama's  le 

hubieses  visto  ! 
vendrds  cuando  te  pluguiere, 
si  d  V.  le  place, 
si  le  gusta  a"  V., 
si  d  V.  le  parece, 
si  V.  quiere, 


God  grant  he  may  be  saved ! 
would  God  you  had  never  seen 

him  ! 
you  will  come  when  you  please. 

if  you  please,  or  if  you  like. 


The  Verb. 


259 


546.  The  compounds  of  placer  are  conjugated  like  nacer  (§  374, 
b)  ;  that  is,  they  are  regular  throughout,  except  in  the  present  stem, 
when  they  are  euphonized  by  the  intercalation  of  a  z  with  strong 
vowel-endings :  — 


Complacer,  complaciendo,  complacido,  to  oblige. 

com-  com- 

plazco    places       place       placemos        placeis       placen. 

plazcas  plazca  plazcamos  plazcais  plazcan. 
plazca  plazcamos  placed       plazcan. 


PRES.  IND. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  plazca 

IMPERAT.      place 

IMPERF.         placia  -fas  -fa 

PAST  DEF.    placi  -iste  -io 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  placi  era  -ieras  -ier; 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  placiese  -ieses  -ies< 
FUT.  SUBJ.    placiere  -ieres  -ier< 
FUTURE.        placer-e  -as  -a 
CONDIT.         placer-fa  -fas  -fa 


-lamos 

-lais 

-lan. 

-imos 

-isteis 

-ieron. 

-ieramos 

-ierais 

-ieran. 

-iesemos 

-ieseis 

-iesen. 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

-ieren. 

-emos 

-eis 

-an. 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

547.   Valer,  valiendo,  valido,  to  be  worth. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  valg  (strong,  §  446,  b} ,  val  (weak) . 

PRES.  IND.    valgo        vales  vale        valemos         valeis  valen. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  valga       valgas      valga    valgamos    valgais  valgan. 

IMPERAT.      val^^^/vale    valga    valgamos    valed  valgan. 

IMPERF.         val-ia         -fas  -ia  -famos  -fais  -lan. 


-ieron. 
-ieran. 
-iesen. 
-ieren. 


PRETERIT  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

PAST  DEF.     val-i  -iste  -io  -imos  -isteis 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  val-iera      -ieras          -iera        -ieramos  -ierais 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  val-iese      -ieses          -iese        -iesemos  -ieseis 
FUT.  SUBJ.    val-iere      -ieres          -iere        -ieremos  -iereis 

FUTURE  STEM. — valdr  (§  454). 

FUTURE.        valdr-e         -as  -a  -emos  -€is 

CONDIT.        valdr-ia        -fas         -ia  -famos  -fais 


a.   So  also  the  reflexive  verb  valerse,  to  avail  one's  self  of  (de), 


to  take  advantage :  — 

me  valgo,     te  vales,     se  vale, 

se  vale  de  este  recurso  para 
enganar  y  estafar  a  la  gente 
sencilla, 


nos  valemos,     os  valeis,  etc. 

he  takes  advantage  of  this  expe- 
dient to  deceive  and  defraud 
simple  people. 


260 


Form  and  Inflection. 


548.   Ver,  viendo,  visto,  to  see. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  ve  (strong),  v  (weak). 


PRES.  IND.          veo 

ves 

ve 

vemos 

veis 

ven. 

PRES.  SUBJ.         vea 

veas 

vea 

veamos 

veais 

vean. 

IMPERAT. 

ve 

vea 

veamos 

ved 

vean. 

IMPERF.  (§451)  ve-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

PRETERIT  STEM.  — v  REGULAR. 
PAST  DEF.  vi  viste         vio  vimos  visteis        vieron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.         viera        vieras       viera        vieramos       vierais       vieran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.         viese         vieses       viese        viesemos        vieseis        viesen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.       -  viere         vieres       viere        vieremos        viereis        vieren. 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 
FUTURE.  ver-e,  etc.  CONDIT.  ver-fa,  etc. 

a.  Ver  was  formerly  written  and  pronounced  veer  (from  the 
Latin  videre) ,  and  was  regular  in  the  present  indicative  and  sub- 
junctive, but  still  irregular  in  the  imperfect.  Thus:  — 


veo 

vees 

vee 

(veemos) 

(veeis) 

veen. 

vea 

veas 

vea 

veamos 

veais 

vean. 



vee 





veed. 

via 

vias 

via 

vfamos 

viais 

vian. 

In  the  past  definite  first  and  third  persons  singular,  the  forms 
vide,  vido,  from  the  Latin  vidi,  vidit,  were  used. 

549.  Like  ver  are  inflected  all  its  own  compounds ;  those  in 
veer,  as  well  as  all  simple  verbs  in  -eer,  like  creer,  leer,  poseer, 
etc.,  are  regular  throughout,  save  that  the  diphthongs  ie  and  id 
must  always  be  consonantized,  according  to  §  442,  b :  — 

a.   Pro  veer,  proveyendo,  proveido,  or  pro  visto,  to  provide. 


PRES.  IND. 
PRES.  SUBJ. 
IMPERAT.  . 
IMPERF. 
PAST  DEF. 
i  IMP.  SUBJ. 
2  IMP.  SUBJ. 
FUT.  SUBJ. 
FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 

proveo 
provea 

prove-ia 
prove-i 
prove-yera 
prove-yese 
prove-yere 
proveer-e 
proveer-ia 

provees 
proveas 
provee 
-fas 
-iste 
-yeras 
-yeses 
-yeres 
-as 
-fas 

provee 
provea 
provea 
-fa 

-y6 
-yera 
-yese 
-yere 

-a 
-fa 

proveemos 
proveamos 
proveamos 
-famos 
-imos 
-yeramos 
-yesemos 
-yeremos 
-emos 
-fames 

proveeis 
proveais 
proveed 
-fais 
-isteis 
-yerais 
-yeseis 
-yereis 
-eis 
•fais 

proveen. 
provean. 
provean. 
-fan. 
-yeron. 
-ye  ran. 
-yesen. 
-yeren. 
-an. 
•{an. 

The  Verb. 


261 


b.   Creer 

PRES.  IND. 
PRES.  SUBJ. 
IMPERAT. 
IMPERF. 
PAST  DEF. 
i  IMP.  SUBJ. 
2  IMP.  SUBJ. 
FUT.  SUBJ. 
FUTURE. 

,  creyendo 

creo 
crea 

cre-fa 

cre-yera 

cre-yese 
cre-yere 
creer-e,  etc. 

(§442, 
crees 
creas 
cree 
-fas 
-iste 
-yeras 
-yeses 
-yeres 

b),  creido,  to  believe. 
cree        creemos         creeis 
crea        creamos         creais 
crea       creamos         creed 
-fa          -famos           -fais 
-yo        -imos             -fsteis 
-yera    -yeramos    -yerais 
-yese     -yesemos     -yeseis 
-yere     -yeremos     -yereis 
CONDIT.  creer-fa,  etc. 

creen. 
crean. 
crean. 
-fan. 
-yeron 
-yeran 
-yesen 
-yeren 

• 

c.   Poseer,  poseyendo,  poseldo,  to 

PRES.  IND.  poseo  posees 

PRES.  SUBJ.  posea          poseas 
IMPERAT.  posee 

IMPERF.  pose-fa        -fas 

PAST  DEF.  pose-f          -Iste 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  pose-yera  -yeras 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  pose-yese  -yeses 
FUT.  SUBJ.  pose-yere  -yeres 
FUTURE.  poseer-e,  etc. 


ildo,  to  possess. 
posee     poseemos 
posea     poseamos 
posea     poseamos 
-fa         .  -famos 
-y6         -Imos 
-yera    -yeramos 
-yese     -yesemos 
-yere     -yeremos 
CONDIT.  poseer-fa, 

poseeis 
poseais 
poseed 
-fais 
-fsteis 
-yerais 
-yeseis 
-yereis 
etc. 

poseen. 
posean. 
posean. 
-fan. 
-yeron. 
-yeran. 
-yesen. 
-yeren. 

550.  Yacer,  yaciendo,  yacido,  to  lie  (Latjacere). 

fyazcol 

PRES.  IND.   ]  yazgo  \  yaces         yace  yacemos        yaceis       yacen. 

[yago    J 

fyazca  yazcas     yazca  yazcamos  yazcais  yazcan. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  <!  yazga  yazgas    yazga  yazgamos  yazgais  yazgan. 

[yaga     t  yagas       yaga  yagamos     yagais     yagan. 

IMPERAT.        yace,  or  yaz  yaced 

yacfa;  yaci,  yaciera,  yaciese,  yaciere;  yacer-e",  -fa. 

THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

551.  Asir,  asiendo,  asido,  to  lay  hold  of. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  — asg  (strong),  as  (weak). 

PRES.  IND.      asgo          ases          ase  aslmos  asfs  asen. 

PRES.  SUBJ.     asga         asgas      asga       asgamos     asgais     asgan. 

IMPERAT.        ase  asga       asgamos     asid          asgan. 

asfa ;  asi,  asiera,  asiese,  asiere ;  asire,  asirfa. 


262 


Form  and  Inflection. 


552.   Ir,  yendo  (§  442,  a),  ido,  to  go  (definitely). 


PRES.  IND.    voy(§  449)  vas  va  vamos         vais 

PRES.  SUBJ.  vaya  vayas  vaya  vayamos    vayais 

IMPERAT.      ve(§45o)  vaya  vamos        id 

IMPERF.        iba(§45i)  ibas  iba  ibamos       ibais 

PAST  DEF.    fui  fuiste  fue  fuimos        fuisteis 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  fuera  fueras  fuera  fueramos  fuerais 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  fuese  fueses  fuese  fuesemos   fueseis 
FUT.  SUBJ.    fuere  fueres  fuere  fueremos  fuereis 
FUTTTRE.        ir-e  -as  -a  -emos  -eis 
CON    "**.        ir-fa  rfas  -fa  -famos  -fais 


van. 

vayant 

vayan. 

iban. 

fueron. 

fueran. 

fuesen. 

fueren. 

-an. 

-Ian. 


a.     .rse,  yendose,  idose,  to  go  away,  to  go. 


PRES.  IND. 
PRES.  SUBJ. 
IMPERAT. 
IMPERF. 
PAST  DEF. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ. 
FUT.  SUBJ. 
FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


me  voy 
me  vaya 

me  iba 
me  fui 
me  fuera 
me  fuese 
me  fuere 
me  ire 
me  iria 


te  vas       se  va 
te  vayas  se  vaya 
vete          vayase 
te  ibas      se  iba 
te  fuiste  se  fue 
te  fueras  se  fuera 
te  fueses  se  fuese 
te  fueres  se  fuere 
te  iras       se  ira 
te  irias     se  iria 


nos  vamos 
nos  vayamos 
vamonos 
nos  ibamos 
nos  fuimos 
nos  fueramos 
nos  fuesemos 
nos  fueremos 
nos  iremos 
nos  iriamos 


os  vais 
os  vayais 
fdos(§404) 
os  ibais 
os  fuisteis 
os  fuerais 
os  fueseis 
os  fuereis 
os  ireis 
os  iriais 


se  van. 
se  vayan. 
vayanse. 
se  iban. 
se  fueron . 
se  fueran . 
se  fuesen. 
se  fueren. 
se  iran. 
se  irian. 


553.   Oir,  oyendo  (§  442,  b\  oido,  to  hear. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  — oig  (strong),  oy  (tonic  weak),  o  (atonic  weak). 


PRES.  IND. 

oigo 

oyes 

oye 

oimos 

01S 

oyen. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

oiga 

oigas 

oiga 

oigamos 

oigais 

oiga  n. 

IMPERAT. 



oye 

oiga 

oigamos 

oid 

oigan. 

IMPERF. 

o-ia 

-fas 

-ia 

-famos 

-famos 

-ian. 

PRETERIT  STEM. — o  (diphthongs  ze,  id,  consonantized). 

PAST  DEF.    01  olste          oyo         oimos  oisteis  oyeron. 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  oyera     oyeras     oyera     oyeramos  oyerais  oyeran. 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  oyese     oyeses     oyese      oyesemos  oyeseis  oyesen. 
FUT.  SUBJ.    oyere     oyeres     oyere      oyeremos  oyereis  oyerenc 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 

FUTURE.        oir-e  -as  -a  -emos  -eis  -an. 

CONDIT.        oir-ia         -fas          -fa  -famos  -fais  -fan. 


The  Verb. 

L. 

554.    Salir,  saliendo,  salido,  to  go  out. 

PRESENT  STEMS.  —  salg  (strong),  sal  (weak). 


263 


PRES.  IND. 

salgo 

sales 

sale 

salimos 

salfs 

salen. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

saiga 

saigas 

saiga 

salgamos 

salgais 

salgan 

IMPERAT. 



sal 

saiga 

salgamos 

salid 

salgan 

IMPERF. 

sal-fa 

-fas 

-fa 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

PAST  DEF.  sal-f 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  sal-iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  sal-iese 
FUT.  SUBJ.  sal-iere 


FUTURE. 
CONDIT. 


PRETERIT  STEM.  —  REGULAR. 
-iste  -io  -imos 

-ieras  -iera  -ieramos 
-ieses  -iese  -iesemos 
-ieres  -iere  -ieremos 

FUTURE  STEM.  —  saldr  (§  454) . 
saldr-e         -as          -a  -emos 

saldr-fa        -fas         -fa  -famos 


-fsteis 
-ierais 
-ieseis 
-iereis 


-icron. 
-ieran. 

-io    n. 
-ier?  . 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

555.  The  following  verbs  are  used  only  in  those  forms 
of  which  the  personal  ending  begins  with  an  2,  including, 
however,  the  future  :  — 

despavorir,     regular. 
embair,  regular. 

empedernir,  like  servir. 
garantir,         regular. 
manir,  regular. 


abolir, 
aguerrir, 
arrecirse, 
aterirse, 
desmarrirse, 

regular, 
like  herir. 
like  herir. 
like  herir. 
regular. 

Examples. 
a.   Abolir,  aboliendo,  abolido,  to  abolish. 

PRES.  IND.  

IMPERAT.  

IMPERF.  abol-fa  -fas  -fa 

PAST  DEF.  abol-i  -iste  -io 

1  IMP.  SUBJ.  abol-iera  -ieras  -iera 

2  IMP.  SUBJ.  abol-iese  -ieses  -iese 
FUT.  SUBJ.  abol-iere  -ieres  -iere 
FUTURE.  abolir-e  -as  -a 
CONDIT.  abolir-fa  -fas  -fa 


abol-imos 

-is 



abol-id 

-famos 

-fais 

-imos 

-fsteis 

-ieramos 

-ierais 

-iesemos 

-ieseis 

-ieremos 

-iereis 

-emos 

-eis 

-famos 

-fais 

-fan. 

-ieron. 

-ieran. 

-iesen. 

-ieren. 

-an. 

-fan. 


264  Form  and  Inflection. 

b.   Aguerrir,  aguirriendo,  aguerrido,  to  exercise  in  war. 

PR.  IN.  aguerr-imos  -is  

IMPER.  aguerr-id        

IMPF.     aguerr-ia  -fas  -fa  -famos  -fais  -ian. 

PA.  D.    aguerr-i  -iste     aguirrio  aguerr-imos  -fsteis    aguirrieron. 

I  I.  Sj.  aguirr-iera  -ieras  -iera  -ieramos  -ierais  -ieran. 

2 1.  Sj.  aguirr-iese  -ieses  -iese  -iesemos  -ieseis  -iesen. 

Fu.  Sj.  aguirr-iere  -ieres  -iere  -ieremos  -iereis  -ieren. 

FUT.       aguerrir-e  -as  -a  -emos  -eis  -an. 

COND.    aguerrir-fa  -fas  -fa  -famos  -fais  -fan. 

556.  The  verb  raer,  to  erase,  is  now  replaced  by  rayar, 
which  is  regular.     The  original  form  is,  however,  met 
with  occasionally,  conjugated  like  caer.     Thus  :  — 

raigo  and  rayo,         raes,         rae,  raemos,     raeis,        raen. 

raiga  and  ray  a,  etc. 

ra-ia;    raf,  raiste,  rayo,  etc.;   rayera,  rayese,    rayere,  etc. 

557.  Roer,  to  gnaw,  has  the  following  forms  :  — 

roo,  roigo,  and  royo ;    roes,    roe,  etc. 

roa,  roiga,  and  roya ;    roas,  roigas,  and  royas ;    etc. 

a.    Corroer,  to  corrode,  makes  corroe  —  corroen  in  the  indicative 
present,  and  corroa  —  corroan  in  the  subjunctive. 

558.  Many  verbs  are  used  only  in  the  third  persons 
singular  and  plural  of  certain  tenses  (see  also  §  422) :  — 

a.  Aplacer,  to  please  (obsolete)  :  — 

aplace  —  aplacen.  |  aplacfa  —  aplacfan. 

b.  Ataner,  to  appertain :  — 

atafie  —  atafien.  atafiia  —  atafifan. 


aquien  lo  de  yufo  en  efta  nfa 
carta  contenido  atafie  /  o 
ataner  puede, 


to  whom  appertaineth  or  may 
appertain  what  followeth  in 
this  our  letter. 


—  Law  for  the  expulsion  of  the  Jews  from  Spain,  A.D.  1492. 


The  Verb. 
c.    Concernir,  concerniendo,  concernido,  to  concern. 


265 


concierne  —  conciernen. 
concierna  —  conciernan. 

concernia  —  concerman. 
concernio  —  concernieron. 


concerniera  —  concernieran. 
concerniese  —  concerniesen. 
concerniere  —  concernieren. 
concernira,  etc. ;  all  little  used. 


559.  The  verb  soler,  to  be  accustomed  to  (past  parti- 
ciple solido)  has  in  common  use  only  the  following 
forms  :  — 


PRES. 
"  IMPERF. 


suelo 

solia 


sueles 

solias 


suele 

solia 


solemos 
soliamos 


soleis 
soliais 


suelen. 

solfan, 


IRREGULAR    PAST    PARTICIPLES. 

560.  Past  participles  are  said  to  be  irregular  when 
they  do  not  end  in  -ado  or  -ido,  like  the  primitive  models 
//tf^/-ado,  com-ido,  viv-i&o.  The  irregularity  proceeds 
from  the  original  Latin  form,  more  or  less  contracted 
and  modified  (classic  and  post-classic),  and  is  found 
even  with  verbs  that  are  otherwise  regular  in  Spanish. 


561.  Regular  verbs  in  Spanish  that  have  an  irregular 
past  participle  are  the  following,  together  with  their 
compounds  :  — 


abrir,  to  open ; 

entreabrir,  to  half-open; 

cubrir,  to  cover] 

descubrir,  to  discover  ; 

encubrir,  to  conceal ; 

escribir,  to  write ; 

circunscribir,         to  circumscribe  ; 

inscribir,  to  register  ; 

prescribir,  to  prescribe  ; 

proscribir,  to  proscribe  ; 

imprimir,  to  print ; 


abierto  (L.  apertus),  opened. 

entreabierto,  half-opened. 

cubierto  (L.  co-opertus\covered. 

descubierto,  discovered. 

encubierto,  concealed. 

escrito  (L.  scriptus),  written. 

circunscrito,  circumscribed. 

inscrito,  registered. 

prescrito,  prescribed. 

proscrito,  proscribed. 

impreso  (L.  impressus},  printed. 


266 


Form  and  Inflection. 


562.  Irregular  verbs  in  Spanish  that  have  an  irregular 
past  participle  are  the  following,  together  with  their 
compounds :  — 


decir,  to  say,  to  tell; 

contradecir,  to  gainsay; 

desdecir,  to  unsay; 

interdecir,  to  prohibit ; 

predecir,  to  foretell; 

hacer  (obs.  facer)  ,to  make,  to  do; 

contrahacer,  to  falsify  ; 

deshacer,  to  undo  ; 

rehacer,  to  do  over; 

satisfacer,  to  satisfy; 

morir,  to  die ; 
poner,  to  put,  to  place  ; 


componer, 

deponer, 

disponer, 

exponer, 

imponer, 

oponer, 

proponer, 

suponer, 


to  mend; 
to  lay  down  ; 
to  dispose; 
to  set  forth; 
to  deposit; 
to  oppose  ; 
to  propose  ; 
to  suppose; 


solver  (obs.),  to  solve ; 

absolver,  to  absolve  ; 


disolver, 
resolver, 
ver,  to  see ; 
entrever, 
prever, 
rever, 


to  dissolve  ; 
to  resolve  ; 

to  get  a  glimpse 
to  foresee  ;  [of; 
to  review  ; 


volver,  to  turn  to  ret^trn ; 

devolver,  to  give  back  ; 

envolver,  to  wrap  up  ; 

revolver,  to  turn  over  ; 


dicho  (L.  dictus),  said,  told. 

contradicho,  gainsaid. 

desdicho,  unsaid. 

interdicho,  prohibited. 

predicho,  foretold. 

hecho  (L,.factus),  made,  done. 

contrahecho,  falsified. 

deshecho,  undone. 

rehecho,  done  over. 

satisfecho,  satisfied. 

muerto  (L.  mort\u\us),  died. 
puesto  (L.  pos[jt~\tus) ,  put. 


compuesto, 

depuesto, 

dispuesto, 

expuesto, 

impuesto, 

opuesto, 

propuesto, 

supuesto, 


mended, 
laid  down, 
disposed, 
set  forth, 
deposited, 
opposed, 
proposed, 
supposed. 


suelto  (L.  sol\yf\tus) ,  solved. 

absuelto,  absolved. 

disuelto,  dissolved. 

resuelto,  resolved. 

visto  (L.  vistus  for  msus) ,  seen. 

entrevisto,  got  a  glimpse 

previsto,  foreseen,    [of. 

revisto,  reviewed. 

vuelto  (L.  vol\yt~\tus),returned. 

devuelto,  given  back. 

envuelto,  wrapped  up. 

revuelto,  turned  over. 


563.  The  verbs  bendecir,  to  bless,  and  maldecir,  to 
curse,  have  the  regular  past  participles  bendecido,  mal- 
decido,  although  compounds  of  decir.  The  ancient 
past  participles  bendito,  maldito,  are  now  used  as 


The  Verb. 


267 


adjectives,  save  only  when  a  wish  or  desire  in  the  form 
of  an  exclamation  is  to  be  expressed  :  — 

God  hath  blessed  him  and  all 

his  house, 
let  no  one  say  he  is  accursed  of 

Cxod. 

blessed  be  thou  among  women ! 
may  they  all  be  accursed  ! 
holy  water ;  a  blessed  alms. 


Dios  le  ha  bendecido  a  el  y  a 

toda  su  casa, 
nadie  diga  que   es  maldecido 

de  Dios,  [jeres! 

j  bendita  seas  tii  entre  las  mu- 
j  sean  malditos  todos  ellos ! 
agua  bendita;  una  bendita  li- 

mosna, 

a.    "  Blessed,"  throughout  the  Scriptures,  is  rendered  by  bien- 
aventurado  when  it  represents  the  Hebrew  dsharim,  and  the  Greek 


blessed  is  the  man  that  walketh 
not  in  the  counsel  of  the  un- 
godly ! 


jbienaventurado  el  varon  que 
no  anda  en  consejo  de  malos  ! 


564.  Bienquerer,  to  esteem,  and  malquerer,  to  abhor, 
have  the  regular  past  participles  bienquerido,  mal- 
querido,  but  are  more  commonly  employed  with  ser  in 
the  ancient  forms  bienquisto,  malquisto :  — 


es  bienquisto  de  sus  vecinos, 
no  es  malquisto  de  ellos, 


he    is    much    esteemed   by   his 

neighbors, 
he  is  not  hated  by  them. 

a.  These  two  verbs  are  oftener  used  as  separable,  and  thus  we 
say:  les  queremos  bien,  we  are  very  fond  of  them;  no  la  quiso 
mal,  he  did  not  hate  her. 

565.  Freir,  to  fry,  and  its  compounds,  have  two  past 
participles,  freido  and  frito,  either  of  which  may  be 
used  with  haber ;  but  with  ser  and  estar  it  is  more 
common  to  employ  the  latter  form :  — 

have  they  not  fried  the  eggs 


ffreido 


;  no  han  \  _  \  todavia  los  huevos  ? 

[  into    j 


los  huevos  ya  estdn  fritos, 


yet? 
the  eggs  are  fried  now. 


268 


Form  and  Inflection. 


566.  Injerir,  to  graft,  has  the  regular  past  participle 
injerido  with  haber  and  ser,  and  the  form  injerto  in 
other  relations  without  an  auxiliary:  — 


fueron  quebradas  (las  ramas) 
para  que  yo  fuese  injerido, 

mi  padre  me  decia  que  era  Espa- 

fiol  transplantado  en  Italiano, 

y  Gallego  enjerto  en  Romano, 

—  Estebanillo,  1646. 


(the  branches)  were  broken  off 
that  I  might  be  grafted  in. 

my  father  told  me  I  was  a  Span- 
iard transplanted  into  an  Ital- 
ian, and  a  Gallician  grafted 
on  to  a  Roman. 


a.  The  orthography  of  injerir,  instead  of  ingerir,  is  sustained 
both  by  the  etymology  of  the  word  and  the  old  form  of  writing  it. 
Enxerir  (pronounced  ensherir)  came  from  inserttre,  and  not  inge- 
rere,  the  s  medial  regularly  passing  over  into  sh ;  old  Spanish,  #, 
and  modern,  /.  The  Academy,  however,  recognizes  only  ingerir ', 
an  untenable  form. 


567.  Matar,  in  its  proper  sense  of  to  kill,  referring 
to  persons,  has  the  irregular  past  participle  muerto, 
like  morir ;  but,  in  the  figurative  senses,  involving  the 
idea  of  harassing,  worrying,  putting  one  out  of  patience, 
and,  as  a  reflexive  verb,  as  well  as  in  its  proper  sense, 
referring  to  animals,  it  is  regular  —  matado  :  — 


dlguien  ha  muerto  {morir) , 
dlguien  le  ha  muerto  (matar) , 
me  ha  matado  con  sus  chismes, 

dice  que  yo  he  matado  la  vaca, 
el  se  ha  muerto  (morir se), 
£1  se  ha  matado  (mat arse) , 


some  one  has  died  (is  dead). 

some  one  has  killed  him. 

he  worried  me  to  death  with  his 

gossip. 

he  says  that  I  killed  the  cow. 
he  has  died  (he  died), 
he  has  committed  suicide. 


568.  Oprimir,  to  oppress,  and  suprimir,  to  suppress, 
have  the  regular  past  participles  oprimido,  suprimido, 
and  occasionally  the  irregular  forms  opreso  and 
supreso,  although  the  latter  do  not  often  occur:  — 


The  Verb. 

se  ha  suprimido  El  Imparcial, 
la  obra  fue  suprimida, 


269 


"  The  Impartial'1  has  been  sup- 
pressed. 
j    the  work  was  suppressed. 


569.  The  verb  prender  in  the  sense  of  to  arrest  a 
person,  has  two  participles,  prendido  and  preso  (Lat. 
prenstis}.  With  haber,  either  form  may  be  used  ;  but 
with  ser  and  estar,  it  is  customary  to  prefer  preso :  — 


han  prendido  )    . 

\  al  reo, 
han  preso 

llego  el  alguacil  y  dijo,  sed  preso 
en  nombre  del  rey, 


they  have  arrested  the  culprit. 

the  constable  came  up  and  said, 
'*  You  are  my  prisoner  in  the 
king's  name." 

all  are  now  made  prisoners. 


todos  estan  presos  ya, 

a.  In  all  other  significations,  prender  is  regular  throughout :  — 
el  fuego  habia  prendido  en  la  casa,  |    the  house  had  taken  fire. 

b.  All  compounds  of  prender  have  only  the  regular  past  parti- 
ciple.    Such  are  :  aprender,  to  learn ;  comprender,  to  understand; 
empreiider,  to  undertake ;  etc. :  — 

ha  apreiidido  algo  nuevo  hoy,         he  has  learned  something  new 

to-day. 


han  comprendido  la  trama, 
el  encargo  no  fue  emprendido, 


they  understood  the  plot. 

the  charge  was  not  undertaken. 


570.   Proveer,  to  provide,  makes  proveido  and  pro- 
visto,  the  latter  usually  with  estar:  — 

the  government  has  provided 
what  is  necessary  for  the  se- 
curity of  the  country. 


el  gobierno  ha  proveido  lo  ne- 
cesario  para  la  seguridad  del 
pais, 

la  plaza  estaba  provista  de  todo, 


the  fortress  was  provided  with 
everything. 

571.   Romper,  to  break,  makes  rompido  and  roto  in 

the  past  participle,  but  the  latter  form  generally  prevails 
in  all  positions,  when  the  verb  is  used  transitively  :  — 


2/O 


Form  and  Inflection. 


han   roto    los    cristales    de    la 

tienda, 

se  ha  roto  el  vaso, 
la  fuente  esta  rota ;  ya  no  sirve, 


they  have  broken  the  window- 
panes  of  the  shop, 
the  glass  has  been  broken,  [use. 
the  dish  is  broken ;  it  is  of  no 


a.   As  an  intransitive  verb,  romper  is  regular  in  its  past  partici- 
pie:- 


ha  rompido  con  su  amigo,  but 
ha  roto  todos  los  lazos, 


he  has  broken  with  his  friend, 
he  has  severed  every  tie. 


b.   The  compound  forms  of  romper  are  regular.     Thus :    cor- 
romper,  to  corrtipt ;  iiiterrumpir,  to  interrupt]   etc.:  — 


sin  ser  corrompido, 
le  han  interrumpido, 
despues  de  haber  prorumpido 
en  lagrimas, 


without  being  corrupted. 

they  interrupted  him. 

after  having  burst  into  tears. 


572.  Past  participles  are  variable  in  gender  and 
number,  like  adjectives  in  o,  when  they  are  conjugated 
with  any  auxiliary  whatever,  except  haber ;  likewise, 
when  used  as  pure  adjectives  or  participial  adjectives 
without  a  verb  :  — 


ella  tiene  escrita  una  carta, 

las  cartas  estan  escritas, 

las   condiciones   del   emprestito 

han  sido  publicadas, 
la  cuestion  queda  zanjada, 
una  leccion  aprendida, 
los  libros  impresos, 
una  hoja  suelta, 
las  simpatfas  granjeadas, 
ella  ha  escrito  la  carta, 
han  emprendido  las  obras, 


she  has  written  a  letter. 

the  letters  are  written. 

the  terms  of  the  (government) 

loan  have  been  published, 
the  affair  is  adjusted, 
a  lesson  learned, 
printed  books, 
a  printed  sheet,  a  notice, 
sympathies  acquired, 
she  has  written  the  letter, 
they  have  begun  building. 


573.   Past   participles,    like   common    adjectives,   are 
often  converted  into  substantives :  — 


preso,  arrested^ 


|  un  preso,  a  prisoner 


The  Verb. 


271 


§574. 

GENERAL    ALPHABETICAL     INDEX 

TO   THE 

INFLECTION   OF  ALL  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


A. 

ag-orar    .    .    . 

§488. 

abastecer  .    . 

like  carecer,    §  374,  a. 

agradecer  .    . 

like  carecer,   $  374,  a. 

abnegar     .    . 

"    negar,       §  468. 

ag-uerrir  .    .    . 

SS555,<*- 

aborrecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

alebrarse    .    . 

"    sembrar,  §  463. 

absolver    .    . 

"    volver,      §  491. 

alentar    .    .    . 

§459- 

pp.  absuelto. 

aliquebrar  .    . 

"    sembrar,  §463. 

absonar  .    .    . 

"    sonar,       §  472. 

almorzar    .    . 

"    forzar,      §  486. 

abstenerse     . 

"    tener,        §  536. 

along-ar  .    .    . 

"     rogar,      §  483. 

abstraer     .    . 

"     truer,         $537. 

amanecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

abunolar    .    . 

"    volar,        $  476. 

amoblar  .    .    . 

"    acordar,  §474. 

acaecer  .    .    . 

§§  374.  a  1  422- 

amolar    .    .    . 

"    volar,       §  476. 

acertar  .    .    . 

§458. 

amollecer  .    . 

"    carecer,   §374,  a. 

aclocar  .    .    . 

"    trocar,      §  482. 

amorecer   .    . 

"    carecer,   §374,  a. 

afcollar  .    .    . 

"    hollar,      §  475. 

amortecer  .    . 

"    carecer,   $  374,  a. 

acontecer  .    . 

§§374.  a\  422- 

amover  .    .    . 

"    mover,     $  489. 

acordar  1    .    . 

§474- 

andar  .... 

§528. 

acornar  .    .    . 

"     acordar,  §474. 

anochecer  .    . 

"    carecer,   §374,^. 

acostar  .    .    . 

"    costar,       §  473. 

antedecir  .    . 

"    decir,       $  539,  b. 

acrecentar    . 

"    alentar,    $  459. 

pp.  ante  die  ho. 

acrecer  .    .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

anteponer  .    . 

"   poner,      §533. 

adecentar  .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

pp.  antepuesto. 

adestrar    .    . 

"    atestar,     §  462. 

antever  .    .    . 

"    ver%          §  548. 

adherir  .    .    . 

"    herir,        §  500. 

pp.  antevisto. 

adolecer    .    . 

"     carecer,    $  374,  a. 

apacentar  .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

adormecer     . 

11    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

aparecer    .    . 

"    carecer,   $374,  a. 

adormir  .    .    . 

"    dormir,     §  508. 

apercollar  .    . 

"    hollar,      §  475. 

adquirir  .    .    . 

§507- 

apernar  .    .    . 

"    acertar,   §  458. 

aducir    .    .    . 

"    conducir,  §  538. 

apetecer    .    . 

"    carecer,   §  374,  a. 

advertir     .    . 

$502. 

apostari.    .    . 

11    costar,      §  473. 

afollar    .    .    . 

"    hollar,      §  475. 

apretar  .    .    . 

§461. 

aforar2   .    .    . 

"    sonar,      §  472. 

aprobar  .    .  --» 

"    probar,     §  478. 

1  Regular  in  the  sense  of"  to  tune." 

1  Regular  in  the  sense  of  "  to  post  "  men, 

2  Regular  when 

it  means  "  to  gauge." 

guards,  etc. 

272 


Form  and  Inflection. 


argiiir    .    .    . 

§526. 

C. 

arrecirse    .    . 

§555- 

caber  .... 

§529- 

arrendar    .    . 

like  alentar,    \  459. 

caer     .... 

§544- 

arrepentirse  . 

"    sentir,       §  499. 

calentar  .    .    . 

like  alentar,    §  459. 

ascender    .    . 

"    entender,  $  471. 

canecer  .    .    . 

"     carecer,   $  374,  a. 

asentar  .    .    . 

"     alentar,     §  459. 

carecer  .    .    . 

Ss  374,  ^ 

asentir   .    .    . 

11    sentir,       $  499. 

ceg-ar  .... 

"     negar       §  468. 

aserrar  .    .    . 

"     cerrar,      $  460. 

cenir  .... 

§518. 

asir  

5  cci. 

cerner 

"    perder      5  470. 

asolar     .    .    . 

3    OJ  •*' 

"    volar,        $  476. 

cerrar     .    .    . 

\  460. 

asoldar  .    .    . 

"    acordar,  $  474. 

cimentar    .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

asonar    .    .    . 

"    sonar,       §  472. 

circuir    .    .    . 

11    atribuir,  §  523. 

asosegar    .    . 

"    negar,       §  468. 

clarecer  .    .    . 

"    carecer,   §  374,  a. 

ataner    .    .    . 

§§378,£;  558,^. 

clocar     .    .    . 

"    trocar,     §  482. 

atender  .    .    . 

"    entender,  §471. 

cocer  .... 

§497- 

atenerse    .    . 

"    tener,        $  536. 

colar  .... 

"    volar,       §  476. 

atentar  1     .    . 

"    alentar,    $  459. 

colegir    .    .    . 

"    regir,       §  515. 

aterirse  .    .    . 

§555- 

colg-ar     .    .    . 

"    rogar,      \  483. 

aterrar2     .    . 

"    cerrar,      §  460. 

comedir  .    .    . 

"    pedir,       \  512. 

ate  star  3     .    . 

$462. 

comenzar  .    . 

"     empezar,  §  469. 

atraer     .    .    . 

"     traer,        $537. 

compadecer  . 

"     carecer,   §  374,  a. 

atravesar  .    . 

"    apretar,    §  461. 

comparecer  . 

"     carecer,   §  374,  a. 

atribuir  .    .    . 

{  523- 

competir    .    . 

"    pedir,       ^512. 

atronar  .    .    . 

"    sonar,       §  472. 

complacer 

§546. 

avalentar  .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

complanir  .    . 

"    planir,     §  378,  c. 

avanecerse    . 

"     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

componer  .    . 

"    Poner,       §533. 

avenir    .    .    . 

"    venir,        §  541. 

pp.  compuesto. 

aventar  .    .    . 

"    alentar,    $  459. 

comprobar     . 

"    probar,     §  478. 

avergonzar, 

concebir     .    . 

"    pedir,       $  512. 

like  agorar,  §  4 

88,  andforzar,  §  486. 

concernir  .    . 

$  558,  c. 

azolar    .    .    . 

like  volar,       §  476. 

concertar  .    . 

"    acertar,   §  458. 

concluir     .    . 

"    huir,         §  522. 

B. 

concordar  .    . 

"     acordar,  §  474. 

bendecir    .    . 

$54°. 

condescender 

"    entender,  §  471. 

pp.  bendecido. 

condolerse     . 

"    moler,      ^  492. 

bienquerer    . 

like  querer,     $  534. 

conducir    .    . 

§538. 

blanquecer   . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

conferir  .    .    . 

"    herir,       §  500. 

bregar    .    .    . 

"    negar,       §  468. 

confesar     .    . 

"    apretar,   §  461. 

brunir    .    .    . 

"    planir,      §  378,  c. 

confluir  .    .    . 

"    huir,        §  522. 

bullir.    .    .    . 

§378,^. 

conmover  .    . 

"    mover,     §  489. 

conocer  .    .    . 

§  374,  c. 

1  Regular  in  the  more  usual  modern  sense 

conseguir  .    . 

"    seguir,      §  516. 

of  "  to  attempt  a  crime." 

consentir    .    . 

"    sentir,      §  499. 

2  Regular  when 

it  means  "  to  terrify." 

consolar     .    . 

"    volar.       §  476. 

3  Meaning  "  to  testify,"  it  is  regular. 

consonar    .    . 

"    sonar,       §  472. 

The  Verb. 


273 


constituir  .    .  like 

instituir,  §  524. 

deponer.    .    .  1 

ike  poner,       $  533. 

constrenir  .    .    " 

cenir,        \  518. 

pp.  depuesto. 

construir  .    .    " 

huir,         §  522. 

derreneg-ar    . 

"    negar,       §  468. 

contar    .    .    . 

§477- 

derrengar 

"    negar,       \  468. 

contender  .    .    " 

entender,  §  471. 

derretir  .    .    . 

"    pedir,        $512. 

contener    .    .    " 

tener,        §  536. 

derrocar    .    . 

"    trocar,      §  482. 

contorcerse  .    " 

torcer,       $  496. 

derruir  .    .    . 

"    huir,         \  522. 

contracordar    " 

acordar,  §  474. 

desabastecer 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

contradecir  .    " 

decir,        §  539,  b. 

desacertar    . 

"    acertar,    §  458. 

pp.  contradicho. 

desacollar     . 

"    hollar,      §  475. 

contraer    .    .    " 

traer,        §  537. 

desacordar    . 

"    acordar,  §  474. 

contrahacer  .    " 

hacer,       §  530. 

desadormecer 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

pp.  contrahecho. 

desadvertir  . 

"    advertir,  §  502. 

contraponer  .    " 

poner,        §  533. 

desaferrar     . 

"    cerrar,      §  460. 

pp.  contrapuesto. 

desaforari.    . 

"    sonar,       \  472. 

contravenir  .    " 

venir,        §  541. 

desagradecer 

"    carecer,    \  374,  a. 

contribuir  .    .    " 

atribuir,  $  523, 

desalentar     . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

controvertir  .    " 

advertir,  §  502. 

desamoblar  . 

"     acordar,    §  474. 

convalecer    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desandar   .    . 

"    andar,      §  528. 

convenir    .    .    " 

venir,        §  541. 

desaparecer  . 

"    carecer,    \  374,  a. 

convertir  .    .    " 

advertir,  §  502. 

desapretar    . 

"    apretar,    §  461. 

correglr     .    .    " 

regir,        §  515. 

desaprobar    . 

"    probar,     §  478. 

corroer  .    .    . 

§557,0- 

desarrendar  . 

"    alentar,     §  459. 

costar    .    .    . 

§473- 

desasentar    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

crecer    ..." 

carecer,    §  374,  a% 

desasir  .    .    . 

"    asir,          §  551. 

creer  .    .    .    . 

§  549,  6- 

desasosegar  . 

"    negar,       §  468. 

fc  •     • 

desatender    . 

"    entender,  \  471. 

p. 

desatentar    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

dar      .... 

$  ^4^. 

desaterrar 

"    cerrar,      §  460. 

decaer    .    .    .  like 

y  j^j' 
j  caer,         §  544. 

desatraer  .    . 

"    traer,        \  537. 

decentar    .    .    " 

alentar,    §  459. 

desatravesar 

"    apretar,    §  461. 

decir  .    . 

§539- 

desavenir  .    . 

"    venir,        §  541. 

•    pp.  dicko. 

desaventar    . 

"    alentar,    $  459. 

decrecer    .    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desbastecer  . 

"     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

deducir  .    .    .    " 

conducir,  §  538. 

desbravecer  . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

defender    .  •'..•=" 

entender,  §  471. 

descabullirse 

"    bullir,       \  378,  a. 

defenecer  .  .  •  *-  " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

descaecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

deferir   ..." 

herir,        §  500. 

descender.    . 

"    entender^  §471. 

degollar     .    .    " 

agorar,     §  488. 

descenir    .    . 

"    cenir,        §  518. 

demoler     .    .    " 

moler,       §  492. 

descolgar  .    . 

"    rogar,       \  483. 

demostrar     .    " 

costar,       §  473. 

descollar  .    . 

"    hollar,      §  475. 

denegar     .    .    " 

negar,       §  468. 

descomedirse 

"    pedir,        §512. 

r\f\-r\t\evr>cn-*CLY>                " 

r 

cienegrGCor    . 
denostar    .    .    " 

costar,      §  473. 

1  Regular  when 

it  meanij  "  to  redeem  a 

dentar    .    .    .    " 

alentar,     §  459. 

heritage." 

274 


Form  and  Inflection. 


descomponer,  VAaeponer,       §  533. 

desgobernai  Vk&acertar,      §458. 

pp.  desoompuesto. 

desguarnecer,"    carecer,      §  374,  a. 

desconcertar,    " 

acertar,    $  458. 

deshacer  .    .   "    hacer,         §530. 

desconocer     .   " 

conocer,    \  374,  c. 

pp.  deshecho. 

desconsentir  .   " 

sentir,       §  499. 

deshelar    .    .  "    kelar,         $464. 

desconsolar    .  " 

volar,        §  476. 

desherbar      .  "    acertar,      §458. 

descontar  .    .   " 

contar,      §  477. 

desherrar  .    .   "    cerrar,       \  460. 

desconvenir  .   " 

venlr,        §  541. 

deslaombrecerse,  carecer,    §  374,  a. 

descordar  .    .  " 

acordar,   \  474. 

deshumedecer,    carecer,      §  374,  a. 

descornar  .    ,  " 

acordar,   §  474. 

desimponer  .   "  poner,         §533. 

descrecer  .    .  " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

pp.  desimpuesto. 

desdar     ..." 

dar,           \  543. 

desinvernar  .   "    acertar,      §  458. 

desdecir.    .    .  " 

decir,        §  539. 

desleir    ..."    reir,           §  520. 

pp.  desdicho. 

deslendrar    .   "    sembrar,     §463. 

desdentar  .  .  ,.  " 

alentar,    §  459. 

deslucir     .    .   "    lucir,          §  374,  d. 

desembebecerse, 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

desmajolar    .   "    volar,         §476. 

desembellecer," 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

desmedirse   .   "  pedir,         ^  512. 

desembravecer, 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

desmelar  .    .   "    helar,         $464. 

desempedrar  .  " 

acertar,    §  458. 

desmembrar,  "    sembrar,     §463. 

•desempobrecer, 

carecer,    $  374,  a. 

desmentir  .    .   "    sentir,        §  499. 

desencarecer,   " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

desmerecer  .   "    carecer,      §  374,  a. 

desencerrar    .   " 

cerrar,      §  460. 

desmullir  .    .   "    dullir,        §378,  a. 

desencordar  .   " 

acordar,   §  474. 

desneg-ar  .    .  "    negar,        {468. 

desencrudecer, 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desnevar  .    .   "    nevar,        §  417. 

desencruelecer, 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desobedecer,  "    carecer,      §  374,  a. 

desenfurecerse, 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desoir     ..."    oir,             ^553- 

desengrosar  .   " 

costar,       $  473. 

de  solar  ..."    volar,         §  476. 

desenmohecer," 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desoldar     .     .   "    acordar,     §  474. 

desenmudecer," 

carecer,     \  374,  a. 

desollar     .    .   "    hollar,       §  475. 

desensoberbecer,^r^^,    \  374,  a. 

desobstruir  .   "    huir,          ^522. 

desentenderse," 

entender>  §  471. 

desosari    .    .                         §480. 

desenterrar   .   " 

cerrar,      §  460. 

desovar      .    .   "    desosar,      §480. 

desentorpecer,  " 

carecer,    \  374,  a. 

desparecer    .   "    carecer,      §  374,  a. 

desentristecer," 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

despedir    .    .   "  pedir,         §  512. 

desenturaecer,  " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

despedrar      .   "    acertar,      §458. 

desenvolver  .  " 

volver,      §  491. 

desperecer    .   "    carecer,      §374,  a. 

pp.  desenvuelto. 

despernar.    .   "    acertar,      §458. 

deservir  ..." 

servir,      §  513. 

despertar  .    .   "    acertar,      §  458. 

desf  allecer  .    .   " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

despezar2.    .  "    empezar,     §469. 

desfavorecer  .  " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

desplacer  .    .   "    complacer,  §  546. 

desferrar     .    .  " 

cerrar,      §  460. 

desplegar  .    .   "    negar,        \  468. 

desflaquecerse, 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

desflocar     .    .  " 

trocar,      §  482. 

1  Signifying  "  not  to  dare,"  it  is  regular. 

desflorecer     .  " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

2  Regular  when  it  means  to  reduce  the  end 

desfortalecer,  " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

of  a  pipe  or  tube,  so  as  to  fit  it  to  another. 

The  Verb. 


275 


despoblar    .  \\teprobar, 

§478. 

E. 

desproveer  .    "   proveer, 

§549,0- 

educir    .    .    .  like  conducir,  $  538. 

pps.  desproveido  and  desprovisto. 

elegir.    ..." 

regir,        §  515. 

destentar     .  like  alentar, 

§459- 

embarbecer  .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

destenir    .    .    "    cenir, 

§518. 

embastecer  .    " 

carecer,     $  374,  a. 

desterrar     .    "    cerrar, 

§460. 

embebecer    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

destituir  .    .    "    instltuir, 

§524- 

embellecer    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

destorcer     .    "    torcer, 

§496. 

embermejecer," 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

destrocar     .    "    trocar, 

§482. 

embestir    .    .    " 

servir,       §  513. 

destruir    .    .    "    huir, 

§522. 

emblandecer,    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desvanecer  .    "    carecer, 

§374,0- 

emblanquecer,  " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desventar    .     "    alentar, 

§459- 

embobecer    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desverdecer,  "    carecer, 

§  374,  0- 

embosquecer,  " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desvergonzarse, 

embravecer  .    " 

carecer,     \  374,  a. 

like  forzar,  §  486  ;  and  agorar,  §  488. 

embrutecer  .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

desvolver    .  like  volver, 

§49L 

emparentar  .    " 

alentar,     §  459. 

pp.  desvuelto. 

empedernir  . 

§555- 

detener     .     .     "    tener, 

§536. 

empedrar  .    .    " 

cerrar,      §  460. 

detraer     .    .     "    traer, 

§537- 

empellar    .    .    " 

helar,        §  464. 

devolver  .    .    "    volver, 

§49L 

empequefiecer, 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

pp.  devuelto. 

empezar    .    . 

§469. 

dezmar     .     .     "    ate  star, 

}  462. 

emplastecer,     " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

diferir  ..."    herir, 

§500. 

emplumecer,    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

difluir    ..."    huir, 

§522. 

empobrecer, 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

digerir  ..."    herir, 

§500. 

empodrecer, 

carecer,     \  374,  a. 

diluir     ..."    huir, 

§522. 

empoltronecerse 

,  carecer,     §  374,  a. 

discerner      .     "   perder, 

§470. 

emporcar  .    .    w 

trocar,       §  482. 

discernir  .    .     "    hervlr, 

§503. 

enaltecer  .    .    " 

'carecer,     §  374,  a. 

disconvenir,     "    venir, 

§54L 

enardecer  .    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

discordar     .     "    acordar, 

§474- 

encabellecerse, 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

disentir     .     .     "    sentir, 

§499- 

encalvecer     .    " 

carecer,     $  374,  a. 

disminuir     .    "    huir, 

§522. 

encallecer  .    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

disolver   .    .    "    volver, 

§  491- 

encandecer   .     " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

pp.  dlsuelto. 

encanecer  .    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

disonar     .    .    "    sonar, 

§472. 

encarecer  .    .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

dispertar  .     .     "    acertar, 

§458. 

encarnecer    .     " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

displacer.    .     "    complacer, 

§546. 

encender    .    .    " 

entender,  §  471. 

disponer  .     .     "    poner, 

§533- 

encentar    .    .    " 

alentar,     §  459. 

pp.  dlspuesto. 

encerrar    \    .    " 

cerrar,      §  460. 

distender      .     "    entender, 

§47L 

enclocar     .    .    " 

trocar,       \  482. 

distraer    .    .     "    traer, 

§537- 

encloquecer  .    " 

carecer,     §  374,  a. 

distribuir      .     "     atribuir, 

§523- 

encomendar  .    " 

alentar,     §  459. 

divertir     .     .     "    advertir, 

§502. 

encontrar  .    .    " 

contar,       §  477. 

doler     ..."    moler, 

§492- 

encorar  ..." 

sonar,        §  472. 

dormir  .    .    . 

§508. 

encordar    .    .    " 

acordar,    §  474. 

276 


Form  and  Inflection. 


encorecer  .    . 

like  carecer,   §  374,  a. 

enruinecerse,  like  carecer,  §374,^. 

encornar    .    . 

"    acordar,  §  474. 

ensalmorar    .    " 

volar,       §  476. 

encovar  .    .    . 

"    sonar,      §  472. 

ensandecer    .    " 

carecer,   §374,  a. 

encrudecer    . 

"    carecer,   §  374,  a. 

ensangrentar,    " 

alentar,    §  459. 

encruelecer  . 

"    carecer,   §374,0. 

ensoberbecer,    " 

carecer,    §374,  a. 

encubertar    . 

"    acertar,   §  458. 

ensonar  ..." 

sonar,      §  472. 

endentar    .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

ensordecer     .    " 

carecer,   §374,0. 

endentecer    . 

"     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

entallecer  .    .    " 

carecer,   §374,0. 

endurecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

entender     .    . 

§47L 

enflerecerse  . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

entenebrecer,    " 

carecer,   §374,0. 

enflaquecer   . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

enternecer,    .    " 

carecer,   §  374,  a. 

enfranquecer, 

"     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

enterrar  ..." 

cerrar,     §  460. 

enfurecer  .    . 

"    carecer,   §  374,  a. 

entigrecerse  .     " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

engorar  .    .    . 

"    agorar,    §  488. 

entontecer     .    " 

carecer,   §  374,  a. 

engrandecer  . 

"     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

entorpecer     .    " 

carecer,   §  374,  a. 

engreirse    .    . 

"     reir,          §  520. 

entortar  ..." 

acordar,  §  474. 

engrosar    .    . 

"    sonar,       §  472. 

entredecir  .    .    " 

decir,       §  539. 

engrumecerse 

,  "     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

pp.  entredicho. 

engullir  .    .    . 

"    bullir,      §  378,  a. 

entregerir  .    .    " 

herir,       §  500. 

enhambrecer, 

"    carecer,   §  374,  a. 

entrelucir  .    .    " 

lucir,        §374,0'. 

enhambrentar 

,  "    alentar,    §  459. 

entrenaorir  .    .    " 

morir,      §  509. 

enhestar     .    . 

'    atestar,     §  462. 

pp.  muerto. 

enlenzar     .    . 

"    empezar,  §  469. 

entreoir  ..." 

°*r*           §  553- 

enloquecer    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

entreparecerse," 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

enlucir    .    .    . 

"    lucir,       §  374,  d. 

entrepernar   .    " 

a  cer  far,    §  458. 

enllentecer    . 

"    carecer,   §  374,  a. 

entreponer     .    " 

poner,       §  533. 

enmagrecer  . 

"     carecer,   §  374,  a. 

pp.  entrepuesto. 

enmalecer  .    . 

'  "     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

entretener  .    .    " 

tener,        §  536. 

enmarillecerse,"    carecer,   §374,0. 

entrever     .    .    " 

•ver,           §  548. 

enmelar  .    .    . 

"    helar,       §  464. 

pp.  entrevisto. 

enmendar  .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

entristecer     .    " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

enmohecer     . 

"    carecer,    \  374,  a. 

entullecer  .    .     " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

enmollecer     . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

entumecer.    .    " 

carecer,   §  374,  a. 

enmudecer    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

envanecer  .    .    " 

carecer,   §  374,  a. 

ennegrecer    . 

"     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

envejecer  .    .    " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

ennoble  cer    . 

"     carecer,    §  374,  a. 

enverdecer     .    " 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

emmdecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

envestir  ..." 

servir,      §  513. 

enorgullecer  . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

envilecer    .    .    " 

carecer,   §  374,  0. 

enrarecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

envolver     .    .    " 

volver,     §  491. 

enriquecer 

"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

pp.  envuelto. 

enrobustecer, 

"    carecer,    §  374,  #. 

enzurdecer    .    " 

carecer,    §  374,  0. 

enrodar  .    .    . 

"    probar,     §  478. 

equivaler    .  ;.    •« 

valer,       §  547. 

enrojecer   .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374,  #. 

erguir.    .    .    . 

§505. 

enronquecer  . 

"     carecer,    \  374,  #. 

errar    .... 

§466. 

enronecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §  374.  #. 

escabullirse   .    " 

bullir,      §  378,  a. 

The  Verb. 


277 


escandecer    . 

like  carecer, 

§374,0- 

H. 

escarmentar, 

"    alentar, 

§459- 

haber.    .    .    . 

§35L 

escarnecer    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0. 

hacendar  .    . 

like  alentar, 

§459- 

esclarecer.    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0- 

hacer  .... 

§530. 

escocer  .    .    . 

"    cocer 

§497- 

pp.  hecho. 

escolar  .    .    . 

"    volar, 

§476. 

heder.    .    .    . 

"   perder, 

§470. 

esforzar  .    .    . 

"   forzar, 

§486. 

helar  .... 

§  464. 

establecer     . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0. 

henchir  .    .    . 

§§  378,  d 

;  513. 

estar  ..... 

§382. 

hender    .    .    . 

"    entender, 

§471. 

estatuir  .    .    . 

"    instituir, 

§524- 

henir  .... 

"    cenir, 

§518. 

estregar     .    . 

"    negar, 

§468. 

herbar    .    .    . 

"    acertar, 

§458. 

estremecer    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0. 

herbecer    .    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0- 

estrenir  .    .    . 

"    cenir, 

§5i8. 

herir   .... 

§500. 

excluir  .    .    . 

"    huir, 

§522. 

herrar     .    .    . 

"     cerrar, 

§460. 

expedir  .    .    . 

"    pedir, 

§512. 

hervir     .    .    . 

§503. 

exponer  .    .    . 

"    poner, 

§533. 

holgar    .    .    . 

"    rogar, 

§483. 

pp.  expuesto. 

hollar.    .    .    . 

§475- 

extender    .    . 

"    entender, 

§  471- 

huir     .    .    .    . 

§522. 

extraer  .    .    . 

"    traer, 

§537- 

humedecer    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0. 

extrenir  .    .    . 

"    cenir, 

§518. 

I. 

F. 

imbuir    .    .    . 

like  atribuir, 

§523- 

fallecer  .    .    . 

like  carecer, 

§374,0- 

impedir  .    .    . 

"    pedir, 

§512. 

favorecer  .    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0. 

imponer  .    .    . 

"    poner, 

§533- 

fenecer  .    .    . 

"     carecer, 

§  374,  0- 

pp.  imptiesto. 

ferrar  .... 

"    cerrar, 

§460- 

improbar    .    . 

"    probar, 

§478. 

florecer  .    .    . 

"    carecer, 

§  374,  0. 

incensar     .    . 

"    pensar, 

§457- 

fluir     .... 

"    huir, 

§522. 

incluir     .    .    . 

"    huir, 

§522. 

foliar  .... 

11    hollar, 

§475- 

indisponer     . 

"    poner, 

§533- 

fortalecer  .    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0- 

pp.  indispuesto 

forzar.    .    .    . 

§486. 

inducir  .    .     . 

"    conducir, 

§538. 

fregar     .    .    . 

"    negar, 

§468. 

inferir     .     .    . 

"    herir, 

§500- 

freir     .... 

"    reir, 

§520. 

inf  ernar  .    .    . 

"    acertar, 

§458. 

pps./r  -eido  and 

frito. 

influir      .    .    . 

"    huir, 

§522. 

ing-erir    .    .    . 

"    herir, 

§500- 

G. 

pp.  ingerto. 

ganir  .... 

like  planir, 

§  378,  c. 

inhestar     .    . 

"    atestar, 

§462. 

gemecer     .    . 

"     carecer, 

§374,0- 

injerir     .    .    . 

"    herir, 

§Soo. 

gemir.    .    .    . 

"    pedir, 

§512. 

pp.  injerto. 

gobernar    .    . 

"     acertar, 

§458. 

inquirir  .    .    . 

"     adquirir, 

§507. 

gruir  .... 

"    huir, 

§522. 

inseguir  .    .    . 

"    seguir, 

§5i6. 

grunir     .    .    . 

"    planir, 

§  378,  c. 

instituir      .    . 

§524. 

guanir    .    .    . 

"    planir, 

§  378,  c. 

instruir  .    .    . 

"    atribuir, 

§523- 

guarecer    .    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0. 

interdecir  .    . 

"    decirt 

§539- 

guarnecer  .    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0- 

pp.  interdicho. 

278 


Form  and  Inflection. 


interponer    . 

like  poner, 

§533- 

mover    .    .    . 

§489. 

pp.  interpuestc 

B 

muir    .... 

like  huirt 

§522. 

intervenir     . 

"    venir, 

§541- 

mullir.    .    .    . 

"    bullir, 

§378,  a. 

introducir     . 

11    conducir, 

§538. 

munir.    .    .    . 

"    planir, 

§378,^. 

invernar   .    . 

"    acertar, 

§458. 

invertir     .    . 

"    advertir, 

§502. 

N. 

in  ve  stir     .    . 

"    servir, 

$513- 

nacer  .... 

§  374,  A 

ir    

6  cr^2. 

negar  .... 

§468. 

T 

I  OO    ' 

negrecer    .    . 

like  carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

j  • 

nevar  .... 

6  417 

jimenzar  .    . 

like  empezar, 

§469. 

I  **/* 

jugar  '  .    .    . 

§485. 

0. 

L. 

obedecer   .    . 

like  carecer, 

§  374,  a* 

languidecer, 
leer    .... 

like  carecer, 
"    creer, 

$374,0- 
§  549,  b. 

obscurecer    . 

obstruir  .    .    . 

"    carecer, 
"    kuir, 

\  374,  a. 

§522. 

liquefacer     . 
lobreguecer, 

"    sat  is  facer, 
"     carecer, 

§531- 
§  374,  a> 

obtener  .    .    . 
ofrecer  .    .    . 

"     tener, 
"     carecer, 

§536. 
§  374,  ^ 

lucir  .... 

§  374,  d. 

oir   

§553- 

luir     .... 

"    huir, 

§522. 

oler     .... 

§494- 

oponer    .    .    . 

"    porter, 

§533- 

LI. 

pp.  opuesto. 

Hover    .    .    . 

§418. 

oscurecer  .    . 

"     carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

M. 

maldecir  .    . 

like  bendecir, 

§540. 

P. 

malherir    .    . 

"    herir, 

§500. 

pacer  .... 

like  nacer, 

{  374,  b. 

malquerer    . 

"    querer, 

§534- 

padecer  .    .    . 

"     carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

malsonar  .    . 

"    sonar, 

§472. 

palidecer   .    . 

"     carecer, 

\  374,  a- 

maltraer  .    . 

"     traer, 

§537- 

parecer  .    .    . 

"    carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

mancornar   . 

"    acordar, 

§474- 

pedir  .... 

§512. 

manifestar    . 

"    ate  star, 

§462. 

pensar    .    .    . 

§457- 

mantener  .    . 

"     tener, 

§536. 

perder    .    .    . 

§470. 

mecer    .    .    . 

§373- 

perecer  .    .    . 

"    carecer, 

{  374,0- 

medir     .    .    . 

"    pedir, 

§512. 

permanecer  . 

"     carecer, 

§  374,  0- 

melar     .    .    . 

"    helar, 

§464. 

perniquebrar, 

"    sembrar, 

$463- 

mentar  .    .    . 

"     alentar, 

§459- 

perse  guir  .    . 

"    segulr, 

§5i6. 

mentir  .    .    . 

"     sentir, 

§499- 

pertenecer     . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0- 

merecer    .    . 

"    carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

pervertir    .    . 

"    advertir, 

§502. 

merendar  .    . 

"    alentar, 

§459- 

pimpollecer  . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0. 

moblar  .    .    . 

"    contar, 

§477- 

placer     .    .    . 

§545- 

mohecer  .    . 

"    carecer, 

$374,0- 

planir.    .    .    . 

$378,£. 

moler     .    .    . 

$492. 

plastecer   .    . 

"    carecer, 

§374,0> 

morder  .    .    . 

§490. 

pleg-ar     .    .    . 

"    negar, 

§468. 

morir     .    .    . 

$509. 

poblar     .    .    . 

"    sdnar, 

§472. 

pp.  muerto. 

poder  .... 

§532. 

mostrar     .    . 

"    costar, 

$473- 

podrecer    .    . 

41    carecer, 

§374,0- 

The  Verb. 


279 


podrir    .    .    . 

§510. 

reaparecer    .  like  carecer,   §  374,  a. 

poner     .    .    . 

§533- 

reapretar  .    . 

"    apretar,    §461. 

pp.puesto. 

reaventar  .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

poseer  .    .    . 

§549,^. 

rebendecir    . 

"     bendecir,  §  540. 

posponer  .    . 

like  poner, 

§533- 

reblandecer  . 

carecer,    §  374,  a. 

pp.  pospuesto. 

rebullirse  .    . 

"    bullir,       §  378,  a. 

preconocer  . 

"    cbnocer, 

§374,^- 

recaer     .    .    . 

"    caer,         §  544. 

predecir    .    . 

"    decir, 

§539- 

recalentar.    . 

alentar,    §  459. 

pp.  predicho. 

recentar     .    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

predisponer.     "   poner, 
pp.  predispuesto. 
preferir.    .    .    "    herir, 
prelucir     .    .    "    lucir, 
premorir  .    .    "    morir, 
pp.  premuerto. 

§533- 

§500. 
§  374,  d. 
§509. 

recenir   .    .    . 
recluir    .    .    . 
recocer  .    .    . 
recolar   .    .    . 
recolegir    .    . 

"    cenir,       \  518. 
"    huir,         §522. 
"    cocer,       §  497. 
"    volar,       §  476. 
"    regir,       §515. 

preponer  .    . 

pp.  prepuesto. 

"   poner, 

§533- 

recomendar  . 
recomponer  . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 
"    poner,       §533. 

presentir  .    .    "    sentir, 
presuponer  .    "   poner, 
pp.  presupuesto. 
prevalecer    .    "    carecer, 

§499. 
§533- 

$  374,  a- 

pp.  recompuesto. 
reconducir    . 
reconocer  .    . 
reconstruir    . 

"    conducir,  §  538. 
11    conocer,    $  374,  c. 
"    huir,         $  522. 

prevaler    .    . 
prevenir    .    . 

"    valer, 
"    venir, 

§547- 

recontar     .    . 
reconvalecer, 

"    contar,      §  477. 
"    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

prever  .    .    . 

pp.  previsto. 

"    ver, 

§548. 

reconvenir     . 
recordar    .    . 

"    venir,        \  541. 
"    acordar,  §474. 

probar  .    .    . 

§478. 

recostar     .    . 

"    costar,      §  473. 

producir    .    . 

"    conducir, 

§538. 

recrecer     .    . 

11    carecer,    §  374,  a. 

proferir     .    . 

"    herir, 

§500. 

recrudecer    . 

"    carecer,    ^  374,  a. 

promo  ver  .    . 

"    mover, 

§489. 

redarguir  .    . 

"    arguir,     §526. 

proponer  .    . 

"    poner, 

§533. 

redoler  .    .    . 

"    moler,       §  492. 

pp.  propuesto. 

reducir  . 

"    conducir,  \  538. 

prose  guir  .    . 

"    seguir, 

§516. 

reelegir  .    .'-  .r 

"    regir,       §515. 

prostituir  .    . 

"    instituir, 

§524. 

reencomendar, 

11    alentar,    §  459. 

proveer     .    . 

§  549,  a> 

referir     .    .    . 

"    herir,       §  500. 

pps.  proveido  and  provisto. 

reflorecer  .    . 

"    carecer,    §374,  a. 

provenir    .    . 

like  venir, 

§54!- 

refluir     .    .    . 

"    huir,         §  522. 

pudrir    .    .    . 

§510. 

ref  orzar  .    .    . 

"   forzar,     §  486. 

ref  regar  .    .    . 

"    negar,       §  468. 

Q- 

refreir    .    .    . 

41    reir,         \  520. 

quebrar     .    . 

like  sembrar, 

§463- 

pp.  refreido  and 

refrito. 

querer  .    .    . 

§534- 

reganir  .    .    .  \\teplahir,     §378,  £. 

R. 

regar  .... 

"    negar,       §  468. 

raer    .... 

§546- 

regimentar    . 

"    alentar,    §  459. 

rarefacer  .    . 

like  satisfacer, 

§531. 

regir   .... 

§5J5- 

pp.  rarefecho. 

regoldar    .    * 

"    agorar,    §  488. 

reagradecer. 

"    carecer, 

§374,0- 

regrunir     .    . 

"    planir,      §  378,  c. 

280 


Form  and  Inflection. 


rehacer  .    .    . 

like  hacer, 

§530. 

resentirse  .    . 

like  sentir, 

§499. 

pp.  rehecho. 

resolver  .    .    . 

11    volver, 

§491. 

rehenchir  .    . 

"    henchir, 

}378,A 

pp.  resuelto. 

reherir   .    .    . 

"    herir, 

§500. 

resollar  .    .    . 

"    hollar, 

Y47S- 

reherrar    .    . 

"    cerrar, 

§460. 

re  sonar  .    .    . 

"    sonar, 

§472. 

rehervir     .    . 

"    hervir, 

§503. 

resplandecer, 

"    carecer, 

\  374,  a. 

rehollar  .    .    . 

"    hollar, 

§475- 

resquebrar 

"    sembrar,  §  463. 

rehuir     .    .    . 

"    huir, 

§522. 

restablecer    . 

"    carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

rehumedecer, 

"    carecer, 

y  374,  a. 

restituir  .    .    . 

"     instituir, 

Y524- 

reir  

5  ^20. 

restregar    .    . 

"     negar, 

6468. 

rejuvenecer  . 

"    carecer, 

Y  O       ' 

y  374,  a. 

restrinir  .    .    . 

"    planir, 

j  ^^^< 
§378,^. 

relentecer 

"    carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

retallecer  .    . 

"     carecer, 

y  374,  *• 

relucir    .    .    . 

"    lucir, 

§  374,  d. 

retemblar  .    . 

"    sembrar, 

y463- 

remendar  .    . 

"    alentar, 

§459- 

retener  .    .    . 

"    tener, 

y536. 

rementir    .    . 

"    sentir, 

§499- 

retentar.    .    . 

"    alentar, 

y459- 

re  molar  .    .    . 

"    volar, 

§476. 

retenir    .    .    . 

"    cenir, 

§5i8. 

reraoler  .    .    . 

11    moler, 

§492. 

retinir     .    .    . 

"    planir, 

§378,£. 

remorder  .    . 

"    morder, 

§490. 

retonecer   .    . 

"    carecer, 

y  374,  a. 

remover    .    . 

"    mover, 

^489. 

retorcer  .    .    . 

"    forcer, 

§496. 

remullir  .    .    . 

11    bullir, 

§378,^. 

retostar  .    .    . 

"     co  star, 

y473- 

renacer  .    .    . 

"    nacer, 

y374,<*. 

retraer    .    .    . 

"    traer, 

y537- 

rendir     .    .    . 

"    servir, 

§513- 

retribuir     .    . 

"    atribuir, 

yS23- 

renegar  .    .    . 

"    negar, 

§468. 

retronar  .    .    . 

"    sonar, 

§472. 

renovar  .    .    . 

"    sonar, 

y472. 

retrotraer  .    . 

"    traer, 

§537. 

renir  .... 

"    cenir, 

§518. 

revejecer   .    . 

11    carecer, 

y  374,  a. 

repacer  .    .    . 

"    nacer, 

y374,<*. 

revenirse    .    . 

"    venir, 

y54i. 

repadecer.    . 

"    carecer, 

y  374,  a. 

reventar     .    . 

"    alentar, 

§459- 

repedir  .    .    . 

"   pedir, 

§512. 

rever  .    .    .    . 

"    ver, 

§548. 

repensar    .    . 

"    pensar, 

'y457- 

pp.  revisto. 

repetir   .    .    . 

"   pedir, 

§512. 

reverdecer     . 

"    carecer, 

§  374,  a. 

replegar    .    . 

"    negar 

§468. 

reverter  .    .    . 

"    perder, 

y470. 

repoblar    .    . 

"    sonar, 

§472. 

revestir  .    .    . 

"    servir, 

y5i3- 

repodrir     .    . 

"    podrir, 

§510. 

re  volar   .    .    . 

"    volar, 

§476. 

reponer  .    .    . 

"    poner, 

$533- 

revolcarse  .    . 

"    trocar, 

§482. 

pp.  repuesto. 

revolver     .    . 

"    volver, 

Y491- 

reprobar    .    . 

"    probar, 

y478. 

pp.  revuelto. 

reproducir    . 

"    conducir, 

yS38. 

robustecer     . 

"    carecer, 

y  374,  a. 

repudrir     .    . 

"    podrir, 

§510. 

rodar  .... 

"    sonar, 

§472. 

requebrar  .    . 

"    cerrar, 

§460. 

roer     .    .    .    . 

y557- 

requerer    .    . 

"    querer, 

§534- 

rogar  .... 

§483- 

requerir     .    . 

"    herir, 

^500. 

re  saber  .    .    . 

"    saber, 

YS35- 

S. 

resalir    .    .    . 

"    salir, 

vSS4. 

saber  .... 

$535- 

resegar  .    .    . 

"    negar, 

Y468. 

salir     .... 

y554- 

resembrar.    . 

"    sembrar, 

y463- 

salpimentar  . 

like  alentar, 

y459- 

The  Verb. 


281 


salpullir     .    .  like  bullir,      §  378,  a. 

subarrendar  .  like  alentar,    §  459. 

sarmentar  .    .    "    alentar,    §  459. 

subentender  .    " 

entender,  §  471. 

sarpullir     .    .    "    bullir,      §378,  a. 

subseguir  .    .    " 

seguir,      §  516. 

satisfacer  .    .                        §53i. 

substituir  .    .    "  ' 

instituir,  \  524. 

pp.  satis/echo. 

substraer  .    .    " 

traer,        §  537. 

segar  .    .    .    .    "    negar,      §  468. 

subtender  .    .    " 

entender,  §  471. 

seguir     .    .    .                        §516. 

subvenir    .    .    " 

venir,       \  541. 

sembrar     .    .                        $463- 

subvertir  .    .    " 

advertir,  §  502. 

sementar  .    .     "    alentar,    §459. 

sugerir  ..." 

herir,        \  500. 

sentar     ..."    alentar,    §459. 

superponer   .    " 

poner,      \  533. 

sentir.    .    .    .                        $499- 

pp.  superpuesto. 

ser  §  385. 

supervenir     .    " 

venir        6  CAI. 

serrar     ..."    cerrar,     §460. 

suponer.    .    .    " 

•         y  oitj'« 
poner,       §  533. 

servir.    .    .    .                       §513. 

pp.  supuesto. 

simenzar    .    .    "    empezar,  §469. 

sustituir     .    ,"••'•"• 

instituir,  §  524. 

sobrecrecer  .     "    carecer,    \  374,  a. 

sustraer     .    .    " 

traer,        \  537. 

sobreentender,  "    entender,  §  471. 

sobrentender,   "    entender,  §  471. 

T. 

sobreponer    .    "    poner,      §  533. 

tallecer  .    .    .  like  carecer,    §374,0. 

pp.  sobrepuesto. 

taner  .... 

y  378,  b. 

sobresalir  .    .    "    salir,        §554. 

temblar  ..." 

sembrar,  §  463. 

sobresembrar,  "    sembrar,  §463. 

tender    ..." 

entender,  \  471. 

sobresolar.    .    "    volar,       §476. 

tener  .... 

v536. 

sobrevenir     .    "    venir,       \  541. 

tentar     ..." 

alentar,    §  459. 

sobreventar  .    "    alentar,    $  459. 

tenir   .    r    .    .    " 

cenir,        \  518. 

sobreverterse,  "    perder,     \  470. 

torcer     .    .    . 

§496. 

sobrevestir    .    "    sentir,      §499. 

tostar     ..." 

costar,      §  473. 

sofreir    ..."    reir,         §520. 

traducir     .    .    " 

conducir,  §  538. 

pps.  sofreido  and  sofrito. 

traer  .... 

y537- 

solar  ....  like  volar,       §  476. 

transcender  .    " 

entender,  §  471. 

soldar     ..."    acordar,  §  474. 

transfreg-ar   .    " 

negar,       §  468. 

soler  ....                         §559- 

translucirse  .    " 

lucir,        §  374,  d. 

soltar  .    .    .    .     "    acordar,  §  474. 

transponer    .    " 

poner,      §  533. 

[solver]  ..."    volver,      §  491. 

pp.  transpuesto. 

pp.  suelto. 

trascender     .    " 

entender,  §  471. 

sollar  .    .    .    .    "    hollar,      §  475. 

trascolar    .    .    " 

volar,        §  476. 

somover     .    .     "    mover,      §  489. 

trascordarse,    " 

acordar,  $474. 

sonar  ....                        }  472. 

trasegar     .    .    " 

negar,       §  468. 

sonreir    ..."    reir,         \  520. 

trasferir     .    .    " 

herir,        \  500. 

sonrodarse     .    "    volar,       §476. 

trasfregar  .    .    " 

negar,      §  468. 

sonar  .    .    .    .     "    sonar,  __j^72. 

traslucir    .    .    " 

lucir,        §  374,  d. 

sorregar     .    .    "    negar,      §468. 

trasoir    .    .    .    *^ 

oir,           §  553- 

sosegar  ..."    negar,      §468. 

trasonar     .    .    " 

sonar,       §  472. 

sostener     .    .    "    tener,        §536. 

trasponer  .    .    " 

poner,      §  533. 

soterrar.    .    .    "    cerrar,     §460. 

pp.  traspuesto. 

282 


Form  and  Inflection. 


trastrocar    . 

like  trocar, 

§482. 

verdecer  .    .    . 

like  carecer,  \  374,  a. 

trasverter    . 

"    perdert 

§470. 

verter  .    .    .    . 

"    perder,  §470. 

trasvolar  .    . 

"    vo7  ~* 

§476. 

vestir   .    .    .    . 

"    servir,    §  513. 

travesar    .    . 

"    acertar, 

§458. 

volar    .    .    .    . 

§476. 

trocar   .    .    . 

§482. 

volcar  .... 

"    trocar,    §  482. 

tronar   .    .    . 

"    sonar, 

$472. 

volver  .... 

$49L 

tropezar   .    . 

"    empezar, 

$469- 

pp.  vuelto. 

tullir.    .    .    . 

"    bullir, 

$  378,  a. 

tumefacerse, 

11    satisfacer, 

§531- 

Y. 

pp.  tumefecho. 

yacer   .    .    .    . 

$550. 

yuxtaponer     . 

\\ktponer  t     §533. 

V. 

pp.  yuxtapuesto. 

valer.    .    .    . 

§547- 

venir.    .    .    . 

}S4i. 

Z. 

ventar  .    .    . 

like  alentar, 

$459- 

zabullir    .    .    . 

like  bullir,    §  378,  a. 

ver     .... 

$548. 

zaherir     .    .    . 

11    herir,      §  500. 

pp  .  visto. 

zambullirse     . 

"    bullir,     §  378,  a. 

The  Adverb.  283 


The  Adverb* 

575.  Adverbs  may  be  classed  according  to  their  form 
and  signification. 

576.  With  reference  to  their  form,  adverbs  are  simple 
or  compound. 

577.  Simple  adverbs  are  further  divisible  into  primi- 
tive and  derivative. 

578.  A  primitive  adverb  is  one  that  is  expressed  by 
an  originally  single  word,  without  affixes  or  etymological 
adhesions,  as  :  — 

si;  no;  bien;  mal;  luego,      |     yes;  no;  well;  badly;  presently. 

a.   Some   adverbs,   though   simple  in  form,  are   etymologically 
compound :  — 


acaso  (from  a  caso) ,  perchance. 
amenudo  (a  menudo),  often. 


despacio  (de  espacio) ,  slowly. 
ap^nas  (a  penas) ,  scarcely. 


b.   Many  simple  adverbs  are  properly  neuter  adjectives  tempo- 
rarily used  as  adverbs  :  — 


alto,    aloud. 
bajo,   low. 
falso,  out  of  tune. 


mucho,  much. 
poco,  little. 
pronto,  soon. 


s61o,  only. 

siibito,         suddenly. 
temprano,  early. 


579.  Derivative  adverbs  are  formed  principally  from 
common  adjectives  by  applying  to  them  the  affix  -mente 
(corresponding  to  the  English  ending  -#>),  agreeably  to 
the  following  laws  :  — 

a.  Common  adjectives  in  o  (fern,  a)  attach  the  affix 
to  the  feminine  form  :  — 


284 


Form  and  Inflection. 


franco ;        francamente, 
orgulloso ;  orgullosajnente, 
gracioso ;     graciosamente, 
acertado ;    acertadamente, 
cierto ;         ciertamente, 


frank; 
proud ; 
graceful ; 
appropriate ; 


frankly. 

proudly. 

gracefully. 

appropriately. 

surely. 


REMARK.  —  Common  adjectives  of  two  terminations  that  do  not 
end  in  -o,  form  their  adverbs  by  a  circumlocution  with  manera, 
manner,  never  in  -mente:  — 

burlon,  a,  roguish  —  de  una  manera  burlona,  roguishly. 

b.  If  the  adjective  be  of  one  termination  for  both 
genders,  the  affix  is  applied  to  the  common  form  :  — 


prudente ; 
cortes ; 
facil ; 
feliz ; 
ficl; 


prudentemente, 

cortesmente, 

facilmente, 

felizmente, 
fielmente, 


prudent;  prudently, 

polite ;  politely, 

easy ;  easily, 

happy ;  happily, 

faithful ;  faithfully. 


REMARK.  —  The  affix  -mente  is  originally  the  ablative  singular 
of  the  Latin  feminine  noun  mens,  the  mind,  which  finally  passed 
over  into  the  popular  signification  of  manner,  replacing  the  classic 
endings  -ter,  -e,  etc.  Thus  :  — 


certa  mente,  ciertamente, 
facili  mente,  facilmente. 


felici  mente,  felizmente. 
fideli  mente,  fielmente. 


At  different  periods  of  the  Spanish  language,  the  affix  was  vari- 
ously written  mientre,  miente,  and  mente,  and  was  generally  separated 
from  the  adjective  till  about  the  beginning  of  the  fifteenth  century. 


580.  The  affix  -mente  is  atonic,  and  does  not,  there- 
fore, modify,  in  any  way,  the  accent  or  structure  of  the 
adjective:  — 


asperamente ;  facilmente, 
titilmente ;        cortSsmente, 
ciertamente ;    certisimamente, 
fuSrtemente ;    fortlsimamente, 


harshly ;  easily, 

usefully ;  politely, 

surely ;  very  surely, 

strongly ;  most  strongly. 


The  Adverb*  285 

581.  When  two  or  more  adverbs  in  -mente  follow  one 
another  connected  by  a  conjunction,  the  affix  is  applied 
to  the  last  adjective  only:  — 


clara  y  distintamente, 

justa  6  injustamente, 

prudente  pero  terminantemente, 


clearly  and  distinctly, 
justly  or  unjustly, 
prudently,  but  decidedly. 


582.  Adverbs  in  -mente  usually  express  manner,  and 
in  this  sense  may  be  equally  turned  into  adverbial  phrases 
by  employing  the  adjective  with  the  noun  manera  or 
modo,  way,  manner:  — 

seguramente,  de  una  manera  segura,  or  de  un  modo  seguro. 
terminantemente,  de  una  manera  (or  de  un  modo)  terminante. 
justa  y  verdaderamente,  or  de  un  modo  justo  y  verdadero. 

583.  Adjectives  derived  from  the  names  of  countries, 
provinces,  and  cities,  are  made  adverbs  of  manner  by 
assuming  the  dative  singular  feminine  with  the  definite 
article,  agreeing  with  some  noun  understood  like  usanza, 
usage,  style,  fashion  :  — 


a  la  espanola, 
a  la  francesa, 
a  la  valenciana, 
a  la  andaluza, 


in  the  Spanish  fashion, 
in  the  French  style, 
after  the  mode  of  Valencia, 
in  the  Andalusian  style. 


These  forms  correspond  to  the  Latin  more  hispanico,  gallico, 
Valentino,  bcetico. 

REMARK.  —  The  same  idea  may  be  rendered  by  the  phrase  al 
estilo  followed  by  the  adjective,  or  al  estilo  de  followed  by  the 
proper  noun :  — 


al  estilo  andaluz, 
al  estilo  de  Castilla, 


in  the  Andalusian  style, 
after  the  manner  of  Castile. 


286 


Form  and  Inflection. 


584.  Many  common  adjectives  assume  the  feminine 
formula  with  a  la,  when  they  express  manner,  and  adopt 
the  adverbial  affix  when  they  indicate  time :  — 


£  la  antigua,  £  la  moderna, 
antiguamente ;  modernamente, 


in  ancient  —  modern  —  style, 
anciently  ;  in  recent  times. 


585.  A  few  adjectives  derived  from  proper  nouns  also 
admit  the  adverbial  formula  d  la :  — 


andar  £  la  jineta,1 
vestido  a  la  maja,2 


to  ride  with  short  stirrups, 
dressed  picturesquely. 


586.  A  very  few  derivative  adverbs  have  the  inorganic 
affix  sy  which  belongs  to  a  comparatively  late  period  in 
the  development  of  the  language  :  — 


OLD. 

ante; 

dempues  (de-in-post); 

dende  (de-inde); 

estonge  (ex  tune) ; 

mientre  ([du]w  interim)'/ 

quic,ab  (quis  sapit); 


MODERN. 
antes, 
despues, 
desde, 
entdnces, 
mientras, 
quizes  and  quiza", 


formerly;  rather. 

afterwards;  since. 

since. 

then. 

while. 

perhaps. 


REMARK.  —  In  the  adverb  l£jos,/#r,  far  off,  the  s  is  organic,  the 
word  being  from  laxius,  —  by  attraction,  laixus  and  lexos^  —  the 
form  in  which  it  was  written  prior  to  the  appearance  of  the  Acade- 
my's Dictionary  in  1726-39. 


1  The  jinete  or  ginete  is  a  name  derived  from  that  of  a  Barbary  clan,  —  the 
Zfewz-Zeneta, —  once  the  famous   Moorish  cavalry  of  Spain,  characterized, 
aside  from  their  armor,  by  their  peculiar  mode  of  riding,  so  that  andar  a  la 
jineta  now  means  to  ride  with  short  stirrups,  after  the  manner  of  the  "  Zeneta  " 
family. 

2  The  "  Maja  "  and  "  Manola"  are  Spanish  types  of  women  now  only  to  be 
met  with,  as  such,  in  the  plays  of  Ramon  de  la  Cruz,  or  on  the  boards  of  the 
Madrid  theatres.     In  their  fatigue  uniforms  of  plain  percalina,  their  descendants 
are  soberly  employed  in  the  government  tobacco  factories. 

8  Compare  Mingo%  old  Spanish  for  Domingo,  Dominic. 


The  Adverb. 


587.  Compound  adverbs  consist  of  two  or  more  words 
variously  associated,  as  substantives,  adjectives,  and 
adverbs  with  prepositions,  adverbs  with  adverbs,  etc. 


a.    With  the  article:  — 

a"  la  clara,     )          ...     . 
,  .       ,          \mamfestly. 
£  las  claras,  ) 

d  la  larga,  in  the  long  run. 
£  la  ligera,  superficially. 
£  la  moda,  in  fashion. 
d  la  verdad,  truly. 
al  contado,  in  cash,  cash. 
al  momento,  instantly. 
al  paso,  at  a  walk,  slowly. 


al  punto,  immediately. 

al  rev^s,  on  the  other  side. 

al  vivo,  to  the  life. 

a"  lo  divino,  in  the  sacred  style. 

en  el  acto,  instantly. 

en  lo  sucesivo,  henceforward, 

por  lo  ma's,  at  most. 

por  lo  mdnos,  at  least. 

por  lo  pronto,  for  the  present. 


b.    Without  the  article,  singular :  — 


a  caballo,  on  horseback. 

£  conciencia,  conscientiously. 

d  escape,  in  haste,  quick. 

a"  menudo,  often. 

a  pid,  on  foot. 

a  porfia,  persistently. 

A  una,  together, 

con  ligereza,  superficially. 

con  todo,  notwithstanding. 

de  antemano,  beforehand. 

de  buena  gana,  willingly. 

de  continue,  continually. 

de  dia,  by  day. 

de  etiquela,  in  full  dress. 

de  frente,/Jw»  to  face. 

de  golpe,  suddenly. 

de  hecho,  de  facto,  truly. 

de  improviso,  off  one^s  guard. 

de  lance,  #/  #  bargain. 

de  molde,  perfectly. 

de  noche,  Ay  night. 

de  nuevo, 


de  paso,  <?# 

de  prisa,  /» 

de  pronto,  quickly. 

de  propdsito,  purposely. 

de  raiz,  radically. 

de  seguro,  surely. 

de  suyo,  of  one^s  own  accord. 

de  todo  punto,  wholly. 

de  tropel,  pell-mell. 

de  vista,  #X  -fig^ 

en  fin,  finally. 

en  resumen,  /«  short. 

en  seguida, 

por  alto, 

por  cierto,  certainly,  of  course. 

por  consiguiente,  consequently 

por  mayor,  #/  wholesale. 

por  menor,  atf  retail. 

por  supuesto,  of  course. 

por  ultimo,  to//K. 

por  ventura,  peradventure* 

sin  novedad,  <zj  usual. 


288 


Form  and  Inflection. 


c.    Without  the  article, 

ciegas,  blindly. 
coces,  with  kicks,  kicking. 
cuestas,  on  one^s  shoulders. 
escondidas,  secretly. 
escondillas,  stealthily. 
gatas,  on  all  fours. 
hurtadillas ,  stealthily . 
oscuras,  in  the  dark. 


a  ojos  cerrados,  blindly. 
£  trechos,  at  intervals. 


plural :  — 

a  sabiendas,  wittingly,  knowing- 

£  secas,  plainly,  plain?          \ly. 

a  solas,  alone,  in  private. 

&  tientas,  feeling  one^s  way. 

a"  voces,  aloud. 

de  oidas,  by  hearsay,  report. 

de  rodillas,  on  one^s  knees. 

de  veras,  truly. 

en  ayunas,  agog,  uninformed. 

en  cueros,  naked. 

por  momentos,  every  moment. 


588.   To  these  may  be  added  a  few  Latin  technical 
terms,  some  of  them  more  or  less  corrupted :  — 


alias,2  otherwise  called. 
ex  profeso,  purposely. 
gratis,  gratis. 
inclusive,  inclusive. 
incontinenti,  at  once. 


infraganti  (flagrant!  delicto),  in 

the  act. 

interin,  meanwhile. 
item  and  iten,  furthermore. 
maxime,  especially. 


589.   With   reference    to  their   signification,  adverbs 
may  be  variously  classed  as :  — 


a.    Adverbs  of  time:- — 

ahora;  entdnces, 
amenudo ;  raras  veces, 
anoche ;  anteanoche, 
dntes ;  despues, 
ayer;  anteayer, 
hoy;  manana, 
siempre;  nunca, 
tarde;  temprano, 


now ;  then. 

often ;  seldom. 

last  night ;  night  before  last. 

before ;  afterward. 

yesterday ;  day  before  yesterday. 

to-day ;  to-morrow. 

always ;  never. 

late ;  early. 


1  As :  se  11am6  Amadis  &  secas,  he  called  himself  plain  Amadis. 

2  Always   written   in   abbreviation    and   between   parentheses;    as,   Jos6 
Blanco  (a)  Pepito  el  Chico,  Joseph  White,  alias  "Little  Joe" 


The  Adverb. 


289 


b.    Adverbs  of  place :  — 

adelante;  atrds, 
^a  derecha ;  a  izquierda, 
aqui,  alii;  aca,  alia, 
arriba ;  abajo  ;  encima ;  debajo, 
cerca ;  lejos  ;  dentro  ;  fuera, 


forward ;  backward, 
tm  the  right ;  on  the  left, 
here,  there  ;  hither,  thither, 
up ;  down ;  above ;  below, 
near ;  far ;  within  ;  without. 


c.    Adverbs  of  manner:  — 

asi;  como, 

alto,  or  en  alta  voz, 

bajo,  or  en  voz  baja, 

bien ;  mal, 

con  el  aliento, 

mejor;  peor, 


so;  as. 

aloud,  or  audibly, 
low,  or  in  a  low  tone, 
well ;  badly  or  ill. 
in  a  whisper, 
better;  worse. 


and  most  adverbs  in  -mente. 


d.    Adverbs  of  quantity:  — 


mucho  ;  muy  ;  poco, 
menos  ;  por  lo  menos, 
mas ;  por  lo  mas, 
demasiado,  or  sobrado, 
bastante  ;  harto  (asaz,  obs.), 
algo ;  como ;  apenas, 


much  ;  very  ;  little. 

less ;  at  least. 

more ;  at  most. 

too ;  too  much. 

enough ;  sufficiently. 

somewhat;  about;  scarcely. 


e.    Adverbs  of  affirmation  and  negation :  — 


si ;  eso  si ;  justo  ;  claro, 
por  supuesto  ;  por  cierto, 
ciertamente ;  yerdaderamente, 
sin  duda, 

no  ;  eso  no  ;  nada, 
tampoco  ;-  ni  yo  tampoco, 
nunca ;  jamas,          .  / 

f.    Adverbs  of  doubt:  — 

acaso  ;  tal  vez,  or  quizas, 
apenas ;  probablemente, 
dificilmente, 


yes ;  that  indeed  ;  true ;  of  course. 

of  course ;  certainly. 

surely ;  truly. 

undoubtedly. 

no  ;  not  that ;  not  at  all. 

no ;  nor  I  either.  , 

never. 


perchance;  perhaps, 
hardly;  probably, 
unlikely,  improbably. 


290 


Form  and  Inflection. 


590.   There  are  also  in  Spanish  a  great  number  of 
adverbial  phrases  like  the  following :  — 


a  m£s  correr,  at  one*s  utmost 
speed.  \might. 

£  ma's  no  poder,  with  all  one's 

£  ma's  tardar,  at  the  latest. 

cuando  menos,  at  least. 

cuanto  dntes,  as  soon  as  possible. 

de  aca  para  alia,  hither  and  thither. 

de  aqui  para  alii,  here  and  there. 

de  cuando  en  cuando, )  now  and 

de  vez  en  cuando,        )     then. 

de  hito  en  hito,  (to  look)  through 
and  through.  \through. 

de   parte    a  parte,    (to    thrust) 


en  alguna  parte,  somewhere. 
en  cualquier  parte,  anywhere. 

en  ninguna  parte, ) 

,  \  nowhere. 

en  parte  alguna,    ) 

en  otra  parte,  elsewhere. 

hoy  dia,       )  at  the  present  day, 

hoy  en  dia, \     now-a-days. 

luego  a  luego,  little  by  //#/*( time). 

paso  £  paso,  step  by  step,  slowly. 

poco  a  poco,  little  by  little  (de- 
gree). 

uno  a"  uno,  one  by  one,  one  after 
another. 


591.  Adverbs  in  -mente  are  frequently  replaced  by  a 
phrase  composed  of  the  preposition  con,  with,  and  the 
appropriate  noun  :  — 

francamente,  or  con  franqugza,  frankly, 

maliciosamente,  or  con  malicia,  maliciously, 

rapidamente,  or  con  rapidez,  rapidly, 

recelosamente,  or  con  recelo,  apprehensively, 

enojosamente,  or  con  enojo,  angrily, 

cautelosamente,  or  con  cautela,  circumspectly. 


Use  of  Certain  Adverbs. 


592.  Some  adverbs  stand  after  nouns  in  the  sense 
of  "up"  and  "down,"  "out"  and  "in,"  "before"  and 
"after,"  etc  :  — 


escalera  arriba,  up  stairs. 
escalera  abajo,  down  stairs. 
cuesta  arriba,  up  hill. 
ciudad  abajo,  down  town. 
tierra  adentro,  inland. 


mar  afuera,  seaward. 
camino  adelante,  onward. 
meses  antes,  months  before. 
dias  despues,  days  afterwards, 
anos  atras,  years  back,  ago. 


The  Adverb. 


291 


593.  The  words  acaso  in  the  modern  language,  and 
por  ventura  in  the  quainter  style,  both  meaning  for- 
sooth,  pray,  are  often  mere  interrogative  signs,  and  as 
such  need  not  be  translated :  — 


^  acaso  soy  yo  el  que  tengo  la 

culpa? 

I  acaso  no  me  entiende  V.? 
^es  hora  esta  por  ventura  de 

hallar  la  puerta  abierta? 
iy  habeisla  visto  algun  dia  por 

ventura  ? 


am  I  the  one  to  blame  (for- 
sooth) ? 

don't  you  understand  me  ? 

is  this  an  hour  to  find  the  door 
open? 

and  have  ye  seen  her  at  any  time, 
pray? 


594.  Aqui,  ahi,  and  alii,  with  verbs  of  rest,  bear  the 
same  relation  to  each  other  that  the  demonstratives  este, 
ese,  and  aquel,  do.  With  verbs  of  motion,  they  properly 
assume  the  forms  aca,  ahi,  alia:  — 


REST. 
aqui, 
ahi, 
alii, 


MOTION. 

aca", 
ahi, 
alM, 


por  aqui,  por  aca", 
por  ahi,  por  ahi, 
por  alii,  por  alia, 

aqui  estci, 

viene  aca, 

ahi  esta, 

ahi  va, 

alii  esta, 

alia  va, 

,jvive  V.  por  aqui? 

coloque  V.  eso  por  ahi, 


here    (where  /am), 
there  (where  you  are) . 
there  (distant  from  both) . 

this  way,  here,   hereabouts, 
that  way,  there,  thereabouts, 
that  way,  there,  thereabouts. 


(where  /am). 


here  he  is, 
here  he  comes,  ] 

there  he  is,        )  , 

,u       ,  [  (where you  are). 

there  he  goes,   )  v 

there  he  is,        )  , ..  f        ,      ,  , 

[  (distant  from  both) . 
there  he  goes,  ) 

do  you  live  hereabouts  ? 
set  that  there,  somewhere. 


REMARK.  —  Por  ahi  has  also  certain  vague  meanings  referring 
to  the  whereabouts  of  persons  and  things,  not  easily  translated.  It 
is  conveniently  used  when  we  do  not  know  or  wish  to  declare  where 
a  person  or  thing  is,  as  well  in  a  favorable  as  in  an  unfavorable 
sense :  — 


Form  and  Inflection. 


^donde  esta"  fulano? — estara  por 

ahi, 

anda  por  ahl  como  siempre, 
la  cesta  esta"  por  ahl  fuera, 


where  is  so  and  so  ?  —  I  presume 

he's  off  somewhere. 
he  is  at  his  old  haunts,    [where, 
the  basket  is  out  there  some- 


a.  We  may  say  aqui  en,  here  in  (Madrid,  where  / 
am) ;  ahi  en,  there  in  (Valparaiso,  where  you  are) ;  but 
alia  en,  there  in  (California,  where  neither  is)  —  never 
alii  en.  In  good  English,  the  adverb  is  usually  omitted 
in  such  cases : — 


aqui  en  Filadelfia, 
ahi  en  Sevilla, 
alia  en  Boston, 


(here)  in  Philadelphia, 
(there)  in  Seville, 
(there)  in  Boston. 


b.  By  the  same  principle,  de  aqui  means  from  here, 
or  hence  (from  what  /  have  said) ;  de  ahi,  thence  (from 
what  you  have  said) ;  and  de  alii,  from  there,  thence 
(from  what  has  been  said). 

595.  Donde,  where,  is  either  an  interrogative  adverb 
of  place,  or  a  relative  signifying  which.  Its  meaning 
is  rendered  specific  by  prepositions  like  a,  to ;  en,  in; 
de,  from,  and  por,  through :  — 

Interrogative. 

where  do  you  live?  (rest.) 
where  are  you  going?  (motion.) 
where  do  you  come  from? 
which  way  do  you  go  ? 


I  d6nde  vive  V.  ? 
^addndevaV.? 
^,de  d6nde  viene  V.? 
<j,por  ddnde  pasa  V.  ? 


Relative. 

la  calle   donde,  or  en   donde 

vive, 

la  calle  a  donde  va, 
la  calle  de  donde  viene, 
las  calles  por  donde  pasa, 


the  street  where  or  in  which  he 

lives. 

the  street  to  which  he  goes, 
the  street  from  which  he  comes, 
the    streets   through   which   he 

passes. 


The  Adverb. 


293 


REMARK.  —  Donde  assumes  the  graphic  accent  only  when  it  is 
interrogative  in  a  direct  or  indirect  sentence  :  — 


I  donde  vive  ? 
no  se'  ddnde  vive, 
£&  d6nde  va? 
ignoro  a  d6nde  vaya, 


where  does  he  live? 

I  do  not  know  where  he  lives. 

where  is  he  going? 

I  do  not  know  where  he  is  going. 


596.  The  adverbs  ago,  since,  are  expressed  by  certain 
tenses  of  the  verbs  hacer  and  haber  used  imperson- 
ally:— 

hacer  haber 

hace  cuatro  dias,  cuatro  dias  ha, 

hace  mucho  tiempo,  mucho  tiempo  ha, 

hacia  un  mes,  un  mes  habia, 

hara  seis  anos,  seis  afios  habra, 


four  days  ago. 

long  ago. 

(it  was)  a  month  ago. 

(it  will  be)  six  years  ago. 


597.   Mismo  qualifies  such  adverbs  of  time  and  place 
as  ahora,  hoy,  ayer,  manana,  aqui,  alii,  etc.  :  — 


ahora  mismo ;  hoy  mismo, 
ayer  mismo ;  mafiana  mismo, 
aqui  mismo ;  alii  mismo, 


this  very  moment ;  —  day. 
only  yesterday;  to-morrow  surely, 
in  this  —  that  —  very  place. 


598.  Muy,  very,  very  imich,  qualifies  adjectives, 
adverbs,  and  adverbial  expressions,  in  the  positive 
degree : — 

muy  bueno  ;  muy  bien, 

TTmv  arrmrln  •   miitr  alpcrrp 


muy  bueno  ;  muy  bien, 

muy  amado  ;  muy  alegremente, 

muy  a  la  ligera, 


muy  a  la  ligera, 


very  good  ;  very  well. 


very  good  ;  very  well. 

very  much  beloved  ;  very  gaily. 

very  rapidly,  superficially. 


a.    Likewise    past    participles    of    verbs    conjugated 
with  ser,  estar,  or  their  substitutes  :  — 


es  muy  amado, 

estaba  muy  afligido, 

se  quedd  muy  satisfecho, 

muy  airado ;  muy  exaltado, 


he  is  very  much  beloved, 
he  was  very  much  grieved, 
he  was  very  well  satisfied, 
very  much  angered  —  excited. 


294 


Form  and  Inflection. 


599.  Mucho,  much,  and  muchisimo,  very  much, 
qualify  adjectives,  adverbs,  and  adverbial  phrases,  in 
the  comparative  degree  :  — 

mucho  mejor ;  mucho  peor, 
xnucho  ma's ;  mucho  menos, 


mucho  mas  contento, 
muchisimo  mejor  —  peor, 


much  better ;  much  worse, 
much  more  ;  much  less, 
much  better  pleased, 
very  much  better  —  worse. 


a.    Likewise  verbs,  and  past  participles  conjugated 
with  haber :  — 


lo  siento  mucho  —  muchisimo, 
no  conviene  hablar  mucho, 
se  ha  quejado  mucho, 
han  sufrido  muchisimo, 


I  regret  it  much  —  very  much, 
it  is  not  fitting  to  talk  much, 
he  complained  a  good  deal, 
they  endured  very  much. 


a.  Muy  cannot  qualify  mucho,  in  the  present  state  of  the  lan- 
guage ;  very  much,  a  great  deal,  must  be  expressed  by  the  super- 
lative muchisimo :  — 


pide  muchisimo, 
padece  muchisimo, 


he  demands  a  great  deal, 
he  suffers  very  much. 


b.   Muy  can  never  stand  alone  without  an  adjective  or  an  adverb ; 
in  such  case  it  is  always  replaced  by  mucho  in  the  signification  of 


is  the  story  amusing?  —  very, 
is  he  very  sad  ?  —  yes,  very ; 


<;  es  divertido  el  cuento  ? —  mucho, 
,;  esta*  muy  triste  ?  —  si,  mucho, 


but  not  mucho  divertido,  mucho  triste. 

600.  Recientemente,  recently,  is  reduced  to  recien 
when  standing  as  an  adverb  before  participial  adjec- 
tives :  — 


llegd  recientemente, 
el  recien  llegado, 
un  nino  recien  nacido, 
los  recien  venidos, 
los  recien  casados, 
casas  recien  construidas, 


he  arrived  recently. 

the  newly-arrived  person. 

a  new-born  child. 

the  new  comers. 

the  newly-married  pair, 

newly-built  houses. 


The  Adverb. 


295 


601.  The  conjunction  si,  if,  is  often  employed  adverb- 
ially to  mean  why,  expressive  of  wonder,  surprise,  or  it 
may  have  the  force  of  an  expletive  :  — 

why,  I  did  not  say  anything, 
why,  I  just  saw  it. 
but,  gentlemen,  I  have  not  men- 
tioned it  yet. 


si  no  he  dicho  nada, 
si  lo  acabo  de  ver, 
pero,  senores,  si  no  lo  he  dicho 
todavia. 


602.  Si  (with  the  graphic  accent)  signifies  yes,  and 
may  be  strengthened  and  emphasized  by  adding  par- 
ticles like  tal,  que,  or  by  its  position.  It  is  then  trans- 
lated by  yes,  indeed,  or  by  one  of  the  modal  auxiliaries 
do,  did,  would,  etc.  :  — 


sital, 

ve  V.  ya?  —  \  si  que  lo  veo, 
lo  veo,  si, 
sital, 
vendrd"  V.  ?  —  \  si  que  vendre, 

vendrd,  si, 
le  convienea"  V.  esto?  —  eso  si 
que  me  conviene, 
le  gustan  a*  V.  los  cuadros?  — 
esos  si  que  me  gustan, 


rldo. 
do  you  see  it  now? — ^  indeed,  I  do. 

[yes,  I  do. 

r  I  will, 
will  you  come? —  -j  indeed,  I  will. 

(yes,  I  will, 
does  this  suit  you?  —  that,  indeed, 

does  suit  me. 

do  you  like  the  pictures?  —  those, 
I  do, indeed. 


a.  In  contrasted  clauses,  si  is  likewise  equivalent  to 
indeed,  I  grant,  I  concede,  or  to  any  appropriate  modal 
auxiliary :  — 


pobre,  si;   pero  honrado  como 

ninguno,1 

vendrd,  si ;  pero  no  hoy, 
es  licencia,  si;  pero  no  poe'tica, 

£1  no  lo  quiso ;  yo,  si, 
estos,  si ;  pero  no  aquellos, 


poor,  it  is  true;  but  second  to 

none  in  integrity. 
I  will  come ;  but  not  to-day, 
it  is  a  license,  I  grant  you ;  but 

not  a  poetical  one. 
he  did  not  wish  to ;  I  did. 
these,  indeed ;  but  not  those. 


In  the  dialect  of  the  illiterate, probe  si;  pero  honrao  como  dcnguno. 


2Q6 


Form  and  Inflection. 


b.  After  verbs  of  declaring,  believing,  suspecting, 
fearing,  and  so  forth,  the  adverbs  si  and  no  are  joined 
to  such  verbs  by  means  of  the  conjunction  que,  that, 
and  are  translated  by  yes  or  so,  not,  or  by  the  appropriate 
modal  auxiliary :  — 

(he  says  "yes,"  —  "  no,"  or 

dice  que  sf,  —  que  no,  \     ,,    ,  ,        ...  „    t          ...       .  „ 

L"  that  he  will,"  " —  will  not." 

f  I  think  so,  —  not,  or 
creo  que  si,  —  que  no,  <  .,    ,  T  /u  ,     .„  .„ 

\that  I  (he)  will,  —  will  not. 


Negation  in  Spanish. 

603.   No  signifies  not,  and  always  stands  before  the 
verb,  or  in  default  of  the  verb,  after  a  subject-pronoun :  — 

no  tengo  ;  ^  no  tengo  yo  ? 

no  lo  tengo  ;  ,5,110  lo  tengo  yo? 

yo  no ;  ellos  no, 


I  have  not;  have  I  not? 

I  have  it  not ;  have  I  it  not? 

not  I ;  not  they. 


604.  Two  negatives  strengthen  one  another  in  Span- 
ish. Therefore  adverbs  like  ni,  neither,  nor;  nunca  or 
jamas,  never;  nada,  nothing,  not  anything,  require  the 
verb  to  be  made  negative  when  they  stand  after  the 
verb ;  but,  if  they  stand  before  it,  the  negative  is  not 
required :  — 


no  tengo  ni  pluma  ni  papel, 

no  tengo  pluma  ni  papel, 

ni  pluma  ni  papel  tengo, 

no  le  he  visto  nunca,  1 

nunca  le  he  visto,       J 

no  me  lo  dijo  jamas,  | 

jamas  me  lo  dijo,       J 

tal  obra  jamas  la  tuvo  entre  sus 

libros, 

no  nos  hace  falta  nada,! 
nada  nos  hace  falta,       J 


I  have  neither  pen  nor  paper. 


I  have  never  seen  him. 

he  never  told  me  so. 

he  never  had  such  a  work  among 

his  books, 
we    lack    nothing    (nothing    is 

wanting  to  us). 


The  Adverb. 


297 


a.    Nunca  and  jamas  may  be  associated  in  the  same 
sentence  to  emphasize  a  negation  :  — 


ya  no  le  hablare  nunca  jamas, 
nunca  jamas  se  lo  volverd  a" 
decir, 


I  shall  never  speak  to  him  again. 
I  shall  never  say  it  to  him  again. 


b.  Instead  of  nunca  or  jamas,  the  term  en  mi  vida, 
without  a  negative  expressed,  is  frequently  employed 
for  never,  never  in  my  life :  — 

I  never  said  such  a  thing. 


en  mi  vida  he  dicho  semejante 

cosa, 
en  mi  vida  me  habia  visto  sefior 

de  tanto  dinero  junto, 


never  before  was  I  master  of  so 
much  money  at  one  time. 


c.  Nunca,  jamas,  and  en  mi  vida,  signify,  on  the  other 
hand,  ever,  in  clauses  containing  sin,  without ;  ni  or 
tampoco,  nor ;  in  interrogative  and  exclamatory  sen- 
tences expecting  negative  answers,  and  after  compara- 
tives or  superlatives :  — 


sin    que    diga   nunca   lo    que 

piensa, 

sin  haberle  visto  jamas, 
I  cdmo  podre  pagar  nunca  todo 

lo  que  le  debo? 

,:  podria  yo  ir  jamas  a  un  sitio  tal  ? 
tampoco  se  diga  nunca  que  yo 

le  haya  faltado, 
hoy  esta  peor  que  nunca, 
tiene  la  figura  mas  mala  que  en 

mi  vida  he  visto, 
(un  animal)  el  mas  adornada 

que  en  mi  vida  he  visto, 


without  his  ever  saying  what  he 

thinks. 

without  ever  having  seen  him. 
how  can  I  ever  pay  all  that  I  owe 

him? 

could  I  ever  go  to  such  a  place? 
nor  let  it  ever  be  said  that  I  have 

slighted  him. 

he  is  worse  to-day  than  ever, 
he  has   the  worst  countenance 

that  I  ever  saw. 
(an  animal)   the  most  adorned 

with  trappings  I  ever  saw. 


605.   Siquiera,  even,  at  least,  may  be  employed  affirm- 
atively or  negatively  with  no  and  ni:  — 


2Q8 


Form  and  Inflection. 


le  rogue*  me  hiciese  el  favor  una 
vez  siquiera,  [ra, 

no  quiso  rebajar  un  real  siquie- 
ni  siquiera  una  vez,  or  \ 
ni  una  vez  siquiera, 
ni  un  real  siquiera,  or  \ 
ni  siquiera  un  real, 
no  le  ofreci  ni  uno  siquiera, 


I  begged  him  to  do  me  the  favor 

once  at  least.       [(five  cents). 

he  would  not  take  off  even  a  real 

not  even  once. 

not  one  real  even. 

I  did  not  promise  him  one  even. 


606.  Tampoco,  nor  —  either,  no,  can  be  used  with  no 
and  ni  when  it  closes  a  negative  phrase,  and  without 
them  when  it  begins  one.  In  a  series  of  two  or  more 
negative  answers,  it  replaces  the  adverb  no  after  the 
first :  — 


ni  yo  tampoco, 

^quiere  V.  este  libro? — no.     Y 

ese  ?  —  tampoco, 
no  quiero  ese  libro  tampoco,  or 
tampoco  quiero  ese  libro, 


nor  I  either. 

do  you  want   this  book?  —  no. 

And  that  one? — no. 
I  do  not  want  that  book,  either,  or 
nor  do  I  want  that  book. 


607.   Ya,  already,  now  (Lat.  jam),  means,  with  a  nega- 
tive, no  longer,  not  any  longer,  not  —  now :  — 


ya  no  me  habla, 
ya  no  hace  falta, 


he  does  not  speak  to  me  now. 
I  don't  need  it  any  more. 


608.  Certain  verbs,  in  association  with  others,  are 
translated  into  English  by  adverbial  expressions.  Such 
are :  volver  a,  followed  by  an  infinitive,  meaning  again  ; 
acabar  de,  followed  likewise  by  an  infinitive  and  equi- 
valent to  to  have  just,  while  the  infinitive  is  translated 
by  the  past  participle  :  — 

vuelve  a  hablar ;  a*  escribir, 
acaba  de  salir  ;  de  entrar, 


acababa  de  llegar, 


he  speaks  again ;  writes  again, 
he  has  just  gone  out ;  come  in. 
he  had  just  arrived. 


(literally,  he  returns  to  speak;  he  finishes  to  go  out.) 


The  Adverb. 


299 


Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

609.  Adverbs,  like  adjectives,  have  the  three  usual 
degrees  of  comparison,  but  without  variation  for  gender 
and  number :  — 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

cerca,  near. 
Iejos,/ar,/ar  off. 
claro,  clearly. 
doctamente,  learnedly. 
fielmente,  faithfully. 

mas  cerca,  nearer. 
mas  lejos,  farther  ,  farther  off. 
mas  claro,  more  clearly. 
mas  doctamente,  more  learnedly. 
mas  fielmente,  more  faithfully. 

Superlative  Relative. 

Superlative  Absolute. 

(lo)  mas  cerca,  the  nearest. 
(lo)  inas  lejos,  the  farthest  off. 
(lo)  mas  claro,  the  most  clearly,    \edly. 
(lo)  mas  doctamente,  the  most  learn- 
(lo)  mas  fielmente,  the  most  faithfully. 

cerquisimo  (§  180,  £),  very  near. 
lejisiino,  very  far  off. 
clarisirno,  very  clearly. 
doctisimamente,  very  learnedly. 
fidelisimainente,  very  faithfully. 

610.   Four  adverbs  have  an  independent  organic  com- 
parison :  — 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative 
Relative. 

Superlative 
Absolute. 

mucho,  much. 
poco,  little. 
bien,  well. 
mal,  badly. 

mas,  more. 
menos,  less. 
mejor,1  better. 
peor,2  worse. 

(lo)  mas,  the  most. 
(lo)  menos,  the  least. 
(lo)  mejor,  the  best. 
(lo)  peor,2  the  worst. 

muchisimo,  very  much. 
poquisimo,  very  little. 

malisimo,  very  badly. 

611.   Another  form  of  the  superlative  absolute  is  con- 
structed by  associating  with   the  positive  one  of  the 


1  Mas  bien,  like  6ntes,  means  rather. 

2  Occasionally  mas  mal,  worse  or  worst. 


300 


Form  and  Inflection. 


adverbs  muy,  bien,  very ;  bastante,  harto,  quite,  suffi- 
ciently;  sumamente,  exceedingly ;  etc.  :  — 


muy  cerca ;  bien  claro, 
bastante  l^jos, 
sumamente  bien, 


very  near ;  very  clearly, 
a  good  way  off,  quite  far. 
exceedingly  well. 


REMARK. — A  kind  of  superlative  absolute  is  found  in  the  repe- 
tition of  certain  adverbs  :  — 


bien  bien,  very  well. 
casi  casi,  very  nearly. 
de  par  en  par,  wide  open. 


luego  luego,  very  soon. 

lo  me'nos  lo  menos,  the  very  least. 

ya  ya,  very  truly,  quite  so. 


612.   Comparative  formulae  are  :  — 


613.   Equality,  with  adverbs :  tan  —  como,  as  —  as ; 
no  -  menos  —  que,  not  -  less  —  than  :•  — 


escribe  tan  bien  como  V., 
vive  tan  l^jos  como  nosotros, 
lee  tan  corrientemente  como  su 

maestro,  [yo, 

no  viene  me'nos  amenudo  que 
no  trabaja  con  me'nos  asiduidad 

que  el  oncial  (§  624) , 


he  writes  as  well  as  you. 

he  lives  as  far  off  as  we. 

he  reads  as  fluently  as  his  teach- 
er. [I  do. 

he  does  not  come  less  often  than 

he  does  not  work  less  steadily 
than  the  journeyman. 


a.   With  verbs :   tanto  como,  or  tanto  cuanto,  as 

much  as;   no  -  menos  que,  not  -  less  than:  — 


estudia  tanto  como  (or  cuan- 
to) su  hermano, 
no  trabajo  m^nos  que  V., 


he  studies  as  much  as  his  brother. 
I  do  not  work  less  than  you. 


614.    Superiority,  with  adverbs :   mas 
—  than:  — 


que,  more 


escribe  mas  rdpidamente  que  el 

dependiente  de  banquero, 
vive  mas  cerca  que  V., 


he  writes  more  rapidly  than  the 

banking-clerk, 
he  lives  nearer  than  you. 


The  Adverb. 


301 


a.    With  verbs:   mas  que,  more  than;   mejor  que, 
better  than:  — 


escribe  mas  que  su  hermano, 
vivira  mas  que  nosotros, 
esta  mucho  mejor  que  antes, 


he  writes  more  than  his  brother. 

he  will  live  longer  than  we. 

he  is  much  better  than  formerly. 


615.   Inferiority,  with  adverbs :   menos  —  que,  less 
' —  than  ;  no  -  tan  —  como,  not  -so  —  as :  — 


escribe    m^nos    elegantemente 

que  su  maestro, 
no    habla   tan    corrientemente 

como  su  hermano,  [dntes, 
me  visita  me'nos  amenudo  que 
no  me  visita  tan  amenudo  como 

antes,  [solia, 

no   obra  tan   de  ligero   como 


he  writes  less  beautifully  than 

his  master, 
he  does  not  speak  so  fluently  as 

his  brother.  [than  before, 
he  calls  on  me  less  frequently 
he  does  not  call  on  me  so  often 

as  before.  [used  to. 

he  does  not  act  so  giddily  as  he 


a.  With  verbs :  menos  que,  less  than ;  no  -  tanto 
como,  or  no  -  tanto  cuanto,  not  -  so  much  as ;  peor 
que,,  ivorse  than :  — 


sale  m^nos  que  antes, 
no  sale  tanto  cuanto  solia,  1 
no  sale  tanto  como  solia,    J 
vive  peor  que  sus  vecinos  todos, 
escribe  peor  que  su  hermana, 


he  goes  out  less  than  formerly, 
he  does  not  go  out  as  much  as 
he  used  to.  [bors. 

he  lives  worse  than  all  his  neigh- 
he  writes  worse  than  his  sister. 


616.  The  correlatives  cuanto  —  tanto,  the  —  so  much 
the  — ,  may  be  used  with  any  comparative  adverb. 
Tanto,  so  much,  may  be  omitted  from  the  formula  in 
both  languages,  unless  used  alone :  — 

cuanto  mas  habla,  (tanto)  mas  the  more  he  talks,  (so  much)  the 

perjudica  su  causa,  more  he  injures  his  case. 

cuanto  mas  estudia,  (tanto)  the  more  he  studies,  (so  much) 

mas  aprende,  the  more  he  learns. 

cuanto  m^nos  escribe,  (tanto)  the  less  he  writes,  (so  much)  the 

peor  sale  su  letra,  worse  his  hand  appears. 


302  Form  and  Inflection. 


cuanto  me'nos,  (tanto)  mejor, 
tanto  peor  para  el, 
tanto  mejor  para  todos, 


the  less,  the  better. 

so  much  the  worse  for  him. 

so  much  the  better  for  all. 


617.  Than  before  a  numeral  is  expressed  by  de,  in- 
stead of  que,  unless  the  verb  in  the  first  member  of  the 
comparison  be  negative  :  — 

se  lo  dije  mas  de  dos  veces, 
hace  mas  de  mes  y  medio  que 


estoy  aqui, 

no  me  dijo  ma's  que  dos  pala- 
bras, 


I  told  him  so  more  than  twice. 
I  have  been  here  more  than  a 

month  and  a  half, 
he  did  not  say  more  than  two 

words  to  me. 


618.  Than  is  expressed  by  de  lo  que  when  the  second 
member  of  the  comparison  contains  a  verb  forming  a 
complete  sentence :  — 

pide  ma's  de  lo  que  tengo,  |    he  asks  more  than  I  have. 

619.  In  the  phrase,  no  poder  menos  de,  to  be  able  to 
do  no  less  than,  the  use  of  que  is  regarded  in  Spain  as 
provincial :  — 

no  pudo  me'nos  de  censurarle,     |    he  could  not  do  less  than  censure 

him. 

620.  The  use  of  the  expletive  adverb  no,  not,  may  be 
admitted  into  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  after 
que,  than,  provided  the  first  member  be  not  interroga- 
tive, or  negative  expecting  a  negative  answer:  — 


mas  vale  el  contentamiento  que 

no  las  riquezas,       [nosotros? 

^no  son   ellos  mas  felices  que 


contentment     is     better     than 

riches, 
are  they  not  happier  than  we  ? 


621.   The  relative  superlative  of  adverbs  is  identical 
in  form  with  the  comparative :  — 


The  Adverb. 


303 


£1  es  quien  vive  mas  cerca, 
el  que  lee  mas  distintamente, 
los  que  escriben  mas  rapida  y 

elegantemente,  [gozan, 

los  reyes  no  son  los  que  mas 
los  que  m^nos  trabajan, 
el  que   come   mejor  es  el  que 

tiene  buen  apetito, 
es  lo  que  m^nos  le  preocupa, 


he  lives  nearest.  [tinctly. 

the  one  who  reads  the  most  dis- 
the  ones  who  write  most  rapidly 

and  beautifully.  [most, 

kings  are  not  the  ones  who  enjoy 
those  who  toil  least, 
he  who  dines  the  best  is  the  one 

who  has  a  good  appetite, 
that  troubles  him  least. 


a.  If,  however,  the  relative  superlative  is  followed 
by  a  qualifying  term,  the  neuter  article  lo,  the,  may  be 
used :  — 


>  posible, 


lo  mas  cerca  or 
cuanto  mas  cerca, 
acerquese  V.  lo  mas  que  pueda, 
se  acercd  lo  mas  que  pudo, 
lo  me'nos  posible, 


the  nearest  possible,  or 
as  near  as  possible, 
come  as  near  as  you  can. 
he  came  as  near  as  he  could, 
the  least  possible. 


obra  lo  mis  cuerdamente 


fque  pueda,  \he  acts  as  prudently 


que 


-  he  can. 


REMARK.  —  We  may  also  say,  hizo  lo  posible  para  .  .  .  ,  or 
cuanto  estuvo  de  su  parte  para  .  .  .  ,  he  did  all  that  he  could 
to  .  .  . 

622.  When  "most"  means  the  greater  part,  it  is 
expressed  by  la  mayor  parte  in  the  singular,  and  by 
los  or  las  mas  in  the  plural  :  — 


me  dejd  en  herencia  la  mayor 
parte  de  todo  cuanto  poseia, 
los  mds  de  los  hombres, 
los  m£s  no  consintieron  en  ello, 
de  las  senoras  las  m£s  se  que- 

daron  en  casa, 

fabulosos  son  los  mas  de  los 
asuntos  por  los  trdgicos  de 
todo  tiempo  inmortalizados, 


he  bequeathed  to  me  the  most 
of  all  that  he  possessed. 

most  men.  [it. 

the  greater  part  did  not  agree  to 

of  the  ladies,  the  greater  part 
stayed  at  home. 

the  greater  part  of  the  subjects 
immortalized  by  tragic  writers 
in  every  age  are  pure  fable. 


304 


Form  and  Inflection. 


623.   The  absolute  superlative  indicates  a  very  high 
degree,  but  without  comparison  :  — 

he  lives  a  great  way  off. 


vive  lejisimo,  or  muy  lejos, 
escribe  elegantfsimamente,  or 

con  suma  elegancia, 
se   ha   portado    muy   mal,   or 

malisimamente, 
el     actor    represento    p^sima- 

meiite,  or  malisimamente, 


he  writes  most  beautifully, 
he  has  acted  despicably. 

the    actor    played    very    badly 
indeed. 


624.  Adverbs  formed  by  the  association  of  the  prepo- 
sition con  with  a  substantive,  insert  between  them  the 
first  term  of  the  comparative  :  — 


Con  frecuencia, 
con  tanta  frecuencia  como  antes, 
con  mas  frecuencia  que  antes, 
con  suma  frecuencia,  or 
con  la  mayor  frecuencia, 

But,  aside  from  con :  — 

A  gusto, 

tan  a  gusto  como  siempre, 
mas  a  gusto  que  nunca, 
mas  d.  gusto ;  muy  a  gusto, 


Frequently. 

as  frequently  as  before, 
more  frequently  than  before. 

very  frequently. 


Satisfactorily . 
as  satisfactorily  as  ever, 
more  satisfactorily  than  ever, 
most  satisfactorily ;    very  satis- 
factorily. 


The  Preposition* 

625.  Prepositions  are  simple  or  complex,  according 
as  they  govern  their  object  directly,  or  in  combination 
with  other  words. 


626.   The  simple  prepositions  are  :  — 

cabe,  near,  by  (archaism), 
con,  with. 
contra,  against. 


ante,  before,  in  presence  of. 
bajo,  under. 


The  Preposition. 


305 


de,  of,  from.  {since. 

desde    (vulg.    dende),    from, 

durante,  during. 

en,  /;/,  at,  on. 

entre,  between,  among. 

excepto,  except. 

h£cia,  towards. 

hast  a,  till,  until,  up  to,  to. 

mediante,  through,  by  means  of. 

meiios,  except,  but. 


no  obstante,  notwithstanding. 

para,  for,  in  order  to,  to. 

por,  by,  through. 

sacado,  a  (part.),  deducting. 

salvo,  excepting,  save. 

segun,  according  to. 

sin,  without. 

so  (sub},  under,  on. 

sobre,  on,  upon,  about. 

tras,  after. 


627.   The  complex  prepositions  are  :  — 

a.   Those  composed  of  simple  adverbs  followed  by 
de,  that  is,  governing  the  genitive:  — 


acerca  de,  about,  concerning. 
ademas  de,  beside. 
alrededor  de,  around. 
antes  de,  before  (time,  order). 
cerca  de,  near,  about. 
debajo  de,  under  (place) . 


delante  de,  before  (place). 
dentro  de,  within,  in,  into. 
despues  de,  after  (time,  order) . 
detras  de,  behind  (place) . 
encima  de,  on,  over. 
fuera  de,  outside,  beyond. 


16jos  de,  far  from. 

b.    Those  composed  of  simple  adverbs  followed  by 
that  is,  governing  the  dative:  — 


conforme  £,  according  to. 

contrario  £,  contrary  to. 

f rente  £,  opposite,  in  front  of. 


junto  £,  near,  close  by. 
respecto  £,  with  respect  to. 
tocante  £,  touching. 


c.  One  composed  of  a  single  adverb  followed  by  con :  — 
juntamente  con,  |    together  with. 

d.  Those  composed  of  compound  adverbial  expres- 
sions followed  by  de :  — 


a  casa  de,  to  the  house  of. 
£  causa  de,  on  account  of. 


a  excepcion  de,  •with  the  excep- 
a  f uerza  de,  by  dint  of.  \tion  of. 


306 


Form  and  Inflection. 


&  la  vista  de,  within  sight  of. 
al  cabo  de,  at  the  expiration  of. 
al  lado  de,  by  the  side  of. 
al  trave's  de,  across,  through. 
a  pesar  de,  in  spite  of. 
a  razon  de,  at  the  rate  of. 
de  casa  de,  from  the  house  of. 
de  parte  de,  on  the  part  of. 
en  casa  de,  at  the  house  of. 
en  frente  de,  opposite. 


en  lugar  de,  instead  of. 

en  medio  de,  in  the  midst  of. 

en  vez  de,  instead  of. 

en  virtud  de,  by  virtue  of. 

en  vista  de,  in  mew  of. 

mas  alia  de,  beyond. 

por  causa  de,  on  account  of. 

por  el  lado  de,  on  the  side  of. 

por  razon  de,  by  reason  of.  [ing. 

sin  embargo  de,  notwithstand- 


e.  Those  composed  of  compound  adverbial  expres- 
sions followed  by  a :  — 

en  cuanto  a,  with  respect  to.         |    en  6rden  a,  with  regard  to. 

f.  Those  composed  of  two  successive  prepositions  :  — 
de  a,  of,  at,  —  each.  \   para  con,  towards,  to. 


USE    OF    CERTAIN    PREPOSITIONS. 
A,  En,  De. 

628.  The  leading  signification  of  a  is  to,  with  verbs 
of  motion  toward  a  given  point ;  that  of  en,  in,  at,  on, 
with  verbs  of  rest  in  -a  place  :  — 


Voy 

a  Espafia,  a  Lisboa,  al  correo, 
al  rio,  a  palacio,  a  casa, 
a  la  tienda,  a  la  plaza, 

Estoy 

en  Espana,  en  Madrid, 
en  palacio,  en  casa, 

Vengo 

de  Espana,  de  Madrid, 
de  palacio,  de  casa, 
de  la  tienda,  del  Museo, 


I  am  going 

to  Spain,  to  Lisbon,  to  the  post ; 
to  the  river,  to  the  palace,  home  ; 
to  the  shop,  to  market. 

I  am 

in  Spain,  at  Madrid ; 
at  the  palace,  at  home. 

I  come 

from  Spain,  from  Madrid ; 
from  the  palace,  from  home ; 
from  the  shop,  from  the  Museum. 


The  Preposition. 


307 


REMARK.  —  It  will  be  observed  that  the  Spanish  use  of  d  and  en 
differs  materially  from  the  French  :  je  vais  en  Espagne,  a  Lisbonne; 
j^ai  demeure  en  Espagne^  d  Madrid. 


629.   A  is  further  used  :  — 

a.    In  general,  in  the  dative  relation  —  to :  — 


al  hombre  ;  al  muchacho, 
a  la  mujer ;  a  los  ninos, 


to  the  man  ;  to  the  boy. 

to  the  woman;  to  the  children. 


b.  To  mark  a  personal  object  when  specific  (§  76) : — 
busco  al  criado ;  busco  un  criado, 

veo  a  la  mujer ;  veo  una  mujer, 
temen  a  Dios  ;  —  al  juez, 


I  look  for  the  servant ;  —  a  ser- 
vant. 

I  see  the  woman  ;  —  a  woman, 
they  fear  God  ;  —  the  judge. 


c.   As   a   connective   between   certain   verbs   and   a 
dependent  infinitive  —  to:  — 


voy  a  verle, 
empieza  a  hablar, 
echo  a  correr, 
se  puso  a  llorar, 


I  am  going  to  see  him. 
he  begins  to  speak, 
he  set  out  to  run. 
he  commenced  to  cry. 


d.   Temporary  situation  —  at :  — 


a  la  puerta ;  a  la  esquina, 
a  la  mesa ;  al  mostrador, 
al  Ateneo ;  a  la  Academia, 


at  the  door ;  at  the  corner. 

at  table  ;  at  the  counter. 

at  the  Atheneum  ;  —  Academy. 


e.    Time,  price,  rate,  —  at :  — 


a  la  noche  ;  al  amanecer, 
a  las  doce  ;  a  media  noche, 
a  dos  reales  el  metro, 
a  veinte  duros  mensuales, 
a  ocho  reales  diarios, 
<ja  cuanto?  —  a  tanto, 


at  night ;  at  dawn, 
at  noon  ;  at  midnight, 
at  two  reals  per  metre, 
at  twenty  dollars  a  month, 
at  forty  cents  per  diem. 
at  how  much?  —  at  so  much. 


308 


Form  and  Inflection. 


f.    Distance  off  —  at  -  off:  — 


a  una  legua  ;  a  veinte  pasos, 
a  tiro  de  ballesta ;  a  tiro  de  piedra, 


at  a  league  off;  at  twenty  paces, 
at  a  bow  shot ;  at  a  stone's  throw. 


g.    Distributively  —  by:  — 

uno  £  uno ;  dos  a  dos, 
gota  a  gota, 
poco  a  poco, 


one  by  one ;  two  by  two. 
drop  by  drop, 
little  by  little. 


h.    Adverbially  —  on,  in,  with :  — 


£  caballo  ;  a  pie, 
a  tiempo  ;  a  palos, 


on  horseback ;  on  foot, 
in  time  ;  with  blows. 


i.    After  certain  verbs  — on,  at,  in,  off,  from:  — 


las  ventanas  dan  al  jardin, 
jugar  a  los  naipes  ;  —  al  ajedrez  ; 

—  a  la  loteria, 
sabe  a  herejia  ;  sabe  a  ajo, 
huele  a  ambar, 
llevd  al  caballero  una  onza, 
robd  al  mozo  su  chaqueta, 


the  windows  face  the  garden, 
to  play  (at)  cards  ;  —  chess  ;  — 
(in)  the  lottery.  [garlic, 

it  savors  of  heresy ;  it  tastes  of 
it  smells  of  amber.  [dollars, 
he  charged  the  gentleman  sixteen 
he  stole  the  lad's  jacket. 


(literally,  he  took  from  the  gentleman  [the  price  of]  an  ounce ;  he 
stole  from  the  lad  his  jacket) . 


j.    Elliptically :  — 

a  que  no  lo  tiene  V., 
a  que  si ;  a  que  no, 


I'll  bet  you  haven't  it. 
I  have ;  you  haven't. 


REMARK.  —  This  ellipse,  common  in  ordinary  conversation, 
depends  on  the  verb  apostar  a,  to  wager  that,  expressed  or  under- 
stood. Apuesto  (or  apostar^)  a  que  me  va  V.  a  pagar  lo  que 
me  debe,  /'//  wager  you'll  pay  me  what  you  owe  me.  —  A  que  no, 
/'//  bet  I  won't.  —  A  que  si,  you  will,  etc.  So,  a  que  vendra 
mafiana  Fulano  de  Tal,  /'//  wager  So  and  So  will  come  to-morrow. 
—  A  que  no  vendra,  /'//  bet  he  won't,  etc.  Not  very  elegant,  but 
constantly  heard. 


The  Preposition. 


309 


630.  En  further  signifies  on,  in :  — 


en  la  mesa;  en  la  chimenea ;  en 

la  silla, 

en  el  cajon  de  la  mesa, 
en  la  ciudad ;  en  el  campo, 
en  su  ausencia ;  en  general, 


on  the  table;    on  the   mantel- 
piece ;  on  the  chair, 
in  the  table-drawer, 
in  the  city ;  in  the  country, 
in  his  absence  ;  in  general. 


631.   De  primarily  signifies  of,  and  corresponds  to  the 
English  possessive  case  :  — 


las  tapias  de  la  casa, 
los  drboles  del  paseo, 
el  palacio  del  rey, 
un  amor  de  madre, 


the  (outside)  walls  of  the  house, 
the  trees  of  the  promenade, 
the  king's  palace, 
a  mother's  love. 


a.    It  is  often  to  be  translated  by  to :  — 

el  camino  de  la  Cdrte ;  —  de  la 

ciudad, 
la  guia  de  Espana, 


the  road  or  way  to  the  capital , 

—  to  the  city, 
the  guide-book  to  Spain. 


b.  It  often  connects  words  which  are  to  be  translated 
by  compound  expressions,  or  by  an  adjective  and  a 
noun :  — 

un  buzon  de  correos, 
un  apartado  de  correos, 
un  billete  de  ferro-carril, 
un  talon  de  equipage, 
un  carro  de  mudanza, 
la  estacion  del  mediodia, 
el  tren  del  Norte, 
una  cuchara  de  plata, 
un  reloj  de  oro, 


a  post-box,  letter-box  (public). 

a  letter-box  (private). 

a  railway  ticket. 

a  luggage-check. 

a  furniture  van. 

the  southern  station. 

the  northern  train. 

a  silver  spoon. 

a  gold  watch. 


c.    It  denotes  cause — for,  with:  — 


llor<5  de  gozo, 

brined  de  contento, 

tiembla  de  frio ;  —  de  miedo, 


he  wept  for  joy. 

he  leaped  about  with  pleasure. 

he  trembles  with  cold ;  —  fear 


3io 


Form  and  Inflection. 


d.   After  certain  participles  and  adjectives  :  — 

laden  with  benefits, 
detested  by  all. 


colmado  de  beneficios, 
aborrecido  de  todos, 


e.   It  is  often  superfluous  in  English  :  — 


se  olvida  de  sus  amigos, 
abusa  de  la  amis  tad, 
no  me  acuerdo  de  el, 


he  forgets  his  friends, 
he  abuses  friendship. 
I  do  not  remember  him. 


/.   After  certain  verbs  —  as,  in :  — 


va  de  empleado, 
va  de  embajador, 
estd  de  luto, 


he  goes  as  a  government-clerk, 
he  goes  as  an  ambassador, 
he  is  in  mourning. 


Ante,  Delante  de,  Antes  de. 

632.  Ante  signifies  in  the  presence  of  an  authority ; 
and,  in  an  official  sense,  relating  to  persons,  courts, 
deliberative  bodies,  nations,  the  world,  history,  the  con- 
science, etc.,  viewed  as  judges,  witnesses,  or  interested 
spectators :  — 

before  the  judge ;  —  the  mayor, 
before    the  government;    —   a 

committee, 
before  the  courts  ;  —  the  House. 


ante  el  juez ;  —  el  alcalde, 
ante  el  gobierno ;  —  una  comi- 

sion, 

ante  los  tribunales ;  —  la  Cdmara, 
ante  la  nacion  ;  —  la  historia, 
ante  la  conciencia ;  ante  todos, 


before  the  nation ;  —  history, 
before  conscience  ;  before  all. 


a.  Also,  in  general,  in  presence  of,  in  view  of:  — 

ante  esta  actitud  del  pueblo,         |   in  view  of  this  attitude  of  the 

people. 

b.  Likewise  order  and  preference  :  — 

first  of  all,  they  put  their  respon- 
sibility out  of  danger. 


ponen    a"    cubierto   ante   todas 

cosas  su  responsabilidad, 
ante  todo  soy  Espanol, 


I  am  a  Spaniard  before  all  else. 


The  Preposition. 


633.  Delante  de  denotes  mere  situation  in  front  of 
things ;  location  before  people,  but  without  the  formal- 
ity inherent  in  ante:  — 


delante  de  la  casa ;  —  del  rey, 
delante    del    espejo;    —    del 

mundo, 

habld  delante  de  mucha  gente, 
lo  dijo  delante  de  testigos, 


before  the  house  ;  —  the  king, 
before  the  mirror ;  —  the  world. 

he  spoke  before  many  people, 
he  said  it  before  witnesses. 


REMARK.  —  Ante  and  delante  de  may,  therefore,  be  used  inter- 
changeably before  persons,  according  as  we  attribute  to  them  a 
judicial  or  critical  attitude,  or  consider  them  as  mere  auditors. 

634.  Antes  de  denotes  priority  of  time,  order,  and 
rank :  — 


antes  de  la  comida ;  —  de  la 

reunion, 

£ntes  de  la  una ;  —  de  las  dos, 
antes  de  un  ano ;  antes  de  su 

llegada, 

V.  estci.  antes  de  mi, 
un   marques    es    antes    de   un 

duque,  y  e'ste   antes   de   un 

conde, 


before  dinner ;  before  the  meet- 
ing. 

before  one  —  two  —  o'clock. 

before  a  year;  before  his  (her, 
their)  arrival. 

you  come  before  me. 

a  marquis  is  before  a  duke,  and 
the  latter  before  an  earl. 


Tras,  Detras  de,  Despues  de. 


635.   Tras  is  after  in  the  sense  of  what  immediately 

folloivs :  — 


tras  mi  viene  mi  amigo, 
tras  la  soga  viene  la  mula, 
tras  un  mal  vino  otro, 

[suerte, 

tras  la  adversidad  vendra  mejor 
uno  tras  otro, 
yo  iba  tras  £1, 
tras  esto, 


after  me  comes  my  friend, 
after  the  rope  came  the  mule, 
after  one   misfortune   came  an- 
other, [come, 
after  adversity  a  better  time  will 
one  after  another. 
I  went  after  him. 
(immediately)  after  this. 


312 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a.   Tras  de  often  occurs,  but  rather  in  the  sense  of 
aside  from,  besides :  — 


tras  de  venir  tarde,  regafia, 


besides   coming  late,   he   finds 
fault. 


636.  Detras  de  signifies  behind,  close  behind,  of  place, 
situation,  and  order,  corresponding  to  delante  de,  in 
front  of:  — 

detras  de  la  puerta,  behind  the  door, 

detras  de  la  tapia,  behind  the  wall, 

se  puso  detrds  de  mi,  he  got  behind  me. 


637.   Despues   de,  after, 
before,  of  time  and  order  :- 

despues  de  mucho  tiempo, 

llegd  despues  de  todos, 

el  ministro  es  despues  del  em- 

bajador, 
despues    de    haber    platicado 

largo  rato,  al  fin  se  sentd, 


corresponds  to  antes   de, 

after  a  long  time. 

he  arrived  the  last  of  all. 

the  minister  is  after  the  ambas- 
sador (in  rank). 

after  having  discoursed  a  long 
while,  at  last  he  sat  down. 


Bajo,  So,  Debajo  de. 

638.   Bajo  denotes  situation  close  under;  hence  be- 
neath, underneath,  below:  — 


bajo  la  mano ;  —  la  piedra, 
bajo  el  cielo ;  bajo  el  sol, 


under  the  hand ;  —  the  stone, 
beneath  the  sky ;  under  the  sun. 


a.  Figuratively  and  adverbially  with  the  idea  of 
protection,  guarantee,  subordination  in  rank,  duty, 
etc.  :  — 


bajosobre;   — fianza;   — pro- 
testa, 
bajo  Have, 


under  cover ;  —  bonds ;  —  pro- 
test, 
under  lock  and  key. 


The  Preposition. 


313 


bajo  ciertas  condiciones, 
bajo  palabra  de  honor, 
bajo  im  gefe ;  bajo  ayos, 


on  certain  conditions. 

upon  honor. 

under  a  superior ;  under  tutors. 


REMARK.  — Bajo  de  is  occasionally  heard  among  the  people, 
and  frequently  found  in  the  older  literature  or  modern  quaint  style. 

639.  So  (Lat.  sub)y  formerly  interchangeable  with  bajo 
in  the  second  sense,  is  now  limited  to  a  few  phrases 
only  :  — 

so  pena  de  la  vida,  1 
bajo  pena  de  muerte,/ 
so  capa  de ;  so  pretexto  de, 


,      f  forfeiture  of  life, 
under  \          .       f  ,      . 
[penalty  of  death. 

under  the  mask  —  pretence  —  of. 


640.   Debajo  de  corresponds  to  encima  de,  and  de- 
notes mere  material  situation,  under:  — 

debajo  de  la  mesa,  under  the  table. 

debajo  de  la  higuera,  under  the  fig-tree, 

el  miedo  de  las  cosas  debajo  de  the  fear  of  things  underground, 
tierra, 

REMARK.  —  Bajo  and  debajo,  like  ante  and  delante,  are  often 
used  interchangeably. 

bajo  or  debajo  de  mis  plantas,    |   beneath  or  under  my  feet. 


Sobre,  Eiicima  de. 

641.  Sobre  (Lat.  super)  and  encima  de  (en  cima  =  on 
top)  both  mean  on,  upon,  m  the  sense  of  location ;  but 
encima  has  an  additional  application  to  things  higher 
than  we  —  up  on.  It  also  means  over,  higher  than  one's 
head :  as,  the  birds  fly  over  the  kouse9  encima  de  la 
casa : — 


sobre  or  encima  de  la  mesa, 
sobre  or  encima  de  la  silla, 
encima  del  armario, 
encima  de  la  ciudad, 


on  the  table. 

on  the  chair. 

on  the  top  of  the  wardrobe. 

over  the  town  or  city. 


314 


Form  and  Inflection. 


a.  Sobre  has  also  the  figurative  sense  of  over,  more 
than,  above :  — 

amardDiossobretodaslascosas,  |  to  love  God  above  all  things. 

b.  It  also  signifies  of,  concerning,  about:  — 


^que*  opina  V.  sobre  esto? 
hablando  sobre  estas  cosas  se 
exaltd, 


what  is  your  opinion  about  this? 
speaking  about  these  things,  he 
became  excited. 


Con. 


642.   Con  denotes  accompaniment,  means,  and  instru- 
ment :  — 


ir  con  alguno, 

con  estos  recursos  se  rehabilitan, 

le  hirid  con  una  porra, 


to  go  (along)  with  some  one. 
by  means   of  such   expedients, 

they,  regain  public  favor, 
he  struck  him  with  a  club. 


a.   Con  makes  many  idiomatic  expressions  with  verbs, 
especially  with  dar,  to  give :  — 

did  con  e'l  en  la  calle,  he  met  him  in  the  street. 

did  con  ellos  por  la  ventana,  he  threw  them  out  of  the  window, 

le  did  con  la  puerta  en  los  ojos,  he  closed  the  door  in  his  face. 

did  consigo  en  el  suelo,  he  fell  down. 


Desde. 

643.   Desde  signifies  from,  as  a  starting-point  of  time 
and  place :  — 

desde  entdnces, 
desde  el  principio, 
desde  arriba  hacia  abajo, 
desde  la  una  en  adelante, 
desde  Ldndres  hasta  Paris, 
desde  muchos  anos, 


from  that  time,  since  then, 
from  the  beginning, 
from  above,  downwards, 
from  one  o'clock  onwards . 
from  London  to  Paris, 
for  many  years. 


The  Preposition. 


315 


Hdcia. 

644.  Hacia  denotes  material  direction  towards :  — 


los  vid  venir  hacia  si, 

la  proa  del  buque  se  dirijio  h£cia 

el  Mediodia, 
miraba  hacia  el  puerto, 
hacia  la  noche, 


he  saw  them  coming  toward  him. 
the    ship's    bow    was    pointed 

toward  the  south, 
he  was  looking  toward  the  port, 
towards  night. 


a.    It  also  is  popularly  used  in  the  sense  of  moral 
direction  toward  one4  like  para  con:  — 

demuestra  mucho  carifio  hacia 
nosotros, 


he  displays  a  great  attachment 
for  us. 


Hasta. 


645.   Hasta  signifies  as  far  as,  to,  up  to,  till,  until,  of 
place,  time,  and  degree  :  — 


hast  a  la  puerta ;  —  la  ciudad,' 
hasta  Paris  ;  hast  a  Ldndres, 
hasta  entdnces  ;  hasta  ahora, 
hasta  las  doce  ;  —  las  dos, 
la  acompane  hasta  su  casa, 
hasta  no  mas ;  hasta  lo  ultimo, 


up  to  the  door ;  —  the  town, 
up  to  (or  to)  Paris ;  to  London, 
until  then ;  until  now. 
up  to  twelve  —  two  —  o'clock. 
I  went  with  her  as  far  as  her  house, 
as  far  as  I  could ;  up  to  the  very 
last. 


Para,  Por. 

646.  Para  represents  the  Latin  dative  and  the  prepo- 
sitions pro  and  ad;  therefore,  its  meaning  is  for  in  the 
sense  of  destination,  end,  purpose ;  and  it  also  denotes 
the  relation  of  one  thing  to  another — for,  to,  in  order 
to,  for  the  purpose  of:  — 

esta  carta  no  es  para  V.,  this  letter  is  not  for  you. 

no  sirve  para  militar,  he  will  not  do  for  a  soldier, 

se  sentia  mas  apto  para  la  poll-  he  felt  that  he  was  better  fitted 
tica  que  para  las  letras,  for  politics  than  for  letters. 


316 


Form  and  Inflection. 


me  marcho  para  fuera, 
me  parece  que  no  es  para  me'nos, 
para    hacer    eso    se    necesitan 
tiempo  y  dinero, 


I  am  going  abroad,  or  out  of  town  -. 
it  seems  to  me  I  could  not  do  less, 
to  do  that  time  and  money  are 
necessary. 


647.  Por,  a  confounding  of  the  Latin  per  and  pro,  has 
the  meanings  of  both — for,  in  behalf  of,  for  the  sake  of, 
by,  through,  along,  on  account  of,  out  of,  as :  — 


lo  hago  por  un  amigo, 
(lo  hago  para  un  amigo,) 

dan  dinero  por  verlo, 

(dan  dinero  para  poder  ver, 
y  lo  consiguen,) 

lo  dan  por  cosa  extrana, 

6,  por  mejor  decir, 

por  miedo  de  las  consecuencias, 

por  (amor  de)  Dios, 


I  do  it  for  (in  behalf  of )  a  friend. 

(I  am  making  it  for  a  friend.) 
they  give  money  to  see  it. 

(they  give  money  to  be  able 

to  see,  and  they  succeed.) 
they  represent  it  as  a  strange 

thing.  [rectly) . 

or,  rather  (to  speak  more  cor- 
for  fear  of  consequences, 
for  Heaven's  sake. 


A  casa  de,  En  casa  de. 

648.  The  prepositions  a  casa  de,  to  the  house  or  shop 
of  any  one  ;  en  casa  de,  at  the  house  or  shop  of  any  one, 
are  respectively  translated  by  to  and  at  with  the  pos- 
sessive case.  The  former  is  used  with  verbs  of  motion, 
and  the  latter  with  verbs  of  rest :  — 


ha  ido  a  casa   del   Senor  de 

Herrera, 

viene  de  casa  de  Lhardy, 
ha  ido  a  su  casa ;  —  a  casa, 
estd  en  casa  de  Murillo, 
no  vive  ya  ma's  en  casa  del  senor 

marque's, 

{£  ddnde  va  V.?  —  d  casa,  or  £ 
casa  del  senor  conde, 


he  has  gone  to  Mr.  Herrera's. 

he  comes  from  Lhardy's.  [home, 
he  has  gone  to  his  house ;  — 
he  is  at  Murillo's. 
he  does  not  live  at  the  marquis's 
any  more. 

where  are  you  going?  —  home, 
or  to  the  earl's. 


The  Preposition. 


317 


de  ddnde  viene  V.  ?  —  de  casa, 
or  de  casa  del  senor  Moreno, 

en  ddnde  ha  estado  V.?  —  en 
casa,  or  en  casa  de  Lhardy, 


where  do  you  come  from  ?  —  from 
home,  or  from  Mr.  Moreno's. 

where  have  you  been?  —  home, 
or  at  Lhardy's. 


649.  De  a  (of,  at)  are  employed  to  denote  rate,  de- 
nomination, or  with  adverbs  to  convert  them  into 
species  of  adjectives:  — 

un  guardia  civil  de  a  caballo, 
los  de  a  caballo  ;  los  de  a  pie, 


veinte  sellos  (de  correo)  de 
veinte  y  cinco  centimes, 


a  mounted  rural  guard, 
the  cavalry  ;  the  infantry, 
twenty  five-cent  stamps  (twenty 

stamps  at  twenty-five  centimes 

each). 

two  twenty-four  pounders  (guns), 
a  piece  of  eight  (coin), 
the  right-hand  court. 


dos  canones  de  a  veinte  y  cuatro, 
una  moneda  de  a  ocho  (obs.), 
el  patio  de  a  mano  derecha, 

REMARK.  —  The  prepositions  de,  para,  and  por,  are  idiomatically 
associated  with  other  prepositions  to  define  more  closely  the  direc- 
tion, time,  or  manner,  expressed  by  the  latter:  — 


de  entre  los  arboles, 

cada  uno  de  por  si, 

dntes  los  tftulos  de  condes  se 

daban  de  por  vida, 
para  entre  amigos  se  deja  de 

complimientos, 

pasar  por  delaiite  de  una  casa, 
"  Por  entre  urias  matas, 
Seguido  de  perros 
(No  dire  coma) 
Volaba  un  conejo," 


from  among  the  trees. 

each  one  by  himself. 

formerly  the  title  of  a  count  was 

given  for  life  (only) . 
among  friends  compliments  are 

to  be  laid  aside, 
to  pass  along  by  a  house. 
"  Through  the  thicket, 
Pursued  by  dogs, 
A  coney  flew 
(Not  to  say  ran)." — Iriarte. 


650.  Para  con,  to,  toward,  signifies  moral  direction  :  — 
su  conducta  para  con  sus  hijos,   |    his  behavior  toward  his  children. 

651.  Many    complex    prepositions   which    contain    a 
noun,  transform  their  object  into  an  adjective  when 
that  object  is  a  personal  pronoun:  — 


318 


Form  and  Inflection. 


al  lado  de, 

al  lado  mio,  or  a  mi  lado, 

de  parte  de, 

de  parte  suya,  or  de  su  parte, 

en  conformidad  con  esto, 
en  esta  conformidad, 


by  the  side  of. 
at  my  side,  by  me. 
on  the  part  of,  from, 
on  his  part,  from  him. 

in  harmony  with  this,  or 
in  this  way. 


But  the  latter,  I  think,  is  originally  dialectic,  since  it 
is  largely  used  by  Aragonese  writers. 


The  Conjunction. 

652.  Pure   conjunctions   are   few   in   number,    while 
adverbs  and  prepositions  temporarily  employed  as  con- 
junctions,  with    or   without    que,    are    numerous.     All 
admit  the  usual  divisions  into  copulative,  disjunctive, 
causal,   concessive,   conditional,   temporal,   adversative, 
etc. 

653.  The  pure  conjunctions  are  :  — 


pero,  mas,  siiio,  but. 

ni,  nor. 

6  (before  another  0, 11),  or. 


que,  that. 

si,  if,  whether,  f  wonder  if. 

y  (before  i  or  hi,  6) ,  and. 


654.  Pero  and  mas  are  found  at  the  beginning  of  a 
paragraph  or  a  phrase,  and  in  an  adversative  sentence  ; 
but  sino  only  in  such  a  sentence  when  the  first  clause 
contains  a  negation  that  is  contrasted  with  an  affirma- 
tion in  the  second  :  — 


pero  la  historia  dice  otra  cosa, 
asi  lo  cuenta  el ;  pero  otros  lo 

refieren  de  distinto  modo, 
el  nino  sab  fa  perfectamente  la 

leccion,  mas  no  supo  decirla, 


but  history  tells  a  different  story. 

so  he  relates  it ;  but  others  give 
a  different  account. 

the  child  knew  the  lesson  per- 
fectly, but  could  not  recite  it. 


The  Conjunction. 


319 


no  fue  61,  en  verdad,  el  unico 

intolerante  de  su  siglo;  mas 

<ique  importa?     [por  lo  serio, 

no  lo  digo  en  broma,  sino  muy 

no   hay   optimismo   en   lo   que 

digo,  sino  pura  imparcialidad 

y  justicia, 


truly  he  was  not  the  only  intole- 
rant man  of  his  time  ;  but  what 
matters  it?  [all  sincerity. 

I  do  not  say  it  jestingly,  but  in 
there  is  no  optimism  in  what  I 
say,  but  pure  impartiality  and 
justice. 


655.  The  conjunction  y,  and,  assumes  its  ancient 
form  e  when  a  word  follows  beginning  with  the  vowel 
i  or  the  syllable  hi:  — 


Fernando  6  Isabel, 
padres  6  hijos, 


Ferdinand  and  Isabella, 
parents  and  children. 


REMARK.  —  Y  and  hy  were  anciently  adverbs  meaning  there, 
and  the  conjunction  and  was  always  expressed  by  6  (Lat.  et).  In 
the  latter  part  of  the  fifteenth  century  y  and  6  became  interchange- 
able, but  a  century  later  6  had  entirely  disappeared :  — 


murieron  y  muchos  moros, 
tomaron    los    cuerpos    delos 
reyes  que  y  yazien  enterrados 
6  lleuaro  los  alas  Asturias, 


and  many  Moors  died  there. 

and  they  took  the  bodies  of  the 
kings  who  lay  buried  there 
and  carried  them  to  Asturias. 


—  Chronica  General,  A.D.  1260,  ed.  1541 ;  ff.  260  £,  2610. 


finco  hy  sus  tiendas, 
«P*que  no  se  partiria  de  hy, 


he  pitched  his  tents  there, 
that  he  would  not  go  from  there. 


—  Chronica  del  Cid,  fourteenth-century,  ed.  1593;  pp.  87,  95. 


656.    Conjunctions  with 
prepositions,  are :  — 

a"  fin  de  que,  in  order  that. 

£  menos  que,  1 

,  }  unless. 

a  no  ser  que,J 

a"ntes  que,  before. 
asi  que,  so  that,  so. 

aunque,    \     .., 

i.  }  although. 

bien  quej 


quey  formed  of  adverbs  and 

caso  que,  in  case  that. 
como  quiera  que,  however. 
con  que,  so,  therefore,  so  then. 
con  motivo  que,  so  that. 
con  tal  que,  provided  that . 
cuanto  m£s  que,  the  more  since, 
dado  que,  in  case  that. 


320 


Form  and  Inflection. 


dado  caso  que,  supposing  that . 

de  manera  que,  1 

de  modo  que,     \  so  that. 

de  suerte  que,    J 

desde  que,  since. 

despues  que,  after. 

en  tanto  que,  while,  in  case  that. 

en  vez  de  que,  instead  of. 

entre  tanto  que,  while. 

excepto  que,  excepting. 

hasta  que,  until. 

luego  que,  as  soon  as. 

mientras  que,  while.  \ing. 

no  obstante  que,  notwithstand- 


>  however  little. 


para  que,  in  order  that. 

por  —  que,  however. 

porque,  because,  in  order  that. 

por  mas  que,  however  much. 

por  menos  que,] 

por  poco  que, 

pues  que, 

puesto  que, 

sea  que,  whether,  while. 

siempre  que,  whenever. 

sin  que,  without. 

supuesto  que,  since. 

tanto  que,  so  that. 

ya  que,  since. 


\  since. 
[ue,J 


657.   The  principal  correlatives  are  :  — 


ap£nas  —  cuando,  scarcely  — 

when. 

asl  —  como,  both  —  and. 
ni  —  ni,  neither  —  nor.   [when. 
no  bien  —  cuando,  scarcely  — 


no  solo  —  sino,  |  not  only 

no  solamente  —  sino,  j    —  but. 
6  —  6,  either  —  or. 
sea  —  sea,  whether  —  or. 


The  Interjection. 
658.   The  interjections  proper  are  : —  * 

a.  Exclamations  denoting  any  strong  emotion,  such 
as  surprise,  pain,  disgust,  encouragement,  remonstrance, 
desire,  etc. :  — 

puf  (aversion) ,  ugh ! 
uf  (weariness) ,  oh ! 
ca  and  quia  (expressive  of  in- 
dignant negation  or  doubt). 
caspita,  zounds ! 
chiton,  hist !  hush ! 
ojala,  would  that !  O  that ! 


oh,  ah,  oh !  ah ! 

ay,  oh !  alas !  ah ! 

ha  (exultation),  ha!  eh! 

he*  (shock,  start),  eh! 

ea  (encouragement),  cornel 

ea  ea  (impatience),  come  now  I 

huy  (pain,  shock),  oh !  dear  me  I 


ola,  or  hola  (recognition  or  discovery) ,  ah  !  oh ! 


The  Interjection. 


321 


REMARK.  —  Of  these  ay,  ea,  huy,  uf,  and  ojald,1  are  of  Arabic 
origin,  and  consequently  #/z-European  and  characteristic,  especially 
ay,  which  indicates  delight,  as  well  as  pain  or  surprise  ;  and,  popu- 
larly, is  as  common  as  the  trans-Pyrenean  oh  I  Chiton  imposes 
silence  about  something  forbidden,  with  the  ringer  on  the  lips,  well 
illustrated  by  the  national  proverb,  Inquisicion  .  .  .  chiton!  when 
the  Inquisition  is  mentioned,  hold  your  breath ! 

b.    Cries  addressed  to  domestic  animals,  birds,  etc. :  — 

so,  jo,  or  cho,  whoa ! 


anda 
alza 


(to  urge  forward  horses, 
mules,  etc.). 


ox  (to  frighten  away  birds). 
zape  (to  frighten  cats) . 


c.    Words  that  serve  to  imitate  sounds  :  — 


cataphim,  crash ! 


tras  and  zas,  thump,  thump  I 


REMARK.  —  These  are  very  numerous,  and  differ  with  the  indi- 
vidual character  or  province.  Tras  and  zas  may  be  repeated  to 
represent  rapping  at  the  door,  the  sound  of  feet  tripping  along  the 
hall,  and  many  other  movements  and  sounds. 

d.  Idle  or  profane  terms,  common  to  all  classes,  with 
their  euphemisms  or  evasions  of  the  original  word  :  — 


and    others    in  \ 
ca-  (expressing  \egadl 
surprise),          J 


cielos,  Dios,  por  Dios,  heavens ! 

Dios  mio,  dear  me ! 

ay  Dios  mio,  Oh,  dear  me  I 

Jesiis,  O  heavens ! 

valgame  Dios,  bless  me ! 

virgen  santa,  marry ! 


caramba 
carai 
caracdles 
canasto 
canario 

diantre  (to  avoid  diablo,  demo- 
nio) ,  the  deuce !  by  Jove ! 

REMARKS.  —  "\Jesus!"  "jAve  Maria  I"  ";Ave  Maria  purisi- 
mal"  are  heard  when  anything  heretical,  exaggerated,  or  surprising, 
is  told  or  seen ;  and  the  exclamation  j  Jesus !  alone,  when  any  one 
sneezes  or  gapes,  is  considered  as  a  polite  formula  of  exorcism,  at 
which  name  evil  spirits  will  forbear  pursuing  their  advantage  to 
possess  the  individual. 


1  From  in  sh&  'Hah,  "  if  Allah  please,"  written  formerly  oxala,  and  pro- 
nounced anciently  oshald. 


322 


Form  and  Inflection. 


659.    Other  words  used  as  exclamations  are  :  — 
a.   Verbs  in  the  imperative  mode  :  — 


anda  (importunity,  incredulity) , 
cornel  pshaw  I 

calla  or  calle  (command,  incre- 
dulity), keep  still!  nonsense! 

diga,  say! 

oy  e  and  oiga,  say !  hallo ! 


quit  a,  or      1  let  me  alone  I 
quitese  V.,J  go  aw  ay  I 
toma,  indeed!  really \ 
vamos,  cornel  why  I  well! 
vaya  (surprise,  to  take  leave,  as- 
sent), indeed  I  well  I  of  course! 


b.    Nouns,  adjectives,  and  adverbs  :  — 

al  asesino,  murder  I 
al  ladron,  stop  thief  I 
bravo,  bravo  I  good  I 
caballero  (indignation),  sir  I 


como,  how  I  why  I 
cuidado,  take  care ! 
f  uego,  fire  I 
socorro,  help  I  murder ! 


REMARK.  —  Conversation  is  frequently  rendered  emphatic  by 
introducing « the  words  hombre,  man;  mujer,  woman-,  as,  si, 
hombre,  yes,  of  course;  no,  mujer,  not  at  all,  sure. 

660.  Adjectives  employed  as  interjections  are  accom- 
panied by  the  preposition  de  when  a  personal  pronoun 
follows  :  — 


j  necio  de  mi ! 
j  pobre  de  mi ! 
j  desgraciados  de  nosotros ! 


silly  me  that  I  am  (I  was)! 

alas  for  me ! 

unfortunate  ones  that  we  are ! 


a.   The  interjection  /ay!  is  also  accompanied  by  de 
when  a  noun  or  pronoun  follows  :  — 


j  ay  de  mi ! 

j  ay  de  mi  Alhama ! 

j  ay  de  ti !  —  de  nosotros ! 

i  ay  del  malhechor ! 


alas  for  me !  woe  is  me ! 
alas  for  my  (city)  Alhama ! 
alas  for  you  !  —  for  us  ! 
woe  to  the  transgressor ! 


REMARK.  —  With  adjectives,  exclamations  maybe  introduced  by 
que:  as,  jqud  desgraciada  soy!  how  unfortunate  I  ami  jque* 
bueno  es !  how  kind  he  is ! 


SECTION  THIRD. 


THE   ESSENTIALS   OP    SYNTAX 
The  Article. 

Use  of  the  Definite  Article. 

661.  The  expression  or  omission  of  the  definite  article 
el,  la,  los,  las,  depends,  in  general,  on  the  degree  of 
limitation  we  wish  to  assign  to  the  accompanying  sub- 
stantive.    The  laws   that  govern   this  article  may  be 
reduced  to  three,  two  of  which  correspond  also  with 
the  English  usage. 

662.  First.   The  definite  article  is  expressed  both  in 
Spanish  and  in  English,  when  it  designates  a  particular 
individual  or  a  specific  object,  thought,  or  class,  in  the 
singular,  and  several  particular  individuals,  or  objects 
of  a  class,  in  the  plural :  — 


el  hombre  es  soberbio, 

la  casa  es  hermosa, 

el  pafio  es  carisimo, 

el  trigo  esta  vendido, 

los  hombres  son  soberbios, 

los  caballos  son  fogosos,     [nas, 

el  estudio  de  las  lenguas  moder- 

la  ensenanza  de  los  jdvenes, 


the  man  is  haughty. 

the  house  is  beautiful. 

the  cloth  is  very  dear. 

the  wheat  is  sold. 

the  men  are  haughty. 

the  horses  are  fiery.        [guages. 

the  study   of  the   modern  lan- 

the  instruction  of  the  young. 


a.  Consequently,  the  article  is  used  in  both  languages 
before  the  epithets  of  sovereigns,  poets,  artists,  and  with 
facetious  nicknames  (apodos) :  — 


324 


Syntax. 


Alfonso  el  Sabio, 
Fernando  el  Catolico, 
Pedro  el  Cruel, 
Carlos  tercero  el  Grande, 
Boabdil  el  Chico, 
Herrera  el  Mozo, 
Pepito  el  Ciego, 


Alfonso  the  Wise. 
Ferdinand  the  Catholic. 
Peter  the  Cruel. 
Charles  III.  the  Great. 
Boabdelf  the  Less. 
Herrera  the  younger.1 
little  Joe,  the  blind  boy. 


REMARK.  —  Under  this  law  of  particulars,  the  article  often  has 
the  force  of  a  demonstrative  adjective,  and  may  be  translated  by  that. 

663.  Second.  The  definite  article  is  omitted  in  both 
languages,  when  the  noun  is  taken  in  an  indeterminate 
sense,  involving  a  portion  of  a  substance  or  a  class  :  — 


deme  V.  pan ;  —  queso, 
traigame  V.  dinero  ;  —  vino, 
me  did  oro  y  valores, 
ganoso  de  paz  y  tranquilidad, 
tiene  casas  y  heredades, 
veo  praderas  y  huertas, 
cargado  con  grandes  paquetes, 


give  me  bread ;  —  cheese, 
bring  me  money ;  —  wine, 
he  gave  me  gold  and  securities, 
desirous  of  peace  and  quiet, 
he  possesses  houses  and  lands. 
I  see  green  fields  and  plantations, 
laden  with  large  bundles, 
covered  with  rich  stuffs. 


cubierto  de  riquisimos  panos, 

REMARK  i .  —  This  law  of  the  partitive  sense  of  substantives  is 
expressed  regularly  in  French  by  a  special  use  of  the  definite  article ; 


donnez-moi  du  pain, 
apportez-moi  de  1'argent,  [leurs, 
il  m'a  donne  de  Tor  et  des  va- 


give  me  some  bread. 

bring  me  some  money. 

he  gave  me  gold  and  securities. 

2.  —  An  echo  of  this  construction  is  occasionally  met  with  in 
Spanish :  — 

'*  —  te  he  dicho 
Que  me  des  de  lo  anejo 
Cuando  te  pida  vino," 


" —  I  ordered  you 
To  give  me  some  of  the  old 
When  I  call  for  wine.1" 
—  Cadalso,  Obras,  Madrid,  1818,  vol.  iii.,  p.  37. 


es  or  son  de  los  f amosos,   [hay, 
son  de  los  mas  c^lebres  que 


it  is  or  they  are  famous  ones, 
they  are  some  of  the  best  known. 


1  To  distinguish  him  from  Herrera  el  viejo,  the  elder  Herrera. 


The  Article. 


325 


3.  —  In  Spanish,  as  in  English,  the  partitive  substantive  may  be 
qualified  by  some  term  like  alguno,  un  poco  de,  some,  a  little,  for 
the  singular ;  and  algunos,  unos,  unos  cuaiitos,  unos  pocos,  some, 
a  few,  for  the  plural :  — 


deme  V.  un  poco  de  pan, 
trae  unos  cuaiitos  paquetes, 


give  me  a  little  bread, 
he  brings  a  few  parcels. 


a.    Also  in  a  great  many  adverbial  expressions  :  — 


a  pie  ;  a  caballo  ;  en  coche, 
con  alegria ;  con  dolor, 
a  casa ;  en  casa, 
llevado  en  triunfo, 


on  foot ;  on  horseback ;  by  coach, 
with  joy  ;  with  sorrow, 
home  {motion)  ;  at  home  (rest). 
borne  in  triumph. 


664.  Third.  The  definite  article  is  expressed  in  Span- 
ish and  omitted  in  English,  when  it  designates  an  object, 
a  substance,  or  a  thought,  in  an  universal,  very  general, 
or  in  an  absolute  sense,  for  the  singular,  and  all  the 
individuals  of  a  class,  for  the  plural :  — 


la  vida  es  breve, 

la  juventud  es  pasajera, 

el  oro  es  preciosfsimo, 

el  trigo  es  abundante, 

la  caridad  es  benigna, 

la  muerte  se  acerca,       [jenable, 

la  libertad  es  un  derecho  ina- 

la  buena  administracion  conduce 

a  la  prosperidad, 
el  hombre  piensa ;  —  habla, 
los  caballos  son  utiles, 
los  gobiernos  son  necesarios, 
los  hombres  piensan ;  —  hablan, 


life  is  short. 

youth  is  transitory. 

gold  is  very  precious. 

wheat  is  plentiful. 

charity  is  kind. 

death  draws  near. 

liberty  is  an  inalienable  right. 

good    administration    leads    to 

prosperity. 

man  thinks  ;  —  talks, 
horses  are  useful, 
governments  are  necessary, 
men  think  ;  —  talk. 


REMARK.  — Nearly  all  these  and  similar  comprehensive  sentences 
may  be  turned  into  particular  ones,  when  the  sense  requires  it,  or  by 
some  slight  modification,  such  as  the  insertion  of  an  adjective,  an 
adjunct,  or  a  relative  :  — 


326 


Syntax. 


la  vida  del  hombre  es  breve, 
el   mejor   trigo  no  es  siempre 

abundante, 

el  hombre  que  piensa, 
los  caballos  que  posee, 


the  life  of  man  is  short. 

the   best  wheat   is    not    always 

plentiful. 

the  man  who  thinks. 
the  horses  which  he  owns. 


a.    The  same  law  applies  to  the  English  also,  in  a 
few  words,  when  we  speak  of  them  in  general  terms  :  — 

the  mind  cannot  grasp  it. 
the  horse  is  an  exceedingly  strong 
and  useful  animal. 


la  mente  no  lo  alcanza, 
el  caballo  es  un  animal  suma- 
mente  fuerte  y  util, 


b.  Likewise,  in  general,  the  article  is  expressed  with 
words  that  are  originally  adjectives,  when  they  are  used 
as  nouns,  and  are  taken  in  an  universal  or  very  compre- 
hensive range  of  meaning  :  — 

misers  (the  avaricious)  are  never 
.  satisfied. 
Spaniards  (the  Spanish)  are  very 

jealous  of  their  honor, 
both  Protestants  and  Catholics 

worship  God. 


los   avaros    nunca   estdn   satis- 

fechos, 
los  Espanoles  son  bastante  pun- 

donorosos, 
tanto  los  Protestantes  como  los 

Catdlicos  adoran  a  Dios, 


665.   The   definite   article  is  furthermore   expressed 
diversely  from  the  English  usage :  — 

a.   With  the  names  of  the  days  of  the  week,  except 
in  dates  :  — 


vendra"  el  sabado, 
los  mie'rcoles  y  jue'ves, 
todos  los  m£rtes  y  viernes, 
domingo,  tres  de  abril, 


he  will  come  on  Saturday. 
Wednesdays  and  Thursdays, 
every  Tuesday  and  Friday. 
Sunday,  April  3. 


b.   With  the  names  of  the  seasons  :  — 


en  la  primavera  parece  que  la 
naturaleza  se  despierta  como 
de  un  sueno, 


in  spring,  nature  appears  to  rouse 
up  as  from 


The  Article. 


327 


mi  amigo  pasa  el  verano  d  los 
ban  os  de  mar ;  el  otono  en 
Madrid,  y  el  invierno  en  Se- 
villa  6  Malaga, 


my  friend  spends  summer  at  the 
seaside,  autumn  at  Madrid, 
and  winter  in  Seville  or  Ma- 
laga. 


c.    Before  all  titles  of  respect,  dignity,  or  office,  when 
the  individual  is  spoken  of,  not  when  he  is  addressed:  — 

el  sefior  y  la  senora  (or  los  se- 

fiores)  de  Moreno, 
las  senoritas  de  Garcia, 
el  rey  don  Alfonso  doce, 
el  general  Concha, 
el  secretario  Zurita, 
el  cardenal  Quiroga, 
el  maestro  Luis  de  Leon, 
el  padre  Inigo  (een'-ye-go), 
la  madre  Serafina, 


Mr.  and  Mrs.  Moreno. 

the  Misses  (young ladies)  Garcia. 

King  Alfonso  the  Twelfth. 

General  Concha. 

Secretary  Zurita. 

Cardinal  Quiroga. 

Master  Louis  de  Leon. 

Father  Ignatius. 

Mother  Seraphina  (prioress). 


Exceptions  are :  the  title  of  don  (before  the  Christian  name)  ; 
fray  (of  an  ecclesiastical  order)  and  frey  (of  a  military  order) ,  brother*, 
sail  or  santo,  saint ;  sor  (of  nuns) ,  sister,  but  the  more  common 
word  hermana  takes  the  article ;  as,  sor  Angelica,  or  la  hermaiia 
Angelica,  sister  Angelica. 

d.  Before  the  names  of  Italian  classic  writers  and 
artists :  — 

el  Dante,  el  Bocacio,  el  Petrarca,  el  Ticiano,  etc. 


So  also  with  the  names  of  Spanish  authors  when  they 
represent  their  works  :  — 

bring  me  Garcilaso's  works. 
I  do  not  find  that  word  in  Covar- 
rubias  (Dictionary,  1611). 


tr£igame  V.  el  Garcilaso, 
no  encuentro  esa  voz  en  el  Co- 
varrubias, 


The  same  with  titles  of  well-known  books  :  — 


la  Raquel  de  Vicente  Garcia  de 

la  Huerta  6  la  de  Ulloa, 
estoy  leyendo  el  Quijote, 


Huerta's  or  Ulloa's  Rachel  (tra- 

gedy). 
I  am  reading  Don  Quixote. 


328 


Syntax. 


e.    With  a  few  names   of   countries,  provinces,  and 
cities.     Such  are  at  present  chiefly :  — 


el  Japon ;  el  Brasil, 

el  Canada ;  el  Peru, 

el  Paraguay ;  la  Florida, 

La  Mancha ;  La  Rioja, 

Castilla  la  Nueva ;  —  la  Vieja, 

la  Coruna ;  la  Habana, 

el  Ferrol ;  el  Cairo  ;  el  Havre, 


Japan ;  Brazil. 

Canada;  Peru. 

Paraguay ;  Florida. 

{provinces  of  Spain). 

New  —  Old  —  Castile .        [vana. 

Corunna  (the  "Groyne")  ;    Ha- 

Ferrol ;  Cairo  ;  Havre. 


REMARK.  —  With  other  names  of  countries  and  provinces  it  is 
not  now  common  to  use  the  article,  save  in  the  poetical  or  oratorical 
style,  or  when  an  adjective  qualifies  them. 

la  Europa  catdlica,  I    Catholic  Europe. 

la  Espafia  liberal,  |    liberal  Spain. 


/.    With  the  Christian  names  of  women  in  familiar 
style :  — 

Mary;  Jane. 

Mercy ;  Dolores. 

Josie  gave  it  to  me. 

Molly  was  not  unacquainted  with 


la  Maria ;  la  Juana, 
la  Mercedes  ;  la  Dolores, 
me  lo  regalo  la  Pepa, 
la  Mariquita  no  ignoraba  el  con- 
tenido  de  la  carta, 


the  contents  of  the  letter. 


Also  with  surnames,  but  generally  vulgar :  — 
me  lo  conto  la  Alvarez,  |    (the  woman)  Alvarez  told  it  to  me. 


g.    With  numerals  to  indicate  the  hour :  — 

it  is  one  —  ten  —  o'clock. 

at  one  ;  at  ten  (o'clock). 

at  twelve  o'clock,  noon. 

before  sunrise,  at  an  early  hour. 


es  la  una ;  son  las  diez, 
a*  la  una ;  a*  las  diez, 
a"  las  doce  (del  dia) , 
a*  la  madrugada, 


k.   With  many  adverbial  and  other  phrases  :  — 


a"  la  noche  ;  a"  la  ciudad, 

a"  la  escuela ;  a"  la  iglesia, 

en  la  ciudad  ;  en  la  escuela,  etc., 

al  cuidado  de  ;  las  mafianas, 


at  night ;  to  town. 

to  school ;  to  church. 

in  town  ;  at  school ;  —  church. 

in  care  of;  mornings. 


The  Article. 


329 


666.  The  definite  article  is  sometimes  employed  for 
the  indefinite,  in  general,  indeterminate,  expressions  and 
phrases : — 

la  fragancia  de  la  rosa, 

me   parece    que    la   monarquia 

tiene  sus  ventajas, 
me  did  las  buenas  noches  y  salid, 


the  fragrance  of  a  rose, 
it  appears  to  me  that  a  monarchy 
has  its  advantages,  [went  out. 
he  bade  me  (a)  good  night  and 


a.    Also  to  denote  rate,  with  words  signifying  weight, 
measure,  and  distance  :  — 


dos  duros  la  libra, 

cuatro  reales  la  botella, 

a  tanto  la  vara ;  —  la  legua, 


two  dollars  a  pound. 

four  reals  a  bottle. 

at  so  much  a  yard ;  —  a  league. 


667.   The  definite  article  is  omitted  in  Spanish  and 
expressed  in  English  :  — 

a.    Before  a  number  indicating  the  order  of  succes- 
sion of  pontiffs  and  sovereigns :  — 


Pablo  cuarto,  or  Pablo  IV,, 
Carlos    quinto    de   Alemania   y 

primero  de  Espana, 
Felipe  segundo  ;  —  tercero  ;  etc. 
Fernando  septimo, 
Alfonso  doce,  rey  de  Espana, 


Paul  the  Fourth,  or  Paul  IV. 
Charles  the  Fifth  of  Germany 
and  the  First  of  Spain,   [etc. 
Philip  the.Second  ;  —  the  Third  ; 
Ferdinand  the  Seventh. 
Alfonso  XII.,  king  of  Spain. 


Except  when  speaking  of  the  ancient  sovereigns  in  whose  times 
the  article  was  employed,  but  even  with  these  the  use  is  not 
uniform :  — 


Don  Alfonso  decimo, 
Don  Alfonso  el  onceno, 
Don  Enrique  el  cuarto, 
Don  Juan  segundo,  or  el  s., 


Alfonso  the  Tenth. 
Alfonso  the  Eleventh. 
Henry  the  Fourth  (of  Spain). 
John  the  Second  (of  Spain). 


REMARK.  —  The  ordinal  numbers  are  used  in  such  cases  up  to 
eleven ;   thence  onward  the  cardinals.     See  §  674. 


330 


Syntax. 


b.   With  nouns  in  the  predicate  modified  by  an  ad- 
junct :  — 


es  hija  de  un  conde, 
es  comandante  de  la  plaza, 
la  necesidad  es  madre  de  la  in- 
vention, 

ha  sido  nombrado  representante 
de  Espaiia  cerca  de  la  Santa 
Sede, 


she  is  the  daughter  of  an  earl. 

he  is  the  commander  of  the  fort 

necessity  is  the  mother  of  inven- 
tion. 

he  has  been  appointed  the  repre- 
sentative of  Spain  near  the 
Holy  See. 


c.   With  a  word  in  apposition  :  — 


Don  Quijote,  obra  del  inmortal 

Cervantes, 

Madrid,  corte  de  Espafia, 
Boabdil,   ultimo    rey   moro   de 

Granada, 


Don  Quixote,  the  work  of  the 
.    immortal  Cervantes. 
Madrid,  the  capital  of  Spain. 
Boabdelf,  the  last  Moorish  king 
of  Granada. 


d.   At  the  head  of  titles  of  books  and  articles  :  — 


Vida  del  arzobispo  de  Toledo, 

primado  de  las  Espanas, 
Historia  del  sitio  de  Gibraltar, 

Revista  Hispano-Americana, 


The  Life  of  the  Archbishop  of 
Toledo,  the  Primate  of  Spain. 

The  History  of  the  Siege  of  Gib- 
raltar. 

The  Spanish-American  Review. 


e.    In  certain  conventional  phrases  :  — 


d  esquina  de  tal  calle, 

d  orillas  de  un  rio, 

a*  razon  de  cuatro  millas  la  legua, 

ir  A  casa  de ;  —  £  palacio, 
estar  en  casa  de ;  —  en  palacio, 

tener  intencion  de, 
dormir  siesta  (=  hora  sexto) , 
de  parte  de  su  padre, 
en  nombre  de  la  religion, 
con  objeto  de, 


on  the  corner  of  such  a  street. 

on  the  banks  of  a  river. 

at  the  rate  of  four  miles  per 

league.  [palace, 

to  go  to  the  house  of;  —  to  the 
to  be  at  the  house  of;  —  at  the 

palace. 

to  have  the  intention  of. 
to  take  the  noon  nap. 
on  the  part  of  his  father, 
in  the  name  of  religion, 
with  the  object  of. 


The  Article. 


331 


Use  of  the  Indefinite  Article. 


668.  The  indefinite  article  un,  una,  is  in  general  used 
much  the  same  in  both  languages.  Special  divergences, 
however,  are  the  following  :  — 


669.   The  indefinite  article  is  omitted  in  Spanish  :  — 

a.  Before  substantives  standing  in  the  predicate  when 
they  denote  rank,  class,  occupation,  and  characteristic, 
in  very  general  terms  :  — 


mi  amigo  es  capitan, 

fulano  es  artista  ingles, 

es  caballero  ;  es  titulo, 

es  sastre  ;  es  albanil, 

es  cobarde  ;  es  holgazan, 

se  ha  hecho  soldado, 

la  fe  es  don  de  Dios, 

dar  la  limosna  es  obra  de  caridad, 

es  catolico  ;  es  protestante, 

es  judio  ;  es  libre  pensador, 


my  friend  is  a  captain, 
such  a  one  is  an  English  artist, 
he  is  a  gentleman ;  —  a  noble, 
he  is  a  tailor ;  —  a  mason, 
he  is  a  coward ;  —  an  idler, 
he  has  become  a  soldier, 
faith  is  a  gift  of  God.    [charity. 
to  distribute  alms  is  a  work  of 
he  is  a  Catholic ;  —  a  Protestant, 
he  is  a  Jew  ;  —  a  free-thinker. 


REMARK.  —  But  if  the  separate  existence  of  the  predicate  sub- 
stantive is  to  be  emphasized  and  particularized,  the  article  may  be 
expressed :  — 

es  un  cobarde  ;  —  un  holgazan, 
esta  nina  es  una  pobre  huerfana, 
es  un  oficial  de  grande  merito, 
su  madre  es  una  catdlica  de  las 
ma's  fervorosas, 


he  is  a  coward ;  —  an  idler, 
this  girl  is  a  poor  orphan, 
he  is  an  officer  of  great  merit, 
her    mother    is    a    most    fervid 
Catholic. 


b.    With  nouns  designating  title,  office,  or  attribute, 
preceded  by  the  preposition  de :  — 


el  empleo  de  secretario, 
va  de  embajador  a  tal  parte, 


the  office  of  (a)  secretary, 
he  goes  as  an  ambassador  to  such 
a  place. 


332 


Syntax. 


el  tftulo  de  grande  de  Espana, 
el  nombre  de  libertador  de  la 
patria, 


the  title  of  (a)  grandee  of  Spain, 
the    name    of   liberator   of   his 
country. 


c.  With  substantives  that  express  an  idea  in  a  general, 
indefinite  way :  — 


tengo  motivo  para  afirmarlo, 
tiene  derecho  de  manifestarlo, 
poner  precio ;  —  tasa  or  coto, 
poner  escuela ;  —  tienda, 
buscar  vida  desahogada, 
llegd  a"  pasar  por  jdven  de  espe- 

ranzas, 

los    palaciegos    lo    tenfan    por 
incomparable  desgracia  el  ser 
desterrado  de  la  corte, 
manifesto  ddio  encarnizado  con- 
tra la  herejfa,  [festar, 
dia  vendra  en  que  lo  he  de  mani- 


I  have  a  reason  for  affirming  it. 

he  has  a  right  to  declare  it. 

to  fix  a  price  ;  —  a  limit. 

to  set  up  a  school ;  —  a  shop. 

to  seek  an  easy  life. 

he  came  to  be  considered  as  a 
young  man  of  expectations. 

palace  people  considered  it  an 
unequalled  calamity  to  be  ex- 
iled from  the  court. 

he  exhibited  a  furious  hatred 
towards  heresy,  [declare  it. 

a  day  will  come  in  which  I  shall 


d.  After  the  verb  tener  with  a  substantive  denoting 
some  quality  of  the  mind  or  heart,  when  combined  with 
an  adjective :  — 

tiene  buen  corazon, 

tiene  feliz  memoria,  [cerlo, 

tiene  grande  inclinacion  de  ha- 


he  has  a  good  heart. 

he  possesses  a  fine  memory. 

he  has  a  great  mind  to  do  it. 


REMARK.  —  So  also  in  general  after  tener  and  tener  por,  as  under 
rule  c,  in  indefinite  statements  :  — 


tener  gana  de,  tiempo  de, 
tener  apetito  ;  —  motives, 


to  have  a  mind,  time,  to. 

to  have  an  appetite  ;  —  reasons. 

e.    With  words  in  apposition  :  — 


Cddiz,  ciudad  de  Andalucia, 

Calderon,  poeta  insigne, 

la  Carta  de  Paracuellos,  sdtira 

de  Francisco  Sanchez, 
entrd  su  hijo,  muchacho  vivo, 


Cadiz,  a  city  of  Andalusia. 
Calderon,  a  celebrated  poet, 
the  Paracuellos  Epistle,  a  satire 

by  Francisco  Sanchez, 
his  son,  a  bright  lad,  came  in. 


The  Article. 


333 


f.  With  certain  indefinite  expressions,  like  otro,  otra 
vez,  cierto,  seme j ante,  tal,  como,  gran  numero  de, 
tan :  — 


vino  el  dia  siguiente  otro  aviso, 

otra  vez  no  sere  tan  torpe, 
Jlego  a  mis  oidos  cierta  noticia, 
no  me  gusta  seme  j  ante  engafio, 
tal  dia ;  tal  noche, 
obro  como  maestro, 
la  pintura  como  arte, 
hubo  gran  numero  de  gente, 
a  tan   concluyente   explicacion 
nadie  puede  replicar, 


the  following  day  another  notice 
came.  [stupid. 

another  time  I  shall  not  be  so 

a  certain  item  came  to  my  ears. 

I  do  not  like  such  deception. 

such  a  day ;  such  a  night. 

he  proceeded  like  a  master. 

painting  as  an  art.          [people. 

there   was   a   large   number  of 

to  such  a  conclusive  explanation 
no  one  can  reply. 


g.    With  nouns  in  negative  sentences  :  — 


sin  obtener  respuesta, 
se  me  sin  decir  palabra, 
sin  que  recibiese  contestacion, 
no  me  ha  de  quedar  consuelo, 
no  tengo  genio  para  eso, 


without  obtaining  an  answer, 
he  went  off  without  saying  a  word, 
without  his  getting  a  reply, 
no  consolation  will  remain  to  me. 
I  have  no  talent  for  that. 


h.    At  the  head  of  book  titles  :  • 


Diccionario  de  la  Lengua  Cas- 

tellana,  [Espanola, 

Ensayo    sobre    la    Legislacion 


A   Dictionary   of  the   Castilian 

Language.  [tion. 

An  Essay  on  Spanish  Legisla- 


i.    With  nouns  denoting  weight  or  measure,  accom- 
panied by  the  fractions  thereof  :  — 


compre  libra  y  media, 
anduve  legua  y  cuarta, 
me  midio  dos  varas  y  tercia, 


I  purchased  a  pound  and  a  half. 
I  travelled  a  league  and  a  quarter, 
he  measured  me  off  two  yards 
and  a  third. 


j.    In  exclamations  after  que :  — 


i  quo*  ruido !  ;  qu£  dia  ! 
i  qu^  hermoso  paisaje  ! 
i  que  bobo  eres  ! 


what  a  noise  !  what  a  day  ! 
what  a  fine  landscape  ! 
what  a  dunce  you  are  ! 


334 


Syntax. 


Use  of  the  Neuter  Article  I^o. 

670.  The  neuter  article  lo  is  only  used  in  the  singular, 
and  turns  an  adjective  into  a  substantive,  for  which  a 
pure  substantive  may  likewise  be  often  employed  (see 
§§83;  113,*):- 

dominaba  en  ella  el  sentimiento 

de  lo  maravilloso, 
no  dejes  de  mandarles  algo  de 

lo  mucho  que  vas  a  ganar, 

en  lo  sucesivo ;  lo  pasado, 

en  lo  ma's  escondido  de  un  valle, 

contra  lo  dispuesto  por  las  leyes, 


the  sense  of  the  marvellous  was 
dominant  in  her. 

do  not  fail  to  send  them  some- 
thing of  the  much  you  will 
earn. 

for  the  future ;  the  past. 

in  the  most  retired  (part)  of  a 
valley.  laws. 

against  what  is  provided  by  the 


671.  The  substantive  nature  of  the  adjective  with  lo 
is  especially  manifest  when  they  are  accompanied  by 
que  with  the  verb  to  be,  or  one  of  its  substitutes.  In  this 
case,  as  we  have  seen  (§  113,  a),  the  adjective  is  varied 
anomalously,  agreeing  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
noun  subject  to  the  verb.  The  formula  then  will  be:  — 

Lo — variable  adjective  —  que — verb  to  be  —  noun-subject;  or,  without 
que :  noun-subject  —  verb  to  be  —  lo  —  variable  adjective. 


lo  amentf  que  es  esta  pradera, 
lo  caprichostf  que  es  la  imagina- 

cion,  [ballero, 

lo  pundonoroso  que  es  este  ca- 
lo  fresco  que  son  estas  aceitunas, 
lo  desatendid#.y  que  habian  sido 

sus  suplicas, 
lo  honradw  que  se  considerarian, 

si,  etc. 
lo  conveniently  que   fueron  en 

otros  tiempos,  y  lo  util&r  que 

pueden  ser  todavia, 


the  amenity  of  this  green  field. 

the  capriciousness  of  the  imagi- 
nation, [tleman. 

the  punctiliousness  of  this  gen- 

the  freshness  of  these  olives. 

the  deaf  ear  that  had  been  turned 
to  his  prayers. 

the  honor  they  would  consider 
done  to  them,  if,  etc. 

the  suitableness  of  them  in  other 
days,  and  their  possible  utility 
still. 


The  Numeral. 


335 


una  prueba  de  lo  satisfactory 
que  le  son  vuestros  trabajos, 

el  ministro  se  propone  que  la 
discusion  de  los  presupuestos 
sea  todo  lo  amplitf  posible, 

es  una  de  esas  reformas  que  por 
lo  necesarirtj  estan  fuera  de 
toda  discusion, 


a  proof  of  his  satisfaction  with 
your  labors. 

the  minister  proposes  to  give 
all  possible  latitude  to  the 
discussion  of  the  budget. 

it  is  one  of  those  reformatory 
measures,  the  necessity  of 
which  is  too  evident  for  dis- 
cussion. 


The  literal  version  of  a  few  of  these  examples,  which  are  all  taken 
from  modern  writers,  will  explain  this  extraordinary  idiom :  — 

The  agreeable  that  this  green  field  is;  the  fresh  that  these  olives  are  ;  the 
honored  that  they  would  consider  themselves,  if,  etc. ;  the  suitable 
that  they  were  in  other  tijties,  and  the  useful  that  they  may  still  be  ;  a 
proof  of  the  satisfactory  that  your  labors  are  to  him  ;  the  minister 
proposes  that  the  debate  on  the  estimates  be  all  the  broad  possible ; 
it  is  one  of  those  reforms  that  by  the  necessary  (on  account  of  their 
necessity)  are  beyond  all  discussion. 


The  Use  of  the  Numerals. 

672.   Order  in  a  series  is  properly  expressed  as  in 
English  by  the  ordinal  numbers  :  — 


el  primer  dia ;  el  segundo  afio, 

el  tercer  aniversario, 

la  cuarta  fila, 

el  quinto  articulo,  [cima, 

las  lecciones  de*cima  y  undd- 

los  siglos  de'cimo  sexto  y  de'ci- 

mo  septimo, 
el  libro  trige'simo  tercio, 


the  first  day ;  the  second  year. 

the  third  anniversary. 

the  fourth  row  or  file. 

the  fifth  article. 

the  tenth  and  eleventh  lessons. 

the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth 

centuries, 
the  thirty-third  book. 


673.  Popularly,  the  cardinals  are  more  generally  used 
than  the  ordinals  to  specify  the  number  of  a  volume, 
book,  chapter,  lesson,  century,  or  other  word  which, 
from  its  signification,  naturally  involves  a  series :  — 


336 


Syntax. 


capftulo  veinte  y  uno, 
leccion  quince, 
pagina  ciento  y  una, 
el  siglo  diez  y  nueve, 


chapter  twenty-first, 
lesson  fifteenth, 
page  one  hundred  and  first, 
the  nineteenth  century. 


674.  The  ordinals  are  used  up  to  eleven,  to  indicate 
the  order  of  succession  of  sovereigns  ;  but  from  that 
number,  the  cardinals  are  regularly  substituted :  — 


Carlos  primero  de    Espana  y 

quinto  de  Alemania, 
Henrique  cuarto, 
Fernando  se'ptimo, 
Leon  trece ;  Alfonso  doce, 
Luis  catorce,  rey  de  Francia, 


Charles  the  First  of  Spain  and 

the  Fifth  of  Germany. 
Henry  the  Fourth. 
Ferdinand  the  Seventh. 
Leo  XIII;  Alfonso  XII. 
Louis  XIV,  king  of  France. 


675.  The  cardinal  numbers  are  used  instead  of  the 
ordinals,  in  dates,  with  the  sole  exception  of  primero, 
first.  In  this  case,  the  month  and  year,  when  ex- 
pressed, are  always  to  be  preceded  by  the  preposition 
de:  — 

Madrid,  January  first,  eighteen 
hundred  and  eighty. 

the  second  of  May,  1808. 

April  I7th. 

February  nth. 


Madrid,  primero  de  Enero,  de 
mil  ochocientos  y  ochenta, 

el  dos  de  Mayo,  de  1808, 

el  diez  y  siete  de  Abril, 

el  dia  once  de  Febrero, 

viernes,  cuatro  de  Julio,  de  mil 
setecientos  sesenta, 

vendra  el  dia  diez, 


Friday,  July   fourth,  seventeen 

hundred  and  sixty, 
he  will  come  on  the  loth. 


REMARK. —  The  word  dia,  day,  may  be  or  not  employed  when 
the  month  is  expressed ;  but  when  the  number  stands  alone,  it  is 
more  common  to  give  it:  — 

el  dia  quince  Junio,  or  1 
el  quince  de  Junio,  J 
el  dia  cuatro, 

tenemos  cita  para  el  dia  doce, 
fallecid  el  dia  dieciseis, 


the  fifteenth  of  June. 

the  fourth.  [twelfth, 

we  have  an  appointment  for  the 
he  died  on  the  sixteenth. 


The  Numeral. 


337 


676.  The  question,  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ?  may 
be  expressed  in  Spanish  by  £  que  dia  del  mes  tenemos? 
or  by  £  a  cuantos  estamos  del  mes  ?  and  is  answered 
in  the  first  case  by  the  cardinal  number  (except  \hefirsi) 
with  the  definite  article ;  and  in  the  second  case,  by  the 
same  preceded  by  the  preposition  a,  with  or  without 
the  corresponding  verb  :  — 


tenemos  [seis, 

el  primero ;   el  dos ;  el  dieci- 


estamos 
a  primero ;  a  dos ;  a  diez  y  seis 


it  is  the  first ;  —  the  second ;  —  the  sixteenth. 
REMARK.  —  Indefinite  or  approximate  expressions  are  :  — 


a  primeros  de  (Enero), 

a  principios  del  (siglo  actual) , 

a  mediados  del  (ano  pasado), 
a  fines  del  (siglo  pasado), 

a  ultimos  del  (mes  que  viene), 
More  definite  are  :  — 

a  or  en  primero  de  (mes) , 
a  or  en  fin  de  (ano), 


in  the  early  part  of  (January) . 
at  the  beginning  of  (the  present 

century) . 

about  the  middle  of  (last  year) . 
toward   the    close   of   (the   last 

century) . 
about  the  end  of  (next  month). 


on  the  first  of  (the  month) . 
at  the  end  of  (the  year) . 


677.  A  week  is  more  often  expressed  by  ocho  dias, 
and  a  fortnight  by  quince  dias,  than  by  the  general 
terms  una  semana,  dos  semanas :  — 

he  will  come  within  a  week. 

a  week  from  to-morrow. 

I  have  not  seen  him  in  more  than 


vendra  dentro  de  ocho  dias, 

mafiana  en  ocho  dias, 

hace  ma's  de  quince  dias  que 

no  le  veo  ;  quince  dias  ha", 
de  hoy  en  ocho  (quince)  dias, 


a  fortnight ;  a  fortnight  ago. 
a  week  (fortnight)  from  to-day. 


678.  The  hour  or  time  of  day  is  expressed  by  the  car- 
dinals with  the  feminine  article  plural  las  (except  la  una, 
one),  agreeing  with  hora,  horns,  understood  :  — 


338 


Syntax. 


I  qu6  hora  es  ? 

es  la  una ;  la  una  y  media, 

es  la  una  y  tres  cuartos,  or  1 

son  las  dos  menos  cuarto,  J 

son  las  once ;  las  doce, 

son  las  diez  y  cuarto, 

a  la  una ;  a  las  siete, 

a  las  dos  de  la  madrugada, 

d  las  ocho  de  la  mafiana, 

a  las  cuatro  de  la  tarde, 

a  las  nueve  de  la  noche, 

REMARK.  —  To  strike  the 
tively :  — 
las  tres  van  a  dar, 
ya  van  a  dar  las  cinco, 
ban  dado  las  doce  ya, 
dada  la  una ;  dadas  las  once, 
al  dar  las  doce, 


what  time  is  it?  [o'clock, 

it    is    one  —  half-past    one  — 

it  is  quarter  to  two. 

it  is  eleven  —  twelve  —  o'clock. 

it  is  a  quarter  past  ten. 

at  one  o'clock ;  at  seven. 

at  two  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

at  eight,  A.M. 

at  four  o'clock,  P.M. 

at  nine  o'clock  at  night. 

hour  is  dar  la  hora,  used  intransi- 


it  is  going  to  strike  three, 
it  is  just  going  to  strike  five, 
it  has  already  struck  twelve, 
when  it  had  struck  one  —  eleven, 
as  it  struck  twelve. 


679.  In  stating  age,  the  Spanish  employs  the  verb 
tener,  to  have,  with  anos,  years,  preceded  by  the  cardi- 
nal number :  — 


I  cuantos  anos  tiene  V.  ? 

<;que  edad  tiene  V.  ? 

tengo  veinticinco  anos, 

este  jdven  tendra  unos  diez  y 

ocho  anos, 
su  padre  tiene  cincuenta  afios, 

y  su  madre  cuarenta, 
no  es  muy  viejo, 
es  todavia  jdven,  6  ma's  bien  de 

edad  mediana, 
es  un  viejo  (indelicate),       \ 
es  un  anciano  (courteous) ,  J 
me  mi  antfguo  preceptor, 


how  old  are  you? 

what  is  your  age  ? 

I  am  twenty-five  years  old. 

this  young  man  must  be  about 

eighteen, 
his  father  is  fifty  years  old,  and 

his  mother  forty, 
he  is  not  very  old  (in  life), 
he  is  still  young,  or  rather  in 

middle  life. 


he  is  an  old  man. 

he  was  my  old  teacher. 

REMARK.  —  Viejo  always  signifies  literally  old  in  years ;  old, 
meaning  "  former,"  is  autiguo  ;  he  is  an  old  friend,  es  un  antiguo 


Agreement. 


339 


amigo.  To  be  "older"  than  another  is,  tener  mas  edad,  mas 
anos,  que  otro,  although  aged  people  might  say  of  each  other,  mas 
vie  jo  que,  older  than. 

680.  "To  be  just  so  many  years  old,"  "to  have  com- 
pleted so  many  years  "  is  tener  —  aiios  cumplidos, 
cumplir  —  anos: — 


tiene  veintiseis  anos  cumplidos, 
al  cumplir  los  trece  anos, 


he  is  just  twenty-six  years  old. 
when  he  had  completed  his  thir- 
teenth year. 


REMARK.  —  Idioms  with  expressions  of  age  and  time  are :  — 


a  los  dos  dias, 

A  la  edad  de  cinco  anos, 

a  los  cinco  anos  de  su  edad, 

a  los  veinte  anos  de  su  reinado, 

a  los  cinco  meses  de  su  estancia, 
fallecid  joven  de  veinte  anos, 


in  two  days,  on  the  second  day. 

at  five  years  of  age. 

at  the  age  of  five  years. 

in  the  twentieth  year  of  his  reign. 
f  after  a  stay  of  five  months,  or 
[when  he  had  stayed  five  months. 

he  died  at  the  age  of  twenty  years. 


The  Laws  of  Agreement. 

The  Adjective  and  Noun. 

681.  Adjectives  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
substantive  they  limit  or  describe  :  — 

un  hombre  activo, 
una  senora  anciana, 
personas  emprendedoras, 
ciertas  sociedades  son  fomen- 


tadoras  de  la  riqueza  piiblica, 


an  active  man. 
an  old  lady, 
enterprising  persons, 
certain  societies  are  promoters 
of  the  public  wealth. 


682.  A  plural  substantive  may  be  limited  by  two  or 
three  adjectives  in  the  singular,  agreeing  in  gender 
only,  when  they  relate  to  distinct  members  of  the  same 
series  :  — 


340 


Syntax. 


las  lenguas  castellana  y  fran- 

cesa, 

los  tomos  primero  y  cuarto, 
los  siglos  segundo  y  tercero, 


the    Spanish    and    French    lan- 
guages. 

the  first  and  fourth  volumes, 
the  second  and  third  centuries. 


683.  When  an  adjective  relates  to  two  or  more  sub- 
stantives  of  the  same  gender  (whichever  be  the  num- 
ber), it  stands  in  the  plural,  and  the  gender  will  be 
determined  by  that  of  the  substantives  :  — 


el  padre  y  el  hijo  estan  malos, 
la  madre  y  su  hija  son  muy  pare- 

cidas, 

la  madre  y  sus  hijas  son  bellas, 
la  aplicacion  y  constancia  en  el 

estudio    son    necesarias    al 

que  quiere  adelantar, 


the  father  and  son  are  ill. 

the  mother  and  her  daughter 
look  very  much  alike.  [fair. 

the  mother  and  her  daughters  are 

diligence  and  perseverance  in 
study  are  necessary  to  one 
who  desires  to  advance. 


684.  When  an  adjective  relates  to  two  or  more 
substantives  in  the  singular  number  and  of  different 
genders,  it  stands  in  the  masculine  plural,  provided  the 
substantives  have  distinct  meanings  :  — 


el  padre  y  la  madre  son  ambos 

caritativos,         [admiracion, 

el  cielo  y  la  tierra  son  dignos  de 

la  plaza  y  el  cuartel  mas  limpios 

de  la  ciudad, 


the  father  and  mother  are  both 
benevolent.       [of  admiration, 
the  sky  and  the  earth  are  worthy 
the  neatest  square  and  neighbor- 
hood in  town. 


REMARK.  —  If,  however,  the  two  nouns  are  synonymous,  or 
nearly  so,  in  meaning,  whichever  be  their  gender,  the  adjective 
agrees  in  the  singular  with  the  nearest  noun :  — 


muestra  una  capacidad,  un  ta- 

lento  singular, 
con  un  alborozo,  una  satisfac- 

cion  indescriptible, 
para  solaz  y  desahogo  comun, 


he  displays  singular  ability  and 
talent. 

with  indescribable  joy  and  sat- 
isfaction, [lief. 

for  common  consolation  and  re- 


Agreement. 


341 


685.  When  an  adjective  relates  to  two  or  more  sub- 
stantives in  the  plural  number  and  of  different  genders, 
it  agrees  with  the  nearest  noun  in  gender  and  number :  — 


observaban  ademanes  y  conver- 

saciones  agitadas,       [vanos, 

sus  esperanzas  y  temores  eran 


they  noticed  excited  gestures  and 

conversation.  [vain. 

their  hopes  and  their  fears  were 


686.  Adjectives  of  all  kinds  that  stand  before  the 
noun  they  limit  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
nearest  one  :  — 


nuestro  atraso  y  decadencia, 
poca  unidad  y  trabazon, 
con  singular  vigor  y  presteza, 
con  mucha  furia  y  denuedo, 


our  low  state  and  decline, 
little  unity  and  connection,  [ness, 
with  marked  energy  and  prompt- 
with  great  fury  and  boldness. 


687.  With  titles,  the  adjective  agrees  with  the  natural, 
not  the  grammatical,  gender,  when  it  stands  in  the 
predicate  or  as  a  participle  past :  — 


su  majestad  esta*  enfermo, 
su  majestad  esta  enferma, 
sus  majestades,  prevenidos,  se 
levantaron, 


his  majesty  is  ill. 
her  majesty  is  ill. 
their   majesties    (the   king  and 
queen)  being  notified,  arose. 


a.    But  adjectives  that  form  part  of  the  title  agree 
regularly :  — 

su  sagrada  majestad,  his  sacred  majesty  (Rom.  Emp.). 

sus  majestades  catdlicas,  their  Catholic  majesties. 

vuestra  sefioria,  your  lordship. 


The  Verb  with  its  Subject. 


688.   The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject,  expressed  or 
understood,  in  number  and  person  :  — 


yo  leo ;  nosotros  leemos, 
la  hoja  cae ;  las  hojas  caen, 


I  read ;  we  read. 

the  leaf  falls  ;  the  leaves  fall. 


342 


Syntax. 


689.  Collective  terms  in  the  singular  number  require 
a  verb  in  that  number  whether  they  involve  the  idea  of 
unity  or  plurality  :  — 


el  pueblo  le  escucha, 

el  piiblico  se  divierte, 

la  gente  lo  dice, 

el  ejeVcito  avanza, 

la  tropa  acudid, 

el  congreso  se  reunid, 

la  Academia  lo  aprueba, 

la  junta  se  disolvid, 

la  multitud  se  impresiond, 

la  poblacion  queda  tranquila, 

el  rebano  huye  ante  el  lobo, 


the  people  listen  to  him. 

the  public  amuse  themselves. 

people  say  so. 

the  army  moves  forward. 

the  troops  came  up. 

the  congress  met. 

the  Academy  approves  it. 

the  committee  was  dissolved. 

the  throng  was  moved. 

the  town  remains  quiet. 

the  flock  flees  from  the  wolf. 


690.    Collective  terms  followed  by  an  adjunct  in  the 
phiral,  expressed  or  understood,  require  a  plural  verb :  — 


multitud  de  personas  le  felici- 
taron,  [tieron  en  ello, 

gran  parte  de  ellos  no  consin- 
la  mayor  parte  lo  saben, 
parte  venian  sin  armas, 
la  mitad  perecieron, 

la  mayor  parte  de  la  gente  lo 

cree, 
gran  parte  de  la  poblacion  ha 

quedado  reducida  a  cenizas, 


but 


crowds  of  people  congratulated 
him.  [agree  to  it. 

a  large  number  of  them  did  not 
the  greater  part  know  it. 
a  part  came  without  arms, 
one-half  perished. 
L 

the  greater  part  of  the  people 
believe  it. 

a  large  part  of  the  town  was  re- 
duced to  ashes. 


691.   Nouns  in  the  singular,  connected  by  the  correla- 
tive ni  —  ni,  neither  —  nor,  are  now  generally  accom- 
panied by  a  plural  verb  :  — 
ni  el  miedo  ni  el  interes  torcie- 

ron  su  fe, 
ni  un  solo  grito,  ni  un  solo  gesto 


empafiaron  aquella  escena, 


neither  fear  nor  interest  swerved 
his  faith. 

neither  a  single  shout  nor  a  sin- 
gle gesture  marred  that  scene* 


Agreement. 


343 


REMARK.  —  With  6  —  6,  either  —  or,  the  use  of  the  language 
does  not  seem  to  be  fixed,  both  numbers  being  met  with :  — 

either   ambition   or   anger   im- 
pelled him. 


6  la  ambicion  6  la  ira  le  movid 
and  le  movieron, 


692.  When  there  are  two  or  more  subjects  in  either 
number,  the  verb  is  regularly  put  in  the  plural ;  but 
in  vehement  discourse,  the  verb  is  often  found  to  agree 
in  the  singular  with  the  first  noun  of  a  series,  before 
which  the  verb  stands,  as  if  the  enumeration  of  char- 
acteristics were  mere  expansions  of  one  thought :  — 


la  novela  y  las  poesias  me  han 

gustado  mucho, 
las  cartas  y  el  prologo  me  pare- 

cieron  muy  bien  escritos, 

nunca  fu6  tan  expuesto  su  valor 
y  constancia,  ^ 

decia  mi  amigo,  con  la  autoridad 
que  le  da  su  palabra,  su  talen- 
to,  su  integro  caracter, 


I  was  much  pleased  with  the 
novel  and  the  poetry. 

the  letters  and  the  preface  ap- 
peared to  me  to  be  very  well 
written. 

his  courage  and  firmness  were 
never  so  tested. 

my  friend  said, with  all  the  weight 
that  his  words,talent,and  integ- 
rity of  character  give  him  .... 


a.   A  singular  verb  may  accompany  a  double  subject  when  these 
are  used  synonymously,  whichever  be  the  position  of  the  verb  :  — 


el   contento    y   el    aplauso   fu6 

grande, 
el  disgusto   y  murmuracion  no 

dejd  de  hacerse  sentir, 


the    satisfaction    and    applause 

were  great, 
dissatisfaction  and  murmurs  did 

not  fail  to  make  themselves  felt. 


693.  When  a  verb  has  two  or  more  subjects  of  differ- 
ent persons,  it  is  put  in  the  plural  and  agrees  with  the 
first  person  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and  with 
the  second  person  rather  than  the  third  :  — 


ni  yo  ni  mi  amo  la  habemos 
visto  jamas,  [buenos, 

yo  espero  que  tu  y  ella  est^is 
iieinos  usted  y  yo, 


neither  I  nor  my  master  have 

ever  seen  her. 

I  hope  that  you  and  she  are  well, 
you  and  I  will  go. 


344 


Syntax. 


694.  When  the  subject  is  a  relative  pronoun,  the  verb 
properly  agrees  in  person  and  number  with  the  person  to 
whom  the  relative  refers,  that  is,  with  the  antecedent  :  — 


yo  soy.quien  lo  digo, 

nosotros  somos  los  que  lo  hemos 

visto,  [mejor  que  yo, 

vosotros  sois  los  que  lo  sabeis 
VV.  son  los  que  hablaron  con 

el, 


I  am  the  one  who  say  it. 

we  are  the  ones  who  saw  it,  or  we 

saw  it.  [better  than  we. 

you  are  the  ones  who  know  it 
you  are  the  ones  who  spoke  to 

him. 


a.   In  ordinary  language,  however,  and  even  in  literature,  it  is 
not  uncommon  to  find  the  verb  in  the  third  person :  — 


yo  soy  quien  lo  dice,        [favor, 
ahora  soy  yo  el  que  pide  a"  V.  el 


I  am  the  one  who  say  (says)  it. 
it  is  I  who  ask  you  the  favor  now. 


695.  The  third  person  plural  is  often  used  in  reference 
to  a  vague  subject  equivalent  to  the  passive  voice,  or  to 
the  French  on  with  a  singular  verb  :  — 


vuelva  V.  mafiana,  nos  decian 

en  todas  partes,          [casino, 

cuando  cierran  el  cafe  voy  al 


come  again  to-morrow,  said  they 

everywhere.         [to  the  club. 

when  they  close  the  cafe,  I  go 


(that  ,is,  /  was  told  everywhere  to  call  the  next  day.     French  :  me 
disait-on  par  t out ;  lorsqtfon  ferme  le  cafe,je  m*en  vais  au  cercle.) 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 

Indicative  Mode. 
696.    PRESENT  TENSE. 


hablo ;  estoy  hablando, 
cdmo ;  estoy  comiendo, 
vivo ;  estoy  viviendo, 


I  speak ;  I  am  speaking. 
I  eat;      .1  am  eating. 
I  live  ;      I  am  living. 


a.    Expresses  what  occurs  at  the  time  in  which  it  is 
asserted :  — 

escribo  una  carta,  I  am  writing  a  letter. 

Juan  lee  el  diario,  John  is  reading  the  paper. 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 


345 


REMARK.  —  In  this  sense,  the  Spanish  may  employ  equally  well 
the  simple  verb  or  the  progressive  form  (§  379)  :  — 


escribo,  or 


\ 


estoy  escribiendo  J 


una  carta. 


Juan  lee,  or 


\ 


Juan  estd  leyendo  J 


el  diario. 


b.    Expresses  habit,  custom,  and  absolute  fact,  with- 
out regard  to  a  determinate  period :  — 

my  uncle  is  a  journalist. 

I  give  Spanish  lessons. 

we  get  up  early. 

my  sister  draws  well.         [away. 

God  gives  wealth  and  takes  it 


mi  tio  es  periodista, 
doy  lecciones  de  Castellano, 
nos  levantamos  temprano, 
mi  hermana  dibuja  bien, 
Dios  da  los  bienes  y  los  quita, 
el  hombre  propone,  y  Dios  dis- 
pone, 


man    proposes,    and   God    dis- 
poses. 


c.    Replaces  the  future  in  familiar  language  :  — 

I'll  go  at  once. 

he'll  be  back  directly. 

in  that  case  I'll  not  go  out. 

what  shall  I  do  ?  consent  ? 

I  will  not  sign  it. 

will  you  do  me  the  favor? 


voy  al  instante, 
vuelve  en  seguida, 
en  ese  caso  no  salgo, 
I  que  hago  ?  ^  consiento  ? 
no  lo  firmo, 

hace  V.  el  favor? 


d.    Replaces  the  past  definite  in  lively  narration  :  — 


coge  su  sombrero  y  sale, 
llega,  saluda,  y  me  dice, 


he  caught  up  his  hat  and  went  out. 
he  came  up,  greeted  me,  and  said . 


e.    Used  idiomatically  after  a  clause  with  the  imper- 
sonal verb  hace,  it  is,  with  expressions  of  time  :  — 


hace  mucho  tiempo  que  no  le 
veo,  [en  esta  casa, 

hace  cuatro  afios  que  vivimos 

hace  ocho  dias  que  rondan  la 
calle  donde  vivo, 

^cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  esta 
V.  en  Madrid?  [raiido? 

^hace  mucho  que  esta  V.  espe- 


it  is  a  long  time  since  I  have 
seen  him.  [house. 

we  have  lived  four  years  in  this 

for  a  week  they  have  been  prowl- 
ing about  the  street  I  live  in. 

how  long  have  you  been  in 
Madrid? 

have  you  been  waiting  long? 


346 


Syntax. 


697.    IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


hablaba ;  estaba  hablando, 
comia ;  estaba  comiendo, 
vivia ;  estaba  viviendo, 


I  spoke  ;  I  was  speaking. 
I  ate ;        I  was  eating. 
I  lived ;     I  was  living. 


a.    Denotes  progressive  continuity  in  the  past :  — 


como  decia ;  como  andaba, 
me  hacia  senales, 


as  I  was  saying ;  —  walking, 
he  made  signs  to  me. 


b.  Describes  an  action  or  situation  that  was  going 
on  or  existing,  when  some  incident,  expressed  by  the 
past  definite,  was  introduced  or  intervened.  In  this 
case,  the  progressive  form  must  be  employed  in  Eng- 
lish and  may  be  also  in  Spanish :  — 


escribia  (or  estaba  escribien- 
do)  cuando  entr<5  Juan, 

estaba  (or  me  encontraba)  en 
mi  despacho  cuando  oi  elgrito, 

mientras  que  nos  paseabamos, 
empezd  a"  Hover, 


I  was  writing  when  John  came 

in. 
I  was  in  my  office  (or  study) 

when  I  heard  the  cry. 
while  we  were  taking  a  walk,  it 

began  to  rain. 


c.  Denotes  customary  action  or  state  -  during  some 
previous  period.  In  this  case,  it  may  be  translated  by 
the  absolute  imperfect  (/  spoke)  or  by  the  term  "  used 
to":  — 


cuando  vivia  en  Sevilla,  visita- 

ba  amenudo  los  jardines  del 

duque, 
me   gustaba   andar  por  el   rio 

entre  la  Torre  del  Oro  y  el 

Puente  de  Barcas, 
le  veia  todos  los  dias, 
los  Griegos  cultivaban  las  letras 

y  los  Romanos  la  guerra, 


when  I  lived  in  Seville,  I  often 
visited  the  duke's  gardens. 

I  used  to  like  strolling  along  the 
river,  between  the  Gold-Tower 
and  the  Bridge  of  Boats. 

I  used  to  see  him  daily. 

the  Greeks  cultivated  letters, 
and  the  Romans  war. 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 


347 


REMARK.  —  Custom   may  also  be  expressed  by  the  imperfect 
tense  of  the  verb  soler,  to  be  wont  to:  — 


en  aquella  epoca  solfamos  ir 
cada  ano  d  los  bafios, 

solian  acompafiarnos  muchos 
amigos  y  amigas, 


at  that  period,  we  used  to  go  to 

the  baths  every  year, 
many  friends  of  both  sexes  were 

wont  to  accompany  us. 


d.  It  is  translated  by  the  absolute  past  when  it  in- 
volves the  idea  of  more  or  less  duration  over  a  series  of 
moments  or  of  years.  In  this  sense,  it  is  found  in  vivid 
descriptions  and  narrations,  or  to  declare  what  a  person 
or  object  was  during  a  certain  period  in  the  past :  — 

mirabale     el     muchacho     con 

asombro, 
me  decla  muchas  cosas  que  me 


causaban  extraneza,      [casa, 
estaba   de   hue'sped    en    dicha 
Ciceron  era  grande  orador, 
Alejandro  era  rey  de  Grecia, 


the  lad  gazed  at  him  with  aston- 
ishment. 

he  told  me  many  things  which 
surprised  me.  [mentioned. 

I  was  a  boarder  in  the   house 

Cicero  was  a  great  orator. 

Alexander  was  king  of  Greece. 


e.  In  the  old  language,  especially  in  the  ballad  poetry,  the 
imperfect  occasionally  takes  the  place  of  the  present  when  the  verse 
requires  it :  — 


Si  hallo  el  agua  clara, 
Turbia  la  bebia  yo, 


If  I  find  the  water  clear, 
When  I  drink  it  it  is  roiled. 


—  Ballad  beginning  "Fontefrida* 


Que  un  Cristiano  dejo  muerto, 
Tras  mi  venla  el  alcalde, 


I  have  slain  a  Christian, 
The  sheriff  is  pursuing  me. 


—  Ballad  "Yo  m*era  mora  Moray  ma" 
f.   In  familiar  language,  the  imperfect  often  replaces  the  condi- 


tional :  — 

si  le  hubiera  dicho  la  verdad,  me 
exponia  a"  un  regano, 

era  tan  amigo  del  padre  Quieto, 
que  no  le  movia  un  terre- 
moto, 


if  I  had  told  him  the  truth,  I 
should  have  risked  a  scolding. 

he  was  so  partial  to  father  Ease, 
that  an  earthquake  would  not 
disturb  him. 


348 


Syntax. 


REMARK.  —  The  simple  form  of  the  English  past  tense  (f  spoke, 
I  wrote)  is  expressed  then,  in  Spanish,  by  two  distinct  tenses  —  the 
imperfect,  denoting  prolonged  past  action  or  custom ;  and  by  the 
past  definite,  denoting  past  action  without  continuity,  a  past  inci- 
dent :  — 


hablaba,  /  spoke  >  —  that  is,  / 
was  speaking. 


liable,  I  spoke,  - 
occasion  past. 


•  that  is,  on  one 


698.    PAST  DEFINITE  TENSE. 
/  spoke.         \        comi,  /  ate.        \        vivl,  /  lived. 

a.  Indicates  what  occurred  on  one  occasion  in  the 
past,  whether  a  short  time  or  ages  before,  of  which  no 
part  is  continued  to  the  present,  and  without  involv- 
ing duration  or  extension  of  time.  It  is,  therefore,  the 
tense  of  absolute  past  time,  corresponding  to  the  Greek 
aorist :  — 


le  vi  hace  un  momento, 

lo  dijo  ayer,  pero  lo  niega  hoy, 

Juan  sali6  temprano,       [corial, 
el  mes  pasado  estuve  en  el  Es- 
Alejandro  muri6  jdven, 
Cain  mat6  a  su  hermano, 


I  saw  him  a  moment  ago. 
he  said  so  yesterday,  but  he  de- 
nies it  to-day. 
John  went  out  early, 
last  month  I  was  at  the  Escorial. 
Alexander  died  young. 
Cain  slew  his  brother. 


b.  Hence  the  past  definite  is  the  favorite  tense  for 
historical  narration,  in  every  case  in  which  the  action 
or  state  is  devoid  of  the  idea  of  repetition,  custom,  and 
prolonged  duration,  which  distinguishes  it  radically  from 
the  imperfect :  — 

until  the  morning  of  the  eighth, 
the  confessor  was  not  able  to 
inform  the  king -of  the  edict, 


hasta  la  manana  del  ochp  no 
pudo  el  confesor  enterar  del 
edicto  a  Carlos  III,  quien  sin 
demora  mandd  a"  su  ministro 
despachar  un  correo  al  Inqui- 
sidor  general, 


who  immediately  directed  his 
minister  to  despatch  a  courier 
to 'the  Inquisitor-general. 


—  Ferrer  del  Rio,  Cdrlos  ///,  Madrid,  1856;  I.  388. 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 


349 


la  ciudad  de  Granada  fu£  po- 
blacion  de  los  de  Damasco,  que 
vinieron  con  Tarif  su  capi- 
tan ;  i  diez  anos  despues  que 
los  Alarabes  echaron  a"  los 
Godos  del  senorio  de  Espana, 
la  escogieron  por  habitacion, 


the  city  of  Granada  was  set- 
tled by  people  from  Damascus, 
who  came  with  Tarif  their 
leader,  and  ten  years  after  the 
Arabs  drove  the  Goths  from 
power  in  Spain,  they  selected 
it  for  their  residence. 


—  Mendoza,  Guerra  de  Granada,  Lisbon,  1627;  f.  2,  £. 

c.  In  the  ancient  language,  the  past  definite  was  often  replaced 
by  the  old  pluperfect  in  ra  (hablara,  comiera,  from  the  Latin /5z£#- 
laram,  comederairi),  now  limited  mostly  to  the  subjunctive  mood :  — 

El  dixera  otra  razon,  |    He  gave  a  different  message. 

—  Ballad  "Rosa  fresca." 

Por  ahi  fuera  a"  pasar,  |    He  passed  that  way. 

"Fonte  frida" 

Into  the  fire  he  threw  the  notes, 
And  slew  the  messenger. 


Las  cartas  echo  en  el  fuego, 
Y  al  mensagero  matara, 


—  Ballad  "Pasedbase  el  rey  moro." 


699.    PAST  INDEFINITE  TENSE. 


he  hablado, 

he  comido, 

he  vivido, 

he 

he  estado  comieiido, 

be  estado  viviendo, 


I  have  spoken. 

I  have  eaten. 

I  have  lived. 

I  have  been  speaking. 

I  have  been  eating. 

I  have  been  living. 


a.    Denotes  what  is  absolutely  past,  but  wholly  unde- 
termined as  to  the  specific  period  :  — 


Ixe  escrito  una  carta, 

no  digas  nada  a  nadie  de  lo  que 

nemos  tratado,  [cion, 

nan  cumplido  con  su  obliga- 
^habeis  quedado  en  no  ir? 
VV.  no  han  dicho  nada, 
Espana  ha  producido  grandes 

hombres, 


I  have  written  a  letter. 

do    not   tell   anybody  anything 

about  what  we  have  talked, 
they  have  discharged  their  duty, 
have  you  decided  not  to  go  ? 
you  have  said  nothing. 
Spain  has  produced  great  men 


350 


Syntax. 


b.    Indicates  a  determinate  epoch  in  the  past  which 
has  not  entirely  elapsed  :  — 


hoy  hemos  escrito  algunas  car- 

tas, 
mi  hermano  se  marchd  la  semana 

pasada  y  ha  vuelto  hoy, 
este    afio    ha    habido    mucha 

lluvia,  [tal  ? 

<;  cuando  ha  vis  to  V.  a  fulano  de 
le  he  visto  este  mes,     1 
no  le  vl  el  mes  pasado,*j 


we  have  written  some  letters  to- 
day. 

my  brother  went  away  last  week, 
and  has  returned  to-day. 

there  has  been  a  good  deal  of 
rain  this  year.  [So? 

when  have  you  seen  Mr.  So  and 
have  seen  him  this  month, 
did  not  see  him  last  month. 


c.    This  tense  is  often  used  incorrectly  at  the  present 
day  in  imitation  of  the  French  :  — 

POPULAR. 

he  ido  anoche  al  teatro. 
ha  venido  ayer  y  se  ha  alojado 

en  la  fonda  del  Cisne. 


CORRECT. 

anoche  fui  al  teatro. 
vino  ayer  y  se  alojo  en  la  fonda  del 
Cisne. 


d.  The  progressive  form  is  used  the  same  as  the 
common  one,  except  that  it  can  only  stand  when  the 
time  during  which  an  action  or  state  lasted  is  men- 
tioned or  easily  implied  :  — 


^que'  ha  hecho  V.  hoy?  [hoy? 
<;que  ha  estado  V.  haciendo 
he  estado  escribiendo  cartas, 


what  have  you  done  to-day? 
what  have  you  been  doing  to-day  ? 
I  have  been  writing  letters. 


700.    PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


habia  hablado, 

habia  comido, 

habia  vivido, 

habia  estado  hablando, 

habia  estado  comiendo, 

habia  estado  viviendo, 


I  had  spoken. 

I  had  eaten. 

I  had  lived. 

I  had  been  speaking. 

I  had  been  eating. 

I  had  been  living. 


a.  Expresses  an  action  or  event  that  is  absolutely 
completed,  with  reference  to  another  which  was  simul- 
taneous with  or  subsequent  to  it,  expressed  or  implied : — 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 


351 


yo  habia  leido  ya  un  traslado 

del   libro,   antes   que   saliese 

impreso, 
61   habia   estado    durmiendo 

durante  la  conversacion, 
le  pregunte  si  habia  oido  alguna 

cosa  nueva, 


I  had  already  read  a  transcript 
of  the  book,  before  it  came  out 
in  print. 

he  had  been  sleeping  during  the 
conversation . 

I  asked  him  if  he  had  heard  any- 
thing new. 


701.    PAST  ANTERIOR. 


(cuando)  hube  hablado, 
(cuando)  hube  comido, 
(cuando)  hube  vivido, 


(when)  I  had  spoken, 
(when)  I  had  eaten, 
(when)  I  had  lived. 


a.  Expresses  the  same  as  the  pluperfect,  but  is  al- 
ways preceded  by  some  conjunction  of  time,  such  as, 
cuando,  when;  despues  que,  after;  luego  que,  asi 
que,  tan  pronto  como,  as  soon  as;  no  bien,  no  sooner; 
apenas,  scarcely,  hardly ;  etc.  :  — 


cuando  hube  leido  el  oficio,  se 

lo  devolvi, 
luego  que  hubo  escrito  la  con- 

testacion,  la  entregd  al  mozo, 
tan  pronto  como  hubimos  pe- 

netrado  en  el  anden,  se  puso 

en  marcha  el  tren, 


when  I  had  read  the  (official)  pa- 
per, I  handed  it  back  to  him. 

after  he  had  written  the  answer, 
he  delivered  it  to  the  waiter. 

as  soon  as  we  had  reached*  the 
platform  of  the  station,  the 
train  began  to  move  off. 


702.  A  simple  form  of  the  pluperfect  indicative  is  often  met  with 
in  the  exalted  prose,  or  poetical,  style,  a  form  derived  from  the 
Latin  original  in  -aram,  -eram,  etc.,  and  which  is  now  chiefly  con- 
fined to  the  imperfect  subjunctive  in  -ra  :  — 


el  pendon  de  Castilla  onde6 
luego  en  una  de  las  torres  (de 
la  Alhambra)  donde  tantos 
siglos  tremolara  el  estandarte 
del  Profeta, 


soon  the  pennon  of  Castile  float- 
ed out  over  one  of  the  towers 
(of  the  Alhambra)  where,  for 
so  many  centuries,  the  Proph- 
et's standard  had  waved. 


—  Lafuente,  Hist,  de  Espana,  1850. 


352 


Syntax. 


divorciado  del  partido  en  cuyas 
aras  lo  sacrificara  todo, 

—  Emilio  Castelar,  Ferdinand  VII,  1864. 

abominado   de    la    teocracia   a" 
quien  sirviera, 


Trayendo  a"  nuestros  pechos  la 

dulzura 
Que  perdieran  un  tiempo  aun 

no  olvidado, 


divorced  from  the  party  on  whose 
altars  he  had  sacrificed  all. 


detested  by  the  fanatics  whom 
he  had  served.  —  Ibid. 


Restoring  to  our  hearts  the  joys 

of  peace 
That  they  had  lost  in  days  not 

yet  forgotten. 


—  Sonnet  to  King  Alfonso,  1877. 

.  703.    FUTURE  TENSE. 

hablar£,  /  shall  speak.  \  corner^,  /  shall  eat.  \  vivir£,  /  shall  live. 


a.    Denotes  future  time  :  — 


escribir^  la  carta  mafiana  por  la 

manana, 

I  que  hara  V.  en  ese  caso  ? 
la  guerra  acabara  pronto, 
habra  una  cosecha  abundante 

este  afio, 

^cuando  vendra?  sabes? 
sera  V.  elegido  diputado, 


I  shall  write  the  letter  to-morrow 
morning.  ^ 

what  will  you  do  in  that  case?,) 

the  war  will  close  soon. 

there  will  be  an  abundant  har- 
vest this  year. 

when  will  he  come,  do  you  know  ? 

you  will  be  elected  to  Congress. 


b.  It  is  employed  in  a  potential  sense  in  interrogative 
sentences  that  are  undeniable  in  the  estimation  of  the 
interrogator  ;  also  in  queries  :  — 


^  habra  desgracia  mayor  que  la 

mia?  [mas  ruin? 

I  podra    manifestarse     infamia 


can  there  be  a  greater  misfortune 

than  mine?  [light? 

can  baser  villainy  be  brought  to 


c.  Replaces  the  present  tense,  when  something  is 
affirmed  of  which  there  is  a  doubt.  In  such  case,  some 
adverb  or  phrase  must  be  inserted  like  perhaps,  I  sus- 
pect, I  wonder;  and  when  speaking  of  time  or  age, 
about :  — 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 


353 


vendr£  para  abonarme  la  can- 

tidad  que  me  debe, 
no  se  a*  que  vendra, 
^cuantos  anos  tendril? 
tendra  unos  veinte  anos, 
<ique  hora  sera? 
seraii  las  diez, 


he  is  coming,  perhaps,  to  pay  me 

the  amount  he  owes  me. 
I  do  not  know  what  he  comes  for. 
about  how  old  is  he  ?    [years  old. 
he  is  somewhere  about  twenty 
what  time  is  it,  I  wonder? 
it  must  be  about  ten. 


('d.)  Denotes  not  so  much  future  time  as  will,  moral 
consent  or  refusal :  — 


har£  todo  cuanto  V.  quiera, 
no  lo  hare*  de  ningun  modo, 


I  will  do  all  you  desire. 

I  will  not  do  it  by  any  means. 


704.    Idiomatic  future  forms  are  :  — 

a.   Haber  de,  to  have  to,  to  be  to,  to  will,  to  be  about  to,  denoting 
mild  duty,  intention,  design,  with  reference  to  the  future  :  — 

to-morrow  I  am  to  dine  with  a 
friend  of  mine. 

she  is  to  make  her  returns  Mon- 
day morning. 

I  assure  you  that  we  will  not  go. 


mafiana  he  de  ir  a  comer  con 

un  amigo  mio, 
ella  ha  de  entregar  el  lunes  por 

la  manana,  [de  ir, 

la  aseguro  a  V.  que  no  hemos 


b.  Haber  de  also  signifies  possible  possession,  to  believe  that  one 
has,  must  have :  — 


he  de  tener  en  casa  un  ejemplar 
del  libro  que  V.  busca, 


I  think  I  have  at  home  a  copy  of 
the  book  you  seek. 


c.   Tener  que,  to  have  to,  must,  denotes  necessity,  positive  obli- 
gation :  — 

we  poor  people  have  to  toil  to 

earn  our  daily  bread, 
what  have  you  got  to  dp  to-day  ? 
a  word  with  you  (seriously) . 


tenemos  los  pobres  que  trabajar 
para  ganar  el  pan  de  cada  dia, 
<ique  tiene  V.  que  hacer  hoy? 
tenemos  que  hablar, 


d.  Tener  que  means  also  what  remains  to  be  said,  done,  or 
denotes  expostulation :  — 


ique  tiene  V.  que  decir? 

el  no  tiene  nada  que  ver  con  eso, 


what  have  you  to  say? 

he  has  nothing  to  do  with  that. 


354 


Syntax. 


e,   Tener  de,  to  have  to,  denotes  provision :  — 


^tenemos  algo  de  comer?  or 
<,  hay  algo  de  comer? 


have  we  anything  to  eat? 
is  there  anything  to  eat? 


f.   Ir  a,  with  an  infinitive,  to  be  going  to:  — 


voy  a  visitarle, 

va  d  ver  lo  que  sale, 

van  a  oir  misa, 

705. 

habr£  hablado, 
habre  comido, 
habr3  vivido, 


I  am  going  to  pay  him  a  visit, 
he  is  going  to  see  what  will  result 
they  are  going  to  attend  mass. 


FUTURE  PERFECT. 

I  shall  have  spoken. 
I  shall  have  eaten. 
I  shall  have  lived. 


a.   This  tense  bears  the  same  relation  to  the  simple 
future  that  the  pluperfect  and  past  anterior  do  to  the 
past  definite :  — 
ya  habr6  terminado  la  tarea 

cuando  llegue  el  verano, 


manana  a"  estas  horas  ya  habra 
concluido  todo, 


I  shall  have  finished  my  task 
when  summer  comes. 

to-morrow,  about  this  time,  all 
will  be  over. 


b.  The  same  special  rules  belong  to  this  tense  as  to 
the  simple  form  (§  703,  #,  c)  to  express  a  conjecture  in 
the  tone  of  conviction  or  confidence :  — 


<jse  habra  visto  cosa  ma's  enre- 

dada?  [chico? 

<ique    vicio    habra    tenido    el 

ya    habras     oido    decir    eso 

muchas  veces,  [mente, 

no  te  habras  expresado  clara- 

habran   recibido    malas    noti- 

cias, 


could    anything    be    more    in- 
volved? [have  had? 
what  bad  habit  could  the  boy 
doubtless  you  have  often  heard 
that  said.        [yourself  clearly, 
probably  you  have  not  expressed 
they  must   have   received   bad 
news. 


706.    CONDITIONAL  PRESENT. 
hablarfa,  f  should  speak.  \  comerla,  f  should  eat.  \  vivirla,  f  should  live. 

a.    Used  chiefly  in  conditional  sentences  of  which  it 
naturally  forms  the  apodasis  or  conclusion,  while  the 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 


355 


clause   with   si,  if,  forms   the  protasis  or   states   the 
condition  :  — 

leeria  todo  el  dia,  si  tuviese 

tiempo, 
si  no  creia  que  me  hiciese  dano, 

comeria  dun  mas, 


viviria  mucho  ma's  tiempo,  si  se 
cuidase  mejor, 


I  should  read  all  day,  if  I  had 

time, 
if  I  did  not  think  it  would  hurt 

me,  I  should  eat  even  more, 
he  would  live  much  longer,  if  he 

took  better  care  of  himself. 


b.  In  the  protasis  the  forms  in  -se  and  -ra  are  inter- 
changeable :  — 

leeria  todo  el  dia,  si  tuviera  I    I  should  read  all  day,  if  I  had 
(or  tuviese)  libros,  books. 

c.  The  clauses  in  the  protasis  and  apodosis  may  freely 
exchange  places  :  — 


si  tuviese  (or  tuviera)  dinero, 

comprarfa  la  finca,     [haria  ? 

si  estuviese  V.  en  mi  lugar  ^que* 


if  I  had  money,  I  would  purchase 

the  property,    [would  you  do  ? 

if  you  were  in  my  place,  what 


d.    The  protasis  may  be  understood  or  implied  :  — 


yo  no  lo  haria  de  modo  alguno, 
dijo  que  vendria, 
el  consentiria  en  ello,  yo  n6, 
creyeron   que   habria   una  paz 
duradera, 


I  would  not  do  it  by  any  means, 
he  said  that  he  would  come, 
he  would  agree  to  it,  I  would  not. 
they  believed  that  there  would 
be  a  lasting  peace. 


e.    To  express  a  wish  or  modest  request :  — 


desearia  ver  las  habitaciones  de 
este  cuarto. 


I  would  like  to  see  the  rooms  of 
this  apartment. 


REMARK.  —  In  this  sense,  the  subjunctive  form  in  -ra  with  the 
verb  querer,  to  wish,  to  like,  is  more  common :  — 


quisiera  ver  lo  que  tiene  V.  en 
telas  de  algodon, 


I  should  like  to  see  what  you  have 
in  cotton  goods. 


f.   To   indicate  an  approximate   or  uncertain   state- 
ment in  narrations :  — 


356 


Syntax. 


seria  la  una  de  la  madrugada, 
serian  las  dos  de  la  tarde, 
dicha  senora  seria  muy  hermpsa, 


it  was  about  one  A.M. 
it  was  about  two  P.M. 
the  lady  you  mention  was  very 
beautiful,  /  suppose. 


g.    To  express  possibility  or  fitness  :  — 


I  seria  verdad  eso  ? 
^deberia  de  hacerlo  yo? 


could  that  be  so  ? 

ought  I  to  do  it,  forsooth  ? 


The  Use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode. 

707.  The  subjunctive  mode  expresses  necessity,  doubt, 
or  emotion,  and  is  chiefly  used  in  a  clause  dependent 
on  a  verb  containing  one  of  these  ideas. 

708.  In    independent    and    principal    sentences    the 
subjunctive  is  used  :  — 

a.  In  the  present  tense  to  supply  the  imperative 
mode,  affirmatively  in  the  first  and  third  persons,  and 
negatively  in  all  persons  :  — 


sea  yo, 

let  me  be. 

no  sea  yo, 

let  me  not  be. 

(j/*£), 

(be  thou). 

no  seas  (tu), 

do  not  be. 

sea  el, 

let  him  be. 

no  sea  (//), 

let  him  not  be. 

sea  V., 

&?(sing.). 

no  sea  V., 

do  #6?  &  (slag.). 

seamos  nosotros 

,  let  us  be. 

no  seamos, 

let  us  not  be. 

(  sed  vosotros)  , 

(be  ye). 

no  seais, 

do  not  be. 

scan  ellos, 

let  them  be. 

no  sean, 

let  them  not  be. 

scan  VV., 

be  (plur.). 

no  sean  VV., 

do  not  <fe(plur.). 

haga  yo, 

let  me  do. 

no  haga  yo, 

let  me  not  do. 

(haz\ 

(do  thou). 

no  hagas, 

do  not  do. 

haga, 

let  him  do. 

no  haga, 

let  him  not  do. 

haga  V., 

do  (sing.). 

no  haga  V., 

do  not  doling.). 

hagamos, 

let  us  do. 

no  hagamos, 

let  us  not  do. 

(haced)* 

(do  ye). 

no  hagais, 

do  not  do. 

hagan, 

let  them  do. 

no  hagan, 

let  them  not  do. 

hagan  VV., 

do  (plur.). 

no  hagan  VV., 

do  not  do  (plur.). 

The  Use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode. 


357 


REMARK.— Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  the  imperative  has  only 
one  proper  form  in  each  number,  and  that  in  the  affirmative  diction. 
In  all  the  other  persons,  and  throughout  the  negative  inflection,  the 
subjunctive  must  be  used.  Hence,  we  cannot  say,  no  has,  no  haced; 
no  se\  no  sed;  but  only  no  hagas,  no  hagais ;  no  seas,  no  seats:-— 


haz  lo  que  te  digo, 

no  hagas  lo  que  te  prohibo, 

haced  lo  que  os  digo, 

no  hagais  lo  que  os  prohibo, 

And  in  polite  address  :  — 

haga  V.  lo  que  le  digo, 
no  haga  V.  lo  que  le  prohibo, 
Jiagan  VV.  lo  que  les  digo, 
no  hagan  VV.  lo  que  les  prohibo, 


do  what  I  tell  thee. 

do  not  do  what  I  forbid  thee. 

do  what  I  tell  you. 

do  not  do  what  I  forbid  you. 


do  what  I  tell  you  (sing.). 
do  not  do  what  I  forbid  you. 
do  what  I  tell  you  (plur.). 
do  not  do  what  I  forbid  you. 


b.    To  ex 
gestion  :  — 
seale  la  tierra  leve, 
alabente  los  cielos, 
hagame  V.  el  favor, 
pidan  lo  que  quieran, 
i  viva  el  rey ! 
sepan  cuantos  estas  cartas  vie- 

ren, 

pongamos  fin  a  la  platica, 
sepamos  que  es  esto, 
andeme  yo  caliente,  y  riase  la 

gente  (Gongora,  1627), 


a  gentle  command,  exhortation,  sug- 


may  the  ground  be  light  over  him. 
may  the  heavens  praise  thee. 
pray  do  me  the  favor, 
let  them  ask  for  what  they  wish, 
long  live  the  king  ! 
know  all  men  by  these  presents 
(let  all  know  who  shall  see,  etc.) . 
let  us  end  the  discussion, 
let  us  know  what  this  is. 
let  me  be  warm,  and  the  people 
may  scorn. 


REMARK. — With  this  use  of  the  subjunctive,  que  may  be  added 
—  an  ellipse  to  be  explained  by  understanding  some  verb  expressing 
a  command  or  wish  :  — 


que  pase,  let  him  enter. 
que  saiga,  let  him  come  out. 
que  venga  otro,  bring  another . 


que  baile,  let  him  dance.  [out. 
que  no  saiga  nadie,  let  no  one  go 
que  se  quite,  take  him  (or  //)  off. 


c.    With  indeterminate  expressions  involving  indiffer- 
ence :  — 


358 


Syntax. 


venga  lo  que  viniere, 

saiga  lo  que  saliere, 

sea  la  que  fuere  la  contestacion, 

digan  lo  que  quieran, 

donde  quiera  que  vayan, 

d.   With  correlatives  that 
que  lo  sepa  6  no, 
que  llueva  6  que  no  llueva, 
que  quieras  6  no  quieras, 
quisiese  6  no  quisiese,     [otro, 
ya  sea  por  un  motivo,  ya  sea  por 
al£grese  6  no  el  pueblo, 


come  what  may. 
be  the  issue  what  it  may. 
be  the  answer  what  it  may. 
let  them  say  what  they  please, 
wherever  they  go. 

express  alternative :  — 

whether  he  knows  it  or  not. 
whether  it  rains  or  not. 
whether  you  will  or  no. 
whether  he  would  or  not.  [other, 
whether  for  one  reason  or  for  an- 
whether  the  people  rejoice  or  not. 


e.    In  the  present  or  imperfect  with  verbs  denoting  a 
wish :  — 


plegue  a"  Dios  no  saiga  asi, 

[alii, 

pluguiese  a"  Dios  me  encontrdra 

ojald    hubiese    escuchado    mis 

consejos,  [obra, 

permita  Dios  que  lo  pongas  por 


God  grant 


may  not  turn 


I  had  been  there  ! 
woulcHnat  he  had  listened  to  my 
counsels  !  [practice  ! 

God  grant  that  you  may  put  it  in 


709.  The  subjunctive  mode  is  employed  in  dependent 
sentences  connected  with  the  principal  clause  by  the 
conjunction  que,  that:  — 

a.  When  the  principal  clause  contains  a  term  that 
denies,  doubts,  or  questions  the  assertion  or  possibility 
of  the  assertion  contained  in  the  dependent  sentence:  — 

no  creo  que  lo  haya  hecho, 
dudoquelohayandicho,  [tado? 
I  es  verdad  que  lo  hayan  inten- 
no  pudo  ser  que  lo  negasen, 
ni  puede  sostenerse  que  fuera 

ma's  tirdnico  que  sus  contem- 

pordneos, 
no  se  sabe  que  lo  hayan  variado, 


I  do  not  believe  he  did  it. 

I  doubt  whether  they  said  so. 

is  it  true  that  they  attempted  it? 

they  could  not  have  denied  it. 

and  it  cannot  be  maintained  that 
he  was  more  tyrannical  than 
his  contemporaries.  [it. 

it  is  not  known  that  they  changed 


The  Use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode. 


359 


REMARK.  —  If  the   dependent  verb   refers    to    the   future,   the 
appropriate  tense  is  employed :  — 

,j,cree  V.  que  triunfar^mos  ?       |  do  you  think  we  shall  triumph? 

b.    When  the  verb  in   the  principal   clause  denotes 
hope,  expectation,  fear,  apprehension  :  — 


esperemos  a"  que  salgan  todos, 
temo  que  no  haya  recibido  la 
carta, 


let  us  wait  for  them  all  to  go  out. 
I  fear  that  he  has  not  received  the 
letter. 


c.  After  verbs  expressive  of  a  command,  direction, 
caution,  wish,  desire,  entreaty,  preference,  concession, 
permission  :  — 

mandd  que  se  hiciera, 
dispuso  que  el  rey  asistiese 


la 

junta,  ^jfe 

quiere  que  noslJUpiemos, 
le  suplique  que  no  se  fuflttk 
mire  V.  que  no  rompan^^Mato, 
[pregunta, 

permitame  V.  que  le  haga  una 
admito  que  no  lo  haya  dicho, 
prefiero  que  no  dudes, 


he  ordered  it  to  be  done. 

he  took  measures  for  the  king  to 

be  present  at  the  meeting, 
he  desires  us  to  go  away. 
I  begged  him  not  to  go  away, 
see  that  they  do  not  break  the 

plate. 

allow  me  to  ask  you  a  question. 
I  grant  that  he  did  not  say  so. 
I  prefer  you  should  not  doubt. 


d.    After  terms  denoting  some  strong  emotion,  such 
as  joy,  grief,  regret,  surprise,  vexation  :  — 


me  alegrare  que  no  haya  suce- 

dido  desgracia  alguna,  [venir, 

siento  que  no  hayamos  podido 

me  admiro  que  no  lo  confieses 

con  franqueza, 


I    shall    rejoice   if  no   accident 

occurred.  [come. 

I  regret  that  we  were  not  able  to 

I  am  surprised  that  you  do  not 

frankly  confess  it. 


e.    After  impersonal  expressions,  unless  they  imply 
positive  certainty:  — 


conviene  que  lo  sepa, 
es  Idstima  que  lo  niegue, 
es  fa*cil  que  no  venga, 


it  is  proper  for  him  to  know  it. 
it  is  a  pity  that  he  denies  it. 
it  is  probable  that  he  will  not 
come. 


360 


Syntax. 


es  justo  que  cobremos  nuestros 

derechos, 
es    necesario    que  lo   haga  V. 

pronto, 
era  precise   que  la  intolerancia 

se  personificara  en  alguno, 
no  es  seguro  que  estdn  mas  obli- 

gados  ahora  que  estuviesen 

en  vida  a  satisfacer  indiscretas 

preguntas, 


it  is  just  that  we  secure  our 
rights. 

you  must  do  it  soon  (it  is  neces- 
sary that  you,  etc.). 

it  was  necessary  that  intolerance 
should  take  form  in  some  one. 

it  is  not  certain  that  they  are 
more  obliged  now  than  they 
were  in  life  to  satisfy  indiscreet 
inquiries. 


710.  The  subjunctive  is  employed  after  certain  con- 
junctions in  sentences  expressing  possibility,  uncer- 
tainty, and  indefinite  future  time.  Such  are  :  — 

en  caso  de  que^//  case  that. 
hasta  que, 
hasta  donde"^ 


a*ntes  que,  before. 

a  menos  que,  tmless. 

a  fin  de  que,  to  the  end  that. 

aunque,  although. 

bien  que,  although. 

como,  when,  as. 

como  si,  1        .f 

cualsi,    ]aStf'  [ing. 

como  quiera  que,  notwithstand- 

con  tal  que,  provided  that. 

cuando,  when. 

dado  que,  granted  that. 

dntes  que   escribiese  V.    este 

libro,    ni    acaso    imaginara 

escribirlo, 
aunque  pierda  la  herencia,  no 

consentire', 

como  si  no  comprendiera, 
con  tal  que  lo  haga, 
se  lo  dire  cuando  pueda, 
<ique  dira  tu  amo  cuando  vea  lo 

que  has  hecho? 
hasta  que  venga, 


Tar  as. 
luego  *$fe,  as  soon  as. 
mientras,  while. 
no  sea  que,  lest. 
ojala,  would  that. 
para  que,  in  order  that. 
por  —  que,  however. 
siempre  que,  whenever. 
sin  que,  without. 
supuesto  que,  supposing  that . 

before  you  wrote  this  book,  or 

perhaps  had  an  idea  of  writing 

it. 
although  I  lose  the  inheritance, 

I  will  not  consent, 
as  if  he  did  not  understand, 
provided  he  do  it. 
I  will  tell  him  when  I  can. 
what  will  your  master  say  when 

he  sees  what  you  have  done  ? 
until  I  (or  he)  come. 


The  Use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode. 


36i 


luego  que  hayan  entregado  el 

dinero,  venga  V.  a  mi  casa, 
para  que  lo  crea, 
por  sabio  que  sea, 
sin  que  lo  supiesemos, 


as  soon  as  they  have  delivered 
the  money,  come  to  my  house, 
that  he  may  believe  it. 
however  wise  he  be. 
without  our  having  known  it. 


711.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  sentences, 
when  the  relative  pronoun  refers  to  a  negative  or  re- 
strictive idea,  or  to  an  interrogation  involving  a  negative 


answer :  — 

no  hay  quien  lo  crea, 

no  habia  quien  le  ganase  en  mal 

genio, 
tampoco  fue  el  unico  que  en  su 

siglo    emprendiese    guerras 

religiosas, 

no  hay  mal  que  cien  anos  dure, 
solo  dos  personas  hay  que  sepan 

mas  de  el  que  V., 
<ihay  alguno   que   haga  menos 

que  el? 


there  is  no  one  who  believes  it. 
there  was  no  one  who  exceeded 

him  in  bad  temper, 
nor  was  he  the  only  one  who,  in 

his  time,  engaged  in  religious 

wars. 

there  is  no  ill  that  lasts  forever, 
there  are  only  two  persons  who 

know  more  of  him  than  you. 
is  there  any  one  who  does  less 

than  he? 


a.  The  subjunctive  is  further  used  when  the  relative 
refers  to  persons,  things,  and  ideas,  that  are  unknown, 
or  are  mentioned  in  a  general  indefinite  sense  :  — 


si  cayeras  en  ma-nos  de  personas 

que  te  supieran  manejar,  ya 

trabajarias  bien, 
aguardaba  el  paso  de  algun  al- 

deano   que   le   diese   buenos 

informes, 
si  existe  alguien  que  haya  leido 

todo   lo   que    hemos   escrito, 

habra  notado,  etc., 
deudores  seran  de  VV.  cuantos 

escriban  sob  re  Felipe  II, 
quien  quiera  que  seas, 
adonde  quiera  que  vaya, 
venga  lo  que  viniere, 


if  you  came  into  the  hands  of  per- 
sons who  knew  how  to  manage 
you,  you  would  work  well. 

he  waited  for  some  villager  to 
pass  by  who  might  give  him 
reliable  information. . 

if  there  is  any  one  who  has  read 
all  that  we  have  written,  he 
has  doubtless  noted  that,  etc. 

all  who  write  on  Philip  II  will  be 
your  debtors. 

whoever  you  may  be. 

wherever  he  goes. 

come  what  will  (or  may) . 


362 


Syntax. 


Correspondence  of  Tenses* 

712.    The   present    subjunctive    corresponds    to    the 
present  and  future  indicative :  — 


quiero  que  venga, 

no  quiero  que  se  vaya, 

es  precise  que  la  historia  hable, 

le  regard  que  se  abstenga, 
sera  preciso  que  se  quede, 


I  wish  him  to  come. 
I  do  not  wish  him  to  go. 
history  must  speak  (it  is  neces- 
sary that  history  speak) . 
I  will  ask  him  to.  abstain,    [stay. 
it  will  be  necessary  for  him  to 


713.   The  imperfect  subjunctive  in  either  form  cor- 
responds to  any  past  tense  of  the  indicative :  — 

querla  que  viniese  (or  viniera), 
no  quise  que  se  fuese  (or  se 

fuera), 

fue  preciso  que  hablase, 
ha  querido  que  se  entendiesen 

(or  se  entendieran), 
habia  exigido  que  no  volvie- 

sen  (or  volvieran), 


I  wished  him  to  come. 
I  did  not  wish  him  to  go. 

it  was  necessary  for  him  to  speak, 
he  desired  that  they  should  come 

to  an  understanding, 
he  had  required  that  they  should 

not  return. 


714.   The  past  indefinite  subjunctive  corresponds  to 
the  present  or  future  of  the  indicative :  — 


es  facil  que  se  haya  ido, 
no    creo    que    haya    sobrado 
nada, 


it  is  probable  that  he  has  gone. 
I  do  not  believe  anything  was 
left. 


715.   The  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  either  form  cor- 
responds to  any  past  tense  of  the  indicative :  — 


no  pens£  que  se  hubiese  ido 

tan  pronto, 
file*   preciso   que    se    hubiera 

enter  ado  cuanto  dntes, 


I  did  not  suppose  that  he  would 

have  gone  so  soon, 
it  was  necessary  for  him  to  have 

informed  himself  at  once. 


716.  The  future  and  future  perfect  subjunctive  are  em- 
ployed in  sentences  introduced  by  si,  if;  cuando,  when; 


The  Use  of  the  Infinitive  Mode. 


363 


mientras,  while,  or  by  a  relative  pronoun  or  adverb, 
when  reference  is  made  to  a  future  contingency  :  — 

if  I  should  have  time,  I  will  come, 
while  life  shall  last, 
when  he  has  finished  what  he 
has  to  do,  he  will  write  the 


si  tuviere  tiempo,  vendre', 

mientras  durare  la  vida, 

cuando  hubiere  concluido  lo  que 

tiene  que  hacer,  escribira  la 

carta,  [ren, 

devolvere'  todo  cuanto  me  die- 


letter. 
I  shall  return  all  they  give  me. 


REMARK.  —  Instead  of  this  tense,  the  present  or  past  indefinite 
subjunctive  may  be  employed :  — 

si  tenga  tiempo,  if  I  have  time, 

mientras  dure  la  vida,  while  life  lasts, 

todo  cuanto  me  den,  all  they  give  me. 

cuando  haya  concluido,  when  he  has  finished. 


The  Use  of  the  Infinitive  Mode. 

717.  The  infinitive,  as  a  verbal  noun  (represented  in 
English  by  the  ending  -ing),  may  be  inflected  precisely 
like  any  substantive  in  the  singular :  — 


hablar, 
de  hablar, 
a  hablar, 
con  hablar,  or 


to  speak,  speaking, 
of  speaking, 
to  speaking. 


vivir, 

de  vivir, 

a  vivir, 

con  vivir,  or 

viviendo. 


to  live,  living, 
of  living, 
to  living. 


\by  living. 


hablar  mucho  es  un  vicio, 
el  arte  de  bien  vivir, 
muy  propenso  a  mentir, 
con   hablar  1  la   gente   se   en- 
hablando      j      tiende, 

(  comiendo, 
el  apetito  viene  < 

[  con  comer, 


to  talk  much  is  a  bad  habit, 
the  art  of  living  correctly, 
much  addicted  to  falsifying, 
by  talking,  people  come  to  an 
understanding. 

appetite  comes  by  eating. 


718.    Hence  the  infinitive   stands   after  all   preposi- 
tions :  — 


364 


Syntax. 


dntes  de  levantarse, 
'despues  de  comer, 
sin  preguntar, 


before  getting  up. 
after  eating  (or  dinner), 
without  asking  or  inquiring. 


REMARK.  —  The  preposition  en,  in,  is,  however,  usually  accom- 
panied by  the  gerund  when  it  signifies  (i)  after,  (2)  by.  In  the 
latter  case,  we  may  substitute  con  with  the  infinitive,  or  the  gerund 
may  be  used  alone :  — 


en  comiendo,  salgo  a  dar  un 

paseito, 
en  entrando  en  el  despacho  es 

inaccesible  a  todos,     [cultad, 
en  pagandole  se  zanja  la  din- 


after  eating,  I  go  out  and  take  a 

short  walk, 
after  he  enters  the  office,  he  is 

inaccessible  to  all.       [ficulty. 
by  paying  him,  you  heal  the  dif- 


719.   The  definite  article  is  usually  employed  with  the 
infinitive  as  subject  or  predicate  :  — 


el  saber  es  siempre  util,   [vida, 
el  comer  es  indispensable  d  la 
a  Pedro  toca  el  gobernar, 
seria  curioso  el  comparar  esta 

doctrina  con  la  otra, 
el  mejor  medio  es  el  probar  que 

hay  un    pensamiento    propio 

filosofico  en  Espana, 

gastar  en  un  banquete  la  renta 

de  un  ano  es  locura, 
aunque  sea  repetir  lo  que  nadie 

ignora,  los  Espafioles  estamos 

atrasados, 


but 


knowledge  is  always  useful, 
eating  is  indispensable  to  life, 
it  is  Peter\s  duty  to  govern, 
it  would  be  curious  to  compare 

this  doctrine  with  the  other, 
the  best  way  is  to  prove   that 

Spain  has  a  philosophic  idea 

of  her  own. 

to  expend  on  a  banquet  a  year's 
income  is  folly. 

although  it  be  to  repeat  what  no 
one  is  ignorant  of,  we  Span- 
iards are  behind  the  age. 


720.  The  infinitive  governs  its  case  only  when  used 
substantively ;  otherwise,  its  apparent  object  is  a  true 
subject  of  the  verbal  idea:  — 


el  duJce  lamentar  de  dos  pasto- 
res  (=  el  dulce  lamento), 


the  sweet  lament  of  two  shep- 
herds. 


The  Use  of  the  Infinitive  Mode. 


365 


oigo  el  murmurar  de  las  fuentes 
(=  oigo  el  murmullo) , 

al  acabar  de  la  vida  (=  al  fin  de 
lavida),  [dia), 

al  caer  del  dia  (—  a*  la  caida  del 


I  hear  the  playing  of  the  foun- 
tains, 
at  the  close  of  life. 

at  the  close  of  day. 


al  alzarse  el  telon, 
al  acabarse  la  vida, 
al  entrar  el  estrangero, 
al  asomarse  al  balcon, 
al  caer  el  dia, 


but 


when  the  curtain  rises  (or  rose) . 
when  life  closes  (or  closed), 
when  the  foreigner  entered, 
on  looking  out  at  the  balcony, 
when  the  day  declined. 


721.  The  infinitive  is  used  in  the  dative  with  the 
article  to  replace  a  finite  clause  introduced  by  a  con- 
junction of  time,  as  when,  after,  as ;  or  a  preposition,  as 
in :  — 


al  hablar  asi, 
al  tocar  a  misa, 
al  verle  yo  tan  distraido, 
al  cumplir  Simon  los  trece  anos 
perdio  su  ultimo  hermano, 


in  speaking  thus, 
when  the  bell  tolled  for  mass, 
when  I  saw  him  thus  inattentive, 
when  Simon  was  thirteen  years 
old,  he  lost  his  last  brother. 


a.  Without  the  article,  the  preposition  d,  with  an 
infinitive,  often  replaces  the  protasis  of  a  conditional 
sentence :  — 


a  saber  lo  que  resultaria  (=  si 

hubiese  sabido), 
£  no   confesarlo,  saldria  peor 

(=  si  no  lo  confesase) , 
a  no  ser  yo  el  que  lo  pedf,  no 

tendrfa  inconveniente, 


if  I  had  known  what  would  come 

of  it. 
if  he  did  not  confess  it,  it  would 

turn  out  worse, 
were  it  not  I  who  asked  for  it,  I 

should  have  no  objection. 


722.  The  infinitive  is  governed  directly,  or  indirectly 
by  a  preposition,  according  to  the  regimen  of  the  noun, 
adjective,  or  verb,  on  which  it  depends. 


366 


Syntax. 


723.  The  infinitive  depends  directly  on  the  verb  when 
both  have  the  same  subject,  except  verbs  of  command- 
ing, causing,  hindering,  or  forbidding,  which  may  take 
the  infinitive  or  a  subjunctive.  Such  verbs  are  :  — 

celebrar,  to  be  glad  to. 
conviene,  //  is  expedient  to. 
deber,  to  ought,  be  to. 
dejar,  to  let,  allow  to. 
desear,  to  desire,  want  to. 
determinar,  to  resolve  to. 
esperar,  to  hope,  expect  to. 
gustar,  to  like  to. 
hacer,  to  make,  cause  to. 
impedir,  to  prevent  from. 
mandar,  to  have,  order. 
ma's  vale,  it  is  better  to. 

celebraria  verle  a  V.  alii, 
no  conviene  hacerlo, 
debo  decirle  a  V.  que  .  .  .  , 
no  me  deja  concluir, 
deseo  hablar  con  el, 
me  gusta  coiner  tarde, 
«;que  me  mandaV.  hacer? 
piensa  partir  pronto, 
se  prohibe  fijar  carteles, 


merecer,  to  deserve  to. 
necesitar,  to  want  to. 
oir,  to  hear. 

osar,  to  dare,  venture  to. 
pensar,  to  intend  to. 
poder,  to  be  able  to,  can. 
pretender,  to  claim,  try  to. 
procurar,  to  try  to. 
prohibir,  to  forbid  to. 
querer,  to  wish  to. 
saber,  to  know  how  to,  can. 
temer,  to  fear  to. 

I  should  be  glad  to  see  you  there. 

it  is  not  wise  to  do  it. 

I  must  tell  you  that  .... 

he  will  not  let  me  finish. 

I  want  to  speak  to  him. 

I  like  to  dine  late. 

what  do  you  direct  me  to  do? 

he  intends  to  go  soon. 

it  is  forbidden  to  post  notices. 


724.  The  infinitive  is  governed  by  a  preposition  ac- 
cording to  the  signification  or  natural  regimen  of  the 
noun,  adjective,  or  verb,  on  which  it  depends  :  — 

725.  By  the  preposition  a :  — 

a.  With  verbs  of  motion,  and  such  as  involve  the  idea 
of  direction  toward  an  end.     Such  are  :  — 


aprender  a",  to  learn  to. 
aspirar  a,  to  aspire  to. 
comenzar  a,  to  commence  to. 


dar  a",  to  give  to. 
echar  a",  to  begin  to. 
empezar  a,  to  begin  to. 


The  Use  of  the  Infinitive  Mode. 


367 


ensenar  a,  to  teach  to. 
enviar  a" ,  to  send  to. 
ir  a,  to  go  /#,  be  going  to. 
obligar  a,  to  compel  to. 


pasar  a,  to  go,  come  to. 
salir  a,  ta£#  0wtf  to. 
venir  a",  /#  £<?#/£  to. 
volver  &,  to  —  again. 


Together  with  many  reflexive  verbs  expressive  of  strong 
moral  assertion,  effort,  or  decision,  such  as  :  — 


atre verse  a,  to  dare  to. 
decidirse  a",  to  resolve  to. 
esforzarse  a",  to  try  to. 

aprende  a  leer  y  £  escribir, 
me  did  a  entender, 
echose  a  reir, 
empieza  a  Hover, 
voy  a  verle  pronto, 
vamos  a  dar  un  paseo, 
viene  a  decirle  eso  que  sabes, 

vuelve  £  salir, 
no  nos  volvera  £  ver, 
se  niega  a  aceptarlo, 
no  se  atrevio  a  decirselo, 


negarse  a,  to  refuse  to. 
ponerse  a,  to  begin  to. 
resistirse  a,  to  resist. 

he  is  learning  to  read  and  write. 

he  gave  me  to  understand. 

he  began  to  laugh. 

it  begins  to  rain. 

I  am  going  to  see  him  soon. 

let  us  go  and  take  a  walk. 

he  comes  to  tell  you  that  you 

know  of. 

he  goes  out  again, 
he  will  not  see  us  again, 
he  refuses  to  accept  it. 
he  did  not  dare  tell  it  to  him. 


b.    In  certain  elliptical  phrases,  such  as  :  — 
a  saber ;  a  decir  la  verdad,  |    namely ;  to  speak  truly. 

726.   By  the  preposition  de :  — 

a.   With  nouns  and  adjectives  which  are  followed  by 
a  genitive :  — 

tiene  el  atrevimiento  de  decir- 

melo  a  la  cara, 

no  tengo  costumbre  de  mentir, 
tiene  ganas  de  comer; 
no  me  da  la  gana  de  hacerlo, 
hagame  V.  el  favor  de  decirme 

eso, 
tengo  vergiienza  de  pedirlo, 


he  has  the  impudence  to  say  it 
to  my  face.  [falsehoods. 

I  am  not  in  the  habit  of  telling 
he  has  a  desire  to  eat. 
I  don't  choose  to  do  it. 
do  me  the  favor  to  tell  me  that 

I  am  ashamed  to  ask  it. 


368 


Syntax. 


no  tengo  el  gusto  de  conocer 

aV., 

es  dificil  de  conseguir, 
soy  deseoso  de  aprender, 


I  have  not  the  pleasure  of  know- 
ing you. 

it  is  difficult  to  attain. 
I  am  desirous  to  learn. 


b.   With  verbs  represented  by  the  following  :  — 


-acabar  de,  to  have  just. 
acordarse  de,  to  remember  to. 
alegrarse  de,  to  be  glad  to. 
arrepentirse  de,  to  repent  of. 
dejar  de,  to  fail  to,  leave  off. 

acaba  de  salir, 

me  acuerdo  de  haber  dicho, 

se  alegra  de  vernos, 

no  deja  de  escribir, 

hemos  de  vivir, 

se  me  olvido  de  decirlo, 

tratare  de  venderlos, 


desistir  de,  to  cease  from. 
haber  de,  to  be  about  to.     [with. 
ocuparse  de,  to  busy  one^s  self 
olvidarse,  to  forget  to. 
tratar  de,  to  try  to. 

he  has  just  gone  out. 

I  remember  to  have  said. 

he  is  glad  to  see  us. 

he  does  not  cease  writing. 

we  must  live. 

I  forgot  to  say  so. 

I  shall  try  to  sell  them. 


c.    After  the  verb  to  be,  used  impersonally :  — 

it  is  desirable   that  he  do   not 
come.  [soon. 

it  is  to  be  hoped  that  it  will  be 


es  de  desear  que  no  venga, 
es  de  esperar  que  sea  pronto, 


727,   By  the  preposition  en :  — 

he  persisted  in  his  desire  to  go 

and  see  him. 
he  will  not  be  long  coming. 


se  empen6  en  querer  ir  £  verle, 
no  tardard.  en  venir, 


728.   By  the  preposition  con,  or  the  gerund  with  or 
without  en :  — 
con  hablar  (en  hablando,  hab- 

lando)  asi,  creia  sacar  algun 

provecho, 


by  talking  thus,  he  thought  that 
he  would  derive  some  advan- 
tage. 


729.  By  the  preposition  para,  in  order  to,  to,  for  the 
purpose  of,  about  to,  expressing  purpose,  result,  use, 
situation  :  — ' 


The  Use  of  the  Infinitive  Mode. 


369 


se  abriga  uno  para  no  tener  frio, 
tiene  bastante  dinero  para  com- 
prar  la  casa,        [para  comer, 
se  come  para  vivir,  no  se  vive 
el  hombre  nace  para  morir, 
quien  tiene  oidos  para  oir,  oiga, 
no  sirve  para  aprender, 
estoy  para  marcharme, 


one  wraps  up  so  as  not  to  be  cold, 
he  has  money  enough  to  buy  the 
house.  [eat. 

we  eat  to  live,  we  do  not  live  to 
man  is  born  to  die.  [hear, 

he  who  hath  ears  to  hear,  let  him 
he  is  not  fit  to  learn. 
I  am  about  to  set  out. 


730.   By  the  preposition  por,  for  the  sake  ofy  on  ac- 
count of,  toy  expressing  motive,  result,  reason,  willing- 


ness, or  anticipation  :  — 

trabaja  por  confundir  a  su  con- 

trario, 

habla  solo  por  hablar, 
no  me  lo  dijo  antes,  por  no  faltar 

.a  un  compromiso, 
me  regand  por  no  haber  hecho 

lo  que  el  queria, 
llevaba  la  cara  embozada  por  no 

darse  a"  conocer, 
estuve  por  escribirle, 
la  casa  esta  por  acabar, 


he  labors  to  silence  his  adver- 
sary, [talking. 

he  only  talks  for  the  sake  of 

he  did  not  tell  me  before,  so  as 
not  to  break  a  promise. 

he  scolded  me  for  not  having 
done  as  he  wished  me  to  do. 

he  kept  his  face  muffled,  so  as 
not  to  be  known. 

I  was  willing  to  write  him. 

the  house  is  yet  to  be  finished. 


731.  The  infinitive  may  stand  in  sudden  exclamations 
as  an  imperative,  or  as  an  interrogation  of  surprise  :  — 

i  callar !  \  no  correr !  ±  negarlo  yo  ?   |   hush  !  don't  run !     I  deny  it  ? 

732.  The  transitive  verbs  oir,  to  hear,  and  ver,  to  see, 
are  followed  by  the  infinitive,  and  not  by  the  gerund  as 
in  English  :  — 


me  vid  venir, 
le  vi  acercarse, 


he  saw  me  coming. 

I  saw  him  approaching. 


REMARK.  —  With  intransitive  verbs,  the  gerund  is  used  as  in 
English :  — 


vino  corriendo, 

se  fue  murmurando, 


he  came  running. 

he  went  off  grumbling. 


370 


Syntax. 


The  Gerund. 

733.  The  gerund  partakes  of  the  nature  of  the  verb 
from  which  it  is  derived,  and  has  the  same  regimen.  It 
is,  therefore,  invariable  in  gender  and  number :  — 

seeing  him  approach,  I  saluted 
him.  [promise, 

he  would  not  tell  me,  pleading  a 
the  gentlemen  received  him  with 
pleasant  smiles,  recognizing  in 
him  the  merit  qf  having  won 
the  heart  of  the  lady. 


vi^ndole  acercarse  le  salude, 

[do  una  promesa, 

no  quiso  decfrmelo,  pretextan- 

los  caballeros  le  recibieron  con 
amables  sonrisas,  recono- 
ciendole  el  merito  de  haber 
conquistado  el  corazon  de  la 
dama, 

su  doncella  entro  en  el  comedor, 
y  acercandose  a  su  oido,  le 
dijo  secretamente  algunas  pa- 
lab  ras, 

volvi^ndose  a  uno  de  los  que 
Servian  la  mesa,  afiadid, 


her  maid  came  into  the  dining- 
room,  and,  approaching  her, 
she  whispered  in  her  ear  pri- 
vately a  few  words. 

turning  to  one  of  those  who 
served  the  table,  he  added. 


734.  The  gerund  is  freely  used  with  certain  verbs  to 
form  the  idea  of  progression,  of  something  going  on  in 
succession :  — 

those  who  were  gathering, 
the  guests  came  one  after  an- 
other, 
they  were  eating  when  he  came. 


los  que  se  iban  reuniendo, 
se  fueron  presentando  los  con- 

vidados, 
estaban  comiendo  cuando  vino, 


735.  The  gerund  is  often 
present  participle,  or  finite 
by,  in:  — 

pero  la  que  vive  en  delicias,  vivi- 

endo  esta  muerta, 
creyd  enganarles   aparentando 

estar  dormido,  [dad, 

haciendo  esto  muestra  su  cari- 


equivalent  to  the  English 
verb,  introduced  by  whiley 

but  she  that  liveth  in  pleasure  is 

dead  while  she  liveth. 
he  thought  to  deceive  them  by 

feigning  sleep.  [charity, 

in  doing  this,  he   displays   his 


The  Use  of  the  Past  Participle. 


736.   The  gerund  may  have  a  definite  or  indefinite 


subject :  — 

pudiendo  mas  con  el  la  fuerza 

de  la  sangre  que  el  atractivo 

de  la  corona,  [cosa, 

no   siendo   posible   hacer   otra 
no  habiendo  tiempo  para  discu- 

tir  la  medida,  se  suspendid  la 

sesion, 


the  force  of  blood  having  more 

power  over  him  than  the  lure 

of  a  crown.  [thing  else. 

it  not  being  possible  to  do  any- 

there  not  being  time  to  discuss 

the  measure,  the  session  was 

suspended. 


737  The  gerund,  with  or  without  the  preposition  en, 
may  have  an  indefinite  personal  subject,  and  is  trans- 
lated by  when,  if  one  has,  is,  etc.  :  — 


en  habiendo  dinero  en  el  bol- 
sillo,  se  gasta  sin  miseria, 


when    one    has    money    in    his 
pocket,  he  spends  it  freely. 


738    The  gerund  has  the  same  regimen  as  the  verb 
from  which  it  is  derived  :  — 


gozando  de  buena  salud, 
olvidandose  de  lo  pasado, 
me    iba    aficionando    a    estas 
cosas,  [yerno, 

queriendo  dar  a  conocer  a  su 


enjoying  good  health, 
forgetting  the  past. 
I  came  to  grow  fond  of  these 
things.  [known, 

desiring  to  make  his  son-in-law 


The  Use  of  the  Past  Participle. 

739.   The  past  participle  of  all  verbs  is  invariable  in 
the  compound  tenses  formed  by  the  auxiliary  haber:  — 

los  hombres  han  coniido, 
habiamos  vivido  alii, 


the  men  have  eaten, 
we  had  lived  there. 


a.  The  verbs  llevar  and  tener,  when  used  as  substi- 
tutes of  haber,  require  the  past  participles  that  accom- 
pany them  to  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  their 
object :  — 


372 


Syntax. 


lie  van  escritas  tres  cartas, 
las  cartas  que  tengo  escritas, 


they  have  three  letters  written, 
the  letters  that  I  have  written. 


b.  In  the  tenses  of  the  passive  voice,  the  past  partici- 
ple of  the  verb  conjugated  passively  is  inflected,  while 
those  of  ser,  estar,  and  their  substitutes,  remain  un- 
changed because  dependent  on  haber:  — 

hemos  sido  engafiados, 
han  quedado  satisfechos, 


we  have  been  deceived, 
they  have  remained  satisfied. 


740.  Separated  from  the  auxiliary,  the  past  participle 
agrees,  in  gender  and  number,  with  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun qualified,  like  any  adjective:  — 


a  la  hora  convenida,  ella  se  pre- 
sentd  apoyada  en  el  brazo  de 
su  padre,  cubierta  con  un 
vestido  bianco, 

el  gabinete  forrado  de  raso 
bianco  y  vestido  de  guirnal- 
das  de  flores  sirvid  de  capilla, 

741.   The  past  participle 

firmado  el  contrato  quedaba  aun 

por  legitimar  la  voluntad  de 

los  cdnyuges, 
disuelta  la  asamblea  se  retira- 

ron  todos, 
reunidas  las  Cortes  se  empezo  d 

discutir  el  proyecto  de  ley, 


at  the  hour  agreed  on,  she  came 
forward  leaning  on  her  father's 
arm,  dressed  in  a  white  robe. 

the  sitting-room,  lined  with  white 
satin  and  decked  with  garlands 
of  flowers,  served  for  a  chapel. 

may  be  used  absolutely :  — 

the  (civil)  contract  having  been 
signed,  the  will  of  the  pair  yet 
remained  to  be  legalized. 

the  assembly  dissolved,  all  with- 
drew. 

the  Cortes  having  come  together 
again,  they  began  to  discuss 
the  bill. 


742.  Relation  of  time  in  the  absolute  participial  con- 
struction may  be  expressed  by  the  preposition  despues 
de,  placed  before  it :  — 


despues    de    firmada    la    paz 

ambas  partes  se  felicitaron, 


after  peace  was  signed,  both  par- 
ties congratulated  each  other. 


The  Use  of  the  Past  Participle. 


373 


deapues  de  cerradas  todas  las 
puertas  y  ventanas  se  entre- 
garon  las  Haves  al  portero  de 
al  lado, 


after  all  the  doors  and  windows 
were  locked,  the  keys  were 
delivered  to  the  porter  of  the 
next  house. 


743.  The  past  participle  with  the  preposition  para, 
for,  is  used  to  express  capability  or  necessity  after  the 
verb  to  be,  with  a  negative  :  — 


no  es  asunto  para  satisf echo  en 
corto  numero  de  renglones, 

estas  providencias  no  son  para 
propuestas, 

las  artes  de  la  politica  tampoco 
son  tan  para  vistas  por  den- 
tro  como  las  de  la  guerra, 


it  is  not  a  subject  to  be  exhausted 
in  a  few  short  lines. 

these  measures  are  not  to  be 
proposed. 

nor  are  the  arts  of  state  polity  so 
transparent  (easy  to  be  scru- 
tinized) as  those  of  war. 


744.   Past  participles  may  be  used  as  nouns  :  — 


el  convidado,  the  guest. 

los  desposados,  the  espoused. 

muchos    son    los    llamados    y 
pocos  los  escogidos, 


los  convidados,  the  guests. 

los  desgraciados,  the  unfortu- 
nate. 

many  are  the  called,  and  few  the 
chosen. 


745.   The  Latin  future  passive  participle  in  -ndus  is 
still  preserved  in  a  few  substantives  only :  — 


los  educandos, 

los  bautizandos, 

los  libros  expurgandos, 


the  pupils. 

the  candidates  for  baptism. 

books  to  be  expurgated. 


REMARK.  —  In  substitution,  the  Spaniards  employ  the  verb  haber 


de  with  the  passive  or  reflexive  :  — 

los  libros  que  han  de  ser  ex- 

purgados,  [pacharse, 

los  asuntos   que   han   de   des- 

este  negocio  no  se*  ha  de  ter- 

niinar  tan  facilmente  como  se 

cree, 


the  books  that  are  to  be  expur- 
gated, [posed  of. 
the  matters  that  are  to  be  dis- 
this  business  will  not  be  brought 
to  a  close  so  easily  as  they 
think. 


374 


Syntax. 


746.  The  present  participle,  as  such,  has  wholly  disap- 
peared from  the  Spanish,  being  replaced  by  the  gerund. 
The  few  remaining  forms  are  used  as  adjectives  or 
substantives  :  — 


amante  de  la  patria, 
un  caballero  andante, 
un  hijo  obediente, 
un  traslado  fehaciente, 
las  Cortes  constituyentes, 
los  enseres  pertenecientes  al 
almacen,          [los  creyentes, 
los  partioipaiites ;  los  oy elites ; 


fond  of  one's  country, 
a  knight-errant, 
an  obedient  child, 
an  authentic  copy, 
the  constituent  assembly, 
the   fixtures    belonging   to   the 
warehouse.        [the  believers, 
the   participants ;    the   hearers ; 


Regimen  of  Verbs. 

747.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb  regularly  stands 
in  the  accusative  case  without  a  preposition,  when  it 
designates  things  or  objects  not  endowed  with  life 
(Impersonal  Accusative) :  — 

he  built  the  house, 
they  gained  a  victory. 
Charles  reads  the  newspapers, 
the  worthy  man  loves  virtue  and 


edified  la  casa, 
alcanzaron  una  victoria, 
CaYlos  lee  los  diarios, 
el  hombre  digno  ama  la  virtud 
y  aborrece  el  vicio, 


hates  vice. 


748.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb  regularly  stands 
with  the  preposition  a,  when  it  designates  persons  or 
animals  (Personal  Accusative):  — 

Juan  sigue  a  su  hermano, 
conozco  a  este  hombre, 
hemos  visto  a  los  reyes, 
debemos  amar  a  Dios  y  a  nues- 

tros  semejantes, 
el  espada  mata  al  toro, 
el  nifio  acaricia  al  gato, 


John  follows  his  brother. 

I  know  this  man. 

we  have  seen  the  king  and  queen. 

we  ought  to  love  God  and  our 

fellow-men. 

the  swordsman  slays  the  bull, 
the  child  fondles  the  cat. 


Regimen  of  Verbs. 


375 


£  a  quie'n  buscas  ? 

se  debe  recompensar  a  los  que 

nos  sirven  fielmente, 
los  hombres  le  acogieron  como 

a  un  se*r  afortunado, 


whom  do  you  seek? 

we  ought  to  reward  those  who 

serve  us  faithfully, 
the  men  congratulated  him  as  a 

lucky  person. 


749.   Hence  the  personal  accusative  is  found  :  — 

a.  To  indicate  definite,  determinate,  known  person- 
ality :  — 

busco  d  un  criado  mio, 

aguardo  £  mis  amigos, 

fueron  a  llamar  a  un  medico 

muy  conocido  por  su  habili- 

dad, 

b.  With  pronouns  in  the  redundant  construction,  and 
in  antithesis :  — 


I  am  seeking  a  servant  of  mine. 
I  am  waiting  for  my  friends, 
they  went  to  call  a  physician  well 
known  for  his  skill. 


creeme  £  mf, 

os  vere  a  vosotros, 

£  mf  de  todo  se  me  pegd, 

deja  £  mi  triste  por  alegrar  d  el, 

se  miraron  uno  £  otro, 

se  enganan  unos  a  otros, 


believe  me. 

I  shall  see  you. 

a  little  of  everything  clung  to  me. 

he  leaves  me  sad  to  cheer  him. 

they  looked  at  each  other. 

they  deceive  one  another. 


c.   With  words  that  explain  a  personal  pronoun  :  — 


nos  abrazd  a  todos, 
los  vio  a  todos, 
nos  acogieron  muy  bien 
hermana  y  a  ml, 


mi 


he  embraced  us  all. 
he  saw  them  all. 
they  received  my  sister  and  me 
very  well. 


d.    After  a  predicate  adjective  or  past  participle  :  — 

my    master 


la  prosperidad  hizo  orgulloso  a 

mi  amo,  [hechor, 

vimos  muerto  d  nuestro  bien- 


prosperity    made 

proud, 
we  saw  our  benefactor  lie  dead. 


e.   When  the  object  is  the  proper  name  of  a  person 
or  animal,  or  of  a  place  without  the  definite  article  :  — 


376 


Syntax. 


leo  a  Cervantes, 

conozco  a  Se villa ;  —  a  Cadiz, 

los   Moros   conquistaron  a  Es- 

pana  en  el  siglo  octavo, 
sin  esperar  mas  respuesta  pico 

a  Rocinante, 

Pizarro  conquisto  el  Peril, 
he  visitado  la  Corufia, 


but 


I  read  Cervantes. 

I  know  Seville;  —  Cadiz. 

the  Moors  conquered  Spain  in 

the  eighth  century, 
without  waiting  for  a  reply,  he 

put  spurs  to  Rocinante. 

Pizarro  conquered  Peru. 
I  have  visited  Corunna. 


750.   The  personal  accusative  stands  with  the  names 
of  things  :  — 


a.    When  they  are  considered  as  personified  :  — 

he  defends  his  country. 

he  invoked  death. 

the  birds  salute  the  dawn. 

they  reward  merit. 

he  feared  his  own  shadow. 


defiende  a  la  patria, 
llamd  a  la  muerte, 
las  aves  saludan  a  la  aurora, 
recompensan  al  me'rito, 
temia  a  su  propia  sombra, 


REMARK.  —  This  principle  is  especially  applied  to  animals,  birds, 
and  insects  in  fables :  — 


Este  £  la  Hormiga  alaba,  aquel 

al  Perro, 
Quien   a   la    Abeja,    quien    al 


This  one  praises  the  Ant,  that 

one  the  Dog, 
One  the  Bee,  another  the  Parrot. 


Papagayo,         — Fdbulas  de  Iriarte,  Madrid,  1787,  vol.  L,  p.  54. 
b.    To  distinguish  the  object  from  the  subject :  — 


el  invierno  sigue  al  otofio, 
la  noche  precede  al  dia, 
el  verbo  rige  al  nombre,  y  el 
nombre  al  verbo, 


winter  follows  autumn, 
night  precedes  day. 
the  verb  governs  the  noun,  and 
the  noun  the  verb. 


c.    To  distinguish   the  object  of   the  verb  from  its 
predicate :  — 


llama  caracter  a  su  capricho, 
trae  unos  anteojos  que  le  hacen 
parecer  riqueza  a  la  pobreza, 


he  calls  his  caprice  character, 
he  wears  glasses  that  make  pov- 
erty appear  to  him  riches. 


Regimen  of  Verbs. 


377 


751.   The  impersonal  accusative  stands  even  with  a 
personal  object:  — 

a.    When  that  object  is  indeterminate,  unknown,  or 
taken  partitively  :  — 


busco  un  criado, 

fueron  a  buscar  un  medico  que 

fiiese  experimentado, 
en  mi  vida  he  visto  hombre  que 

sea  mas  orgulloso,  [gos, 

hemos  convidado  algunos  ami- 
conozco  senoras  mas  amables 

que  ella,  [capitanes, 

Espana  ha  producido  grandes 


I  am  looking  for  a  servant. 

they  went  to  look  for  an  experi- 
enced physician. 

I  have  never  seen  anybody  who 
is  prouder. 

we  have  invited  a  few  friends. 

I  know  ladies  more  amiable  than 
she.  [tains. 

Spain  has  produced  great  cap- 


b.    When  the  object  is  qualified  by  a  numeral :  — 


veo  cuatro  personas,         [des, 
el  gobernador  cito  veinte  alcal- 


I  see  four  persons.         [alcaldes, 
the  governor  summoned  twenty 


c.    After  the  verb  tener,  when  it  means  to  have,  to 
possess :  — 

tengo  un  buen  padre, 
es  precise  que  el  ej^rcito  tenga 
oficiales, 


I  have  a  good  father. 

the  army  must  have  officers. 


REMARK.  —  But  when  tener  means  to  hold  a  person  fast,  or 
when  it  is  put  for  estar  in  definite  sentences,  the  personal  accusative 
follows :  — 


^a  quie'n  tengo?  —  tengo  £  V., 
tengo  a  mi  madre  enferma, 
tenemos  a  nuestro  hermano  en 
el  extrangero, 


whom  have  I?  —  I  have  you. 
my  mother  is  ill. 
our  brother  is  abroad  (we  have 
our  brother  abroad). 


but 


tengo  una  madre  muy  indul- 

gente,  [trangero, 

tenemos  un  hermano  en  el  ex- 


I  have  a  very  indulgent  mother, 
we  have  a  brother  abroad. 


378 


Syntax. 


d.   After  the  verb  perder,  to  lose,  since  perder  a  sig- 
nifies to  ruin :  — 


perdid  su  Tinico  hijo, 

he  perdido  mi  madre, 


he  lost  his  only  son. 
I  have  lost  my  mother. 


REMARK.  —  Some  modern  writers,  however,  offend  this  rule  :  — 

perdid  a  su  ultimo  hermano,       |    he  lost  his  last  brother. 

—  Jose*  Selgas,  Escenas  Fantdsticas,  p.  80,  ed.  1876. 

e.    After  the  verb  querer,  in  the  meaning  to  wish,  to 
wanty  since  querer  a  signifies  to  love,  to  like :  — 


yo  quiero  un  hombre  honrado 

que  me  sirva, 
quiere  muchisimo  a  su  hijo, 


I  want  an  honest  man  to  serve 

me. 
he  loves  his  child  very  much. 


f.    After  words  of  naming,  appointing  :  — 

el    rey   nombrd    los    goberna- 

dores, 
el  papa  elige  los  cardenales, 


the  king  appointed  the  gover- 
nors, 
the  pope  elects  the  cardinals. 


g.    When  the  same  verb  governs  an  indirect  object 
with  dy  or  a  personal  pronoun  without  d:  — 


prefiero  el  discrete  al  valiente, 
Cervantes  a  Quevedo,  Cadiz 
d  Valencia, 

envia  el  jardinero  £  la  plaza, 

presentaron  el  seiior  a"  la  dama, 
ha  sido  forzoso  dejar  el  conde 

en  rehenes  al  enemigo, 
me  recomendd  el  general, 

enviaron  el  hijo  a"  su  padre, 
abandonan  el  hombre  a"  su  des- 
esperacion, 


I  prefer  the  prudent  (man)  to  the 

brave,  Cervantes  to  Quevedo, 

Cadiz  to  Valencia, 
he   sends   the  gardener   to   the 

market.  [the  lady, 

they  presented  the  gentleman  to 
it  has  been  necessary  to  leave  the 

count  as  a  hostage  with  the  foe. 
he  recommended  the  general  to 

me. 

they  sent  the  child  to  his  father, 
they  deliver  the  man  over  to  his 

despair. 


For  euphony,  before  the  letter  d  very  often,  but  not 
uniformly :  — 


Regimen  of  Verbs. 


379 


busco  amigos ;  —  algun  amigo, 
^conoce  V.  a  este  caballero?! 
<iconoce  V.  aquel  caballero?/ 


I  seek  friends  ;  —  some  friend, 
do  you  know  that  gentleman? 


752.    Many  transitive  verbs  admit  two  objects, — an 
indirect  of  the  person  and  a  direct  of  the  thing :  — 

ill  al  mozo  una  propina, 
envio  a  fulano  una  esquela, 
le  preste  cinco  duros, 
dijo  al  juez  la  verdad, 


I  gave  the  lad  a  gratuity, 
he  sent  so  and  so  a  note. 
I  lent  him  five  dollars, 
he  told  the  judge  the  truth. 


753.  Verbs  that  involve  the  notion  of  taking  away, 
winning,  asking,  paying,  thanking,  praising,  take  in 
Spanish  the  dative  of  the  person  and  the  accusative  of 
the  thing,  while  in  English  the  object  is  governed  by 
some  preposition  other  than  to :  — 


quit6  al  pobre  todos  sus  aho- 

rros, 

le  quit6  su  hacienda, 
se  la  quit6, 

robd  al  obrero  su  jornal, 
se  lo  rob6, 

gan6  a"  su  contrincante  la  apuesta, 
el  gan6  la  apuesta, 
el  pobre  pidi6  al  caballero  una 

limosna, 
se  la  pidio, 

pagd  al  sastre  el  gaban, 
le  pagd  al  sastre, 
se  lo  pagd, 

le  agradeci  su  buena  voluntad, 
se  la  agradeci, 
alabaron  al  capitan  su  valor, 
se  lo  alabaron, 
alabo  a  V.  su  aplicacion, 
se  la  alabo  a  V., 
se  lo  pido  a  V.  encarecidamente, 


he  took  from  the  poor  man  all 

his  savings. 

he  took  from  him  his  property, 
he  took  it  from  him.        [wages. 
he  robbed  the  mechanic  of  his 
he  robbed  him  of  them,  [ponent. 
he  won  the  wager  from  his  op- 
he  won  the  wager  from  him. 
the  beggar  asked  the  gentleman 

for  an  alms, 
he  asked  him  for  one. 
he  paid  the  tailor  for  the  coat, 
he  paid  the  tailor  for  it. 
he  paid  him  for  it. 
I  thanked  him  for  his  good  will. 
I  thanked  him  for  it.     [courage, 
they  praised  the  captain  for  his 
they  praised  him  for  it. 
I  praise  you  for  your  industry- 
I  praise  you  for  it. 
I  earnestly  beg  you  to. 


38o 


Syntax. 


REMARK.  —  Merecer,  in  the  sense  of  to  receive  as  a  reward  of 
merit,  is  similarly  construed  :  — 


merecer  al  rey  un  nombramien- 
to  a*  un  alto  cargo, 


to  receive  from  the  king  a  high 
appointment. 


754.   Some  verbs  require  the  same  construction  with 
personal  pronouns  only  :  — 

persuadid  a"  su  hijo  que  lo  hici- 

ese,  but 

se  lo  persuadid, 
impidid  que  lo  hiciesemos,  but 
nos  lo  impidid, 
preguntaron  al  muchacho  si  fue' 

verdad,  but 


se  lo  preguntaron, 
se  lo  prohibo  a"  V., 


he  persuaded  his  son  to  do  it, 

but 

he  persuaded  him  to. 
he  prevented  us  from  doing  so>  but 
he  prevented  us  from  it. 
they  asked   the    lad    if  it  was 

true,  but 
they  asked  him  about  it. 
I  forbid  you  to. 


REMARK.  —  "To  give  any  one  anything,"  in  the  sense  of  &  pres- 
ent, is  expressed  by  regalar  alguna  cosa  a  alguien;  otherwise 
dar  is  used  :  — 


me  rega!6  un  reloj  nuevo, 
me  di6  un  reloj  nuevo, 


he   presented    me   with   a   new 

watch.  [watch. 

he    gave    (handed)    me    a   new 


755.   In  English,  a  verb  often  governs  its  object  by 
means  of  a  preposition,  when,  in  Spanish,  it  is  direct :  — 


to  look  for  anything, 

to  listen  to  advice, 

to  wait/^r  the  arrival  of  a  train. 


buscar  alguna  cosa,  or  algo. 
escuchar  los  consejos. 
esperar  la  llegada  de  un  tren. 


756.  Verbs  which  express  the  notion  of  perceiving, 
often  take  with  the  accusative  of  the  thing  a  dative  of 
the  personal  pronoun  rendered  into  English  by  means 
of  the  preposition  in  or  from :  — 

trae  V.  una  cara  que  no  le  he       you  wear  a  countenance  that  I 
visto  jama's,  never  saw  in  you. 


The  Regimen  of  Verbs. 


381 


confieso  que  no  le  hallo  ni  chispa 

ni  sentido, 
cuando  me  oyo  la  respuesta  se 

puso  furioso, 


I  confess  that  I  do  not  find  any 

wit  or  sense  in  it. 
when  he  heard  the  reply  from 

me,  he  became  very  angry. 


757.  Many  verbs  signifying  to  rejoice,  to  boast,  to  be 
sorry,  to  pity,  to  remember,  to  forget,  to  trust,  to  dis- 
trust, to  be  ashamed,  to  laugh  at,  to  want,  to  need,  to 
deprive,  to  use,  govern  their  object  by  means  of  the 
preposition  de,  of,  for,  at.  Such  verbs  are :  — 


abusar  de,  to  abuse. 
acordarse  de,  to  remember. 
admirarse  de,  to  wonder  at. 
alegrarse  de,  to  rejoice  at. 
aprovecharse  de,  to  avail  one's 
self  of  ,  to  use.  [of. 

avergonzarse  de,  to  be  ashamed 
burlarse  de,  to  laugh  at. 
carecer  de,  to  want,  to  be  without. 
compadecerse  de,  to  pity. 
condolerse  de,  to  pity. 
desconfiar  de,  to  distrust 
dudar  de,  to  doubt. 
fiarse  de,  to  trust. 
gozar  de,  to  enjoy. 
jactarse  de,  to  boast. 

se  acuerda  de  su  juventud, 
gozamos  de  buena  salud, 
se  olvidan  de  sus  amigos, 
usa  de  medios  ilicitos, 
se  sirve  de  los  talentos  ajenos, 
no  dudo  de  ello, 
prescindiendo  de  eso, 
carecen  de  pan, 


lamentarse  de,  to  lament. 
mofarse  de,  to  scoff  at. 
necesitar  de,  to  need. 
olvidarse  de,  to  forget. 
preciarse  de,  to  boast. 
prescindir  de,  to  do  without,  to 

leave  out  of  the  account. 
privarse  de,  to  deprive  of. 
reirse  de,  to  laugh  at. 
renegar  de,  to  abominate. 
servirse  de,  to  use. 
tener  lastima  de,  to  pity.        [of. 
tener  vergiienza  de,  to  be  ashamed 
usar  de,  to  use. 

valerse  de,  to  avail  one^s  self  of  . 
zafarse  de,  to  get  rid  of. 

he  remembers  his  youth. 

we  enjoy  good  health. 

they  forget  their  friends. 

he  uses  unlawful  means,  [others. 

he  avails  himself  of  the  talents  of 

I  do  not  doubt  it. 

leaving  that  out  of  the  account 

they  are  without  bread. 


APPENDIX   TO   PART  SECOND. 


Diminutives  and  Augmentatives. 

758.  These  consist  of  various  endings  applied  chiefly 
to  substantives  to  express  different  modes  of  characteriz- 
ing persons,  things,  and  qualities,  as  being  small  or 
large,  together  with  certain  other  subordinate  circum- 
stances, involving  attractiveness,  burlesque,  irony,  and 
aversion.     In  view  of  the  nice  distinctions  and  shades 
of  feeling  they  often  suggest,  it  is  scarcely  possible  for 
the  learner  to  employ  them  appropriately ;   and  they 
are,  in  fact,  for  the  most  part,  a  silent  element  in  the 
northern  tongues,  unless  rendered  by  some  circumlocu- 
tion adapted  to  the  context.     They  abound  in  domestic 
and  popular  language,  and  in  humorous,  poetical,  and 
satirical  writings,  but  seldom  suit  the  grave  style  of 
history  or  serious  compositions  of  any  kind.     Among 
the  uneducated  classes,  they  very  commonly  appear  as 
a  makeshift  for  a  limited  vocabulary,  or  to  emphasize 
passionate  utterances. 

DIMINUTIVES. 

759.  The  leading  diminutives  end  in  :  — 

a.  Ito,  cito,  ecito ;  fern,  ita,  cita,  ecita,  applied  to 
substantives,  adjectives,  and  a  few  adverbs,  to  express 
smallness  of  size,  quality,  or  degree,  in  connection  with 
fondness,  caresses,  admiration,  good  humor,  true  sym- 
pathy, modest  demand,  respect  (by  servants),  and  irony 
stated  without  vituperation.  Therefore  this  ending 


Diminutives  and  Augmentatives. 


383 


cannot  be  used  with  words  having  in  themselves  an 
unlovely,  repulsive  signification,  save  in  satire  or  ridi- 
cule. The  translation  may  be  expressed  with  substan- 
tives, by  little,  pretty  little,  dear  little  ;  with  adjectives 
and  adverbs,  by  quite,  very,  or  all  may  be  given  by 
circumlocutions  suited  to  the  context :  — 


papaito;  madrecita, 

mi  hermanito ;  mi  hermanita, 

son  amiguitos, 

mis  primitos  y  primitas, 

la  cotorrita  tiene  dos  patitas, 

;  que  casita  tan  guapita ! 

agradezco  a"  V.  su  regalito, 

\  pobre  hijita  mia ! 

I  me  hace  V.  el  favor  de  un  vasito 

de  agua  fresca? 
voy,  sefiorito ;  —  sefiorita, 
con  que  \  cuidadito ! 
es  jovencito  y  buen  mozo, 
agua  fresquita  <;  quien  pide  ? 
i  bunuelos  calentitos ! 

a  este  caballero  no  le  gustan  las 

bromitas,  [titos, 

yo  aseguro  que  no  faltarfan  azo- 

i  angelitos !  que  pronto  os  aveza- 

ban  a"  los  sacrificios  de  la  carne 

humana ! 

Alfonsito;  Manolito, 
Carlitos;  Merceditas, 
Dolor citas;  Juanita, 
Paquito;  Pepito;  Periquito, 

vive  por  ahi  cerquita, 
se  quedd  algo  lejitos, 
arrfmate  junto,  juntito, 
tome  V.  un  poquito, 
andaba  pasito  a  paso, 


papa,  do ;  come,  mother. 

my  little  brother ;  —  sister. 

they  are  dear  friends  (of  children). 

my  little  cousins. 

the  little  parrot  has  two  little  feet. 

what  a  pretty  little  house ! 

I  thank  you  for  your  nice  gift. 

my  poor  child ! 

will  you  give  me  a  glass  of  cool 

water? 

yes,  sir;  —  ma'am  (of  service), 
so  then,  take  care  now ! 
he  is  young  and  good-looking, 
nice,  cool  water,  who  will  buy? 
fritters,  nice  and  hot ! 

this  gentleman  is   not  fond   of 

jokes.  [forgotten. 

I'll  warrant  the  stripes  were  not 

angelic  spirits !  how  quickly  they 

habituated  you  to  sacrifices  of 

human  flesh ! 

little  Alfonso  ;  —  Manuel. 
Charley ;  little  Mercy, 
little  Dolores ;  Jennie. 
Frank;  Josy;  Peter. 

he  lives  near  here. 

he  kept  some  distance  off. 

move  up,  close  up. 

take  a  little,  pray. 

he  was  going  very  slowly. 


3^4 


Appendix  to  Part  Second. 


b.  Illo,  cillo,  ecillo ;  fern,  ilia,  cilia,  ecilla,  applied 
likewise  to  substantives  and  adjectives,  to  express 
smallness  of  size,  quantity,  or  degree,  either  stated 
indifferently  without  reference  to  fondness,  etc.,  or  in 
a  tone  of  depreciation,  roguishness,  ridicule,  with  or 
without  good  humor,  and  pity  for  an  unfortunate 
person.  It  may  be  translated  by  little,  somewhat,  that 
(in  contempt),  or  as  the  context  suggests  :  — 


un  chiquillo  me  guid, 

un  ladroncillo  es, 

vaya  V.  a"  comprar  un  panecillo, 

estoy  algo  malillo, 

deme  V.  un  poquillo, 

echeme  V.  un  traguillo, 

tiene  un  gustillo  desagradable, 

hubo  un  olorcillo  de  ajos, 
habla  con  el  tonillo  de  un  Cata- 
lan, 

es  un  pobre  vie j ecillo, 
una   mujercilla    que    no    tiene 

vergiienza, 

Julianillo  el  jorobado, 
Francesillo  el  gracioso, 
Sebastianillo  el  enano, 
el  libro  trae  no  pocos  cuente- 

cillos, 

la  Juliana  es  una  loquilla, 
como  me  quiere  tanto  el  ama, 
teme  que  mi  madre  le  robe  ese 
carino  jpobrecilla! 


|   a  youngster  directed  me. 

he  is  a  little  thief. 

go  and  buy  a  loaf  of  bread. 

I  am  somewhat  ailing. 

give  me  a  very  little  (a  trifle) . 

pour  me  out  a  little  (swallow) . 

it  has  a  somewhat  unpleasant 
taste. 

there  was  a  slight  odor  of  garlic. 

he  speaks  with  the  (dialectic)  ac- 
cent of  a  Catalonian. 

he  is  a  poor  old  man. 

a  woman  who  has  no  sense  of 
shame. 

Julian,  the  hunchback. 

Frank,  the  (court)  jester. 

Sebastian,  the  (court)  dwarf. 

the  book  contains  quite  a  number 
of  short  stories. 

Julia  is  a  giddy  girl. 

as  nurse  loves  me  so  much,  she  is 
afraid  my  mother  will  rob  her 
of  that  affection,  poor  thing ! 


c.    Uelo,  zuelo,   ezuelo  ;  fern,  uela,  zuela,  ezuela, 

applied  to  substantives  and  less  frequently  to  adjectives, 
to  express  smallness  in  a  depreciative  sense,  involving 
inferiority,  lownes$,  ridicule,  and  disdain  ;  and  also  in 


Diminutives  and  Augmentatives. 


385 


a  humorous,  roguish,  bantering  style.  Occasionally  it 
replaces  illo  in  its  natural  meaning  of  smallness  with- 
out regard  to  other  qualities :  — 


chicuelo ;  rapazuelo, 
mozuelo;  pequeiiuelo, 
cojuelo;  tontuelo, 
cazuela;  tinajuela, 
plazuela;  callejuela, 
pajuelas;  pedazuelo, 
arroyuelo;  riachuelo, 
hombrezuelo ;  mujerzuela, 
autorzuelo;  pilluelo, 
jovenzuelo;  salonzuelo, 


urchin;  youngster, 
lad ;  little  one. 
limping ;  silly  person, 
skillet ;  jar. 

little  square ;  poor  street, 
matches  ;  a  petty  morsel, 
brooklet;  streamlet, 
little  man  ;  low  woman, 
poor  author ;  little  thief, 
vile  youth  ;  little  parlor. 


REMARK.  —  If  a  polysyllabic  stem  ends  in  a  vowel,  the  letter  h  or 
g  is  inserted  with  this  ending :  — 
aldea,  ] 

aldehuela,  or  aldegiiela,  J 
judio, 


judihuelo,  or  judigiielcx 


a  wretched  hamlet, 
a  despised  Jew. 


d.    Ete,  cete ;  fern,  eta,  ceta,  applied  to  substantives 
in  a  diminutive  and  depreciative  sense  :  — 


un  mocete ;  un  pobrete, 
un  librete ;  un  galancete, 
una  aleta ;  una  lengtieta, 


a  small  boy ;  a  poor  fellow, 
a  small  book ;  a  ladies'  man. 
a  little  wing ;  —  tongue. 


e.  Ejo,  fern,  eja,  is  applied  most  commonly  to  words 
ending  in  /  or  n,  and  denotes  decided  contempt ;  occa- 
sionally, however,  it  merely  indicates  smallness  of  size, 
quality,  degree :  — 


animal  ejo, 
el  alguacilejo, 
un  librejo, 

no  cobro  mas  que  doce  realejos 

diarios,  [papelejo, 

como    dijo    el    autor   de    cierto 


any  troublesome  insect, 
that  constable  (in  disdain) . 
a  worthless  book. 
I  only  get  a  pittance  of  twelve 
reals  a  day.  [once  said, 

as  the  author  of  a  certain  scrawl 


386  Appendix  to  Part  Second. 

dona  Juana  la  Beltraneja,1  lady  Jane,  she  of  Beltran. 

un  arbolejo;  una  canaleja,  a  small  tree  ;  a  drinking-trough. 

amarillejo,  yellowish. 

REMARK.  —  This  ending  is  occasionally  found  with  Arabic  words 
hispanicized,  to  denote  simple  smallness  or  to  distinguish  the  less 
from  the  greater :  — 

The  little  square  by  the  Roman  aqueduct  at  Segovia  in  Spain  is  called 
El  Azoguejo  from  the  Arabic  as-soq,  "the  market,"  "square,"  and  the 
Spanish  diminutive  ending.  Almadenejo  means  "the  lesser  mine,"  to 
distinguish  it  from  Almaden,  Arab,  al-ma'din,  "the  mine." 

760.  Other  diminutives  are  formed  by  means  of  the 
endings  ico,  in,  ino,  and  ino,  all  of  which  are  local  or 
dialectic,  to  wit :  — 

a.  Ico,  cico,  ecico ;  fern,  ica,  cica,  ecica,  usually 
given  as  the  synonym  of  ito,  was  originally  a  local  varia- 
tion proceeding  from  Aragon,  and  domesticated  in  the 
Castiles,  to  add  a  vein  of  sprightly  humor  impossible  to 
characterize.  It  should  not,  therefore,  be  used  indis- 
criminately for  itoy  but  be  held  in  reserve  to  season  a 
choice  diminutive  wittily  and  warily  :  — 


mocico;  jovencico,  * 
avecico;  perrico, 
Juanico;  Alfonsico;2  Perico, 
el  Emperador  y  Felipico,3 


little  lad  ;  little  youngster, 
little  bird  ;  little  dog. 
Johnny ;  Alfonso  ;  Peter, 
the  Emperor  and  little  Philip. 


1  The  princess  dona  Juana,  daughter  of  the  queen  dona  Juana,  wife  of 
Henry  IV  (1462),  by  the  courtier  don  Beltran  de  la  Cueva,  was  popularly  called 
par  mepris  la  Beltraneja,  and  because  of  her  notorious  illegitimacy,  was  set 
aside  from  the  succession,  at  Henry's  death,  for  the  famous  Isabella  of  Castile 

(1474). 

2  For  example,  when  the  present  king  of  Spain  succeeded  to  the  throne  in 
1875,  the  Madrid  people  often  spoke  of  him  as  Alfonsico,  with  a  distinct  mix- 
ture of  irony  and  resignation ;  "Alfonsito "  would  have  been  a  grave  political 
error,  because  of  the  adhesion  it  implies. 

3  Actually  said  of  Charles  V  and  Philip,  his  son,  about  1535,  by  the  court- 
jester,  Francesillo  de  Zufiiga,  in  his  Burlesque  Chronicle. 


Diminutives  and  Augment atives. 


387 


REMARK.  —  The  Aragonese  still  use  ico  in  the  natural  sense. 
Even  in  the  old  local  ballad  which  first  appeared  in  print  in  the 
Cancionero  General  of  Valencia,  1511,  we  find  the  proper  use:  — 


Fountain  cool,  fountain  cool, 
Fountain  cool  and  winsome,  too, 
Where  the  little  birdlings  all 
Gather  Vound  their  mates  to  woo, 
Save  the  little  turtle-dove 
That  is  widowed  of  its  love. 


Fonte  frida,1  fonte  frida, 
Fonte  frida  y  con  amor, 
Do  todas  las  avecicas 
Van  tomar2  consolacion, 
Sino  es  la  tortolica 
Qu'  estd  viuda  y  con  dolor, 

b.  In,  fern,  ina,  peculiar  to  the  Bable  or  Asturian  dia- 
lect ;  ino,  fern,  ina,  common  in  the  province  of  Estre- 
madura ;  and  inoyfem.  ina,  in  the  dialect  of  Galicia,  are 
all  more  or  less  used  in  Castilian  to  denote  smallness 
merely :  — 


un  nifio  chiquitin,     1 
una  nina  chiquitinaj 
calcetin;  calcetines, 
peluca;  peluquin, 
baldosa ;  baldosin, 
bolsa;  bolsin, 
padrino;  madrina, 
paloma ;  palomino, 
recuerdome  que  era  muy  aficio- 
nado d  los  langostinos,3 

cuerpo,  corpino, 


a  wee  little  child. 

sock;  socks. 

wig ;  little  wig. 

flooring-tile ;  fine  flooring-tile. 

exchange ;  evening  exchange. 

godfather;  godmother. 

dove ;  pigeon. 

I  remember  that  he  was  very  fond 

of  shrimps. 
body  of  a  dress. 


Form. 


761.  All  these  endings  are  attached  to  the  stem  of 
a  word  found  by  rejecting  the  terminal  vowel,  unless 
accented,  even  in  diphthongs  :  — 


abeja,  abejita,  little  bee. 
pajaro.  paj  arete,  mean  bird. 
mozo,  mozuelo,  young  lad. 


cuchara,  cucharita,  teaspoon. 
libro,  librillo,  little  book. 
jovenzuelo,  a  youngster. 


rubio,  a,  rubito,  a,  of  light  complexion. 


1  In  Castilian,  Fuente  fria.  2  A  Gallicism  for  van  a  tomar. 

3  A  sense  not  found  in  the  Spanish-English  dictionaries ;  Fr.  ecrevisses. 


388 


Appendix  to  Part  Second. 


762.  The  final  radicals  c,  g  (git),  zy  become  respec- 
tively qu,  gu  (gu),  c,  when  the  ending  is  introduced  by 
one  of  the  vowels  e  or  i :  — 


frac,  fraqu-ecito,  dress-coat. 
fresco,  fresquito,  quite  cool. 
amigo,  amiguillo,  little  friend. 
ciego,  cieguezuelo,  blind  boy. 


lengua,  lengii-ecita,  little  tongue. 
pez,  pececillo,  little  fish. 
cruz,  crucecita,  little  cross. 
pedazo,  pedacillo,  little  piece. 


a.  With  regard  to  radical  diphthongs  that  are  mova- 
ble (ie,  ue)y  usage  generally  requires  them  to  be  retained 
at  the  present  day,  except  in  primitives  of  more  than 
two  syllables  :  — 


huevo,  huev-ecito,  little  egg. 
caliente,  calentito,  nice  and  hot. 


nieto,  niet-ecillo,  little  grandson. 
valiente,  valenton,  a  swaggerer. 

Still  we  say :  puerta,  portezuela,  door  (of  a  carriage). 


763.  The  second  forms  of  the  diminutives,  namely, 
cito  (cico),  cillo,  zuelo,  cete,  are  required  with  words 
of  more  than  one  syllable  ending  in  n  or  r :  — 


salon-cillo,  a  small  parlor. 
gratifLCSicioiicita,smatt  gratuity. 
ladroncillo,  little  pilferer. 
jovencete,  a  youth  (contempt). 

Jardin  makes  jardinito  and  jardincito,  small  garden. 


amor-cillo,  slight  affection. 
autorcico,  boy -author. 
mujerzuela,  silly  woman. 
Dolor citas,  little  Dolores. 


764.   The   third    forms   of   the   diminutives,   namely, 
ecito  (ecico),  ecillo,  ezuelo,  are  to  be  used:  — 

a.    With  monosyllables  :  — 


sol-ecillo,  little  sun. 
flor-ecita,  little  flower. 
pan-ecillo,  loaf  of  bread. 
fraqu-ezuelo,  dress-coat. 


red-ecilla,  net  {for  the  hair} . 
nuez,  nuececica,  little  walnut. 
cruz,  crucecita,  little  cross. 
pez,  pececillo,  little  fish. 


Pie*  makes  piececito,  a  charming  little  foot ;  and  mano,  hand, 
xnanita  or  manecita. 


Diminutives  and  Augmentatives.  389 

b.    With  words  ending  in  e  or  y :  — 


fraile,  frail-ecico,  little  friar. 
ave,  avecilla,  little  bird. 
alegre,  alegrecito,  jolly. 
amable,  amablecillo,  kind. 


viaje,  viaj-ecito,  short  trip. 
rey,  reyezuelo,  petty  sovereign. 
grande,  grandecito,  rather  tall. 
pobre,  pobrezuelo,  sadly  poor. 


But  proper  names  in  e  are  excepteu :  — 
Pepe,  Pepito,  Joseph.  \  Felipe,  Felipico,  Philip. 

c.    With  words  ending  in  a  or  0,  only  when  they  have 
a  diphthong  in  the  stem  :  — 


piedra,  piedrecilla,  little  stone. 
cuerpo,  cuerpezuelo,  little  body. 
ciego,  cieguecillo,  blind. 
nuevo,  nuevecico,  new. 


pleito,  pleitecillo,  law-suit. 
viento,  vientecito,  slight  breeze. 
quieto,  quietecillo,  still. 
viejo,  viejezuelo,  old. 


Except  abuelo,  a,  abuelito,  a,  grandfather,  -mother,  and  perhaps 
others. 

AUGMENTATIVES. 

765.   The  leading  augmentatives  are  :  — 

a.  On,  fern,  ona,  denoting  large  size,  grotesqueness, 
and  in  general  an  extraordinary  degree  of  what  is  con- 
tained in  the  primitive.  Feminine  nouns  usually  be- 
come masculine  in  assuming  this  ending,  unless  natural 
gender  is  indicated  :  — 

calavera,  calaveron,  rascal.          \   cigarro,  cigarron,  big  cigar. 
ala,  zilon,  wing  (of a  fowl,  served),  j    encuentro,  encontron,  shock. 

picaro,  picaron,  great  rogue. 

senor,  senoron,  great  gentleman. 

tunante,  tunanton,  scoundrel. 

autor,  autoron,  big  author. 

valiente,  valenton,  a  brave. 


cuchara,  cucharon,  ladle. 
jarra,  jarron,  large  vase. 
barba,  barb  on,  thick  beard. 
migaja,  migajon,  large  crumb. 
mujer-ona,  big  woman. 


tan  de  sopeton,  so  suddenly,,  unexpectedly. 

b.    Azo,  fern,   aza,   has   a   similar   meaning   applied 
according  to  the  gender  of  the  primitive  :  — 
boca,  bocaza,  big  mouth.  \  hereje,  herejazo,  great  heretic. 


390 


Appendix  to  Part  Second. 


REMARK  i.  —  The  ending  azo  invariable,  is  oftenest  used  to 
represent  a  blow  or  discharge  of  something  indicated  in  the  primi- 
tive :  — 


abanico,  abanicazo, 
baston,  bastonazo, 
bombo,  bombazo, 
porra,  porrazo, 
navaja,  navajazo, 
canon,  canonazo, 
fusil,  fusilazo, 


a  blow  with  a  fan. 

a  blow  with  a  cane. 

a  beating  of  drums. 

a  cudgelling. 

a  thrust  with  the  clasp-knife. 

report  of  a  cannon,  cannon-shot. 

a  rifle-shot. 


REMARK  2. —  The  ending  ada  has  a  similar  meaning;  often  a 
thrust  with  a  sharp  weapon :  — 

una  lanzada  (lanza), 
una  punalada  (punal), 
una  estocada  (estoque), 
una  andanada, 
dar  manotadas, 
una  bufonada, 
una  campanada, 


thrust  with  a  lance. 

a  stab  with  the  short  dirk. 

thrust  with  a  long,  thin  sword. 

a  broadside. 

to  throw  up  the  hands  as  in  falling. 

a  piece  of  buffoonery. 

stroke  of  a  bell. 


c.    Ote.fem.  ota,  has  a  depreciative  sense  sometimes, 
and  others  only  the  augmentative:  — 


amigo,  amigote,  old  friend. 
un  librote  de  a  folio, 
rico,  ricote,  ricota, 
grandote,  feote,  feota, 


hereje,  herejote,  great  heretic. 
an  old  folio  volume, 
rich  and  pretentious, 
pompous,  ugly  old  person. 


d.    Acho  and  ucho  have  the  more  definite  sense  of 
disdain,  contempt :  — 

el  populacho,  the  masses.  \  animalucho,  an  insect. 

una  casucha,  a  poor  house. 


766.  Combinations  of  diminutives  and  augmentatives 
are  very  frequent  to  lend  an  accumulative  force  to  words. 
Such  are :  — 


Diminutives  and  Augmentatives.  391 

a.  Ito  with  ito  and  in  :  — 

chico,  small ' ;  chiquito,  chiquitito,  chiquitin. 
los  pie's  chiquirrititos,  little  mites  of  feet. 

b.  Hlo  with  on  :  — 

grande,  large ;  grandillon,  rather  biggish. 

c.  Etc  with  on  :  — 

mozo,  lad;  mocete,  moceton,  quite  a  tall  lad. 
pobre,  poor;  pobrete,  pobreton,  a  poor  old  fellow. 

d.  Ejo  with  on  :  — 

calle,  street;  calleja,  callejon,  a  lane,  alley. 

e.  Acho  with  uelo  :  — 

rio,  river;  riacho,  riachuelo,  rivulet. 

f.  Acho  with  on  :  — 

bueno,  good;  bonacho,  bonachon,  easy-going,  "clever" 

g.  On  with  azo  :  — 

picaro,  rogue;  picaron,  picaronazo,  piece  of  knavery. 
encuentro,  meeting;  encontron,  encontronazo,  crash. 

767.   Occasional  forms  are  :  — 

nube  ;  nubarron,  cloud  ;  threatening  cloud. 


bobo;  bobarron, 
bobalias;  bobalicon, 
Idmpara;  lampion, 
nariz;  narigon, 
raiz;  raigon, 
vivo ;  vivaracho, 
mamarracho, 
ave ;  avechucho, 
pillo ;  pillastro, 
gente ;  gentuza, 
migaja  (pop.  miejd), 
latin,  latinajo, 


i  o 

stupid ;  great  dunce. 

dolt ;  great  blockhead. 

lamp ;  large  lantern. 

nose ;  big  nose ;  big-nosed. 

root;  snag. 

lively;  sprightly. 

grotesque  ornament,  botch. 

bird ;  bird  of  ill-omen. 

rogue;  great  rogue. 

people;  rabble. 

crumb,  grain.  [ous). 

Latin ;  Latin  quotation  (humor- 


392 


Appendix  to  Part  Second. 


768.   Diminutive    and    augmentative    endings    often 
express  independent  ideas  :  — 


senora,  (married)  lady; 

pano,  doth ; 

pan,  bread; 

manta,  blanket,  wrap; 

azucar,  sugar; 

calzas,  knee-breeches ; 

calle,  street; 


senorita,  young  lady. 
panuelo,  handkerchief. 
panecillo,  loaf  of  bread. 
mantilla,  Spanish  veil. 
azucarillo  (a  confection). 
calzoncillos,  drawers. 
callejon,  lane. 


769.   Many  words  have  endings  that  are  only  appar 
ently  diminutive  and  augmentative:  — 


varon,  a  man,  male. 
tornillo,  screw. 
sencillo,  simple,  plain. 
pantorrilla,  calf  of  the  leg. 
vajilla  (vasilia),  plate  (collect.). 
ladrillo,  brick. 
bosquejo,  sketch. 
cotejo,  collation  of  a  book. 
azulejo,  Dutch  tile. 


conejo,  rabbit. 
guedeja,  lock  of  hair. 
madeja,  skein. 
oveja,  sheep. 
2cm\&\®,  fish-hook. 
cazuela,  skillet  (earthen). 
billete,  ticket. 
bigotes,  mustachios. 
escondrijo,  lurking-place. 


escondite,  hiding-place. 


SECTION    FOURTH. 
DRILL-BOOK. 

Pronunciation. 

[The  accentuated  syllable  that  should  not  bear  the  graphic  accent  is  here 
noted  by  a  long  mark  placed  over  the  vowel  that  has  the  principal  stress ;  thus, 
papel,  but  dnimo.] 

Simple  Vowels. 

Ama,  ala,  ama*ra,  amlgo,  amistad  (31),  almenara,  drama, 
anden,  abalorios,  amapola.  Era,  dpoca,  epistola,  escala,  escalera, 
mandadero,  embarcadero,  sombrero,  sombrerero,  es,  esta,  escuela, 
eslabon,  alfiler,  elemento,  elefante,  £bano,  ingles,  cordobe's.  Libro, 
fila,  tira,  timbre,  tinta,  cortina,  triste,  visita  (40),  baladi,  papelito, 
tilin,  bailarin,  motin.  Olor,  opaco,  reld,  autor,  mediador,  corredor, 
con  (never  koii)i  conmlgo,  contento,  confiado,  consonante,  narigon, 
pasion.  Pluma,  uso,  usted,  gusto,  busto,  susto,  busca,  bulto,  duda, 
burla,  gula,  nulo,  unico,  ambigu,  abuso,  adulation  (28). 

Diphthongs. 

Aire,  airoso  (40),  baile,  caigo,  traigo,  fraile,  vaiven,  maitmes. 
Auto,  aula,  bautismo,  aun  (even),  caudal,  caudaloso,  raudal  (39), 
autor,  fautor,  auditorio.  Aureo,  aurea,  empireo,  Imea.  Peine, 
veinte,  treinta,  afeite,  deleite,  aceite  (28),  reino,  reinado,  ley,  rey. 
Feudo,  neutro,  deudo,  leudo,  Euro,  Europa.  Feria,  amplio,  amplia, 
Hmpio,  llmpia,  nimio,  nimia,  indio,  india,  vicio,  ciencia,  servicio, 
paciencia,  codicia,  albrlcias. 

Hielo,  grieta,  nieto,  viene,  consiente,  doliente,  teniente,  bien, 
tambien,  sienes,  bienes,  siempre,  tientan,  sienten,  vientos, 
CTudadano,  viudo  ;  coima,  oigo,  estdico,  herdico.  Cuando,  cuanto, 
guardia,  agua,  estdtua,  contmua.  Fuego,  duelo,  vuelo,  suelo, 
fuero,  agiiero,  nuevo,  muero,  trueno,  grueso.  CuTdadoso,  ruidoso, 
arruinado,  huireis  ;  ambiguo,  tortuoso,  virtuoso. 


394  Drill-Book. 

Improper  Diphthongs. 

Cae,  trae,  caida,  traido,  cai;  haul,  ataud  or  atahud,  aun -(yet, 
still)  ;  galantea,  alancea,  hebrea,  marea ;  cree,  lee,  alancee,  galantee ; 
ref,  creimos,  creido,  leldo ;  toreo,  hebreo,  liceo,  galanteo ;  galena, 
alegria,  tropelia,  tonteria,  heria,  comiamos,  vivfan ;  rie,  avie ;  rio, 
vario ;  oido,  old ;  huida,  imbuldo ;  continua,  falua. 

Consonants. 

Bienes,  vienes,  bota,  voto,  bebe,  vive,  bata,  vate,  tubo,  tuvo, 
bacia,  vacfa,  balido,  valido,  baron,  varon,  hombre,  nombre,  bribon. 
Casa,  caldo,  caridad  ;  queso,  quema,  querella,  palenque,  alcornoque, 
albaricoque  ;  quien,  quiso,  quieto,  quimica,  alquila,  tranquilo  ;  cosita, 
coro,  corona ;  curioso,  cubo,  alcuza ;  escualido,  cuantioso,  cuasi ; 
cuestion,  cuela,  cuero,  Cuenca;  cuita,  cuidado ;  cuota,  inicuo. 
Muchacho,  leche,  Elche,  noche ;  cuchillo,  chico,  marchito ;  ocho, 
ducho,  chorro,  dicho,  ricachon,  cachorro;  chucho,  higo-chumbo, 
chulo,  chusma. 

Gato,  galgo,  ganga ;  guerra,  sigue,  albergue,  drogueria,  guedeja, 
Agueda;  guia,  guion,  guitarra,  erguido,  aguila,  guisantes,  seguia, 
borcegui ;  hidalgo,  gozo,  hago,  sirgo,  higo,  conslgo ;  gula,  gusto, 
arguyo,  regular.  Guapo,  guarida,  agua,  fragua,  averlgua;  fragile, 
desagiie,  averigiie,  antigiiedad  ;  argtiir ;  antiguo,  averiguo,  santlguo. 
Hallazgo,  ahora,  habeis,  halagiiefio,  tahur,  desahucio,  haba,  hdroe, 
hilo,  horadaclo,  hule,  huso.  Jaula,  alhaja,  baraja,  jaleo ;  mujer, 
general,  ajeno,  rige,  aflige,  gesto,  genio,  ingenio ;  giro,  gitano, 
dijlste,  registro ;  tasajo,  atajo,  trabajo,  influjo,  trujo ;  juzgo,  enjuto, 
jura;  Juan,  enjuague :  juego,  majuelo,  tejuelo,  juez ;  juicio. 

Halla,  batalla,  llama,  llanto ;  calle,  valle,  Ballecas,  calleja ;  alii, 
cepillito ;  huello,  murmullo,  grulla,  orgullo  ;  lluvia,  velludo.  Nina, 
rifia,  sena,  vina,  engana ;  ensene,  engane ;  renir,  cenir,  tenido ; 
sefior,  engano,  afio,  bano,  dano  ;  sanudo,  nudo.  Vara,  toro,  moro ; 
hablar,  comer,  decir,  llegar,  placer,  dolor ;  arte,  tarde,  hurto,  guardia ; 
rota,  rueda,  ruego,  rasgo,  rindo;  chorro,  torre,  Jburra,  ahorrar; 
enredo,  es  regular,  irregular,  corro.  Santo,  eso,  pasa,  pasado, 
lloroso,  odioso,  Toboso,  cosa,  musa.  Yema,  yedra,  yeso,  yugo, 
tuyo,  suyo,  arguyo.  Raza,  taza,  caza,  haz,  feliz,  desllz  ;  hice,  cena, 
dice,  alancear ;  cita,  civil,  ciudad,  licito ;  mozo,  gozo,  zozobra ; 
panzudo,  zumbar,  azul,  azucena. 


Pronunciation.  395 

Faccioso,  coleccion,  diccionario,  accionista.  Desdicha,  dardo, 
humilde,  muerdo,  ardiendo  ;  dedo,  hablado,  arboleda,  comida, 
soldado,  embudo,  greda;  maldad,  caridad,  verdad,  hablad,  corned, 
usted,  merced,  red,  ved,  acudid,  Madrid,  sacudid,  ardid,  virtud, 
ataud,  almud;  odre,  pudrir,  vendra,  tendra,  albedrio.  Inmenso, 
inmortal,  inmarcesible.  Sexo,  exacto,  mdxime,  proximo,  exhortar, 
exultar.  Naranja,  lisonja,  gengibre. 

Geographical  Names. 

Alava,  Albacete,  AlcaM,  Alcantara,  Alcdzar,  Almeria,  Alora, 
Alsdsua,  Aranjuez,  Ardvalo,  Avila.  Badajoz,  Barcelona,  Baztan, 
Beasoain,  Burgos.  Castillejos,  Ceuta,  Ciudadreal,  Cuenca. 
Darincharinea.  Elizondo,  Escorial.  Fuenterrabia.  Gijon,  Granada, 
Granja,  Guadalajara,  Guadalaviar,  Guadalhorce,  Guadalquivir, 
Guipuzcoa.  Hellin.  Irun,  Jabalquinto,  Jaen,  Jativa,  Jerez.  Medellm, 
Menjibar,  Mdrida,  Montilla,  Murcia.  Pamplona.  Quintanapalla. 
Santander,  Santiponce,  Sevilla,  Socuellamos.  Tanjer,  Teruel, 
Trujillo.  Valencia,  Valladolid,  Villalba,  Vitoria,  Vizcaya.  Zaragoza. 

Proper  Adjectives. 

Asturiano,  Valencia.no,  Murciano,  Guipuzcoano,  Toledano, 
Sevillano,  Jerezano,  Gaditano,  Vallisoletano,  Zaragozano,  Castellano; 
Alicantmo,  Granadino,  Vizcaino,  Alcalamo,  Bilbamo ;  Madrileno, 
Estremeno,  Malagueno ;  Matritense,  Conquense,  Tudense,Vascuence ; 
Catalan,  Aleman ;  Gallego,  Manchego ;  Alavds,  Aragones,  Leon^s, 
Cartagin^s,  Cordobes,  Tudes,  Frances,  Ingles,  Irlandes,  Escocds ; 
Navarro ;  Espanol,  Andaluz,  Flamenco,  Maragato. 

Family  Names. 

Alvaro,  Alvarez,  Arderius,  Benitez,  Bermiidez,  Carvajal,  Cervantes, 
Diaz,  Diez,  Dommguez,  Eguflaz,  Est^banez,  Fernandez,  Garcia, 
Garcds,  Gomez,  Gonzalez,  Gutierrez,  Herv^.s,  Ibanez,  Ifiigo, 
Iniguez,  Jimenez,  Lodisa,  Nunez,  Pdrez,  Ramirez,  Rodriguez, 
Sanchez,  Sanchiz,  Tellez,  Velasquez. 


396  Drill-Book. 


FIRST   SERIES. 
Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection. 

[The  words  will  be  found  in  the  vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book.  Words 
in  parentheses  are  to  be  expressed  in  Spanish.  Hyphens  connect  English 
terms  which  are  to  be  given  in  Spanish  by  one  word.  The  small  figures  at  the 
top  of  the  line  indicate  the  order  of  the  words  in  Spanish.  Words  to  be  left 
untranslated  are  placed  between  brackets.] 

Exercise  First. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§79,  81,  82,  84,  85,  101-104,  107-110. 

I.  The  friend  of  the  king,  or  the  king's  friend.  2.  The  queen's 
room.  3.  The  captain's  ships.  4.  The  boy's  pens.  5.  The  estates 
of  the  gentlemen,  or  the  gentlemen's  estates.  6.  The  ladies'  pres- 
ents. 7.  The  leaves  of  the  trees.  8.  The  palaces  of  the  king-and- 
queen  (106).  9.  The  houses  of  the  prince-and-princess.  10.  The 
master-and-mistress  of  the  servants. 

ii.  A  tree  of  the  garden.  12.  A  door  of  the  house.  13.  The 
verdict  of  a  judge.  14.  The  counsels  of  a  mother.  15.  The  water 
of  the  sea.  16.  The  child's  hunger.  17.  The  stir  of  a  town.  18.  The 
girl's  needle.  19.  The  birds  of  the  air  (Span.  sky).  20.  The  flight 
of  the  eagle. 

21.  The  joy  of  the  house.     22.  The  judge  speaks  to  the  prisoner. 

23.  The  captain  gives   (to)  the  sailor  the  command  of  a  vessel. 

24.  The  lady  lends  a  book  to  the  girl.     25.  A  gentleman  gave  money 
to  the  errand-boys.     26.  The  queen  gave  the  jewels  to  the  ladies. 
27.  The  souls  of  (the)  men.     28.  The  laws  of  the  commonwealth. 
29.  The  crosses  of  the  generals.     30.  The  servants  of  the  judges. 

31.  (The)  trees  have  leaves.  32.  (The)  vessels  have  sails. 
33.  Charles  has  money.  34.  Agnes  has  sisters.  35.  Lewis'  father 
has  houses  and  lands.  36.  A  town  has  streets.  37.  A  house  has 
doors  and  windows.  38.  A  man  has  friends  and  enemies.  39.  (The) 
nations  have  government  and  laws.  40.  (The)  wild  boars  live  in 
the  mountains.  41.  The  ministers  wear  crosses.  42.  (The)  part- 
ridges and  quails  live  in  the  woods. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  397 


Exercise  Second. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§112-118. 

i.  The  rose  is  a  beautiful  flower.  2.  (The)  roses  are  beautiful 
flowers.  3.  The  garden  has  high2  walls.1  4.  (The)  benevolent2 
ladies1  are  always  beautiful.  5.  The  water  is  (esta)  cool;  it-comes 
from  a  living2  spring.1  6.  My  friend  lives  in  a  white2  house.1 
7.  The  Spanish  language  is  rich  and  harmonious.  8.  The  [ladies] 
of-Cadiz  are  beautiful.  9.  The  boys  and  girls  have  roguish2  eyes.1 
10.  The  streets  of  the  city  are  broad. 

ii.  The  German2  literature1  is  modern,  the  Castilian  is  ancient. 
12.  (The)  wise2  men1  are  good  companions.  13.  The  French2 
rail-ways1  are  (estdri)  well  made.  14.  (The)  Spanish2  laws1  are 
very  ancient.  15.  (The)  Andalusian2  customs1  are  very  graceful 
and  picturesque.  16.  The  houses  in  Spain  are  generally  low,  but 
spacious.  17.  Madrid  has  the  characteristics  of  a  French2  town.1 
1 8.  The  men  wear  tall2  hats,1  and  the  young-men  caps  of  curious2 
shape.1 

19.  You  will-find  English2  and  French3  goods1  in  the  Spanish2 
shops.1  20.  A  good  memory  is  necessary  in-order-to  learn  a  lan- 
guage. 21.  The  Andalusian2  wit-and-humor1  is  known  everywhere. 
22.  The  young-man  directed  treacherous2  glances1  toward  his 
opponent.  23.  The  highland-women  of  Spain  serve  as  (de)  nurses 
in  the  capital.  24.  They  wear  tall2  head-dresses1  and  picturesque2 
costumes1  with  much  jewelry  and  bright2  colors.1  25.  Charles  gave 
(to)  his  sister  a  new2  book1  illustrated  with  many  engravings. 

Exercise  Third. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  119-122. 

i.  An  easy2  lesson.1  2.  Spain  has  many  religious2  festivals,1 
and  few  national  [ones].  3.  (The)  parents  are  faithful2  friends.1 
4.  We  spent  many  happy2  hours1  at  (en)  his  house.  5.  (The)  rainy 
days  are  dull,  but  useful.  6.  There-are  noble2  men1  and  vile2 
men.1  7.  A  common2  interest1  unites2  them.1  8.  Agnes  gave 
(to)  her  sister  a  blue2  ribbon.1  9.  (The)  young-men  are  capable 
of  doing  (to  do)  many  things  which  are  impossible  to  the  old. 
10.  The  customs  of-Morocco  are  very  different  from  those  (las) 


398  Drill-Book. 

of-Europe.     n.   All  his  remarks  were  courteous.     12.    Spain  is  a 
wine-growing2  country.1 

13.  (The)  Spanish2  villages1  generally2  have1  one  broad2  street.1 
14.  A  large2  house1  has  many  rooms  of  different  sizes.  15.  A 
palace  has  public2  and  private3  apartments.1  16.  The  sweet2 
orange1  is  for  Mary,  and  the  sour2  lemon1  is  for  John.  17.  The 
gentlemen  understand  many  different  languages.  18.  The  official'2 
buildings1  of  a  capital  where1  the  government3  resides2  are  usually 
large  and  magnificent.  19.  The  Catalonian2  manufacturers1  furnish 
all  Spain  with  (de)  common2  fabrics.1  20.  All  (the)  wars  are 
serious,  and  are  contrary  to  the  spirit  of  (the)  Christianity. 


Exercise  Fourth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  123-127. 

i.  A  good  man  always  has  good  friends.  2.  Lewis  wants  a  good 
pen,  the-one  that  (la  qite)  he  has  is  poor.  3.  (The)  good  books 
are  good  companions,  and  much  more  convenient  than  (the)  living 
[ones].  4.  One  bad2  boy1  can  do  much  harm.  5.  Thisb  has J  been4 
[a]  bad1  year2  for  the  farmers.  6.  One  bad  thought  may  engender 
a  bad  habit.  7.  A  poor  book  is  [a]  poor  companion.  8.  The  bad2 
boys1  cherish  bad  designs.  9.  The  last  moment  of  (the)  life. 
10.  The  last  day  of  the  fair.  n.  The  first  month  of-the  year. 
12.  My  friend  lives  in  the  first  white2  house1  on  the  right.  13.  In 
the  three  first  centuries  the  Latin2  language1  was  spoken  (fern.) 
over  all  Spain.  14.  The  campaign  began  in  the  third  month  of-the 
third  year  of  the  emperor's  reign. 

15.  The  third  man.  16.  The  third  week.  17.  The  first  and 
third  row.  18.  One  book  read  with  care  is-worth  more  than  many 
read  (in.  pi.)  carelessly.  19.  One  day  a  friend2  came1  to  our 
house.  20.  One  week  has  seven  days.  21.  Some  day  we-shall-go 
to  Spain.  22.  Some  time  after  he-read  the  newspaper.  23.  I-saw 
the  (§  76)  man  some  weeks  before.  24.  Some  oranges  are  sour. 
25.  No  occasion  is  better  than  the  present  (fern.).  26.  No  day  is 
free  from  cares.  27.  No  friends  are  so  faithful  as  those  (the)  of  our 
own  household.  28.  A  great  danger  threatened2  him.1  29.  In  a 
great  house  there-are  many  servants.  30.  A  great  man  has  many 
friends.  31.  A  great  general  is  often  [a]  guarantee  of  (the)  peace. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  399 

32.  The  blow  may  fall  any  day.      33.   Better  is  no  book  than  any 
book.      34.    The  father  gave  (to)  his  son  [one]  hundred  dollars. 

35.  I-saw  [one]  hundred  soldiers  drawn-up  in  the  public-square. 

36.  [One]  hundred  and  one  is  [an]  odd2  number.1 


Exercise  Fifth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  128-131. 

.  i.  He-brings  an  important  piece-of-news.  2.  He-is  an  influential 
man.  3.  The  parable  of-the  prodigal  son.  4.  The  poem  of  (the) 
Paradise  Lost.  5.  The  young-man's  threatening  looks.  6.  The 
measures  of  (the)  foreign  governments.  7.  The  iron-clad  ships  of 
the  French  and  English  (§  655).  8.  Madrid  society  (the  society 
of-Madrid)  is  gay  in  (the)  winter.  9.  He-speaks  the  Spanish 
language.  10.  Cabrera  was  [a]  Carlist  chieftain,  n.  Espartero 
was  the  principal  general  of  the  Constitutional  party. 

12.  The  definite  decision  of-the  government.  13.  The  innocent 
lambs.  14.  (The)  entangling  alliances.  15.  The  producing  classes. 
1 6.  The  active  and  passive  service,  that  is,  the  employed  and  pen- 
sioned officers.  17.  The  second  and  third  chapters.  18.  (The)  books 
first  and  fifth.  19.  He-gives  good  advice  (pi.)-  20.  He-undergoes 
a  just2  punishment.1  21.  He-writes  with  a  bad  pen.  22.  He-leads 
(lleva)  a  bad  life.  23.  In  (the)  ancient  times  the  selectmen  repre- 
sented (representaban)  the  (al)  third'  estate,  that  is  to  say  (it-is  to 
say),  the  (al)  people.  24.  He-has  a  great  defect,  which  (que)  is 
almost  a  vice.  25.  My  father  has  a  large  house.  26.  The  doctor 
lives  in  the  new  street.  27.  The  poor  man  has  the  sympathies  of 
all  (the)  charitable  persons.  28.  He-placed  several  volumes  on 
the  table.  29.  I-found  that  poem  in  a  volume  of  miscellaneous 
papers.  30.  The  messenger  brought  reliable  news  (pl>). 

Exercise  Sixth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  132-139. 

i.  The  building  is  as  large  as  a  palace.  2.  The  window  is  as 
high  as  the  ceiling.  3.  The  toys  are  as  amusing  as  the  books. 
4.  The  pens  are  as  poor  as  the  paper  and  the  ink.  5.  The  women 
are  as  tall  as  the  men.  6.  The  house  is  as  white  as  (the)  snow. 
7.  John  is  as  small  as  his  brother.  8.  Agnes  is  as  gentle  as  a  lamb. 


400  Drill-Book. 

9.  The  merchant  is  as  rich  as  the  banker.  10.  The  paper  is2  not1 
so  fine  as  the  envelopes,  n.  The  house  is  not  so  large  as  the 
palace.  12.  The  streets  of  Toledo  are  not  so  broad  as  those  (the) 
of  Madrid. 

13.  Paul  has  as-much  courage  as  Peter.  14.  Mary  has  as-much 
diligence  as  her  sister.  15.  The  boys  have  as-many  projects  as  the 
men.  16.  The  tables  have  as-many  legs  as  the  chairs.  17.  Julia 
has  as-many  pens  as  her  friend  Louisa.  18.  The  merchant  has2 
not1  so-much  money  as  the  banker.  19.  The  horse  has  not  so-much 
patience  as  the  ox.  20.  John  has  not  so-many  friends  as  Peter. 
21.  The  farmer  has  not  so-many  houses  as  the  judge.  22.  The  cat 
is  not  so  useful  as  the  dog. 

23.  The  horse  is  more  useful  than  the  ox.  24.  (The)  gold  and 
(the)  silver  are  more  precious  (684)  than  (the)  iron  or  (the)  lead. 
25.  The  houses  of-the  king  are  more  spacious  than  those  (the)  of 
(the)  citizens.  26.  The  merchants  are  richer  than  the  scholars. 
27.  The  wise  are  happier  than  the  ignorant.  28.  The  tables  are 
taller  than  the  chairs.  29.  John  is  less  amiable  than  his  sister. 
30.  The  laborer  has  fewer  books  than  the  mechanic.  31.  The  farmer 
has  less  money  than  the  shop-keeper,  but  he-is  more  contented  than 
the-latter  (este).  32.  We-have  more  than  (§  137,  b)  [one]  hundred 
acquaintances  in  this  town.  33.  The  royal  palace  is  larger  than  any 
(125)  of  the  houses  in  (of)  the  capital.  34.  It-is  difficult  to  say 
which  is  {sea}  better,  (the)  riches  or  (the)  wisdom ;  both  are-im- 
portant to  the  state  and  to  (the)  society. 

Exercise  Seventh. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  140-148. 

i.  The  count's  palace  is  the  largest2  building1  in  (147)  the  city. 
2.  This  is  the  widest2  street1  in  the  capital.  3.  He-gave  the  wisest2 
counsel1  of  all.  4.  He-is  the  best  friend  (that)  I  have.  5.  A  dulled 
conscience  is  our  worst  enemy.  6.  He-took  the  smallest'2  coin1  that 
/  had  (tenia).  7.  The  wisest  [men]  err  sometimes.  8.  The  love- 
liest2 women1  are2  not1  always  the  most  beautiful.  9.  The  best 
schools  in  (the)  town  are  the  public  [ones].  10.  The  most  enter- 
taining2 books1  for  (the)  children  are  those  (the)  which  have  pictures. 
ii.  He-gave2  me1  [some]  of  his  poorest  (peores)  pens.  12.  The 
fleece  of  the  lamb  was  of  the  whitest2  color.1 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  401 

13.  The  justest  judgments  are  always  the  wisest.  14.  The 
shortest2  road1  is2  not1  always  the  best.  15.  (The)  Spanish  pro- 
verbs are  full  of  the  profoundest2  truths.1  16.  The  earliest  collection 
is  of-the  marquis  of  Santillana.  17.  The  Broad2  Street1  of  St. 
Bernard  is  one  of  the  longest  in  the  Spanish  capital.  18.  The  street 
of  Alcala  is  the  most  beautiful  in  Madrid.  19.  The  Gate  of  the  Sun 
is  the  most  spacious2  square1  in  that  town.  20.  The1  shortest6 
street,2  or3  rather4 -lane,5  is  that  (the)  of  Seville.  21.  The  city  of 
Cadiz  is  the  most  ancient  in  Europe.  22.  Seen  (fern.)  from  the  sea, 
it-appears  [to  be]  a  mass  of  [the]  whitest  clouds  (superl.  abs.}. 


Exercise  Eighth. 
Learn  and  Recite  §§  149,- 159. 

I.  The  day  is  very  fine.  2.  The  night  was  (estuvo)  very  dark. 
3.  He-is  a  most2  congenial3  person1  (with  muy).  4.  His  arrival 
was  most-timely  (\K.-isim6).  5.  The  benches  are  very-low  (or  very 
low).  6.  The  review  was  most-brilliant.  7.  We-have  very-many 
friends  in  this  town.  8.  There-is  very-much  fruit  this  year. 
9.  The  houses  of  Cadiz  are  very-white.  10.  The  Phrenicians  were 
a  very-ancient  people  (151).  n.  This  is  a  most-beautiful  bird. 
12.  The  boy  is  exceedingly  diligent.  13.  The  ring  is  of  [the]  finest2 
gold1  (absoL).  14.  The  lecture  was  (estuvd)  very-well-attended. 

15.  He-is  a  very-learned2  man.1  16.  His  manners  were  very-mild. 
17.  Some  of  the  streets  of  London  are  very-long.  18.  His  conduct 
was  (fue)  most-shocking.  19.  The  occasion  was  most-happy. 
20.  Last-night  occurred  a  most-shocking2  attempt1  against  the 
king's  life.  21.  This  afternoon  the  attendance  at  the  Cortes  was 
very-slim.  22.  The  way  is  very-long  and  the  night  very  dark. 
23.  The  countess  is  a  very-amiable  lady.  24.  Our  neighbor's 
father-and-mother  are  very-old.  25.  The  envelopes  are  very-poor. 
26.  The  question  is  [a]  very-difficult  [one],  27.  The  news  is  quite 
certain. 

28.  The  dog  is  a  very-faithful2  friend.1  29.  It- was  a  very-devout 
action  (reg.  of  piadosd).  30.  The  inside  room  is  more  quiet  than 
the  front  [one].  31.  This  gentleman  is  my  most  intimate  friend. 
32.  He-is  quite  young,  but  he-has  considerable  experience.  33.  He 


402  Drill-Book. 

has  a  very2  pretty3  hotel1  on  the  "  Castellana." *     34.  He-is  very 
[much  of  a]  gentleman. 

Exercise  Ninth. 
Learn  and  Recite  §§  160-165. 

i.  Two  men  and  three  boys.  2.  Four  books  and  five  pencils. 
3.  Seven  churches  and  six  schools.  4.  Nine  windows  and  eight 
doors.  5.  Ten  oranges  and  twelve  pears.  6.  Eighteen  ships  and 
three-hundred  men.  7.  Fifteen  trees  and  thirteen  statues.  8.  Twenty 
horses  and  fifty  sheep.  9.  Five-hundred  houses  and  twelve  thousand 
residents.  10.  Ninety-nine  cents  and  nine  mills. 

ii.  Eight  and  six  are  fourteen.  12.  A  year  has  twelve  months. 
13.  A  month  has  thirty  or  thirty-one  days.  14.  A  year  has 
three-hundred  [and]  sixty-five  days.  15.  A  Spanish  real  is-worth 
about  five  cents,  and  a  Cuban  [one]  ten  cents.  16.  There-are 
nineteen  ships  and  twenty-six  steamers  in  the  port.  17.  A  set  of 
twelve  chairs,  two  sofas,  and  three  or  four  easy-chairs  form  a  siller  la. 
1 8.  The  permanent2  army1  of  Spain  in  time  of  peace  consists  of 
more  than  seventy-five  thousand  men.  19.  They-have  fifty  thou- 
sand men  in  the  Basque  provinces  since  the  peace  of  1876.  20.  The 
year  (of)  1492  was  [a]  very  notable  [one].  21.  The  capture  of 
Constantinople  in  the  year  (of)  1453  was  coetaneous  with  the  inven- 
tion of  (the)  printing  in  Europe. 

Exercise   Tenth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  166,  168-170. 

I.  The  first  day  of  the  week.  2.  The  second  month  of  the  year. 
3.  The  third  Saturday  of  the  month.  4.  Three  is  the  fourth  part  of 
twelve.  5.  The  seventh  exercise  is  easier  than  the  eighth.  6.  The 
first  lessons  of  a  new  language  are  more  difficult  than  the  last. 
7.  The  second  half  of  the  nineteenth2  century.1  8.  The  twenty- 
third2  chapter1  of  the  book.  9.  The  thirtieth2  volume ]  of  the  history 
of  Spain. 

10.  The  Arabs  entered  (into)  Spain  in  the  eighth  century. 
ii.  Alfonso  the  Tenth  was  a  wise  and  enlightened  king.  12.  A 

*  The  name  of  a  fashionable  drive  in  Madrid,  the  extension  of  the  Prado 
and  Recoletos. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  403 

Spanish  real  is  the  twentieth  part  of  a  dollar.  13.  He-spends  one 
(the)  half  of  his  time  in  the  streets.  14.  He-lost  three  fourths  (the 
three  quarter  parts)  of  his  income.  15.  Nine  tenths  of  them  were 
favorable  to  the  project.  16.  He-gave  (to)  his  son  one  fifteenth 
(the  fifteenth  part)  of  his  receipts.  17.  (The)  four  fifths  of  the 
soldiers  were  raw-recruits. 

1 8.  The  servant  bought  a  quarter  of  flour,  a  quarter  of  wine,  a 
little  beef,  and  [some]  lettuce  for  the  salad.  19.  The  farmer  gave 
(to)  the  parish-priest  his  tithe  of  wheat.  20.  Last-night  the  con- 
scripts disturbed  the  neighborhood  with  their  shouts  and  songs. 
21.  At  the  introduction  of  printing  into  Spain  at  the  close  (a  ultimas) 
of  the  fifteenth2  century,1  all  (the)  books  were  printed  in  folio  or  in 
quarto.  22.  (The)  ancient2  Spanish3  books1  in  8vo  are  usually  of 
the  size  of  our  books  in  i6mo,  or  smaller  still. 


Exercise  Eleventh. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  171-175. 

i.  Five  and  three  are*  eight  and  ten  are  eighteen,  and  seven  are 
twenty-five.  2.  Three  times  nine  are  twenty-seven.  3.  Four  times 
eight  are  thirty-two.  4.  Twelve  times  twelve  [are  a]  hundred  and 
forty-four.  5.  Twice  thirteen  are  twenty-six  and  nine  are  thirty- 
five.  6.  A  day  and  [a]  half.  7.  An  hour  and  [a]  quarter. 
8.  He-gave  one  (the)  half  of  his  goods  to  the  poor.  9.  He-worked 
half  [a]  day.  10.  He-will-wait  half  [an]  hour. 

n.  I-spent  a  couple  of  days  in  the  country.  12.  He-bought  half 
[a]  dozen  (of)  oranges.  13.  He  sold  a  dozen  and  [a]  half  (of) 
boxes  of  raisins.  14.  He-has  a  score  of  acquaintances.  15.  He-lived 
there  a  score-and-a-half  of  years.  16.  He  spoke  once  or  twice  (two). 
17.  He-plays  sometimes.  18.  (The)  children  cry  many  times  or 
often.  19.  (The)  thoughtful2  men1  jest  seldom.  20.  Some  (unas) 
times  he-wrote,  other  [times]  he-read. 

21.  He-plays  every  day.  22.  He-goes  to  the  country  twice  a  (al) 
year.  23.  He-writes  every  month.  24.  He-visits  (to)  his  parents 
every  two  months.  25.  He  attends  (to)  the  church  every  week. 
26.  He  studies  (at)  every  moment ;  he-is  very  diligent.  27.  Every 
three  months  I-go  to  (the)  town. 

*  Are  is  usually  omitted  in  ordinary  calculations. 


404  Drill-Book. 

28.  6  +  3  -f  9  —  8  =  10.  29.  |  and  T%  are  how-many?  30.  In  a 
couple  of  hours  he-will-be  here.  31.  I  have  visited  the  palace  of 
the  Alhambra  a  score  of  times.  32.  Sometimes  he-comes  in  (por) 
the  morning,  and  others  in  (for)  the  afternoon.  33.  Every  day 
I  write  three  or  four  letters.  34.  Every  time  that  I-see2  him1 
he-pleases2  me1  less. 


Exercise  Twelfth. 

Learn  and  Recite  p.  90;  Read  pp.  91-93 ;  and  Learn  Pres.  Ind.  of 
§  536,  p.  254. 


tengo,       or 
yo  tengo 
V.  tiene,  or 
tiene  V. 


/  have. 


>  you  ha 


<J  tengo  yo  ?  or 
I  tengo  ? 
£  tiene  V.?  or 
V.  tiene? 


have  I? 


no  tengo,       or  ~\   I  have  not,  or 
yo  no  tengo       /  I  have  no. 
V.  no  tiene,  or  ^  you  have  not,  or 
no  tiene  V.        J  you  have  no. 


£no  tengo  yo?  or  "\  have  I  not?  or 

I  no  tengo  ?  J  have  I  no  ? 

<?  no  tiene  V.  ?   or  ^  have  you  not  ?  or 

«iV.  no  tiene?        J  have  you  no? 


So  all  the  persons  in  all  the  tenses  throughout  the  verb. 

i.  I  have  a  book  and  a  pencil.  2.  Thou  hast  more  knives  than  I. 
3.  He  has  many  houses,  and  she  has  many  [lady]  friends.  4.  You 
have  fewer  oranges  than  I.  5.  I  have  better  presents  than  you. 
6.  We  boys  (189,  a)  have  more  time  than  you  girls.  7.  Agnes' 
sisters  have  prettier  dresses  than  she.  8.  They  have  also  bracelets 
and  necklaces.  9.  Mary  and  Jane  have  rings ;  we  have  no  orna- 
ments. 10.  Charles  and  Peter  have  no  rings,  n.  John  has  new2 
shoes1  and  a  new2  hat.1  12.  Ye  (zd  pi.}  have  a  good  father  and 
a  good  mother.  13.  Children,  have  ye  no  toys?  14.  Peter  and 
Manuel  have  a  top  and  a  drum  ;  but  they  haven't  [any]  hoops. 

15.  We  have  good  friends;  they  have  no  friends.  16.  Have  you 
no  needles,  Julia?  17.  What  have  we?  18.  You  have  kind2  parents 
and  relatives.1  19.  Has2  the  poor  boy3  no1  kite4?  20.  Have1  the 
boys3  [any]  friends2?  21.  What  have  you  (//.)?  22.  We  have  a 
ball  and  a  hoop.  23.  Who  has  my  brother's  slate?  24.  We  have 
his  slate.  25.  You  have  my  sister's  paper  and  pens. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  405 

26.  Have  I  a  pen?  27.  You  have  not  [an]  inkstand.  28.  Have 
you  a  sister?  29.  We  have  cousins,  but  we  have  not  [an]  uncle 
and  [an]  aunt  (§  106).  30.  Have  we  no  paper?  31.  Have2  the 
children3  no1  toys4?  32.  Have  they  [any]  letters?  33.  Hast  thou 
a  pencil  and  a  rule?  34.  Here  is  (have  you)  a  pencil,  but  I  have 
no  rule. 

Exercise  Thirteenth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  184-186,  205,  and,  Pres.  Ind.  of  §  362,  p.  171. 

le  hablo,  or  j  f         k  ^    f  him.  £  lo  hallo  ; 

/  I  her. 


yo  le  hablo 

V.  le  habla  )  7  ,    f  him. 

\  you  speak  to  \ 
le  habla  V.  jf  \Jter. 

no  le  hablo,  or\Ido  not  sfeak  to  f  Mm. 
yo  no  le  hablo  J  i.  her. 

V.  no  le  habla  )  ,  ,  .    f  him. 


no  le  habla  V 


a  1  ,  ,.,    $ 

\youdonotspeakto\ 

.  J  l/ 


<;lo  hallo?       J 

;lohalla  V.?)      ,  .     ,  .,  ,, 

Y  do  you  find  it  ? 
iV.  lohalla?/ 

£  no  lo  hallo  yo  ?  )    do  I  notjind 

I  no  lo  hallo?       J  zV/1 

^  no  lo  halla  V.  ?  ")  do  you  not  find 


.  nolohalla?/  it? 


So  all  the  persons  in  all  the  tenses  throughout  the  verb. 

Like  hablar,  conjugate  :  buscar,  to  look  for,  to  seek;  hallar,  to  fina"; 
alabar,  to  praise  ;  enganar,  to  deceive. 

i.  I-am-looking-for  something  (379).  2.  What  are-you-looking- 
for?  3.  I-am-looking-for  a  needle,  but  I  do  not  find  it  (fern.). 
4.  Do  you  not  find  it?  5.  You  deceive  yourself  (398),  you  have  it 
in  your  (the)  hand.  6.  Does  he  speak  to  thee?  7.  He  does  not 
speak  to  me.  8.  You  deceive  him.  9.  /  do  not  deceive  him;  he 
deceives  me  (pleon.,  185).  10.  We  praise  them  because  they  are 
(son)  diligent,  u.  Do  they  praise  us?  12.  Do  they  praise  us? 
13.  Do  they3  praise2  us1?  14.  You  deceive  yourself.  15.  You 
deceive  yourselves.  16.  They  find  what  (lo  que)  they-are-looking- 
for.  17.  Do  you  find  what.  [you]  are-looking-for  (218)  ?  18.  We 
do  not  find  what  we-are-looking-for. 

19.  The  boys  deceive  themselves  (176,  a).  20.  Do  the  boys3 
deceive2  themselves1?  21.  Does  he  not  speak  to  us?  22.  [He] 
speaks  to  them,  not3  to1  us.2  23.  Why  does  he  not  speak  to  us? 
24.  Because  we  do  not  praise  him.  25.  Does  Upraise  us?  26.  He 
does  not  praise  us,  he  deceives  us.  27.  Have  you  the  boy's  top? 


406  Drill-Book. 

28.  I  haven't  it,  his  brother  has  it.  29.  Who  has  Jane's  bracelet? 
30.  Her  sister  has  it.  31.  She  is-looking-for  it  everywhere.  32.  Her 
sister  deceives  her.  33.  Do  (the)  brothers-and-sisters 3  deceive2 
each-other 1  ?  34.  They  praise  each-other,  but  they  do  not  deceive 
each-other. 


Exercise  Fourteenth. 

Read  pp.  96-105  ;   Learn  and  Recite  §§  217-224,  and  Pres.  Ind.  of 
§§  363,  364- 

Like  comer,  conjugate:  aprender,  to  learn;  le-er,  to  read;  temer, 
to  fear,  to  be  afraid  of. 

Like  vivir,  conjugate:  escribir,  to  write;  cumplir  con,  to  fulfil,  to 
discharge  (a  duty,  etc.}  ;  permitir,  to  allow,  permit. 

I.  Are  you  learning  a  new  language?  2.  What  are  you  reading? 
3.  Are  you  not  afraid  to  talk  to  him  (con  el).*  4.  I  do  not  fear  him. 
5.  He  is  reading  the  newspaper.  6.  Where  do  you  live?  7.  Are 
you  writing  a  letter?  8.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  dine?  9.  [We] 
usually1  dine2  late.  10.  We  discharge  (con)  our  obligations  as  well 
as  (the)  time3  and  (the)  strength4  permit2  (it  to-usl).  n.  Do  you 
allow  it?  12.  I  do  not  allow  it.  13.  We  have  a  house  in  the 
country,  and  we  live  there  during  the  summer. 

14.  In  the  winter  they  live  in  the  city,  because  the  weather  does 
not  permit  (to)  them  to  live  in  the  country.  15.  I  am  writing  a 
letter  to  my  cousin  who  (que)  lives  at  (in)  Rome.  16.  The  children 
do  not  allow  us  to  write ;  they  are  learning  to  (d)  read  with  their 
blocks  of  wood.  17.  If  you  discharge  your  duties  faithfully  up-to 
the  measure  of  your  capacity,  you  will  have  (tendrd)  your  reward. 

1 8.  We  do  not  live  (in-order)  to  eat,  but  (sind)  we  eat  in-order-to 
live.  19.  We  are  reading  in  a  most  amusing  book.  20.  You  are 
writing  with  a  pencil,  and  I  am  writing  with  a  pen.  21.  My  brother 
writes  more  than  (de)  fifteen  letters  a  (al)  day.  22.  The  weather 
does  not  allow  us  to  go-out.  23.  The  good  do  not  fear  their 
fellow-men  (§  76).  24.  He  does  not  allow  me  to  write  with  his  pen. 

*  Hablar  followed  by  the  dative  signifies  to  address  a  person,  to  speak  to 
him ;  to  talk  with  a  person,  involving  conversation,  is  hafolar  con  una  persona. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  407 

Exercise  Fifteenth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  233-238,  and  Pres.  Ind.  of  §§  539,  543. 

i.  He  gives  it  to  me.  2.  He  says  it  to  him.  3.  He  writes  them 
(fern. and  m.)  to  us.  4.  They  permit  him  to  (it  to  him).  5.  I  tell 
you;  I  tell  it  to  you;  I  tell  it  to  you  (pleon.).  6.  I  give  you;  I 
give  it  to  you ;  I  give  it  to  you  (pleon.).  7.  John  has  three  oranges 
and  he-gives3  them2  all4  to-me.1  8.  The  children  give  us  their 
play-things;  they  give  them  to  us.  9.  Agnes  has  a  story,  and  she 
is  reading  it  to  us. 

10.  The  old-people  (ancianos)  have  a  letter  from  their  children, 
and  a  lady  is  reading  it  to  them.     n.  The  boys  and  girls  are  look- 
ing-for their  toys,  but  their  parents  do  not  allow  them  to  (it  to  them). 
12.  If  I  find  them,  I  [shall]  give  them  to  you.     13.  They  tell  it  to 
them.     14.  They  give  them  to  them.     15.   I  do  not  say  so  (it)  to 
him.     1 6.  We  do  not  say  so  to  them. 

Exercise  Sixteenth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  243-254,  and  the  past  definite  of  hablar, 
comer,  and  vivir  (pp.  171,  175,  178). 

i.  My  father  spoke  to  him.  2.  My  brothers  found  a  treasure. 
3.  Thy  friend  deceived  us.  4.  His  servants  feared  his  anger. 
5.  Your  friends  praised  the  artist  (§  76).  6.  Their  pens  were  (fue- 
rori)  poor.  7.  He  did  not  learn  his  exercises.  8.  They  did  not 
look-for  their  money.  9.  Did  you  not  fear  (the)  punishment? 
10.  He  fulfilled  his  duties. 

11.  They  allowed  us  to  see  our  (§  76)  friends.     12.  We' did  not 
write  our  letters.     13.  You  did  not  learn  your  lessons.     14.  Did  I 
not  praise  (§  76)  my  teachers?      15.  They  deceived  their  friends. 
16.  Didst  thou  find  thy  knife,  my  son?     17.  A  friend  of  mine  found 
it,  and  gave  (did)  it  to  me.     18.  Did  you  write  the  letter  to  your 
uncle?      19.  John  did  not  allow  me  to  (it  to  me).      20.  Did  you 
speak  to  me?     21.  Who  allowed  them  to  go-out?     22.  We  did  not 
deceive  you.     23.  Where  did  they  dine  last-night?     24.  We  lived 
in  his  house  many  years. 


408  Drill-Book. 

Exercise  Seventeenth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  254-258,  and  the  past  indefinite  indie,  of 
hablar,  coiner,  and  vivir  (pp.  173,  176,  180). 

The  past  participle  of  escribir  is  escrito  (§  561). 

i.  Have  you  found  your  book?  2.  I  have  not  found  mine,  but  I 
have  found  my  sister's  (the  of).  3.  My  friend  and  yours.  4.  Thy 
house  and  mine.  5.  His  pictures  and  ours.  6.  Their  parents  and 
mine.  7.  My  sister  and  thine.  8.  Our  cousins  and  yours.  9.  Your 
houses  and  ours.  10.  Their  hats  and  mine. 

ii.  I  have  spoken  to  my  friend,  but  not  to  yours.  12.  Thou  hast 
not  deceived  (§  76)  thy  friend,  but  (sino)  mine.  13.  He  has  not 
found  my  slate,  but  his-own.  14.  We  have  written  letters  to  our 
parents  and  to  his.  15.  You  have  looked-for  your  paper,  and  not 
[for]  ours.  16.  They  have  feared  my  anger,  and  not  thine.  17.  I 
have  read  their  letters  and  yours. 

Exercise  Eighteenth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  259-269,  and  the  imperative  of  the  three 
conjugations. 

SINGULAR. 


hablale  (familiar) 


no  le  hables  (fam.)    -j  do  not  speak  to 


hablele  V.  (polite)  }  speak  to  him'      no  le  hable  V.  (pol.)  }          him. 

PLURAL. 


hablemosle,  let  us  speak  to  him. 

habladle  (fam.)        ^ 

i  'i  i     i    XT-IT  /     i  \  \  speak  to  him. 

hablenle  VV.  (pol.)  /  * 


no  le  hablemos,  let  us  not  speak  to  him. 
no  le  hableis  (fam.)  ^  do  not  speak 
no  le  hablen  VV.  (pol.)  /  to  him. 


SINGULAR. 


comelo  (fam.)      -> 
comalo  V.  (pol.)  / 


eat  it. 


no  lo  comas  (fam.) 
no  lo  coma  V.  (pol 


do  not  eat  it. 


PLURAL. 


comamoslo,  tet  us  eat  it. 
comedlo  (fam.) 


no  lo  comamos,  let  us  not  eat  it. 
no  lo  comais  (fam.) 


comedlo  (fam.)         ^  no  lo  comais  Qtam.;       -| 

comanlo  W.  (pol.)  }  eat  lt'  no  lo  coman  VV.  (pol.)  }  do  noteatlt' 

The  third  conjugation  take  -Id  instead  of  -ed,  otherwise  the  same  as  the 
second,  —  vivid,  vivan  W. ,  etc. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  409 

I.  Speak  to  this  man  (fam.  and  pol.).  2.  Speak  to  him.  3.  Per- 
mit (to)  this  lady.  4.  Permit  'to)  her.  5.  Praise  these  boys  (§  76). 
6.  Praise  them.  7.  Read  this  letter ;  read  it.  8.  Read  these  letters ; 
read  them.  9.  Fear  this  punishment ;  fear  it.  10.  Fear  these  pen- 
alties ;  fear  them. 

ii.  Do  not  speak  to  that  man  ;  do  not  speak  to  him.  12.  Do  not 
praise  that  girl ;  do  not  praise  her.  13.  Do  not  deceive  (§  76)  these 
gentlemen ;  do  not  deceive  them.  14.  Do  not  learn  those  lessons  ; 
do  not  learn  them.  15.  Do  not  write  that  letter  so  badly.  16.  Do 
not  write  it  so  badly.  17.  Do  not  look-for  (§371)  those  books; 
do  not  look-for  them. 

18.  Let  us  speak  to  these  gentlemen.  19.  Let  us  not  deceive 
these  children.  20.  Let  us  not  fear  them.  21.  Let  us  praise  them. 
22.  Let  us  not  live  in  this  house.  23.  Let  us  fear  God  (§  76),  and 
keep  his  commandments.  24.  Let  us  not  deceive  our  (§  76)  parents, 
because  they  are  (son)  our  best  friends.  25.  Let  us  live  in  peace 
with  all  (the)  men.  26.  Let  us  not  live  (in-order-)  to  eat,  but 
(sino)  let  us  eat  (in-order-)  to  live. 


Exercise  Nineteenth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  271-276,  and  the  present  indicative  of 
ser  and  estar  (pp.  190,  193). 

ser  is  absolute  being;   estar,  accidental  being  or  state. 

i.  This  is  the  boy  who  lives  in  my  house.  2.  These  are  the 
persons  who  deceive  (§  76)  their  friends.  3.  The  book  which  I  have 
read  is  on  the  table.  4.  The  inkstands  which  I  have  bought 
are  not  good.  5.  The  papers  of  which  I  spoke  are  in  the  table- 
drawer.  6.  The  ladies  whom  I  seek  are  not  here.  7.  The  friends 
with  whom  I  live  wrote  me  a  long2  letter.1  8.  The  boys  to  whom  I 
read  the  exercise  are  diligent. 

9.  The  days  on  (in)  which  he  writes  are  (the)  Tuesdays  and 
Fridays.  10.  The  books  of  which  he  speaks  are'2  unknown  to-me.: 
1 1 .  The  rule  with  which  he  makes  the  lines  belongs  to  (is  of)  my 
brother.  12.  The  exercises  that  we  write  are  more  difficult  to-day 
than  those  (the)  of  yesterday.  13.  You  are  my  friend.  14.  Are 
you  tired?  15.  Where  is  the  inkstand?  16.  Do  you  know  (sabe  V.) 


4 1  o  Drill- Bo  ok. 

where1  my  pens  are*?  17.  I  have  not  seen  them.  18.  I  am  the 
person  (whom)  you  deceived.  19.  We  are  the  artists  whom  they 
praised.  20.  Thou  art  the  boy  to  whom  I  spoke  yesterday. 


Exercise  Twentieth. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  277-282,  and  the  past  def.  of  estar  and  ser. 

i .  The  table  near  which  he  was.  2.  The  balcony  from  which  he 
spoke  to-me.  3.  The  charge  with  which  he  honored  me.  4.  The 
judge  before  whom  he  stood.  5.  The  books  about  which  they 
deceived  us.  6.  The  conditions  on  (bajo)  which  they  wrote. 
7.  The  limits  beyond  which  he  did  not  wish  (quiso)  to  go.  8.  The 
measures  against  which  we  spoke.  9.  The  individuals  among  whom 
we  were.  10.  The  city  toward  which  he-was-going  (iba).  n.  The 
roofs  upon  which  the  birds 2  alighted.1 

12.  He  says  what  he  thinks.  13.  He  writes  what  he  wishes. 
14.  I  praise  what  pleases  me.  15.  They  find  what  they  seek.  16. 
They  fulfil  what  they  promise.  17.  They  read  what  they  find. 
18.  We  eat  what  we  like  (pleases  us).  19.  We  praise  what  we  read. 
20.  We  know  what  we  write.  21.  He  finds  all  that  he  looks-for. 
22.  He  praises  all  that  /  do  (hago).  23.  He  does  not  fulfil  all  that 
he  promises.  24.  He  does  not  praise  all  that  you  do  (hace).  25. 
He  allows  me  to  do  all  that  I  like  (quiero). 


Exercise  Twenty-First. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  284-287,  and  the  imperfect  indicative  of 
estar,  ser,  hablar,  coiner,  and  vivir. 

i.  That  is  the  gentleman  in  whose  house  /  was-living.  2.  The 
young-man  whose  father  is  ill  was-looking-for  a  physician.  3.  This 
is  the  teacher  (d)  whose  scholars  we-were-praising  so-much.  4.  He 
is  the-one-who  was-writing  when  we-came-in.  5.  She  is  the-one 
who  found  what  we-were-looking-for.  6.  You  are  the  one  who 
deceived  us  about  what  we-were-asking.  7.  They  are  the  ones  who 
were-reading  while  we  were-speaking  to  them. 

8.  He  who  seeks  finds,  and  he  who  asks  receives.  9.  Those 
who  study,  learn.  10.  They  do  not  praise  him  who  deceives  (At 
que  engana  no  le  alaban).  n.  They  do  not  always  believe  him  who 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  411 

praises.  12.  Him  who  fears  they  do  not  honor  (him).  13.  Him 
who  discharges  his  duties  they  honor.  14.  He  who  wrote  the  letter 
which  we  have  received  lives  in  London.  15.  They  who  deserve 
rewards  are  those  who  have  written1  their  exercises  well:2  16.  She 
who  deceived  her  sister  is  worthy  of  blame. 


Exercise    Twenty-Second. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  288-292,  and  the  future  indicative  of 
hablar,  comer,  vivir,  estar,  and  ser. 

i.  Who  is-looking-for  a  book?  2.  Whose  pen  is  this?  3.  Whose 
toys  are  these  that  are  [lying]  on  the  floor?  4.  Whom  will-you- 
deceive?  5.  What  will  he  fear?  6.  Whom  will-they-praise ?  7. 
What  shall  I  learn?  8.  What  wilt-thou- write?  9.  What  shall-we- 
find?  10.  To  what  [purpose]  will-they- write ?  n.  To  whom  shall 
I  speak?  12.  What  will-it-be? 

13.  What  house  is  that?  14.  What  is  the  number  of  this  house? 
15.  What  day  of  the  week  is-it?  16.  What  is  the  object  of  the 
visit?  17.  What  measures  have  you  taken?  18.  What  are  the 
lessons  that  he-is-learning ?  19.  Which  of  these  houses  is  yours? 
20.  With  which  of  these  pens  will  you  write  the  letter?  21.  What 
day  will  you  dine  with  us?  22.  How  proud  they  are!  23.  What 
a  misfortune  [it  is]  !  24.  Where  will  you  live  in  Paris  ?  25.  They 
will  praise  what  pleases  (to)  them.  26.  Thou  wilt  arrive  to-morrow 
night  (m.  por  la  n.).  27.  When  shall  we  dine?  28.  I  do  not  know 
when  it  will  be. 


Exercise  Twenty-Third. 

Learn  and  Recite  §§  293-308,  and  conjugate  all  the  simple  forms  of 
the  verb  hablar 

i.  The  true  master  praises  another's  work,  but  not  his-own. 
2.  The  thief  seeks  the  treasures  of  others.  3.  The  unjust  [man] 
speaks  freely  of  others'  lives,  and  does  not  consider  his  own. 
4.  Somebody  is  calling  us;  do  you  not  hear  a  voice?  5.  I  hear 


412  Drill-Book. 

(siento)  steps ;  some-one  is-coming  (viene) .  6.  Somebody  will 
praise  the  master  (§  76)  whose  works  deserve  it  (merezcari). 
7.  Has1  anybody3  found2  what  I  lost?  8.  Somebody  wrote  him 
a  letter  which  gave  him  (a)  great  offense. 

9.  Some-one  of  our  acquaintances  spoke  ill  of  him.  10.  Some 
of  these  trees  do  not  grow.  u.  Are  you  looking  for  anything? 
12.  Is-there  (hay)  anything  more  troublesome  than  to  listen-to  the 
twaddle  of  the  vain?  13.  Every  day  has  its  duties.  14.  Every  coun- 
try has  its  language  and  its  customs.  15.  Every  year  we  go  to  the 
baths.  1 6.  The  Spaniards  go  to  the  drive  every  day.  17.  I -met2 
so-and-so3  yesterday,1  and  he-tol$  (dijo)  me  that  you  were-looking- 
for  [a]  house.  18.  When  he  had  (tmbo)  spoken  he  sat  down. 
19.  He  would  not  speak  to  me  if  I  were  not  (estuviese)  with  influ- 
ential friends.  20.  They  spoke  of  the  grand  dinner  at  (en)  [the] 
palace. 


Exercise  Twenty-Fourth. 

Recite  §§  309-321,  and  Learn  the  compound  forms  of  the 
verb  hablar. 

I.  He  told  me  nothing.  2.  I  had  not  eaten  anything.  3.  He 
would  not  learn  anything.  4.  He-who  knows2  nothing1  fears2 
nothing.1  5.  He  has  found  nothing.  6.  Nobody  has  written  more 
than  the  great  dramatic  author,  Lope  de  Vega.  7.  He  praises  no 
one.  8.  No  one  will  deceive  him.  9.  He  was-looking-for  no  one. 
10.  [Let]  no  one  deceive  you  (subj.).  n.  No  one  would  find  it 
(cond.)  even  if  he-should-search  (subj.)  all  the  year. 

12.  In  no  house  do-they-do  (hacen)  this.  13.  None  of  these 
things  moves  me.  14.  None  of  these  things  move  me.  15.  None 
of  the  trees  grows  more  than  this  [one].  16.  He  has  deceived  none 
of  them.  17.  They  have  looked-for  [a]  house,  but  have  found 
none.  18.  We  have  not  received  any  news  from  our  friends.  19. 
No  house  in  (of)  the  city  is  as  large  and  beautiful  as  the  royal2 
palace.1  20.  None  of  these  ladies  is  as  amiable  as  the  marchioness. 
21.  I  cannot  (no  puedd)  write  with  any  (neg.)  of  these  pens.  22, 
No  paper  is  so  good  as  (the)  hand-laid  paper. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  413 


Exercise  Twenty-Fifth. 

Recite  §§  323-335,  and  conjugate  all  the  simple  forms  of  the 
verb  coiner. 

i.  Have2  you  no1  time?  2.  The  poor  people  have  (has)  no 
home.  3.  We  eat  no  meat  [on]  (the)  Fridays.  4.  They  have  no 
friends.  5.  Others  toil  in-order-that  I  may-eat  (subj.).  6.  I  shall 
write  the  letter  another  day.  7.  That  (eso)  is  another  thing. 
8.  The  other  day  I  dined  with  a  friend.  9.  In  Spain  some  dine  at 
(d  las)  two  in  (of)  the  afternoon,  and  others  at  (d  las)  six.  10.  Do 
you  want  these  books  or  the  others  ?  1 1 .  I  will  take  these  and  you 
may  (puede)  have  the  rest. 

12.  Some  went  (fueron)  to  the  country,  others  to  the  baths,  and 
the  rest  staid  home  (reft.).  13.  I  shall  dine  with  any  one  who  invites 
(subj.)  me.  14.  Give  me  (deme  V.)  any  book.  15.  I  cannot  (no 
puedo)  write  with  any  pen.  16.  I-am-looking-for  any  house  that  is 
(sea)  comfortable  and  convenient.  17.  Such-a  thing  might  (podria) 
happen  to  any  [one].  18.  Such  men  are-not-accustomed  (no  suelen) 
to  be  idle.  19.  The  history  of  such-a  period  is  full  of  interest.  20. 
Such  books  are  very  useful  to  (para)  the  young  (youth). 


Exercise  Twenty-Sixth. 

Recite  §§  336-349,  and  Learn  the  compound  forms  ofvthe 
verb  comer. 

I.  I  have  been-reading  all  (the)  day.  2.  We  had  been-watching 
all  night.  3,  He  has  been  (estado)  in  the  National2  Library1  all  the 
morning.  4.  Have  you'2  everj  travelled1  over  all  Andalusia?  5.  I 
had  been-waiting-for  him  all  that  afternoon.  6.  All  (the)  days  are 
alike  (iguales)  to  (para)  him  (or  dat.  pron.).  7.  All  classes  praise 
him.  8.  The  whole  battalion  entered  into  the  fight.  9.  This  is 
that  Light  that  lightens  every  man  who  comes  into  (d)  this  world. 
10.  We  see  the  same  [thing]  everywhere,  u.  They  arrested  them 
all  (§  76).  12  He  had  eaten  it  all.  13.  They  had  read  it  all 
before. 

14.  Every  one  who  learns  Spanish  must  (ha  de)  begin  with  (por) 
the  grammar.  15.  All  those  who  do  (hacen)  such  things  receive 
their  reward.  16.  All  that  we  learned  was  profitable  to  us  (during) 


414  Drill-Book. 

all  [our]  (the)  life.      17.  All  that  the  best  men  approve  is  good. 

1 8.  In  the  school  the  teacher  gave  (some1)  very3  severe4  lessons.'2 

19.  Having  dined  he  went  to  the  gardens  with  some  friends.    20.  We 
have  two  houses,  one  (of)  stone,  and  the  other  (of)  wood.    21.  He 
was  looking-for  a  number  of  good  paintings  with  which  he  wished 
to  adorn  the  walls  of  his  drawing-room. 


Exercise  Twenty-Seventh. 

Recite  the  conjugation  of  the  entire  verbs  vivir,  haber  (p.  162), 
and  §§  354-355- 

i.  Living  in  (de)  this  way  we  spent  little  money.  2.  Having 
written  a1  very3  long4  letter,2  he  went-out  to  take  (d  dar)  a  walk  in 
the  gardens.  3.  (In-order)  to  have  friends,  it-is  necessary  to  be 
friendly.  5.  (The)  to  have  lived  soberly  in  our  youth  is  a  pleasant 
reflection  for  our  old-age.  6.  We-used-to-live  (p.  346,  c)  in  the 
country,  but  now  we  reside  in  (the)  town.  7.  In-order  that  we  may 
discharge  (with)  all  our  obligations,  it-is  necessary  to  have  principles 
of  honor.  8.  He  was-fearing  that  I  should  write  to  his  parents. 
9.  He  does  not  wish  me  to  live  (that  f  may  live)  in  the  capital,  sur- 
rounded by  (del)  pageant  and  luxury,  until  my  moral  forces  and  my 
judgment  are  (subj.)  more2  developed.1  10.  I-feared  (imperf.)  that 
he  would  not  find  what  he-was-looking-for.  n.  I  wrote  him  in- 
order  that  he  might  permit  me  to-do  what  I-wished. 

12.  There-are  days  in  which  one  cares  (not)  neither  to  read  nor 
to  write.  13.  There-were  more  than  three  hundred  persons  at  the 
dinner.  14.  There-will-be  no 'school  to-morrow.  15.  There  is  no 
one  who  does  not  know  (sepa)  what  is  just.  16.  There-has  been 
much  rain  this  year.  17.  There  have  been  occasions  of  great  in- 
terest and  profit  during  this  season.  18.  In  the  Castiles  there  are 
no  trees,  and  therefore  there  are  no  birds.  19.  There  would  have 
been  much  less  danger,  if  every  one  had  remained  (hubiese  per- 
manecidd)  in  his  place  (sitio).  20.  Will  there  be  [a]  war,  or  will 
there  be  none  (§  197)  ?  21.  There  were  (sing.)  people  whom  I  did 
not  know  (imperf.).  22.  There  was  nobody  in  the  sitting-room. 
23.  There  would  be  no  remedy  if  a  fire2  should-break-out.1  24. 
There  was  a  moment  of  the  deepest  silence,  and  then1  the  conver- 
sation3 went-on.2 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  415 

Exercise  Twenty-Eighth. 

El    Bar 6 metro. 
COMEDIA   EN  UN  ACTO 

La  Condesa^  \  Dios  mio2!  ;  Dios  mio !  esto3  es  insoportable. 
Hace4  tres  meses  y  medio5  que  llegue6  a  esta  quinta,  y  ni  un  solo 
dia  ha  dejado7  de  Hover.  Yo8  no  tengo9  resignacion  para10  sufrir 
este  tiempo,  que  me  aburre,  me  desespera  y  me  mata.  Vamos  d11 
ver  si  el  bardmetro  me  da  alguna  esperanza.  \  Nada12 !  Ayer  mar- 
caba13  lluvia,  y  hoy  indica  tempestad.  \  Esto3  es  horroroso  !  Pues 
bien,  voy11  a  acabar  de  una  vez14  con15  el  complice  de  esta  lluvia 
eterna.  (Descuelga16  el  bardmetro  y  le  arroja  al  suelo,17  hacie'ndole 
pedazos18  con  estrdpito.)  Ya19  no  me  mortificara'  ma's  con  sus 
presagios.  ( Vdse.™) 

In  this  passage  the  following  verbs  are  regular:  ist  conj.,  acabar, 
arrojar,  dejar,  desesperar,  matar;  2d  conj.,  none;  3d  conj.,  sufrir, 
aburrir  (used  in  the  3d  pers.  sing,  and  plur.  only;  otherwise  in  the  re- 
flexive form,  aburrir se} .  The  following  make  orthographic  changes: 
indicar,  marcar,  mortificar,  llegar  (§  371).  The  following  are  irreg- 
ular :  ist  conj.,  dar  (§543),  descolgar  (like  rogar,  §§483,  371); 
2d  conj.,  hacer  (§  530),  Hover  (§  418,  impers.),  ser  (§  385),  tener 
(§  536),  ver  (§  548);  3d  conj.,  ir  (§  552),  irse  (§  552,  «).  All  these 
verbs  must  be  learned  or  reviewed  before  the  lesson  is  passed. 

i.  The  countess  is  in  her  summer-house  in  the  south  of  Spain,  in 
that  ancient  province  that  is  called  (calls  itself)  Andalusia.  2.  It 
has  rained  incessantly  during  all  the  time  that  she  has  been  there, 
and  she  has  become-im patient  at  (de)  so  much  bad  weather.  3.  In 
the  capital  of  Spain,  where  she  lives,  it  scarcely  ever  rains  (no  II. 
cast  nuncd).  4.  Seeking  some  victim  of  her  anger,  she  hits  on  the 

i  97,  d.  2  249  and  a.  3  266.  4  426,  b.  5  172.  6  371  and  b.  ~  415  and  726,  b. 
8  187,  a.  9  322.  10  729.  11  552  and  725,  a :  vamos  a  ver  is  much  more 
energetic  than  veamos,  which  a  calm  person  would  use,  let  us  see.  12  313. 
13  697,  a.  14  De  una  vez,  adverbial  phrase,  "  of  one  time,"  at  once,  once  for 
all.  15  Con,  with,  is  the  regimen  of  acabar,  to  finish  with  (con),  we  say,  "  to 
put  an  end  to."  16  From  descolgar  :  descuelgo,  gas,  ga,  like  rogar,  §  483. 
17  On  the  floor,  lit.  to  the  floor.  18  Hacer  pedazos,  with  the  direct  obj.,  lit. 
to  make  a  thing  pieces,  i.e.  to  break  it  in  pieces.  19  607.  20  552,  a  ;  206. 


416  Drill-Book. 

barometer,  which  does  not  cease  to  point  to  [a]  storm.  5.  She 
takes  it  down  from  the  nail  on  (de)  which  it-was-hanging  (pendia), 
and  she  throws  it  violently  on- the  floor.  6.  Thus2  triumphant1  over 
(de)  her  foe,  and  leaving  the  field  strewn  with  the  evidences  of  the 
fray,  she  retires  from  the  scene. 

Exercise  Twenty-Ninth. 

ESCENA    SEGUNDA. 

Anselmo,  criado  ;    Victorina,  criada. 

Viet.  iQu6  ruido  es  este?  j Jesus1!  El  bardmetro  hecho 
afiicos2! 

Ans.  \  Que  Mstima3 !  Despues  que  le5  costd  mil  quinientos 
reales4  al5  sefior6  conde,  ha  tenido  el  pobre  chisme  un  fin  muy 
desgraciado.  Todavia  me  acuerdo7  de  la  tarde  que  fuf  con  el  amo8 
a"  la  tienda  del  dptico9  de  la  calle  de  la  Montera,  y  .  .  . 

Viet.  Vamos,10  no  empiece11  usted  ya  con  los  discursos  de 
siempre,12  y  recoja13  usted  esos  pedazos  a"ntes  que  vuelva14  la 
sefiora.  (Lee  un  periddico.) 

Ans.  Mejor  seria  que  usted  me  ayudara,15  para16  acabar  mas 
pronto.  <rNo  oye17  usted?  (\  Se  hace18  la  sorda  y  sigue19  leyendo20 
sin  hacer21  caso  !)  ^Trae  alguna  noticia  interesante  ese22  periddico? 

Viet.  Muy  interesante.     Han  preso23  a  Vargas.24 

Ans.  \  Eso25  es  imposible,  imposible  ! 

Viet.  ^Imposible?  Oiga26  usted:  "  Al  fin  se  ha  conseguido27 
capturar  al  celebre  bandido,  que  por  espacio  de  un  ano  ha  sido  el 
azote  de  los  pueblos  de  Andalucia." 

1  658,  d,  Rem.  2  anicos,  stronger  than  pedazos,  and  popular ;  hecho  a., 
broken  into  a  thousand  fragments.  3  291,  a.  4  i.e.  $75.  5  215.  6  senor  and 
senora  are  used  with  titles,  and  words  denoting  relatives,  to  indicate  respect ; 
omit  in  English.  7  From  acordarse,  474,  396,  757.  8  el  amo,  for  mi 
amo,  as  being  sufficiently  explicit  in  common  language.  9  a  casa  de, 
to  so  and  so's  (house)  ;  d  la  tienda  de,  to  so  and  so's  (shop,  store)  ;  translate 
to  the  optician's  in  Montera  Street.  10  659,  a,  imperat.  of  ir,  lit.  let  us  go,  here 
used  as  an  exclam.  like  the  French  allons,  voyons,  "  come  now !  "  n  From 
empezar,  371,  469,  367,  a,  b.  12  Speeches  of  always  =the  old  story.  13  375. 
14  volver,  491, 710.  15  713,  709,  e.  16  729.  17  From  oir.  ^  hacerse  la  s., 
to  pretend  not  to  hear  (to  be  deaf).  19  From  seg-uir.  20  From  leer.  21  718  ; 
h.  caso,  to  take  notice,  to  pay  attention.  22  263.  28  569,  410.  24  748.  25  266. 
26  From  oir,  553.  2?  410. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  417 

Ans.  Y  ^ddnde  han  atrapado  £  ese  tunante? 

Viet.  En  Mairena. 

Ans.  \  Caramba  !  y  qu6  cerca  estaba  de28  nosotros  . 

Viet.  A  media  legua29  de  esta  casa.  No  he  acabado  de30  leer 
todavia.  Oiga  usted:  "  Vargas  es  un  hombre  muy  original,  y 
podemos  dar  algunos  pormenores  de  su  persona.  Su  mirada  es 
terrible,  pero  llena  de  inteligencia ;  su  boca  perfecta,  aunque  con- 
traida  por  una  sonrisa  irdnipa ;  de  frente  sombria,  adornada  de  una 
magnifica  cabellera  negra.  Con  los  hombres  es  implacable,  pero  tan 
galante  con  las  senoras  que  jamas  las  despoja  de  sus  sortijas  sin 
besar31  caballerosamente  la  mano."  Como  que32  -es  hijo  de  una 
buena  familia,  segun  dicen. 

Ans.  jYa!  Y  le  ha  quedado  esa  costumbre  de  cuando  gastaba 
levita.33 

Conjugate  the  regular  verbs:  1st  conj.,  atrapar,  ayudar,  besar, 
capturar,  despojar,  gastar,  quedar;  2d  conj.,  leer  (549,  ^),  prender 
(569),  recoger  (375).  Conjugate  the  irregular  verbs:  ist  conj.,  acor- 
darse  (474),  costar  (473),  empezar  (469,  371),  estar  (382);  2d  conj., 
poder  (532),  traer  (537),  volver  (491);  3d  conj.,  decir  (539),  oir  (553), 
seguir  and  conseguir  (516). 

i.  Do  you  hear  a  noise?  2.  It-is  the  barometer  falling  (that 
falls).  3.  It  has  been  broken  into  (se  ha  hecho)  fragments.  4.  How 
much  did  it  cost  our  (to  the)  master?  5.  He  purchased  it  at  the 
optician's  (en  la  /.,  etc.).  6.  Do  you  know  the  optician?  7.  I  have 
often2  been1  in  his  shop.  8.  I  have  bought1  opera-glasses  there.2 
9.  His  shop  is  near  the  Gate  of  the  Sun,  [a]  famous  square  in  (of) 
Madrid.  10.  Do  you  not  remember  it?  n.  I  think  I  do  (that  yes). 
12.  Will  you  pick-up  the  pieces?  13.  I  will  (yes),  if  you  will  help 
me  (fut.).  14.  The  lady  will  come-back  soon.  15.  What  are  you 
doing  (do  you)?  16.  I  am  reading  the  newspaper.  17.  What 
news  is  there?  18.  They  have  caught  a  famous  marauder.  19.  Who 
(cudl)l  20.  A  highway-robber  who  has  been  the  terror  of  this 
region. 

28  627.  29  629,  f.  30  Finished  reading,  726,  b.  31  "  Without  saluting  them 
politely ;  "  ancient  Spanish  salutation  was  by  kissing  the  hand  of  the  person 
saluted:  see  also  §  253,  a.  32  como  que,  an  ellipse  for  4  como  no? 

puesto  que,  why  not?  since,  etc.  33  levita,  the  gentleman's  afternoon  or 
Prince  Albert  coat;  hence  gastar  1.,  to  be  dressed  like  a  gentleman  (to  wear 
a  levita) ,  to  be  a  respectable  citizen. 


4i  8  Drill-Book. 


Exercise    Thirtieth. 

ESCENA   TERCERA. 

La  Condesa.  Mayo,  lluvia ;  Junio,  lluvia ;  Julio,  grandes  lluvias, 
y  Agosto,  tempestades.  (Ve  d  los  criados.)  <iQue  haceis1  aqui  ? 

Ans.  Senora,  estabamos  recogiendo2  los  restos  mortales  del 
bardmetro  que  fue'.3  (Vdse.) 

La  Cond.  (a  Viet.)  ^Que  papel  es  ese  que  tienes  en  la  mano? 

Viet.  Es  un  periddico  de  Sevilla,  con  una  noticia  que  de  seguro 
la4  agradara. 

La  Cond.  ^Qud  noticia? 

Viet.  La  de  que5  el  famoso  bandido  Vargas  ha  sido  preso  al  fin. 

La  Cond.  \  Oh !  \  cuanto  me  alegro6!  Te  aseguro  que  su  re- 
cuerdo7  me  ha  hecho  pasar  noches  terribles.  Todavia  le  veo  en 
mis  suenos. 

Viet.  Y  ademas  dice  el  periddico  que  desde  Sevilla  lo  llevaran  £ 
Madrid  con  una  cadena  de  hierro  muy  gruesa  para  que  no  se 
escape.8 

La  Cond.  No  tendria  yo9  necesidad  de  cadena  para  que  me 
llevaran  alia". 

Conjugate  or  review  the  following  verbs:  ist  conj.  (regular},  agradar, 
asegurar,  llevar,  pasar;  (refl.,  399),  alegrarse,  escaparse;  (prog.,  380, 
382),  estar  recogiendo;  (pass.,  386),  ser  preso;  2d  conj.  (irreg.), 
hacer,  tener,  ver  ;  3d  conj.,  decir. 

i.  It  has  rained  the  whole  month  of  May.  2.  What  are  the 
servants  doing  (progress.)?  3.  They  are  busy  at  (en)  (the)  work. 
They  are  working.  4.  The  news  pleases  me.  5.  Does  the  news 
please  you?  6.  I  do  not  wish  anybody  (§  317)  to  be  (subj.)  unfor- 
tunate. 7.  You  cannot  be  (no  se  puede  ser)  kind  to  some  people 
(certain  people).  8.  Do  you  remember  him?  9.  I  do  not  remem- 
ber him.  10.  I  have  a  vivM  recollection  (reciter do)  of  what  took- 

1  180  (d),  182.  2  380.  3  que  fue,  that  was,  i.e.  the  late  barometer;  so  :  el 
ministro  que  fue,  (if  dead)  the  late  minister ;  el  m.  que  ha  sido  (if  alive, 
but  out  of  office),  the  late  m.  4  220.  5  La  de  que  is  an  ellipse  =  la  noticia 
de,  the  news  of,  namely  (que)  the,  etc.  We  would  say  simply:  that  the 
famous,  etc.  6  How  I  rejoice  =  how  glad  I  am  /  7  Lit.  his  memory  =  the 
thought  of  him.  8  710.  9  365,  190. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  419 

\ 

place  that  night.  11.  What  does  the  paper  say  further?  12.  Read 
/it,  madam.  13.  You  read  (famit.)  it  for  me  (leemelo  tu)  14.  Are 
you  glad?  15.  I  am  very  glad  (I  rejoice  much).  16.  What  are 
you  glad  of  (of  what)?  17.  That  he  has  been  arrested  and  carried- 
off  (de  que  ha  sido,  etc.).  18.  He  is-going  (not  prog.)  where  / 
should-like  (gutsier a)  to  go.  19.  Where  would  you  like  to  go? 
20.  Home  ;  I  do  not  like J  the  country  any  more  (ya  -  no*} .  21.  When 
it  rains  the  town  is  more  agreeable  than  the  country.  22.  To  (para) 
me  it-is  the  (lo)  same. 


Exercise  Thirty-First. 

ESCENA   CUARTA. 

La  Condesa.  (sola.  Sin  dejar  su  asiento  mira  a"  la  campifia  a*  travel 
de  los  cristales  de  las  ventanas.)  Nada,  no  escampa.  Esto  es 
peor  que  el  diluvio  universal,  que  no  durd  mas  que  cuarenta  dias,  y 
ahora  hace }  ciento  que  llueve  sin  descanso  en  este  pais  que  dicen  es 
un  rincon  del  cielo.  \  Me  gusta  el  tal  rinconcito2?  Y  yo  que  creia 
reunir  aqui  una  tertulia  de  mas  de3  treinta  personas,  me  veo  sola. 
Lo  unico4  que  me  consuela  es,  que  hoy  llegard.  la  familia  del  mar- 
ques de  la  Pena,  que  es  numerosa  y  de  excelente  humor  sobre  todo, 
especial mente  la  buena  marquesa,  que  me  ha  pedido  permiso5  para 
traer  a  su  sobrino  Carlos,  con6  quien  tiene  el  proyecto  de  casarme. 
Dificil  me  parece  que  lo  consiga.7  He  sido  tan  dichosa  en  mi 
matrimonio,  que  la  segunda  prueba  no  sera  nunca  como  la  primera. 
(Dan8  las  doce.)  j  Las  doce !  Ya  debe  estar  el  tren  de  Sevilla  en 
la  estacion  inmediata.  j  Si  no  hubiese  llegado !  No  quiero  pen- 
sarlo.  j  Si  pasard  todavia  un  mes  en  esta  soledad  !  j  Imposible  ! 
Prefiero  morirme.9 

Conjugate  the  following  verbs :  {Regular),  casarse,  durar,  gustar, 
mirar;  creer  (549,  £),  deber,  verse  (548);  reunir;  (Irreg.),  consolar 
(476),  pensar  (457);  parecer  (374,  <0,  querer  (534);  decir  (539), 
morir  (509),  pedir  (512),  preferir  (500). 


1  696,  e.  *  759,  a ;  lit.  "  I  like  such  a  little  nook,  indeed,"  said  in  irony ;  we 
would  say,  a  pretty  nook,  indeed,  this  !  3  137,  b.  4  83.  5  753.  6  Regimen  of 
oasarse  ;  we  say,  to  whom.  ?  That  she  will  succeed  in  it;  subj.  after  dificil 
with  impers.  verb.  s  678,  Rem.  9  395. 


420 


Drill-Book. 


IDIOMS. 
I.   Gustarle  £  uno,  to  like  (lit.  to  please  any  one). 


me  gusta  el  libro, 

me  gustan  los  libros, 

la  casa  que  me  gusta, 

las  casas  que  nos  gustan, 

no  me  gusta  —  gustan, 
<J  le  gusta  a  V.  ? 

£no  le  gusta  a  V.?  [aquello? 

£que    le    gusta    a   V.   mas,    esto  6 

a  mi  amigo  le  gusta  charlar, 


I  like  the  book. 

I  like  (the)  books. 

the  house  that  I  like. 

the  houses  that  we  like. 

I  do  not  like  it  —  them. 

do  you  like  it? 

don't  you  like  it?  [(thing), 

what  do  you  like  better,  this  or  that 

my  friend  likes  to  talk. 


2.    Casarse  con  alguien,  to  marry  somebody. 


<?con  quien  se  casa? 
se  casa  con  su  primo, 
se  caso  ya, 


whom  does  he  (she)  marry, 
she  marries  her  cousin, 
he  has  already  got  married. 


3.  Pedirle  a  uno  alguna  cosa,  to  ask  any  one  for  anything. 


le  pido  a  V.  permiso  para, 
que  me  pide  V.? 
no  me  pidio  nada, 
pide  al  caballero  dinero, 


I  ask  your  permission  to  ... 
what  do  you  ask  me  for? 
he  did  not  ask  me  for  anything, 
he  asks  the  gentleman  for  money. 


I.  Without  getting-up  the  lady  looks  out  of  (se  asoma  d  la)  the 
window.  2.  The  countess  does  not  like  the  rain.  3.  All  the 
country  round-about  is  impassable  on  account  of  the  bad  weather. 
4.  The  weather  will  never  clear-up.  5.  The  friend  of  the  countess 
wants  to  marry  her  to  (con)  a  gentleman  whose  name  is  (who  calls 
himself)  Charles.  6.  She  does  not  wish  to  marry  the  {por)  second 
time.  7.  He  has  asked  me  for  my  (the)  hand.  8.  We  expect 
some  friends  by  (con)  the  Seville  train.  9.  The  train  has  already2 
left1  the  station  of  Mairena,  and  presently  it-will-arrive  at  this  '[one]. 

10.  The  train  carries  two  engines,  because  the  weather  is  so  bad. 

11.  What-if  (si)  our  friends  should  not  arrive!      12.  They  would 
have  to  (que)  pass  the  night  in  the  cars.     13.  They  might  (podriari) 
return  to  Seville. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  421 


Exercise  Thirty-Second. 

ESCENA  QUINTA. 

La  Condesa.  ^Ha  llegado  el  tren  de  Sevilla? 

Anselmo.  No,  sefiora  Condesa,  las  dguas  ban  destrozado  la  via,  y 
por  un  milagro  ban  podido  salvarse  los  viajeros.  No  se  sabe1 
cuando  podra'2  estar  expedite  el  camino. 

I^a  Cond.  Haz3  que  enganchen4  en  seguida. 

Ans.  Pero  <jque  piensa  V.  hacer,  sefiora? 

La  Cond.  Irme  con  Victorina  y  contigo  a"  Sevilla,  aunque  seas 
nadando,  y  desde  alii  a"  Madrid. 

Ans.  <i  A  Madrid  £  nado? 

La  Cond.  Si,  a  Madrid;  ^y  eso  te  espanta?  Vamos  ^qu^  es- 
peras?  Corre. 

Ans.  Pero,  sefiora,  si6  no  se  puede7  dar  un  paso,8  ni  £  pi£  ni  en 
coche,  por  la  campifia,  y  ademas  la  casa  de  Madrid  esta*  en  obra, 
aprovechando  el  verano,  y  luego  tienen  que  arreglarla  los  pintores 
y  los  tapiceros.  De  modo  que  hasta  dentro  de  un  mes  lo 
me'nos9  .  . 

La  Cond.  Tienes  razon,10  ve'te,11  no  quiero  ver  d  nadie.  (Vdse 
el  criado.) 

ESCENA    SEXTA. 

La  Cond.  (sola).  Es  decir,12  que  me  veo13  obligada  a"  permanecer 
aqui  como  un  prisionero.  Dicen  que  los  prisioneros14  se  resignan  ; 
me  resignare'.  Voy  £  leer.  (Toma  un  libro  y  lee.)  "EL  LAGO." 
;  Jesus !  me  horroriza  todo  lo  que  l5  es  agua.  (Arroja  el  libro  y  se 
levanta.)  ^En  que  me  ocupare,  cielo  santo?  Voy  a  dibujar.  Si, 
el  dibujo  es  una  gran  distraccion,  y  divierte  al  mismo  tiempo. 

1  409.  2  can  be  cleared,  lit. "  will  be  able  to  be  cleared."  See  532,  a.  3  530 ; 
hacer  is  causal,  signifying  that  another  is  to  carry  out  the  action  expressed  by 
the  principal  verb.  We  generally  omit  it:  "Solomon  built  him  an  house" ; 
Span.,  "  Salomon  hizo  edificar  una  casa"  caused  a  house  to  be  built. 
4  709,  c*  5  710-  6  601.  7  408.  8  dar,  to  give,  has  many  other  meanings,  here 
to  take  ;  so,  dar  un  paseo,  to  take  a  walk.  9  83  and  610.  10  tener  razon, 
to  have  reason  =  to  be  right.  n  Imperative  of  irse.  See  552,  a.  12  eso 
understood,  but  never  expressed  in  this  phrase:  that  is  to  say,  that  means, 
18  389,  a.  14  664.  16343. 


422  Drill-Book. 

Copiare  la  iglesia  de  ese  pueblo  inmediato,  y  el  campanario  gdtico 
que  tambien  se  distingue  desde  aqui.  (Toma  un  album,  y  se 
coloca  frente  a  la  ventana  en  actitud  de  dibujar ;  pero  en  seguida 
vuelve  a  Hover16  con  furia.)  \  Otro  aguacero !  Ya  no  veo17  ni  el 
campanario,  ni  la  iglesia,  ni  las  casas,  ni  el  horizonte,  ni  nada. 
Todo 18  ha  desaparecido  detras  de  esa  catarata.  \  Que  espectaculo 
tan19  horrible!  Ni  un  ser  viviente  se  ve20  en  el  camino.  Pero 
i  calla !  me  parece  que  aquel  es  un  viajero.  Si,  no  hay  duda.  Ha 
ido  £  ampararse  debajo  de  un  drbol.  ^Torque*  no  se  refugiara  en 
mi  casa?  Si  supiese21  cdmo  me  fastidio  de  estar  sola.  \  Oh,  que 
idea!  Quizes  venga22  de  Madrid.  Traera"  noticias,  y  frescas  ;  eso 
es  indudable.  (Tira  del23  cordon  de  la  campanilla.) 

Conjugate  the  following  verbs:  enganchar,  refugiarse;  horrorizar 
(§  371*  0>  colocar  (§  371,  a);  desaparecer  (§  374,  a),  permanecer 
(id.)',  saber  (§  535),  poder  (§532);  distinguir  (§  376,  a)\  divertir 
(502),  venir  (§541). 

IDIOMS. 

I.  Acabar  de  (infin.),  to  finish  (pres.  part.),  or  to  have  just 
(past  part). 


acaba  de  escribir  la  carta, 


I  he  has  just  written  the  letter, 
acababamos  de  salir,  ] 


acabamos  de  salir,      ) 
acabo  de  recibir  una  carta, 


'  he  finishes  writing  the  letter. 


we  had  just  gone  out. 

I  have  just  received  a  letter. 


2.   Volver  a  (infin.),  to  (second  verb)  again. 

he  goes  out  again. 


vuelve  a  salir, 

no  le  he  vuelto  a  ver, 

cuando  vuelven  VV.  a  escribirles,  den- 
ies muchas  memorias  de  mi  parte, 

acababa  V.  de  escribir  la  carta,  y 
ahora  la  vuelve  a  escribir  de 
nuevo, 


I  have  not  seen  him  again. 

when  you  (//.)  write  them  again, 

give  them  my  kindest  regards, 
you  had  just  written  the  letter,  and 

now    you    are    writing    it    over 

again. 


I.  The  train  has  just  arrived,  and  it  will  not  go-out  again  to-day. 
2.  I-shall-learn  this  lesson  so  well  that1  it-will4  not2  be  necessary5 


16  608;  725,  a.      17  607.       18  341,  a.      19  291,  Rem.      20  408.      21  From  saber. 
22  710.      28  Tirar  means  to  throw  away ;  tirar  de,  to  pull  at. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  423 

for-me3  (to-me)  to  learn  it  again  (volverla  d  ap.).  3.  The  lady 
persists  in  returning  (in/in.)  to  the  city.  4.  The  carriage  cannot 
go  (andar)  over  the  country  on  account  of  the  inundation.  5.  A 
gentleman  has  just  come-in  who  says  that  the  roads  are  impassable. 
6.  It-is  necessary  to  resign  one's  self  to  one's  (the)  fate,  and  to 
have  patience.  7.  A  Spanish-woman  out-of-patience  goes  and 
comes,  jumps-up  and  sits-down,  skips-about  again,  and  runs  (corre 
que  corre)  over  (por)  the2  whole1  house.  8.  An  English  [woman] 
or  an  American  [woman]  in  like  circumstances  sits-down  calmly 
and  busies  herself  with  (en)  something  useful  (of  profit). 


Exercise  Thirty-Third. 

ESCENA   SEPTIMA.  „. 

La  Condesa.  (al  criado.)  <;  Ves  d  un  viajero  debajo  de  aquel  a>bol 
tan  corpulento? 

Anselmo.  Si,  senora. 

La  Cond.  Corre  a  dll  y  dfle2  que  venga.3 

Ans.  La  senora  Condesa  le  conoce  sin  duda. 

La  Cond.  Corre,  te  digo.  (Vase.)  \  Ah !  es  atrevido^  es  teme- 
rario  lo  que  acabo  de  hacer,  pero  lo  primero  es  vivir,  y  yo  no  puedo 
wir  de  esta  manera.  Sin  embargo,  abrir  las  puertas  de  mi  casa  d 
un  hombre  que  no  conozco,  es  mas  que  rareza,  es  una  verdadera 
locura  —  es  .  .  .  \  Victorina-a-a  !  \  Victorina-a-a ! 

ESCENA  OCTAVA. 

La  Cond.  (a  la  doncella.)  Llama  en  seguida  a  Anselmo,  que4 
venga  al  momento. 

Victorina.  Es  imposible,  senora,  ya  va5  muy  lejos. 

La  Cond.  No  importa,  v£  d  buscarle.6 

Viet.  Pero,  senora  <ic6mo  voy  £  hacerlo?     Mire  usted,  ya  vuelve. 

La  Cond.  <iSolo  quizas?  .  .  .  ;  Que'  miro !  Viene  con  el  otro. 
i  Que'  es  lo  que  he  hecho  !  \  Ah  !  Ya  estoy  arrepentida.  Oigo  que 
suben.7 

1  210.  2  212,  from  decir.  3  709,  c.  4  708,  b,  Rent.  5  Substitute  for  estar, 
389,  a.  6  ir  a  buscar,  to  go  after  a.  o.  7  /  hear  them  coming  up-stairs ; 
los  is  understood. 


424 


Drill-Book. 


Viet,  (aparte.)  iQuien  sera"8?  .  .  .  La  se flora  no  esta"  satisfecha 
con  nada.  Continiia  la  tormenta;  me  voy  antes  que  empiecen9  los 
truenos. 

Conjugate  the  verbs  llamar,  correr,  abrir  (§  561) ;  conocer  (§  374,  c), 
oir  (§553).  Continuar  is  regular,  but  notice  accent:  continue,  con- 
tinuas  ;  continue,  continues,  etc. 


IDIOMS. 


Tener  razon  (reason), 

no  tener  razon, 

tener  vergiienza  (shame), 

"      miedo  (fear), 

"      sueno  (sleep), 

"      hambre  (hunger), 

"      sed  (thirst), 

"      frio  (cold), 

"      calor  (warmth), 

tiene  razon,  no  tiene  razon, 

itengo  yo  razon,  6  no? 

no  tenemos  miedo  de  nadie, 

tendran  hambre  y  frio, 

el   que  bebiere    del   agua   que   yo 

le  dare,  no  volvera  a  tener  sed 

jamas. 


to  be  right. 

not  to  be  right,  to  be  wrong. 

to  be  ashamed. 

"     afraid. 

"      sleepy. 

"      hungry. 

"     thirsty. 

"      cold. 

"      warm. 

he  is  right,  he  is  wrong. 

am  I  right  or  wrong. 

we  are  afraid  of  no  one. 

they  will  be  hungry  and  cold. 

he  who  drinketh  of  the  water  that  I 

shall  give  him  will  never  thirst 

again. 


i.  The  traveller  stood  under  a  large2  tree1  to  (para)  shelter 
himself  from  the  rain.  2.  The  lady,  who  found  in  (the)  society  her 
only  resource,  saw  him  and  sent  for  him.  3.  (The)  reflection, 
which  always  comes  late  to  the  impatient,  suggested  to-her  her 
folly,  when  the  step  that  she-had  taken  (given)  could  not  be  re- 
called (no  se  podia  revocar).  4.  In  her  selfish  vanity  she  rejects 
blindly  the  humiliating  reproof  of  a  servant  couched  in  these  words : 
"Madam  knows  the  gentleman,  of  course."  5.  She  has  more  con- 
fidence in  (the)  man  than  respect  for  herself  (si  misma).  6.  The 
great  qualities  that  once  shone-forth  (imperf.)  in  the  nations  of  the 
South  have  survived  only  in  the  impetus  of  the  senses. 


8  7°3i c-      9  710- 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  425 


Exercise  Thirty-Fourth. 

ESCENA   NONA. 

La  Condesa.  Caballero  .  .  .  dispense  V.  si  le1  he  hecho  entrar 
casi  a  la  fuerza,  pero  .  .  .  pero  .  .  .  (iQue  le  digo2  a  este  hombre3?) 
Pero  anoche  hubo4  una  tempestad  horrorosa;  el  viento  soplaba  con 
furor,  y  como  se  ban  roto5  todos  los  cristales  de  la  casa,  y  el  tiempo 
esta  tan  malo,  hay  necesidad  absoluta  de6  volverlos  a  poner. 

El  Desconocido.  De  modo  que  V.  me  ha  tornado  por  un  vidriero. 
(Pues  me  gusta  la  ocurrencia.) 

La  Cond.  Si,  eso  es,  por  un  vidriero  .  .  .  (No  se  lo  que  digo.) 
Ya  comprendera  V.  que  a*  cierta  distancia  .  .  .7  crei  que  .  .  .  Ahora 
veo  que  me  he  equivocado.8 

Descon.   En  efecto,  un  poco,  senora,  porque  soy  militar.9 

La  Cond.   \  Ah  !   Conque  usted  .  .  . 

Descon.  Siento  de  todo  corazon  no  ser  vidriero9  en  estos  mementos. 

La  Cond.  En  verdad,  caballero,  que  estoy  confusa  y  avergonzada 
de  mi  error.  Quisiera  darle 10  una  satisfaccion  completa,  y  no  se  .  .  . 

Descon.  Ninguna  reparacion  me  debe  V.,  sefiora.  Lo  unico  que 
le10  supllco  es,  que  tenga11  la  bondad  de6  prestarme  un  paraguas 
para  ir  a  la  estacion,  y  en  ese  caso,  yo  sere  el  que  la  dd 12  un  millon 
de  gracias.13 

La  Cond.  (Acaba  de  entrar,  y  ya  piensa  irse.)  j  Como !  <:No 
esperara  V,  siquiera14  que  pase15  este  aguacero?  Es  imposible  tran- 
sitar  por  esos16  caminos  llenos  de  barro. 

Descon.  Cuando  se  han  pasado5  cuatro  meses  en  los  campos  de 
Africa,  el  andar17  media  hora  sobre  la  tierra  un  poco  humeda  de 
Andalucia,  es  bien  poca  cosa.  Por  tanto,  si  tuviera18  V.  la  bondad 
de  prestarme  un  paraguas  .  .  . 

La  Cond.  \  Ah  !  Conque  <iV.  ha  estado19  en  Africa?  \  Brillante 
campana !  * 

Descon.   Un  poquito  penosa. 

La  Cond.  ±V .  sirvio20  en  infanteria?  Es  un  arma  que  me  gusta 
mucho. 

1  219.  2  696,  c.  3  215.  4  354.  5  408  and  571.  6  724;  726,  a.  7  629,  / 
8  397-  9  669,  a.  10  219,  220.  n  709,  c.  12  From  dar,  711.  13  163.  14  605. 
15  709,  b.  16  265.  17  719.  is  708,  b.  19  391,  b.  20  513. 

*  General  O'Donnell's  unjustifiable  war  against  Morocco  in  1859-60. 


426  Drill-Book. 

Descon.   No,  senora. 

La  Cond.  Entonces  seria21  en  caballeria.    Todavia  me  gusta  ma's. 

Descon.    He  servido  en  ingenieros,  senora. 

La  Cond.  \  En  ingenieros !  A  mi  me 22  agradan  infinite  los 
ingenieros. 

Descon.  Senora  ^tendria  V.23  la  bondad  de  mandar  que  me 
trajesen24  un  paraguas? 

La  Cond.  (Vuelta  al  tema  del  paraguas.)  De  modo  que  ha 
tenido  V.  la  gloria  de  encontrarse25  en  la  famosa  batalla  de  que  tanto 
se  habld  .  .  * 

Descon.  <;  En  la  batalla  del  cuatro  de  febrero,27  6  en  la28  de 
Vad-Ras? 

La  Cond.   Eso  es,29  en  la  de  Vad-Ras. 

Descon.  Si,  senora,  he  tenido  esa  honra.  —  Aunque  el  pardguas 
sea30  malo,  no  importa.31 

The  student  cannot  review  the  conjugations  too  frequently.  It  is  the 
basis  of  thoroughness  in  the  handling  of  the  spoken  language.  Hence- 
forward, however,  he  need  give  only  the  first  person  singular  of  each  tense, 
conjugating  any  specially  irregular  or  peculiar  parts  of  the  verb.  Give  the 
outline,  then,  of  the  following,  conjugating  the  necessary  tenses  of  those 
\Viitalics:  entrar,  mandar,  importar  (§415);  suplicart(§T>fji'),  andar 
(§  528),  dar  (§  543),  encontrar  (§477),  pensar  (§  457);  comprender, 
creer  (§  549,  £),  deber,  haber  (§  354) ;  hacer  (§  530),  querer  (§  534), 
romper  (§  571),  saber  (§  535) ;  tener  (§  536),  traer  (§  537),  ver  (§  548) ; 
decir  (§  539),  ir  and  irse  (§  552),  sentir  (§499),  servir  (§  513). 

(Imperative  — polite  form.) 

I.  Excuse  me,  madam.  2.  Excuse  me,  ladies.  3.  Come  in  (sing. 
and//.).  4.  Go-out  (sing.  and//.).  5.  Come-up.  6.  Go-down. 
7.  Come-out.  8.  Go-in.  9.  Don't  come-in.  10.  Don't  go-out. 
n.  Don't  come-up.  12.  Don't  go-down.  13.  Don't  come-out 
14.  Don't  go-in.  15.  Do  it  (hdgalo  V.).  16.  Don't  do  it  (no  lo 
h.  V.).  17.  Try  it;  don't  try  it.  18.  Ask-for  it;  don't  ask-for  it. 
19.  Give  it  to-me ;  don't  give  it  to-him.  20.  Look-for  it ;  don't 
look-for  it.  21.  Forgive  him  ;  don't  forgive  him.  22.  Hang  it  up  ; 

21  706,  /       22  2I4.       23  706,  e.        24  709,  c  -   7^.       25  389,  a.        26  409.       27  675, 

date  of  the  battle  of  Tetuan.      28  267.     29  That's  it.      30  710.     3^  415. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  427 

don't  hang  it  up.  23.  Come-near;  don't  come-near.  24.  Go-away; 
don't  go  (away).  25.  Do  him  the  favor;  don't  do  him  the  favor. 
26.  Have  the  goodness  to  .  .  . ;  don't  refuse  to  ...  27.  Turn-around ; 
don't  turn-around. 

Tema  Trigesimo-Quinto. 
ESCENA  NONA — CONTINUACION. 

La  Condesa.  (llamando  al  criado.)  \  Anselmo !  jAnselmo! 
(aparece.)  Ya  que  este  caballero  quiere  absolutamente  ponerse  en 
camino,  ve'  a"  buscar  un  pardguas,  y  traelo  al  instante.  (Que  no 
haya1  ni  un  solo  paraguas  en  la  casa  <:  entiendes  ?)  (Vase  el 
criado.)  Pero  sientese  V.,  caballero. 

Descon.  Sefiora,  tengo  prisa  por  marcharme,  y  agradezco2  la 
invitacion  de  V.  Me  esperan  algunos  amigos  en  la  estacion,  y 
ademas,  prolongando8  mi  presencia  en  esta  casa,  temo4  ser  indis- 
creto,  cuando 5  no  me  es  posible  ni  dun  componer  los  cristales  que 
se  han  roto. 

La  Cond.  Puede  V.  estar  tranquilo,  porque  el  tren  no  sale  hasta 
dentro  de6  tres  horas.  Conque  decia  V.  que  en  Africa  ...  Y  <;me' 
V.  herido7  en  campana? 

Descon.  Si,  senora,  dos  veces,  y  muy  gravemente  por  cierto, 
mie'ntras  tratdbamos  de  establecer  una  paralela. 

La  Cond.  Conque  ,1V.  ha  tratado  de  establecer  una  paralela? 
No  sabe  V.  lo  que8  yo  he  deseado  siempre  saber  lo  que  es  una 
paralela. 

Descon.  Voy  a"  satisfacer  entdnces  la  curiosidad  de  V.  mie'ntras 
traen  el  pardguas. 

La  Cond.   Pero  sie'ntese  V.,  yo  se  lo9  ruego. 

Descon.  Gracias.  La  paralela,  senora,  consiste  en  una  linea  de 
ataque  y  de  defensa  trazada  sobre  el  terreno  que  ocupan  los  sitia- 
dores,  con  objeto  de  avanzar  por  zanjas  6  caminos  cubiertos  hdcia 
la  plaza  6  el  punto  sitiado. 

La  Cond.   Comprendo  perfectamente. 

Descon.   Esas  zanjas  se  construyen  en  tres  lineas  unidas  entre  si 

1  708,  b,  Rent.  2  agradecer  ({  374,  a).  3  735.  *  723(  ••  that  I  shall  be." 
5  since.  6  hasta  dentro  de  =  before,  in,  with  a  negative  verb.  7  390. 
8  282,  a.  9  754. 


428  Drill-Book. 

por  otras  en  forma  de  zig-zags.  La  profundidad  de  cada  zanja  es 
la  de  un  metro,  y  su  longitud  varia  desde  uno  hasta  tres  metres 
prdximamente.  Hay  seis  modos  de  construirlas :  de  zapa  sencilla, 
de  zapa  volante,  llena,  medio-llena,  doble  y  semi-doble.  ^Com- 
prende  V.? 

La  Cond.  \  Vaya10  si  comprendo  !  Es  muy  interesante  todo  eso. 
Decia  V.  que  hay  cincuenta  y  seis  maneras  de  construir  las  zanjas  . . . 

Descon.  \  Cincuenta  y  seis !  \  Ave  Maria  Purisima11 !  seis,  senora, 
seis. 

La  Cond.  Es  verdad,  perdone  V.,  me  he  equivocado.  Como 
nosotras  no  tenemos  obligacion  de  saber  esos  trabajos  de  zapa  .  .  . 

Descon.  \  Pues  ya  lo  creo !  Como  que  los  hacemos  nosotros.12 
Vamos  ahora  a13  definir  claramente  lo  que  es  zapa  sencilla. 

La  Cond.   Vamos  a"  ver. 

Descon.    Se  llama  zapa  sencilla  .  .  .    (Sale14  el  criado.) 

Conjugate  desear,  variar;  avanzar  (§  371,  <r);  rogar  (§483),  sentarse 
(§  459);  agradecer  (§  374);  entender  (§  471),  componer  (§  533);  con- 
struir (§  522),  salir  (§  554)  ;  ser  herido  (§  386). 


IDIOM. 

tratar  de  (inf.),  to  try  to  (inf.). 
tratemos  de  averiguarlo, 
tratare  de  encontrarle, 


let  us  try  to  ferret  it  out. 
I  shall  try  to  find  him. 


i.  I  wish  you  [a]  good  journey.  2.  He  has  changed  his  (de) 
opinion.  3.  The  ship  changed  her  (de)  course.  4.  He-came- 
forward  boldly.  5.  Let  him  come-forward.  6.  I  came-forward  to 
(d)  salute  him.  7.  I  begged  him  to  (it  to-him).  8.  He  begged  us 
to.  9.  I  beg  you  not  to  go-out  (sufy'.).  10.  He  begged  me  not  to 
go-out,  n.  We  beg  you  to  sit-down  (que  se  siente).  12.  I  thank 
you  for  it  (it  to  you}.  13.  I  shall  be  infinitely  obliged  to  you  for  it. 
14.  He  does  not  understand  me.  15.  Don't  you  understand  me? 

16.  Nobody  understands  him;  he  speaks  badly.  17.  He  who 
makes  shoes  is  called  [a]  shoemaker ;  he  who  mends  them  is  called 
[a]  cobbler.  18.  He  who  draws  up  plans  of  houses  or  property  is 

10  659,  a,  "  Of  course  I  do."  n  658,  d,  Rem.  12  "  Oh  !  of  course,  since  we 
are  the  ones  to  construct  them  " ;  zapa  has  the  two  meanings  here.  13  "  Now 
let  us  explain  "...  14  Salir,  in  plays,  means  "  to  enter." 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  429 

called  a  draughtsman.  19.  He  is  trying  to  construct  a  tramway 
from  (desde)  his  village  to  the  city.  20.  When  do  you  start  for 
Seville?  21.  The  train  will  leave  in  (within)  two  hours.  22.  Will 
you  leave  by  the  mail-train  or  by  the  accommodation  ?  23.  There-are 
excursion-trains  almost  every  day  during  the  bathing-season. 


Tema  Trigesimo-Sexto. 
ESCENA  DECIMA. 

Anselmo.  (a  su  ama.)  Senora,  he  revuelto  toda  la  casa,  y  no  he 
podido  encontrar  ma's  que  esto.  (Saca  de  la  funda  el  armazOn  de  un 
paraguas  viejo  y  muy  grande  y  le  abre.) 

La  Condesa.  (al  Desconocido.)  Ya  ve  V.,  caballero,  que  no  le 
falta  ma's  que  la  tela.1  Creimos  que  haria2  buen  tiempo  y  no  hemos 
pensado  en  traer  pardguas  (plur.)  de  Madrid. 

Ans.  Y  ademds,  sera"  inutil  dentro  de  pocos  minutos.  La  lluvia 
ha  cesado,  y  cualquiera  diria  que  el  sol  va  a"  salir. 

La  Cond.  (corriendo  hacia  la  ventana.)  ^Sera"3  posible?  Va  a 
salir  el  sol.  \  Que  alegria !  Kara  buen  tiempo  y  vendra"n  los  amigos 
que  espero  con  tanta  ansiedad.4  Anselmo,  sube  al  momento  a"  la 
azotea  y  cada  cinco  minutos  baja  a  decirme  cua"!5  es  el  estado  del 
cielo. 

Ans.  (Pues,  senor,6  vamos  arriba  a  desempenar  las  funciones  del 
bardmetro  que  se  hizo  pedazos  esta  manana.)  (Vase.) 

Conjugate  bajar,  sacar  (§  371);   revolver  (§491)  ;  venir  (§  541). 

IDIOMS. 
Hacer,  to  be  (of  the  temperature  and  weather). 


hace  buen  (mal)  tiempo, 
£que  tal  tiempo  hara  manana? 

hacia  mucho  frio,  calor, 

hizo  un  tiempo  muy  templado, 


it  is  good  (bad)  weather, 
what  kind  of  weather  will  it  be  to- 
morrow ? 

it  was  very  cold,  warm. 
it  was  quite  moderate  weather. 


l  lit.  it  does  not  lack  to  it  more  than  the  cloth,  i.e.  "it  lacks  only  the 
cover."  2  //  would  be.  3  703,  b.  4  624.  5  292.  6  Addressed  to  himself  in 
good  humor. 


43  o  Drill-Book. 

i.  What  kind  [of]  weather  is-it-going  to  be  (va  A  h.)  to-morrow? 
2.  The  sun  set  (has  set)  clear ;  I  fancy  (that)  it  will  be  fair 
weather.  3.  It-was  very  cold  that  night,  do  you  remember?  4.  It- 
has  not  been  very  hot  this  summer.  5.  It-is  hotter  in  Madrid  than 
in  Boston,  but  one  does  not  feel  it  (no  se  siente)  so-much  there, 
because  the  atmosphere  is  very  dry  in  the  centre  of  Spain.  6.  One 
never  perspires  there,  and  they  (se)  do  not  wear1  straw-hats  or  (nor) 
white  clothes  much.2  7.  Spaniards  only  want  good  government  and 
(the)  material2  prosperity.1 

Tema  Trigesimo-Septimo. 

ESCENA  UNDECIMA. 

Desconocido.  Como  deciamos,  la  zapa  sencilla  .  .  . 

La  Condesa.  Caballero,  V.  me  permitira  que  le  diga1  que  es 
una  imprudencia  por  mi  parte  detenerle  ma's  tiempo,  y  que  estoy 
abusando  de2  su  amabilidad. 

Descon.  Al  contrario,  senora. 

La  Cond.  S<£  bien  lo  que  es  un  viaje.  Falta  el  tiempo  para  todo ; 
los  mementos  son  preciosos. 

Descon.  Pero  ,ino  me  ha  dicho  V.,  hace  un  momento,  que  tengo 
tres  horas  disponibles?  Ahora  soy  yo  el  que  pide3  a  V.  el  favor  de 
no  abandonar  tan  pronto  esta  casa. 

La  Cond.  Si  es  asi  .  .  .  caballero  .  .  .  (de  mal  humor.) 

Descon.  Vuelvo  a  mi  narracion.     La  zapa  sencilla  .  .  . 

La  Cond.  \  Dios  mio  !  \  Dios  mio  ! 

Descon.  <iSe  pone  V.  mala4? 

La  Cond.  No,  no  es  nada. 

Descon.  En  la  zapa  sencilla  sdlo  se  emplean  gaviones  y  faginas, 
que  consisten  .  .  . 

ESCENA  DUODECIMA. 

Anselmo.  \  Senora  Condesa,  senora  Condesa ! 

La  Cond.   £  Qud  ocurre  ? 

Ans.  El  sol  que  aparecid  un  instante  se  ha  retirado  bruscamente. 
El  cielo  esta"  cubierto  de  unos  nubarrones5  negros  que  asustan  .  .  . 
y  oiga  V.,  senora,  la  lluvia  cae  a  torrentes. 

La  Cond.  \  Horrible  contrariedad  !  La  marquesa  y  su  familia  no 
podran  venir,  y  voy  a  continuar  sola  en  este  infierno. 

i  709,  c.      2  757.      3  694,  a.      4  Idiom  :  are  you  ill?      5  767. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  431 

Ans.  (Se  ha  puesto  furiosa.  Me  voy  £  escape,  porque  como 
ahora  soy  yo  el  bardmetro,  no  tendria  nada  de  extrano6  que  hiciera 
conmigo7  lo  que  hizo  con  mi  antecesor). 

Conjugate  aparecer  (§  374)  and  caer  (§  544). 

IDIOM. 

Ponerse,  to  place  or  put  one's  self;  (of  dress)  to  put  on;  (of  the  sun) 
to  set;  (of  physical  or  moral  state)  to  get,  to  become,  to  be. 

i.  He  has  been  wounded  by  (de)  a  ball  (§  765,  Rem.  I.).  2.  We 
have  been  wounded  in  our  self-respect.  3.  The  sun  appears  through 
(por  entre)  the  clouds.  4.  The  sun  sets,  had  set,  went-down^ 
5.  A  friend  put  himself  between  the  two  combatants.  6.  When  the 
sun2  goes-down1  among  clouds  it  is  [a]  sign  that  (de  que)  the  follow- 
ing day  will  be  overcast  or  stormy.  7.  They  know  (conocer)  the 
signs  of  the  sky,  but  they  do  not  discern  the  signs  of  the  times. 

8.  He  put  on  his  (frock-)coat  and  went-out  to  (d)  make  some  calls. 

9.  (The)  excursion  tickets  are  called  in  Spain  tickets  of  out  and 
back  (go  and  return).     10.  The  machine  or  engine  that  draws  the 
train  is  called  there  "  locomotora,"  and  in  (the)  Spanish  America 
4 4  locomotiva "    from-the   English.      n.    He-has    got   well   (good) 
again.     12.  If  he  should  go  to  Malaga  he  would  get  well  (good). 
13.  I  should  become  very  angry  if  he  said  that  to-me.    14.  He  is  ill ; 
he  is  getting*  better. 

Tema  Trigesimo-Octavo. 

ESCENA  DECIMA-TERCIA. 

La  Condesa  (al  desconocido,  con  dulzura).  Cuando  V.  guste,1 
mi  querido  amigo,  puede  continuar  esa  deliciosa  descripcion  de 
los  trabajos  de  zapa. 

Descon.  Al  momento,  sefiora.  Toda  vez  que  V.  lo  desea,  pasa- 
re'mos  a"  la  zapa  volante. 

La  Cond.   Ya  escucho.     (Y  es  buen  mozo.) 

Descon.  La  zapa  volante  se  comienza  a"  practicar  casi  siempre 
de  noche,  y  se  hace  salir2  de  la  trinchera  un  destacamento  de  tra- 
bajadores  ;  cada  uno  lleva  una  pala,  una  espiocha  y  un  fusil. 

La  Cond.   Una  pala,  una  espiocha  y  un  fu  .  .  . 

6  "  It  would  not  be  at  all  strange  if"  (que).  7  203 ;  con  here  =  to.  *  he 
goes  getting  better,  se  va  poniendo  m.  1  710.  2  Literally :  a  detachment  is 
made  to  come  forth  ;  we  say :  they  take  from  the  trinchera  a  detachment  of. 


432  Drill-Book. 


ESCENA   DECIMA-CUARTA. 

Anselmo.  \  Victoria !  \  Victoria !  El  sol  ha  triunfado  de  la 
lluvia,  y  el  cielo,  casi  despejado,  presenta  un  aspecto  magmfico. 

La  Cond.  \  Oh !  qu6  alegria !  Ve  a  prepararlo  todo,  Anselmo, 
para  recibir  a  mis  amigos,  que  vendran  hoy  fijamente  en  el  primer 
tren.  (Al  Desconocido.)  Caballero,  retener  a  V.  un  momento 
mas  en  esta  quinta  seria  un  abuso,  una  inconveniencia.  Y  antes  de 
marchar  reciba  V.  un  millon  de  gracias  por  la  paciencia  y  la  amabi- 
lidad  con  que  me  ha  hecho  compania  por  espacio  de  una  hora. 
Crea  V.  que  jamas  olvidard  su  conducta. 

Descon.  Adios,  senora  Condesa,  y  gracias  por  la  hospitalidad 
que  he  encontrado  en  su  casa  de  V. 

La  Cond.  Y  yo  ruego  a  V.,  caballero,  que  olvide  la  manera 
especial  y  violenta  que  he  tenido  de  hacerle  entrar  en  ella. 

Descon.  Dichosa  violencia,  senora,  que  me  hapermitido  conocerla. 

La  Cond.  Tampoco  olvidare'  que  V.  me  ha  hecho  pasar  una  de 
las  horas  mas  deliciosas  que  he  disfrutado  en  tres  meses. 

Descon.  Esa  hora  pasada  cerca  de  V.  va  d  hacer  muy  largas  las3 
que  faltan  para  que  saiga  el  tren.  Adios,  Senora. 

La  Cond.  <jQuiere  V.  seguir  mi  consejo?  Ese  tiempo  lo  puede 
V.4  emplear  en  visitar  los  alrededores,  que  son  deliciosos.  Ahora 
no  hay  peligro  ninguno  de  caer  en  manos  de  los  bandidos  y  ser 
degollado  por  el  famoso  Vargas. 

Indicate  all  the  verbs  that  are  in  the  subjunctive  mode, — guste,  olvide, 
saiga,  —  and  apply  the  principle  regulating  each.  Give  the  imperative  in 
the  familiar  form,  and  change  it  into  the  imperative  with  the  polite  form. 
Give  all  those  in  the  polite  form,  and  change  them  to  the  familiar  form, 
affirmative  and  negative,  with  and  without  a  pronoun.  As:  haz,  hdzlo, 
no  hagas,  no  lo  hagas  ;  haga  V.,  hdgalo  V.y  no  haga  V.,  no  lo  haga  V. 

i .  The  treaty  of  the  United  States  with  Spain  was  signed  at  (en) 
St.  Lawrence,  that  is,  at  the  Escorial,  near  Madrid,  by  the  famous  Man- 
uel Godoy,  called  [the]  Prince  of  the  Peace,  and  Thomas  Pinckney 
on  (de)  [the]  part  of  the  United  States,  the  twenty-seventh  of  Octo- 
ber,* (of)  one  thousand  seven  hundred  [and]  ninety-five.  2.  The 

8  Will  make  those  that  remain  before  the  train  starts  very  long.  4  The 
object  comes  first  for  emphasis,  and  is  repeated  in  a  pronoun  substitute  (lo) 
superfluous  in  English.  Unemphatic  is :  Puede  V.  emp.  ese  tiempo  en.  *  675, 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  433 

king,  Charles  [the]  Fourth,*  ratified  it  at  the  palace  of  Aranjuez, 
April  25,  1796,  and  George  (Jorge)  Washington  ratified  the  same 
by-the  (de)  advice  and  with  the  consent  of  the  Senate,  at  (en) 
Philadelphia,  March  7,  1796,  Timothy5  Pickering6  being1  then2 
Secretary  of  State.4  3.  The  Treaty,  with  all  its  documents,  was 
then2  printed1  (se  imprimio)  at  Madrid  in  a  small  4to  volume  of 
fifty  pages,  with  this  title:  Treaty  |  of  Friendship,  Limits  and 
Navigation  |  concluded  |  between  the  King  our  Lord  |  and  the 
United  States  of  America :  |  Signed  at  (en)  St.  Lawrence  the  Royal  | 
October  27th  f  (of)  1795.  |  By  (de)  order  of  the  King.  |  Madrid,  in 
the  Royal  Press,  |  year  of  1796.  4.  This  volume  is  (estd)  in  two 
columns,  the  one  for  the  Spanish  text  and  the  other  for  the  Eng- 
lish, with  the  powers  (poderes)  and  ratifications  at- the  end,  running 
across  the  page  (d  renglon  seguido) ,  and  with  two  engraved  plans  of 
passports  or  sailing  patents  (patentes  de  mar).  The  draft  of  the 
treaty  is  said  to  have  been  made  (was  made,  as  it  is  said,)  by  the 
celebrated  Count  de  Aranda,  one  of  Spain's  ablest  statesmen. 


Tema  Trigesimo-Nono. 

ESCENA  DECIMA-CUARTA  —  CONTINUACION. 

Desconocido.   £  Vargas  ? 

La  Condesa.  Si,  un  bandido  que  ha  sido  el  terror  de  este  pais, 
y  que  me  ha  hecho  pasar  noches  terribles.  Sdlo  con  nombrarle  me 
echo  a1  temblar  como  una  azogada.2 

Descon.  (Voy  a  vengarme  de  tf.)  En  efecto,  ahora  recuerdo 
que  ayer  arrestaron  a  ese  celebre  bandido  y  que  hoy  le  he  visto  en 
el  camino  de  hierro. 

La  Cond.   Gracias  a  Dios  que  nos  vemos  libres  de  ese  hombre. 

Descon.   No  tan  libres  como  V.  cree. 

La  Cond.   \  Como  !     Pues  <:  que  ha  sucedido  ? 

Descon.  Hombre  de  una  destreza  y  de  una  fuerza  increibles,  ha 
logrado  romper  los  hierros  que  le  aprisionaban ;  ha  herido  a*  cuatro 
guardias  que  le  custodiaban,  y  echo  a  correr  por  esos3  campos  sin 
que  fuera4  posible  darle  alcance. 

*  674.  f  d  veinte  y  siete  de  O.  *  echarse  a,  to  begin ;  "  at  the  bare 
mention  of  his  name  I  begin  to."  2  An  azogado  (from  azogfue,  quicksilver) 
is  one  who  has  destroyed  his  nervous  system  by  labor  in  the  quicksilver  mines. 
We  say,  "  to  tremble  like  a  leaf."  3  265,  translate  "  the  open  fields."  4  710. 


434  Drill-Book. 

La  Cond.  \  Eso  es  horrible  !  Van  a"  empezar  otra  vez  los  robos 
y  los  crimenes,  y  yo  vuelvo  a"  mis  noches  de  insomnio  y  de  angustia. 
Dicen  que  ese  hombre  es  un  mdnstruo  de  fealdad. 

Descon.    Se  exagera  mucho,  senora. 

La  Cond.  ±  V.  lo  conoce  ?  Ahora  recuerdo  que  acaba  V.  de 
decir  que  esta  manana  .  .  . 

Descon.  No  es  tan  feo  como  se  asegura.  Figurese  V.  el  color  de 
mis  cabellos. 

La  Cond.   ^Es  posible? 

Descon.   Frente  igual  a"  la  mia. 

La  Cond.   ±  De  veras  ? 

Descon.    La  nariz,  la  boca  y  la  barba  de  una  semejanza  perfecta. 

La  Cond.   Pero  ;eso  es  raro  !     <:¥  su  estatura?  (inquieta.) 

Descon.   Como  la  mia ;  ni  mas  alta  ni  ma's  baja. 

La  Cond.   Y  <:  que  edad  representa  ? 

Descon.    La  misma  que  yo. 

La  Cond.  \  Dios  mio  !  Empiezo  a  sospechar.  (El  jdven  cierra 
por  dentro  todas  las  puertas  y  se  guarda5  las  Haves  en  el  bolsillo.) 
<iQue  esta  V.  haciendo,  caballero? 

Descon.    Senora,  el  famoso  bandido  que  tanto  la  aterra,  soy  yo. 

La  Cond.    \  Socor  .  .  .  ! 6 

Descon.   No  de  V.  un  solo  grito  si  quiere  V.  conservar  la  vida. 

La  Cond.   \  Estoy  perdida ! 

Descon.   V.  misma  me  ha  hecho  entrar  en  su  casa  y  por  fuerza. 

La  Cond.  iQud  quiere  V.?  ^Dinero?  Le  dard  todo  el  que  me 
pida. 

Descon.  <iPor  quie'n  me  toma  V.?  por  un  vidriero  al  principio,  y 
ahora  por  un  cambiante  de  monedas  *. 

La  Cond.  \  Quien  lo  creydra !  Un  hombre  que  me  parecia  de 
modales  tan  distinguidos ! 

i.  The  stranger  made  her  tremble,  feigning  himself  [to  be]  the 
robber  of  whom1  the  morning4  paper3  spoke.2  2.  It  would  seem 
to  be  a  very  ungallant  vengeance  to  take  on  a  lady,*  but  we  must 
remember  that  her  behavior  toward  a  stranger  had  been  quite 
extraordinary.  3.  The  lady  began  to  cry  (to  the)  help,  but  the 

5  guardar,  to  keep,  also  to  lay  aside,  as  a  book ;  here  to  put  (away) .  For 
the  se,  see'§$  231  and  253.  6  j  Socorro !  help  I  *  It  seems  little  gallant  to 
avenge  one's  self  thus  of  a  lady,  but  one  must,  etc. 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  435 

pretended  robber,  seeing  the  gravity  of  the  situation,  sought  to 
(procurar)  moderate  the  terror  of  his  victim  [by]  giving  her  an 
account  of  his  life.  4.  Knowing  the  character  of  (the)  ladies,  he 
sought  to  excite  her  sympathy  even  in  [the]  midst  of  the  danger 
that  seemed  to  surround  her.  5.  While2  the  narration4  went-on,3 
however,1  the  lady  found  means  to  (para)  notify  the  servants  of  her 
position.  6.  The-latter3  having1  come2  to  (en)  her  aid,  the  stranger 
was  obliged  to  acknowledge  that  he  was  acting  a  farce.  7.  The 
declaration  of  his  attachment  to  the  lady  under  the  circumstances 
does  not  add  to  the  interest  of  the  play  in  our  opinion.  8.  It  is, 
however,  very  popular  in  [a]  certain  class  of  Spanish  theatres, 
which  are  called  summer  or  cafe'  theatres  (631,  £). 


Tema  Cuadrag£simo. 

ESCENA  DECIMA-CUARTA  —  CONTINUACION. 

Descon.  Es  que1  yo  no  soy  bandido  por  instinto,  sino  por  un 
rapto  de  amorosa  desesperacion. 

La  Cond.  (Un  poco  mas  tranquila.)     \  Es  posible  ! 

Descon.  Si,  seiiora  Condesa.  No  he  hecho  mas  que  vengarme. 
El  amor  unicamente  es  lo  que  me  convirtid2  en  un  hombre  criminal. 

La  Cond.  (Para  ganar  tiempo.)  Debe  ser  esa  una  historia 
romantica  y  terrible  a*  la  vez. 

Descon.  Si,  senora,  roma*ntica  y  terrible. 

La  Gond.  Tengo  niiedo  de  estar  sola  con  V.,  y  sin  embargo 
quisiera  saberla. 

Descon.  Yo  adoraba  con  delirio  en  mi  pais  a"  la  hija  de  un  rico 
labrador.  (La  Condesa  se  sienta  junto  a  la  mesa  y  escribe  sin  ser 
vista  algunas  palabras  en  un  pedazo  de  papel,  mientras  sigue  la 
relacion.) 

La  Cond.  Que  seria  hermosa  sin  duda. 

Descon.  Hermosa  como  un  angel  de  la  gloria.  Diria  que  era  la 
mas  bella  de  todas  las  mujeres,  si  no  hubiera  tenido  la  fortuna  de 
conocer  a"  V. 

La  Cond.  (Esto  es  lo  que  se  llama  un  bandido  bien  educado. 
Yo  habia  oido  decir  que  habia  algunos  muy  finos,  pero  no  en  el 
campo). 

1 188,  Rent.  2  converter,  502. 


436  Drill-Book. 

Descon.  Nos  amabamos  con  frenesi.  Pues  bien,  senora,  aquella 
nina,  d  quien  yo  creia  un  modelo  de  pureza,  me  proporciono*  el  mds 
cruel  de  los  desehganos. 

(La  Condesa  se  habia  aproximado  todo  lo  posible  a"  la  puerta,  y, 
fingiendo  que  se  le  cay  6  el  panuelo,  pasd  por  la  rendija  el  papel 
donde  habia  escrito.)  . 

ESCENA  DECIMA-QUINTA. 

Anselmo.  (por  fuera.)  Senora,  senora  ^llamaba  V.? 

Descon.  (d  la  Cond.)  Puede  V.  decir  lo  que  le  plazca.3  Ya  sabe 
V.  que  estoy  armado. 

La  Cond.  (al  criado,  con  voz  conmovida.)  Anselmo  ^ha  llegado 
el  tren? 

Ans.  Si,  senora* 

La  Cond.  ^  Y  la  familia  que  esperaba? 

Ans.  No  ha  venido.  El  tren  llegd  con  dos  horas  de  retraso  a" 
causa  del  mal  estado  de  los  caminos.  La  tormenta  ha  descargado 
sobre  el  rio  y  ha  convertido  en  un  lago  la  campifia. 

Descon.  (aparte.)  \  Demonio !  Yo  me  marcho.  Ademas,  voy 
vengado,  y  el  susto  ha  sido  de  primera  clase.  (A  la  Condesa.) 
Senora,  con  permiso  de  V.,  me  retiro,  y  ahora  estoy  seguro  que  no 
me  detendra  ma's  tiempo  a"  su  lado.  Pero  ^que*  ruido  es  ese?  (Dan 
fuertes  golpes  en  la  puerta.) 

Ans.  (desde  fuera.)  Senora,  valor,  aqui  estamos  para  librarla 
de  ese  infame  bandido.  Somos  seis  hombres  y  traemos  cada  uno 
nuestra  escopeta. 

La  Cond.  (al  Descon.)  Ese  ruido  significa  que  mis  criados  van  d. 
acabar  con  V.,  dentro  de  pocos  momentos,  si  se  atreve  a"  dar  un 
solo  paso. 

Descon.  (aparte.)  Pues  me  he  metido  en  buen  zipizape.  No  hay 
m£s  remedio  que  confesar  la  verdad  y  salir  de  este  atolladero. 
(Alto,  a"  la  Condesa)  Sepa  V.,  senora  Condesa,  que  todo  ha  sido 
una  farsa.  V.  me  tom6  como  recurso  contra  la  lluvia  y  contra  el 
fastidio ;  yo  lo  comprendi,  y  quise  darla  un  susto  fmgie'ndome  ese 
bandido  que  tanto  la  aterra. 

La  Cond.  \  Cdmo  ! 

Descon.   Si;    pertenezco  a"  una  de   las  familias  ma's   nobles   de 

3  545- 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  437 

Andalucia,  y  soy  sobrino  de  la  marquesa  de  la  Pena,  que  hoy  debia 
salir  de  Sevilla  para  ir  a"  la  quinta  de  la  Condesa  de  Alvarado,  con 
quien  tiene  el  proyecto  de  casarme. 

La  Cond.  Conque  V.  ...  (La  puerta  cede  al  fin  &  los  golpes, 
y  entra  Anselmo  con  cinco  criados,  todos  armados  de  escopetas.) 

I.  There  are  rail-ways  over  all  Spain.  2.  One  goes  from  the 
French  frontier  on  the  north  to  Cadiz  in  the  extreme  south.  3.  This 
road  gives-off  lateral  branches  that  lead  to  Lisbon  and  Oporto  in 
Portugal,  and  on  the  other  hand  to  Malaga,  Carthagena,  and 
Valencia  along  (par)  the  eastern  coast.  4.  Besides,  there  are 
roads  from  Madrid  to  Barcelona  via  (por  via  de)  Saragossa,  and 
to  the  north-west  as-far-as-to  Bilbao  and  Santander.  5.  These  are 
the  great  lines ;  there  are  many  short  [ones]  which  connect  impor- 
tant places  with  the  capital.  6.  The  Spanish  language  is  spoken 
to-day  by  more  people  than  any  other  language  in  western  Europe, 
except  the  English.  7.  In  a  few  years  the  demands  of  commerce 
will  make  it  the1  only2  absolutely 5 indispensable 6  foreign4  language3 
in  (de)  this  country.  8.  It  is  spoken  over  the  whole  of  Central  and 
South  America  (por  toda  la  A.  del  Centra  y  del  Sur),  but  with  [a] 
certain  local  type  like  that  which  (al  que)  distinguishes  the  Anglo- 
American  from  the  Englishman.  9.  Still  the  educated  of  both 
countries  may  be  said  *  to  have  a  common  speech  and  type. 
10.  Many  distinguished  Mexicans,  Chilians,  et  cetera,  have  con- 
tributed by  (con)  their  writings  to  (the)  Spanish  literature,  and  have 
become  (hacerse)  members  of  the  various  Academies  of  the  mother- 
country. 

Tema  Cuadragesimo-Primo. 

ESCENA   DECIMA-SEXTA. 

Anselmo.  (al  Desconocido.)  Date  preso,1  tunante,  ahora  las  vas  a" 
pagar2  todas  juntas. 

La  Cond.  \  Eh,  detendos3!  Y  tu,  Anselmo,  respecta  la  persona 
de  este  caballero  como  si  fuese  la  mia  propia. 

Ans.  Pero,  entonces  <ique  significa  el  papel  que  me  did  V.  por 
debajo4  de  la  puerta? 

*  Still,  it  may  be  said  that  the  educated  of  both  countries  have,  etc. 

1  Lit.,  give  yourself  up  as  a  prisoner  ;  that  is,  "  you  are  my  prisoner."  2  Often 
render  ir  a  by  the  future  of  the  following  verb :  "  you'll  pay  now  for  the  whole 
score."  3  209,  404.  4  649,  Rent. 


43  8  Drill-Book. 

La  Cond.  Calla ;  luego  lo  sabras  todo. 

Descon.  Conque  <jV.  did  aviso  sin  que5  yo  lo  notara? 

La  Cond.  Creo  que  V.  en  mi  lugar  hubiera  hecho  lo  mismo. 
El  lance  no  ha  sido  para  me'nos.6  Pero  despues  he  procurado 
enmendar  mi  error. 

Descon.  j  Oh,  si!  mil  gracias.  Mi  nombre  es  Cdrlos  Velazquez, 
y  ofrezco  a*  V.  mi  mano  y  mi  corazon  que  sabra  amarla  siempre. 

Ans.  (aparte.)  Me  parece  que  esto  va  a  acabar  en  tragedia,  es 
decir,  en  boda. 

La  Cond.  Pero  <iy  esa  sefiora  con  quien  desea  casarle7  la  mar- 
quesa  de  la  Pena? 

Cdrlos.  Renuncio  a  ella  para  siempre. 

La  Cond.  Entdnces,  caballero,  siento  no  poder  dar  a*  V.  mi 
mano,  porque  V.  mismo  acaba  de  negarse  a*  ello.8 

Cdrlos.  j  Yo  negarme9!  .  .  .  No  comprendo. 

La  Cond.  Esta"  V.  en  casa  de  la  Condesa  de  Alvarado. 

Cdrlos.  (con  alegria.)  \  Sera  posible  !  \  Ah  !  soy  feliz,  y  voy  a* 
obedecer  ciegamente  las  drdenes  de  mi  tia. 

Ans.  (jCarambaJ  esto  va  por  la  posta.10  Es  precise  ponerse 
bien  con  este  hombre.)  Caballero,  V.  dispense  si  hace  poco11  me 
tome'  la  libertad  de  poner12  la  mano  .  .  . 

Cdrlos.  Estds  perdonado. 

ESCENA  ULTIMA. 

Victorina.  i  Esta"  ya  preso  ? 

Anselmo.  Si,  preso,  y  para  toda  su  vida  el  infeliz. 

La  Condesa.  (al  publico.) 

En  la  pasada  lluvia 

Tendi  mis  redes, 

Y  pesque^este^ingeniero 

Que^ofrezco^a"  ^ustedes . 

Ya^importa^un  bledo13 

5  Lit.,  without  that  I  should  note  it,  i.e.,  "  without  my  observing  it."  6  The 
occasion  demanded  it ;  lit.,  "  the  critical  occasion  was  not  for  less."  7  \Q=you. 
8  ello  refers  to  the  idea,  —  not  to  the  mere  word  mano,  which  is  fern.  9  731. 
1°  ir  por  la  posta,  to  go  " by  express"  as  we  say.  n  hace  poco,  just  now, 
a  little  while  ago.  12  to  lay  my  hands  (on  you).  13  Bledo  :  Low  Lat.  bledum, 
Germ.  Blatt,  Fr.  ble :  a  grain,  a  whit.  A  negative  is  understood  with  the  verb: 
"  I  don't  care  a  whit  now,  whether  "  (que). 


Essentials  of  Form  and  Inflection.  439 

Que^el  bardmetro  marque 
Bueno^/5  mal  tiempo. 
Ayer,  al  verme  sola, 

Aqui  moria  ... 
Y_hoy  puede14  que  me^estorbe 

La  compafiia. 
Si  .  .  .  yo  soy  franca, 
Y  con  franqueza  pido 

Una  palmada.15 

i.  He  shuts  the  door;  shut  the  door  (fam.  and  pol.).  2.  He 
opens  the  door ;  open  the  door.  3.  He  goes  up  stairs  ;  go  up  stairs 
{la  escalerd).  4.  He  goes  down  stairs ;  go  down  stairs.  5.  He 
leaves  him;  leave  him;  don't  leave  him.  6.  He  calls  them;  call 
them;  don't  call  them.  7.  Do  not  speak  to  me.  8.  Let  no  one 
come  in  (que  nadie  pase  or  entre).  9.  Let  no  one  see  me.  10.  Let 
there  be  no  one  at  the  door.  n.  Let  it  not  be  so.  12.  Let  us  go 
(yamos)  ;  let  us  go  up ;  let  us  go  down.  13.  Let  us  not  listen  to 
him.  14.  Let  us  give  (to)-the  poor2  [man]  something.1  15.  Let 
us  not  give  him  anything  (nothing).  16.  Pardon,  brother  !  17.  May 
(que)  God  relieve  you.  18.  Farewell,  cavalier  (Go  with  God,  cava- 
lier). 19.  To  (para)  deny  an  alms  in  Spain,  they  say  to  the  beggar  : 
"  Pardon,  brother,"  or  "God  protect  you"  (Dios  le  ampare),  or 
both  (things).  20.  The  beggar  answers  cheerfully,  "Go,  your 
worships,  with  God ;  another  time  it  will  be  "  (ptra  vez  serd). 

14 puede  que,  popular  for  puede  ser  que,  impersonal.  15  The  usual  end- 
ing of  Spanish  plays,  the  "  vos  plaudite "  of  the  ancients.  Observe  that  in 
poetry  similar  vowels  meeting  one  another  are  absorbed  in  pronunciation; 
vowels  that  are  not  similar  are  diphthongized,  or  even  uttered  in  triphthongs. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


A. 

A,  to,  at,  in,  within,  at  —  off. 

Abalorios,  M.  PL.,  glass  beads. 

Abandonar,  to  forsake,  to  leave. 

Abrir,  to  open,  §  561. 

Absolutamente,  absolutely;  quiere 
a.,  is  determined  to. 

Absolute,  a,  absolute. 

Aburrir,  to  weary,  to  wear  out. 

Abusar,  to  abuse,  foil,  by  de,  §  757. 

Abiiso,  M.,  abuse,  outrage. 

Acabar,  to  bring  to  an  end,  to  finish, 
to  close;  to  get  through;  a.  con, 
to  put  an  end  to,  to  make  an  end 
of;  a.  de,  to  finish  (doing  some- 
thing) ;  to  have  just,  p.  422. 

Accionista,  M.,  shareholder. 

Aceite,  M.,  (olive)  oil. 

Acordarse,  to  remember,  foil,  by 
de,  §  474. 

Actitud,  F.,  attitude;  en  a.  de,  in  a 
position  for. 

Acto,  M.,  act. 

Acudid  —  acudir. 

Acudir,  to  apply  (d,  to). 

Acuerdo(me)  —  acordarse. 

Ademas,  besides,  furthermore. 

Adios,  good  bye, 

Adorar,  to  be  in  love  with,  to 
adore. 

Adornado,  a,  adorned  (de,  with). 

Adulacion,  F.,  flattery. 

Afeite,  M.,  cosmetic. 

Aflige  —  afligir. 


Afligido,  a,  sorrowful. 

Afligir,  to  grieve. 

Agdsto,  M.,  August. 

Agradar,  to  please,  to  like;  used 
same  as  gustar,  p.  420. 

Agradecer,  to  thank,  §§  374,  754. 

Agradezco  —  agradecer. 

Agua,  F.,  water;  las  a — s,  rain; 
inundation. 

Aguacero,  M.,  shower. 

Agueda,  F.,  Agathe  or  Agatha. 

Agiiero,  M.,  augury,  omen. 

Aguila,  F.,  eagle,  §  81. 

Ahora,  now,  at  present. 

Ahorrar,  to  lay  up,  to  save. 

Aire,  M.,  air,  atmosphere. 

Airoso,  a,  successful,  triumphant. 

Ajeno,  a,  another's,  of  others;  for- 
eign (de,  to). 

Ala,  F.,  wing;   rim,  §  81. 

Alancea —  alancear. 

Alancear,  to  dart,  to  spear. 

Alancee  —  alancear. 

Alav^s,  a,  Alavese,  of  Alava. 

Albaricoque,  M.,  apricot. 

Albedrio,  M.,  will  (arbitriuni) . 

Albergue,  M.,  refuge. 

Albricias,  F.  PL.,  present  for  bring- 
ing good  news. 

Alburn,  M.,  album,  sketching-book. 

Alcalaino,  a,  of  Alcala. 

Alcance,  M.,  range;  dar  a.,  to  come 
up  to,  to  reach. 

Alcorndque,  M.,  cork-tree. 


Spanish-English   Vocabulary. 


441 


Alcuza,  F.,  cruet,  oil-jar. 
Alegrarse,   to  rejoice,  to  be  glad 

(de,  at,  of). 
Alegria,  F.,  joy,  delight;  /que  a.! 

how  glad  I  am  ! 
Aleman,  a,  German. 
Alfiler,    M.,  pin;    (two  and   three 

penny)  nail,  (four  and  six  cent) 

nail. 
Alguno,  a,  some,  any;   PL.,  some, 

a  few. 

Alhaja,  F.,  jewel. 
Alicantino,  a,  of  Alicante. 
Almenara,  F.,  beacon. 
Almud,  M.,  measure. 
Alqufla,  F.,  sign  (which  indicates 

that  a  hack  is  not  engaged) . 
Alrededor,    adv.,   around;    a.   de, 

prep.,  around;  los  a  —  es,  M.  PL., 

the  environs,  outskirts. 
Alto,  a,  high,  tall. 
Alia,  thither,  there  (motion). 
Alii,  there  (rest). 
Ama,  F.,  lady  or  mistress  of  a  house 

(with  respect  of  the  servants) ; 

nurse,  §  81. 

Amabilidad,  F.,  kindness. 
Amapola,  F.,  poppy. 
Amar,  to  love. 
Amar  a,  from  amar. 
Ambigii,  M.,  rotunda. 
Ambiguo,  a,  ambiguous. 
Amiga,  F.,  friend  (lady). 
Amigo,  M.,  friend. 
Amistad,  F.,  friendship. 
Amo,  M.,  the  gentleman  or  master 

of  a  house. 
Amor,  M.,  love. 
Amoroso,  a,  pertaining  to  love,  on 

account  of  love. 
Ampararse,  to  seek  shelter. 


Amplio,  a,  full,  ample. 
Andalucia,   F.,  Andalusia   (south- 
ern Spain). 

Andaluz,  a,  Andalusian. 
Andar,  to  go,  to  walk  (indefinite) ; 

el  a.,  the  going,  walking,  §  528. 
Anden,  M.,  platform,   inside  of  a 

railway  station. 
Angel,  M.,  angel;   a.  de  la  gloria, 

an  angel  in  paradise. 
Angustia,  F.,  anguish,  suffering. 
Anima,  F.,  (disembodied)  soul,  §  81 . 
Anoche,  last  night. 
Ansiedad,  F.,  anxiety;  con  tanta  a., 

so  anxiously. 

Antecesor,  M.,  predecessor. 
Antes,  adv.,  before,  formerly;  a.  de, 

prep.,  before;  a.  que,  conj.,  before 

(with  subj.). 

Antigiiedad,  F.,  antiquity. 
Antiguo,  a,  old,  ancient. 
Anicos,  M.  PL.,  fragments;  hecko  a., 

broken  into  fragments. 
Ano,  M.,  year. 
Aparecer,  to  appear,  to  present  one's 

self,  §  374- 

Aprisionar,  to  bind,  to  hold  captive. 
Aprovechar,  tq  take  advantage  of, 

to  avail  one's  self  of. 
Aproximarse,  to  approach,  to  draw 

near. 

Aquel,  la,  lo,  that,  that  one,  yonder. 
Aqui,  here. 

Ar agones,  a,  Aragonese. 
Arbol,  M.,  tree. 
Arboleda,  F.,  row   of  trees ;   trees 

(coll.). 

Arder,  to  burn. 
Ardid,  M.,  cunning. 
Ardiendo,  aglow,  burning. 
Argiiir,  to  argue,  §  526. 


442 


Spanish- English  Vocabulary. 


Argiiyo  —  argilir. 

Arma,  F.,  arm,  weapon;   branch  of 

military  service,  §  81. 
Armado,  a,  armed. 
Armazon,  M.,  frame,  skeleton  (with- 
out the  cover). 

Arte,  M.  and  F.,  art,  §§  81,  94,  £. 
Arreglar,  to  arrange,  to  "  fix,"  to 

put  in  order. 

Arrepentido,  a,  repentant. 
Arrestar,  to  arrest. 
Arriba,  up,  above,  up-stairs. 
Arrojar,  to  throw,  to  throw  away 

or  down. 

Arruinado,  a,  in  ruins. 
Asegnrar,  to  assure,  to  assert;  se 

asegura,  it  is  asserted. 
Asiento,  M.,  seat,  chair. 
Aspecto,  M.,  appearance. 
Astnriano,  a,  Asturian. 
Asustar,  to  frighten,  to  scare;   to 

be  dreadful. 

Atajo,  M.,  short-cut  (of  roads). 
Ataqne,  M.,  attack. 
Atand,  M.,  casket,  coffin. 
Aterrar,  to  terrify,  to  frighten ;  reg. 

aterro,  aterras,  etc. 
Atolladero,  M.,  bog,  slough,  mire; 

scrape,  difficulty.  * 
Atrapar,  to  catch, 
Atreverse,   to   dare,    to   presume, 

foil,  by  d. 
Atrevido,   a,  bold;   es  a.,  it   is  a 

piece  of  effrontery. 
Anditorio,  M.,  audience. 
Aula,   F.,  public  hall;    university; 

court. 

Ann,  even. 
Ann,  yet,  still. 
Annqne,  although. 
Anreo,  a,  golden. 


Anto,  M.,  judicial  indictment;  order 
for  commitment ;  trial. 

Antor,  M.,  author. 

Avanzar,  to  advance,  to  come  for- 
ward. 

Ave  Maria  Pnrisima  !  bless  me  ! 

Avergonzado,  a,  abashed,  ashamed. 

Averigna  —  averiguar. 

Averignar,  to  find  out. 

Averigiie  —  averiguar. 

Averigno  —  averiguar. 

Aviar,  to  arrange,  to  put  in  order, 
to  prepare. 

Avie  —  aviar. 

Aviso,  M.,  notice;  dar  a.,  to  notify, 
to  give  an  alarm. 

Ayer,  yesterday. 

Ayudar,  to  aid,  to  help. 

Azogado,  a,  (a  man  or  woman 
whose  nervous  system  has  been 
destroyed  by  work  in  a  quick- 
silver mine);  temblar  como  una., 
to  tremble  like  a  leaf. 

Azote,  M.,  scourge,  terror. 

Azotea,  F.,  flat  roof  of  southern 
houses,  the  terrace. 

Azncena,  F.,  white  lily. 

Azul,  blue. 

B. 

Bacia,  F.,  barber's  basin. 
Bailarm,  a,  dancer,  ballet  girl. 
Baile,  M.,  dance;  ball. 
Bajar,  to  go  down,  to  come  down 

(d  with  infinitive) . 
Bajo,  a,  low,  short. 
Baladi,  of  no  value. 
Balido,  M.,  bleating  of  sheep. 
Bandido,  M.,  robber,  marauder. 
Bano,  M.,  bath. 
Baraja,  F.,  pack  of  cards. 


Spanish- English  Vocabulary. 


443 


Barba,  F.,  chin. 

Bar6metro,  M.,  barometer. 

Baron,  M.,  baron. 

Barro,  M.,  clay,  mud;   lleno  de  b., 

muddy. 

Bata,  F.,  morning-gown. 
Batalla,  F.,  battle,  engagement. 
Baul,  M.,  trunk,  box. 
Bautismo,  M.,  baptism. 
Bebe  —  beber. 
Beber,  to  drink. 
Bello,  a,  fair,  beautiful. 
Besar,   to  kiss;    besarle   d  uno  la 

mano,  to  salute  any  one. 
Bien,  adv.,  well,  very. 
Bien,  M.,  good,  blessing;  PL.,  goods, 

property. 

Bilbamo,  a,  of  Bilbao. 
Bledo,  M.,  a  blade  of  corn;  me  im- 

porta  un  b.,  I  don't  care  a  straw. 
Boca,  F.,  mouth,  lips. 
Boda,  F.,  marriage,  wedding. 
Bolsillo,  M.,  pocket. 
Bondad,    F.,   goodness,    kindness; 

tener  la  b.  de,  to  be  so  good  as  to, 
Bonito,  a,  pretty. 
Borcegui,  M.,  buskin. 
Bota,  F.,  wine-bag. 
Bribon,  M.,  rascal. 
Brillante,  brilliant,  magnificent. 
Bruscamente,  suddenly. 
Bueno,  a,  good,  well. 
Bulto,    M.,   bundle,    package,    lay- 
figure. 

Burla,  F.,  mockery,  jest. 
Burra,  F.,  she-ass. 
Busca,  F!,  search,  guest. 
Buscar,    to   look    for,    to   seek,  to 

search;  ir  d  b.,  to  go  after  or  for; 

enviar  d  b.,  to  send  for. 
Busto,  M.,  bust. 


C. 

Caballeria,  F.,  cavalry. 
Caballero,  M.,  gentleman ;  (in  direct 

address)  sir. 
Caballerosamente,  adv.,   politely, 

like  a  well  bred  gentleman. 
Cabellera,  F.,  head  of  hair. 
Cabellos,  M.  PL.,  the  hair  of  the 

head. 

Cachorro,  M.,  whelp,  cub. 
Cada,  each,  every. 
Cadena,  F.,  chain ;  c.  de  hierro,  iron 

chain. 

Cae  —  caer. 
Caer,  to  fall,  §  544. 
Caerse,  to  fall  down;   se  le  cae  el 

panuelo,  her  handkerchief  falls, 

she  has  let  her  handkerchief  fall. 
Cai  —  caer. 
Caida,  F.,  fall. 
Caigo  —  caer. 
Caldo,  M.,  broth. 

Calla  !  hush  !  be  still !  hold !  stop  ! 
Callar,  to  keep  silent. 
Calle,  F.,  street. 
Calleja,  F.,  lane. 
Cambiante,    M.,     changer;     c.   de 

monedas,  money  changer. 
Camlno,  M.,  road,  way;  ponerse  en 

<:.,  to  set  out,  to  go. 
Campanario,    M.,    church    tower, 

belfry,  spire. 
Campanula,   p.,  door-bell,  service 

bell. 

Camparia,  p.,  campaign. 
Campma,   F.,   country    (around   a 

city  or  village). 
Campo,  M.,  field;   esos  campos,  the 

open  fields. 

Capturar,  to  take  captive,  to  catch. 
Caramba,  zounds ! 


444 


Spanish-English  Vocabulary. 


Caridad,  F.,  charity,  love. 

Carlos,  Charles. 

Cartagines,  a,  Carthaginian. 

Casa,  F.,  house. 

Casar,  to  marry  any  one  (to,  con). 

Casarse,  to  marry,  to  get  married. 

Casi,  almost. 

Caso,  M.,  case;  hacer  c.de,  to  take 

notice,  to  pay  attention  (de,  to). 
Castellano,  a,  Castilian. 
Catalan,  a,  Catalonian. 
Catarata,  F.,  cataract,  deluge. 
Caudal,  M.,  capital. 
Caudaldso,  a,  swift-flowing  (of  a 

river)  ;  of  abundant  means. 
Causa,  F.,  cause;   d  c.  de,  on  ac- 
count of. 

Caza,  F.,  shooting;  game. 
Ceder,  to  give  way,  to  yield. 
Celebre,  celebrated,  famous. 
Cena,  F.,  supper. 
Cenir,  to  gird  on. 
Cepillito,  M.,  little  brush  (dim.  of 

cepillo). 
Cerca,  adv.,  near;  c.  de,  prep.,  near, 

close  to,  by. 
Cerrar,  to  shut,  to  shut  up;  to  lock 

(with  a  key). 
Cesar,  to  cease,  to  stop;  la  lluvia 

ha  cesado,  it  has  stopped  raining. 
Cielo,  M.,  sky,  heaven. 
Cien  —  ciento. 

Ciencia,  F.,  science,  knowledge. 
Ciento,  one  hundred  (before  noun 

cien). 
Cierto,  a,  sure,  certain;  a  certain; 

d  c  —  a   distancia,    at   a   certain 

distance,  some  distance  off;  por 

c  —  o,  surely,  indeed. 
Cierra  —  cerrar. 
Cincuenta,  fifty. 


Cita,    F.,    summons,    engagement, 

citation. 

Ciudad,  F.,  town,  city. 
Ciudadano,  M.,  citizen. 
Civil,  civil. 
Claramente,  clearly. 
Claro,    a,   clear,    light;    es    <:.,    of 

course. 
Clase,  F.,    class;   de  primer  a  c.,  a 

first-class  one. 
Coche,  M.,  carriage,  car;  en  c.,  by 

carriage. 

Codicia,  F.,  greed,  covetousness. 
Coima,  F.,  hag. 
Colar,  to  strain ;  to  slip  through,  to 

slip  in,  §  476. 
Coleccion,  F.,  collection. 
Colocar,  to  set,  to  place ;  c.  bien,  to 

adjust  properly. 
Colocarse,  to  place  one's  self,  to 

take  one's  place,  §  371. 
Color,  M.,  color. 
Corned  —  comer. 
Comedia,  F.,  a  play. 
Comenzar,  to  begin,  foil,  by  d  with 

an  infinitive,  §  469. 
Comer,  to  eat,  to  dine. 
Comiamos  —  comer. 
Comida,  F.,  dinner,  meal. 
Comienza  —  cotnenzar. 
Como,  as,  since,  like. 
C6mo,  how?  how! 
Compania,  F.,  company ;  hacer le  d 

uno  c.,  to  keep  one  company. 
Complete,  a,  complete,  full. 
C6mplice,  M.,  accomplice. 
Componer,to  repair,  to  mend,  §  553. 
Comprender,  to  understand. 
Con,  with. 
Conde,  M.,  earl. 
Condesa,  F.,  countess. 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


445 


Conducta,  F.,  behavior. 

Confesar,  to  confess,  to  acknowl- 
edge, §  461. 

Confiado,  a,  trusting,  relying. 

Confuso,  a,  confused,  confounded. 

Conmlgo,  with  me  \niecum\. 

Conmovido,  a,  pitiful. 

Conocer,  to  be  acquainted  with,  to 
become  acquainted  with,  to  know, 
to  make  one's  acquaintance,  §  374. 

Conozco  —  conocer. 

Conque  or  con  que,  so  then. 

Conquense,  of  Cuenca. 

Conseguldo,  a,  succeeded  in;  se 
ha  c.,  they  have  s.  in  (w.  inf.). 

Conseguir,  to  attain,  to  succeed  in, 
§516. 

Consejo,  M.,  counsel,  advice. 

Consentir,  to  consent,  §  499. 

Conservar,  to  preserve. 

Consiente  —  consentir. 

Consiga  —  conseguir. 

Consigo  —  conseguir. 

Consigo,  with  him  (her,  them,  you) 
\_secuni\ . 

Consistir,  to  consist  (en,  of). 

Consolar,  to  comfort,  §  476. 

Consonante,  F.,  consonant. 

Construir,  to  construct;  to  dig  (a 
trench);  se  construyen,  are  con- 
structed, §  522. 

Constriiyen  —  construir. 

Consuela  —  consolar. 

Contento,  a,  satisfied,  pleased. 

Contigo,  with  thee,  with  you 
\_tecum~\ . 

Contimia  —  continuar. 

Continuacion,  F.,  continuation, 
continued,  of  a  story. 

Continuar,  to  continue,  to  go  on. 

Continue,  a,  continuous. 


Contraido,  a,  contracted,  drawn 
up,  distorted. 

Contrariedad,  F.,  disappointment, 
unfortunate  circumstance. 

Contrario,  a,  contrary;  al  c.,  on 
the  contrary. 

Converter,  to  convert,  to  transform, 
§502. 

Convirti6 —  converter. 

Copiar  (copio,  as,  a),  to  copy. 

Corazon,  M.,  heart,  valor;  detodo  c., 
with  all  one's  heart;  (with  verb 
sentir)  deeply. 

Cordobes,  a,  Cordovese,  of  Cordova. 

Cordon,  M.,  cord ;  c.  de  la  campani- 
lla,  bell-pull. 

Coro,  M.,  choir. 

Corona,  F.,  crown. 

Corpulento,  a,  immense,  of  a  large 
trunk  (as  a  cork-tree). 

Corredor,  M.,  runner,  agent. 

Correr,  to  run,  to  be  quick. 

Corriendo  —  correr. 

Corro,  M.,  group,  knot. 

C6rtes,  F.  PL.,  the  Spanish  Parlia- 
ment. 

Cortina,  F.,  curtain. 

Cosa,  F.,  thing;  no  es  c.  de,  there  is 
no  question  of. 

Cosita,  F.,  little  thing,  trifle. 

Costar,  to  cost,  §  473. 

Costumbre,  F.,  custom,  habit. 

Cree  —  creer. 

Creer,  to  believe,  to  think,  to  sup- 
pose; to  be  assured,  to  rest  as- 
sured, §  549,  b. 

Crei  —  creer. 

Creia  —  creer. 

Creido,  a,  believed. 

Creimos  —  creer. 

Creyera —  creer. 


446 


Spanish-English  Vocabulary. 


Criada,  F.,  maid,  servant. 

Criado,  M.,  servant. 

Crimen,  M.,  crime. 

Criminal,  adj.,  criminal;  hombrec., 

criminal. 
Cristal,  M.,  window-pane,  pane  of 

glass. 

Cruel,  cruel. 
Cual,  which?  what? 
Cualquiera,  any  one,  any. 
Cuando,  when,  since;  de  c.t  since 

the  time  when. 
Cuando,  when? 
Cuantioso,  a,  large,  copious. 
Cuanto,  a,  as  much,  as  many. 
Cuanto,  a,  how  much?  how  many? 
Cuarenta,  forty. 
Cuasi  or  casi,  almost. 
Cuatro,  four. 

Cubierto,  a,  covered  (det  with) . 
Cubo,  M.,  pail. 
Cuchillo,  M.,  (table)  knife. 
Cuela  —  colar. 
Cuero,  M.,  leather. 
Cuestion,  F.,  question,  matter. 
Cuidado,  M.,  care. 
Cuidadoso,  a,  careful. 
Cuita,  F.,  woe. 
Cuota,  F.,  share,  scot. 
Curiosidad,  F.,  curiosity. 
Curioso,  a,  inquisitive;  neat. 
Custodiar,  to  guard,  to  accompany, 

as  a  guard. 

CH. 

Chico,  a,  little ;  a  little  boy  or  girl. 
Chisme,  M.,  implement,  tool,  thing. 
Chorro,  M.,  stream  of  water. 
Chucho,  M.,  kind  of  owl. 
Chulo,   M.,  boy  of  the  ring,  bull- 
fighter. 


Chusma,  F.,  crowd,  rabble. 

D. 

Dano,  M.,  injury,  harm. 

Dar,  to  give ;   to  hit,  to  strike ;   to 

take,  §  543. 
Dardo,  M.,  dart. 
De"  —  dar. 
Debajo  de,  under,  beneath;  por  d. 

de,  (along)  under. 
Deber,toowe;  to  be  to;  ought,  must. 
Decidido,  a,  decided,  resolved  (d, 

to). 
Decir,  to  say,  to  tell ;  to  mean ;  digo 

que,  I  mean  that;  es  d.,  that  is  to 

sav>  §  539- 

Dedo,  M.,  finger,  toe. 
Defensa,  F.,  defense. 
Definir,  to  define,  to  explain;  vamos 

d  d.,  let  us  explain. 
Degollado,  a,  beheaded;   ser  d.,  to 

be  beheaded,  to  have  one's  throat 

cut  \_gola\. 
Dejar,  to  leave;  d.  de,  to  leave  off, 

to  cease. 

Deleite,  M.,  joy,  pleasure. 
Delicioso,  a,  delightful. 
Delirio,  M.,  delirium;  con  d.,  wildly, 

madly,  passionately. 
Demonic,  heavens ! 
Dentro  de,  within;  por  d.,  on  the 

inside. 
Derecha,  F.,  right  (hand) ;  d  la  d., 

to  the  right,  on  the  right. 
Desagiie,  M.,  drainage. 
Desahucio,  M.,  ejectment. 
Desaparecer,  to  disappear. 
Desbordamiento,  overflowing,  in- 
undation. 
Descanso,  M.,  rest;  sin  d.t  without 

cessation,  incessantly. 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


447 


Descargar,  to  fall  with  fury  (sobre, 
upon),  §  371. 

Descolgar,  to  take  down  (anything 
suspended),  §  483. 

Desconocido,  a,  unknown ;  a 
stranger. 

Description,  F.,  description. 

Descuelga  —  descolgar. 

Desde,  from,  since ;  d.  —  hasta  or  d, 
from  —  to ;  d.  alii,  from  there ; 
d.  aqui,  from  here,  hence. 

Desdicha,  F.,  misfortune. 

Desear  (deseo,  as,  a),  to  desire,  to 
wish. 

Desempenar,  to  discharge;  to  act, 
to  play. 

Desengano,  M.,  disillusion,  disen- 
chantment; proporcionarle  d  uno 
un  d.,  to  undeceive  one. 

Desesperacion,  F.,  despair,  des- 
peration; amorosa  d.,  desperation 
on  account  of  love. 

Desesperado,  a,  in  despair. 

Desesperar,  to  put  in  despair,  dis- 
courage. 

Desgraciado,  a,  unfortunate,  la- 
mentable. 

Desliz,  M.,  delinquency,  slip. 

Despedir,  to  dismiss,  §  512. 

Despejado,  a,  clear,  free  from 
clouds  or  obstacles.  ^ 

Despide  —  despedir. 

Despojar,  to  despoil,  to  strip,  to  rob. 

Despues,  afterward,  subsequently; 
despues  de,  prep.,  after;  despues 
que,  conj.,  after. 

Destacamento,  M.,  detachment. 

Destreza,  F.,  dexterity,  cunning, 
shrewdness. 

Destrozar,  to  break  up ;  to  carry 
away,  §  371. 


Detendra  —  detener. 

Detener,  to  detain,  §  536. 

Detenerse,  to  stop,  §  536. 

Detras,  behind;  d.  de,  behind,  be- 
yond. 

Deudo,  M.,  relative. 

Di  —  decir  and  dar. 

Dia,  M.,  day. 

Dibujar,  to  sketch,  to  draw. 

Dibujo,  M.,  drawing,  sketching. 

Diccionario,  M.,  dictionary. 

Dice  —  decir. 

Dicen  —  decir. 

Dicho,  a,  said,  told  {decir). 

Dichoso,  a,  happy,  fortunate, 
blessed. 

Dificil,  difficult;  not  likely. 

Diga  —  decir. 

Digo  —  decir. 

Dijiste  —  decir. 

Diliivio,  M.,  flood,  deluge. 

Dinero,  M.,  money. 

Dios,  God ;  D.  mio,  dear  me ! 

Diria  —  decir. 

Dirigirse,  to  direct  one's  self,  to 
proceed  (^,  toward),  §  375. 

Discurso,  M.,  speech ;  d.  de  siempre, 
old  story. 

Disfrutar,  to  enjoy. 

Disimulo,M., simulation;  cond.,s\y\y. 

Dispensar,  to  excuse;  V.  dispense, 
pardon,  beg  pardon. 

Disponible,  to  dispose  of,  to  spare. 

Distancia,  F.,  distance ;  d  cierta  d., 
at  a  certain  distance  off. 

Distinguido,  a,  distinguished,  high 
born  (distingue,  guee) . 

Distinguir,  to  descry;  se  distingue, 
is  visible,  §  376. 

Distraction,  F.,  something  to  oc- 
cupy one's  mind. 


448 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


Diver  tir,  to  amuse,  §  502. 

Divierte  —  divertir. 

Doble,  double. 

Doce,  twelve ;  las  d.,  twelve  o'clock, 

noon,  midnight. 
Doliente,  grieving,  pitiful. 
Dolor,  M.,  pain,  grief. 
Doncella,  F.,  lady's  maid. 
Donde,  where ;  jddnde?  where  ? 
Droguerla,    herb-shop  ;    (Spanish 

America,  drug-store). 
Ducho,  a,  clever,  skilful. 
Duda,  F.,  doubt;  sin  d.,  doubtless, 

of  course;  no  hay  d.,  there  is  no 

doubt  of  it,  it  is  certain. 
Duelo,    M.,   pain;    mourning    [Fr. 

deuil~]. 
Dulziira,    F.,    sweetness;     con   d., 

affably. 
Durar,  to  last. 

E. 

Ebano,  M.,  ebony. 

Echar,  to  throw,  to  toss;  echar  d 
and  echarse  d,  to  begin  to  (foil, 
by  an  infinitive). 

Edad,  F.,  age,  number  of  years. 

Educacidn,  F.,  education ;  buena  e., 
good  manners,  courtesy. 

Educado,  a,  educated;  bien  e.,  well 
bred. 

Efecto,  M.,  effect;  en  e.,  indeed  you 
have;  in  fact. 

Ejecutarse,  to  be  effected,  executed. 

El  que,  he  who,  the  one  who. 

Elefante,  M.,  elephant. 

Elemento,  M.,  element. 

Embarcadero,  M.,  station,  landing. 

Embargo  —  sin  e.,  notwithstand- 
ing, still. 

Embudo,  M.,  funnel. 


Emocion,  F.,  emotion. 
Empenarse,  to  persist  (en,  in),  to 

insist  (en,  on). 
Empezar,  to  begin  (by,  con},  foil. 

by  d  with  an  infinitive,  §  469. 
Empiece  —  empezar. 
Enipiecen  —  empezar. 
Empiezo  —  empezar. 
Empireo,  a,  celestial. 
Emplear,    to   employ,   tcr   use,   to 

make  use  of;  se  emptea,  is  used. 
En,  in,  into,  at,  on. 
Encontrar,  to  meet  with,  to  find, 

to  come  upon  casually;  refl.,  to 

find  one's  self,  to  be. 
Enganchar,  to  harness  up,  to  put 

the  horses  to   the   carriage;   haz 

que  enganchen  en  segmda,  have 

the  carriage  made  ready  at  once. 
Engana  —  enganar. 
Enganar,  to  deceive. 
Engane  —  enganar. 
Engano,  M.,  deception. 
Enjuague,  M.,  finger-bowl. 
Enjuto,  a,  dry,  thin. 
Enmendar,  to  amend,  to  correct, 

§459- 

Enredo,  M.,  plot,  snarl. 
Ensenar,  to  teach;  to  show. 
Ensene  —  ensenar. 
Extender,  to  understand,  to  hear, 

§471- 

Entiendes  —  entender. 

Ent6nces,  then. 

Entrar,  to  go  in,  to  come  in,  to  enter. 

Entre,  between  (two),  among  (sev- 
eral) ;  entre  si,  together. 

Epistola,  F.,  letter,  epistle. 

Epoca,  F.,  period,  epoch. 

Equivocarse,  to  be  mistaken;  me 
he  equivocado,  I  made  a  mistake. 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


449 


Era  —  ser. 

Erguido,  a,  erect,  with  head  set 
back. 

Error,  M.,  error,  mistake. 

Es  —  ser. 

Escala,  F.,  steps,  ladder. 

Escalera,  F.,  staircase,  ladder. 

Escampar,  to  stop  raining. 

Escaparse,  to  get  away,  to  escape. 

Escape  —  d  escape,  quick;  irse  d  e., 
to  be  off. 

Escena,  F.,  scene;  stage. 

Escoces,  a,  Scotch,  Scotsman  (or 
woman) . 

Escopeta,  F.,  musket. 

Escribir,  to  write,  §  561. 

Escualido,  a,  squalid. 

Escuela,  F.,  school. 

Ese,  esa,  eso,  that  (where  you  are, 
which  you  have,  or  which  you 
say). 

Eslabon,  M.,  link  of  a  chain;  flint. 

Eso,  that  (thing)  ;  eso  es,  that's  it. 

Espacio,  M.,  space,  period;  por  e. 
de,  during,  for. 

Espantar,  to  scare,  to  terrify. 

Espanol,  a,  Spanish,  a  Spaniard. 

Especial,  peculiar,  extraordinary. 

Especialmente,  especially. 

Espectaculo,  M.,  sight,  view,  display. 

Esperanza,  F.,  hope,  encourage- 
ment. 

Esperar,  to  expect;  to  wait,  to  wait 
for,  to  await. 

Espiocha,  F.,  pickaxe. 

Esta  —  estar. 

E  stab  a  —  estar. 

Establecer,  to  establish,  to  con- 
struct (as  a  parallel),  §  374. 

Estacion,  F.,  station,  "  depot,"  (Fr. 
gare). 


Estado,  M.,  state,  condition. 

Estar,  to  be  (incidentally  or  tem- 
porarily) ;  to  be  in,  at  home,  §382. 

Estatua,  F.,  statue;  effigy. 

Estatura,  F.,  stature,  height. 

Este,  esta,  esto,  this. 

Est6ico,  stoic;  stoical. 

Estorbar,  to  disturb,  to  be  in  one's 
way. 

Estoy  —  estar. 

Estremeno.     See  Extremeno. 

Estr6pito,  M.,  loud  noise,  crash; 
con  e.t  with  a  crash,  noisily. 

Eterno,  a,  unceasing,  eternal. 

Euro  (6-u-ro),  M.,  Eurus. 

Europa^  F.,  Europe. 

Exacto,  a,  exact. 

Exagerar,  to  exaggerate ;  se  ex- 
agera,  they  exaggerate,  it  is  ex- 
aggerated. 

Excelente,  excellent,  first  rate. 

Exhortar,  to  exhort. 
i    Expedite,  a,  cleared,  put  in  running 
order  (of  trains) . 

Experimentado,  a,  experienced. 

Extrano,  a,  strange. 

Extremeno,  a,  of  Extremadura  or 
Estremadura. 

Exultar  (seldom),  for  exultarse, 
to  exult. 

F. 

Faccioso,  M.,  rebel  (Carlist). 
Fagina,  F.,  fascine  (long  fagot  for 

military  defense). 
Faltar,    to    lack,   to    be   wanting; 
falta  el  tiempo,  there  is  no  time 

(para,  to,  for). 

Falua,  F.,  marine  launch,  felucca. 
Familia,  F.,  family. 
Famoso,  a,  famous,  notorious. 


450 


Spanish-English  Vocabulary. 


Farsa,  F.,  farce. 

Fastidiarse   (fastidio,  as,  a),  to 

be  weary  (de,  of). 
Fastidio,  M.,  ennui. 
Fautor,  M.,  abettor. 
Fealdad,  F.,  ugliness,  plainness; 

monstruo  de  f.,  prodigiously  ugly 

looking. 

Febrero,  M.,  February. 
Feliz,  happy. 

Feo,  a,  ugly,  plain,  "  homely." 
Feria,  F.,  fair. 
Feudo,  M.,  fief. 
Figurarse,  to  fancy,  to  imagine,  to 

picture  to  one's  self. 
Fijamente,  without  fail. 
Fila,  F.,  row. 
Fin,  M.,  end;    al  fin,  at   last,   at 

length. 

Fingir,  to  pretend,  to  feign,  §  375. 
Fino,  a,  polite,  elegant. 
Flamenco,  a,  Fleming. 
Forma,  F.,  form ;   en  f.  de,  in  the 

form  of. 

Fortuna,  F.,  good  fortune. 
Fragua,  F.,  forge. 
Fraguar,  to  forge,  §  372. 
Fragile  —fraguar. 
Fraile,  M.,  friar. 
Frances,  a,  French,  Frenchman  or 

woman. 

Franco,  a,  frank. 
Franqueza,  F.,  frankness;    con  /, 

frankly,  openly. 
Frenesi,  M.,  frenzy;  con  /,  wildly, 

passionately. 
Frente,  F.,  forehead;  /  d,  in  front 

of,  before. 

Fresco,  a,  fresh,  cool;  recent. 
Fuego,  M.,  fire. 
Fuera  —  ser  and  ir. 


Fuera,  outside;  desde /,  from  with- 
out; por  f.,  outside,  from  the  out- 
side. 

Fuero,  M.,  privilege. 

Fuerte,  strong,  powerful;  fuertes 
golpes,  hard  blows. 

Fuerza,  F.,  strength;  por  f.  or  d  la 
f.,  by  force. 

Fuese  —  ser  and  ir. 

Fui  —  ser  and  ir. 

Funcion,  F.,  office;  PL.,  id. 

Funda,  F.,  cover  for  furniture,  etc. 
(Fr.  housse,  etui?) 

Furia,  F.,  fury;  con  f.,  furiously. 

FuriSso,  a,  furious,  in  a  fury. 

Furor,  fury;  con  f.,  furiously. 

Fusil,  M.,  gun. 

G. 

Gaditano,  a,  of  Cadiz. 

Galante,  polite,  courteous,  pleasing 
to  ladies. 

Galantea  — galantear. 

Galantear,  to  court  ladies'  society, 
to  play  the  beau. 

Galantee  —galantear. 

Galanteo  — galantear. 

Galeria,  F.,  gallery. 

Galgo,  M.,  grey-hound. 

Gallego,  a,  Galician. 

Ganga,  F.,  bargain. 

Gastar,  to  spend;  to  waste;  to 
wear  (a  garment). 

Gato,  M.,  cat. 

Gavion,  M.,  gabion  (a  cylindrical 
wicker  basket,  open  at  both  ends, 
used,  filled  with  earth,  for  de- 
fense) . 

General,  M.,  general. 

Gengibre,  M.,  ginger.  (Some  spell 
jengibre.) 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


451 


Genio,  M.,  disposition,  genius. 
Gente,  F.,  people ;  PL.,  id. ;  lasgentes 

del  pais,  the  people  of  the  local- 
ity; the  country  people. 
Gesto,  M.,  gesture,  movement. 
Giro,  M.,  whirl,  turn;  draft. 
Gitano,  M.,  gypsy. 
Gloria,  F.,  glory,  honor ;  dngel  de  la 

g.t  an  angel  in  paradise. 
Golpe,  M.,blow;  dar  ung.,  to  strike; 

fuertes  g — s,    hard   blows    (en, 

on). 

G6tico,  a,  Gothic. 
Gozo,  M.,  joy. 

Gracias,  F.  PL.,  thanks,  thank  you. 
Gran  — grande. 
Granadino,  a,  of  Granada. 
Grande,  great,  large  (before  a  noun 

sing.,  gran) . 
Gravemente,  seriously. 
Greda,  F.,  chalk. 
Grieta,  F.,  crevice. 
Grito,  M.,  cry,  shout ;  dar  un  g.t  to 

utter  a  cry. 

Grueso,  a,  thick,  heavy,  big. 
Grulla,  F.,  crane. 
Guapo,  a,  pretty. 
Guardarse,  to  put  away,  to  put  (in 

one's  pocket). 

Guardia,  F.,  guard;  M.,  guard. 
Guarida,  F.,  den,  lair. 
Guedeja,  F.,  lock  of  hair. 
Guerra,  F.,  war. 
Guia,  F.,  guide. 
Guidn,  M.,  hyphen. 
Guipuzcoano,   a,   a   Basque   from 

Guipdzcoa. 

Guisantes,  M.  PL.,  peas. 
Guitarra,  F.,  guitar. 
Gula,  F.,  gluttony. 
Gustarle  a  uno,  to  please  any  one, 


to  like,  p.  420;  me  gusta,  I  like; 
cuando  V.  guste,  when  you  like. 
Gusto,  M.,  taste,  pleasure. 

H. 

Haba,  F.,  bean. 

Habeis  —  haber. 

Haber,  to  have  (only  as  an  aux- 
iliary} ,§351. 

Habia,  there  was,  there  were,  §  354. 

Habia  —  haber. 

l&abl&dL  —  hablar. 

Hablado,  a,  spoken,  talked. 

Hablar,  to  speak,  to  talk  (d,  to; 
con,  with;  de,  of). 

Hace  —  hacer. 

Hace,  it  is;  ago;  h.  —  que,  it  is  — 
since;  h.  un  momenta,  a  moment 
ago;  h. poco,  a  short  time  ago,  a 
while  ago. 

Hacer,  to  make,  to  do,  to  cause,  to 
be;  hacer  pedazos,  to  break  in 
pieces ;  h.  caso,  to  take  notice,  to 
pay  attention,  §  530. 

Hacerse,  to  be  made,  to  become; 
to  pretend  to  be,  to  dissemble; 
se  hace  la  sorda,  pretends  not  to 
hear. 

Hacia,  toward,  in  the  direction  of. 

Hago  —  hacer. 

Halagiieno,  a,  flattering,  charming. 

Halla— hallar. 

Hallar,  to  find. 

Hallazgo,  M.,  discovery. 

Han  —  haber. 

Hara — hacer. 

Hasta,  until,  up  to,  to;  desde — hasta 
or  d,  from  —  to. 

Hay  —  haber,  §354. 

Haya—  haber,  §354. 

Haz  —  hacer. 


452 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


Haz,  F.,  bundle. 

He  —  haber,  §351. 

Hebreo,  a,  Hebrew. 

Hecho,  a,  made,  done,  caused,  had 

—  hacer. 
Heria  —  herir. 
Herido,  a,  wounded;   ser  //.,  to  be 

wounded. 

Herir,  to  wound,  §  500. 
Hermoso,  a,  beautiful,  fine. 
H6roe,  M.,  hero. 
Her6ico,  a,  heroic. 
Hice  —  hacer. 
Hidalgo,  M.,  gentleman. 
Hielo,  M.,  ice. 
Hierro,   M.,   iron;    camino   de   h.t 

railway;     PL.,    hierros,     fetters, 

handcuffs. 
Higo,  M.,  fig. 

Higo-chumbo,  M.,  prickly-pear. 
Hija,  F.,  daughter. 
Hijo,  M.,  son,  child;  descendant. 
Hilo,  M.,  thread,  linen. 
Historia,  F.,  history,  story. 
Hizo  —  hacer. 
Hollar,  to  trample,  §  475. 
Hombre,  M.,  man. 
Honra,  F.,  honor. 
Hora,  F.,  hour,  o'clock. 
Horadado,  a,  pierced. 
Horizante,  M.^  horizon. 
Horrorizar,  to  terrify,  §  371. 
Horroroso,  a,  horrible. 
Hospitalidad,  F.,  hospitality. 
Hoy,  to-day ;  at  the  present  day. 
Hubiese  —  haber. 
Hubo  —  haber,  §  354. 
Huello  —  hollar. 
Huida,  F.,  flight. 
Huir,  to  flee,  §  522. 
Huireis  —  huir. 


Hule,  M.,  oil-cloth. 
Humedo,  a,  damp,  wet. 
Humilde,  lowly,  humble. 
Humor,  M.,  spirits,  humor ;  de  malh., 

ill  naturedly,  in  ill  humor. 
Hurto,  M.,  theft. 
Huso,  M.,  spindle. 

I. 

Idea,  F.,  idea;  que  i.,  what  a  happy 

thought !  „ 

Ido,  a,  gone  —  ir  or  irse. 
Iglesia,  F.,  church. 
Igual,  like,  the  same  as,  foil,  by  d. 
Imbuido,  a,  permeated. 
Implacable,  inexorable. 
Importar,  to  be  important,  to  be  of 

consequence;  importa,  it  matters; 

no  i.,  never  mind. 
Imposible,  impossible,  it  cannot  be. 
Imprudencia,    F.,  indiscretion;    es 

una  i.,  it  is  imprudent. 
Inclinado,  a,  inclined,  bent  over. 
Inconveniencia,    F.,    impropriety; 

es  una  i.t  it  is  inexpedient. 
Increible,  incredible. 
Indicar,  to  point  out,  to  indicate, 

§37'- 

Indio,  a,  Indian. 

Indiscrete,  a,  indiscreet,  impru- 
dent. 

Indudable,  undoubted,  sure. 

Infame,  infamous. 

Infanteria,  F.,  infantry. 

Infeliz,  unfortunate;  poor  man. 

Infierno,  M.,  torture. 

Infinite,  exceedingly. 

Influjo,  M.,  influence. 

Ingeniero,  M.,  engineer ;  PL.,  corps 
of  engineers. 

Ingenio,  M.,  genius;  talent. 


Spanish-English  Vocabulary. 


453 


Ingles,  a,  English,  Englishman  or 

woman. 

Inicuo,  a,  heinous. 
Inmarcesible,  unfading. 
Inmediato,  a,  next. 
Inmenso,  a,  boundless. 
Inmortal,  immortal,  undying. 
Inquieto,  a,  uneasy,  anxious. 
Insomnio,  M.,  sleeplessness;  noches 

de  i.,  sleepless  nights. 
Insoportable,  intolerable. 
Instante,   instant,    moment;   aLj., 

immediately,  at  once. 
Instinto,  M.,  instinct. 
Inteligencia,  F.,  intelligence. 
Interesante,  interesting,  of  interest. 
Iniitil,  useless. 
Invitacion,  F.,  invitation. 
Ir,  to  go,  §  552;  ir  d,  to  be  going 

to  (with  infinitive) ;   ir  d  buscar, 

to  go  after,  for. 
Irse,  to  go  away,  to  go  off,  to  be 

going;  vdse,  exit  (in  plays). 
Irlandes,    a,    Irish,    Irishman    or 

woman. 

Ir6nico,  a,  sarcastic. 
Irregular,  irregular. 

J. 

Jaleo,  M.,  outcry,  uproar. 

Jamas,  never,  ever. 

Jaula,  F.,  cage. 

Jerezano,  a,  of  Jerez  or  Sherry. 

Jesus,  heavens ! 

J6ven,  young  man  or  woman, youth. 

Juan,  John. 

Juego,  M.,  play,  game. 

Juez,  M.,  judge. 

Juicio,  M.,  judgment. 

Julio,  M.,  July. 

Junio,  M.,  June. 


Junto,  a,  joined;  together;  pagar- 
las  todas  juntas,  to  pay  off  old 
scores,  to  make  a  final  settlement. 

Junto  a,  near. 

Jura,  F.,  oath  taking ;  act  of  admin- 
istering an  oath. 

Juzgar,  to  judge,  §  371. 

Juzgo  — juzgar. 

L. 

Labrador,  M.,  farmer. 

Lado,  M.,  side;  d  su  /.,  by  him,  by 

her. 

Lago,  M.,  lake. 
Lance,  M.,  occasion;  el  L  no  ha  sido 

para  menos,  the  o.  demanded  it. 
Largo,  a,  long. 
Lastima,  F.,   pity;   que  /.,  what  a 

pity! 

Leccion,  F.,  lesson. 
Leche,  F.,  milk. 
Lee  —  leer. 
Leer,  to  read,  §  549,  b. 
Legua,  F.,  league. 
Leido,  a,  read  —  leer. 
Lejos,  far,  far  off;  muy  /.,  a  good 

way  off. 

Leones,  a,  Leonese,  of  Leon. 
Leudo,  a,  leavened. 
Levantarse,  to  get  up,  to  rise. 
Levita,  F.,  frock-coat;  gente  de  /., 

middle  and  upper  classes;  gastar 

/.,  to  be  a  gentleman. 
Ley,  F.,  (PL.,  leyes},  law. 
Leyendo  —  leer. 
Libertad,  F.,  liberty;  tomarse  la  /., 

to  take  the  liberty  (de,  to). 
Librar,  to  deliver,  to  set  at  liberty. 
Libre,  free,  rid. 

Libro,  M.,  book;  l.demolde,  (print- 
ed) book  ;  /.  de  mano,  manuscript. 


454 


Spanish-English  Vocabulary. 


Liceo,  M.,  Lyceum. 
Licito,  a,  allowed,  lawful. 
Limpio,  a,  clean,  neat. 
Linea,  F.,  line. 
Lisonja,  F.,  flattery. 
Locura,  F.,  folly,  piece  of  folly. 
Lograr,  to  succeed  in. 
Longitud,  F.,  length. 
Luego,  then,  next;  presently. 
Lugar,  M.,  place,  stead. 

LI. 

Llama,  F.,  flame. 

Llamar,  to  call;  to  knock  (d,  at). 
Llamarse, to  be  called,  to  be  named; 

se  llama,  is  called;  jcdmose  llama 

V.  ?  what  is  your  name  ? 
Llanto,  M.,  weeping  \_planctui\. 
Llave,  F.,  key. 
Llegado,  a,  arrived  —  llegar. 
Llegar,  to  arrive,  to  come,  §  371. 
Lleno,  a,  full,  filled  (de,  with). 
Llevar,  to  carry,  to  take. 
Lloroso,  a,  tearful. 
Llover,  to  rain;  volver  d  //.,  to  rain 

again,  §418. 
Llueve  —  Hover. 
Liu  via,  F.,  rain;  grandes  lluvias, 

heavy  rains,  much  rainy  weather. 

M. 

Madrileno,  a,  Madrilenian,  of 
Madrid. 

Magnifico,  a,  magnificent. 

Mairena,  name  of  a  town  about 
sixteen  miles  from  Seville,  prop- 
erly, M.  del  Alcor. 

Maitines,  M.  PL.,  matins. 

Majuelo,  M.,  vine-patch  newly 
planted  or  set  out. 

Malagueno,  a,  of  Malaga. 


Maldad,  F.,  evil,  wickedness. 
Malo,  a,  bad,  evil;  poor;  ill  (before 

a  sing,  noun  masc.,  mal). 
Manchego,  a,  of  La  Mancha. 
Mandadero,  messenger,errand-boy. 
Mandar,  to  order;   to  cause,  have 

(anything  done). 
Manera,  F.,  manner,  way;  de  esta 

m.,  in  this  way. 
Mano,  F.,  hand;  besar  la  mano  d, 

to  salute  (a  person) . 
Manana,F.,morning;  M.,to-morrow. 
Maragato,  a,  a  man  or  woman  of 

Astorga. 

Marcar,  to  mark,  to  indicate,  §  371. 
Mar  char,  to  walk,  to  go. 
Marcharse,  to  go  away,  to  depart, 

to  go. 

Marchito,  a,  withered. 
Marea,  F.,  tide. 
Marque  —  mar  car. 
Marques,  M.,  marquis. 
Marquesa,  F.,  marchioness. 
Mas,  more,  longer;    no  —  m.9    no 

longer  ;     no  —  mds    que,    only, 

nothing  but. 

Matar,  to  kill;  to  wear  out. 
Matrimonio,   M.,   marriage;    man 

and  wife. 

Matritense,  of  Madrid. 
Maxime,  especially. 
Mayo,  M.,  May. 
Mediador,  M.,  mediator. 
Medio,  M.,  means;   de  que  m.,  in 

what  way? 
Medio,  a,  half. 
Mej or,  better;  serlam.que,  it  would 

be  better  if,  you  had  better. 
M6nos,  less;  lo  m.,  the  least  thing; 

at  least. 
Merced,  F.,  grace,  favor. 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


455 


Merecer,  to  deserve,  §  374. 

Mes,  M.,  month. 

Mesa,  F.,  table,  writing  desk,  desk 

(in  schools). 

Meterse,  to  get  (en,  into). 
Metro,  M.,  metre. 
Miedo,   M.,   fear;  tener  m.,  to  be 

afraid  (de,  to). 
Mientras,  while. 
Mil,  a  thousand. 
Milagro,  M.,  miracle,  wonder. 
Militar,  soldier,  military  officer. 
Millon,  M.,  million.  . 
Minuto,  M.,  minute. 
Mirada,  F.,  look,  glance. 
Mirar,  to  look,  to  see,  to  behold; 

m.  d,  to  look  at;  mire  V.,  see,  look. 
Mismo,  a,  same,  self;  lo  m.,  the 

same  (thing). 

Modales,  M.  PL.,  manners,  style. 
Modelo,  M.,  model,  beau-ideal. 
Modo,  M.,  way,  manner;  de  m.  que, 

so  that,  so. 
Memento,  M.,  moment;  al  m.y  this 

instant,  instantly;  en  estos  m  —  s, 

Sit  present. 
Moneda,  F.,  coin,  piece  of  money, 

small  change,  change. 
Monstruo,  M.,  monster;  m.  de  feal- 

dad,  prodigiously  ugly. 
Montera,  p.,  hunting-cap;  name  of 

a  central  street  in  Madrid,  leading 

from  the  Puerta  del  Sol  to  those 

of  Fuencarral  (pop.  Funcarral) 

and  Hortaleza. 
Morder,  to  bite,  §  490. 
Morir,  to  die,  §  509. 
Morirse,  to  die,  to  give  up. 
Moro,  M.,  Moor. 
Mortal,  mortal. 
Mortificar,  to  provoke,  §  371. 


Motin,  M.,  riot,  disturbance. 
Mozo,  M.,  boy,  waiter;  buen  m.,  fine 

looking. 

Muchacho,  a,  M.  F.,  boy,  girl. 
Mucho,  a,  much,  a  good  deal  of; 

PL.,  many,  a  good  many. 
Mucho,  adv.,  much,  greatly. 
Muerdo  —  morder. 
Muero  —  morir  or  morirse. 
Mujer,  F.,  woman,  wife. 
Murciano,  a,  of  Murcia. 
Murmullo,  M.,  murmur. 
Musa,  F.,  muse. 
Muy,  very. 

N. 

Nada,  nothing,  not  anything,  no ! 
Nadar,  to  swim. 
Nadie,  no  one,  not  anyone. 
Nado  —  d    nado,     swimming,    by 

water. 

Naranja,  F.,  orange. 
Narigon,  M.,  long-nosed. 
Nariz,  F.,  nose. 
Narracion,  F.,  story,  recital. 
Navarro,  a,  Navarrese. 
Necesidad,  F.,  need,  necessity. 
Necesitar,  to  need,  to  be  in  need  of 

(generally  foil,  by  de) . 
Negarse,  to  decline,  to  refuse  (foil. 

by  d  with  pron.  or  infin.),  §  371. 
Negro,  a,  black,  dark. 
Neutro,  M.,  neuter. 
Ni,  neither,  nor,  not ;  no  —  ni  —  ni, 

neither  —  nor,  not  —  either — or; 

not  even,  not  so  much  as. 
Nieta,  F.,  granddaughter. 
Nieto,  M.,  grandson. 
Nimio,  a,  excessive. 
Ningu.no,  a,  no,  not  any,  not  at  all; 

no  one,  not  anyone. 


456 


Spanish-English  Vocabulary. 


Nina,  F.,  child,  girl. 

Nino,  M.,  boy,  child. 

No,  not,  no. 

Noble,  noble,  high-born. 

Noche,  F.,  night;  de  n.,  by  night, 
at  night. 

Nombrar,  to  mention  by  name,  to 
speak  a  name;  sdlo  con  nom- 
brarle,  at  the  bare  mention  of  his 
name. 

Nombre,  M.,  name. 

Nosotros,  as,  we  (men),  we  (wom- 
en), us  (after  prep.). 

Notar,  to  observe. 

Noticia,  F.,  news,  item,  piece  of 
news;  PL.,  news. 

Nubarron,  M.,  great  cloud,  black 
cloud. 

Nuevo,  a,  new. 

Nulo,  a,  null,  void. 

Numeroso,  a,  numerous. 

Nunca,  never  (with  neg.  verb  if  it 
follows  verb). 


N. 


Nudo,  M.,  knot. 

O. 

Objeto,  M.,   object;   con  o.  de,  for 

the  purpose  of. 
Obligacion,  F.,  duty,  obligation ;  no 

tener  o.  de,  not  to  be  supposed  to. 
Obligado,    a,    compelled,     forced 

(4  to). 

Obra,  F.,  work;  estar  en  o.,  to  be 
in  repairs,  or  repairing. 

Ocupar,  to  occupy,  to  hold. 

Ocuparse,  to  employ  one's  self 
(en,  in,  about). 

Ocurrencia,  F.,  occurrence,  inci- 
dent, coincidence. 


Ocurrir,  to  happen,  to  be  the  mat- 
ter; tque  ocurre?  what  is  the 
matter  ? 

Ocho,  eight. 

Odidso,  a,  hateful. 

Odre,  M.,  wine-skin. 

Ofrecer,  to  offer,  §  374. 

Ofrezco  —  ofrecer. 

Old  —  oir. 

Oido,  a,  heard;  o.  decir,  heard  say 
—  oir. 

Oido,  M.,  hearing;  ear. 

Oiga  —  oir. 

Oigo  —  oir. 

Oir,  to  hear,  to  listen,  §  553. 

Olor,  M.,  odor,  smell. 

Olvidar,  to  forget;  refl.  with  de. 

Opaco,  a,  opaque,  dark. 

Optico,  M.,  optician. 

Orden,  F.,  order  (command);  M., 
order  (sequence). 

Orgiillo,  M.,  pride. 

Original,  M.,  extraordinary,  pecu- 
liar. 

Otro,  a,  other,  another,  other  one. 

Oye  —  oir. 

P. 

Paciencia,  F.,  patience. 

Pagar,  to  pay;  pagdrlas,  to  pay  for 
it,  to  "catch"  it;  pagarlas  todas 
juntas,  to  settle  for  old  scores, 

§§  37^  753- 

Pais,  M.,  country;  district,  region. 
Pala,  F.,  shovel. 
Palabra,  F.,  word  (in  discourse;  a 

single  word  is  voz,  F.) . 
Palenque,  M.,  wrestling  place,  arena. 
Palmada,    F.,    clap  of  the   hands. 

applause. 
Panzudo,  a,  corpulent. 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


457 


Panuelo,  M.,  handkerchief;  shawl 
(anything  put  over  the  head  or 
shoulders) . 

Papel,  M.,  paper;  newspaper;  part, 
character  (in  a  play);  hacer  un 
p.,  to  act  a  part,  to  cut  a  figure. 

Papelito,  M.,  little  paper;  pop., 
paper  segar. 

Para,  for;  to,  in  order  to,  so  as  to ; 
p.  que,  in  order  that,  that,  so  that 
(subj.). 

Paraguas,  M.,  SING,  and  PL.,  um- 
brella. 

Paralela,  F.,  parallel  (a  trench  with 
a  parapet  constructed  opposite 
the  enemy's  works). 

Parece,itappears,itseems — parecer. 

Parecer,  to  appear,  to  seem,  §  374. 

Parezco  — parecer. 

Parte,  F.,  part;  por  mi  p.,  on  my 
part,  in  me. 

Pasa,  F.,  raisin. 

Pasado,  a,  passed,  spent;  past,  late. 

Pasado,  M.,  past. 

Pasar,  to  pass,  to  spend,  to  expe- 
rience; to  pass  over;  to  pass  any- 
thing (J)or,  through). 

Pasatiempo,  M.,  pastime,  passing 
amusement. 

Pasion,  F.,  passion. 

Paso,  M.,  step;  dar  un  p.,  to  take  a 
step. 

Pedazo,  M.,  piece;  hacer  pedazos, 
to  break  in  pieces. 

Pedir,  to  ask,  to  ask  for,  §§  512,  753. 

Peine,  M.,  comb. 

Peligro,  M.,  danger. 

Penoso,  a,  painful,  severe. 

Pensar,  to  think,  to  reflect,  to  ima- 
gine ;  to  intend ;  /.  en,  to  think  of, 
§457- 


Pena,  F.,  cliff,  rock.     Proper  name, 

Fr.  de  la  Roche. 

Pedr,  worse;  lo peor,  the  worst. 
Perder,  to  lose;  to  ruin,  §  470. 
Perdido,  a,  lost,  ruined,  undone. 
Perdonar,  to  forgive. 
Perfectamente,  perfectly. 
Perfecto,  a,  perfect,  complete. 
Peri6dico,  M.,  newspaper. 
Permanecer,  to  remain,  §  374. 
Permiso,  M.,  permission;  pedir  d 

uno  p.  para,  to  ask  leave  to. 
Permitir,  to  allow,  to  permit  (que 

with  subj.,  to). 
Pero,  but;  why. 

Persona,  F.,  person;  appearance. 
Pertenecer,  to  belong,  §  374. 
Pertenezco  — pertenecer. 
Pescar,  to  fish,  to  fish  up,  to  catch 

fa  fish),  §371. 
Pesque"  — pescar. 
Pida  — pedir. 
Pide  — pedir. 
Pido  — pedir. 
Pie",  M.,  foot;  dp.,  on  foot. 
Piensa  — pensar. 
Pintor,  M.,  painter. 
Placer,  M.,  pleasure. 
Placer,  to  please ;  place,  it  pleases, 

§545- 

Plaza,  F.,  square,  market;  fortress. 
Plazca  — placer. 
Pluma,  F.,  pen. 
Pobre,  poor,  sorry,  wretched. 
Poco,  a,  small,  little;  PL.,  few;  imp.* 

a  little,  slightly. 
Podemos  — poder. 
Poder,    to    be     able,     can,    may, 

§  _532- 

Podido,  been  able  — poder. 
Podra,  will  be  able,  can  — poder. 


458 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


Poner,  to  put,  to  place,  to -lay;  to 
put  in ;  /.  la  mano,  to  lay  one's 
hand  (en,  on),  §  533. 

Ponerse,  to  become,  to  get;  /.  bien 
con,  to  get  on  good  terms  with; 
/.  bueno  or  ma  to,  to  be  well  or 
ill;  p.  en  caniino,  to  start  off,  to 
set  out,  to  go. 

Poquito,  very  little,  rather,  some- 
what. 

Por,  by,  for,  through,  along,  over. 

Pormenores,  M.  PL.,  particulars, 
details. 

Porque,  because,  for  (consequence). 

Porque  and  Por  qu6,  why? 

Posible,  possible. 

Posta,  F.,  post;  ir por  la  p.,  to  go 
by  express. 

Practicarse,    to    be    constructed, 

§37J- 
Precioso,    a,    precious,    valuable; 

magnificent,  superb. 
Precise  —  es  p.,  it  is  necessary. 
Preferir,  to  prefer,  §  500. 
Prefiero  — preferir. 
Prender  (pp.  preso),  to  arrest,  to 

seize,  to  take. 
Preparar,  to  prepare,  to  arrange; 

prepararlo  todo,  to  get  everything 

in  readiness. 
Presagio,  M.,  prophecy. 
Presencia,  F.,  presence. 
Presentar,  to  present. 
Preso,   a,  arrested,    taken — pren- 

der;  darse  p.,  to  surrender. 
Prestar,  to  lend. 

Primero,  a,  first ;  lop.,  the  first  thing. 
Principle,  M.,  beginning;  al  p.,  at 

first. 
Prisa,  F.,  haste;  tener  p.,  to  be  in  a 

hurry  (por  or  para,  to) . 


Prisionero,  M.,  prisoner. 
Procurar,  to  try,  to  seek  (de,  to). 
Profundidad,  F.,  depth. 
Prolongar,  tp  prolong,  to  lengthen 

out,  §  371. 

Pronto,  quick,  soon ;  mdsp.,  quicker. 
Propio,  a,  self,  own. 
Proporcionar,  to  bestow,  to  afford, 

to  give. 

Pr6ximamente,  approximately. 
Pr6ximo,  a,  near,  next. 
Proyecto,  M.,  plan,  purpose;  tener 

el  p.  de,\.o>  purpose. 
Prueba,  F.,  proof,  trial;  essay. 
Piiblico,  M.,  public. 
Pudrir,  to  decay,  §  510. 
Pueblo,  M.,  village;  town;  people. 
Puede,  may,  can,  is  able  — poder. 
Puedo,  no  p.,  I  cannot  — poder. 
Puerta,  F.,  door,  gate. 
Pues,  then,  well,  why;  /.  bien,  well. 
Puesto,  a — poner  and  ponerse. 
Puesto  que,  since. 
Punto,  M.,  point;  moment. 
Pureza,  F.,  purity,  virtue. 


Que,  who,  which,  whom;  that, 
since;  until;  let  (with  subj.). 

Qu6,  what?  what!  how! 

Quedar,  to  remain,  to  be  left;  q.  d., 
to  keep;  quedarse  con.,  to  keep. 

Quema,  F.,  burn,  scorching. 

Querella,  F.,  feud. 

Querer,  to  wish,  to  want,  to  like; 
will,  §  534- 

Querido,  a,  dear. 

Queso,  M.,  cheese. 

Quien,  who;  after  a  prep.,  whom. 

Quien,  who?  whom? 

Quiere  —  querer. 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


459 


Quiero  —  querer. 

Quieto,  a,  quiet,  still. 

Quimica,  F.,  chemistry. 

Quinientos,  as,  five  hundred. 

Quinta,  F.,  summer-house. 

Quise  —  querer. 

Quisiera  —  querer. 

Quiso  —  querer. 

Quizas,  or  quiza,  perhaps  (subj.). 

R. 

Rapto,  M.,  burst. 

Rareza,  F.,  eccentricity. 

Raro,  a,  odd,  curious,  strange. 

Rasgo,  M.,  dash,  stroke. 

Rato,  M.,  while. 

Ratito,  M.,  little  while,  moment. 

Randal,  M.,  torrent,  rapid. 

Raza,  F.,  race,  stock. 

Razdn,  F.,  reason;  tener  r.,  to  be 

right. 
Real,  M.,  a  rial  or  royal  (5  cts.  in 

Spain,  and  locts.  in  Cuba). 
Recibir,  to  receive. 
Recoger,  to  gather  up,  to  pick  up, 

§  375- 

Recoja  —  recoger. 
Recordar,  to  remember,  §  474. 
Recuerdo  —  recordar. 
Recuerdo,  M.,  recollection,  memory, 

thought;  su  r.,  the  thought  of  him. 
Recurso,    M.,    resource,    recourse, 

convenience. 
Red,  F.,  net. 

Refugiarse,  to  take  refuge  (en,  in) . 
Regir,  to  rule,  §  515. 
Registro,  M.,  record. 
Regular,  usual. 
Rei  —  reir. 
Reinado,  M.,  reign. 
Reino,  M.,  kingdom. 


Reir  and  reirse,  to  laugh  (de,  at), 
§  520. 

Reloj  (more  often  now,  rel6),  M., 
watch,  clock. 

Remedio,  M.,  remedy;  no  hay  mds 
r.  que,  the  only  way  is  to. 

Rendija,  F.,  opening,  rent,  crevice. 

Rendirse,  to  surrender,  §  513. 

Renunciar,  to  give  up,  to  abandon 
(foil,  by  <f). 

Renir,  to  quarrel,  to  fight,  §  518. 

Reparacion,  F.,  amends,  satisfac- 
tion. 

Representar,  to  appear  to  be  of 
(such  an  age). 

Resignacion,  F.,  patience. 

Resignarse,  to  be  resigned. 

Respetar,  to  respect. 

Resto,  M.,  the  remainder;  PL.,  re- 
mains. 

Retener,  to  hold,  to  keep,  §  536. 

Retirarse,  to  withdraw,  to  disappear. 

Retraso,  M.,  backwardness;  llegar 
con  r.  (of  a  train),  to  be  behind, 
to  be  late. 

Reunir,  to  gather. 

Revolver,  to  turn  upside  down,  to 
ransack,  §  491. 

Revuelto,  a  —  revolver. 

Rey,  M.,  king. 

Ricachon,  very  rich. 

Rico,  a,  rich. 

Rie  —  reir  or  reirse. 

Rige  —  regir. 

Rincon,  M.,  corner. 

Rinconcito,  M.,  little  corner,  nook, 

Rindo,  me  —  rendirse. 

Rina,  F.,  quarrel,  fight. 

Rio  —  reir  or  reirse. 

Rio,  M.,  river. 

Robo,  M.,  robbery,  theft. 


460 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


Rodflla,  F.,  knee;  de  r — s,  on  one's 
knees. 

Rogar,  to  request,  to  beg,  to  be- 
seech, §  483. 

Romantico,  a,  romantic,  full  of 
romance. 

Romper,  to  break;  refl.,  to  be  broken. 

Rota,  F.,  rout,  defeat. 

Roto,  a —  romper ,  §  571. 

Rueda,  F.,  wheel, 

Ruego  —  rogar. 

Ruego,  M.,  request. 

Ruido,  M.,  noise,  tumult. 

Ruidoso,  a,  boisterous,  noisy. 

S. 

Sabe,  knows;  se ,r.,is  known — saber. 
Saber,  to  know,  to  know  how,  to 

learn;  to  be  able,  can,  §  535. 
Sabras  —  saber. 
Sacar,  to  take  out;  to  take  down, 

§37'- 

Sacudid,  shake  ye  —  sacudir. 

Sacudir,  to  shake. 

Salir,  to  go  out,  to  come  out,  to  go 
away,  to  go,  to  start  to  leave ;  to 
get  out  of,  to  escape  from  (with 
de) ;  to  set  out  from,  to  leave,  to 
start  (foil,  by  de,  from),  §  554. 

Salvarse,  to  save  one's  self,  to  be 
saved. 

Santiguarse,  to  make  the  sign  of 
the  cross,  §  372. 

Santiguo  —  santiguarse. 

Santo,  a,  holy;  cielo  s.,  heavens  ! 

Santo,  a,  M.  and  F.,  saint. 

Sanudo,  a,  full  of  wrath. 

Satisfaction,  F.,  satisfaction,  atone- 
ment, amends. 

Satisfacer,  to  satisfy,  §  531. 


Satisfecho,  a,  satisfied,  contented, 
pleased  —  satisfacer. 

S6  —  saber. 

Sea  —  ser. 

Seguia  —  seguir. 

Seguida  —  en  s.,  at  once,  imme- 
diately. 

Seguir,  to  follow,  to  take  (advice)  ; 
to  go  on,  §  516. 

Segun,  according  to,  according  as, 
as. 

Seguro,  a,  sure;  de  s  —  o,  surely, 
certainly.  * 

Semejanza,  F.,  likeness,  similarity. 

Semi-doble,  half-double. 

Sencillo,  a,  simple,  plain,  single. 

Sentarse,  to  sit  down,  §  459. 

Sentir,  to  perceive  by  the  senses,  to 
feel,  to  hear  (as  steps)  ;  to  regret, 
to  be  sorry,  §  499. 

Sena,  F.,  sign,  address;  standard. 

Senor,  M.,  sir,  gentleman,  Mr. 

Senora,  F.,  madam,  Mrs.,  the  lady, 
mistress  (of  the  house). 

Sepan  —  saber. 

Ser,  to  be  (absolutely,  of  what  is 
permanent,  inherent),  §  385. 

S6r,  M.,  being;  soul,  individual. 

Servicio,  M.,  service. 

Servir,  to  serve;  s.  en,  to  be  of  (a 
branch  of  public  service),  §  513. 

Sevilla,  F.,  Seville  (pron.  sev'-U, 
and  not  se-vill,  because  from 
Hispalis,  and  Arab.  Isbilia,  so 
that  wile  is  not  separate  from  the 
stem) ;  tren  de  S.,  Seville  train. 

Sevillano,  a,  of  Seville. 

Sexo,  M.,  sex. 

Si,  if,  whether;  why. 

Si,  yes. 

Sido,  been — ser. 


Spanish-English   Vocabulary. 


461 


Siempre,  always,  ever;  para  s.,  for 
ever;  de  s.,  eternal;  continuing  to 
(verb). 

Sien,  F.,  temple,  forehead ;  las 
sienes,  the  temples. 

Sienta  —  sentarse  and  sentir. 

Si6ntese  V.,  sit  down  —  sentarse. 

Sienten  —  sentir  and  sentarse. 

Siento  — sentir  and  sentarse. 

Significar,  to  signify,  to  mean,  §371. 

Significative,  a,  significant. 

Sigue  —  seguir. 

Siguen  —  seguir. 

Sin,  without;  sin  que,  without  (that) . 

Sino,  but;  no  —  sino,  only. 

Siquiera,  even;  ni  s.,  not  even. 

Sirgo,  M.,  twisted  silk. 

Sirvi6  —  servir. 

Sitiado,  a,  besieged. 

Sitiador,  besieger. 

Sobre,  on,  upon,  above,  over;  s.todo, 
above  all. 

Sobrmo,  M.,  nephew. 

Socorro,  M.,  help. 

Sol,  M.,  sun. 

Soldado,  M.,  soldier. 

Soledad,  F.,  solitude,  lonely  situa- 
tion. 

Solo,  a,  single,  alone,  only. 

S61o,  adv.,  only. 

Sombrerero,  M.,  hatter. 

Sombrero,  M.,  hat. 

Sombrio,  a,  gloomy,  morose. 

Somos  —  ser. 

Son  —  ser. 

Sonrisa,  F.,  smile. 

Soplar,  to  blow. 

Sordo,  a,  deaf;  hacerse  la  sorda, 
to  pretend  not  to  hear. 

Sortija,  F.,  (jewelled)  ring. 

Sospechar,  to  suspect. 


Soy  —  ser. 

Su,  his,  her,  its,  one's,  your,  their. 

Subir,  to  go  up,  to  come  up;   to  go 

up  stairs,  up  the  steps;  to  come 

up  stairs,  up  the  steps. 
Suceder,  to  happen. 
Sucedido,  a,  happened. 
Suelo,  M.,  ground,  floor;  al  s.,  on 

the  floor,  down. 
Sueno,  M.,  dream. 
Sufrir,  to  endure. 
Supiese  —  saber. 

Suplicar,  to  beg,  to  request,  §  371. 
Susto,  M.,  fright,  scare. 
Suyo,  a,  his,  hers,  its,  yours. 

T. 

Tahur,  M.,  gambler. 

Tal,  such,  such  a. 

Tambien,  also,  too;  likewise. 

Tampoco,  and  —  not,  nor. 

Tan,  as,  so. 

Tanto,  a,  as  much  —  many,  so  much 
—  many;  por  /.,  therefore,  con- 
sequently. 

Tapicero,  M.,  upholsterer. 

Tarde,  F.,  afternoon. 

Tarde,  adv.,  late. 

Tasajo,  M.,  flitch  of  bacon. 

Taza,  F.,  cup  (coffee  or  tea) . 

Tejuelo,  M.,  lettering  on  the  back 
of  a  book. 

Tela,  F.,  cloth  (cotton  or  linen), 
material,  covering. 

Tema,  M.,  theme,  subject,  talk;  old 
story;  exercise. 

Temblar,  to  tremble,  §  463. 

Tembloroso,  a,  tremulously. 

Temer,  to  fear,  to  be  afraid. 

Temerario,  a,  rash,  fool-hardy. 

Tempestad,  F.,  storm,  violent  storm. 


462 


Spanish-English    Vocabulary. 


Tender,  to  stretch,  to  spread  (as  a 

net),  §471. 
Tendra  —  tener. 
Tendria  —  tener. 
Tener,  to  have;  to  take;   t.  que,  to 

have  to,  §  536. 
Tenga  —  tener~. 
Tenido  —  tener. 
Teniente,  M.,  lieutenant. 
Tentar,  to  try;  to  tempt,  §  459. 
Tenido,  a,  dyed  —  tenir,  §  518. 
Terreno,  M.,  ground. 
Terrible,  terrible. 
Tertiilia,  F.,  party,  company. 
Tia,  F.,  aunt. 
Tiempo,  M.,  time;  weather;  mds  t., 

longer. 
Tienda,  F.,  shop,"store";  en  la  t.  de, 

at  — 's;  d  la  t.  de,  to  — 's. 
Tienes  —  tener. 
Tientan  —  tentar. 
Tierra,  F.,  earth,  land,  soil. 
Tilin  —  hacerle  d  uno  /.,  to  make 

one  tingle. 

Timbre,  M.,  stamp  ;  hand-bell. 
Tinta,  F.,  ink. 
Tio,  M.,  uncle. 
Tira,  F.,  strip. 
Tirar,  to  pull  (de,  at). 
Todavia,   yet,    still;    t.    un,   una, 

another. 

Todo,  a,  all,  the  whole;  M.,  every- 
thing; todo  lo  que,  all  that. 
Toledano,  a,  of  Toledo. 
Tomar,  to  take,  to  take  up  (as  a 

book) ;  t.por,  to  take  anyone  for. 
Tomar  se  (la  liber  tad  </<?),  to  take 

(the  liberty  to) . 
Tonteria,  F.,  folly,  nonsense. 
Toreo,  M.,  bull-fighting. 
Tormenta,  F.,  tempest. 


Toro,  M.,  bull. 

Torre,  F.,  tower. 

Torrente,  M.,  torrent;  d  torrentes, 

in  torrents. 

Tortuoso,  a,  winding. 
Trabajador,  M.,  laborer. 
Trabajar,  to  work. 
Trabajo,  M.,work;  PL.,  operations; 

t  —  s  de  zapa,  undermining  oper- 
ations. 

Trae  —  traer. 
Traer,  to  bring,  to  carry ;  to  contain 

(of  a  newspaper),  §  537. 
Tragedia,  F.,  tragedy. 
Traido  —  traer. 
Traigo  —  traer. 
Trajesen  —  traer. 
Trajo  —  traer. 

Tranqu.Ho,  a,  quiet,  calm;  at  ease. 
Transitar,  to  go,  to  make  one's  way. 
Tratar,  to  try  (de,  to). 
Traves  —  d  t.  de,  through,  across. 
Trazado,  a,  traced,  carried  (sobre, 

along)  —  trazar. 
Trazar,  to  trace,  §  371. 
Treinta,  thirty. 
Tren,  M.,  train. 
Trinchera,  F.,  intrenchment. 
Triste,  sad. 
Triunfar,   to   triumph,  to  get  the 

better  (de,  over,  of). 
Tropelia,  F.,  outrage. 
Trueno,    M.,    a    clap   of    thunder, 

thunder;   PL.,  peals   of   thunder, 

thunder. 
Trujo  —  traer. 
Tubo,  M.,  lamp  chimney. 
Tudense,  of  Tuy  (learned). 
Tud6s,  a,  of  Tuy  (popular). 
Tunante,  M.,  rascal. 
Tuviera  —  tener. 


Spanish-English  Vocabulary. 


463 


Tuvo  —  tener. 
Tuyo,  a,  thine. 

U. 

Ultimo,  a,  last,  final. 
IJnico,   a,   only;    lo   w.,   the    only 

(thing) . 
Unido,  a,  united,  connected  (entre 

si,  together,  to  each  other). 
Unir,  to  join,  to  unite. 
Universal,  universal. 
Unos,  as,  some  (usually  omitted  in 

Eng.),  a  few. 
Uso,  M.,  use. 
Usted,  your  worship,  you. 

V. 

Va  —  ir  and  irse. 

Vacia  —  vaciar. 

Vaciar,  to  empty. 

Vaiven,  M.,  vibration,  oscillation; 

undulation.     [  Va  y  ven,  go  and 

come.] 

Valenciano,  a,  Valencian. 
Valido,   M.,    confidential   minister, 

king's  favorite. 
Valor,  M.,  courage. 
Valle,  M.,  valley. 
Vallisoletano,  a,  of  Valladolid. 
Vamos,   let   us   go,   let  us   come; 

come !   come  now !  vamos  d,  let 

us  — .     From  ir. 
Van  —  ir  or  irse. 

Vara,  F.,  cane,  stick;  yard  (meas.). 
Variar,  to  change,  to  vary,  to  alter; 

v.  de  parecer,   to    change    one's 

opinion. 

Vario  —  variar. 
Vardn,  M.,  man;  male. 
Vascuence,  Basque  language. 
Vase,  exit  —  irse. 


Vate,  M.,  bard,  poet. 

Vaya  —  ir,    indeed !    of    course  ! 

vaya  si  —  of  course  I  do,  I  will ! 
Ve  —  ir;  vete  —  irse. 
Ve  —  ver. 

Veces,  F.  PL.,  times ;  dos  v.,  twice. 
Ved  —  ver. 
Veinte,  twenty. 
Velliido,  a,  hairy,  shaggy. 
Vendra  —  venir. 
Venga  —  venir;   dile  que   v.t  tell 

him  to  come. 
Vengarse,  to  avenge  one's  self  (de, 

of,  on),  §371. 
Venir,  to  come,  §  541. 
Ventana,  F.,  window;  los  cristales 

de  la  v.,  window  panes. 
Veo  —  ver. 
Ver,  to  see;  vamos  d  v.,  let  us-see, 

§^48. 

Verse,  to  be  (substitute  of  estar) . 
Verano,  M.,  summer. 
Veras  —  de  v.,  truly  !  indeed ! 
Verdad,  F.,  truth;  en  v.,  truly;  en 

v.  que,  truly  I  — . 

Verdadero,  a,  true,  genuine,  down- 
right. 

Vete  —  irse. 
Vez,  F.,  a  time ;  otra  z/.,  again,  once . 

more;   de  una  z/.,  at  once,  once 

for  all. 

Via,  F.,  track  (of  a  railway). 
Viaje,  M.,  journey;  travelling. 
Viajero,  M.,  traveller,  passenger. 
Vicio,  M.,  vice;  bad  habit. 
Victoria,  F.,  victory ;  hurrah  ! 
Vida,  F.,  life. 
Vidriero,  M.,  glazier. 
Viejo,  a,  old. 
Viene  —  venir. 
Viento,  M.,  wind. 


464 


Spanish- English    Vocabulary. 


Vina,  F.,  vineyard. 

Violencia,  F.,  force,  violence. 

Violento,  a,  forcible,  violent. 

Virtiid,  F.,  virtue. 

Virtuoso,  a,  virtuous. 

Visita,  F.,  visit,  call. 

Visitar,  to  visit,  to  pay  a  visit  to. 

Visto,  a,  seen  —  ver. 

Viudo,  M.,  widower. 

Vive  —  vivir. 

Vivian  —  vivir. 

Viviente,  living. 

Vivir,  to  live. 

Vizcaino,  a,  Basque  (of  Biscay) . 

Volante,  flying;  zapa  v.,  defence 
made  of  baskets  filled  with  earth 
and  placed  close  together. 

Volver,  to  return,  to  come  back, 

§491- 
Volver  a,  again  (as  v.  d  hacer,  to 

do  again). 
Voto,  M.,  vow. 
Voy  —  ir  or  irse. 
Voz,    F.,   voice,  tone   of  voice ;    a 

word. 
Vuelo,M., flight  (of  a  bird) ;  soaring. 


Vuelta,  F.,  turn,  return;  v.altema, 

back  to  the  old  subject  again. 
Vuelva  —  volver. 
Vuelve  —  volver. 
Vuelvo  —  volver. 

Y. 

Y,  and  (before  initial  i  or  hi,  6). 
Ya,    now,    already ;  ya    no  —  mds, 

not  —  any    more,    no   more,    no 

longer ;  yes  !  of  course  ! 
Ya  que,  conj.,  since. 
Yedra,  F.,  ivy. 
Yema,  F.,  yolk. 
Yeso,  M.,  lime,  mortar. 
Yugo,  M.,  yoke. 

Z. 

Zanja,  p.,  trench,  ditch. 
Zapa,  P.,  sap,  trench,  undermining. 
Zapaddr,  M.,  sapper. 
Zaragozano,  a,  of  Saragossa. 
Zig-zag,  PL.,  zig-zags,  M.,  zig-zag. 
Zipizape,  M.,  scrape;  scuffle. 
Zozobra,  p.,  anxiety. 
Zunibar,  to  buzz,  to  hum. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH  VOCABULARY. 


Able  (to  be),  poder  — puedo,  es,  e. 
About    (concerning},    acerca   de; 

(nearly),  cosa  de;    poco  mas  6 

menos. 

Absolutely,  absolutamente. 
Academy,  Academia,  F. 
Accommodation-train,     el     tren 

mixto  (composed  of  1st,  2d,  and 

3d  class  carriages)  ;  tren-omnibus 

(from  French). 
Account  (narration),  relacion,  F.  ; 

to  give  an  a.  of,  hacer  la  r.  de ; 

on  a.  of,  a.  causa  de. 
Accustomed   (to  be),   soler    (with 

infin.) ;  estar  acostumbrado  a. 
Acknowledge  (to),  confesar. 
Acquaintance,  conocido,  a,  M.  and  F. 
Across,  a  traves  de ;  por ;  running 

a.  the  page,  a  renglon  seguido. 
Act  (to),  represents^. 
Action,  accion,  F.;  acto,  M. 
Active,  active,  a. 
Add  (to),  contribuir ;    does  not  a., 

no  contribute. 
Adorn  (to),  adornar. 
Advice,  consejo,  M.  (usually  PL.,  los 

consejos)  ;  by  the  a.,  de  consejo; 

(in  government)  de  acuerdo. 
Afternoon,  tarde,  F. ;  this  a.,  esta  t. ; 

in  the  a.,  por  la  t. 
Again,  otra  vez;  volver  a  (with  an 

infin.)  ;  as,  he  goes  out  a.,  vuelve 

a  salir,  p.  422. 


Against,  contra. 

Agnes,  Ines,  F. 

Agreeable,  agradable. 

Aid,  auxilio,  M.;  to  come  to  one's  a^ 

venir  or  acudir  en  su  auxilio. 
Air,  aire,  M.;  cielo,  M.;  (that which 

we  breathe)  el  aire  or  la  atmosfera. 
Alight  (to),  posar  (of  birds). 
Alike,  igual;  PL.,  iguales. 
All,  adj.,  todo,  a;    PL.,  todos,  as; 

(everything]  todo. 
Alliance,  alianza,  F. 
Allow  (to),  permitir. 
Almost,  casi. 
Alms,  limosna,  F. 
Already,  ya. 
Also,  tambien. 
Always,  siempre. 
America,  America,  F. 
American,  Americano  (if  Span.); 

Anglo- Americano    (if    from    the 

U.S.). 

American,  adj.,  americano,  a. 
Amiable,  amable. 
Among,    entre    (rest),    por   entre 

(motion) . 
Amusing,    divertido,    a;    entrete- 

nido,  a. 

Ancient,  antiguo,  a. 
And,  y ;  (before  i  or  hi)  e. 
Andalusia,  Andalucia,  F. 
Andalusian,  andaluz,  a. 
Anger,  colera,  F.,  ira,  F.  [no. 

Anglo-American,  Anglo-america- 


466 


English-Spanish  Vocabulary. 


Angry,  incomodado,  a,  (moderate}-, 
enfadado,  a. 

Another,  otro,  a;  a.  time,  otravez. 

Answer  (to),  responder;  .contestar 
a  (when  questioned). 

Any  (you  please),  cualquiera;  in 
a.  language,  en  cualquier  idioma, 
p.  437 ;  (otherwise,  any  is  usually 
left  untranslated);  a.  more,  ya  — 
no;  as,  /  don't  like  the  country  a. 
more,  ya  no  me  gusta  el  campo. 

Anybody  (with  neg.),  nadie;  (with- 
out neg.)  alguien. 

Apartment  (of  a  house),  cuarto,  M. ; 
(of  a  floor}  habitacion,  F. ;  (of  a 
palace}  salon,  M. 

Appear  (to),  in  the  sense  of  to  pre- 
sent one's  self,  aparecer. 

Appear  (to),  meaning  to  seem,  par- 
ecer;  it  appears,  parece. 

Approve  (to},  aprobar. 

April,  abril,  M. ;  April  2$th,  a 
veinte  y  cinco  de  A. 

Arab,  arabe,  M.  and  F. 

Aranjuez,  \aram  Jovis'},  a  royal 
seat,  about  two  hours  by  rail  from 
Madrid. 

Are,  son;  estan. 

Are  (there},  hay. 

Army,  ejercito,  M. 

Arrest  (to},  prender. 

Arrested,  preso,  a. 

Arrival,  llegada,  F. 

Arrive  (to),  llegar. 

Artist,  artista,  M. 

As  (according  as},seg\m,  conformed. 

As,  conj.,  como;  adv.,  tan;  as — as, 
tan  —  como. 

As-far-as,  hasta. 

As-many  —  as,  tantos,  as  —  como. 

As-much  —  as,  tanto,  a — como. 


Ask  (to},  as  a  question,  preguntar; 

as  a  request,  pedir,  p.  420;  to  ask 

for  a  thing,  pedir  alguna  cosa. 
At,  en,  a. 

Atmosphere,  atmosfera,  F.;  aire,  M. 
Attachment,  amor,  M.,  carifio,  M. 
Attempt,  atentado,  M. 
Attend  (to),  asistir,  foil,  by  a. 
Attendance,  asistencia,  F. 
Attended,  concurrido,  a;  very  well 

a.,  muy  concurrido,  a,  or  concu- 

rridisimo,  a. 
Attends  (he),  asiste  a. 
Aunt,  tia,  F. 
Author,  autor,  M. 
Avenge   one's  self  (to),   vengarse 

(,/de). 

B. 

Bad,  malo,  a  (mal). 

Badly,  mal. 

Balcony,  balcon,  M. 

Ball,  pelota,  F.;  (weapon)  bala,  F., 
(shot}  balazo,  M. ;  wounded  by  a  b., 
herido  -de  un  balazo. 

Banker,  banquero,  M. 

Basque,  subst.,  Vizcaino,  a. 

Basque,  adj.,  vascongado,  a. 

Bath,  bafio,  M. 

Bathing-season,  temporada  de 
banos  (la). 

Battalion,  batallon,  M. 

Be  (to),  ser  (absolute)  ;  estar  (acci- 
dental} ;  (of  weather}  hacer,  p. 
429. 

Beautiful,  hermoso,  a;  bello,  a. 

Because,  porque. 

Become (/^),hacerse;  ponerse,p.43i.  N 

Beef,  carne  de  vaca,  or  simply 
carne,  F. 


English-Spanish  Vocabulary. 


467 


Been,  sido;   estado;    (of  weather) 

hecho;  b.  able,  podido. 
Before    (time]    antes;     (presence} 

ante. 
Beg  (to),  meaning  to  request  ',rogar; 

meaning  to  solicit  alms,  pedir. 
Beggar,  mendigo  (seldom  used); 

pobre. 
"Begin  (to),  empezar  (to,  a);  echar 

a;   echarse  a;   ponerse  a. 
Behavior,   conducta,   F.,    compor- 

tamiento,  M. 
Believe  (to),  creer. 
Belong    (to),   pertenecer   (to,   a)  ; 

ser  (to,  de). 
Bench,  banco,  M. 
Benevolent,  caritativo,  a. 
Bernard,  Bernardo. 
Besides,  ademas. 
Best,  el  (la,  lo)  mejor. 
Better,  mejor;  PL.,  mejores. 
Beyond,   mas  alia   de    {farther)  ; 

{outside  or  besides}  fuera  de. 
Bilbao,  Bilbao,  a  large  town  on  the 

Bay  of  Biscay. 
Bird,  ave,  F.;  pajaro,  M.  (p.  is  less 

used  in  poetry  or  in  the  higher 

style  of  prose)  . 
Blame,  censura,  F. 
Blindly,  ciegamente. 
Block,  trozo,  M.,  trocito,  M. 
Blow,  golpe,  M. 
Blue,  azul, 
Boldly,    resueltamente    (bravely)  ; 


Book,  libro,  M. 

Boston,  Boston. 

Both,  ambos,  as  ;   los  (las)  dos. 

Box,  caja,  F. 

Boy,  muchacho,  M. 

Bracelet,  pulsera,  F. 


Branch,  ramo,  M.,  ramal,  M. 
Break  (to),  romper;  to  b.  in  pieces, 

hacer  pedazos,  or  afilcos. 
Break  out  (to),  estallar. 
Bright,  vivo,  a  ;   claro,  a. 
Brilliant,  brillante. 
Bring  (to),  traer;   brings,  trae ;  he 

brought,  trajo. 
Broad,  ancho,  a. 
Brother,  hermano,  M. 
Building,  edificio,  M. 
Busy,  ocupado,  a,  (at,  en). 
Busy  one's  self  (to),  ocuparse  (with 

or  at,  en). 
But,  pero,  mas;   (after  neg.  sent.), 

smo. 
Buy  (to),  comprar. 

C. 

Cadiz,  Cadiz ;   of  or  pertaining  to 

Cadiz,  gaditano,  a. 
Cadiz  (of),  Gaditano,  a. 
Call,  visita,  F. 

Call  (to),  llamar;  called,  llamado,  a. 
Call  one's  self  (to),  llamarse. 
Called   (to  be),  llamarse;    is  c.  or 

named,  se  llama;  are  c.  (they),  se 

llaman. 
Calmly,   con  calma;    tranquilo,  a, 

(adj.  for  adv.). 
Campaign,  campafia,  F. 
Can,  poder;  /  c.,  puedo;  I  cannot, 

no  puedo;  he  c.,  puede  ;  he  cannot, 

no  puede ;  you  c.,  V.  puede,  or  V. 

podra  (if  the  idea  is  future) . 
Cap,  gorra,  F. 
Capable,  capaz. 
Capacity,  capacidad,  F. 
Capital,    capital,    F.;     (of  Spain) 

corte,  F. 
Captain,  capitan,  M. 


468 


English- Spanish   Vocabulary. 


Capture,  toma,  F. 

Car  (railway),  coche,  M. ;  the  cars, 

el  tren,  SING. 
Care,  cuidado,  M. 
Care    (to),    meaning   inclination, 

querer  (quiero,  quieres,  etc.) ;  not 

to  c.,  no  querer. 
Carelessly,  descuidadamente ;  con 

ligereza. 

Carlist,  Carlista,  M.  and  F. 
Carriage,  coche,  M. 
Carry  (to),  llevar. 
Carry   off    (to),   llevar;    llevarse; 

llevar  fuera. 

Carthagena,  Cartagena,  F. 
Castile,  Castilla,  F.;  New  C.,  Cas- 

tilla  la  Nueva;  Old  C.,  Castilla  la 

Vieja. 
Castilian,  Castellano,  a,  M.  and  F.  ; 

adj.,  castellano,  a. 
Cat,  gato,  M.;  gata,  F. 
Catalonian,  Catalan,  a;  Catalan,  a. 
Catch  (to),  coger  (cojo, coges, etc.) ; 

capturar. 

Cavalier,  caballero,  M. 
Cease  {to),  dejar  (to,  de). 
Ceiling,  techo,  M. 
Celebrated,  celebre,  famoso,  a. 
Cent,  centavo,  M.  (Span.  Am.). 
Centre,  centre,  M. 
Century,  siglo,  M. 
Certain  —  a  c.,  cierto,  a  (ivithout 

un,  una) ;   in  a  c.  class,  en  cierta 

clase;    super  I.  certisimo,   a,   and 

ciertisimo,  a. 
Chair,  silla,  F. 
Change  (to),  variar  de  (direction, 

opinion}-,    mudar  de   (residence, 

clothes,  etc.). 
Chapter,  capitulo,  M. 
Character,  caracter,  M. 


Characteristics  of  (the),  el  caracter 

de. 

Charge  (care,  office),  encargo,  M. 
Charitable,  caritativo,  a. 
Charles,  Carlos. 
Cheerfully,  alegremente. 
Cherish  (to),  abrigar. 
Chieftain,    cabecilla    (of    Carlist 

bands),  M. 
Child  (young),  nifio;  (of  any  age), 

hijo,  M. 
Children  {young),  nifios ;   (of  any 

age),  hijos,  M. 
Chilian  (of  Chili),  Chileno,  a,  M. 

and  F.  ;   chileno,  a. 
Christianity,  cristianismo,  M. 
Church,  iglesia,  F. 
Circumstance,    circunstancia,    F., 
caso,  M. ;    under  the  c  —  s,  bajo 
las  circunstancias. 

Citizen  (civilly),  vecino,  M.;    (po- 
litically), ciudadano,  M. 
City,  ciudad,  F.  {common  name)', 
poblacion,  F.  (with  reference  to  its 
inhabitants)',   villa,  F.   (officially 
and  administratively) . 
Class,  clase,  F. ;  in  a  certain  c.,  en 

cierta  c. 

Clear,  claro,  a  ;  despejado,  a. 
Clear  up  (to),  aclarar. 
Clever,  habil. 
Close,  fin,  M.;   at  the  c.  of,  a.  fines 

de,  a  tiltimos  de  (in  dates). 
Clothes,  ropa,  F.  (coll.). 
Cloud,  nube,  F. 
Coast,  costa,  F. 
Cobbler,  zapatero  de  viejo,  M. 
Coetaneous,  coetaneo,  a. 
Coin,  moneda,  F. 

Cold,  frio,  M. ;    to  be  c.,  hacer  f. ; 
to  be  very  c.,  hacer  mucho  f. 


English-Spanish    Vocabulary. 


469 


Collection,  coleccion,  F. 
Color,  color,  M. 
Column,  columna,  F. 
Combatant,  combatiente,  M. 
Come   (to),   venir    (vengo,  vienes, 

etc.)  •   he  came,  vino. 
Come  back  (to),   volver  (vuelvo, 

vuelves,  etc.). 
Come  down  (to),  bajar. 
Come   forward  (to),  adelantarse; 

presentarse. 

Come  from  (to) ,  venir  de ;  salir  de. 
Come  in  (to),  entrar  ;   pasar. 
Come  near  (to),  acercarse. 
Come  out(V<?),salir(salgo,  sales,  etc.). 
Come  up  (to),  subir. 
Comfortable,  comodo,  a. 
Command,   mando,    M.    (authority 

over) . 
Commandment,   mandamiento,  M. 

(divine)  ;  mandate,  M.  (human). 
Commerce,  comercio,  M. 
Common,  comun  ;   ordinario,  a. 
Commonwealth,  repdblica,  F. 
Companion,  compafiero,  a,  M.  and  F. 
Concluded,  concluido,  a. 
Condition,  condition,  F. 
Conduct,    conducta,   F.,   comporta- 

miento,  M. 

Confidence,  confianza,  F. 
Congenial,  simpatico,  a. 
Connect  (to),  unir  (with,  a);  en- 

lazar  (with,  con). 
Conscience,  conciencia,  F. 
Conscript,  quinto,  M. 
Consent,  consentimiento,  M. ;   with 

the  c.  of,  con  c.  de. 
Consider    (to),    considerar    (con- 

sidero,  as,  a) ;    meditar. 


Considerable,  bastante. 

Consist  (to),  consistir  (of,  en);  con- 
star  (of,  de). 

Constantinople,  Constantinopla,  F. 

Constitutional,  constitutional. 

Construct  (to),  construir. 

Contented,  contento,  a;  satis- 
fecho,  a. 

Contrary,  contrario,  a;  opuesto,  a. 

Contribute  (to),  contribuir  (con- 
tribuyo,  yes,  ye)  ;  have  contributed 
(they),  han  contribuido. 

Convenient,  comodo,  a,  (comfort- 
able); conveniente  (expedient). 

Conversation,  conversation,  F. 

Cool,  fresco,  a. 

Cost  (to),  costar  (cuesto,  as). 

Costume,  traje,  M. 

Couched,  concebido,  a. 

Counsel,  consejo,  M. 

Count,  conde,  M. 

Countess,  condesa,  F. 

Country,  pais,M.  (general) ;  campo, 
M.  (not  city,  rus)  ;  patria,  F.  (na- 
tive country  or  province);  cam- 
pifia,  F.  (environs,  campagna). 

Couple,  par,  M. 

Courage,  valor,  M. 

Course,  rumbo,  M.;  of  c.,  sin  duda; 
naturalmente. 

Courteous,  cortes,  fino,  a. 

Cousin,  primo,  a,  M.  and  F. 

Cross,  cruz,  PL.,  cruces,  F. 

Cry  (to),  llorar  (to  weep)  ;  gritar 
(to  exclaim). 

Cuban,  Cubano,  a,  M.  and  F.  ;  cu« 
bano,  a;  de  Cuba. 

Curious,  raro,  a ;  extrafio,  a. 

Custom,  costumbre,  F. 


470 


English- Spanish  Vocabulary. 


D. 

Danger,  peligro,  M. 

Dark,  oscuro,  a. 

Day,  dia,  M. ;  every  d.,  todos  los 
dias. 

Deceive  (to),  engafiar. 

Decision,  decision,  F. 

Declaration,  declaration,  F.,  con- 
fesion,  F. 

Deep,  profundo,  a. 

Defect,  defecto,  M.;  falta,  F. 

Definite,  definitive,  a. 

Demand,  exigencia,  F. 

Deny  (to),  negar,  rehusar. 

Deserve  (to),  merecer  (merezco, 
mereces,  ce). 

Design,  proyecto,  M.;   prop6sito,  M. 

Develop  (to),  desarrollar ;  to  be 
d  —  d,  desarrollarse ;  may  be 
d —  d  more,  se  hayan  desarrolla- 
do  mas. 

Devout,  piadoso,  a;  pio,  a. 

Different,  distinto,  a ;   diferente. 

Difficult,  dificil. 

Diligence,  aplicacion,  F. 

Diligent,  aplicado,  a. 

Dine  (to),  comer. 

Dinner,  comida,  F. 

Direct  (/0),  dirigir  (dirijo,  diriges, 
-ge) ;  he  directed,  dirigio. 

Discern  (to),  discernlr  (discierno, 
-nes,  -ne). 

Discharge  (to),  desempefiar;  cum- 
plir  con  (as  an  obligation). 

Distinguish  (to),  distinguir  (dis- 
tingo,  gues,  gue). 

Distinguished,  distinguido,  a,  (be- 
fore the  noun). 

Disturb  (to),  alborotar  (of  tur- 
moil) ;  estorbar  (of  inconve- 
nience). 


Do  (to),  hacer  (hago,  haces);    of 

doing,  de  hacer. 
Doctor,   doctor,   M.  ;    medico,  M.  ; 

facultative,  M. 
Document,  documento,  M. 
Dog,  perro,  M. 
Dollar,  peso,  M.  (Spain  and  Amer.) ; 

duro,  M.  (Spain). 
Door,  puerta,  F. 
Dozen,  docena,  F. 
Draft,  borrador,  M. 
Dramatic,  dramatico,  a. 
Draughtsman,  perito,  M. ;  dibuja- 

dor,  M. 

Draw  (to),  tirar  (pull). 
Draw  up  (to),  extender  (a    docu- 
ment); redactar,  hacer  (of plans); 

drawn  up,  puesto  en  orden  (of 

soldiers) . 

Drawing-room,  sala,  F. 
Dress,  vestido,  M. ;   traje,  M. 
Drive,  paseo,  M. 
Dry,  seco,  a. 
Drum,  tambor,  M. 
Dull,  triste  ;   fastidioso,  a. 
Dulled,  entorpecido,  a ;   insensible 

(of  conscience). 
During,  durante. 
Duty,  deber,  m.  ;  obligation,  F. 

E. 

Eagle,  aguila,  F. 

Earl,  conde,  M. 

Early,  temprano ;   adj.,  antiguo,  a, 

(ancient) . 
Eastern,  oriental. 
Easy,  facil. 
Easy-chair,  sillon,  M. 
Eat  (to),  comer. 
Educated,    educado,    a;    the  edu- 

cated,TL.,\a.  gente  ilustrada  (coll.). 


English-Spanish    Vocabulary. 


471 


Emperor,  emperador,  M. 
Employ,   emplear;    employed,  em- 

pleado,  a. 

End,  fin,  m. ;   at  the  end,  al  fin. 
Enemy,  enemigo,  M. 
Engender  (to),  engendrar. 
Engine,  maquina,  F. ;   locomotora ; 

(Sp.  America)  locomotiva,  F. 
English,  ingles,  a. 
Englishman,  Ingles,  M. 
"Englishwoman,  Inglesa,  F. 
Engraved,  grabado,  a. 
Engraving,  grabado,  M. 
Enlightened,  ilustrado,  a. 
Entangling,  enredador,  a. 
Enter  (to),  entrar  (into,  en). 
Entertaining,  divertido,  a. 
Envelope,  sobre,  M. 
Err  (to),  errar  (yerro,  as,  a). 
Errand-boy,  mozo,  M.;  mandade- 

ro,  M. 
Escorial,  el  Escorial ;   (full  name  : 

San  Lorenzo  del  Escorial). 
Estate,  estado,  M.  (class) ;  heredad, 

F.  {property). 
Et  csetera,  et  cetera. 
Europe,  Europa,  F.  ;  western  E.,  la 

Europa  occidental ;  el  oeste  de  E. 
Europe  (of*) ,  European,  europeo,  a. 
Even,  aim ;  even  if,  aim  cuando 

(w.  subj.). 
Every,  cada. 

Everywhere,  por  todas  partes. 
Evidence,  prueba,  F. ;   indlcio,  M. 
Exceedingly,  sumamente. 
Except,  excepto ;   salvo. 
Excite  (to),  excitar,  mover. 
Excursion-ticket,    billete    de    re- 

creo  (i.e.,  de  ida  y  vuelta) . 
Excursion-train,  tren  de   recreo; 

"  excursion  "  is  viaje  de  r. 


Excuse  (to*),  dispensar. 
Exercise,  tema,  M. 
Expect  (to),  esperar. 
Experience,  experiencia,  F. 
Express-train,  el  tren  correo,  or 

el  correo  ;  el  tren  de  gran  veloci- 

dad  (of  express  freight). 
Extraordinary,  especial,  extraor- 

dinario,  a. 

Extreme,  extreme,  a. 
Eye,  ojo,  M. 

F. 

Fabric,  tejido,  M. 

Fair,  feria,  F. 

Fair  (of  weather),  bueno,  a. 

Faithful,  fiel. 

Faithfully,  fielmente;  con  fidelidad. 

Fall  (to),  caer  (caigo,  caes,  cae). 

Fall  down  (to*),  caerse. 

Famous,  celebre;  famoso,  a. 

Fancy  (to),  figurarse;  (to  think,  be- 
lieve) creer. 

Farewell,  adios ;  vaya  V.  con  Dios, 
or  simply  con  Dios. 

Farce,  farsa,  F. ;  to  act  a "/,  repre- 
sentar  una  farsa. 

Farmer,  labrador,  M.;  cultivador,  M. 

Fate,  suerte,  F.;  destine,  M. 

Father,  padre,  M. 

Favor,  favor,  M. 

Favorable,  favorable. 

Fear  (to*),  temer. 

Feign  one's  self  to  be  (to),  fingirse 
(me  finjo,  te  finges,  etc**). 

Fellow-man,  semejante,  M. 

Festival,  fiesta,  F. 

Few  (a),  algunos,  as;  unos  cuantos, 
as;  /.,  pocos,  as;  in  a  f.  years, 
dentro  de  algunos  anos;  f.  men, 
pocos  hombres. 


472 


English-Spanish    Vocabulary. 


Fewer,  menos;  no  tantos,  as. 
Field,  M.,  campo,  M. 
Fight,  rifia,   F.    {personal) ;    corn- 
bate,  M.,  pelea,  F.  {general}. 
Find  (to),  hallar  (what  was  lost) ; 

encontrar  (to  meet  with) . 
Fine,  hermoso, a;  fino,  a,  (quality'). 
Fire,  fuego,  M.  (element) ;  incendio, 

M.  (conflagration*). 
Fleece,  vellon,  M. 
Flight,  vuelo,  M.  (as  of  a  bird). 
Floor,  suelo,  M.;  on  the  f.,  al  suelo 

(motion) ;  en  el  suelo  (rest) . 
Flour,  harina,  F. 
Flower,  flor,  F. 
Foe,  enemigo,  M. 
Folio,  folio,  M.  (size);  foja  {foliated 

leaf),  F. 
Following,    adj.,    siguiente    (after 

noun) ;  f.  day,  el  dia  s. 
Folly,  imprudencia,  F. ;   locura,  F. 
For,    para    (destination)  ;    porque 

(reason). 
Force,  fuerza,  F. 
Foreign,  extranjero,  a. 
Forgive  {to),  perdonar. 
Form  {to),  formar,  constituir;   they 

f.,  constituyen. 
Fragment,  pedazo,  M.;   afiicos,  M. 

PL.;   to  break  in  f- — s,  hacer  p — s, 

a — s. 

Fray,  lucha,  F.;   combate,  M. 
Free,  libre ;  exento,  a  {from,  de) . 
Freely,  libremente. 
French,  frances,  a. 
Frenchman,  Frances,  M. 
Frenchwoman,  Francesa,  F. 
Friday,  viernes,  M. ;   on  F.,  el  v. ; 

Fridays,  los  viernes. 
Friend,  amigo,  M.;  amiga,  F. 
Friendly,  amistoso,  a  ;  amable. 


Friendship,  amistad,  F. 

Frock  coat,  levita,  F. 

From,  de  ;  {place,  time)  desde  ; 
f.  —  to,  desde  —  a  or  hasta. 

Front  room,  cuarto  exterior,  M.; 
habitacion  exterior,  F.,  or  cuarto 
que  da  a  la  calle. 

Frontier,  frontera,  F. 

Fruit,  fruto,  M.  {on  the  tree) ;  fruta, 
F.  {plucked). 

Fulfil  {to),  cumplir  ;  to  f.  {an  obli- 
gation), cumplir  con. 

Full,  lleno,  a  ;   repleto,  a,  (of,  de). 

Furnish  {to),  surtir  (to  provide) ; 
they  f.,  surten  —  {with,  de) . 

Further,  mas  ;  ademas  {besides) . 

0 

G. 

Gallant,  galante. 

Garden,  jardin,  M. ;  huerta,  F. 

Gate,  puerta,  F. 

Gay,  alegre. 

General,  general,  M.  adj.,  id. 

Generally,  ordinariamente. 

Gentle,  dulce,  suave  {of  persons) ; 

man  so,  a,  {of  animals). 
Gentleman,  caballero,  M.  ;  sefior,  M. 
German,   aleman,  a ;    Aleman,  a, 

M.  and  F. 
Get  up   {to),  levantarse  ;    without 

getting  tip,  sin  levantarse. 
Get  better,  ponerse  mejor  ;   to  be 

getting  b.,  ir  poniendosem. 
Get  well  (to),  ponerse  bueno,  a; 

to  g.  w.  again,  volverse  a  poner 

bueno,  a. 

Girl,  muchacha,  F.;   nifia,  F. 
Give    {to),    dar;     (as    a   present) 

regalar ;    to  give  an   account  of, 

hacer  la  relacion  de. 


English-Spanish   Vocabulary. 


473 


Give  off  (to),  echar. 

Give  up  (to),  abandonar ;  en- 
tregar. 

Glad  (to  be),  alegrarse ;  /  am  g., 
me  alegro  (that,  de  que);  are 
you  g.  ?  i  se  alegra  V.  ?  How  g.  I 
am  !  \  que  alegria  !  or  \  cuanto  me 
alegro ! 

Glance,  mirada,  F. 

Go  (to) ,  ir  (definite) ;  andar  (vague) ; 
to  be  going  to  (inf.),  ir  a;  /  am 
going,  voy;  I  am  going  to  (inf.), 
voy  a ;  one  goes,  se  va. 

Go  away  (to),  irse. 

Go  down  (to),  bajar  ;  to  go  d.  stairs, 
bajar  la  escalera. 

Go  in  (to),  entrar. 

Go  on  (to),  seguir  (sigo,  sigues). 

Go  out  (to),  salir  (to,  a);  to  go  o. 
again,  volver  a  salir  (salgo,  sales, 
sale). 

Go  up  (to),  subir;  to  go  up  stairs, 
s.  la  escalera. 

Go  and  return  (out  and  back), 
ida  y  vuelta,  F. 

God,  Dios,  M. 

Godoy(Manue!) ,  favorite  of  Charles 
IV.,  and  his  universal  minister  till 
the  1 8th  of  March,  1808. 

Gold,  oro,  M. 

Good,  bueno,  a,  (buen). 

Goods  (blessings),  bienes,  M.  PL.; 
(mdse.),  generos,  M.  PL. 

Goodness,  bondad,  F. 

Government,  gobierno,  M. 

Graceful,  gracioso,  a. 

Grammar,  gramatica,  F. 

Grand,  grande  (gran) ;  in  full  uni- 
form, de  gran  lujo;  de  gala. 

Gravity,  gravedad,  F.;   lo  grave. 

Great,  grande  (gran). 


Grow  (to),  crecer  (crezco,  creces, 

crece). 
Guarantee,  garantia,  F. 


Habit,  costumbre,  F.;  bad  h.,  mala 

c.,  or  vicio,  M. 
Half  (subst.),   mitad,  F. ;    one  h., 

la  m.;   one  h.  of  a  day,  la  m.  de 

un  dia. 
Half  (adj.),  medio,  a ;  h.  a,  medio, 

a ;   h.  a  day,  medio  dia ;   a  day 

and  a  h.,  un  dia  y  medio. 
Hand,  mano,  F. ;    on  the  other  h., 

por  otra  parte ;  por  otro  lado. 
Hand-laid,   hecho   a   mano;    h.-L 

paper,  papel  h.  a  m. 
Hang  (to),  colgar  (on,  de);  pender 

(to,  on,  de). 

Hang  up  (to),  colgar  (cuelgo,  as,  a) . 
Happen  (to),  suceder;   it  happens, 

sucede. 

Happy,  feliz ;  dichoso,  a. 
Harm,  dafio,  M. 
Harmonious,  armonioso,  a. 
Hat,  sombrero,  M. 
Have(/0),  haber  (only  as  an  auxil. 

—  he,  has,  ha)  ;  tener  (the  proper 

verb  —  tengo,  tienes,  tiene). 
Have  just  (to),  acabar  de  (inf.); 

he  has  just  gone  out,  acaba  de  salir0 
Have  to  (to),  tener  que  ;  I  h.  to  do 

it,  tengo  que  hacerlo. 
Head-dress,  toca,  F.  ;   peinado,  M. 
Hear  (to) ,  oir  (oigo,  oyes) ;   enten- 

der    (to    understand —  entiendo, 

des,  de);    (of  a  slight  noise)  sen- 

tir  (siento,  tes,  te). 
Help  (to),  ayudar  (ayudo,  as,  a). 
Help,  socorro  ;  to  cry  for  h.,  gritar 

als. 


474 


English-Spanish   Vocabulary. 


Here,  aqui. 
High,  alto,  a. 
Highlander,  Montafies,  a. 
Highway-robber,  salteador  de  ca- 

minos,  M. 

History,  historia,  F. 
Hit  on  (to),  dar  con. 
Home,  adv.,  a  casa  (motion} ;    en 

casa  (rest}. 

Honor,  honor,  M.;  honra,  F. 
Honor  (to),  honrar. 
Hoop,  aro,  M. 
Horse,  caballo,  M. 
Hot,  caluroso,  a,  (of  the  sun) ;  ca- 

liente  (of fire). 
Hot    (to  be},   hacer   calor   (of  the 

weather}  ;  it  is  hot,  hace  c. ;   it  is 

very  hot,   hace   mucho  c. ;    it  is 

hotter  than,  hace  mas  c.  que. 
Hotel,    hotel   (not   an    apartment 

house),M.;  fonda  (for  guests),  F. 
Hour,  hora,  F. 
House,  casa,  F. 
Household,  casa,  F. 
How  ?  £  como  ?  how  much  ?  many  ? 

<Jcuanto,  a?  £cuantos,  as? 
However,  sin  embargo. 
Humiliating,  humillante. 
Hundred  (one),  ciento  (cien). 
Hunger,  hambre,  F. ;  to  be  hungry, 

tener  h. 


Idle,  ocioso,  a,  (with  estar). 
If,  si. 

Ignorant,  ignorante  (with  ser). 
HI,  malo,  a;  enfermo,  a,  (with  estar). 
HI,  adv.,  mal. 
Illustrated,  ilustrado,  a. 
Impassible,  intransitable. 
Impatient,  impaciente;  to  become  i., 


impacientarse ;    out   of  patience, 

impacientado,  a. 
Impetus,   impetu,   M.;    impetuosi- 

dad,  F. 

Important,  importante. 
Important  (to  be),  importar;   con- 

venir;   is  i.,  importa;   conviene; 

is  very  i.,  importa  mucho;   con- 
viene mucho. 
Impossible,  imposible. 
In,  en ;  in  order  that,  para  que  (w. 

subj.);  in  order  to,  para  (w.  inf.). 
Incessantly,   sin  cesar,   continua- 

mente. 

Income,  renta,  F.,  or  rentas,  F.  PL. 
Indispensable,  indispensable. 
Individual,  individuo,  M. 
Infinitely,  infinite. 
Influential,  influyente. 
Ink,  tinta,  F. 
Inkstand,  tintero,  M. 
Innocent,  inocente. 
Inside,  interior. 
Interest,  interes,M. ;  great  *'.,  mucho 

interes;   to  the  i.  of  the  play,  al 

interes  que  inspira  la  comedia. 
Intimate,  intimo,  a. 
Into,  en. 

Introduction,  introduccion,  F. 
Inundation,   desbordamiento,   M. ; 

avenida,  F. 

Invention,  invencion,  F. 
Invite  (to),  convidar. 
Iron,  hierro,  M. 
Iron-clad,  blindado,  a ;  i.-c.  frigate, 

fragata  blindada. 

J. 

Jane,  Juana,  F. 

Jest  (to),  chancear  (chanceo,  ceas, 
cia). 


English-Spanish   Vocabulary. 


475 


Jewel,  joya,  F.;  alhaja,  F. 
Jewelry,  joyeria,  F.;  alhajas,  F.  PL. 
John,  Juan,  M. 
Journey,   viaje,  M.;  good  /.,   feliz 

viaje. 

Joy,  alegria,  F. ;  gozo,  M. 
Judge,  juez,  M.  (PL.,  jueces). 
Judgment,  juicio,  M. 
Julia,  Julia  and  Juliana,  F. 
Jump  up  (to),  saltar. 
Just,  justo,  a;  to  have  j.,  acabar  de. 

K. 

Keep  (to),  guardar;  quedarse  con. 

Kind,  bueno,  a;  bondadoso,  a,  (to, 
para) . 

Kind,  clase,  F. ;  especie,  F.;  what  k. 
of  weather?  <?que  tal  tiempo? 

King,  rey,  M.;  k.  and  queen,  los 
reyes,  PL.  (the  sovereigns) . 

Kite,  cometa,  F. 

Knife,  cuchillo,  M.  (table  k.} ;  cu- 
chilla,  F.  (in  machinery}  ;  corta- 
plumas,  M.  SING,  and  PL.  (pocket 
k.)',  navaja,  F.  (clasp  k.,  and  com- 
mon name  for  jack-k.  among  the 
lower  classes). 

Know  (to),  saber  (of  things,  se, 
sabes,  sabe) ;  conocer  (of  persons 
and  of  things,  to  k.  thoroughly, 
conozco,  conoces,  ce). 

Know  how  (to),  saber  (w.  inf.). 

Known,  conocido,  a,  (persons) ; 
sabido,  a,  (things'). 

L. 

Laborer,  trabajador,  M.  ;  obrero,  M. 
Lady,  sefiora,  F.;  dama,  F. 
Lamb,   cordero,  M.;    corderito,    a, 
M.  and  F. 


Land,  tierra,  F.;  terreno,  M.  (tract) ; 

heredades,  F.  PL. 
Lane,  callejuela,  F. 
Language,  lengua,  F.;  idioma,  M.; 

la  lengua  castellana  :  el  castellano 

es  idioma  muy  facil. 
Large,  grande  (after  the  noun). 
Largest,  el  (la,  lo)  mas  grande ;  el 

(la)  mayor. 
Last,  tiltimo,  a;   postrero,  a,  (po- 

strer) ;   last  night,  anoche. 
Late,  tarde. 
Lateral,  lateral. 

Latin,  subs.,  Latin;  adj.,  latino,  a. 
Latter  (the),  este,  esta ;  estos,  estas. 
Law,  ley,  F. 

Lawrence  (St.),  San  Lorenzo. 
Lead  (to),  conducir,  llevar ;  to  I.  to, 

llevar,  conducir. 
Lead  (metal),  plomo,  M. 
Leaf,  hoja,  F.  (of  a  tree  or  a  book). 
Learn  (to),  aprender  (to,  a). 
Learned,  erudito,  a  ;  sabio,  a. 
Leave   (to),   dejar  (not  to   take) ; 

salir  (to  depart,  foil,  by  de) ;   to  I. 

by  the   train,  salir  con  el  tren  ; 

salir,  partir  (to  go) ;   when  do  you 

1.  ?  i  cuando  sale  V.?or£  parte  V.  ? 
Lecture,  conferencia,  F. 
Leg,  pie",  M.  (of  a  table). 
Lemon,  limon,  M. 
Lend  (to),   prestar   (with    dat.    of 

pers.). 

Less,  menos;   no  —  tanto,  a. 
Lesson,  leccion,  F. 
Let    (with    imperat.),    que     (with 

subj.),  with  3d  pers.  SING,  and  PL. 
Letter,  carta,  F. 
Lettuce,  lechuga,  F. 
Lewis,  Luis. 
Library,  biblioteca,  F. 


476 


English-  Spanish   Vocabulary. 


Life,  vida,  F. 

Light,  luz,  F. 

Lighten  (to),  alumbrar. 

Like,    igual;    parecido,    a,    (after 

noun);     like   that  which,    seme- 

jante  al  que  (a  la  que,  a  lo  que). 
Like  (to),  querer  (to  esteem — quie- 

ro,  es,  e) ;  gustarle  a  uno,  p.  420; 

agradarle  a  uno  ;    /  /.,  me  gusta ; 

/  do   not  /.,    no   me  gusta;   the 

countess  does  not  like,  a  la  condesa 

no  le  gusta  ;   I  should  /.,  quisiera; 

would  you  1.?  i  quisiera  V.? 
Limit,  limite,  M. 
Line,  linea,  F.;  pauta,  F.;  renglon, 

M.  (of  a  book  or  Ms.) ;   linea  (of 

a  railway,  etc.). 
Lisbon,  Lisboa,  F. 
Listen  to  (to),  escuchar  (without 

prep.). 

Literature,  literatura,  F. 
Little,  poco  ;  a  I.  (of),  un  poco  de. 
Live  (to),  vivir ;   to  live  in,  vivir  en, 

or  habitar  (without,  and  by  some 

with,  en). 

Living  (alive),  vivo,  a. 
Local,  local. 
London,  L6ndres. 
Long,  largo,  z.,(superl.  larguisimo,  a). 
Look,  mirada,  F. 
Look  (to),  mirar. 
Look  for  (to),  buscar. 
Look  out  (to),  asomarse  (of,  a). 
Lord,  sefior,  M. 

Lose  (to),  perder  (pierdo,  es,  e). 
Lost,  perdido,  a. 
Louisa,  Luisa,  F.  (loo-ee-c,a). 
Lovely,  amable  (moral),  hermoso, 

a,  {physical). 
Low,  bajo,  a. 
Luxury,  lujo,  M. 


M. 

Machine,  maquina,  F. 

Madam,  sefiora,  F.  (direct address)  ; 

la  sefiora  (3d  pers.). 
Made  (p.  part.),  hecho,  a. 
Made  (to  be),  ser  hecho,  a. 
Madrid  (of — ),  Madrilefio,  a;  ma- 

drilefio,  a. 

Magnificent,  magnifico,  a. 
Mail- train,  tren-correo,  M.,  or  sim- 
ply el  correo. 
Make  (to),  hacer  (hago, haces,  ce)  ; 

he  made,  hizo. 
Malaga,  Malaga,  F. 
Man,  hombre,  M. 
Manners,  modales,  M.  PL. 
Manuel,  Manuel ;  familiar,  Mano- 

lito. 
Manufacturer,  fabricante,  M.;  PL. 

(general),  industrials,  fabricantes. 
Many,  muchos,  as. 
Marauder,  bandido,  M. 
March,  Marzo,  M.;   M.  Jth,  a  siete 

Marzo,  or  el  dia  siete  de  Marzo. 
Marchioness,  marquesa,  F. 
Marquis,  marques,  M. 
Marry  (to),  casarse;  torn,  any  one, 

casarse  con  alguien ;   to  m.  some 

one  to  another,  casar  a  fulano  con 

mengana. 
Mary,  Maria. 
Mass    (crowd),   masa,  F;    (sacra- 

menf)  Misa,  F. 
Master,  amo,    M.   (of  the  house); 

maestro,  M.  (teacher)  ;  maestro,  M. 

(one  who  excels) . 

Material,  adj.,  material  (after  noun). 
May — he  m.,  it  m.,  puede;  m.  be, 

puede  ser.     See  poder. 
May,  Mayo,  M. 


English-Spanish    Vocabulary. 


477 


Means,  medios,  M.  PL.;  to  find  m., 

encontrar  medios  (to,  para). 
Measure,    medida,    F. ;    providen- 

cia,  F. 

Meat,  came,  F. 
Mechanic,  artesano,  M. 
Meet  (to),  encontrar. 
Member,  individuo,  M. 
Memory,  memoria,  F. 
Mend  (to),   componer  (compongo, 

-pones,  -pone). 
Merchant,  comerciante,  M. 
Messenger  (of  news},  mensagero, 

M.  (errand-boy),  mandadero,  M. 
Mexican,  Mejicano,  a;  mejicano,  a. 
Midst  —  in  the  m.  of,  en  medio 

de. 

Mild,  suave,  blando,  a. 
Mill, milesimo  (imaginary  coin),  M. 
Minister,  mimstro,  M.  (political). 
Miscellaneous,  varios,  as,  PL.  (and 

after  the  noun). 
Misfortune,  desgracia,  F. 
Mistress  (of  the   house),  ama,  F.; 

sefiora,  F. 

Moderate  (to)  calmar;  templar. 
Modern,  moderno,  a. 
Moment,  momento,  M. 
Money,  dinero,  M. 
Month,  mes,  M. 
Moral,  moral. 

More,  mas;  no  m.,  ya  no  (verb). 
Morning,  mafiana,  F.;  them. paper, 

el  periodico  de  la  mafiana. 
Morocco  (of),  Marroqui. 
Mother,  madre,  F. 
Mother-country,  madre-patria.  F.; 

patria. 

Mountain,  sierra,  F. 
Move  (to),  mover  (muevo,  es,  e). 
Much,  mucho,  a. 


N. 

Nail,  clavo,  M.;  alfiler,  M. 
Name,    nombre,   M.    (Christian)-, 

apellido,  M.  (sirname). 
Named  (to  be),  llamarse;  his  name 

is,  se  llama ;   what  is  his  name? 

I  como  se  llama  ? 
Narration,  relacion,  F. 
Nation,  nacion,  F. 
National,  nacional. 
Navigation,  navegacion,  F. 
Near  (adv.),  cerca;  (prep.),  cerca 

de. 
Necessary,  necesario,  a ;    it  is  n., 

es  n.,  es  menester,  es  preciso  (the 

last  is  strongest ;  all  with  subj.  or 

an  inf.). 

Necklace,  collar,  M. 
Needle,  aguja,  F. 
Neighbor,  vecmo,  a,  M.  or  F. 
Neighborhood,  vecindad,  F. 
Never,  no  —  nunca,  or  nunca  before 

the  verb. 
New,  nuevo,  a. 

News,  noticia,  F.,  tf^noticias,  F.PL. 
Newspaper,  periodico, M. ;  diario,M. 
Night,  noche,  F. ;  to-n.,  esta  n. ; 

last  n.,  anoche. 
No  (adv.),  no;   (adj.),  ninguno,  a; 

no  —  alguno,  a,  (alguno,  in  this 

case  after  the  noun). 
Noble,  noble. 
Nobody,  nadie. 
Noise,  ruido,  M. 
Nor,  ni. 
North,  norte,  M. ;   on  the  n.,  en  el 

norte,  al  norte. 
North-west,  noroeste. 
Not,  no. 
Notable,  notable. 


478 


English- Spanish    Vocabulary. 


Notify    (to},    avisar  ;     dar    aviso 

(to,  a). 
Now,  ahora. 
Number,  ndmero,  M. ;  a  n.  of,  una 

porcion  de. 
Nurse,  nodriza,  F. 

O. 

Object,  motive,  M.  (cause,  end}; 
objeto,  M.  (visible}. 

Obligation,  obligacion,  F. ;  to  dis- 
charge one^s  o.,  cumplir  con  su 
obligacion. 

Obliged  (to  be},  agradecer  (agra- 
dezco,  agradeces,  ce  —  under  obli- 
gation} ;  the  stranger  was  o.  to . . ., 
al  desconocido  le  fue  forzoso  el ... 
(inf.). 

Occasion,  ocasion,  F. 

Occur  {to},  suceder ;  acaecer;  te- 
ner  lugar. 

O'clock,  hora,  F. ;  at  what  o"1  clock  ? 
I  a  que  hora  ? 

Octavo,  octavo,  M. ;  in  octavo,  en 
octavo. 

October,  Octubre,  M.;  Oct.  sjth,  a 
veinte  y  siete  de  Octubre,  or  el  dia 
veinte  y  siete  de  Octubre. 

Odd,  raro,  a ;  extrafio,  a ;  o.  (num- 
ber], hnpSr. 

Offence,  disgtrsto,  M.;  to  take  of- 
fence, incomodarse. 

Officer,  oficial,  M. 

Official,  oficial. 

Often,  amenudo ;  muchas  veces. 

Old,  viejo,  a;  antiguo,  a  ;  old  man, 
anciano,  M. 

Old  age,  vejez,  F. 

Old  people,  ancianos,  M.  PL. 

On,  en  ;  sobre ;   encima  de. 


Once,  una  vez  (one  time} ;  antes 
{formerly};  antiguamente  (of  old}. 

One,  with  a  verb,  is  expressed  by 
the  reflexive  se,  3d  SING.;  one 
goes,  se  va. 

One's,  su ;   PL.,  sus. 

Only,  adv.,  solo;  dnicamente;  adj., 
dnico,  a. 

Open  (to},  abrir;  p.p.  abierto. 

Opera-glasses,  gemelos,  M.  PL. 

Opinion,  parecer,  M.  ;  in  our  o., 
a  nuestro  parecer. 

Oporto,  Porto,  M. 

Opponent,  contrario,  M.  ;  contrin- 
cante. 

Optician,  optico,  M. 

Or,  6,  (before  o  or  ho}  u. 

Orange,  naranja,  F. 

Order,  orden,  F. ;   by  o.  of,  de  o.  de. 

Ornament,  adorno,  M. 

Others,  otros,  as. 

Our,  nuestro,  a. 

Out  and  back,  ida  y  vuelta. 

Out  of  patience,  impacientado,  a ; 
impaciente. 

Over,  por  {through} ;  por  {through- 
out} ;  over  all  Spain,  por  toda 
Espafla. 

Overcast,  encapotado,  a. 

Own,  propio,  a. 

Ox,  buey,  M.  (PL.  bueyes). 

P. 

Page,  pagina,  F. 
Pageant,  fausto,  M. 
Painting,  cuadro,  M.;  pintura,  F. 
Palace,  palacio,  M. 
Paper,  papel ;    periodico,  M.  ;    the 
morning  p.,  el  per.  de  la  mafiana. 
Parable,  parabola,  F. 


English-Spanish  Vocabulary. 


479 


Paradise,  paraiso,  M. 

Pardon   (to),    perdonar ;    pardon, 

brother,  perdone,  hermano. 
Parent,  padre,  M.;  PL.,  padres,  M. 
Parish-priest,  cura-parroco,  M. 
Part,  parte,  F. ;    on  the  p.  of,  de 

parte  de. 

Partridge,  perdiz,  F. 
Party,  partido,  M. 
Pass  (to*},  pasar. 
Passive,  pasivo,  a. 
Passport,  pasaporte,  M. 
Patent,  patente,  F. 
Patience,  paciencia,  F. 
Paul,  Pablo. 
Peace,  paz,  F. 
Pear,  pera,  F. 
Pen,  pluma,  F. 
Penalty,  pena,  F. 
Pencil,  lapiz,  M.  ;  lapicero,  M. 
Pensioned,  jubilado,  a. 
People,  gente,  F.;   pueblo,  M. 
Permanent,  permanente. 
Permit  (to),  permitir. 
Persist  (to*),  empenarse  (in,  en). 
Person,  persona,  F. 
Perspire,  transpirar;  sudar. 
Peter,  Pedro. 
Philadelphia,  Filadelfia. 
Phoenician,  Femcio,  a;  femcio,  a. 
Physician,  medico,  M. 
Pick    up    (to),     recoger    (recqjo, 

-coges,  -coge). 
Picture,  cuadro,  M. ;    lamina   (in 

books),  F. 

Picturesque,  pintoresco,  a. 
Piece,  pedazo,  M. ;   piece  of  news, 

noticia,  F. 

Place,  lugar,  M.  ;  sitio,  M. 
Place  (to),   poner  (pongo,  pones, 

pone) ;   colocar. 


Plan,  piano,  M.  (of  a  place) ;  modelo, 

M.  (model). 

Play  (to),  Jugar  (juego,  as,  a). 
Play,  comedia,  F.;  pieza,  F. 
Plaything,  juguete,  M. 
Pleasant,  agradable. 
Please    (to),    agradar;    it    pleases 

•*gusta,  a^rada^  place. 
Poem,  poema,  M. 
Point  to  (to),  indicar. 
Poor,  pobre   (indigent) ;    malo,  a, 

(of  things). 
Popular,  popular. 
Post,  puesto,  M. 
Portugal,  Portugal. 
Position,  situacion,  F.    (state) ;   of 

her  p.,  de  la  situacion  en  que  se 

encontraba. 
Power,  poder,  M. 
Praise    (to),    alabar;    (of  things) 

celebrar. 
Precious,  precioso,  a;    de  precio; 

more  p.,  de  mas  precio. 
Present,  regalo,  M. 
Present,  adj.,  presente. 
Presently,  luego;   pronto;   dentro 

de  poco. 

Press,  imprenta,  F. 
Pretended,  fingido,  a. 
Pretty,  bpnito,  a;  guapo,  a. 
Prince,  prmcipe,  M. 
Princess,  princesa,  F. 
Principal,  principal. 
Principle,  principio,  M. 
Print  (to),  imprimir;  p.p.impreso,a. 
Printed,  impreso,  a. 
Printing,  imprenta,   F.    (the  art); 

impresion,  F.  (the  act). 
Private,  particular. 
Prodigal,  prodigo,  a. 
Producing,  adj.,  productor,  a. 


480 


English-Spanish  Vocabulary. 


Profit,  provecho,  M. 

Profitable,  provechoso,  a;  de  pro- 
vecho. 

Profound,  profundo,  a. 

Project,  proyecto,  M. 

Promise  (to),  prometer. 

Property,  fincas,  F.  PL. 

Prosperity,  prosperidad,  F. 

Proud,  orgulloso,  a. 

Proverb,  refran,  M. 

Province,  provmcia,  F.;  pais,  M. 

Public,  ptiblico,  a;  subst.  pdblico,  M. 

Public  square,  plaza,  F. 

Punishment,  castigo,  M. 

Purchase  (to),  comprar. 

Purpose,  proposito,  M.;  fin,  M.;  for 
what  p.?  £a  que?  (pop.). 

Put  one's  self  (to},  ponerse;  colo- 
carse. 

Put  on  (to},  ponerse. 

Q. 

Quail,  codormz,  F. 

Quality,  calidad,  F. ;   condicion,  F. 

Quarter,  cuarto,  M.;  (of  a  pound), 

cuarteron,  M. ;    (of  a  hundred), 

arroba,  F. 

Quarto,  cuarto,  M.;  in  q.y  en  cuarto. 
Queen,  reina,  F. 

Question,  cuestion,  F.;  asunto,  M. 
Quiet,  tranquilo,  a. 
Quite,  bastante ;  bien. 

R. 

Rail-way,  ferro-carril,M.;  PL.,ferro- 

carriles. 

Rain  (to),  Hover  (llueve). 
Rain,  lluvia,  F. 
Rainy,  lluvioso,  a. 
Raisin,  pasa,  F. 


Rather,  mas  bien  ;   mejor  dicho. 

Ratification,  ratification,  F. 

Ratify  (to),  ratificar. 

Raw-recruit,  bisoiio;  PL.,  gente 
bisofia. 

Read  (to),  leer;  he  r.,  leyo. 

Read  (p.  part.),  leido,  a. 

Real,  real,  M. 

Receipts,  ingresos,  M.  PL. 

Receive  (to),  recibir;  admitir. 

Recollection,  recuerdo,  M. 

Reflection,  recuerdo,  M.;  reflex- 
ion, F. 

Refuse  (fo)9  negarse  (to,  a)  —  (me 
niego  a). 

Region,  pals,  M. 

Reign,  reinado,  M. 

Reject  (to),  rechazar,  despreciar. 

Relative,  pariente,  M.  ;  parienta 
(^popular),  F. 

Relieve  (to),  aliviar,  amparar;  God 
r.  you!  \  Dios  le  ampare  a  V. ! 

Religious,  piadoso,  a ;   devoto,  a. 

Remain  (to),  permanecer  (-ezco). 

Remark,  observacion,  F.  ;  adver- 
tencia,  F. 

Remedy,  remedio,  M. 

Remember  (to),  acordarse  (acuerdo, 
as,  a  —  foil,  by  de,  to  r.  a  thing 
or  a  person) ;  recordar  (recuerdo, 
as,  a  —  to  r.  that,  etc.)  ;  /  r.  him, 
me  acuerdo  de  el ;  /  r.  that,  re- 
cuerdo que  . . . ;  do  you  r.  ?  £  re- 
cuerdaV.  ?  to  r.  (to  keep  in  mind), 
tener  presente;  one  must  r.,  se 
ha  de  tener  p.,  or  se  debe  tener  p. 

Reproof,  censura,  F. 

Reside  (to),  habitar  (direct  or  with 
en). 

Resident,  vecino,  a,  M.  and  F.  (of  a 
town) . 


English-Spanish  Vocabulary. 


481 


Resign  {to),  hacer -demision ;  to  r. 

one's  self,  resignarse  (to,  a),  con- 

formarse  (to,  con). 
Resource,  recurso,  M. 
Respect,  consideration,  F.  (for, 

para) . 

Retire  (to),  retirarse  (to  withdraw). 
Return  (to),  volver  (vuelvo,  ves, 

ve)  ;   in  returning,  en  v. 
Review,  revista,  F.  ;  formation,  F. 

{popular). 

Reward,  premio,  M. ;  recompensa,  F. 
Ribbon,  cinta,  F. 
Rich,  rico,  a. 

Riches,  riqueza,  F.,  or  PL.  riquezas. 
Right  —  on  the  r.,  a  la  derecha  (sc. 

mano) . 
Ring,  anillo,  M.  {plain) ;  sortlja,  F. 

{jewelled} . 
Road,  cammo,  M.;  linea,  F.  {system 

of  railroads) . 

Robber,  bandido,  M.;   ladron,  M. 
Roguish,  burlon,  a. 
Roof,  tejado,  M. 
Room,  habitation,  F.,  cuarto,  M. 
Rose,  rosa,  F. 

Round  about,  alrededor  (adv.) . 
Row,  fila,  F. 
Royal,  real. 
Rule,  regla,  F. 
Run,  correr. 
Running,  corriendo;   r.  across  the 

page,  a  renglon  seguido. 


Sail,  vela,  F.  {of  a  vessel). 
Sailor,  marinero,  M. 
Salad,  ensalada,  F. 
Salute  {to),  saludar. 
Same,  mismo,  a;  the  same  {thing}, 
lo  mismo. 


Santander,  Santander. 
Saragossa,     Zaragoza     [  Caesar  ea 

August a~\. 

Saturday,  sabado,  M. 
Say  (to),  decir  (digo,  dices,  dice), 

he  says,  dice;   said,  dicho;   it  is 

said,  se  dice;  it  may  be  said,  se 

puede  decir. 

Scarcely,  apenas;  no  —  casi. 
Scene,  escena,  F.;  espectaculo,  M. 
Scholar,    discipulo,    M.    {pupil} ; 

erudito,  M.  {learned man). 
School,  colegio,  M.,  and  escuela,  F. 

(used  interchangeably) . 
Score,  veintena,  F. 
Sea,  mar,  m. 

Search  (to),  or  to  s.for,  buscar. 
Season,  temporada,    F.  ;    .$•.   ticket, 

abono,  or  billete  de  a.;   I  have  a 

s.  t.,  estoy  abonado,  a. 
Secretary,  secretario,  M.  ;  s.  of  State, 

s.  de  Estado,  or  ministro  de  Estado. 
See  {to),  ver  (veo,  ves,  ve);  I  saw, 

vi;  he  saw,  vio ;  seeing,  viendo. 
Seek   (to),   buscar;    to  s.  to,   pro- 

curar  de,  tratar  de  (inf.). 
Seem  {to),  parecer;  which  seemed 

to  surround  her,  que  al  parecer 

la  amenazaba;  it  seems,  parece. 
Seen,  visto,  a. 

Seldom,  raras  veces;  pocas  veces. 
Selectman,  hombre  bueno  (#««>«/, 

home  bueno). 

Self-respect,  amor  propio,  M. 
Selfish,    egoista;    s.   vanity,   vano 

egoismo. 

Sell  {to),  vender;  he  sold,  vendio. 
Senate,  senado,  M. 
Send  for  {to),  enviar  a  buscar. 
Sense,  sentido,  M. 
Serious,  grave. 


482 


English-Spanish  Vocabulary. 


Servant,  criado,  M.,  criada,  F.;  coll. 

los  criados  or  la  servidumbre. 
Serve    (to),  servir    (sirvo,    sirves, 

sirve) . 

Service,  servicio,  M. 
Set  (to),  ponerse  (of  the  sun). 
Set,  juego,  M. ;  s.  of  chairs,  sille- 

ria,  F. 

Several,  varies,  as. 
Severe,  severe,  a. 
Seville    (pron.    Sev'il),    Sevilla; 

S.  train,  tren  de  Sevilla. 
Shape,  forma,  F. 
Sheep,  oveja,  F. 
Shelter  onfs  self  (to),  ampararse, 

refugiarse. 

Shine  forth  (to),  brillar. 
Ship,  buque,  M.  (merchant) ;  buque 

de  guerra,  or  fragata,  F.  (war) . 
Shocking,  atroz. 
Shoe,  zapato,  M. 
Shoemaker,  zapatero,  M. 
Shop,  tienda,  F. 
Shop-keeper,  tendero,  M. 
Short,  corto,  a. 
Shout,  grito,  M. 
Shut  (to),  cerrar  (cierro,   as,  a); 

he  shuts,  cierra. 

Sign,  sefial,  F. ;  it  is  a  s.,  es  sefial. 
Sign  (to) ,  firmar ;   signed,  firmado, 

a;  it  was  s.,  fue  firmado,  a. 
Silence,  silencio,  M. 
Silver,  plata,  F. 
Since,  desde  (time). 
Sister,  hermana,  F. 
Sit  down  (to),  sentarse,  (me  siento, 

te  sientas) ;  he  sits  down,  se  sien- 

ta;  sit  down,  sientese  V. 
Sitting-room,  gabinete,  M. 
Situation,  situation,  F. 
Sixteen  mo  (i6mo),  dieciseisavo. 


Size,  tamafio,  M. 

Skip  about  (to),  brincar;  to  s.  a. 

again,  volver  a  brincar ;  she  skips 

a.  again,  vuelve  a  b. 
Sky,  cielo,  M. 
Slate,  pizarra,  F. 
Slim,  flojo,  a,  (of  attendance). 
Small,  pequefio,  a. 
Snow,  nieve,  F. 
So,  tan;  s.  bad,  tan  malo;  s.  (thus), 

asi;  s.  it  is,  asf  es;   s.  (it),  lo; 

s.  much,  tanto,  a;  s.  many,  tan- 

tos,  as. 

Soberly,  sobriamente. 
Society,  sociedad,  F. 
Sofa,  sofa,  M. 

Soldier,  soldado,  M.;  militar,  M. 
Some,  algunos,  as;  unos,  as;  imos 

cuantos,  unas  cuantas. 
Something,  alguna  cosa;  algo. 
Sometimes,  algunas  veces. 
Son,  hijo,  M. 

Song,  cancion,  F.,  canto,  M. 
Soon,  pronto,  luego. 
Soul,  alma,  F. ;  anima,  F.   (disem- 
bodied spirits) . 
Sour,  agrio,  a. 
South,  mediodia,   M. ;   in  the  s.  of 

Spain,  en  el  m.  de  Espafla;  in 

the  extreme  j.t  en  el  extremo  sur. 
Spacious,  espacioso,  a. 
Spain,  Espafia,  F. 
Spaniard,  Espafiol,  a,  M.  and  F. 
Spanish,   espaflol,  a ;    S.  woman, 

Espafiola,  F. 
Spanish- America,  la  America  es- 

pan51a. 
Speak   (to),  hablar;   spoken,  hab- 

lado;  is  s.,  se  habla. 
Speech,    habla,   F.    (el   habla,    un 

habla). 


English- Spanish  Vocabulary. 


483 


Spend  (to),  pasar  (of  time)  ;  gastar 
(of  outlay). 

Spirit,  espiritu,  M. 

Spring,  fuente,  F. ;  manantial,  M. 
(source) . 

Square,  plaza,  F. 

St.  (saint),  santo  and  son.  (§  127). 

Stand  (to),  estar  en  pie  or  de  pie 
(the  act),  estar;  stood,  estuvo. 

Start  for  (to),  salir  para,  marcharse 
para. 

State,  estado,  M.;  the  United  States, 
los  Estados  Unidos. 

Statesman,  hombre  de  estado,  or 
estadista,  M. 

Station,  estacion,  F. 

Statue,  estatua,  F. 

Stay  (to),  quedarse  ;  to  s.  home, 
quedarse  en  casa. 

Steamer,  buque  de  vapor,  M.,  or  sim- 
ply vapor,  M.  [paso. 

Step,  paso,  M.;  to  take  a  s.,  dar  un 

Still,  todavia,  atin  (yet)  ;  sin  em- 
bargo (notwithstanding). 

Stir,  animacion,  F. 

Stone,  piedra,  F. 

Storm,  tempestad,  F. 

Stormy,  malo,  a ;  lluvioso,  a;  tem- 
pestuoso,  a. 

Story,  cuento,  M. 

Stranger,  desconocldo,  M.  (un- 
known) ;  forastero,  M.  (from 
another  place) . 

Straw,  paja,  F.;  s.  hat,  sombrero  de 
paja,  M. 

Street,  calle,  F. 

Strength,  fuerza,  F.  (physical)-, 
fuerzas  (moral). 

Strewn,  cubierto,  a ;  sembrado,  a, 
(with,  de).  [estudia. 

Study   (to),   estudiar ;    he  studies, 


Suggest    (to),   sugerir;    recordar; 

he  suggested,  sugiri6,  recordo. 
Summer,  verano,  M. 
Sun,  sol,  M. 
Surround  (to),  rodear;  that  seemed 

to  s.  her,  que  al  parecer  la  amen- 

azaba  (of  danger). 
Surrounded,  rodeado,  a,  (by,  de) . 
Survive  (to),  sobrevivir. 
Sweet,  dulce. 
Sympathy,  simpatia,  F.;  better,  PL. 

las  s  —  s. 


T. 

Table,  mesa,  F. 

Table-drawer,  el  cajon  de  la  mesa. 

Take  (to),  tomar;    he  took,  tomo; 

to  t.  a  step,  dar  un  paso;   to  t.  a 

walk,  dar  un  paseo. 
Take  down   (to),  descolgar  (des- 

cuelgo,   as,   a,    of  anything  sus- 
pended) . 
Take  place    (to),  suceder;   verifi- 

carse;   tener  lugar. 
Talk  (to),  hablar;  to  talk  to,  h.  con. 
Tall,  alto,  a;  grande. 
Teacher,  maestro,  a,  M.  and  F. 
Tell  (to),  decir  (digo,  dices). 
Terror,  terror,  M.;  azote,  M. 
Text,  texto,  M. 
Than,  que ;  (before  a  numeral)  de ; 

(with  a  verb)  de  lo  que. 
Thank  (to),  agradecer  (agradezco, 

agradeces) . 
That,  ese,  esa,  eso ;  aquel,  aquella, 

aquello ;   /.  is,  es  decir ;    /.  is  so, 

eso  es. 

That,  conj.,  que. 
Theatre,  teatro,  M. ;  summer  or  cafe 

t  —  s,  teatros  de  verano  6  de  cafe. 


484 


English- Spanish   Vocabulary. 


Them,  los,  M.  ;    las,  F. ;    les,  COM. 

(gov.  by  a  verb) ;   ellos,  as  (gov. 

by  a  prep.). 
Then,    entonces    (at    that    time); 

luego  (afterwards). 
There,  alii;  en  el,  en  ella,  en  ellos, 

as ;  t.  is,  hay ;  t.  are,  hay. 
Therefore,  por  consiguiente. 
Thief,  ladron,  M. 
Thing,  cosa,  F. 
Think  (to),  pensar  (pienso,  as,  a); 

creer  (creo,  crees). 
This,  este,  esta,  esto. 
Thomas,  Tom  as. 
Those  (of),  los  or  las  de. 
Thought,  pensamiento,  M. 
Thoughtful,  sensato,  a;  cuerdo,  a; 

grave. 

Threaten  (to),  amenazar. 
Threatening,  amenazador,  a. 
Throw  (to),  arrojar;    to  t.  on  the 

floor,  a.  al  suelo. 
Thus,  asi,  de  este  modo. 
Ticket,  billete,  M. 
Time,  tiempo,  M.;  a  t.,  vez,  F.;    the 

second  t.,  por  segunda  vez;  times, 

veces,  F.  PL.  (occasions) . 
Timely,  oportuno,  a;   acertado,  a. 
Timothy,  Timoteo. 
Tired,  cansado,  a  (estar). 
Tithe,  diezmo,  M. 
Title,  titulo,  M. 
To,  a ;   up  to,  hasta. 
To-day,  hoy;   (at  the  present  d.), 

hoy  dia,  or  en  el  dia. 
Toil  (to),  trabajar. 
To-morrow,  mafiana ;  to-m.  night, 

m.  por  la  noche ;    the  day  after 

to-m.,  pasado  mafiana. 
Top,  peon,  M. 
Toward,  hacia  (material  and  moral 


direction) ;   para  con  (moral  di- 
rection) . 
Town,  ciudad;  poblacion,  F.,  villa. 

See  City. 
Toy,  juguete,  M. 
Train,  tren,  M. ;    Seville  t.,  tren  de 

Sevilla. 

Tramway,  tranvia,  and  tramvia,  M. 
Travel  (to),  viajar. 
Traveller,  viajero,  M. 
Treacherous,  traidor,  a. 
Treasure,  tesoro,  M. 
Treaty,  tratado,  M. 
Tree,  arbol,  M. 

Triumphant,  triunfante;  ufano,  a. 
Troublesome,  molesto,  a;   fastidio- 

so,  a. 
Tremble    (to),    temblar    (tiemblo, 

as,  a). 

True,  verdadero,  a. 
Truth,  verdad,  F. 
Try  (to) ,  probar  (pruebo,  as) ;  to  t. 

to,  tratar  de,  procurar  de. 
Tuesday,  martes,  M. 
Turn   around   (to),   volverse   (me 

vuelvo,  ves,  ve). 
Twaddle,     charladuria,    conversa- 

cion,  F. 

Twice,  dos  veces. 
Type,  tipo,  M. 

U. 

Uncle,  tio,  M. 

Under,  debajo  de;  bajo;  u.  the  cir- 
cumstances, bajo  las  circunstan- 
cias. 

Undergo  (to),  sufrir. 

Understand  (to),  comprender,  en- 
tender  (entiendo). 

Unfortunate,  desgraciado,  a. 

Unite  (to),  unir. 


English-Spanish  Vocabulary. 


485 


United,    unido,  a;   United  States, 

Estados  Unidos. 
Unjust,  injusto,  a. 
Unknown,  desconocido,  a. 
Until,  conj.,  hasta  que. 
Up  to,  hasta. 
Useful,  titil;  provechoso,  a;  de  pro- 

vecho. 
Usually,  ordinariamente. 

V. 

Vain  {puffed  up},  vanidoso,  a. 

Valencia,  Valencia,  F. 

Vanity,  vanidad,  F. ;  selfish  v.,  vano 

egoismo,  M. 
Various,  diverse,  a. 
Verdict,  fallo,  M. 
Very,  muy,  bien ;  /  am  v.  glad,  me 

alegro  mucho;   v.  much,  muchi- 

simo,  a ;  v.  many,  muchisimos,  as. 
Vessel,  buque,  M. 
Vice,  vicio,  M. 
Victim,  victima,  F. 
Vile,  ruin. 

Village,  pueblo,  M.;   aldea,  F. 
Violently,  con  violencia,  F.;   arre- 

batadamente. 
Visit,  vislta,  F. 

Visit  (to},  visitar;  pasar  a  ver. 
Vivid,  vivo,  a. 
Voice,  voz,  F.  (PL.  voces). 
Volume,  tomo,  M. ;    voldmen,  M.; 

in  a  small  4to  vol.,  en  un  tomo 

en  cuarto  pequefio. 

W. 

Wait  (to),  and  to  w.  for,  esperar, 

aguardar. 
Walk,  paseo,  M. 


Wall,  tapia,  F.  (of  an  enclosure)  ; 

pared,  F.  (of  a  room) ;  muralla,  F., 

or  muro,  M.  (of  a  town). 
Want  (to),  meaning  to  wish,  querer 

(quiero,  quieres,  quiere) ;  he  wants 

or  wants  to,  quiere;  he  does  notw. 

to,  no  quiere. 
Want  (to),  meaning  to  need,  faltarj___ 

/  w.,  me  falta ;  what  do  you  w.  ? 

ique  le  falta  a  V.?    Spaniards 

only  w.  good  government,  a  los 

Espafioles    solo    les    falta   buen 

gobierno. 
War,  guerra,  F. 
Was  —  see  ser,  estar. 
Watch  (to),  velar. 
Water,  agua,  F.  (el  agua). 
Way,  camino,  M. ;   via,  F. ;    in  this 

w.,  de  este  modo. 
Wear  (to),  llevar,  gastar. 
Weather,  tiempo,  M. ;    what  kind 

ofw.?  «Jque  tal  t.? 
Week,  semana,  F. 
Well,  bien ;   as  w.  as,  tan  b.  como ; 

so  w.  that,  tan  b.  que. 
Were  —  see  ser,  estar. 
Western,  occidental ;    W.  Europe, 

la   Europa   o.,    or   el    Oeste    de 

Europa. 

What  ?  i  que  ?  w.  kind  of?  <;  que  tal  ? 
What  (that  which),  lo  que  ;  w.  if, 

si  (in  interrog.  and  exclam.). 
Wheat,  trigo,  M. 
When,  cuando  ;   £  cuando  ? 
Where,    donde,    £  donde  ?    (rest)  ; 

adonde,    adonde    (motion)  ;     en 

donde  (in  what  place). 
Which,  que;  (of  two),  cual. 
While,  mientras. 
White,  bianco,  a;   superl.  blanqui- 


486 


English-Spanish    Vocabulary. 


Who,  que ;  whom,  que,  a  quien. 
Whole  (the),  todo  el,  toda  la;   en- 

tero,  a,  (after  the  noun). 
Whose,  cuyo,  ^ctiyo?  w.  name  is, 

que  se  llama. 
Why?  £por  que? 
Wild-boar,  jabali,  M. 
Will  (to),  meaning  to  wish,  querer 

(quiero,  es,  e) ;  w.you?  <J  quiere  V.  ? 
Window,  ventana,  F. 
Wine,  vino,  M. 
Wine-growing,  vimcola. 
Winter,  invierno,  M. 
Wisdom,  sabiduna,  F. 
Wise,   sabio,   a ;    {prudent)    pru- 

dente,  discrete,  a. 
Wish  (to)  anyone  anything,  desear 

(deseo) . 
Wish  (to),  to  will,  to  desire,  querer 

(quiero)  ;     she   does   not  w.,   no 

quiere. 

Wit  and  humor,  sal,  F. 
With,  con;  together  w.,  juntamente 

con. 

Within,  dentro  de. 
Without,  sin ;  w.  doing,  sin  hacer. 
Woman,  mujer,  F. 
Wood,  madera,  F. 


Woods,  monte,  M. 

Word,  palabra,  F.;  voz,  F. ;  in  these 

words,  en  estos  terminos. 
Work  (to),  trabajar;  to  be  working, 

estar  trabajando. 
Work,  trabajo,  M.;  obra,  F. 
Worst  (the),  el  (la,  lo)  peor. 
Worth  (to  be),  valer  (valgo,  vales, 

vale) ;  is  w.,  Vale. 
Worthy,  digno,  a  (of,  de). 
Wounded  (to  be),  ser  herido,  a;  he 

has  been  w.,  ha  sido  herido. 
Write  (to),  escribir  (p.p.  escrito,  a). 
Writings,  escrltos,  M.,  obras,  F. 
Written,  escrito,  a. 

Y. 

Year,  afio,  M. 

Yes,  si. 

Yesterday,  ayer. 

You,   usted,   PL.   ustedes  (polite)-, 

tti,  PL.  vosotros,  as  (familiar}. 
Young,  jdven ;  young  man,  joven, 

M. ;  young  woman,  joven,  F. 
Your,  su,  PL.  sus  (polite) ;  vuestro, 

a  {familiar}. 
Youth,  juventud,  F. 


APPENDIX. 


Able,  habil,  capaz. 

After,  adv.,  despues;   some  time  a., 

algun  tiempo  d. 
Are  (they},  son,  estan,  §  391. 
Attends,  asiste  a. 
Be  (he-will~},  sera,  estara. 
Been  (has),  ha  sido,  /.  398,  5. 
Began  (he,  it},  empezo,  principio. 
Between,  entre. 
Bought,   p.p.,    comprado,    a  ;    he 

bought,  compro. 
Brought  (he},  trajo. 
By,  por,  de. 
Came  (he,  it},  vino. 
Cherish  (they},  abrigan. 
Comes,  viene. 

Comes  from,  sale  de,  /.  397. 
Consists  of,  consta  de. 
Cry  (they),  lloran. 
Disturbed  (they},  alborotaron. 
Doing  (of},  de  hacer,  §  718. 
Entered  (they),  entraron. 
Err  (they},  y  err  an. 
Ever   (at  any  time},  alguna  vez, 

P-  4i3»  4- 

Everywhere,  en  todas  partes. 
Few,  pocos,  as,  /.  397. 
Fifth,  quinto,  a. 
Find   (you-will-},  V.    encontrara, 

or  hallara. 

First,  primero,  a  (primer,  §  123). 
Found  (/),  halle,  encontre. 
Gave  (he},  dio,  §  543. 


Gives,  da. 

Go  (/),  voy. 

Go  (we),\a.mos;  we-shall-go, iremos. 

Go  (they},  van. 

Goes,  va. 

Goods  (property),  bienes,  M.  PL. 

Has,    tiene ;     has    been,    ha   sido, 

P-  398,  5- 

Have  (we},  tenemos. 
Have  (they),  tienen. 
He,  el. 

Her,  su,  PL.  sus. 

Highland-woman,  montanesa,^. 
Him  (obj.  of  verb},  le,  lo  ;   (after 

prep.},  el. 
His,  su,  PL.  sus. 
I,  yo. 
Important,  importante;  are  i.,  hn- 

portan. 

Is,  es;   esta,  §  391. 
Jest  (they},  chancean. 
Known,  conocido,  a,  /.  397  ;  sa- 

bido,  a. 
Lands  (estates),  heredades,  tierras, 

F.  PL. 

Live  (they),  viven. 
Lived  (he},  vivio. 
Lives,  vive  ;    (dwells},  vive,  habita. 
Living  (active},  vivo,  a. 
Lost  (he},  perdio. 
My,  mi,  PL.  mis. 
Occurred  (it}t  sucedio,  tuvo  lugar 

(took  place) . 


488 


Appendix. 


One,  uno,  a  (un). 
[Ones],  not  to  be  translated. 
Order  to  (in), .para  (w.  in/.). 
People    (folks},    gente,    F. ;     (the 

masses),  pueblo,  M. 
Placed  (he),  coloco. 
Plays  (he),  juega. 
Pleases^ (he,  it),  gusta,  agrada. 
Port,  puerto,  M. 
Prisoner,  preso,  M. 
Read  (he),  ley  6  ;    he  was  reading, 

leia. 

Rejoice  (to),  alegrarse. 
Reliable,   fidedigno,   a ;    r.   news, 

noticias  ciertas,  or  fidedignas. 
Religious,  religioso,  a,  p.  397. 
Resides,  habita,  reside. 
Saw  (/),  vi. 
Second,  segundo,  a. 
See  (/),  veo. 

Serve  (they),  sirven  (de,  as). 
Seven,  siete. 
She,  ella. 
Some,  alguno,  a  (algun) ;   PL.  algu- 

nos,  as. 
Spanish  language  (the),  la  lengua 

castellana,  or  espafiola. 
Speaks,  habla. 
Spends  (he),  pasa  (of  time)-,  gasta 

(of  money). 

Spent  (/),  pase  (of  time). 
Spent  (we),  pasamos. 
Spoke  (he),  hablo. 
Spoken,  hablado,  a. 


Studies,  estudia. 

Summer-house,  quinta,  F. 

Their,  su,  PL.  sus. 

These,  estosx  as. 

They,  ellos,  as. 

Those,  esos,  as;   aquellos,  as. 

Threatened  (it) ,  amenazo ;  imperf., 

amenazaba. 
Three,  tres. 
Took  (he),  tomo. 
Undergoes,  sufre. 
Understand     (they),      entienden, 

comprenden. 
Unites,  une. 

Visited  (I have),  he  visitado. 
Visits,  visita. 

Wait  (he-will-),  aguardara. 
Was    (he,    it),   fue,   era ;     estuvo, 

estaba. 

We,  nosotros,  as. 
Wear  (they),  llevan,  gastan. 
Were  (they),  fueron,  /.  398;  eran; 

estuvieron,  estaban. 
Who?  iquien?  PL.  iquienes? 
Wood    (material),    madera,    F.  ; 

(fire-w.),  lefia,  F.  ;    PL.  bosque, 

M.;  (elevated wood-land),  monte, 

M. 

Worked  (he),  trabajo. 
Writes,  escribe. 
Writing  (he-was-),  escribia. 
Wrote  (he),  escribio. 
Ye,  vosotros,  as. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


FEB     6 


IN  STACKS 

WAR  2  5  1958 


2W5 

LD  21-100m-9,'47(A5702sl6)476 


REC'D  LD 

JUN171960 

21JUL'60AE 


. 

'U  01963 


NTER- LIBRARY 
LDAN 

£EP  8 

MAR  1  9  1980 

081 


REC'D  LD 

MAY  2  1'64  -10  A 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


00970 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


